Professional Documents
Culture Documents
IMOs 1959-2010 - Omran Kouba
IMOs 1959-2010 - Omran Kouba
Uploaded by
Mohamed MSAADIOriginal Title
Copyright
Available Formats
Share this document
Did you find this document useful?
Is this content inappropriate?
Report this DocumentCopyright:
Available Formats
IMOs 1959-2010 - Omran Kouba
IMOs 1959-2010 - Omran Kouba
Uploaded by
Mohamed MSAADICopyright:
Available Formats
See discussions, stats, and author profiles for this publication at:
https://www.researchgate.net/publication/249649456
-1959 اﻷوﻟﻤﺒﻴﺎد اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎت-اﻟﻜﺘﺎب اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻲ
2010
Book · May 2011
DOI: 10.13140/2.1.1305.0882
CITATIONS READS
0 31,896
1 author:
Omran Kouba
Higher Institute for Applied Sciences and Technology
110 PUBLICATIONS 120 CITATIONS
SEE PROFILE
Some of the authors of this publication are also working on these related projects:
Mathematical inequalities View project
Mathematical Analysis for Engineers Books View project
All content following this page was uploaded by Omran Kouba on 31 May 2014.
The user has requested enhancement of the downloaded file.
2010
ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﻟﻤﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺭﻱ
اﻷوﳌﺒﻴﺎد اﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ
ﻟﻠﺮايﺿ ّﻴﺎت
2010
ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ
ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﻼﹼ ﺏﹴ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﳝﺔﹲ .ﻓﻨﺮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﻮﺭ .ﺇﺫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻏﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺣﻞﹼ
ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ .ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺣﻞﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ .ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ .ﻭﻟﻌﻞﹼ
ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ Eötvösﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﻈﹼﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﻋﺎﻡ 1894ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺳﻠﻒ ﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﹸﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ.
ﻟﻘﺪ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻴﻨﻨﻐﺮﺍﺩ ) ﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺘﺮﺳﺒﻮﻍ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ( ﻋﺎﻡ ، 1934
ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﻴﻦ Deloneﻭ . Frijtengoltsﻭﺃﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ
ﻋﺎﻡ ، 1959ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻮ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺭﻛﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ.
ﻭﺻﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﻣﻨﺬ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﲔ ،ﺗﺠﺮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺎﻡ . 1980ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔﹰ ،ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ
ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳏﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ،ﺇﻻﹼ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻟﺘﺸﻤﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﲔ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ،ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ .ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍ ﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎﹰ ،ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﻀﺎﻓﺖ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ .ﻳﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻘﺎﰲ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍ ﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ
ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺩ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺮﻓﲔ.
ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ،ﺧﻔﱢﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺇﱃ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻋﺎﻡ ، 1982ﺛﹸﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ،ﻭﺑﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ
ﻭﻗﺘﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ.
ﳚﺐ ﺃ ﻻﹼ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﺃ ﻻﹼ ﻳﻜﻮ ﻥﹶ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﹼﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﹰ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ.
ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﳝﺜﻠﹼﻮﻥ
ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇ ﻻﹼ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺔ ،ﺇ ﺫﹾ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﲨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ
ﺍﳌﹸﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ii
ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺇﻻﹼ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﲨﻴﻌﹰﺎ
ﺗﺘﻄﻠﹼﺐ ﻣﻦ ﳑﺜﹼﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﲤﻨﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍ ﳌﹸﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﻓﹸﺮﺻﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﻢ ﻭﺣﻨﻜﺘﻬﻢ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﺘﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ .ﳝﺘﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ
ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﲔ ﲢﺘﻞﹼ ﻓﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎﹰ ﻳﻮﻣﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﺇﺫﹾ ﻳﻤﻀﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﻮﻥ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍ ﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺘﻪ ،ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ،ﻭﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺕ
ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ .ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﲢﺘﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺴﺞ
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺍﹰ ﺃ ﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻔﻮﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺤﺼﻠﻮﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﳛﺼﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻻﺣﻘﺎﹰ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ.
ﻳﺘﻜﹼﻮﻥ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ .ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖﹴ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﲔ ﰲ ﻳﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ،ﲢﻮﻱ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻟﹶﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﹸﺮﺣﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ .ﻭﺗﺼﺤﺢ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢﹴ
ﺑﲔ 0ﻭ ) . 7ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﻋﺎﻡ 1962ﻃﹸﺮﹺﺣﺖ ﺳﺒﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ( .
ﺣﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﺎ ّﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻷوﳌﺒﻴﺎد اﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮايﺿ ّﻴﺎت
åﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞﹼ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﻴﻒ ﺃﻥ
ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺪﻑ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﹸﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﲡﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍ ﳌﹸﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍ ﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ﺛﻼﺛﲔ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﹰ .ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ،ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺛﲏ
ﻋﺸﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﹰ ،ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻸﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻄﺮﺡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﻓﺘﺠﺮﻳﻪ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﺪ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ ،ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﻜﹼﺎﻡ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﲔ ﳜﺘﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ ،ﻭﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻛﺜﺮﻳﺔ .ﲡﺘﻤﻊ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻳﺎﻡﹴ ﻣﻦ
ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝﹴ ﻭﺳﺮﻱ ﻭﳚﺮﻱ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﰲ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﳒﻠﻴﺰ ﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ » ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ «
ﻛﺎﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﻓﺘﻮﺯﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻜﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ.
iii ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﱯ
åﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﻳﺘﺴﻠﹼﻢ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﳍﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺰﻭﻝ
ﻭﻳﻤﻨﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ.
ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺜﲏ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻄﺮﻭﺡ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻨﻪ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ،ﺃﻭ
ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ .ﲢﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ.
ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﻝ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻼﹰ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ 3ﻭ ، 6ﺛﱡﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ 1ﻭ 2ﻭ 4ﻭ ، 5ﻭﳚﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
ﻳﺘﺮ ﺟﹺﻢ ﻗﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ،ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﹼﺐ ﻃﻼﹼﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻟﻐﺎﻢ ،ﻭﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﲨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ،ﻟﻠﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﲨﺔ.
åﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ،ﳌﻨﺤﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ
ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ .ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﲔ ،ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ،ﳚﺐ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ
ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ .ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ .ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺎﹰ،
ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ 1ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ 6ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻌﺐ .ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ،ﳜﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﻮﻥ ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻓﻴﻬﻲ ﻭﺛﻘﺎﰲ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ.
åﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ .ﻧﻈﺮﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ،ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔﹰ ﻗﺎﺩ ﺓﹸ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ
ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻓﺮﻳﻘﻬﻢ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻌﻮﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻳﺴﻠﹼﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ،ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﹼﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﲨﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ،ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ،ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺴﻘﲔ،
ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﹸﻀﻴﻒ .ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻔﹼﻖ ﻗﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﻟﻜﻞﹼ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ،ﻓﺘﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻗﹼﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻘﺎﻥ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ
ﺧﻼ ﻑ ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﺪ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ،ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﻘﻲ ﺍﳋﻼﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﹰ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻛﺜﺮﻳﺔ.
åﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ .ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺭﻯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ.
ﻳﻤﻨﺢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺮﻭﻧﺰ ﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ 1ﻭ 2
ﻭ ، 3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻﹼ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳛﺼﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، 121ﻭﺃﻻﹼ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳛﺼﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، 14ﻭﺃﻻﹼ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ
ﳛﺼﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ، 12ﻭ ﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﺑﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ
ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳛﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺼﻠﻮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ iv
ﺗﺸﺠﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ،ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺎ
ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﲢﻔﹼﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﺎﹰ ،ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ،ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎﹰ.
ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺭﺃﻳﺖ ﺃﻥ ﺃﲨﻊ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎ ﺏﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ،ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﹸﺮﹺ ﺣﺖ ﰲ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﱴ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ،ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﻮﻻﹰ ﳍﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ .ﺭﺍﺟﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﶈﺐ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ.
ﻛﻤﺎ ﳋﹼﺼﺖ ﰲ ﻣﻠﺤﻖﹴ ،ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ.
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ،ﺃﻭﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻉ ﰲ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ
ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﻜﲑﺍﹰ ﻭﲝﺜﺎﹰ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ
ﻭﰲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ،ﻭﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺟﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺔ.
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺃﺧﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﺮﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﺑﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺪ ﻭﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪﺓ
ﻋﻘﻴﻠﺘﻪ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﺗﺘﻮﺝ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺭﻱ ،ﻭﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﳊﺜﻴﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ.
ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﰲ 7ﺃﻳﻠﻮﻝ .2010
ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﻮﺑﺎ
v ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﱯ
ﺗﻘﺪﱘi .................................................................................................................................................
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ v ..............................................................................................................................................
1 ................................................................................... 1959 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
9 .................................................................................. 1960 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ
17 ................................................................................. 1961 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ
25 ................................................................................. 1962 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ
37 ................................................................................. 1963 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ
47 ................................................................................. 1964 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ
55 ................................................................................. 1965 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ
65 ................................................................................. 1966 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ
71 ................................................................................. 1967 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ
79 ................................................................................. 1968 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ
85 ................................................................................. 1969 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ
95 ................................................................................. 1970 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻋﺸﺮ
101 ............................................................................... 1971 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ
113 ............................................................................... 1972 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
121 ............................................................................... 1973 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ
129 ............................................................................... 1974 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ
137 ............................................................................... 1975 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
145 ............................................................................... 1976 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ
153 ............................................................................... 1977 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
163 ............................................................................... 1978 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
177 ............................................................................... 1979 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
187 ............................................................................... 1981 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
197 ............................................................................... 1982 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
207 ............................................................................... 1983 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ vi
217 ............................................................................... 1984 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ 225 ............................................................................... 1985
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ 235 ............................................................................... 1986
243 ............................................................................... 1987 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ 251 ............................................................................... 1988
265 ............................................................................... 1989 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ 275 ............................................................................... 1990
291 ............................................................................... 1991 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
301 ............................................................................... 1992 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
315 ............................................................................... 1993 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
327 ............................................................................... 1994 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
335 ............................................................................... 1995 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
345 ............................................................................... 1996 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
355 ............................................................................... 1997 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
369 ............................................................................... 1998 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
381 ............................................................................... 1999 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
391 ............................................................................... 2000 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
407 ............................................................................... 2001 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
417 ............................................................................... 2002 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
431 ............................................................................... 2003 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
441 ............................................................................... 2004 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
455 ............................................................................... 2005 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
465 ............................................................................... 2006 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
477 ............................................................................... 2007 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
489 ............................................................................... 2008 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
503 ............................................................................... 2009 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻮﻥ
513 ............................................................................... 2010 ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﳋﻤﺴﻮﻥ
525 ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺃﻭﻝ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ........................................................... .
531 ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺛﺎﻥ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ...................................................................
533 ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ .ﺃﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﱴ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ....................................................... .
ّ ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
21n + 4
ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ . n ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ
14n + 3
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳚﺐ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 21n + 4ﻭ 14n + 3ﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ . nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ù 3 ( 14n + 3 ) − 2 ( 21n + 4 ) = 1
ﺣﻞﹼ ﰲ ℝﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ، x + 2x − 1 + x − 2x − 1 = A :ﺇﺫ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ .ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
.A = 2
.A = 1
.A = 2
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 2
) x + 2x − 1 = ( 1 + 2x − 1
2
1 2
) x − 2x − 1 = ( 1 − 2x − 1
2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﺟﺬﻭﺭﺍﹰ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ
1
≥ . xﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
2
2 2
) ( 1 + 2x − 1 ) + ( 1 − 2x − 1
= x + 2x − 1 + x − 2x − 1
2
ﺃﻭ
1 + 2x − 1 + 1 − 2x − 1
= x + 2x − 1 + x − 2x − 1
2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
= x + 2x − 1 + x − 2x − 1 ) 2 max ( 1, 2x − 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ x ֏ 2x − 1ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ [ ∞ [ 21 , +ﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 1ﻋﻨﺪ . 1
1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 2
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
2 ] : x ∈ [ 21 ,1
x + 2x − 1 + x − 2x − 1 =
[ ∞ 4x − 2 : x ∈ ]1, +
ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، A = 2ﺗﺘﺄﻟﹼﻒ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . [ 21 ,1
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، A = 1ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ù ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ A = 2ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﻲ } . { 3/2
) (E ﻟﺘﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻭ cﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ a cos x + b cos x + c = 0 :
2
ﺑﺎﻬﻮﻝ . cos xﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ( Eɶﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻬﻮﻝ cos 2xﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ x
ﺍ ﻟﱵ ﲢﻞﹼ ﺍ ﳌﻌﺎ ﺩ ﻟﺔ ) ( Eﺣﻠﻮ ﻻﹰ ﳍﺎ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻗﺎ ﺭ ﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﲔ ﺍ ﳌﻌﺎ ﺩ ﻟﺘﲔ ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ a = 4ﻭ b = 2
ﻭ . c = −1
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ . 1 + cos 2x = 2 cos2 xﻓﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( Eﺃﻥﹼ
a cos 2x + a + 2c = −2b cos x
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﳒﺪ
) a 2 cos2 2x + ( a + 2c )2 + 2a ( a + 2c ) cos 2x = 2b 2 ( cos 2x + 1
ﺃﻭ
( Eɶ ) a cos 2x + 2 (a + 2ca − b ) cos 2x + (a + 2c ) − 2b = 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ a = 4ﻭ b = 2ﻭ ، c = −1ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
4 cos2 2x + 2 cos 2x − 1 = 0
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ( Eﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ( Eﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ a = 4ﻭ b = 2ﻭ c = −1ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
2 cos 2x + 2 cos x + 1 = 0
ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ، e −2 i x + e − i x + 1 + e i x + e 2 i x = 0ﺃﻭ
1 + e i x + e2 i x + e 3 i x + e 4 i x = 0
. e i xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ ، e i x ≠ 1ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ e 5 i x = 1ﻭ ≠ 1
2πk
= xﺣﻴﺚ kﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ℤ\5ℤ
5
3 ﻋﺎﻡ 1959
، ABCﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ، b = ACﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ABCﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ
= π
2
] [ BMﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ . BM 2 = AB ⋅ BC
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . AC
b
ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ] [ BMﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺃﻱ .
2
ﺿﻌﻔﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ،ﺃﻱ
b2
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻼﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ACﺃﻱ b
4
ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Bﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ . hﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
b2
= bh
4
1
ﺃﻭ . h = b
4
1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ Bﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ACﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . bﺃﻭ ﺃﻥﹼ Bﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ
4
1
ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ACﻭﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ . b
4
ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ :
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ACﻃﻮﳍﺎ . bﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Mﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ.
ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ] [ MA′ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ AC
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ Bﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ MA′ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C
ﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
A′
C
B
h
A C
M
ù
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 4
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻧﻘﻄﺔﹲ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ ABﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ AMCDﻭ MBEFﻣﻦ
ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( ABﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ Cﻭ C ′ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Mﻭ . N
.1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( AFﻭ ) ( BCﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ . N
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( MNﲤﺮ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ Sﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ AB
.3ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ Pﻭ Qﳘﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ Cﻭ C ′ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﳌﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ PQﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ AB
، ANCﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
.1ﺇﻥﹼ ] [ ACﻫﻮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Cﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
π =
2
)(1 ) ( AN ) ⊥ ( NC
= 1 APM
، ANMﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ -ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﳒﺪ = π
2 4
= 1 MQB
. MNBﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C ′ﳒﺪ = π
2 4
= ANM
+ MNB = = + π π π
ANB
4 4 2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ) ( AN ) ⊥ ( NB
ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Nﻫﻲ
F E ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Bﻭ Cﻋﻠﻰ
N
D C
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ANﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bﻭ Cﻭ Nﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ
C′
C
Q ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ) ( BCﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( AN
P
A BNFﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ
-ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
M B
،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ] [ FBﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C ′ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
π
2
ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 ) ( FN ) ⊥ ( NB
ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Nﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Fﻭ Aﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( NB ) = ( BCﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Fﻭ Aﻭ Nﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) ( BCﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( AFﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺍﻥ ) ( BCﻭ ) ( AFﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ . N
5 ﻋﺎﻡ 1959
، ANBﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Nﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﱵ
.2ﻟﻘﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ = π
2
ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ ABﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ M ′ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( MNﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
F E
N ﻏﲑ Nﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ . Sﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
C
D C
C′ AMﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﻴﺔ
′S
Q
C
. ANSﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
P = ANM
= π
M′ B 4
A
= . AM ′S
M π
2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( MNﻣﻊ
S
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Nﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ
Sﻻﺗﺘﻌﻠﹼﻖ ﲟﻮﻗﻊ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AB
F E .3ﻟﺘﻜﻦ S ′ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( BQ
S′
D C C ﻭ ) . ( APﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
Q
′ = MBQ
ABS =π
P K 4
M′
A M
B ′ = MAP
BAS = π ﻭ
4
، ASﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ S ′ﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
π
= ′B
2
S ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﹸﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Sﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( MQ ) ⊥ ( BQﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ) ( MP ) ⊥ ( APﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
′ = MPS
MQS ′ = π
2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ MQS ′Pﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈ ﻥﹼ Kﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ PQﻫﻮ
ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [ MS ′ﺃﻱ ﺇ ﻥﹼ Kﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ Mﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ HS ′, 1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ S ′
2
1
ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ،ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ Mﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ Kﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ
2
ù HS ′, 12ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ] [ S ′Aﻭ ] . [ S ′B
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 6
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ Pﻭ .Qﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ Pﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ، Qﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
Cﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ Qﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . Pﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Bﰲ Pﻭ Dﰲ Qﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﲡﻌﻼﻥ
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
.1ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﻳﻘﻊ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
.2ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ.
. AD = BC .3
.4ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﺠﺰ .ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ dﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ Pﻭ ،Q
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ Rﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ . ABCDﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) dA = ( ABﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ Rﻭ . P
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) dC = (CDﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ Rﻭ .Q
H B S A
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ dA dCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ dA dﻭ . dC d
ﰲ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ ﻱ Rﺍ ﻟﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻲ ABCDﻫﻮ ﺇ ﺫ ﻥ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ
T
C
C D
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
S′
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Hﺑﺄ ﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ، dAﻭ ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮ ﺯ S
ﻭ S ′ﻭ Tﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ] [ ABﻭ ] [CDﻭ ] [ DAﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( SS ′ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ ، ABCDﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
HS = CS ′ = S ′D
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ ABCDﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ S ′D = DT
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ . SA = TAﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
HA = HS + SA = DT + TA = DA
ﺇﺫﻥ . HA = DA = BCﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Aﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ
، AHﻭﺗﻘﻊ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Cﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . AH
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ BC ≤ CHﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻞﱟ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . AH ≤ CH
7 ﻋﺎﻡ 1959
ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ :
ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ dAﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ dﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ Pﻭ .Q
ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ dCﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ . d
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Rﺍﳌﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ dAﻭ ، dCﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Hﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ
ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ . dA
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ AH > CHﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼﹰ .ﺃ ﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، AH ≤ CHﻓﻨﻌﻴﻦ
Dﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Rﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ dCﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ A
ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . AHﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻌﻴﻦ Bﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Rﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
dAﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Cﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ AHﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﻭﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ،ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻫﻨﺎﻙ
ﺣﻼﹼﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
dA
A
B
B′ H
d
D dC
D′
C
ù ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ ABCDﻭ AB ′CD ′ﻫﻮ ﺣﻞﱞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 8
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 11
ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 11ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ.
ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﲡﺮﻳﺐ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 11ﺍﶈﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ 110ﻭ 990ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ
81ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺁ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻫﻲ aﻭﻋﺸﺮﺍﺗﻪ ﻫﻲ bﻭﻣﺌﺎﺗﻪ ﻫﻲ cﺣﻴﺚ . c ≥ 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ
) (1 n = a + 10b + 100c
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ nﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 11ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ a + c − bﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
، 11ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، { −8, −7, …, 0,1, …,18ﺇﺫﻥ
} a + c − b ∈ { 0,11
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻓﻴﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
)(2 ) n = 11 ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2
ﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . a + c − b = 0ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ) ( 2ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
11 ( a 2 + ( a + c )2 + c 2 ) = a + 10 ( a + c ) + 100c
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
) 2a 2 + ( 2c − 1 )a = 2c ( 5 − c
ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ aﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ،ﺃﻱ ،a = 2a ′ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
) 4a ′2 + ( 2c − 1 )a ′ = c ( 5 − c
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ a ′ ≥ 1ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
c ( 5 − c ) ≥ 4 + ( 2c − 1 ) = 2c + 3
ﻭﻧﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
3 2 3
( c−
2 )
+ = c 2 − 3c + 3 ≤ 0
4
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ، a ′ = 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ c = 5 ﻭ a = 0ﻭ b = 5ﺃﻱ . n = 550
9
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 10
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . a + c − b = 11ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ) ( 2ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
11 ( ( b − c + 11 )2 + b 2 + c 2 ) = b − c + 11 + 10b + 100c
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
( b − c + 11 )2 + b 2 + c 2 = 1 + b + 9c
ﺃﻭ
2b 2 + ( 21 − 2c ) b + 2c 2 − 31c + 120 = 0
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
2b 2 + ( 21 − 2c )b + ( 2c − 15 )( c − 8 ) = 0
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ b ≥ 1ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ 21 − 2c > 0ﺃﻥﹼ
( 2c
− 15 )( c − 8 ) < 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ 7.5 < c < 8ﻷﻥﹼ cﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
، b = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، c = 8ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ a = 3ﺃﻱ . n = 803
ù ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﻦ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 550ﻭ 803ﳘﺎ ﺣﻼﹼﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﻋﻴﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
4x 2
2 < 2x + 9
) ( 1 − 2x + 1
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮ ﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ xﺇﱃ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ [∞ . D = [ − 12 , 0 [ ∪ ]0, +ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ xﻣﻦ Dﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
( 2x + 1 − 1 )( 2x + 1 + 1 ) = 2x
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
4x 2 2
∀x ∈ D, ) 2 = ( 2x + 1 + 1
) ( 1 − 2x + 1
= 2x + 2 + 2 2x + 1
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ 0ﻭﺫﻟﻚ
ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎﺋﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.
11 ﻋﺎﻡ 1960
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ xﻣﻦ [∞ ، [ − 12 , +ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔﹸ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓﹸ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔﹶ
2x + 2 + 2 2x + 1 < 2x + 9
ﺃﻭ
7
< 2x + 1
2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ . x < 458ﻓﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻫﻲ [ ، [ − 12 , 458ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺷﺮﻁ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ
ù ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ، 0ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 0ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ABCﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﰲ ، Aﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺗﺮﻩ ] [ BCﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . aﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﱃ n
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ،ﻭ nﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ αﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ، Aﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Aﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، hﻓﺄﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
4hn
= tan α
)a (n2 − 1
C ﻟﻌﻞﹼ ﺃﺑﺴﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ .ﻟﻨﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ
ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺅﻫﺎ ، Aﻭﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﻫﻲ ) ( β, 0ﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﻫﻲ ) . ( 0, γﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
α ( Dk )0≤k ≤nﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
D1
k
A B
BD k = BC
n
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻬﻲ . Dn −2 1 , Dn +2 1 ﺇﺫﻥ
n −1
ADn −2 1 = AB + BDn −2 1 = ( β, 0 ) + ) ( −β, γ
2n
n +1 n −1
= ( 2n
β,
2n
γ )
ﻭ
n +1
ADn +1 = AB + BDn +1 = ( β, 0 ) + ) ( −β, γ
2 2 2n
n −1 n +1
= (2n
β,
2n
γ )
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 12
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﲔ
L ′ = ADn +1
2
L = ADn −2 1ﻭ
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ADn −2 1 ⋅ ADn +1 β2 + γ2
= cos α 2
= (n 2 − 1 ) 2
LL ′ 4n LL ′
2
a
= (n2 − 1) 2
4n LL ′
ﻭ
) det ( ADn −2 1 , ADn +1 βγ
= sin α 2
= ( ( n + 1 )2 − ( n − 1 )2 ) 2
LL ′ 4n LL ′
βγ ah
= 4n 2 = 4n 2
4n LL ′ 4n LL ′
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ
4n h
ù = tan α 2 ×
n −1 a
ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ABCﲟﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﲔ hAﻭ hBﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻟﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﲔ Aﻭ ، Bﻭﻃﻮﻝ
ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ mﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . A
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ A′ﻭ B ′ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻄﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ
ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( BCﻭ ) ( ACﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ
ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ BCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، hA = AA′ﻭ ، hB = BB ′ﻭ . m = AM
A ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] . [ AM
C B′
m hA
M′
AAﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ A′ ∈ Cﺇ ﺫﻥ
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎ ﻧﺖ ′ M = π2
hB C A′ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊﹴ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ Cﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) C ( A, hA
A′
M ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Aﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، hAﻭﳒﺪ . hA ≤ m
B
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، M ′ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ Aﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻣﻊ
MMﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . ( MM ′ ) ( BB ′
= ′A π
2 ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( ACﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
13 ﻋﺎﻡ 1960
] [ BC ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ CM ′Mﻭ CB ′Bﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ،ﻭ ﻷ ﻥﹼ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ
ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 h
= MM ′ BB ′ = B
2 2
ﺇﺫﻥ M ′ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊﹴ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ Cﻭ ) C ( M , 12 hBﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ، Mﻭﻧﺼﻒ
ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، 12 hBﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ . hB < 2m
ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ :
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﲢﻘﱡﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ hA ≤ mﻭ . hB < 2m
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ AMﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﻮﳍﺎ . m
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ A′ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊﹴ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) .C ( A, hA
(Mﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) .C ( M , 12 hB
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ) M ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ′
ﻧﻌﻴﻦ Cﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( MA′ﻭ ) ، ( AM ′ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﻴﻦ Cﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ
. (AM
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( MA′ﻭ )′
Bﻧﻈﲑﺓ Cﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ . M
ﻧﻌﻴﻦ Bﻧﻈﲑﺓ Cﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ، Mﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﻴﻦ
A hB
C
hA
M′ M′
B
hB
hB C
2
A′
M
B
C
ù ABCﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﻭﳓﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﹼﲔ ABCﻭ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﹰ ، ABCDA′ B ′C ′D ′ﻣﻊ Aﻓﻮﻕ A′ﻭ Bﻓﻮﻕ B ′ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ، ...ﻭﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ Xﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ ACﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ Yﻣﻦ ] . [ B ′D ′
.1ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [ XY
.2ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ Zﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ) ( X ;2ﻭ ) . (Y ;1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 14
ﺳﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻞﱟ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻓﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ
A ( 0, 0, 0 ), B ( 1, 0, 0 ), C ( 1,1, 0 ), ) D ( 0,1, 0
) A′ ( 0, 0,1 ), B ′ ( 1, 0,1 ), C ′ ( 1,1,1 ), D ′ ( 0,1,1
ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ) X ( x , x , 0ﻣﻊ ، 0 ≤ x ≤ 1ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ) Y ( y,1 − y,1ﻣﻊ . 0 ≤ y ≤ 1
.1ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ XYﻫﻮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
=L } ] {( x +2 y , x + 21 − y , 21 ) : ( x, y ) ∈ [ 0,1 2
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
2 2 x + y x + 1 − y
Φ : [ 0,1 ] → ℝ , Φ ( x , y ) = ,
2u 2
v
= vﺃﻥﹼ x +1−y
2 =uﻭ x +y
2 ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ
u + v − 12 = x
u − v + 12 = y
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ( u, v ) ∈ Im Φﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﺎﻥ
0 ≤ u + v − 12 ≤ 1ﻭ 0 ≤ u − v + 12 ≤ 1
v
ﺃﻭ
1
1 ≤ ≤u +v 3
2 2
ﻭ
1
2 ≤ − 21 ≤ u − v 1
2
1
ﺇﺫﻥ Im Φﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) ( 12 , 0ﻭ ) ( 1, 21
0 1 u
2
ﻭ ) ( 12 ,1ﻭ ) ( 0, 12ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ.
A′ D′
Y C′
B′
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ Lﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ
ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ AA′ B ′Bﻭ BB ′C ′Cﻭ CC ′D ′D
A
X D ﻭ . DD ′A′ Aﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ.
B C
15 ﻋﺎﻡ 1960
.2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ Zﻫﻮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
= L′ } ] {( 2x 3+ y , 2x +31 − y , 13 ) : ( x, y ) ∈ [ 0,1 2
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
2 2 2x + y 2x + 1 − y
Ψ : [ 0,1 ] → ℝ , Ψ ( x , y ) = ,
3 3
u v
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ u = 2x3+yﻭ v = 2x +31−yﺃﻥﹼ
u + v − 13 = 43 xﻭ u − v + 13 = 23 y
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ( u, v ) ∈ Im Ψﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﺎﻥ
0 ≤ u + v − 13 ≤ 43ﻭ 0 ≤ u − v + 13 ≤ 23
v
ﺃﻭ
1
2
13 ≤ u + v ≤ 53ﻭ − 13 ≤ u − v ≤ 13
3
1
3 ﺇﺫﻥ Im Φﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) ( 13 , 0
0 1 1 u ﻭ ) ( 1, 23ﻭ ) ( 23 ,1ﻭ ) ( 0, 23ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ.
3
A′ D′
Y
C′ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ L′ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
B′
ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ :
) ( 13 , 0, 13ﻭ ) ( 1, 23 , 13ﻭ ) ( 23 ,1, 13ﻭ ) ( 0, 23 , 13
A X D
B C
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺲ ﺳﻄﺤﻪ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱯ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻪ .ﻭﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ C
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﳐﺮﻭﻃﺎﹰ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﻴﺎﹰ Qﻓﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺓ Sﲤ
ﲢﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ،ﻭﲤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﰐ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱯ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ V1ﺣﺠﻢ
ﺍﳌﺨﺮﻭﻁ Qﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ V2ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ .Cﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ .V1 ≠ V2ﻭﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ
ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ،V1 /V2ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 16
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ aﻫﻮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﻭﻁ ، Qﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ rﻫﻮ
h
ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍ ﻟﻜﺮ ﺓ . Sﻭ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ hﺍ ﺭ ﺗﻔﺎ ﻉ ﺍ ﳌﺨﺮ ﻭ ﻁ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ
r r h
،ﻭﻷ ﻧﻪ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ [ 2θ ∈ ] 0, π2 = tan 2θﻣﻊ = tan θ
a a
θ
θ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . 0 < r < a
| |
a
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
2 tan θ 2a 2r
h =a =
1 − tan2 θ a2 − r 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﻭﻁ Qﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
1 2 2π a 4r
= πa h = V1
⋅ 2
3 3 a − r2
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ Cﻓﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺎ ، rﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ، 2rﻭﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ Cﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ:
V2 = 2πr 3
1
ﻓﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓﹸ V1 = V2ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓﹶ r 4 − r 2a 2 + a 4 = 0ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ
3
2
ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ . ( r 2 − a2 ) + a12 = 0ﺇﺫﻥ .V1 ≠ V2
2 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ،
4
V1 1 a 1
= ⋅ 2 2 2 = 2
V2 3 (a − r )r ) 3 f ( ar 2
1
ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻊ ) . f ( x ) = x ( 1 − xﻭﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ [ ] 0,1ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
4
a 4 V 1
= . rﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ = . xﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺒﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ
2 3 V2 2
1
= tan θ
2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2 1
1 − tan θ 1− 2 1
= cos 2θ 2 = 1
=
1 + tan θ 1+ 2 3
ù ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) . arcsin ( 13
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ
ﺣﻞﹼ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
x + y + z = aﻭ x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = b 2ﻭ xy = z 2
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺎﻫﻴﻞ xﻭ yﻭ . zﻭﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (a,bﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ
ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ.
äﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، a = 0ﻭ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) ( x , y, zﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
x + y = −zﺃ ﻥﹼ ، x 2 + y 2 + 2xy − z 2 = 0ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎ ﺩ ﺓ ﻣﻦ xy = z 2ﳒﺪ
، x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = 0ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . b = 0ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺃ ﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ zﻛﺎﻥ xﻭ yﳘﺎ
ﺣﻼﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ T 2 + zT + z 2 = 0ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ،Tﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ
} {( j z, j2 z, z ), z ∈ ℂ } ∪ {( j2 z, j z, z ), z ∈ ℂ
ﻣﻊ . j = − 21 + i 23ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ.
äﺣﺎﻟﺔ . a ≠ 0ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) ( x , y, zﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ .ﺑﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﳒﺪ
a 2 = x
2
+ y 2 + z 2 + 2(xy
) + yz + zx
b2 z2
= b 2 + 2z (z
+ y + x ) = b 2 + 2az
a
a 2 − b2
= . zﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2a
a 2 − b 2 2 a 2 + b2
xy = ﻭ x + y = a − z =
2a 2a
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ xﻭ yﳘﺎ ﺣﻼﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
a 2 + b2 a 2 − b 2 2
∗ 2
T − T + =0
2a
( )
2a
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ،Tﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
2 2 2 2 2 2 ) 3a 2 − b 2 )( 3b 2 − a 2
( = T − a + b = a + b − 2a − 2b
2 2 2
4a 4a 4a 16a 2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﰲ . ℂ
17
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 18
äﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ) ( x , y, zﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
a ∈ ℝ∗+ﻷﻥﹼ ، x + y + z = aﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ∗ . b ∈ ℝﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
a 2 − b2
= zﺃﻥﹼ . b < aﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ xﻭ yﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
2a
ﺟﺬﺭﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ∗ ( ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
( 3a 2 − b 2 )( 3b 2 − a 2 ) > 0
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ b < aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 3a 2 − b 2 > 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ 3b 2 > a 2 ﺃﻭ . 3 b > a
ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ b < a < 3 bﺷﺮﻁﹲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ
ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ.
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﲔ aﻭ bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ b < a < 3 bﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ
ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ،ﻭﻫﻲ
a 2 + b2 + ) ( 3a 2 − b 2 )( 3b 2 − a 2
= x
4a
2 2
a +b − ) ( 3a − b 2 )( 3b 2 − a 2
2
= y
4a
2 2
a −b
= z
2a
ﺃﻭ
a 2 + b2 − ) ( 3a 2 − b 2 )( 3b 2 − a 2
= x
4a
a 2 + b2 + ) ( 3a 2 − b 2 )( 3b 2 − a 2
= y
4a
2 2
a −b
= z
2a
ù < .b <a ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ aﻭ bﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﲔ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ 3 b
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ aﻭ bﻭ cﻫﻲ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ Aﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ≥ 4 3A
ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﱴ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ.
19 ﻋﺎﻡ 1961
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ Heronﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ
a +b +c
=A ) p ( p − a )( p − b )( p − c =p
2
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
1
=A ) (a + b + c )( c + b − a )( a + c − b )( a + b − c
4
1
=
4
) ( (a + b )2 − c 2 )(c 2 − (b − a )2
1
= 2 (a 2b 2 + b 2c 2 + c 2a 2 ) − a 4 − b 4 − c 4
4
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
2 2
) ∆ = ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) − ( 4 3A
ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2 2
∆ = (a 2 + b 2 + c ) ) − 3 ( 2 (a 2b 2 + b 2c 2 + c 2a 2 ) − a 4 − b 4 − c 4
) ) = 4 (a 4 + b 4 + c 4 − ( a 2b 2 + b 2c 2 + c 2a 2
) ) = 2 ( ( a 4 + b 4 − 2a 2b 2 ) + (b 4 + c 4 − 2b 2c 2 ) + (c 4 + a 4 − 2a 2c 2
2 2 2
(
) = 2 ( a 2 − b 2 ) + (b 2 − c 2 ) + ( a 2 − a 2 )
ﺇﺫﻥ ∆ ≥ 0ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . a = b = c
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ :ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ hﺇﱃ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ
h ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺮﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﻥ
t
s ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ .ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ
ﻗﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﻬﻤﺎ sﻭ . tﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 = h 2 + s 2 + h 2 + t 2 + ( s + t )2
) = 2 ( h 2 + s 2 + t 2 + st
ﻭ
2A = ( s + t ) h
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
δ = ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) − 4 3A
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 20
ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
δ = 2 ( h 2 + s 2 + t 2 + st ) − 2 3 ( s + t ) h
2
(
= 2 (h − (3
2 s + t ) ) + s 2 + t 2 + st − 34 ( s + t )2 )
2
= 2 (( h − (3
2 s + t )) + 1 (s
4 − t )2 )
= ، hﻭﻫﺬﺍ (3
2 s ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ δ ≥ 0ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ s = tﻭ ) + t
ù ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ.
ﺣﻞﱠ ﰲ ℝﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ cosn x − sinn x = 1ﻭ nﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ . ℕ
∗
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔﹸ cos x − sin x = 1ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔﹶ
) cos ( x + π4 ) = cos ( π4
ﻭﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻫﻲ ) . 2πℤ ∪ ( − π2 + 2πℤ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 2ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ cos2 x − sin2 x = 1ﺍﳌﹸﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔﹶ
cos 2x = 1
ﻭﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻫﻲ . πℤ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n > 2ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﺣﻼﹼ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
n n
1 = cosn x − sinn x ≤ cos x + sin x ≤ cos2 x + sin2 x = 1
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
− sinn x = sin x n
cosn x = cos xﻭ = sin2 x n
= cos2 x
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ sin x = 0ﻭ cos2 x = 1ﻓﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ . πℤﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ πℤﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﻣﺎ sin x = −1ﺃﻭ cos x = 1ﻓﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ) ، 2πℤ ∪ ( − π2 + 2πℤﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ.
21 ﻋﺎﻡ 1961
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) ( PAﻣﻊ ) ( BCﰲ ، A′ﻭﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ
) ( PBﻣﻊ ) ( ACﰲ ، B ′ﻭﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) ( PCﻣﻊ ) ( ABﰲ .C ′ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
max
AP BP CP
( PA) ′ PB ′ PC ′
, , ≥2 minﻭ
AP BP CP
( PA) ′ PB ′ PC ′
, , ≤2
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ
) ( A, αﻭ ) ( B, βﻭ ) (C , γﻣﻊ ) ( α, β, γﻣﻦ ( ℝ∗+ )3ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . α + β + γ = 1
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Xﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ) ( B, βﻭ ) ، (C , γﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ Xﺇﱃ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( BCﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( APﻷ ﻥﹼ Pﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ) ( X , β + γﻭ ) . ( A, αﺇﺫﻥ . X = A′ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
αPA + ( 1 − α ) PA′ = 0
ﺇﺫﻥ
AP 1
= −1
PA′ α
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ
CP 1 BP 1
ﻭ = −1 = −1
PC ′ γ PB ′ β
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1 1 1
min( PA
AP BP CP
, ,
′ PB ′ PC ′ ) = = min , , − 1
α β γ ) max ( α, β, γ
−1
1 1 1 1
( max )
AP BP CP
, , = = max , , − 1 −1
PA′ PB ′ PC ′ α β γ ) min ( α, β, γ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ α + β + γ = 1ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1
≥ ) max ( α, β, γ ≤ ) min ( α, β, γﻭ
3 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
max ( PA) ′ PB ′ PC ′
AP BP CP
, , ≥2 minﻭ ( PA) ′ PB ′ PC ′
AP BP CP
, , ≤2
ù ﻭﳘﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺘﺎﻥ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 22
ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ، ABCﻓﻴﻪ AC = bﻭ AB = cﻭ AMB = αﺣﻴﺚ Mﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ
ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ BCﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳑﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، b tan ( α2 ) ≤ c < b
ﻭﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﺠﺰ ، ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ .ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Nﻧﻈﲑﺓ B
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ . A
X
C ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎ ﻥ ) ( AM ) ( NCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰ ﺍﻭ ﻳﺘﲔ
C
α
NCBﻭ AMBﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
C
b M NCB = α
α ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ Cﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Nﻭ ، Bﻭﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
N c A c B
] [ NBﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ . α
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ Cﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) C = C ( A, bﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Aﻭﻧﺼﻒ
ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . b
ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ Cﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، c < b ≤ AXﺣﻴﺚ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ
α
= AXB ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Xﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ NBﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ . Cﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
2
c
= ، AXﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) tan ( α /2
b tan ( α2 ) ≤ c < b
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) c = b tan ( α2ﻓﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﹰ ﰲ . A
ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ :
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ NBﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ، 2cﻭﻧﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ . A
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ Cﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ NBﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ) . αﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ NBB ′ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﰲ Bﻭﻓﻴﻪ ، BNB ′ = π2 − α
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ] [ BB ′ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ( . C
ﻋﻴﻦ Cﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ Cﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) .C ( A, bﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ
ù ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ.
23 ﻋﺎﻡ 1961
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﹰ Pﻻ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ) ( ABCﻭﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﰲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ . Pﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎ ﻁ A′ ﻭ B ′ﻭ C ′ﻧﻘﺎﻃﺎﹰ ﻻ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻦ ، Pﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ A′′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [ AA′ﻭ B ′′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ BB ′ﻭ C ′′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ
] ، [CC ′ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . A′′ B ′′C ′′ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ O
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ .C ′
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ Gﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ G ′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . A′ B ′C ′ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
1
= GO
3(GA′′ + GB ′′ + GC ′′ )
ﻭﻛﺎﻥ
A′ 1
B
C′ = GA′′
2 (
GA + GA′ )
C ′′
O B ′′ 1
C G A′′
B′ 2 (
GB ′′ = GB + GB ′ ) ﻭ
1
A
P′
(
GC ′′ = GC + GC ′
2 ) ﻭ
P
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1
GO = GA + GB + GC + GA ′ + GB ′ + GC = GG ′
′
6
0
2
3GG ′
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Oﺻﻮﺭﺓ G ′ﻭﻓﻖ 1
2 ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ HG , 12ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Gﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ . HG , 12ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ C ′ﰲ Pﺗﺮﺳﻢ G ′ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ، P
ﻓﺎﶈﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﻫﻮ ) ، P ′ = HG , 1 ( Pﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ P
2
ù ﻭﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ Gﻧﺼﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ Gﻋﻦ . P
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 24
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺁﺣﺎﺩﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 6ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﻧﺔ
ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﳓﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
n = ( abc ⋯d 6 )10 ⇝ ( 6abc ⋯d )10
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ nﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ m + 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ . m ≥ 1ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ p
ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ nﻋﻠﻰ ، 10ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ n = 10p + 6ﻣﻊ . 0 ≤ p < 10mﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
4 ( 10p + 6 ) = 6 ⋅ 10m + p
ﺃﻭ ، 13p + 8 = 2 ⋅ 10mﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، p = 2qﻭﻣﻨﻪ
13q + 4 = 10m
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، 10m = 4 mod13ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
m 1 2 3 4 5 6
10m mod13 10 9 12 3 4 1
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺗﺒﺔ 10ﰲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ )× ( ( ℤ /13ℤ )∗ ,ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 6ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ 10m = 4 mod13ﻫﻲ ، m = 5 mod 6ﻓﺄﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ m
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻲ ، m = 5ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، q = 1013−4 = 7692ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﳒﺪ
m
ù ، p = 15384ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ . n = 153846
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
1
> 3−x − x +1
2
= ) x ֏ f ( xﺗﺎ ﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﺮ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ﺎﻝ ﻟﻨﻼ ﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻭ ﻻﹰ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍ ﻟﺘﺎ ﺑﻊ 3 − x − 1 + x
] . I = [ −1, 3ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺎﻝ ﻷﻧﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﲔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ﻋﻠﻴﻪ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ f ( −1 ) = 2ﻭ ، f ( 1 ) = 0ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ x 0 ﻣﻦ ] [ −1,1
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ f ( x 0 ) = 12ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺎﻝ [ . [ −1,x 0
25
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 26
= ) . f ( xﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﳒﺪ 1
2 ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ x 0ﳓﻞﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
15
= = 3 + 2x − x 2 4 − ( 1 − x )2
8
ﻭﺑﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺛﺎﻥ ﳒﺪ
225 31
( 1 − x )2 = 4 − =
64 64
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
31 31
x ∈ 1 − ,1 +
8 8
ù . −1,1 − 31
8
x 0 = 1 −ﻓﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﻲ
31
8 ﻭﻷﻥﹼ x 0 < 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ ABCDA′ B ′C ′D ′ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ABCDﻭﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ
A′ B ′C ′D ′ﻣﻊ A′ﻓﻮﻕ Aﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ....ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Xﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮ ﺑﻊ ABCDﻭﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Yﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮ ﺑﻊ
. B ′C ′CBﺗﻐﺎﺩﺭ Xﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ Bﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ Yﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ B ′
ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ .C ′ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Zﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [ XY
.1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﻫﻮ ، ABﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ Yﻋﻠﻰ
] [ B ′C ′ﻫﻮ ، B ′C ′ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ tﻣﻦ ] ، [ 0,1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، AX = tABﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
. B ′Y = tB ′C ′ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Tﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ AB ′ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ tﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ
] [ 0,1ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
1
) TZ = (TX + TY
2
1
(
= TA + AX + TB ′ + B ′Y
2
TA + TB ′ = 0)
1 t
(
) = tAB + tB ′C ′ = ( AB + BC
2 2
)
t
= AC = tTU
2
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Uﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ BC ′ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] ، [ ABﻭ Yﻋﻠﻰ
] [ B ′C ′ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [TUﻣﻦ Tﺇﱃ .U
27 ﻋﺎﻡ 1962
.2ﻭ ﻛﺬ ﻟﻚ ،ﻳﻜﻮ ﻥ ﺷﻌﺎ ﻉ ﺳﺮ ﻋﺔ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] [ BCﻫﻮ ، BCﻭﺷﻌﺎ ﻉ ﺳﺮ ﻋﺔ Yﻋﻠﻰ
] [C ′Cﻫﻮ ، C ′Cﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ،ﰲ ﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ tﻣﻦ ] ، [ 1, 2ﻳﻜﻮ ﻥ ، BX = ( t − 1 ) BC
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ .C ′Y = ( t − 1 )C ′Cﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ tﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 1, 2ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ :
1
) UZ = (UX + UY
2
1
(
= UB + BX + UC ′ + C ′Y
2
) UB + UC ′ = 0
1 t − 1
(
= = ( t − 1 ) BC + ( t − 1 )C ′C
2
) 2
( )
B ′C ′ + C ′C
t − 1
= B ′C = ( t − 1 )UC
2
ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] ، [ BCﻭ Yﻋﻠﻰ ] [C ′Cﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [UCﻣﻦ U
ﺇﱃ .C
.3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] [CDﻫﻮ ، CDﻭﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ Yﻋﻠﻰ ] [CB
ﻫﻮ ، CBﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ tﻣﻦ ] ، [ 2, 3ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،CX = ( t − 2 )CD
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ .CY = ( t − 2 )CBﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ tﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 2, 3ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ :
1 1
) CZ = (CX + CY ) = ( ( t − 2 )CD + ( t − 2 )CB
2 2
t − 2 t − 2
=
2
(= ) CD + CB
2
CA = ( t − 2 )CV
] [CB ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Vﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [CAﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] ، [CDﻭ Yﻋﻠﻰ
ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [CVﻣﻦ Cﺇﱃ .V
.4ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] [ DAﻫﻮ ، DAﻭﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ Yﻋﻠﻰ ] [ BB ′
ﻫﻮ ، BB ′ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ tﻣﻦ ] ، [ 3, 4ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ، DX = ( t − 3 ) DA
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ . BY = ( t − 3 ) BB ′ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ :
∀t ∈ [ 3, 4 ], VZ = ( t − 3 )VT
] [CB ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Vﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [CAﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Xﻋﻠﻰ ] ، [CDﻭ Yﻋﻠﻰ
ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [CVﻣﻦ Cﺇﱃ .V
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 28
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ،ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ .TUCVﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
D
V C
A X
B
T Z U
C′
A′
Y
ù B′
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
cos2 x + cos2 2x + cos2 3x = 1
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ، 2 cos2 θ = 1 + cos 2θﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔﹸ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔﹶ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
cos 2x + 2 cos2 2x + cos 6x = 0
ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ، cos 3θ = 4 cos3 θ − 3 cos θﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔﹸ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔﹶ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
2 cos3 2x + cos2 2x − cos 2x = 0
ﺃﻭ
cos 2x ( cos 2x + 1 )( 2 cos 2x − 1 ) = 0
ﻓﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﻲ :
ù ) ( π4 + π2 ℤ ) ∪ ( π2 + πℤ ) ∪ ( π6 + πℤ ) ∪ ( − π6 + πℤ
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻄﺎﺓ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﻳﻄﻠﹶﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Dﻣﻦ ، Cﲝﻴﺚ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
A D ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﺠﺰ .ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ
ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Oﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ
O C
. ABCﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ dﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
(BO, BA) + (AB, AO ) + (OA,OB ) = π
C
B
ﻭ
(BC , BO ) + (OB,OC ) + (CO,CB ) = π
29 ﻋﺎﻡ 1962
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺃﻥﹼ :
(BC , BA) + (OA,OC ) + (AB, AO ) + (CO,CB ) = 2π
، BCDﺇﺫﻥ
، BADﻭ ) (OCﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) (OAﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
1
1
) (AB, AO ) = (AB, ADﻭ ) (CO,CB ) = (CD,CB
2 2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﹰﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
π
(
= ) (CO,CB ) + (AB, AO ) = (AB, AD ) + (CD,CB
2 ) 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ، (BC , BA) + (OA,OC ) = 2π − π2ﻭﻷﻥﹼ )2π − (OA,OC ) = (OC ,OA
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
π
)(OC ,OA) = + (BC , BA
2
، (BCﻧﻀﻊ Gﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ O ′ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ≠ ), BA ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ π
2
ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ Cﻭ ) ، Aﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ . (O ′A = O ′C
، (GCﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ),GA) = 2(BC , BA
)(O ′A,O ′C ) = π − (GC ,GA) = π − 2(BC , BA
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
)(O ′C ,O ′A) = π + 2(BC , BA) = 2(OC ,OA
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﲰﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C ′ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ O ′ﻭﲤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
Oﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ C ′ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ، Cﻷﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻫﻮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ
(OCﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ). 21 (O ′C ,O ′A ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [CAﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ),OA
A
B O′
G O
C′
C
C
، (BCﻓﻨﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ Oﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [CA = ), BA π
2 ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 30
ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻞﱢ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ،ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥﹼ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
ABCﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C ′ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ، C
ABCDﳏﺪﺩ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻛﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
. ABC
= π
2 ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [CAﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻞﱟ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎﹰ.
ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺏ ABCDﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
AB + CD = AD + CB
CAﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ Cﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻩ
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ABCﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ ،Cﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Bﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ
→ ℝ, f ( M ) = AB + CM − AM − CB
f : CA
A f ( M )>0 ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
ր
M
lim f ( M ) = AB + CA − CB > 0
D
M →A,M ∈CA
B
ﻭ
M′
ց
C
f (M′)<0 lim f ( M ) = AB − AC − CB < 0
M →C ,M ∈CA
CAﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ Dﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
. f ( D ) = 0ﻭﻋﻤﻼﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻃﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻞﱟ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ :
. ABC
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ dﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ABCﻛﺎﻧﺖ Oﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ dﻣﻊ ] . [ AC ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ = π
2
ﺃ ﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍ ﳊﺎ ﻟﺔ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺎ ﻣﺔ ، ABC ≠ 2ﻓﻨﻨﺸﺊ O ′ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ﺍ ﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﻟﻠﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺓ C
π
ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ Aﻭ ،Cﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ O ′ﻭﲤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ A
ﻭ Cﻭﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ، Cﻓﺘﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻣﻊ dﰲ .O
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﲤﺲ ، ( AB ) ﻓﻴﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ،ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ، A
ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
31 ﻋﺎﻡ 1962
ﻧﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ.
C′
A
D
ւ
B O′
O
G
C C
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ.
A T D ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁﹸ ﻻﺯ ﻡ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
Z
X ﺍﶈﺪﺏ . ABCDﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﻲ Xﻭ Y
C ﻭ Zﻭ Tﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ.
Y ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﲔ ﻣﻦ
B
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ،ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
AD + BC = AT + TD + BY + YC
= AX + ZD + XB + CZ
= AX + XB + ZD + CZ = AB + CD
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻛﺎﻑ : ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ABCDﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ :
AB + CD = AD + BC
A D′ D
ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Cﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ] [ ADﻭ ] [ AB
ﻭ ] . [ BCﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﻳﻘﻄﻊ
C C ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ADﰲ . D ′ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Cﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
B
ABCD ′ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﻥﹼ
AB + CD ′ = AD ′ + BC
ﺇﺫﻥ .CD − CD ′ = AD − AD ′ﻭﻟﻜﻦ AD − AD ′ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ DD ′ﺃﻭ ، −DD ′
ﻭﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ CD = CD ′ + D ′Dﺃﻭ CD ′ = CD + DD ′ﺗﻔﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ D ′
ﺇﱃ ) ، (CDﺇﺫﻥ D ′ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( ADﻭ ) ، (CDﻭ ﻣﻨﻪ ، D = D ′
ù ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ . ABCD
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 32
ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، Rﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻫﻮ . rﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
) R ( R − 2r
A ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ABCﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻱ ﺍ ﻟﺴﺎ ﻗﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ . AB = ACﻭ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
ﺍ ﳌﻘﺪ ﺍ ﺭ ﻳﻦ aﻣﻦ ℝ ∗+ﻭ θﻣﻦ [ ] 0, π2ﺑﺎ ﻟﻌﻼ ﻗﺘﲔ BC = 2a
O . ABCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [ BCﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Oﺇﱃ ﻭ = θ
I
θ
a
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Iﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
B P C
ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Oﻭ Iﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( APﳏﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ BC
a BC 2a
= . AO = R = 2Rﺇﺫﻥ = ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ،
sin 2θ sin A sin 2θ
ABCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . r = a tan ( θ2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ) ( BIﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ Iﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ APﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
AI = AP − PI = AP − r
) = a tan θ − a tan ( θ2
) sin ( θ2
=a
) cos θ cos ( 2θ
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Oﻭ Iﺗﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( APﰲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، A
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 ) sin ( θ2
d = OI = AO − AI = a −
) sin 2θ cos θ cos ( θ2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
) sin 2θ = 4 cos θ cos ( θ2 ) sin ( θ2
ﺇﺫﻥ
) sin ( θ2 a 1 − 2 cos θ
d = a 1− θ
= 1 − 4 sin2 ( 2θ ) = a
) cos θ cos ( 2 sin 2θ sin 2θ
33 ﻋﺎﻡ 1962
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ،
a a
= ) R ( R − 2r (
sin 2θ sin 2θ
) − 2a tan ( θ2 )
a2
= ) ) ( 1 − 2 sin 2θ tan ( 2θ
sin2 2θ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
) 1 − 2 sin 2θ tan ( θ2 ) = 1 − 8 cos θ sin2 ( θ2
= 1 − 4 cos θ ( 1 − cos θ ) = ( 1 − 2 cos θ )2
ﺇﺫﻥ
( 1 − 2 cos θ )2
R ( R − 2r ) = a 2
sin2 2θ
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، d 2 = R ( R − 2rﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﲤﺲ ﲬﺲ ﻛﹸﺮﺍﺕ .ﻭﺑﺮﻫﻦ
ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﲬﺲ ﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﲤﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ
A ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺎﹰ.
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ :ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ ، ABCDﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ
D O
ﺃﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . aﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻠﻪ ،ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ
B
A′ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ :
P
C )(1 OA + OB + OC + OD = 0
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ A′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ . BCDﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ OA + 3OA′ = 0ﺇﺫﻥ
)(2 AO = 43 AA′
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BCDﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ A′ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . A′ B = A′ C = A′ D = a3 ،ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Aﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BCDﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( AA′ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
، BCDﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) . ( BCDﻭﻣﻨﻪ
2 2
) ) AA′2 = AP 2 − A′ P 2 = AP 2 − ( 31 DP ) = ( 98 ) ( a sin ( π3
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 34
، OA = aﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ 4
6 ﺇﺫﻥ ، AA′ = a 36ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ
ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
6
OA = OB = OC = OD = a
4
ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ :ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﹺﻛﹶﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺃﺱ : O
OABﻭ OACﻭ OADﻭ OBCﻭ OBDﻭ OCD
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ،Oﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻭ ) ( ADﻭ ) ( BCﻭ ) ( BDﻭ ) . (CDﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
2 a
= ) r = OA2 − ( 12 AB
2 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ) S = S (O, 2 a 2ﲤﺲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ . ABCD
A ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ( ABCﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﲤ
ﺲ
P′ ﺃﺿﻼ ﻉ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩ ﺍ ﺧﻼﹰ ،ﻭ ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ
L K
ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، D ′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ، Cﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻠﻪ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
D′
C APﳏﻮ ﺭ ﺍ ﻟﻀﻠﻊ BCﻛﺎ ﻥ . AD ′ = 23 APﻟﺘﻜﻦ P ′
C P ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ Cﺍ ﳌﹸﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Pﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍ ﳌﺎ ﺭ
B
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ P ′ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ) ( BCﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Kﻭ Lﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﻭﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ AK = 31 ABﻭ . AL = 13 AC
) S(OD ′ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) S(OD ′ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . (OD ′ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ، ( ABCﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﲤﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( KLﻷﻥﹼ ) . S(OD ′ )(( BC )) = ( KL
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ، AM = 31 ADﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ،ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ،ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﲤﺲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( LMﻭ ) . ( MK
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ HA,3ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Aﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ . 3ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ SAﺑﺄﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
Sﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ HA,3ﺃﻱ ) . SA = HA,3 ( Sﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﲤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ SAﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻭ ) ( ADﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺎ ﻛﻲ HA,3ﻳﺤﺎ ﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ،ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﲤﺲ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
) (CBﻭ ) ( DCﻭ ) ( BDﻷﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ) ( KLﻭ ) ( LMﻭ ) ( MKﻭﻓﻖ . HA,3
35 ﻋﺎﻡ 1962
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺑﺎ ﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻴﺎﺕ HB,3ﻭ HC ,3ﻭ HD,3ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ
) SB = HB,3 ( Sﻭ ) SC = HC ,3 ( Sﻭ ) SD = HD,3 ( Sﳑﺎﺳﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ . ABCDﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ Sﻭ SAﻭ SBﻭ SC
ﻭ SDﳑﺎﺳﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ . ABCD
ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ :ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ . ( Ai )1≤i ≤4ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ Sﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ .ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Siﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎﹰ ﳌﻤﺪﺩﺍﺕ
ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . Ai
S1
X3
A3
ℓ3 ℓ4
ւ X4
A1 ℓ 1 ℓ 2 A2 X2
ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﺮﺓ ،ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ،ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ.
ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎﺳﲔ ﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﺎﻥ ﳑﺎﺳﲔ ﳍﺎ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ℓ iﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Aiﻟﻠﻜﺮﺓ ، Sﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
. 1 ≤ i ≤ 4ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ Ai Ajﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ . Ai Aj = ℓ i + ℓ j
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( A1Ajﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ S1ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ X jﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 2, 3, 4ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ S1ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ( A2A3A4ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ
ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، A2A3A4ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ
) . ( A2A3A4ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ Ajﻟﻠﻜﺮﺓ Sﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺓ ، S1ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Aj X j = ℓ jﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} . { 2, 3, 4ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ A1X 2 = A1X 3 = A1X 4ﺃﻥﹼ
ℓ 1 + 2ℓ 2 = ℓ 1 + 2 ℓ 3 = ℓ 1 + 2 ℓ 4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . ℓ 2 = ℓ 3 = ℓ 4
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 36
ﻭﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎ ﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ A2ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ S2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
. ℓ 1 = ℓ 3 = ℓ 4ﻭﺑﻨﺎ ﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ( Ai Aj )1≤i < j ≤4ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻓﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
ù ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ A1A2A3A4ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ
ﻋﻴﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ pﻣﻦ ℝﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
x2 − p + 2 x2 − 1 = x
ﺣﻠﻮﻻﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ .ﻭﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ.
ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ xﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ،ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺬﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﲔ.
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ . x ≥ max ( 1, p ) ≥ 1 :
ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ x 2 − p ≤ xﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . p ≥ 0
≤ . x 2ﻭ ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﺗﺬ ﻛﹼﺮ ﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 4
3 ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎ ﻓﺊ ﺍ ﳌﺘﺮ ﺍ ﺟﺤﺔ 2 x 2 − 1 ≤ xﺃ ﻥ ﻳﻜﻮ ﻥ
p ≤ x 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . p ≤ 43
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ pﺇﱃ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, 43ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮﻁﹲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ.
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ pﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . [ 0, 43ﺇﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﱠ ﺣﻞﱟ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ
p
( x 2 − 1 )( x 2 − p ) = 1 + − x 2
4
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ
( 4 − p )2
= x2
) 8 (2 − p
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻞﱡ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
4−p
= x = xp
2 4 − 2p
ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
( 4 − p )2 ( 4 − 3p )2 4 − 3p
= x p2 − p = −p =
) 8 (2 − p ) 8 (2 − p 2 4 − 2p
( 4 − p )2 p2 p
= x p2 − 1 = −1 =
) 8 (2 − p ) 8(2 − p 2 4 − 2p
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . x p2 − p + 2 x p2 − 1 = x p ﻭ x pﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ù ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻞﹼ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ pﺇﱃ ] . [ 0, 43
37
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 38
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Aﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ BCﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ Pﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﱵ
. APX
= π
2 ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Xﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ BCﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ Xﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ] [ BCﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Xﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ) ( B,1 − tﻭ ) (C , tﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ] . t ∈ [ 0,1ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Lﺇﱃ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
P ∈ L ⇔ ∃X ∈ [ BC ], AP ⋅ PX = 0
⇔ ∃t ∈ [ 0,1 ], AP ⋅ ( ( 1 − t ) PB + tPC ) = 0
⇔ ∃t ∈ [ 0,1 ], ( 1 − t ) AP ⋅ PB + tAP ⋅ PC = 0
⇔ ( AP ⋅ PB )( AP ⋅ PC ) ≤ 0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ T ′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ATﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
(
AP ⋅ PT = AT ′ + T ′P ⋅ PT ′ + T ′T() )
( ()
= AT ′ − PT ′ PT ′ + AT ′ = AT ′2 − PT ′2)
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ B ′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [ ABﻭ C ′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ ACﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
P ∈ L ⇔ ( AB ′2 − PB ′2 )( AC ′2 − PC ′2 ) ≤ 0
⇔ ( AB ′ − PB ′ )( AC ′ − PC ′ ) ≤ 0
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ، rﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﺔ ) ، B ( M , rﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ
ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﺔ ) B ( M , rﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Mﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، rﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
} B ( M , r ) = { P : PM < rﻭ } B ( M , r ) = { P : PM ≤ r
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ P ∈ Lﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
) ) ( ( PB ′ ≤ AB ′ ) ∧ ( AC ′ ≤ PC ′ ) ) ∨ ( ( AB ′ ≤ PB ′ ) ∧ ( PC ′ ≤ AC ′
ﺃﻭ
) ) L = ( B ( B ′, AB ′ )\B (C ′, AC ′ ) ) ∪ ( B (C ′, AC ′ )\B ( B ′, AB ′
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ BBﻭ B Bﺑﺄﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺒﻼﻥ
] [ ABﻗﻄﺮﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ BCﻭ BCﺑﺄﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﺎﻥ
ù ﺗﻘﺒﻼﻥ ] [ ACﻗﻄﺮﺍﹰ ،ﻛﺎﻥ ) . L = ( B B \BC ) ∪ ( BC \BB
39 ﻋﺎﻡ 1963
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﻟﻪ nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭ ﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
(ai )0≤i <nﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ . a 0 ≥ a1 ≥ ⋯ ≥ an −1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ.
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ .ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ . ( Ai )0≤i <n
ﻟﻨﻤﺪ ﺩ ﺍ ﳌﺘﺘﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﲔ (ai )0≤i <nﻭ ( Ai )0≤i <nﺑﻮﺿﻊ ak = ak mod nﻭ . Ak = Ak mod n
ﻟﻨﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ { 0,1, …, n − 1 }, Ak Ak +1 = ak
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪ ﺅﻫﺎ ، A0ﻭﳏﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻮ ﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ
، A0A1ﻭﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ A2ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ θﻣﻦ [ ] 0, πﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀k ∈ {1, …, n }, (Ak −1Ak , Ak Ak +1 ) = θ
ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﻝ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } ، {1, …, nﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
k
= ) (A0A1, Ak Ak +1 ∑ (Aj −1Aj , Aj Aj +1) = kθ
j =1
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k = nﺃﻥﹼ
)(1 n θ = 0 mod 2π
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺳﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﹰﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ . ℂﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ، A0 = 0
ﻭ A1 = a0ﻭ ، A2 = a 0 + a1e i θﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
Ak +1 = Ak + ake i k θ
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } . { 0,1, …, n − 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
k
∀k ∈ { 0, …, n − 1 }, = Ak +1 ∑ a je i j θ
j =0
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k = n − 1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، An = A0ﺇﺫﻥ
n −1
)(2 ∑ a je i j θ =0
j =0
= ) λj = sin2 ( j2θﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، j ∈ ℤﻓﻨﺠﺪ (1
2 1− ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ) cos j θ
) λj +1 − λj = 12 ( cos j θ − cos ( j + 1 ) θ ) = sin ( θ2 ) sin ( ( j + 12 ) θ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 40
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ
n −1
∑ a j sin ( θ2 )e i( j +1/2 )θ =0
j =0
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
n −1
∑ a j ( λj +1 − λj ) = 0
j =0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n −1 n −1 n −1 n n −1
∑ a j ( λj +1 − λj ) = ∑ a j λj +1 − ∑ a j λj = ∑ a j −1λj − ∑ a j λj
j =0 j =0 j =0 j =1 j =0
n −1
= ∑ (a j −1 − a j )λj ¤ λ0 = λn = 0
j =1
ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥﹼ λn = 0ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( 1ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
n −1
∑ (a j −1 − a j )λj =0
j =1
ﻭﻷﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 0ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
)(3 ∀j ∈ {1,2, …, n − 1 }, (a j −1 − a j )λj = 0
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
} j0 = min { j ≥ 1 : λj = 0
ﻷﻥﹼ ، 0 < θ < πﻧﺮﻯ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ 3 ≤ j 0 ≤ nﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ j0 < nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ
ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ . a 0 = a2 = ⋯ = a j0 −1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
j0 −1 j0 −1
i jθ e i j 0θ − 1
= Aj0 ∑ a je = a0 ∑ e i j θ = a0 =0
j =0 j =0 eiθ − 1
ﺇﺫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ λj0 = 0ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ . e i j0θ = 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
( Aj )0≤ j <nﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، j0 = nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
a 0 = a2 = ⋯ = an −1
ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ.
41 ﻋﺎﻡ 1963
A2
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﱂ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺷﻴﺌﺎﹰ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ
A5 ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ( Aj )0≤ j <nﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ .ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺣﻠﻮﻻﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ
a1
a4 =θ 2π
3 ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺎﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ :
A0=A3 A4 A1 ﻭ n = 6ﻭ . a 3 = a 4 = a5 = 12 ، a 0 = a1 = a2 = 1
ù ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ) X = ( x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 , x 5ﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
x i + x i +2 = yx i +1, } i ∈ {1,2, …, 5
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ x i = x i −5ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } . i ∈ { 6, 7
ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺟﱪ ﺧﻄﹼﻲ .ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) X = ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0ﺣﻞﱞ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . yﻧﺒﺤﺚ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ Xﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ .ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
x5 + x2 = yx1
x1 + x 3 = yx 2
x2 + x 4 = yx 3
x3 + x5 = yx 4
x 4 + x1 = yx 5
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﻴﺔ . AV = yVﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Vﺇﱃ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ∗ V = X
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Aﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
A = 0 1 0 1 ∗0 = P + P
¤ P = 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ AV = yVﺣﻼﹰ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ yﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ . A
ﳒﺪ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Pﻫﻮ ، XP ( λ ) = λ 5 − 1ﻓﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ } Sp ( P ) = {1, ω, ω 2, ω 3, ω 4ﻭ ωﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) . ω = exp ( 2π5 i
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 42
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
1 1 1 1 1
2 3 4
1 ω ω ω ω
1 1 ω2 ω 4 ω ω 3
=Ω
5 3 4 2
1 ω ω ω ω
1 ω 4 ω 3 ω2 ω
ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ، Ω∗ ⋅ Ω = I 5ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . Ω∗ = Ω−1 ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
) Ω∗P Ω = diag ( 1, ω, ω 2 , ω 3 , ω 4
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
) ΩP ∗Ω∗ = diag ( 1, ω 4 , ω 3 , ω 2 , ω
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﳒﺪ
ΩAΩ∗ = diag ( 2,2 cos 25π ,2 cos 45π , 2 cos 45π , 2 cos 25π ) = D
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻫﻲ } . Sp ( A ) = { 2, 2 cos 25π , 2 cos 45π
ﺇﺫﻥ
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } ، y ∉ { 2, 2 cos 25π , 2 cos 45πﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﻱ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻱ ) . X = ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . y = 2ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ AV = 2Vﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ D ΩV = 2ΩVﻭﻫﺬﻩ
ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ، ΩV ∈ ℂε1ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ε1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ∗) . ( 1, 0, 0, 0, 0ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ،V ∈ ℂαﻣﻊ ∗) . α = Ω∗ε1 = 15 ( 1,1,1,1,1ﺇﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﰲ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ } . {(a, a, a, a, a ) : a ∈ ℂ
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . y = 2 cos 25π = 52−1ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ AV = 2 cos 25π Vﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
D ΩV = 2 cos 25π ΩVﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ، ΩV ∈ ℂε2 + ℂε5ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
ε2ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ∗) ، ( 0,1, 0, 0,1ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ε5ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ∗) ، ( 0, −1, 0, 0,1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ،V ∈ ℂβ + ℂγﻣﻊ
∗
) β = 25 ( Ω∗ε2 ) = ( 1, cos 25π , cos 45π , cos 45π , cos 25π
∗
= γ 5
) 2 i sin( 2 π /5
) ( Ω∗ε5 ) = ( 0, −1, −2 cos 25π ,2 cos 25π ,1
ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ) ( β, γﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎﹰ.
43 ﻋﺎﻡ 1963
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . y = 2 cos 45π = − 25 −1ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ AV = 2 cos 45π Vﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
D ΩV = 2 cos 45π ΩVﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ، ΩV ∈ ℂε3 + ℂε4ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
ε3ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ∗) ، ( 0, 0,1,1, 0ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ε4ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ∗) ، ( 0, 0, −1,1, 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ،V ∈ ℂµ + ℂνﻣﻊ
) ∗ (5 ∗
) µ = 2 Ω ε3 = ( 1, cos 5 , cos 5 , cos 25π , cos 45π
4π 2π
∗
= ν 5
) 2 i sin( 2 π /5
) ( Ω∗ε4 ) = ( 0, 2 cos 25π , −1,1, −2 cos 25π
ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ) ( µ, νﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎﹰ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ.
π 2π 3π 1
. cos
7) (
− cos
7
+ cos ) (
7
=
2 ) ( ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ :
= . θﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ، e 7 i θ = e i π = −1ﻭﻷﻥﹼ e i θ ≠ −1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ π
7 ﻟﻨﻀﻊ
e7 i θ + 1
=0 = e6 i θ − e5 i θ + e 4 i θ − e3 i θ + e2 i θ − ei θ + 1
ei θ + 1
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ e 3 i θﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0ﳒﺪ
e 3 i θ − e 2 i θ + e i θ − 1 + e − i θ − e −2 i θ + e −3 i θ = 0
ù ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 2ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ،ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﲬﺴﺔ ﻃﻼﹼﺏ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Dﻭ Eﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ
ﻣﻦ 1ﺣﺘﻰ . 5ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﺗﻌﻠﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﻓﹸﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻬﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﻠﹼﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻴﻢ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ :ﺃﹶ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ABC D E؟ ﻓﺠﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ :ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﹼﺏ ﱂ ﳛﺼﻞ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﹼﻊ ،ﺑﻞ ،ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﱂ ﳛﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﲔ ﳍﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻓﻤﺜﻼﹰ ﱂ ﳛﺼﻞ Cﻭ Dﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ 1ﻭ ، 2
ﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ 2ﻭ ، 3ﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻭ 4ﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻭ . 5
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ :ﺃﹶﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ D AE C B؟ ﻓﺠﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ :ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺼﻼ ﻓﻌﻼﹰ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ،ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺯﻭﺟﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﲝﺼﻮﳍﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ،
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﹼﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻓﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 44
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻓﻔﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺗﺒﻌﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﹼﺎﻟﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﻤﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ.
: D A E C B .1ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Dﻭ ، Aﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Eﻭ Cﻭ Bﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Cﻫﻮ 3ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ C
ﻫﻮ ، 5ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Eﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ D AB EC
1 2 3 4 5
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ Aﻭ Bﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.
: D A E C B .2ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Dﻭ ، Eﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Aﻭ Cﻭ Bﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Bﻫﻮ 2ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ B
ﻫﻮ ، 4ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Aﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ DC E B A
1 2 3 4 5
ﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺇﺫ ﱂ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺃ
ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ) ( DA, ECﺃﻭ ) ( DA,CBﺃﻭ ) ( AE ,CBﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ
ﺧﻄﺄ.
: D AE C B .3ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Dﻭ ،Cﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Aﻭ Eﻭ Bﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Bﻫﻮ 2ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ B
ﻫﻮ ، 3ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Aﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ DC B E A
1 2 3 4 5
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ،ﺇﺫ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ CBﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺟﲔ AEﺃﻭ DAﻋﻠىﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.
: D AE C B .4ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Dﻭ ، Bﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Aﻭ Eﻭ Cﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Cﻫﻮ 3ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ C
ﻫﻮ ، 2ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Eﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ DC AE B
1 2 3 4 5
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ،ﺇﺫ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ AEﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ - CBﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ - AEﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
45 ﻋﺎﻡ 1963
: D AE C B .5ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Aﻭ ، Eﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﻭ Cﻭ Bﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Dﻫﻮ 4ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ D
ﻫﻮ ، 5ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Cﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ C AE B D
1 2 3 4 5
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ،ﺇﺫ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ AEﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﲔ
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ - CBﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ - AEﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
: D A E C B .6ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Aﻭ ،Cﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﻭ Eﻭ Bﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Eﻫﻮ 5ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ E
ﻫﻮ ، 1ﻭﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Bﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ E ABC D
1 2 3 4 5
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ Cﻭ Dﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.
: D A E C B .7ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Aﻭ ، Bﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﻭ Eﻭ Cﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Dﻫﻮ 4ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ D
ﻫﻮ ، 3ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Cﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ C AD E B
1 2 3 4 5
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷ ﻭﻝ ،ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ Dﻭ Eﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.
: D A EC B .8ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Eﻭ ،Cﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﻭ Aﻭ Bﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Aﻫﻮ 1ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ A
ﻫﻮ ، 5ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Bﻫﻮ 2ﻟﻠﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ
B D EC Aﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ Dﻭ E
1 2 3 4 5
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 46
: D A E C B .9ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Eﻭ ، Bﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﻭ Aﻭ Cﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
1 2 3 4 5
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Aﻫﻮ 1ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ A
ﻫﻮ ، 4ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ C D E ABﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ
1 2 3 4 5
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ Aﻭ Bﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.
: D AE C B .10ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ Bﻭ ، Bﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﻭ Aﻭ Eﻓﻬﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ
1 2 3 4 5
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ Aﻫﻮ 1ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ
Aﻫﻮ ، 3ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ Dﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ . E D AC B
1 2 3 4 5
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻨﲔ .ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ
ù ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ
.1ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ » 7ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . « 2n − 1
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ » 7ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . « 2n + 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
r 0 1 2
2r mod 7 1 2 4
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ rﻣﻦ } { 0,1,2ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ nﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ qﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . n = 3q + rﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
2n mod 7 = 8q 2r mod 7 = 2r mod 7
.1ﻓﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ 2n mod 7 = 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 2r mod 7 = 1ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ
ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ . r = 0ﺇﺫﻥ 7ﻳﻘﺴﻢ 2n − 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 3ﻳﻘﺴﻢ
. nﺃﻱ . 7 | ( 2n − 1 ) ⇔ 3 | n
.2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺃ ﻥﹼ 2n mod 7 = 6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 2r mod 7 = 6ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻧﺮ ﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ .ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﲡﻌﻞ 7ﺗﻘﺴﻢ
ù . 2n + 1
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻭ cﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
a 2 (b + c − a ) + b 2 ( c + a − b ) + c 2 (a + b − c ) ≤ 3abc
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ aﻭ bﻭ cﻣﻦ . ℝ +ﺳﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
∀ ( a, b, c ) ∈ ( ℝ + )3 , ( a + b − c )(b + c − a )( c + a − b ) ≤ abc
ﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ a + b − cﻭ b + c − a
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ aﻭ bﻭ cﻣﻦ . ℝ +ﺇﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃ
ﻭ c + a − bﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺛﻨﺎﻥ
ﺍﻵﺧﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ،ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ،ﻓﻬﻲ ﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
47
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 48
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ a + b − cﻭ b + c − aﻭ c + a − bﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
( a + b − c )(b + c − a ) = b 2 − (a − c)2 ≤ b 2
( a + b − c )( c + a − b ) = a 2 − (b − c)2 ≤ a 2
( c + a − b )(b + c − a ) = c 2 − (c − a )2 ≤ c 2
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺎ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ،ﺛﹸﻢ
ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
( a + b − c )(b + c − a )( c + a − b ) ≤ abc
) ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ( . a = b = cﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) . ( Eﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳒﺪ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ( a + b − c )(b + c − a )( c + a − b ) = (b 2 − a 2 − c 2 + 2ac )( c + a − b
= b 2 ( c + a − b ) + a 2 (b + c − a ) + c 2 (a + b − c ) − 2acb
ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
b 2 ( c + a − b ) + a 2 (b + c − a ) + c 2 (a + b − c ) ≤ 3acb
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ABCﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ aﻭ bﻭ . cﻧﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ .ﻳﺆﻟﹼﻒ ﻛﻞﱡ ﳑﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ rﻫﻮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ Aﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﳏﻴﻄﻪ . pﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ . pr = A
A
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ ﺍ ﳌﻤﺎ ﺱ ) ( B ′C ′ﻟﻠﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺓ Cﻣﻮ ﺍ ﺯ ﻳﹰﺎ
hA′
B′ C′ ) ، ( BCﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﰲ
hA
c r b B ′ﻭ C ′ﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎ ﻥ AB ′C ′ﻭ ABC
C r
a
ﻣﺘﺸﺎﲔ.
B C
49 ﻋﺎﻡ 1964
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ hA′ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Aﰲ ، AB ′C ′ﻭﻛﺎﻥ hAﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ
h′
Aﻣﻦ ، ABCﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ، kA = Aﻭﻟﻜﻦ hA′ = hA − 2rﺇﺫﻥ
hA
h − 2r ah − 2ra 2 A − 2A a / p a
kA = A = A = = 1−
hA hAa 2A p
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ A Cﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ CAﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
A AB ′C ′ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ . A CA = kA2 A C
CA
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎ ﺛﹶﻠﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ CBﺗﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ
C kB2 A Cﻣﻊ ، kB = 1 − b /pﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ CC
CB CC ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ kC2 A Cﻣﻊ . kC = 1 − c /p
B C
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ A = A C + A CA + A CB + A CCﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
A = ( 1 + kA2 + kB2 + kC2 ) A C
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
a 2 b 2 c 2
1 + kA2 + kB2 + kC2
= 1 + 1 − + 1 − + 1 −
p p p
a + b + c a 2 + b2 + c2
= 4−2 +
p p2
a 2 + b2 + c2
=
p2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ A C = πr 2 = πA 2 / p 2 :ﺇﺫﻥ . A = π (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) A 2 / p 4
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ Heronﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ،ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ
a 2 + b2 + c2
A=π ) p ( p − a )( p − b )( p − c
p4
) (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 )(b + c − a )(c + a − b )(a + b − c
=π
(a + b + c )3
3
) (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) − 2 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 )(a 4 + b 4 + c 4
=π
( a + b + c )4
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 50
ﰲ ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ،ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻕﹴ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﻏﺒﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺳﻞ ﺣﻮﳍﺎ.
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ 17ﺷﺨﺼﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ
ﰲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻗﺔ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ
ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﺳﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺗﻴﺔ :ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﹰ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﹰ K17ﻓﻴﻪ 17
ﺭﺃﺳﺎﹰ ،ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﲢﻤﻞ
ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Aﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺮ ﻗﺔ .ﺇ ﻧﻪ ﻳﺮﺍﺳﻞ ﻛﻞﱠ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﻀﻮﺍﹰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﲔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ . S1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻀﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ S1ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻛﻮﻧﺎ
ﻣﻊ Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﺳﻠﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ، S1ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﲔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﲔ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Bﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ .ﻭﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺮﺍﺳﻞ ﻛﻞﱠ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﲔ
ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﲔ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ . S2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻀﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ S2ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻛﻮﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ
Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﺳﻠﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ، S2ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞﹼ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ،ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ
ù ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﲬﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺃ ﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﻣﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﻭﺟﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻴﺴﺎ
ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻘﲔ ،ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ،ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﻳﻦ .ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ
ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ .ﻛﻠﹼﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻛﻠﹼﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ.
51 ﻋﺎﻡ 1964
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ 315ﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ .ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ﳝ ﺮ
ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ) ﺇﺫ ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
( .C 42 = 6ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﹼﻲ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺪﺭﺱ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 6 × 5 = 30ﻭﻛﻞﱡ
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻓﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ،ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ،ﺃﺻﻐﺮ
.C 30ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
2
ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ = 30×2 29 = 435
ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ﳝﺮ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ C 62 = 15ﻧﻘﻄﺔﹶ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊﹴ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ،ﺑﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ
ﺣﺬﻑ 14ﻧﻘﻄﺔﹶ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊﹴ ﻣﻔﺘﺮﺿﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻷ ﻭﱄ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ،
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ . 435 − 5 × 14 = 365
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﻤﺎ
ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ،ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) ،ﻭﻟﻴﺲ
ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ( ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻔﺘﺮﺿﺔ
ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ .ﻓﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ . 365 − 3C 52 = 335
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ،ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﲔ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ) ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ( ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ
ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ) ، ،ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ( ﺇﺫﻥ
ﳚﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻔﺘﺮﺿﺘﲔ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ.
ﻓﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ . 335 − 2C 53 = 315
D
7
ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ
6
5
E
ﻣﺜﺎ ﻝﹴ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺿﻊﹴ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﳓﺼﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 315
4
3 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ .ﻟﻘﺪ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ :
C
2
1 ) A ( 0, 0ﻭ ) B ( 0,1ﻭ ) C ( 5, 3ﻭ ) D ( 6, 7ﻭ ) E ( 3, 5
A B 2 3 4 5
ﻭﻧﺘﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ
6
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 315ﻧﻘﻄﺔ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﺎ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﻮﺏù .
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 52
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ . ABCDﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ D0ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ . ABCﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
) ( BCD ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( DD0ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻭ CADﻭ ABDﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A0ﻭ B0ﻭ C 0ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺣﺠﻢ ABCDﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ﺛﹸﻠﺚ ﺣﺠﻢ . A0B0C 0D0ﺃﹶﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ D0ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ
ABC؟
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ D0ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ( ABCﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ﻱ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( ABﺃﻭ ) ( BCﺃﻭ ) . (CAﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍ ﺩ ( α, β, γ ) ﻣﻦ ( ℝ ∗ )3
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ α + β + γ = 1ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮ ﻥ D0ﻣﺮ ﻛﺰ ﺍ ﻷ ﺑﻌﺎ ﺩ ﺍ ﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎ ﻁ ﺍ ﳌﹸﺜﻘﹼﻠﺔ ) ، ( A, α
ﻭ ) ( B, βﻭ ) . (C , γﺃﻱ
∀M , MD0 = αMA + β MB + γ MC
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
)(1 DD0 = αDA + β DB + γ DC
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A0ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ، ( BCDﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ) ( λ, µ, νﻣﻦ ℝ 3
) ( B, λﻭ ) (C , µ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ λ + µ + ν = 1ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ A0ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ
ﻭ ) ( D, νﺃﻱ
∀M , MA0 = λMB + µMC + ν MD
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
AA0 = λAB + µAC + ν AD
= λDB − λDA + µDC − µDA − ν DA
= −DA + λDB + µDC
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ AA0ﻭ DD0ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻳﺮﻳﻦ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ، ( 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ
−1 λ µ
) ( DA, DB, DCﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﹼﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻥﹼ = = ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
α β γ
β γ 1
λ =− ,µ=− ,ν =−
α α α
1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳒﺪ . AA0 = − DD0
α
53 1964 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﻭﲝﺴﺎﺏﹴ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﳌﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1
CC 0 = − DD0 ﻭBB0 = − DD0
γ β
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
1
D0A0 = −DD0 + DA + AA0 = DA − 1 +
α (
DD0 )
1
= DA − 1 +( α
( )
αDA + β DB + γ DC )
1 1
(
= − αDA + β 1 + (
α )
DB + γ 1 +
α (
DC ) )
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ
1 1
D0B0 = − α 1 + DA + β DB + γ 1 + DC
β β
ﻭ
1 1
D0C 0 = − α 1 + DA + β 1 + DB + γ DC
γ γ
ﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳD0A0 ∧ D0B0 ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1
− ( α + β + 1 ) DA ∧ DB − γ 1 + DA ∧ DC + γ 1 +
β α (
DB ∧ DC )
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
( D0A0 ∧ D0B0 ) ⋅ D0C 0 = −( 2 + α + γ + β )( DA ∧ DB ) ⋅ DC
= −3 ( DA ∧ DB ) ⋅ DC
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
vol ( ABCD ) = 1
6 ( DA ∧ DB ) ⋅ DC
vol ( A0B0C 0D0 ) = 1
6 ( D0A0 ∧ D0B0 ) ⋅ D0C 0
ù . vol ( A0B0C 0D0 ) = 3 vol ( ABCD ) ﺇﺫﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 54
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ xﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0,2πﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
≤ 2 cos x ≤ 1 + sin 2x − 1 − sin 2x 2
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ( cos x ± sin x )2 = 1 ± sin 2xﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
1 + sin 2x − 1 − sin 2x = cos x + sin x − cos x − sin x
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) a + b − a − b = 2 min ( a , b
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔﹸ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔﹶ
2
cos x ≤ min ( cos x , sin x ≤)
2
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲎ ﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ، cos x ≤ sin xﻓﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ù ﻗﻴﻢ xﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، cos x ≤ 12ﺃﻱ ] . [ π4 , 74π
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﺎﻝ (aij )1≤i, j ≤3ﰲ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
a11x1 + a12x 2 + a13x 3 = 0
a21x1 + a22x 2 + a23x 3 = 0
a 31x1 + a 32x 2 + a 33x 3 = 0
ﺍﳋﻮﺍ ﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ a11ﻭ a22ﻭ a 33ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﺍﻷﻣﺜﺎﻝ aijﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
i ≠ jﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ
ﻫﻮ . x1 = x 2 = x 3 = 0
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) ( x1, x 2, x 3ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ℝ 3ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ ) . ( 0, 0, 0ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
x k = max ( x 1 , x 2 , x 3 ) > 0
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ } {i, j } = {1,2, 3 }\{kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
akk x k ≤ aki x i + akj x j + aki x i + akk x k + akj x j
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ،ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﳒﺪ
akk x k ≤ aki x i + akj x j + ak 1x1 + ak 2x 2 + ak 3x 3
55
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 56
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ x kﻭﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
akk x k ≤ −aki x k − akj x k + ak 1x1 + ak 2x 2 + ak 3x 3
ﺃﻭ
( ak 1 + ak 2 + ak 3 ) x k ≤ ak 1x 1 + ak 2x 2 + ak 3x 3
ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . ak 1x1 + ak 2x 2 + ak 3x 3 ≠ 0ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ù ) ( x1, x 2, x 3ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
) ( ABﻭ ) (CD ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ . ABCDﻭﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﹰ Pﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ
ﻭﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺰﺃﻳﻦ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺑﻌﺪ Pﻋﻦ ) ( ABﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ kﻣﺮ ﺓﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ
Pﻋﻦ ) ، (CDﻓﺎﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺃﻳﻦ.
D ] [ AD ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Pﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ
P
X ﻭ ] [ DBﻭ ] [ BCﻭ ] [ ACﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Xﻭ Yﻭ Zﻭ W
Y
W ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ) ( XWﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ C
Z ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮ ﻱ ) ، ( BCDﻳﺘﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ ﻱ ﻣﻊ ) ( AB
A
P ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . P
B
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ Pﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ kﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ Pﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، (CDﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
k
= .λ ﺃ ﹼﻥ . AX = kXDﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ AX = λAD ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
k +1
ﺇﻥﹼ ) ، ( XY ) ( ABﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ DXYﻭ DABﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
)(1 BY = λBD
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) ، (YZ ) ( DCﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ BZYﻭ BCDﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
)(2 BZ = λBC
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ) ، ( XP ) ( DBﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ APXﻭ ABDﻣﺘﺸﺎﲔ ،ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
)(3 AP = λAB
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ) ( XW ) ( DCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ AXWﻭ ، ADCﻭﻣﻨﻪ
)(4 AW = λAC
57 1965 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ. ABXYZW ﻢﺴﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍ ﺑﺄﻧVAB ﻑﻟﻨﻌﺮ
VAB = vol ( APXW ) + vol ( PXWBYZ )
: ( ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ4 ) ( ﻭ3 ) ﻭﻣﻦAX = λAD ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ، ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ
1
vol ( APXW ) = det ( AP, AW , AX )
6
1
= λ 3 det ( AB, AC , AD )
6
= λ 3 vol ( ABCD )
ﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳPXWBYZ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺷﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
1
vol ( PXWBYZ ) = det ( BZ , BY , BP )
2
( 2 ) ( ﻭ1 ) ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦBP = AP − AB = ( λ − 1 ) AB ( ﳒﺪ3 ) ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
vol ( PXWBYZ ) = det ( λBC , λBD, ( λ − 1 ) BA )
2
1
= λ 2 ( 1 − λ ) det ( BC , BD, BA )
2
= 3λ 2 ( 1 − λ ) vol ( ABCD )
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
VAB = λ 3 vol ( ABCD ) + 3λ 2 ( 1 − λ ) vol ( ABCD )
= λ2 ( 3 − 2λ ) vol ( ABCD )
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ.CDXYZW ﻢﺴﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍ ﺑﺄﻧVCD ﻓﻨﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮ
VCD = vol ( ABCD ) − VAB
= ( 2λ 3 − 3λ2 + 1 ) vol ( ABCD )
= ( λ − 1 )2 ( 2λ + 1 ) vol ( ABCD )
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
VAB λ 2 ( 3 − 2λ ) k 2 (k + 3 )
= =
VCD ( λ − 1 )2 ( 2λ + 1 ) 3k + 1
ù .ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 58
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ℝ 4ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﹼﺒﺎﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﱢﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ
ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) X = ( x1, x 2, x 3, x 4ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ، ℝ 4ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ .ﺃﻱ
x1 + x 2x 3x 4 = 2, x 2 + x 3x 4x1 = 2
x 3 + x 4x1x 2 = 2, x 4 + x1x 2x 3 = 2
ﻟﻨﻀﻊ λ = x1x 2x 3x 4ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ λﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 0ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
. P ( x ) = x 2 − 2x + λﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀i ∈ {1, 2, 3, 4 }, P ( xi ) = 0
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Pﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { x1, x 2, x 3, x 4ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﺃﻭ . 2
ﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . card ( { x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 } ) = 1ﺃﻱ x1 = x 2 = x 3 = x 4 = aﻣﻊ
، a + a 3 = 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ (a − 1 )(a 2 + a + 2 ) = 0ﺃﻭ . a = 1ﺃﻱ
) . X = ( 1,1,1,1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ،ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺣﻞﱞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ . card ( { x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 } ) = 2ﻳﻮ ﺟﺪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺍ ﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﻥ a < bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
} . { x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 } = {a, bﺇﺫﻥ ) ، P (x ) = (x − a )(x − bﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
ab = λﻭ . a + b = 2
ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺮ ﻛﹼﺒﺎﺕ Xﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ x1 = aﻭ . x 2 = bﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻥ } { x 3, x 4 } = {a, bﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ x 3x 4 = λﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
λ = x1x 2x 3x 4 = λ 2
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، λ = 1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ، a = b = 1ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ } . x 3 = x 4 ∈ { x1, x 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ λﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، x 32 = 1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x 3 = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺟﺬﺭﻱ Pﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 2ﺃﻥﹼ x i = 1ﺃﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، iﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، x 3 = −1ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ
، 3ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) ، X = ( −1, 3, −1, −1ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﻞﹲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ﻓﺎﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ) ( 3, −1, −1, −1ﻭ ) ( −1, 3, −1, −1ﻭ ) ( −1, −1, 3, −1
ù ﻭ ) ( −1, −1, −1, 3ﻭ ﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ) ( 1,1,1,1ﻣﻦ . ℝ 4
59 ﻋﺎﻡ 1965
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ OABﻓﻴﻪ Oﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎ ﺩﺓ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ ABﻟﻴﻜﻦ Pﻭ Q
ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻄﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﺋﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) (OAﻭ ) (OBﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍ ﶈﻞﹼ
ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Hﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ OPQ؟ ﺛﹸﻢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﶈ ﹼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ
Mﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .OAB
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﻣﻦ ] . [ ABﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ tﻣﻦ ] ، [ 0,1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
B
) (1 OM = tOA + ( 1 − t )OB
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( MP ) (QHﻭ ) ( MQ ) ( PHﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
Q
A′
M PMQHﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ،QH = MP
H
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
O B′ P A
)(2 OH = OP + OQ − OM
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ B ′ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ، Bﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ A′ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ . Aﺑﺈﺳﻘﺎﻁ
) ( 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (OAﳒﺪ
)(3 OP = tOA + ( 1 − t )OB ′
ﻭﺑﺈﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (OBﳒﺪ
)(4 OQ = tOA′ + ( 1 − t )OB
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
) OH = tOA + ( 1 − t )OB ′ + tOA′ + ( 1 − t )OB − ( tOA + ( 1 − t )OB
ﺃﻱ
)(5 OH = tOA′ + ( 1 − t )OB ′
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ Mﻋﻠﻰ ] ) ، [ ABﺃﻱ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ tﰲ ] ( ، [ 0,1ﺗﺮﺳﻢ H
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ A′ B ′
، k = cos(AOBﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
ﻟﻨﺘﻤﻌﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Hﻧﻀﻊ )
ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ A1ﻭ B1ﺑﺎ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺘﲔ OA1 = kOAﻭ OB1 = kOBﻓﻴﻜﻮ ﻥ ﺍ ﻟﺸﻌﺎ ﻋﺎ ﻥ OA1
ﻭ ،OB1ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ OAﻭ OBﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ . h = HO,k
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 60
ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃ ﺧﺮ ﻯ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎ ﻥ OB ′ = OB1ﻭ OA′ = OA1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ OA′ﻭ ،OB ′
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﳘﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﺎ OA1ﻭ OB1ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ s = Sdﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d
. AOB
ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
B
d
A′
B1 H
M
O B′ A1 A
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﹼﻲ ، Λ = s hﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) OA′ = Λ(OAﻭ ) OB ′ = Λ(OB
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ، ( 5ﺃﻥﹼ
) OH = t Λ(OA) + ( 1 − t ) Λ(OB
) = Λ(tOA + ( 1 − t )OB ) = Λ(OM
λ
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ M ֏ Hﲢﻮﻳﻞﹲ ﺃﻓﹼﲏ ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Oﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ kﻣﺘﺒﻮﻉ
. AOBﻭﻛﻞﱡ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻓﹼﲏ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﲰﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،OABﺭﲰﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺎ ) H = λ ( Mﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ù ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) h (Oﻭ ) h ( Aﻭ ) ، h ( Bﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .OA′ B ′
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 2ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ } P = { Ai : 1 ≤ i ≤ n
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . nﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) δ = max { Ai Aj : 1 ≤ i < j ≤ n } = diam ( P
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ Ai Ajﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﻮﳍﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ δﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n
ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻨﺆﺟﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺎ.
ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ :ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﲔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، dﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . d
61 ﻋﺎﻡ 1965
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 3
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ، n0ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ . n 0 ≥ 4ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇ ﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Pﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ n0ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ،
ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ n 0 + 1ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ، Pﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) δ = diam ( Pﺃﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ . P
ﺇﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﱠ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ Pﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ . S
ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Aﻣﻦ Pﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻷﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ، Sﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} P ′ = P \{ Aﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ، n 0 − 1ﻭ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﺍﳌﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ n 0 + 1ﻗﻄﻌﺔ
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ، P ′ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ . δﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . n0
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﰲ Pﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ . S
ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ Aﰲ Pﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ] [ ABﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، S
ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } P ′ = P \{ Aﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ، n 0 − 1ﻭﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ }] S \{[ AB
ﺍﳌﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ n0ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ، P ′ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ . δﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . n0
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ Pﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ Sﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﲔ.
ﻷ ﻧﻪ ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﺍ ﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﳑﻜﻦ ، ﺗﺄ ﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ A2ﻣﻦ Pﻭ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ] [ A1A2
ﻭ ] [ A2A3ﻣﻦ Sﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﺒﻼﻥ A2ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( Am )m ≥1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ:
ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ ، mﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Amﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ . P
ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ ، mﻓﺎﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ Am Am +1ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . S
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻘﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ A1ﻭ A2ﻭ . A3ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ( Ak )1≤k ≤mﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ .ﻣﻊ ، m ≥ 3ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Am +1ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ }] S \{[ Am −1Amﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎ . Am
ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ( Aj )1≤ j ≤n +1ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﳒﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﲔ kﻭ ℓ
0
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ 1 ≤ k < ℓ ≤ n 0 + 1ﻭ . Ak = Aℓﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻻﺑﺪ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ k + 1 ≠ ℓﺃﻱ . k + 2 ≤ ℓ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 62
ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ، k > 1ﻛﺎ ﻧﺖ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ Ak , Ak +1ﻭ ] [ Ak −1, Akﻭ ] ، [ Aℓ −1, Aℓ
ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ Sﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Akﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ .ﺇﺫﻥ . k = 1
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ :
} P ′ = P \{ A1, A2 , …, Aℓ −1
}] S ′ = S \{[ A1A2 ], [ A2A3 ], …, [ Aℓ −1, A1 ﻭ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ S ′ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ n 0 − ℓ + 2ﻗﻄﻌﺔﹰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔﹰ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ، P ′ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ ،ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ،
ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ P ′ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ،ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، card ( P ′ ) = n0 − ℓ + 1 ≥ 3ﻭﻃﻮﻝ
ﻛﻞﱢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ S ′ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . δﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . n0
ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﳒﺪ ﰲ Pﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Dﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
{[ AB ], [ AC ], [ AD ]} ⊂ S
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ ،ﺃﻥﹼ ) . BD ≥ max ( BC ,CD
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ BD ≤ δ
X
D ، BADﻟﻴﻜﻦ BDﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ≤ π
3
C ، Cﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Aﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، δﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻞ
A
B
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
. BADﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ،C ∈ BDﻷﻧﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً
C
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) BD ≥ max ( BC ,CDﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) BD = C ∩ D ( B, BD ) ∩ D ( D, BD
ﻭ ) D ( M , rﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Mﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ . r
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﰲ ،ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Xﰲ } ) ، P \{ Aﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
Bﺃﻭ Dﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺎﹶ! ( ،ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . [CX ] ∈ Sﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( AC
ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﳛﻮﻱ ] [ ABﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﳛﻮﻱ ] ، [ ADﻓﻼ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ∅ ≠ ] [CX ] ∩ [ ABﻭ ∅ ≠ ] [CX ] ∩ [ ADﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ = ] . [CX ] ∩ [ ABﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾﹴ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺷﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔﹰ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ nﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾﹴ .ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎﹰ.
63 ﻋﺎﻡ 1965
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ.
ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ :ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﲔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، dﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . d
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
N
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻤﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﳓﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ .ﻭﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ KSN
d
ﻭ LSNﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﰲ ، Sﻭﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻞ
M
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ) ﺃﻱ ] [ LNﺃﻭ ] ( [ KNﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ] [ SNﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ
K S d L
ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . d
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﳛﻤﻼﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ.
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ.
M
ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ.
d
N ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، π2ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥﹼ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2πﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
K d L
ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍﺎ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻃﻮﻝﹶ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ
ù ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ dﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 64
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ
ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻃﹸﺮﹺﺣﺖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ Aﻭ Bﻭ .Cﺣﻞﱠ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ
ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﹼﺬﻳﻦ ﱂ ﳛﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ، Aﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ
ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Bﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ .Cﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Aﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ Aﺇﺣﺪﻯ
ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺘﲔ Bﺃﻭ .Cﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Aﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ
ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Bﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Cﻓﻘﻂ.
A ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ aﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Aﻓﻘﻂ،
a
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ bﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Bﻓﻘﻂ،
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ cﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Cﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ
b
d ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ dﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺘﲔ Bﻭ Cﻭﱂ
c B
C ﳛﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ . A
» ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﹼﺬﻳﻦ ﱂ ﳛﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ، Aﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Bﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ « .Cﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ) b + d = 2 (c + dﺃﻭ
)(1 d = b − 2c
» ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Aﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ
Aﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺘﲔ Bﺃﻭ « .Cﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ ﻥﹼ a = 1 + 25 − a − b − c − d
ﺃﻭ
)(2 2a + b + c + d = 26
» ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Aﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Bﻓﻘﻂ
ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ Cﻓﻘﻂ « .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 a = b +c
ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ aﻭ dﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 3ﰲ ) ( 2ﳒﺪ
)(4 4b + c = 26
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . c = 2 mod ( 4ﻭﻷﻥﹼ d ≥ 0ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 4ﺃﻥﹼ ، 9c ≤ 26
ù ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، c = 2 ﻭ .b = 6
65
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 66
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ . ABCﻓﻴﻪ a = BCﻭ b = CAﻭ . c = ABﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
+ b tan B
a + b = (a tan A ) tan (C
) /2
ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ABCﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ.
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
cos ( C ) − sin A
cos A 2
sin ( C ) = cos ( A
2
+ C ) = cos
2 ) ( π+A2 −B
ﺇﺫﻥ
) sin ( C ) = sin ( B −A
cos ( C ) − sin A
cos A 2 2 2
ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﳒﺪ
) sin ( C ) = sin ( A −B
cos ( C ) − sin B
cos B 2 2 2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
) ) tan ( C
+ b tan B
∆ = a + b − (a tan A 2
ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
− b cos A
a cos B
) sin ( B −2 A
=∆
) cos A cos B cos ( 2
C
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Rﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼّﺚ ABCﻭﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
cos B
sin A sin B
− cos A ) ) = 2 cos ( A −B ) sin ( A −B
−B
= sin ( A
2 2
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
( 4R cos ) sin2 B −A
−A
B
2
∆=−
cos B
cos A ) cos ( C ) ( 2
2
ù B = Aﻭﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ.
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ∆ = 0ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
ϕ ( M ) = MA + MB + MC + MD
ﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ Mﻋﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ϕﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ G
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ .G
67 ﻋﺎﻡ 1966
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ϕﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﰲ ، ℝ +ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ αﻣﻦ ℝ +ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . α = inf ϕﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } I = { M : ϕ ( M ) = α = inf ϕﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚﹸ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Oﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺃﻥﹼ
ϕ ( M ) + ϕ (O ) ≥ 4MO
ﻷﻥﹼ MX + XO ≥ MOﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Xﻣﻦ } . { A, B,C , Dﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ M
= rﻛﺎﻥ . ϕ ( M ) > α α +ϕ(O )+1
4 ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Bﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . I = { M : ϕ ( M ) = α } ⊂ B
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﺔ ) B (O, rﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺻﺔ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ϕ
ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍﹰ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ∅ ≠ . I
ﻟﻨﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﲟﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ uﻭ ، vﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
u +v ≤ u + v
. v u = uﳝﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎ ﻏﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ : ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ v
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Yﻭ X1ﻭ X 2ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ X ′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ X1X 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 2YX ′ ≤ YX1 + YX 2ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Yﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( X1X 2ﻭﱂ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ] . [ X1X 2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Iﲢﻮﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ X1ﻭ ، X 2ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ X ′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [ X1X 2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺫﻛﹼﺮﻧﺎ ﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ αﺃﻥﹼ
2α ≤ 2ϕ ( X ′ ) ≤ ϕ ( X1 ) + ϕ ( X1 ) = 2α
ﺇﺫﻥ 2YX ′ = YX1 + YX 2ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Yﻣﻦ } ، { A, B,C , Dﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( X1X 2ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ I
ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ . M 0ﺃﻱ } . I = { M 0
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ Xﻭ Yﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ، ABCDﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ
PXYﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ) ( XYﻭﳝﺮ ﲟﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ .ﻭ S XYﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ . PXYﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، S XY ( ABCD ) = ABCDﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) ∀M , ϕ ( S XY ( M ) ) = ϕ ( M
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ S XY ( M 0 ) = M 0ﺃﻱ . M 0 ∈ PXY
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 68
D
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ M 0ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ
ﻭ PBCﻭ PBDﻭ ، PCDﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﰲ Gﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ
B
ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ .ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ .G = M 0ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ
C
G ù ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
A
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ sin ( 2n x ) ≠ 0ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n
1
) ∑ sin(2k x ) = cot x − cot ( 2n x
k =1
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ y ∉ π2 ℤﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
1 2 cos2 y − cos 2y
=
sin 2y sin 2y
cos y cos 2y
= −
sin y sin 2y
) = cot y − cot ( 2y
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ xﻣﻦ ℝﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . sin ( 2n x ) ≠ 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ k ≤ nﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ y = 2k −1 xﺇﱃ π2 ℤﻭﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ
1
) = cot ( 2k −1 x ) − cot ( 2k x
sin 2k x
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
n n
1
= ∑ sin 2k x ) ∑ ( cot ( 2k −1x ) − cot ( 2k x )) = cot x − cot ( 2n x
k =1 k =1
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ a1ﻭ a2ﻭ a3ﻭ . a4ﺣﻞﹼ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ :
a i − a1 x 1 + a i − a 2 x 2 + ai − a 3 x 2 + a i − a 4 x 4 = 1
ﻣﻊ iﻣﻦ } . {1,2, 3, 4
69 ﻋﺎﻡ 1966
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ σﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ } {1,2, 3, 4ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) a σ ( 1 ) < aσ ( 2 ) < a σ ( 3 ) < a σ ( 4
ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
4
∑ aσ i ) ( − a j x j = 1, } i ∈ {1,2, 3, 4
j =1
ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺎﻫﻴﻞ
4
∑ aσ i ) ( − a σ ( j ) x σ ( j ) = 1, } i ∈ {1,2, 3, 4
j =1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) y j = x σ ( jﻭ ) bj = aσ ( jﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
0 b2 − b1 b3 − b1 b4 − b1 y1 1
b − b1 0 b3 − b2 b4 − b2
2 y2 1
b3 − b1 b3 − b2 0 b4 − b3 =
y3 1
b − b1 b4 − b2 b4 − b3 0 y4 1
4
ﳒﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﲢﻮﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
1
L4 ( L + L1 ) :
b4 − b1 4
1
L3 ( L − L2 ) :
b3 − b2 3
1
L2 ( L − L1 ) :
b2 − b1 2
ﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﹸﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
0 b2 − b1 b3 − b1 b4 − b1 y1 1
1 −1 −1
−1 y2 0
1 1 −1 −1 y 3 = 0
2
1 1 1 1 y 4 b −b
4 1
1
= ، y1ﻭﺑﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﳒﺪ . y2 = 0 ﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﳒﺪ
b4 − b1
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ
b3 − b1 b4 − b1 y 3 1
=
1 1 y4 1
b4 −b1
1
= . y4 ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ y 3 = 0ﻭ
b4 − b1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 70
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ kﻭ ℓﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ
ak = max aiﻭ a ℓ = min ai
1≤i ≤4 1≤i ≤4
1
= ، x ℓ = x kﻭ x j = 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } ù . j ∉ {k, ℓ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﻞﹼ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
ak − a ℓ
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ . ABCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Kﻭ Lﻭ Mﻧﻘﺎﻃﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺿﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ] [ BCﻭ ] [CA
ﻭ ] [ ABﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ AMLﺃﻭ BKMﺃﻭ CLK
C ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﲟﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ . ABC
y K ﻟﻨﺮ ﻣﺰ ﻛﺎ ﻟﻌﺎ ﺩ ﺓ ، a = BCﻭ ، b = CAﻭ . c = AB
x ﻭ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ، x = BKﻭ ، z = AMﻭ ﺃ ﺧﲑ ﺍﹰ . y = CL
L
ﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ) A ( XYZﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
A z M B . XYZ
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) = z (b − y ) A ( ABC
A ( AML ) = 12 z (b − y ) sin A
cb
A ( BKM ) = 12 x (c − z )sin B) = x (c − z ) A ( ABC
ac
A (CLK ) = 12 y(a − x )sin C ) = y(a − x ) A ( ABC
ba
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
x (a − x )y(b − y )z (c − z ) 3
= ) A ( AML ) A ( BKM ) A (CLK ) A ( ABC
a 2b 2c 2
ﺃﻭ
A ( AML ) A ( BKM ) A (CLK ) = f ( ax ) f ( yb ) f ( cz ) A 3
) ( ABC
= ، tﻭﻣﻨﻪ 1
2 ﻋﻨﺪ 1
4 ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) . f ( t ) = t ( 1 − tﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ
3
1
≤ ) A ( AML ) A ( BKM ) A (CLK ) A ( ABC
4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ
ù ) min ( A ( AML ), A ( BKM ), A (CLK )) ≤ 14 A ( ABC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ
. BADﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ABCDﻓﻴﻪ ، AB = aﻭ ، AD = 1ﻭ = θ
ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABDﺣﺎ ﺩﺓ .ﺃ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ Aﺃ ﻭ Bﺃﻭ C
ﺃﻭ Dﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﺗﻐﻄﹼﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
a ≤ cos θ + 3 sin θ
ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ DAﻭ DBﻭ DC
ﻭ DDﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ Aﺃ ﻭ Bﺃ ﻭ Cﺃ ﻭ Dﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﺗﻐﻄﹼﻲ
ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻏﻄﹼﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ DAﻭ DBﻭ DDﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABD
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABDﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Rﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ DAﻭ DBﻭ DDﺗﻐﻄﹼﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABDﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Oﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ DAﺃﻭ DB
ﺃﻭ ، DDﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞﹼ ﻣﻦ ، 1ﺃﻱ . R ≤ 1
ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . R ≤ 1ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ D ′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ] [BD
D ﻭ ] [DAﻭ ] [BAﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
B′ A′ OAﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
′B = OD ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎ ﻥ ′B = π2
O
ﺍ ﻟﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻲ ﺍ ﻟﺪ ﺍﺋﺮ ﻱ OD ′BA′ﳏﺘﻮ ﻯ ﰲ ﺍ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ
A D′ B
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ] [OBﺫﻱ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ، Rﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ
DB ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ DBﻷﻥﹼ . R ≤ 1
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ OB ′AD ′ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ . DAﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
OA′DB ′ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ . DD
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABDﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻓﺎﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ DAﻭ DB
ﻭ DDﺗﻐﻄﹼﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABD
71
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 72
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﹼﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ DAﻭ DBﻭ DDﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABDﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . R ≤ 1
DB
= 2Rﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ R ≤ 1ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ DB 2 ≤ 4 sin2 θﺃﻭ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
sin θ
D a 2 + 1 − 2a cos θ ≤ 4 sin2 θ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
1
θ ( a − cos θ )2 − 3 sin2 θ ≤ 0
A a B
ﺃﻭ
(a − cos θ − 3 sin θ )(a − cos θ + 3 sin θ ) ≤ 0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABDﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﺴﻘﻂ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
a − cos θ + ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ a − cos θ ≥ 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ 3 sin θ > 0
ù ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . a ≤ cos θ + 3 sin θ
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ
ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 18
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ℝ 3ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﺔ ) B = B ( 0,1ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . 1ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) 16 det ( BA, BC , BDﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
1 1
≤ ) det ( u, v, w
6 8
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ uﻭ vﻭ wﻣﻦ Bﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ u − v ≤ 1ﻭ . u − w ≤ 1
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} K = {( u, v, w ) ∈ B 3 : u − v ≤ 1, u − w ≤ 1
ﻣﻦ ) ، ( ℝ 3ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ
3
1
≤ } sup { 16 det ( u, v, w ) : ( u, v, w ) ∈ K
8
ﻭﻟﻜ ﻦ Kﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺻﺔ ﰲ ) . ( ℝﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ) ( u, v, w ) ֏ 16 det ( u, v, wﺗﺎﺑﻊ
3 3
ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ Kﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
73 ﻋﺎﻡ 1967
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ) ( u 0, v0, w 0ﰲ Kﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
1
6 det ( u0 , v 0 , w 0 ) = sup { 16 det ( u, v, w ) : ( u, v, w ) ∈ K } = Vmax
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ℝ 3ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ
) u0 = ( α, 0, 0ﻭ ) v 0 = ( λ, µ, 0ﻭ ) w 0 = ( x , y, z
ﻣﻊ 0 < αﻭ 0 < µﻭ . 0 < zﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ) ( u 0, v0, w 0ﺇﱃ Kﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
α ≤1
λ + µ2
2
≤1
x 2 + y2 + z 2 ≤1
( λ − α )2 + µ2 ≤1
(x − α)2 + y 2 + z 2 ≤1
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻓﻴﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
Vmax = 16 det ( u0 , v 0 , w 0 , ) = 16 αµz
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) . w1 = ( x , 0, y 2 + z 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( u 0, v 0 , w1
ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . Kﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ 16 det ( u0 , v 0 , w1 ) ≤ Vmaxﺃﻥﹼ y 2 + z 2 ≤ z
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . y = 0ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ) . w 0 = w1 = ( x , 0, z
. v1 = α2 , 1 − α4 , 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( u 0, v1, w 0
( ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ
)
2
ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . Kﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ 16 det ( u0 , v1, w 0 ) ≤ Vmaxﺃﻥﹼ 1 − α4 ≤ µ
2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ،ﺃﻥﹼ
α2 α2
≤ ( λ − α )2 ≤ λ2ﻭ
4 4
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﳒﺪ
α2 α2
≤ ( λ − α )2 + λ 2 +
4 4
= ،λ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ 2 ( λ2 − αλ + α4 ) ≤ 0ﺃﻭ . ( λ − α2 )2 ≤ 0ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
2
α
2
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، µ ≤ 1 − α4ﻭﻛﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ .ﳑﺎ
2
ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . v0 = v1 = ( α2 , 1 − α4 , 0
2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 74
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ . w2 = α2 , 0, 1 − α4ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( u 0, v 0 , w2
( )
2
ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . Kﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ 16 det ( u0 , v 0 , w2 ) ≤ Vmaxﺃﻥﹼ 1 − α4 ≤ z
2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ،ﺃﻥﹼ
α2 α2
≤ (x − α)2 ≤ x2ﻭ
4 4
= ، xﻭﺃﻥﹼ . z = 1 − α4ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﳌﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
α
2
= . w 0 = w2 ( α2 , 0, ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ )
2
1 − α4
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
α α2
= Vmax 1 −
6 4
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
1 3 − 4α + α 3 ) ( 1 − α ) ( 3 − α − α2
= − Vmax =
8 24 24
) ( 1 − α ) ( 1 + 1 − α + 1 − α2 1−α
= ≥
24 24
ﺇﺫﻥ
1 1−α 1
≤ Vmax − ≤
8 24 8
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ،Vmax ≤ 18ﻭﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﲢﺼﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
) u0 = ( 1, 0, 0ﻭ ) v 0 = ( 12 , 23 , 0ﻭ ) w 0 = ( 21 , 0, 23
ù ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ . α = 1
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ kﻭ mﻭ nﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ p = m + k + 1ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ﻣﻦ n + 1ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) . as = s ( s + 1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ a1a2 ⋯anﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) ∏ = (am +1 − ak )( am +2 − ak )⋯(am +n − ak
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . as − ar = (s − r )( s + r + 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
n n n
=∏ ∏ (am + j − ak ) = ∏ ( m − k + j )∏ (m+ pk
) +1 + j
j =1 j =1 j =1
75 ﻋﺎﻡ 1967
ﺇﺫﻥ
!) ( m − k + n )! ( p + n
=∏ ⋅
!) ( m − k !p
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
!) ( m − k + n
= n ! ⋅ C nm+−mk −k
!) ( m − k
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
!) ( p + n 1 +1
= ( n + 1 ) ! ⋅ C pn+ n
!p p
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ p > n + 1ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ pﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ ! ) ، ( n + 1ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ !) ( p − 1ﺇﺫﻥ
gcd ( p, ( n + 1 ) ! ( p − 1 ) ! ) = 1ﻭ ) ) ! ) p | (C np+−1p × ( ( p − 1 ) ! ( n − 1
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ . p | C np+−1pﺇﺫﻥ
∏ = n !( n + 1)! ⋅ Λ
ﻭ Λﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ :
1 n +1
=Λ C ⋅ C nm+−mk −k
p p +n
ù ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ . n ! ( n + 1 ) ! = a1a2 ⋯an
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ﺣﺎ ﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ A0B0C 0ﻭ . A1B1C 1ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ
ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ،ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺑﻪ ، A1B1C 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ A0ﻭ B0ﻭ C 0ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ
] [ BCﻭ ] [CAﻭ ] . [ AB
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﺠﺰ .ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ABCﻭ A1B1C 1ﺃﻥﹼ A = A1ﻭ . B = B1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ CAﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [C 0B0ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ، A1ﻭﺍﶈﺘﻮﺍﺓ
ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (C 0B0ﻭﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ . A0
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﻊ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ CBﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ A0C 0ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ، B1
ﻭﺍﶈﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( A0C 0ﻭﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ . B0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 76
ﺇ ﻥﹼ ) A ( ABC ) = k 2A ( A1B1C 1ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺭ ﻣﺰ ﻧﺎ ) A ( XYZﺇ ﱃ ﻣﺴﺎ ﺣﺔ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
. AABﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
1B1
، XYZﻭﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ kﺇﱃ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ABCﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ABﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ.
A1 ﻟﻴﻜﻦ A′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، CAﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ B ′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
، CBﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ Mﻭ Nﺍﳌﺴﻘﻄﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ
C1 B1 A′ﻭ B ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( ABﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [C 0Aﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Nﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ BC 0
CA
A
M
CB
N
C0
ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، AB = 2MNﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ MNﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ
B A′
B′ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ A′ B ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺤﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، ( ABﻭﻫﺬﺍ
A0 B0
ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ . AB ≤ 2A′ B ′ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) . ( AB ) ( A′ B ′
C ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ C 0
ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ﺧﻂﹼ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ) . ( A′ B ′
ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ :
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ CAﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [C 0B0ﲢﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ، A1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﺱ ، A0ﻭﻧﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ CBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ A0C 0ﲢﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ
، B1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﺱ ، B0ﻭﻧﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ B ′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻦ C 0ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ δﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﳋﻂﹼ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ) . ( A′ B ′ﻓﻴﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ δﻣﻊ CAﰲ A
ﻭﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ CBﰲ . B
ù ﻧﻨﺸﺊ Cﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( AB0ﻭ ) . ( BA0
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ) ( a1, …, a 8ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ .ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
ﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﻤﻮ ﻋﺔ
ﺍ ﳌﻘﺎ ﺩ ﻳﺮ (cn )n ≥1ﺑﺎ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ . cn = a1n + a2n + ⋯ + a 8nﻓﺈ ﺫ ﺍ ﻋﻠﻤ
} Z = { n ∈ ℕ∗ : cn = 0ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻌﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ.
77 ﻋﺎﻡ 1967
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﻘﻒ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﻞ .ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
} V = { ak : 1 ≤ k ≤ 8
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ vﻣﻦ } V \{ 0ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} J v+ = { k ∈ {1, …, 8 } : ak = vﻭ } J v− = { k ∈ {1, …, 8 } : ak = −v
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﻀﻊ ) λv+ = card (J v+ﻭ ) . λv− = card (J v−ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
( )∗ ∀n ∈ ℕ, c2n +1 = ∑ ( λv+ − λv− ) v 2n +1
} v ∈V \{ 0
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
H ∅ ≠ } W = { v ∈ V \{ 0 } : λv+ ≠ λv−
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
∀n ∈ ℕ, = c2n +1 ∑ ( λv+ − λv− ) v 2n +1
v ∈W
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ w = max Wﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
c2n +1 v 2n +1
∀n ∈ ℕ,
w 2n +1
) = ( λw+ − λw− ) + ∑ ( λv+ − λv−
} v ∈W \{w w ) (
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
lim
∞→ n
( wc
2n +1
2n +1 )=λ +
w − λw− ≠ 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ n0ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
c2n +1
∀n ≥ n 0 , >0
w 2n +1
∀n ≥ 1, c2nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎﹰ . ∀n ≥ n 0, c2n +1 ≠ 0ﻭﻷﻧﻪ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ≠ 0
ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ∀n ≥ 2n0, cn ≠ 0ﺃﻱ } . Z ⊂ {1, 2, …, 2n 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ
. Hﻭﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ = . Wﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∈ ∀v V \{ 0 } , λv+ = λv−
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∗ ( ،ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀n ∈ ℕ, c2n +1 = 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Zﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ) . Z = ℕ\( 2ℕ
ù ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 8ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 78
ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻣﺖ nﻳﻮﻣﺎﹰ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ mﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺔﹰ .ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻷ ﻭﻝ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺒﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺘﲔ
ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺒﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﺍﻟﻴﻚ ، . ..ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺟﺮﻯ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . nﻓﻜﻢ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺯﻋﺖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ؟ ﻭﻛﻢ ﻳﻮﻣﺎﹰ
ﺩﺍﻣﺖ ؟
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ mkﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮ ﻓﹼﺮﺓ ﺻﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ . kﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ m1 = m
ﻭ . mn = nﰲ ﺍ ﻟﻴﻮ ﻡ kﺟﺮ ﻯ ﺗﻮ ﺯ ﻳﻊ kﻣﻴﺪ ﺍ ﻟﻴﺔﹼ ﺇﺿﺎ ﻓﺔ ﺇ ﱃ ﺳﺒﻊ ﺍ ﳌﻴﺪ ﺍ ﻟﻴﺎ ﺕ ﺍ ﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ
mk − k
، k +ﻓﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﹼﺮﺓ ﺻﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ k + 1ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
7
mk − k 6 6
mk +1 = mk − k + ( 7 )
= mk − k
7 7
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
k k −1 k −1
7 7 7
)(6
mk +1 − )(
6
mk = −k )(
6
; 1≤k <n
ﻭﺑﺎﳉﻤﻊ ﳒﺪ
n −1 n −1 k −1
7 7
)(6
mn − m1 = −∑ k
k =1
)(
6
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
n k −1
7
= m ∑k
k =1
)(
6
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n
n k ′ x n +1 − 1 ′ x n ( ( n + 1 )( x − 1 ) − x ) + 1
∑ kx k −1
= ∑ x = =
k =1 k =0 x − 1 ( x − 1 )2
ﺇﺫﻥ
n k −1
7 ) 7n ( n − 6
= m ∑k
k =1
)(6
= 36 +
6n −1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ gcd ( 6n −1, 7n ) = 1ﻓﺤﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ mﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎﹰ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ 6n−1ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ
. n − 6ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ، 6n −1 > n − 6ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ، n = 6ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢù . m = 36
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ
ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
C
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻫﻲ ، a + 1ﻭ aﻭ a − 1
a −1 a
ﺣﻴﺚ aﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ
A a +1 B
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ BCﻭ ] . [CAﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
= (a − 1 )2 + ( a + 1 )2 − a 2 a2 + 2
cos A =
) 2 ( a − 1 )( a + 1 ) 2 (a 2 − 1
= a 2 + ( a + 1 )2 − ( a − 1 )2 a+4
cos B =
) 2a ( a + 1 ) 2 (a + 1
= a 2 + ( a − 1 )2 − ( a + 1 )2 a−4
cosC =
) 2a ( a − 1 ) 2 (a − 1
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ cosC > −1ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . a ≥ 3
، B < Aﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ AC < BC < ABﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ
<C
π
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ > Cﻷﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . πﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ
3
، B = 2A
، Bﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ = 2C Aﺃﻭ = 2C ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ
. B < Aﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﻷﻥﹼ
2
2 ( 1 + cos Aﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ . Aﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ )
) = ( 2 cos B ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
= 2B
3a 2 a+4 2
a2 − 1
= (
a +1 )
ﻭﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ a + 1ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
3a 2 ( a + 1 ) = ( a − 1 ) ( a + 4 )2
ﺃﻭ ، a 3 − 2a 2 − 4a + 8 = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ . ( a + 2 )(a − 2 )2 = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ
( .A =B ﺣﻼﹰ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻻﹰ ﺇﺫ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) . a ≥ 3ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻓﻴﻪ = 0
79
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 80
2
2 ( 1 + cosC ) = ( 2 cos Aﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
.Cﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ) ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
= 2A
2
3 ( a − 2 ) a 2 + 2
= 2
a −1 a − 1
ﻭﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ a − 1ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
2
) 3 ( a − 2 )( a − 1 )( a + 1 )2 = ( a 2 + 2
ﺃﻭ
2a 4 − 3a 3 − 13a 2 + 3a + 2 = 0
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺣﻞﱟ aﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . 2ﻓﻼ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ aﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 3ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﻬﺎ.
2
2 ( 1 + cosC ) = ( 2 cos Bﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
.Cﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ) ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
= 2B
2
) 3 (a − 2 a+4
a −1
= (
a +1 )
ﻭﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﺬ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
2a 3 − 7a 2 − 17a + 10 = 0
ﻧﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ aﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 3ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 10ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ
(a − 5 ) ( 2a 2 + 3a − 2 ) = 0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، 2a 2 + 3a − 2 = 2 (a 2 − 1 ) + 3a ≥ 3a > 0ﺇﺫﻥ . a = 5
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ، AB = 6ﻭ ، BC = 5
ù ،C = 2Bﻭﻫﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﻭ CA = 4ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﻳﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
. n 2 − 10n − 22
ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ n ≤ 11ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
n 2 − 10n − 22 = ( n + 1 )( n − 11 ) − 11 < 0
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 12
81 ﻋﺎﻡ 1968
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﻫﻲ
m
= n = ( dmdm −1 …d0 )10 ∑ dk 10k
k =0
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
n 2 − 10n − 22 = dm × dm −1 × ⋯ × d 0 ≤ dm 9m < dm 10m ≤ n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ n 2 − 11n − 22 < 0ﻭﻣﻨﻪ n 2 − 11n − 26 < 0ﺃﻭ
( n − 13 )( n + 2 ) < 0
ﺇﺫﻥ . n < 13ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﺟﺪﺍﺀُ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
n 2 − 10n − 22ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻫﻮ ، 12ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 12ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ
ù ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺛﻼ ﺛﺔ ﺃ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ aﻭ bﻭ cﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . a ≠ 0ﻭ ﻧﻌﺮ ﻑ Sﳎﻤﻮ ﻋﺔ ﺍ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ
) ( x1, …, x nﻣﻦ ℝnﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
} ax k2 + bx k + c = x k +1 : k ∈ {1,2, …, n
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺡ . x n +1 = x1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ) card ( Sﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 0ﺃﻭ ، 1ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ
1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌﺎﹰ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ δ = (b − 1 )2 − 4acﺳﺎﻟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺮﺍﹰ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ، f ( x ) = ax 2 + (b − 1 ) x + cﻭﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . δ < 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ،ﻫﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ، aﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. ∀x ∈ ℝ, af ( x ) > 0
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ∅ ≠ Sﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ) ( x1, …, x nﻣﻦ ℝnﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ،
ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ، f ( x k ) = x k +1 − x kﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ {1, …, n }, a ( x k +1 − x k ) > 0
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﳒﺪ a ( x n +1 − x1 ) > 0ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻷﻥﹼ x n +1
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . x1ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ∅ = Sﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 82
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . δ = 0ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ zﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ f ( x ) = a(x − z )2ﺃ ﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﻦ . ℝ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ∅ ≠ Sﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ) ( x1, …, x nﻣﻦ ℝnﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ،
ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ، f ( x k ) = x k +1 − x kﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ {1, …, n }, x k +1 − x k = a ( x k − z )2
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﳒﺪ
n
a × ∑ ( x k − z )2 = x n +1 − x1 = 0
k =1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ x k = zﺃﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ kﻣﻦ } . {1, …,nﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
∀k ∈ {1, …, n }, x k = zﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ . Sﺇﺫﻥ card ( S ) = 1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . δ > 0ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ z1ﻭ z 2ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
) f ( x ) = a ( x − z 2 )( x − z1
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﳒﺪ ﰲ Sﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ) ( x1, …, x nﻭ ) ( y1, …, ynﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺎﻥ
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
∀k ∈ {1, …, n }, x k = z1ﻭ ∀k ∈ {1, …, n }, yk = z 2
ù ﺇﺫﻥ card ( S ) > 1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ
ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻫﺬ ﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ
ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻟﻨﺴﻢ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ
ABCDﻭﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ] [ ABﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ.
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ABﻭ ACﻭ ADﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ
ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ،ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] ، [ ABﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
) (1 AB ≥ AC + AD
83 ﻋﺎﻡ 1968
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ BAﻭ BCﻭ BDﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﺃ ﹼﻥ
ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ،ﻭﺑﻨﺎ ﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] ، [ ABﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
)(2 BA ≥ BC + BD
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﲔ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﳒﺪ
)(3 2AB ≥ AC + AD + BC + BD
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ، AC + BC > ABﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABD
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ، AD + BD > ABﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﲔ ﳒﺪ
AC + BC + AD + BD > 2AB
ù ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ) . ( 3ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ . f : ℝ → ℝﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ aﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
1
∀x ∈ ℝ, = ) f (x + a + f ( x ) − ( f ( x ) )2
2
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ fﺩﻭﺭﻱ ،ﻭﺃﻋﻂ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊﹴ ﻏﲑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ f ﳛﻘﹼﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . a = 1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ] ، ∀x ∈ ℝ, f ( x ) ∈ [ 0,1ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ
ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ] . ∀x ∈ ℝ, f ( x ) ∈ [ 12 ,1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
g : ℝ → ℝ, g ( x ) = 2 f ( x ) − 1
ﻓﻨﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ gﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﰲ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . [ 0,1ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ xﻣﻦ ℝﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
= ) g (x + a = 4 f ( x ) − 4 ( f ( x ) )2 1 − ( g ( x ) )2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ ، ℝﻳﻜﻦ
= ) g ( x + 2a = 1 − ( g ( x + a ) )2 ) 1 − (1 − g 2 ( x )) = g ( x
ﻷﻥ . g ( x ) ≥ 0ﺇﺫﻥ gﻫﻮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ،ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 2aﺩﻭﺭﺍﹰ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ fﻫﻮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
ﺗﺎﺑﻊ -2a ﺩﻭﺭﻱ.
ﻭﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ) ) f ( x ) = 12 ( 1 + cos ( π2 xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻣﻊ
ù .a = 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 84
ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺍﻤﻮﻉ
n + 2k
= Sn ∑ k +1
k ≥0 2
ﺇﺫ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ x ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، xﺃﻱ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . x
ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻲ
∀x ∈ ℝ, x + x + 12 = 2x
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ x ֏ x + x + 21 − 2x ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 1ﺩﻭﺭﺍﹰ .ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻟﲔ [ [ 0, 21ﻭ [. [ 21 ,1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻷﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
n < 2kﻳﻜﻮﻥ . n2+k +21 = 0ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
k
n 1 n n
= Sn ) ∑ 2k +1 + 2 = ∑ ( 2k − 2k +1
k ≥0 k ≥0
n n
= ∑ 2k − ∑ 2k = n
k ≥0 k ≥1
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻻﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ mﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ، n 4 + m
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ nﰲ ∗ ، ℕﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ m = 4k 4ﻭ kﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
n 4 + 4k 4 = ( n 2 + 2k 2 ) − 4k 2n 2
) = ( n 2 + 2kn + 2k 2 )( n 2 − 2kn + 2k 2
) = ( ( n + k )2 + k 2 )( ( n − k )2 + k 2
↵ ≤1 ↵ ≤1
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﻣﻦ ℕﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ n 4 + 4k 4ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) (a1, a2, …, anﻣﻦ . ℝnﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ f : ℝ → ℝﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
n
) cos ( x + ak
= f x
( )
∑ 2k −1
k =1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ f ( x1 ) = f ( x 2 ) = 0ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ . x1 − x 2 ∈ πℤ
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
n n
e i( x +ak ) e i ak
) f ( x ) = Re ∑ k −1 = Re e i x ∑ k −1 = Re ( e i x ω
k =1 2 k =1 2
n
e i ak
= . ωﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ∑ k −1
k =1 2
n n
e i ak 1 1 1
∑ ω ≥ e i a1 −
k =2 2
k −1 ≥ 1 − ∑
k =2 2
(
k −1 = 1 − 1 − n −1 = n −1 > 0
2 2 )
ﺇﺫﻥ ω ≠ 0ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ϕﻣﻦ [ [ 0, 2πﻭ rﻣﻦ ℝ∗+ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . ω = re− i ϕﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∀x ∈ ℝ, ) f ( x ) = r cos ( x − ϕ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﻫﻲ } ، { ϕ + π2 + πk : k ∈ ℤﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺃ
ﻱ
ù ﺣﻠﹼﲔ x1ﻭ x 2ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . πℤ
85
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 86
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, 3, 4, 5ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ a
ﻛﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ kﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، aﻭ 6 − kﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ
ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
A ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻮ ﻩ ABCDﻓﻴﻪ ، AB = aﻭ ﺃ ﻃﻮ ﺍ ﻝ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ
C
a
D ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [CD
M
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﲔ BCDﻭ ACDﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ
B ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . MB = MA = 23
ﻭﻷﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AMBﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ . 0 < AB < AM + MBﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ
.0 < a < 3
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 0 < a < 3ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ AMBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
3
= AM = MBﻭ AB = a
2
ﺛﹸﻢ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ Mﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ( AMBﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Cﻭ Dﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ
ﺗﺒﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ Mﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ . 12ﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻳﺤﻘﱟﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ .ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ
ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ . 0 < a < 3
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 5
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ H1/aﲢﺎﻛﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ . a1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ABCD
ﻓﻴﻪ ﲬﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ aﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ، 1ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ
، b = 1/aﻭﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 0 < b < 3ﺃﻭ
1
،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺇﺫﻥ .ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ،ﺣﻘﻘﺖ b = 1/aﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ <a
3
ﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ، bﻭﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
0 < b < 3ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﺮ
−1
) ( H1/aﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ . 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ = Ha
ﻓﻴﻪ ﲬﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ aﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ . 1ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ . 13 < a
87 ﻋﺎﻡ 1969
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 2ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ aﻭﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ
A
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1ﻭﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
a a ﺍﳊﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ aﻳﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺃﺱ.
C D
ﻧﺴﻤﻲ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ABCDﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ
M
ﻣﻦ ACﻭ ADﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ aﻭﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
B . 1ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [CD
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ BCDﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . MB = 23
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ACDﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . MA = a 2 − 14ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AMBﺃﻥﹼ
MB − AB < MA < MB + AB
ﺃﻭ
3 1 3
1− < a2 − < 1 +
2 4 2
، 2 − 3 < a < 2 +ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ) 3 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ 3
2 2
(1 ± 3 ) = 2 ( 2 ±
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
3 −1 3 +1
< <a
2 2
A ﺍﳊﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ aﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺃﺱ.
ﻧﺴﻤﻲ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ
a
a
C
M
D ABﻭ CDﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ aﻭﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [CD
B ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ BCDﻭ ACDﻃﺒﻮﻗﺎﻥ .ﻭﻓﻴﻬﻤﺎ
a2
= MB = MA 1−
4
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AMBﺃﻥﹼ ، AB < MB + MAﺃﻱ
a2
a < 2 1−
4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ . a < 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 88
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ 2 < 1+ 2 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k = 2ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ aﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
1+ 3
< 0 <a
2
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ ، k = 1ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻛﺎﻑ ،ﺇﺫ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ، AMBﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻨﺸﺊ
Cﻭ . Dﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ . 0 < a < 1+ 2 3
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 4
.ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k = 2 3 −1
2
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ < a
ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ . H1/a
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 3
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ aﻣﻦ ، ℝ∗+ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ
، 1ﻭﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . a
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، a ≤ 1ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﻪ ، aﺛﹸﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ . 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، a > 1ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﻪ ، 1ﺛﹸﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ
ù ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ . a
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] [ ABﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ Aﻭ . Bﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ D
ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( ABﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﻭ C2ﻭ C 3ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
C1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
C2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ] [CDﻭ ] . [ DA
C 3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ] [CDﻭ ] . [ DB
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﲑ ) ( ABﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ C1ﻭ C2ﻭ . C 3
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﻦ Okﻭ rkﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ، Ckﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } ، {1, 2, 3
ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ Oﻭ rﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Cﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [ ABﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ .ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ .ﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺟﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ AB = cﻭ BC = a
ﻭ ،CA = bﻭﻷﻥﹼ ABCﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﰲ Cﻛﺎﻥ . a 2 + b 2 = c 2
89 ﻋﺎﻡ 1969
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎ ﻣﺪ ﺓ ﻧﻈﺎ ﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪ ﺅ ﻫﺎ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻳﻜﻮ ﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ) A ( −α, 0ﻭ ) B ( β, 0
ﻭ ) C ( γ, 0ﺣﻴﺚ αﻭ βﻭ γﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
ab a2 b2
= γ =βﻭ =αﻭ
c c c
C
C
O2 C2
O1
C1
C 3 O3
A D O B
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C1ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( x1, y1ﻫﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ .O1ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
-ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ( ACﻫﻲ . γx − αy + αγ = 0
-ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ( BCﻫﻲ . γx + βy − βγ = 0
-ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ( ABﻫﻲ . y = 0
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ O1ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ r1ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
γ x1 − αy1 + αγ γ x1 + βy1 − βγ
= r1 = y1 =
α2 + γ 2 β2 + γ2
) ( ACﻭ ) ( BCﻭﻟﻜﻦ O1ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ Dﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ γ x1 − αy1 + αγﺗﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ αγﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ،ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ γ x1 + βy1 − βγ
ﺗﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ −βγﻓﻬﻮ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ . y1 > 0ﺇﺫﻥ
γx1 − αy1 + αγ βγ − γx1 − βy1
= r1 = y1 =
b a
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
( α + b ) y1 − γx 1 = αγ
( β + a ) y1 + γx 1 = βγ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﲨﻌﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﲔ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ α + β = cﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
γc ab ) ab ( a + b − a 2 + b 2
= y1 = =
a +b +c a + b + a 2 + b2 2ab
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 90
ﺇﺫﻥ
a +b −c
= y1
2
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﰲ ﳒﺪ
1 c b 2 a +b −c b2
= x1
γ
= ( α + b ) y1 − α
ab c
+ b
2
−
c ( )
) (b + c )( a + b − c b2 b + c − a b2 b − a a 2 − b2
= − = − = +
2a c 2 c 2 2c
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
) (a − b )( a + b − c
= x1
2c
= ، r1ﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ O1ﻫﻲ a +b −c
2 ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ C1ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
= ) ( x 1, y1 ) ( (a − b )(2ac+ b − c ), a + 2b − c
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C2ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( x 2, y2ﻫﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ .O2ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ O2ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﺫﻥ . y2 = x 2 = r2ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓﹸ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓﹶ Cﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﳚﺐ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ .ﺃﻱ ، OO2 = r − r2ﻭﻷﻥﹼ
) ( β −2 α , 0ﳘﺎ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎ ،Oﻭ r = c2 = α +2 βﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
2 2
β −α β +α
= (OO2 )2 ( 2
− x2 ) = + x 22 ( 2
− x2 ) = ( r − r2 )2
ﺃﻭ
2 2
β +α β −α
= x 22 (
2
− x2 −
2( )) − x 2 = α ( β − 2x 2)
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ( x 2 + α )2 = αβ + α2 = cα = b 2ﺃﻭ . x 2 = b − α
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ C2ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ r2 = b − α = b − bcﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ O2ﻫﻲ
2
2 2
b b
( x 2 , y2 ) = b − , b −
c c
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ x 2 + α = bﺗﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺑﻌﺪ Aﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ C2ﻣﻊ ) ( ABﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
. AC
91 ﻋﺎﻡ 1969
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C 3ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( x 3, y3ﻫﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ .O3ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ O3ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺇﺫﻥ . y 3 = −x 3 = r3ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓﹸ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓﹶ Cﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﳚﺐ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ .ﺃﻱ ،OO3 = r − r3ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
2 2
β −α β +α
= (OO3 )2 ( 2
− x3 ) = + x 32 ( 2
+ x3 ) = ( r − r3 )2
ﺃﻭ
2 2
β +α β −α
= x 32 ( 2
+ x3 − ( )
2 )
) − x 3 = β ( α + 2x 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ( x 3 − β )2 = αβ + β 2 = c β = a 2ﺃﻭ . x 3 = β − aﻷﻥﹼ x 3 − β
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ C 3ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ r3 = a − β = a − acﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ O3
2
ﻫﻲ
2 a a 2
( x 3 , y 3 ) = − a, a −
c c
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ x 3 − β = aﺗﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺑﻌﺪ Bﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ C 3ﻣﻊ ) ( ABﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
. BC
] . [O3O2ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻟﻨﻌﻴﻦ ) ( x 4 , y 4ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
1 1 a 2 − b 2
= ) x 4 = ( x2 + x 3 b − a + = x2
2 2 c
1 1 a 2 + b 2 a + b − c
= ) y 4 = ( y2 + y 3 a + b − = = y2
2 2 c 2
ﺇﺫﻥ O1ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [O2O3ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (O2O3ﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ C1ﻭ C 2
ﻭ . C 3ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﲑ ) ( ABﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (O2O3ﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﹰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳍﺬﻩ
ù ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، 4ﻭﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ nﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ
) ( n − 3 )( n − 4
ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ
2
ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 92
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ A0ﻭ A1ﻭ A2
ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﳏﺪﺏ ﳛﻮﻱ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ.
A2
S2 ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﰲ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ،ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ
A1
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﻲ ) Bk ( x k , ykﻭ kﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ } . {1, 2, …,nﻟﻨﻀﻊ
S3
S1 } ξ = min { x k ,1 ≤ k ≤ n
ξ A0 ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
R } card ( {k ∈ {1, …, n } : xk = ξ } ) ∈ {1, 2
ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ξﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {k ∈ {1, …, n } : xk = ξﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ
ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻪ . x = ξﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ:
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } . {k ∈ {1, …, n } : xk = ξ } = {k1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ( Bk )k ≠k1ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ . x > ξﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k ≠ k1ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ mkﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
yk − yk1
= mk
xk − x k1
ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ mr = ms = mﺗﻌﲏ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bk1
ﻭ Brﻭ Bsﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍ ﻟﺬ ﻱ ﻣﻌﺎ ﺩ ﻟﺘﻪ ) y − yk1 = m ( x − x k1ﻭ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﻳﺨﺎ ﻟﻒ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻠﲔ k0ﻭ k1ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
} mk0 = min {mk , k ≠ k1ﻭ } mk2 = max {mk , k ≠ k1
ﻭﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ A0 = Bk0ﻭ A1 = Bk1ﻭ . A2 = Bk2
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } . {k ∈ {1, …, n } : xk = ξ } = {k1, k2ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . yk1 < yk2
ﺇﺫ ﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ } ( Bk )k ∉{k1,k2ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ ﻱ . x > ξﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻌﺮ ﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ
yk − yk1
= . mk } k ≠ {k1, k2ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ mkﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ :
xk − x k1
ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﳒﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ k0ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
}} mk0 = min {mk , k ∉ {k1, k2
. A2 = Bk 2
ﻭﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ A0 = Bk0ﻭ A1 = Bk1ﻭ
93 ﻋﺎﻡ 1969
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Sﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . n − 3ﻭﻫﻲ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ Rﻫﻲ
ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﳏﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( A1A0ﻭ ) . ( A1A2ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ∅ = ) R ∩ ( A1A2ﻭ ∅ = ) R ∩ ( A0A1
ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ) [ A0A2 ]\{ A0 , A2 } = R ∩ ( A0A2
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ S1ﻭ S 2ﻭ S 3ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ A1A0ﻭ ] [ A1A2ﻭ ] [ A0A2ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﻷﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ S1ﻭ S 2ﻭ S 3ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ .ﺇﺫ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ،
ﻓﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ } {B,Cﻣﻦ ، Sﻧﻌﺮﻑ
} ∅ = ℓ {B,C } = min { k : ( BC ) ∩ Sk
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ } Q{B ,Cﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ] [ BCﻭ } S ℓ {B ,Cﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ.
ﻷﻧﻪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ∅ = ) . S ℓ {B ,C } ∩ ( BC
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻤﻞ } S ℓ {B ,Cﻻ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ] . [ BCﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
} ℓ {B,Cﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﺃﻭ 2ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ) . ( 1ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ } ℓ {B,Cﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 3ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
) ، ( 2ﻷﻥﹼ
) ] ( A0A2 ) ∩ [ BC ] = ( A0A2 ) ∩ ( R ∩ [ BC
] = ( ( A0A2 ) ∩ R ) ∩ [ BC
] = [ A0A2 ] ∩ [ BC
∅ = ) ⊂ S 3 ∩ ( BC
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ } {B,C } ֏ Q{B,Cﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ
(n ) − 3 )( n − 4
ù .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ، Sﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ C n2−3ﺃﻱ
2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 94
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ x1ﻭ x 2ﻭ y1ﻭ y2ﻭ z1ﻭ z 2ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ x1 > 0ﻭ x 2 > 0
ﻭ x1y1 > z12ﻭ ، x 2y2 > z 22ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
8 1 1
≤ 2 2 +
) ( x 1 + x 2 )( y1 + y2 ) − ( z1 + z 2 x1y1 − z1 x 2y2 − z 22
ﻭﺃﻋﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ.
ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ak = x k yk − zk2ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } . k ∈ {1, 2ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ
D = ( x1 + x 2 )( y1 + y2 ) − ( z1 + z 2 )2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳒﺪ ﺑﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ . D = a1 + a1 + x1y2 + x 2y1 − 2z1z 2ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
x1 x x x
= x1y2 + x 2y1 ) ( x 2y2 ) + 2 ( x1y1 ) = 1 ( z 22 + a2 ) + 2 ( z12 + a1
x2 x1 x2 x1
z 2 z 2 x a xa
= x1x 2 2 + 1 + 1 1 + 2 2
x 2 x1 x2 x1
z 2 z1 2 x1a1 x 2a2 2
= x1x 2 − + 2z1z 2 + − + 2 a1a2
x 2 x1 x2 x1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
z 2 z1 2 x1a1 x 2a2 2
D = a1 + a2 + 2 a1a2 + x1x 2 − + −
x 2 x1 x2 x1
z z 2 x a xa
2
= 4 a1a2 + ( a1 − a2 )2 + x1x 2 2 − 1 + 1 1 − 2 2
x 2 x1 x2 x1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳒﺪ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ
( )∗ D ≥ 4 a1a2 > 0
x1a1 x 2a2 z1 z
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ = ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ a1 = a2ﻭ = 2
x2 x1 x1 x2
x1 = x 2ﻭ y1 = y2ﻭ . z1 = z 2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ، a1 + a2 ≥ 2 a1a2ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، a1 = a2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ∗ ( ﺃﻥﹼ ، (a1 + a2 ) D ≥ 8a1a2ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x1 = x 2ﻭ y1 = y2ﻭ . z1 = z 2ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔﹶ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
1 1 8
ù .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ. + ≥ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ :
a1 a2 D
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ABﰲ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ rﻭ r1ﻭ r2ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ABCﻭ AMCﻭ BMCﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ρ
ﻭ ρ1ﻭ ρ2ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ABCﻭ AMCﻭ BMCﻣﻦ
ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﺱ Cﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . r1r2ρ = r ρ1ρ2
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮ ﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABC
C
ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ،ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎﹰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ .Cﻧﺴﻤﻲ X
) ( AB ﻭ Yﻭ Zﻧﻘﺎ ﻁ ﲤﺎ ﺱ ﺍ ﻟﺪ ﺍﺋﺮ ﺓ ﺍ ﻷ ﻭﱃ ﻣﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ
Z r
ﻭ ) ( BCﻭ ) (CAﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﻭﻧﺴﻤﻲ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ X ′ﻭ Y ′ﻭ Z ′
O Y
B
ﻧﻘﺎ ﻁ ﲤﺎ ﺱ ﺍ ﻟﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺓ ﺍ ﻟﺜﺎ ﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( BC
X
A X′
Z′ ﻭ ) (CAﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ρ Y′
O′
، Cﻭﺇﱃ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ AB = c Bﻭ Aﻭ ABCﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ
ﻭ BC = aﻭ ،CA = bﻭﻧﻜﺘﺐ pﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﳏﻴﻄﻪ.
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ AX = AZﻭ BX = BYﻭ CY = CZﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
AX = p − CY − BY = p − a
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ AX ′ = AZ ′ﻭ BX ′ = BY ′ﻭ CY ′ = CZ ′ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
a + BX ′ = b + AX ′ = ( a + BX ′ + b + AX ′ ) = p
2
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ . BX ′ = p − a
′BX ′ = 12 ( π − B
Oﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ O ′BX ′ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ )
p −a BX ′ B
= = tan
ρ O ′X ′ 2
ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ OAXﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
r OX A
= = tan
p −a AX 2
95
ﺎﺕﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴ 96
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
r A B
= tan tan
ρ 2 2
ﳒﺪAMC ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
C r1 A CMA
= tan tan
ρ1 2 2
ﳒﺪBMC ﻭﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
r2 B BMC
r = tan tan
r2
ρ2 2 2
r1 B
A
ρ2 ﺇﺫﻥBMC = π ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
+ CMA
tan CMA = 1
ρ1
BMC
tan
2 2
ρ
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
r1 r2 A B r
⋅ = tan ⋅ tan =
ρ1 ρ2 2 2 ρ
ù .ﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻ
ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞc ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲp ﻧﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ، 1 ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦp ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ
c = ( x n x n −1 ⋯ x 0 )p
x n > 0 ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼD p = { 0,1, …, p − 1 } ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍx k ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
∑ k =0 x k p k ﻭ
n
.c =
Db ( ﻣﻦx k )0≤k ≤n ﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻭﻧﺘﺄ ﻣ. a > b ≥ 2 ﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ﻳb ﻭa ﲔﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﻧﺘﺄ ﻣ
ﻑ ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﻌﺮ. x n −1 > 0 ﻭx n > 0 ﺤﻘﹼﻖﺗ
A = ( x n x n −1 ⋯ x 0 )a , B = ( x n x n −1 ⋯ x 0 )b
A′ = ( x n −1x n −2 ⋯ x 0 )a , B ′ = ( x n −1x n −2 ⋯ x 0 )b
. A′ B < AB ′ ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
97 ﻋﺎﻡ 1970
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ A′ = A − x na nﻭ B ′ = B − x nbnﺇﺫﻥ
) AB ′ − BA′ = A ( B − x nb n ) − B ( A − x na n ) = x n (a n B − b n A
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n n
= a n B − bnA ) ∑ xk (a nbk − a kbn ) = ∑ xka kbk (a n −k − bn −k
k =0 k =0
n
) = x n −1a n −1b n −1 (a − b ) + ∑ x ka kb k (a n −k − b n −k
k =2
n −1 n −1
≥ x n −1a b ) (a − b
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
AB ′ − BA′ ≥ x n x n −1a n −1b n −1 (a − b ) > 0
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ (ak )k ≥0ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . a 0 = 1ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
(bn )n ≥1ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
n
ak −1 1
= bn ∑ 1 − ak ak
k =1
.1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ 0 ≤ bn < 2ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . n
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ cﻣﻦ [ [ 0, 2ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ (ak )k ≥0ﲡﻌﻞ bn > cﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ
ﺩﻟﻴﻞﹴ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ . n = n0
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ bn ≥ 0ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( ak )k ≥0ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ .ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ t
1 1
،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ≤ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ ak −1, akﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ak a k t t
ak
ak − ak −1 dt
ak ak
≤ ∫ t t
ak −1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
n n ak an
a − ak −1 dt dt 2 an 2
bn = ∑ k ≤ ∫∑ = ∫ = − = 2 −
k =1 ak ak k =1 ak −1 t t
a0
t t t 1 an
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ . bn < 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 98
.2ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ak = λ−2kﻣﻊ . 0 < λ < 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
λ − λ n +1
= bn ∑ (1 − λ2 )λk = (1 − λ2 ) 1 − λ
) = ( λ + λ 2 )( 1 − λ n
k =1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 0 ≤ c < 2ﳔﺘﺎﺭ c ′ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . c < c ′ < 2ﻭﻷﻥﹼ λ ֏ λ + λ2ﻫﻮ ﺗﺎﺑ ﻊ
ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℝ +ﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 0ﻋﻨﺪ λ = 0ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 2ﻋﻨﺪ ، λ = 1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ λ0ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ [ ] 0,1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . λ0 + λ02 = c ′ﺛﹸﻢ ﳒﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ n 0
c
.1 − ﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ > λ0n0
c′
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (ak )k ≥0ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، ak = λ0−2kﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ bn > cﺃﻳﹰﺎ
ù ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . n ≥ n 0
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} Sn = {n, n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4, n + 5ﺇ ﱃ ﺟﺰ ﺃ ﻳﻦ Anﻭ Bnﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺟﻪ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Anﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ . Bn
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ .ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ ≠ Anﻭ ∅ ≠ . Bn
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . Snﺇﻥﹼ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
Anﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ، Bnﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﻥ ،ﺇﺫﻥ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ
ﻣﻦ Anﻭﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ . Bnﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ pﺍﻟﻔﺮ ﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ
ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . {1,2, 3, 4, 5ﺇﺫﻥ } . p ∈ { 2, 3, 5
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ I nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . Snﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 3ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ 2 × 3ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﻥ
. card ( I n ∩ ( 3ℕ )) ≤ 1ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﺃﻥﹼ . card ( I n ∩ ( 5ℕ )) ≤ 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﰲ I nﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ 3ﺃﻭ . 5ﺃﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ Snﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻴﺲ
ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ 2ﺃﻭ 3ﺃﻭ . 5ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . n = 1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ n = 1 ،ﻟﻴﺲ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﺍﳉﺰﺃﻳﻦ A1ﺃﻭ B1ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 5؟
ù ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ nﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
99 ﻋﺎﻡ 1970
، BDCﻭﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ
= π
2 ﰲ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) ( ABCﻫﻮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
) ( AB + BC + CA )2 ≤ 6 ( ( AD )2 + ( BD )2 + (CD )2
D ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﱴ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ.
C ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Hﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
A
H ، ABCﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Eﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ
E
B
ﻣﻦ ،Cﺃﻱ ) ، (CHﻣﻊ ) . ( AB
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( DHﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ( ABCﻓﻬﻮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ،
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﳒﺪ ) . ( DH ) ⊥ ( ABﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) . (CE ) ⊥ ( ABﻷﻥﹼ ) (CEﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABC
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) . ( DECﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) . ( DE ) ⊥ ( AB
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ CEBﻭ CDBﻭ EBDﳒﺪ
CE 2 = CB 2 − EB 2 ¤ =
CEB π
2
= CD 2 + DB 2 − EB 2 ¤ =
CDB π
2
= CD 2 + DE 2 ¤
DE= B π
2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ CDEﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﰲ . Dﻓﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CDﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( DBﻭ ) ( DEﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ( DBEﺃﻱ ) ، ( DBA
.CDA
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﳒﺪ ) (CD ) ⊥ ( DAﺃﻭ = π
2
. BDA
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ = π
2
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ADBﻭ BDCﻭ CDAﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰲ Dﳒﺪ
) AB 2 + BC 2 + CA2 = 2 ( DA2 + DB 2 + DC 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) (a + b + c )2 ≤ 3 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2ﻣﻊ
ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . a = b = cﺇﺫﻥ
) ( AB + BC + CA )2 ≤ 6 ( DA2 + DB 2 + DC 2
ù ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ABCﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 100
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ 100ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ
ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ . 70%
.1ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ . Dﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Dﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
ADB
CDAﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 2πﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺟﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒﹼ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ BDCﻭ ﻭ
ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻌﺖ Dﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺏ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Dﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻷﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 2πﻓﺈﺣﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ
ﻭﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﰲ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
.2ﻟﻨﺄ ﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲬﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ .ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ .ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲬﺴﺔ
ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ .ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ .ﻓﻌﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﻭ ﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 3 × 5ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺪ ﺩﻧﺎ ﻛﻞﹼ
ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺣﺎ ﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ) ﻷﻧﻪ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ( .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﲬﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 152 = 7
.3ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ . n ≥ 5ﻫﻨﺎﻙ C n3ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ .ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ C n5
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ .ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ .ﻓﻌﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 7 × C n5ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﻧﺎ
ﻛﻞﹼ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ) C n2−3ﺇﺫ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻤﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ( .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ
7 × C n5
ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ
C n2−3
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
7 × C n5 7
=
C n2−3C n3 10
ù ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 2ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ) (a1, a2, …, anﻣﻦ ، ℝn
ﺍ ﳌﻘﺪ ﺍ ﺭ ) En (a1, a2, …, anﺍ ﻟﺬ ﻱ ﻳﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻱ ﳎﻤﻮ ﻉ nﺣﺪ ﺍﹰ ﻫﻲ ﺟﺪ ﺍ ﺀ ﺍ ﺕ ﺍ ﻟﻀﺮﺏ
) (a1 − a2 )(a1 − a 3 )⋯(a1 − anﻭ ) (a2 − a1 )(a2 − a 3 )⋯(a2 − anﻭ. . .
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ) . (an − a1 )(an − a2 )⋯(an − an −1ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pnﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ
« ∀ (a1, …, an ) ∈ ℝn , » En ( a1, …, an ) ≥ 0
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ Pnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ } . n ∈ { 3, 5
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) A = (a1, a2, …, anﻣﻦ ℝnﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ΩAﺇﱃ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
n
) ΩA ( X ) = ( X − a1 )⋯( X − an ) = ∏ ( X − ak
k =1
ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
= ) En ( A ) = En (a1, …, an ) ∑ ΩA′ (ak
k =1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ ) En (a1, …, an ) = En (aσ(1 ), …, aσ nﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ
( )
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ σﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ } . {1,2, …,nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ) En (a1, …, an
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ . a1 ≤ a2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ an
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ n = 2mﻣﻊ . m ≥ 2ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ) A = ( 0, 0, …, 0, −1ﻣﻦ . ℝnﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ΩΑ = X 2m −1 ( X + 1ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ . En ( A ) = −1ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ P2mﺧﻄﺄ ﺃ ﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ mﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . m ≥ 2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ n = 2m + 1ﻣﻊ . m ≥ 3ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ) A = ( 0, …, 0,1,1,1, 12ﻣﻦ . ℝn
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ΩΑ = X 2m −3 ( X − 1 )3 ( X − 12ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
2m −3 3
1 1 1
= ) En ( A ( )(
2 2
−1 ) =−
2 2m <0
ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ P2m +1ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ mﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . m ≥ 3
101
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 102
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 3ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) A = (a1, a2, a 3ﻣﻦ . ℝ 3ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
(ak )1≤k ≤3ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . a1 ≤ a2 ≤ a 3ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
) E 3 ( A ) = (a1 − a2 )(a1 − a 3 ) + ( a2 − a1 )(a2 − a 3 ) + (a 3 − a1 )(a 3 − a2
) = (a1 − a2 )(a1 − a 3 − a2 + a 3 ) + (a 3 − a1 )( a 3 − a2
= (a1 − a2 )2 + (a 3 − a1 )( a 3 − a2 ) ≥ 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ P3ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 5ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) A = (a1, a2, a 3, a 4 , a5ﻣﻦ . ℝ 5ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ (ak )1≤k ≤5ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . a1 ≤ a2 ≤ a 3 ≤ a 4 ≤ a5ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
E 5 ( A ) = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4 + T5
ﻣﻊ
) T1 = ( a2 − a1 )(a 3 − a1 )(a 4 − a1 )( a5 − a1
) T2 = − ( a2 − a1 )( a 3 − a2 )( a4 − a2 )( a5 − a2
) T3 = (a 3 − a1 )(a 3 − a2 )( a 4 − a 3 )( a5 − a 3
) T4 = − (a 4 − a1 )( a 4 − a2 )( a 4 − a 3 )( a5 − a4
) T5 = (a 5 − a1 )(a 5 − a2 )( a 5 − a 3 )(a 5 − a 4
ﺇﺫ ﺭﺗﺒﻨﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ.
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻷﻥﹼ ak − a1 ≥ ak − a2 ≥ 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } { 3, 4, 5ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ( a 3 − a1 )( a 4 − a1 )( a 5 − a1 ) ≥ (a 3 − a2 )( a 4 − a2 )( a 5 − a2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ .T1 + T2 ≥ 0
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ a5 − ak ≥ a 4 − ak ≥ 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } {1, 2, 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ( a 5 − a1 )( a5 − a2 )( a 5 − a 3 ) ≥ ( a 4 − a1 )( a 4 − a2 )( a 4 − a 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ .T4 + T5 ≥ 0
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ T3ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . E 5 ( A ) ≥ 0
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ P5ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
103 ﻋﺎﻡ 1971
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ P1ﳎﺴﻤﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ . ( Ak )1≤k ≤9ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Piﺻﻮﺭﺓ P1
ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻪ . A1Aiﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ( Pi )1≤i ≤9
ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ h = HA1,2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ A1ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ . 2ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﺴﻢ ) .Q = h ( P1
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(1 ∀i ∈ {1, …, 9 }, Pi ⊂ Q
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ، Piﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ، Piﺗﻮﺟﺪ M 1ﻣﻦ P1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
A1M = A1Ai + A1M1
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ N 1ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ M 1Aiﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 A1M = A1Ai + A1M 1 = 2A1N 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ M 1ﻭ Aiﺇﱃ P1ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ P1ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ N 1ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
. P1ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( 2ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) ، M = h ( N 1ﺇﺫﻥ . M ∈ h ( P1 ) = Qﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ
ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Piﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ .Q
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺴﻤﺎﺕ ( Pi )1≤i ≤9ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﳘﺎ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
9
vol ( = ∪ Pi
1≤i ≤9
) ) ∑ vol ( Pi ) = 9 vol ( P1
i =1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ) ( 1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، ∪ P ⊂ Qﺇﺫﻥ
1≤i ≤9
vol ( )
) ∪ P ≤ vol (Q
1≤i ≤9
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، 9 vol ( P1 ) ≤ vol (Qﻭﻟﻜﻦ Q ﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ P1ﻭﻓﻖ ﲢﺎﻙ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ 2ﺇﺫﻥ
) ، vol (Q ) = 23 vol ( P1ﻭﻧﺼﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
) 9 vol ( P1 ) ≤ 8 vol ( P1
ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻼ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺴﻤﺎﺕ . ( Pi )1≤i ≤9
ù ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲦﺎﱐ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 104
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، 2n − 3ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ
ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ.
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ mﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ r ﳚﻌﻞ 2r − 1ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . m
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ϕ : { 0,1, …, m } → ℤ /m ℤ : k ֏ 2k mod m
ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ k1ﻭ k2ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
0 ≤ k1 < k2 ≤ m
ﻭ
2k1 = 2k2 mod m
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ gcd ( 2, m ) = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ، 2k2 −k1 = 1mod mﻭﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ
. r = k2 − k1
ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺘﻨﺎ ﻭﻟﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( nr )r ≥1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، r ≥ 1ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
∀k ∈ {1, 2, …, r }, gcd ( 2nr +1 − 3, 2nk − 3 ) = 1
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ n1 = 3ﻭ . n2 = 4
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) ( n1, n2 , …, nrﻭﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ gcd ( 2n j − 3,2ni − 3 ) = 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ i < j ≤ rﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
r
) m = ∏ ( 2n j − 3
j =1
ﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ nr +1ﳚﻌﻞ 2nr +1 − 1ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ
. mﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 2nr +1 − 3ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ mﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∀k ∈ {1, 2, …, r }, gcd ( 2nr +1 − 3, 2nk − 3 ) = 1
}{ 2nr − 3 : r ≥ 1 ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( nr )r ≥1ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ .ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ù ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ.
105 ﻋﺎﻡ 1971
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Xﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺇﱃ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ ABﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ Yﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ BCﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ Zﺩﺍﺧﻞ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [CDﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ Tﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [ AD
.1ﺃ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ DAB + BCD ≠ CDA + ABCﻓﺈ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﳋﻂ ﺍ ﳌﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍ ﳌﻐﻠﻖ
XYZTXﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ.
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ DAB + BCD = CDA + ABCﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ
ﺍ ﳋﻄﻮ ﻁ ﺍ ﳌﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺓ ﺍ ﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ XYZTXﺍ ﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻳﺔ ﺍ ﻟﻄﻮ ﻝ ،ﻭ ﻃﻮ ﻝ ﻛ ﱟﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ
= .α 1
2 2AC sin αﻣﻊ ) ( BAC + CAD + DAB
D
Z
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻣﺼﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻘﻮﻯ،
C
ﻭﻟﻨﻘﺼﻪ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ BDﻭ ] ، [ ACﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺒﺴﻄﻪ
T Y ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞﹴ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﹴ .ﳓﺼﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ
A X B ABDB ′A′Cﺍﳌﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
A′
X′
T B′
C Z
D
Y
A X B
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ABCDﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ABDCﻭ BDA′C
ﻭ DB ′A′Cﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﺑﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﻨﻜﺴﺮ XYZTXﺫﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺻﻐﺮﻱ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABDCﺃﻥﹼ Xﻭ Yﻭ Zﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
BDA′Cﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ Yﻭ Zﻭ Tﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
Zﻭ Tﻭ X ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Yﻭ Zﻭ Tﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) . ( XX ′
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 106
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ AX = tABﻣﻊ ، 0 < t < 1ﻛﺎﻥ . A′X ′ = tA′B ′ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
XX ′ = AX ′ − AX = A′X ′ + AA′ − AX
= AA′ + t A′B ′ − AB ( )
2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ f ( t ) = XX ′ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
2 2
)(1 f ( t ) = t 2 V + 2tAA′ ⋅ V + AA′
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ .V = A′ B ′ − AB
ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( XX ′ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻔﲔ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﳛﻮﻱ Aﻭ A′ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ
ﳛﻮﻱ Bﻭ ، B ′ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ، AB = A′ B ′ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ AA′ = BB ′ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻛﻮﻥ
ﻛﻞﹼ ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABB ′A′ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﲔ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ
) ، ( AB ) ( A′ B ′ﻭﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ، AB = A′ B ′ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ . AA′ = BB ′
A′ X′
B′
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . AB = A′ B ′ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﳒﺪ،
T ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ XX ′ = AA′ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ
C Z
D
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Xﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ AB
Y
ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﻨﻜﺴﺮﺓ
A X B XYZTXﺍﻟﱵ ﳉﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻃﻮﻝﹲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮﻱ
. ℓ = AA′ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ACA′ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
ℓ = 2CA sin ) ( 21 ACA′
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . AB ≠ A′ B ′ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، AA′ ≠ BB ′ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ
. BB ′ < AA′ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ t = 1ﳒﺪ
2
BB ′2 = AA′2 + V + 2AA′ ⋅ V < AA′2
2
) f ′ ( tﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . V + 2AA′ ⋅V < 0 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ
] [ 0,1ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ) t ֏ f ( tﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . [ 0,1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻻ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺎﻝ.
107 1971 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ. AB = A′ B ′ ﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ
.ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ،ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ
(AB, A′ B ′) = (AB, BC ) + (BC ,CD ) + (CD, DA′) + (DA′, A′ B ′)
= π − CBA + BCD − π + π − ADC + DAB − π
= BCD + DAB − CBA − ADC
ﻫﻮAB = A′ B ′ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ
(2) BCD + DAB = CBA + ADC
: ﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿ
A′ B′
D
C
A B
ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ACA′ = 2π − ACB − BCD − DCA′
(
= ( π − ACB ) + π − DCA′ − BCD )
= BAC + CBA + A′ DC + CA′ D − BCD
= BAC + CAD + CBA + ADC
− BCD
DAB
= BAC + CAD + DAB
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹼﻢ
BAC + CAD + DAB
ℓ = 2AC sin
2
ù .ﺓﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 108
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، mﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Sﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﻣﻦ Sﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ mﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ Sﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ Aﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
ﻟﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ . ℂﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ℕ mﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
} . {1, 2, …,mﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) C (a, rﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ aﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . r
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻘﺪﻳﺔ ( uk )k ∈ℕ mﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Bﻣﻦ ℕ mﻧﻜﺘﺐ
uB = ∑ ukﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ . u∅ = 0
k ∈B
ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ mﻣﻦ ℕﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pmﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
∗
» ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ( uk )k ∈ℕ mﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) C 0 = C ( 0,1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ :
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ B ֏ uBﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، P ( ℕ mﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ، ℕ mﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ
ϕ
ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﰲ ℂﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ.
) P ( ℕ mﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ Bﻭ B ′ﻣﻦ
« . card ( B ∆B ′ ) > 1 ⇒ uB − uB ′ ≠ 1
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . m = 1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ ، u1 = 1ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ϕﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
u∅ = 0ﻭ . u{1 } = 1
ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺎﻥ ﻭ ﳏﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ .ﺇﺫﻥ P1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . m = 2ﻧﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ u1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎﻩ ﺁﻧﻔﺎﹰ ﻭﻧﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ u2 = aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
C 0ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ .ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ϕﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
u∅ = 0, u{1 } = 1, u{ 2 } = a, u{1,2} = 1 + a
ﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ } { 0,1, a,1 + aﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ a + 1 ≠ 0ﻭ a ≠ 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ } . a ∉ {−1,1
ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ u{1,2} − u∅ ≠ 1ﻭ u{1} − u{2} ≠ 1ﺃﻱ
a + 1 ≠ 1ﻭ . a − 1 ≠ 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
) a ∉ C ( 1,1 ) ∪ C ( −1,1
109 ﻋﺎﻡ 1971
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ) C ( 1,1ﻭ ) C ( −1,1ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ C 0ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ،ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} ( {−1,1 } ∪ C ( −1,1 ) ∪ C ( 1,1 ) ) ∩ C 0 = {1, −1, j, j2, − j, − j2
ﻣﻊ ، j = −1+2 3ﲢﻮﻱ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ،ﻭﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ aﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ C 0ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ
ﻳﺘﺤﻘﱠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺎﻥ ﻭ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ .ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ P2ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ . Pm ⇒ Pm +1ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ( uk )k ∈ℕ mﻣﻦ
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 0ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﻭ .
ﻭﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ um +1 = aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 0ﻟﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻌﺔ ( uk )k ∈ ℕ m +1ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﲔ.
ﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﺎﻥ
} { u B : B ⊂ ℕ mﻭ } {a + u B : B ⊂ ℕ m
ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ ،ﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
} a ∉ { uB − uB ′ : B ⊂ ℕ m , B ′ ⊂ ℕ m
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( uk )k ∈ℕ mﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ،ﺇﺫﻥ uB − uB ′ ∉ C 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
B = B ′ﺃﻭ ، card ( B ∆B ′ ) > 1ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
} a ∉ {uB − uB ′ : B ⊂ ℕ m , B ′ ⊂ ℕ m , card ( B ∆B ′ ) = 1
ﺃﻭ a ∉ E0ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
}} E0 = { εuk : k ∈ ℕ m , ε ∈ {−1,1
ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ a + uB − uB ′ ≠ 1ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﺎﻥ
ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ Bﻭ B ′ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ . ℕ mﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
∉a } ∪ {C ( uB − uB ′,1 ) : B ⊂ ℕ m , B ′ ⊂ ℕ m , B ≠ B ′
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ،ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻪ ،ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ C 0ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
) } E1 = C 0 ∩ ( ∪ {C ( uB − uB ′,1 ) : B ⊂ ℕ m , B ′ ⊂ ℕ m , B ≠ B ′
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ .ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ) . 2 ( 3m − 1
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ aﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ) ، C 0 \( E0 ∪ E1ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ
ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( uk )k ∈ ℕ m +1ﻣﻊ um +1 = aﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﲔ .ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ Pm +1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 110
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ mﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔﹰ ( uk )1≤k ≤mﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
C 0ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﻭ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
Sm = { uB : B ⊂ ℕ m } = Im ϕ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 2mﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ،ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ ϕﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﺑﲔ Smﻭ ) ، P ( ℕ mﻭﺫﻟﻚ
ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ .
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ uﻣﻦ . Smﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ Bﻣﻦ ℕ mﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . u = uBﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ Smﺍﳌﹸﻼﺯﹺﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ uﺑﺄﹼﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} N u = { u ′ ∈ Sm : card ( B ∆ϕ−1 ( u ′ ) ) = 1
ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕB : ℕ m → N u , k ֏ u{k }∆Bﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ،ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞ u ′ﻣﻦ N Bﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ) ، B ∆ϕ−1 ( u ′ﺇﺫﻥ
card ( N u ) = m
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ vﻣﻦ Smﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ . uﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ) . B ′ = ϕ−1 ( v
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، v ∉ N uﻛﺎﻥ card ( B ∆B ′ ) > 1ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
u − v = uB − uB ′ ≠ 1
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، v ∈ N uﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ kﻣﻦ ℕ mﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، ϕB ( k ) = vﺃﻱ
} . B ′ = B ∆ {kﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
. u − v = uB − uB ′ = uk = 1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، { v ∈ Sm : u − v = 1} = N uﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∀u ∈ S m , card ( { v ∈ Sm : u − v = 1 } ) = m
ù ﻭﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Smﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ A = (aij )1≤i, j ≤nﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 0
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ aij = 0ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ iﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ
n2
. jﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . nﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
2
111 ﻋﺎﻡ 1971
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( i, jﻣﻦ {1, …,n }2ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ
n n
= Cj = Liﻭ ∑ akj ∑ aik
k =1 k =1
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ) ، x = min ( L1, L2, …, Ln ,C 1,C 2, …,C nﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ i0ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
، x = Li0ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ، Aﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ
Aﻭﺃﻋﻤﺪﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ . A
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، x ≥ n2ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، ∑ i =1 Liﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ
n
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ nxﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n2
2
∀j ∈ J , ai0 jﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، x < n2ﻧﻌﺮﻑ } ، J = { j : ai0 j > 0ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ≥ 1
n
≤ ) card ( J ∑ j ∈J ai j 0
< = Li0 = x
2
< .y n
2 ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ، y = card (Jﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∑ (C j + Li 0
) ) ≥ n card ( {1, …, n }\J ) = n ( n − y
j ∉J
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∑C j ) ≥ n ( n − y ) − x ( n − y ) = (n − x ) ( n − y
j ∉J
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
∑C j ≥ x card (J ) = xy
j ∈J
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
n
∑( i, j )aij = ∑ j =1C j ) ≥ xy + (n − x ) ( n − y
≥ n 2 − ( x + y ) n + 2xy
n 2 n 2 − 2 ( x + y ) n + 4xy
≥ +
2 2
2
n ) ( n − 2x ) ( n − 2y n2
≥ + >
2 2 2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n2ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
2
ù
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 112
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) A = (aijﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
1 + ( −1 )i + j
= aij
2
ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n2
∑ aij =
2
1≤i, j ≤n
ﻓﺎﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Sﻣﺆ ﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . {10,11, …, 99
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ Sﲢﻮﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ ﳍﻤﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Sﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ } . {10,11, …, 99ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . card ( S ) = 10ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ Sﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ، P ( Sﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
= ) ϕ : P ( S ) → ℕ, ϕ ( B ∑b
b ∈S
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺡ . ∑ b = 0ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
∅∈ b
99
∀B ⊂ S , ≤ ) 0 ≤ ϕ (B ∑ k = 945
k = 90
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ϕﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, 945ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ 946ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
، card ( P ( S ) ) = 210 = 1024ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ϕﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ .ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ Sﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﺎﻥ
ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ) ، ϕ ( A ) = ϕ ( Bﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ A′ = A\B
ﻭ B ′ = B \Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ Sﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
∑ a = ∑′ b
a ∈A′ b ∈B
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺻﻔﺮﺍﹰ ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ = ، A′ = B ′
ù ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ . A = Bﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . n > 4ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺇﱃ nﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ.
ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ،ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺆ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ
ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ ،ﻭﺑﲔ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ
ﺑﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻴﻪ.
113
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 114
N
D ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻬﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ . ABCD ﳝﻜﻦ
A
M ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ .ﻧﺒﺪﺃ
ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ،ﻭﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ C K
O
K
L ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ ABﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
B OKBﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ BCﰲ ، Lﻭﻗﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
OLCﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ DCﰲ ، Mﻭﻗﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ OMDﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ AD
ﰲ ، Nﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍ ﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ OKBLﻭ OLCMﻭ OMDNﻭ ONAKﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺎ ﻋﻲ
ABCDﺇﱃ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ONAKﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
= π −D
MON LOMﻭ = π − C = A KOLﻭ = π −B
ﺇﺫﻥ
= 2π − ( π − B
NOK − (π − D
)−A )
+D
=B = π −A
−A
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ONAKﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺡ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ،ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ O
ﻭ Kﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ، (OK ) ( BCﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Oﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ABCDﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ Oﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) d1 = ( BCﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ d1ﻭﳝﺮ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Aﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ Kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AB
) (ON ) ( DC ،ONAﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ
OKAﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ = C =B ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻷﻥﹼ
ﻓﺤﺘﻰ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻗﻮ ﻉ Nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ ADﳚﺐ ﺃ ﻥ ﳔﺘﺎ ﺭ Oﺑﲔ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ
) d3 = (CDﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d4ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ d3ﻭﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . A
.D
DMOﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،OMDNﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻓﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻓﺤﺘﻰ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [CDﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ Oﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ d5
ﻧﻈﲑ ) ( ADﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . (CDﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d6ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ d5ﻭﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .C
115 ﻋﺎﻡ 1972
OLBﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،OKBLﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻓﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
. Bﻓﺤﺘﻰ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ Lﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ BCﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ Oﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ
d7ﻧﻈﲑ ) ( ABﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( BCﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d8ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ d7ﻭﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
.C
d5
d2
D d6
N M
A
d1
O
C
d7
K L
d3
B d4
d8
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﰲ ﺟﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ،Cﻟﺘﻘﻊ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﺑﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Cﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ،ﻭﻗﻌﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ
ù ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ Oﰲ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ nﻭ ، mﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ! ) ( 2m ) ! ( 2nﺩﻭﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ! ) . m ! n ! ( n + m
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ ℕ2ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
! ) ( 2n ) ! ( 2m
= An,m
!) n !m !( n + m
ﻭﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ . ( An,m )( n,m )∈ℕ2ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) 2 ( 2m + 1 ) 2 ( 2n + 1
= An,m +1 = An +1,mﻭ An ,m A
n +m +1 n + m + 1 n,m
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
= An +1,m + An,m +1 ( 2 n2n++m1
( )
+
) 2 ( 2m + 1
n +m )
An ,m = 4An ,m
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 116
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
) (1 ∀ ( n, m ) ∈ ℕ 2 , An +1,m = 4An,m − An,m +1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ℕﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ » . « ∀m ∈ ℕ, An,m ∈ ℕ
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ P0ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ
! ) ( 2m
= A0,m = C 2mm ∈ ℕ
( m ! )2
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ ، Pn ⇒ Pn +1ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ An,mﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ.
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ Pnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . nﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔù .
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ
( x12 − x 3x 5 )( x 22 − x 3x 5 ) ≤ 0
( x 22 − x 4x1 )( x 32 − x 4x1 ) ≤ 0
( x 32 − x 5x 2 )( x 42 − x 5x 2 ) ≤ 0
( x 42 − x1x 3 )( x 52 − x1x 3 ) ≤ 0
( x 52 − x 2x 4 )( x12 − x 2x 4 ) ≤ 0
ﻟﻨﻀﻊ x i = x i −5ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 6 ≤ i ≤ 10ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Sﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
5
= S ) ∑ ( xi2 − xi +2xi +4 )( xi2+1 − xi +2xi +4
i =1
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ . S ≤ 0ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
5
= S ) ∑ ( xi2xi2+1 − xi2x i +2x i +4 − xi2+1x i +2x i +4 + x i2+2x i2+4
i =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
5 5 5 5
2S = 2∑ x i2x i2+1 − 2∑ x i2x i +2x i + 4 − 2∑ x i2+1x i +2x i + 4 + 2∑ x i2+2x i2+ 4
i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
5 5 5 5
= ∑ xi2+2xi2+4 ﻭ ∑ xi2xi2+2 = ∑ xi2x i2+1 ∑ x i2+4xi2
i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1
117 ﻋﺎﻡ 1972
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
5 5 5 5
= ∑ xi2+2xi2+4 ﻭ ∑ xi2+3xi2 = ∑ xi2+1xi +2xi +4 ∑ xi2xi +1x i +3
i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1
ﺇﺫﻥ
5 5
= 2S ( ∑ x i2 x i2+ 4 − 2x i +2x i + 4 + x i2+2 ) ) + ∑ x i2 ( x i2+1 − 2x i +1x i + 3 + x i2+ 3
i =1 i =1
ﺃﻭ
5 5
= 2S ∑ x i2 ( xi +2 − xi +4 )2 + ∑ xi2 ( xi +1 − xi +3 )2
i =1 i =1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ S ≤ 0ﺃﻥﹼ ∀i ∈ {1, …, 5 }, x i = x i +2ﺃﻱ
x1 = x 2 = x 3 = x 4 = x 5
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ù ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﲔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﲔ f : ℝ → ℝﻭ . g : ℝ → ℝﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ℝ2ﻳﻜﻦ ) . f ( x + y ) + f ( x − y ) = 2 f ( x ) g ( y
fﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ﻭﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ ℝﻳﻜﻦ . f ( x ) ≤ 1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ g ( x ) ≤ 1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ . ℝ
ﺳﻨﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﹼﲔ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ b ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . f (b ) ≠ 0ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ yﻣﻦ ℝﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
( un )n ∈ℕﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ . un = f (b + ny ) + f (b − ny ) :ﻓﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ
) un +1 + un −1 = f (b + ( n + 1 ) y ) + f (b − ( n + 1 ) y
) + f (b − ( n − 1 ) y ) + f (b + ( n − 1 ) y
) = f (b + ny + y ) + f (b + ny − y
) + f (b − ny + y ) + f (b − ny − y
) = 2 f (b + ny ) g ( y ) + 2 f (b − ny ) g ( y ) = 2un g ( y
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 118
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀n ∈ ℕ, un +1 + un −1 = 2λun
ﻣﻊ ) λ = g ( yﻭ ) u0 = 2 f (bﻭ ) . u1 = 2λ f (b
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ، g ( y ) > 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﻥﹼ
n n
(
) un = f (b ) ( λ + λ2 − 1 ) + ( λ − λ 2 − 1 )
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ λ > 1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ λ + λ2 − 1 > 1ﻭ ، 0 < λ − λ2 − 1 < 1ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ λ < −1ﻓﻠﺪﻳﻨﺎ λ − λ 2 − 1 < −1ﻭ . −1 < λ + λ2 − 1 < 0ﺇﺫﻥ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
) un ∼ f (b ) ( λ + λ 2 − 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ lim un = +∞ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﳏﺪﻭﺩﺍﹰ.
∞→ n
.2ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ .ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ . m = sup ℝ f ( x ) > 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
) f (x + y ) + f (x − y
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℝ 2, = ) f (x ) g (y ≤m
2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ xﳒﺪ
∀y ∈ ℝ, m g (y ) ≤ m
. ∀y ∈ ℝ,ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﺃﻭ g ( y ) ≤ 1
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﹼﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﳏﺪﻭﺩﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓù .
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ،ﳛﻮﻱ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ A0A1A2A3ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﳛﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ Pkﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ
ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ، Akﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﹰ ﻧﺎﻇﻤﺎﹰ nﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮﹴ ﺗﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
( )∗ } Pk = { M : A0M ⋅ n = dk
ﻣﻊ . d0 = 0 < d1 < d2 < d3
119 ﻋﺎﻡ 1972
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ .ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ، A0B1B2B3ﻭﻧﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ، nﻭﻋﻦ ﲢﺎﻙ HA0 ,rﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ A0ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ، rﳚﻌﻞ ) Ak = HA0 ,r ( Bkﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Pkﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ∗ ( .
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ℝ 3ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ A0B1B2B3ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
1 0 0 1
1
B1 = 0 ﻭ B2 = 1 ﻭ B3 = 0 ﻭ A0 = − 1
3 0 0
1 1
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ rﻭﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ nﻟﺘﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
A0Ak ⋅ n = dk , 1 ≤ k ≤ 3
ﺃﻭ
rA0Bk ⋅ n = dk , 1≤k ≤3
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ . rn = [ α, β, γ ]Tﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
4α + β + γ = 3d1
α + 4β + γ = 3d2
α + β + 4 γ = 3d 3
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
d1 + d2 + d 3
α = d1 −
6
d + d2 + d 3
β = d2 − 1
6
d1 + d2 + d 3
γ = d3 −
6
1
= ،n = rﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ [ α, β, γ ]T ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ α 2 + β 2 + γ 2
r
ù ﻭﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 120
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ
( Pk )1≤k ≤2n +1 ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔﹶ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺓ (OPk )1≤k ≤2n +1 ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
ﺗﻘﻊ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .Oﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
OP1 + OP2 + ⋯ + OP2n +1 ≥ 1
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 0ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ.
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n − 1ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﺃﺷﻌﺔﹶ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ (OPk )1≤k ≤2n +1 ﺗﻘﻊ ﲨﻴﻌﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .Oﻧﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ℂﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻦ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﻴﺪ
ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ( Pk )1≤k ≤2n +1ﻟﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻳﺔ (e i θk )1≤k ≤2n +1ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ
(OPk )1≤k ≤2n +1ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ . 0 ≤ θ1 ≤ θ2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ θ2n +1 ≤ π :
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { re i θ : θ1 ≤ θ ≤ θ2n +1ﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﳏﺪﺑﺔ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ( Pk )2≤k ≤2nﻓﻬﻲ
2n
1
r iϕ
2n e = OGﺑﻌﺪ ﺩ ﻋﻘﺪﻱ ∑ ﲢﻮﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻠﻬﺎ ، Gﺇﺫﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ OPk
2n k =2
ﻣﻊ rﻣﻦ ℝ +ﻭ ϕﻣﻦ ] . [ θ1, θ2n +1ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ re i ϕﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ . ∑ k =2OPk
2n
ﺃﻱ . r ≥ 1ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ≥ 1
2n
∑k =2OPk
2n +1
Z = e i θ1 + e i θ2n +1 + re i ϕﺃﻭ Zﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ .V = ∑ k =1 OPkﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
Z = exp i ( θ +2θ )( 2 cos ( θ
1 2n +1 2n +1
2
− θ1
))) ) + r exp ( i (ϕ − θ +2θ
1 2n +1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
Z = 2 cos θ + re i ψ
= θﻭ ] . ψ = ϕ − θ2n +21 +θ1 ∈ [ − π2 , π2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ θ2n +1 −θ1
2 ﻣﻊ ] ∈ [ 0, π2
2
Z = r 2 + 4 cos2 θ + 4r cos θ cos ψ ≥ r 2 ≥ 1
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ V ≥ 1ﻭﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n
121
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 122
ﺃﹶﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﲑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ
) ( ABﻭ ) (CD Aﻭ Bﻣﻨﻬﺎ ،ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻳﺎﻥ Cﻭ Dﲡﻌﻼﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ
ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ؟
ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺭﺅ ﻭﺱ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊﹴ ﺳﺪ ﺍﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢﹴ ﰲ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍ ﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻊ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ Sﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﲔ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﲔ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻘﻄﺮﹴ
ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﻳﻦ.
A
D
B
C
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ Aﻭ Bﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺭﺃﺳﲔ Cﻭ Dﳚﻌﻼﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ.
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ Aﻭ Bﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﲔ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ Cﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ
Aﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ، Aﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ Dﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﰲ
ﺍﳌﺴﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ، Bﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺻﻒ
ﻗﻄﺮﻳﻪ ،ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﻬﻤﺎ .ﻓﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ Sﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎﹰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ
} S = {a, −a,b, −b, c, −c, a + b, −a − b, a + c, −a − c
ﻣﻊ
ù b = ( − 12 , 0, 2
3
b = ( − 12 ,ﻭ ) 3
2 ,0 aﻭ) ) = ( 1, 0, 0
123 ﻋﺎﻡ 1973
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Dﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ) (a,bﻣﻦ ℝ2ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
x 4 + ax 3 + bx 2 + ax + 1 = 0
ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺣﻼﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ } . δ = inf {a 2 + b 2 : (a,b ) ∈ D
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ xﺣﻼﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
) (E x 4 + ax 3 + bx 2 + ax + 1 = 0
1
ﻛﺎﻥ ، x ≠ 0ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ y = x +ﻣﻦ [ ℝ\]−2,2ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
x
2
)(E′ y + ay + b − 2 = 0
ﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) ( E ′ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ yﻣﻦ [ ℝ\]−2,2ﺣ ﹰ
1
، x +ﺣﻼﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ = ، xﻭ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺬ ﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎ ﺩ ﻟﺔ = y 1
2 (y + ﺑﺎ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) y 2 − 4
x
ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ) . ( Eﺇﺫﻥ
} D = { ( a, b ) ∈ ℝ 2 : ∃y ∈ ( ℝ\]−2,2 [ ), y 2 + ay + b − 2 = 0
1
2 ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺟﺬﺭﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ y 2 + ay + b − 2 = 0ﳘﺎ ) ∆ 21 ( −a +ﻭ ) ∆ ( −a −
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ∆ = a 2 + 8 − 4b ≥ 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∧ ) ( a, b ) ∈ D ⇔ ( ∆ ≥ 0 ( { −a +2 ∆ ∆ −a −
, 2 ) ∅ ≠ [} \ ]−2,2
ﺃﻭ
∧ ) ( a, b ) ∈ D ⇔ ( ∆ ≥ 0 ( ( −a +2 ∆
≥ 2 ) ∨ ( −a −2 ∆ ) ) ≤ −2
ﺃﻭ
∧ ) ( a, b ) ∈ D ⇔ ( a 2 + 8 ≥ 4b ( a 2 + 8 − 4b ≥ 4 − a )
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﻥﹼ
b
a 2 + 8 − 4b ≥ 4 − a ⇔ ( a ≥ 4 ) ∨ a ≥ 1 + ( 2 )
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ( a − 4 )2 ≥ 0ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ) ، a 2 + 8 ≥ 8 ( a − 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ a ≥ 1 + b2
ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ، a 2 + 8 ≥ 4bﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
b
⇔ ( a, b ) ∈ D ( (a 2 + 8 ≥ 4b ) ∧ ( a ≥ 4 ) ) ∨ a ≥ 1 + ( 2 )
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 124
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ ) (a,bﻣﻦ . D
ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ a ≥ 4ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. a 2 + b 2 ≥ 16
ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ b ≤ −2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. a 2 + b 2 ≥ 4
b
ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ a ≥ 1 + > 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2
2
5 4 1 5 4
a 2 + b 2 ≥ 1 + b + b 2 = + + ≥ b
4 5 5 2 5
4
≥ .δ ﺇﺫﻥ
5
2 4
b0 = −ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ = a 0ﻭ
5 5
4
= a 02 + b02 ﻭ ( a 0 , b0 ) ∈ D
5
4
ù = . δﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ. ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
5
ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﺟﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻐﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ .ﳛﻤﻞ
ﺍﳉﻨﺪﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﹰ ﻛﺎﺷﻔﺎﹰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳉﻨﺪﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ
ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﺪﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﻨﺠﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ؟
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، aﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
C2 C ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ . r = 43 aﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳉﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ
ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . Aﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﺍﳉﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ
C′ C1
ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﲔ Cﻭ Dﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﳝﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
B′
) ، C1 = C ( B, rﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Bﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، rﻭﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ
A B
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) C 2 = C (C , rﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Cﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ
، rﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳝﺮ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ B ′
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، C1ﺛﹸﻢ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ C ′ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C 2
ﻓﺎﻟﻄﻮﻝ Lﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﳉﻨﺪﻱ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ΓAB ′C ′ﻟﻪ
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻂﱟ ﻣﻨﻜﺴﺮ ΓAB ′C ′ = [ AB ′ ] ∪ [ B ′C ′ ] :ﻣﻊ B ′ ∈ C1ﻭ .C ′ ∈ C 2
125 ﻋﺎﻡ 1973
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
} L ≥ inf { AB ′ + B ′C ′ : B ′ ∈ C1,C ′ ∈ C 2
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ B ′ﻣﻦ ، C1ﻭ C ′ﻣﻦ ، C 2ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ
C2 C
ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ :
r
C1
B ′C ′ ≥ B ′C − C
′C = B ′C − r
r
C′ C ′′
ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﻘﺖ C ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ C ′′ﻭﻫﻲ
A
B′
B ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ B ′Cﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، C 2ﺇﺫﻥ
} L ≥ inf { AB ′ + B ′C − r : B ′ ∈ C1
ﺃﻭ
} L + r ≥ inf { AB ′ + B ′C : B ′ ∈ C1
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Dﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] ، [ BHﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ، Bﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C1ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ d
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( BHﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Cﻧﻈﲑﺓ Cﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ . d
C d
H C
D
X
B′
A B
C1
ADCﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Cﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ) ( BHﺇﺫﻥ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ADCﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Dﻭ
C ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
،CDCﺇﺫﻥ = π
ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ B ′ﻣﻦ ، C1ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Xﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) ( B ′Cﻣﻊ . d
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AB ′Xﳒﺪ AB ′ + B ′X ≥ AXﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . B ′ = D
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AXCﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ AX + XC ≥ ACﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . X = D
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ AX + XC ≥ AD + DCﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . X = D
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 126
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
AB ′ + B ′C = AB ′ + B ′X + XC
≥ AX + XC ≥ AD + DC
ﺃﻱ
∀B ′ ∈ C1, AB ′ + B ′C ≥ AD + DC = 2AD
ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﻘﺖ B ′ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Bﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
، C1ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [ BHﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ . H
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
L ≥ L0 = 2AD − r
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ :ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ] ΓADE = [ AD ] ∪ [ DEﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Dﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ
ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Bﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Bﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، rﻭﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Eﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ DCﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 2ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Cﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . rﺇﻥﹼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، L0ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳉﻨﺪﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﲤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﻪ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﺍﹰ
ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ L0ﻫﻮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﺪﻱ ﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﻪ.
C
E
D
A B
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ،ﻭﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ،ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ
ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰﻫﺎ Aﻭ Dﻭ Eﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . rﻓﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ΓADEﻫﻮ
ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﺪﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻠﻜﻪ ﻟﻴﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻘﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻪ .ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ù . 2 74− 3 aﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
127 ﻋﺎﻡ 1973
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ aﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ bﻧﻜﺘﺐ fa,bﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻴﲏ
. fa,b : ℝ → ℝ, fa,b ( x ) = ax + bﻭﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Aﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ:
} A = { fa ,b : ( a, b ) ∈ ℝ ∗ × ℝ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ Aﺯﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ fﻭ gﻣﻦ Aﻛﺎﻥ
fﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ . Aﻭﻟﻜﻞﱢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ fa,bﻣﻦ Aﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ f1/a,−b /aﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . Aﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ g
ﺯﻣﺮﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Gﻣﻦ ) ، Aﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﻠﻮﺏ ( .ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻜﻞﹼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ fﻣﻦ Gﻧﻘﻄﺔﹰ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔﹰ ،ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ x f
ﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ . f ( x f ) = x fﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻜﻞﱢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ . G
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) (a,bﻭ ) (c, dﻣﻦ ℝ∗ × ℝﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
fa,b fc,d = fac,ad +b
ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fa,bﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ a ≠ 1ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ . fa,b = id = f1,0
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } ، G = { idﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﺎﻓﻬﺔ.
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ f = fa,bﻣﻦ Gﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ . idﺇﺫﻥ ، a ≠ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
b
= .x0
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻫﻲ
1−a
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ g = fα,βﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ . Gﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ g = idﻛﺎﻥ . g ( x 0 ) = x 0ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
، g ≠ idﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، α ≠ 1ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ
β
= . xg ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ gﻫﻲ
1−α
h = g −1 f −1ﻣﻦ Gﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ g f
h = f 1 ,− β fa1 ,−ab fα, β fa,b
α α
= f 1 ,−a β +b fαa,αb +β = f1, αb +β −a β −b
αa αa αa
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ hﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ αb + β − a β − b = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
β b
= xg = = x0
1−α 1−a
ﺇﺫﻥ . g ( x 0 ) = x 0ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ x 0ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ . Gﻭﻳﺘﻢ
ù ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 128
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ qﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ [ ، ] 0,1ﻭﻧﻌﻄﻰ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ) ، (a1, a2, …, an
ﻣﻊ . n ≥ 2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ) (b1, b2, …,bnﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
.∀i ∈ {1, …, n }, ai < bi
bi +1 1
.∀i ∈ {1, …, n − 1 }, < q <
bi q
1+q
< .b1 + b2 + ⋯ + bn ) ( a + a 2 + ⋯ + an
1−q 1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ k ≤ nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ bkﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
n
= bk ∑ q j −k a j = q k −1a1 + ⋯ + qak −1 + ak + qak +1 + ⋯ + q n −kan
j =1
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔﹲ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ iﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, …, n − 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
bi +1 − qbi = ( 1 − q 2 )( ai +1 + qai +2 + ⋯ + q n −i −1an ) > 0
bi − qbi +1 = ( 1 − q 2 )( q i −1a1 + ⋯ + qai −1 + ai ) > 0
b 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ < ، q < i +1ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .
bi q
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ j ≤ nﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n
∑ q j −k = q j −1 + ⋯ + q + 1 + q + ⋯ + q n − j
k =1
∞ ∞
1 q 1+q
< = ∑qℓ + ∑qℓ +
1−q 1−q
=
1−q
ℓ =0 ℓ =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n n n n
n j −k a < 1 + q
n
∑ bk = ∑ ∑ q j −k
= a j ∑ ∑ q ⋅ ∑ a j
j 1−q
k =1 k =1 j =1 j =1 k =1 j =1
1+q
< 1−q
ù ﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ. ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﻳﻠﻌﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻻﻋﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﻮ ﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ .ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﲔ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻠﻘﹼﻰ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻻﻋﺐﹴ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﺗﻠﻘﹼﺎﻫﺎ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ،ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲨﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﲔ ﺇﱃ
20ﻗﻄﻌﺔﹰ ،ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲨﻌﻬﺎ ﻻﻋﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ 10ﻗﻄﻊﹴ ،ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲨﻌﻬﺎ
ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺇﱃ 9ﻗﻄﻊﹴ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﹼﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﹼﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲨﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ
ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ .ﻓﻤﻦ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﹼﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ؟
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ،ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ،ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﲝﻮﺯﺓ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ 20ﻭ 10ﻭ 9ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ
a1ﻭ a2ﻭ a3ﻣﻊ . a1 < a2 < a3
ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ s = a1 + a2 + a3ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ kﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ،ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
k ⋅ s = 9 + 10 + 20 = 39
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ . s ≥ 1 + 2 + 3 = 6
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ k ⋅ s = 39ﻣﻊ k ≥ 2ﻭ . s ≥ 6ﺇﺫﻥ k = 3ﻭ . s = 13
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮ ﻥ ﳎﻤﻮ ﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ Aﰲ ﺍ ﳌﺮ ﺍ ﺣﻞ ﺍ ﻟﺜﻼ ﺙ ﻳﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻱ 20ﺃﻥﹼ
، 3a3 ≥ 20ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ . a3 ≥ 7
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ axﻭ ayﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻐﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ Bﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ،
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ a3ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ . ax + ay + a3 = 10ﻭﻷﻥﹼ
ax + ay ≥ 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . a3 ≤ 10 − 2 = 8
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، a3 = 7ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، ax + ay = 3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، ax ≠ ayﺃﻱ
} ، {ax , ay } = {a1, a2ﻭﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ . a1 + a2 + a3 = 10ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ،
ﺇﺫﻥ . a3 = 8ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ax + ay = 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ . ax = ay = 1
129
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 130
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ) (a1, a2, a3 ) = ( 1, 4, 8ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 13ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﺃﻥﹼ Bﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ 1ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ Cﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 8ﰲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﲔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﲑ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻷﻧﻪ ﳛﺼﻞ
ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﱂ ﳛﺼﻞ Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 1ﻷﺎ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ، Bﻭﱂ ﳛﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 8ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 4ﰲ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﻧﺼﻴﺐ C ﻧﺼﻴﺐ B A ﻧﺼﻴﺐ
4 1 8 ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ
4 1 8 ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
1 8 4 ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ . ABCﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻨﺠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ABﻧﻘﻄﺔ D
ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ DCﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﻮﻟﲔ ADﻭ ، DBﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﱠﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
≤ sin2 C
⋅ sin B
sin A
2
C
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻧﻘﻄﺔﹰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] ، [ ABﺗﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
( = αﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [0,Cﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ] . [ 0, π
α
) CA,CD
A D B
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ADCﻭ DBCﳒﺪ
CD DB CD AD
=
ﻭ
=
sin B )sin(C − α sin A sin α
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
− α) AD ⋅ DB
sin α sin(C
=
sin B
sin A CD 2
131 ﻋﺎﻡ 1974
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﳒﺪ Dﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ CD 2 = AD ⋅ DBﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﳒﺪ
. sin α sin(C − α) = sin A [0,Cﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
sin B αﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ]
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
] → ℝ, f ( x ) = sin x sin(C
f : [0,C ) − x
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﳒﺪ Dﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ CD 2 = AD ⋅ DBﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ
، f ( α ) = sin Aﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ [0,Cﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
sin B ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ α ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ]
sin Aﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ )] f ([0,Cﻭﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [0,Cﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ . f
sin B
، f ′ ( x ) = sin(Cﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ f
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) − 2x
x 0 C
C
2
) f ′(x ր 0 ց
f (x ) 0 ) sin2 ( C2 0
ﺇﺫﻥ . f ([0,C ]) = 0, sin2 ( C2 ) ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﳒﺪ Dﻋﻠﻰ
. sin Aﻭﻫﻲ ] [ ABﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ CD 2 = AD ⋅ DBﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ≤ sin2 ( C
sin B
2
ù ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
n
= Anﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 5ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ∑ C 22nk ++11 ⋅ 23k ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ
k =0
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ nﻣﻦ . ℕﻧﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ C rsﻫﻮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ !) . s !(rr−! s
n n
= ، 8Anﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) ∑ C 22nk +1 ( 8 ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
2k 2k +1
= Bn ( ∑ C 22nk ++11 )8
k =0 k =0
ﻣﻦ ، ℕﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2n +1
k 2n +1
Bn + = 8An ( ∑ C 2kn +1 8 ) = (1 + )8
k =0
2n +1
k 2n +1
= Bn − 8An ∑ C 2kn +1 ( − ) 8 ) = (1 − 8
k =0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 132
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ،ﳒﺪ
)(1 Bn2 − 8An2 = −72n +1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ −72n +1 ≡ −2 ( 22 ) mod 5 ≡ 3 ( −1 )n mod 5ﺇﺫﻥ
n
} −72n +1 mod 5 ∈ { 2, 3
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ } Q5 = { x 2 mod 5 : x ∈ ℕ } = { 0,1, 4ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ
)(2 ∀m ∈ ℕ, m 2 ≠ −72n +1 mod 5
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 5ﻳﻘﺴﻢ Anﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ Bn2 = −72n +1 mod 5ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
ù 5ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ nﻣﻦ . ℕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) . ( 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ An
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺞ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ . 8 × 8ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ ) ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ( ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . pﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ،ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ
ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، pﻭﺃﻋﻂ ﲨﻴﻊ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ.
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮ ﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ (ak )1≤k ≤pﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﺎ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . ∑ k =1 ak = 64ﻭﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ (ak )1≤k ≤pﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺔ
p
ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
p
≤ 2 + 4 + ⋯ + 2p ∑ ak = 64
k =1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ p ( p + 1 ) ≤ 64ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . p ≤ 7
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . p = 7ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ . (ak )1≤k ≤7ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻣﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
a1 < a2 < ⋯ < a 7
ak
= . bk ﻧﻀﻊ ﺇﺫﻥ − k
2
133 ﻋﺎﻡ 1974
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ
7 7
1
= ∑ bk ∑2 k
ak − 28 = 4
k =1 =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﹼﺮﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ (ak )1≤k ≤7ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
ak +1 − ak
= bk +1 − bk −1 ≥ 0
2
ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
b1 + b2 + ⋯ + b7 = 4 0 ≤ b1 ≤ b2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ b7ﻭ
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ) (b1,b2, …,b7ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
) ( 0, 0, 0, 0,1,1,2 ) ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 4
) ( 0, 0, 0,1,1,1,1 ) ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,1, 3
) ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,2, 2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {a1, a2, …, a7ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
} { 2, 4, 6, 8,10,12, 22
} { 2, 4, 6, 8,10,14, 20
} { 2, 4, 6, 8,10,16,18
} { 2, 4, 6, 8,12,14,18
} { 2, 4, 6,10,12,14,16
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﲑ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ،ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ 22ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ) ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻩ 22 × 1ﺃﻭ
، ( 11 × 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ.
ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ } { 2, 4, 6, 8,10,14,20ﺣﺎﻟﺔﹲ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
1 ×8
3 ×2
5 ×4 5 ×2
2 ×2
2 ×7
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 134
ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ } { 2, 4, 6, 8,10,16,18ﺣﺎﻟﺔﹲ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ: ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ
2 ×8
2 ×5
6 ×3 2 ×3 2 ×2
2 ×4
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ } { 2, 4, 6, 8,12,14,18ﺣﺎﻟﺔﹲ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ:
1 ×8
2 ×6
7 ×2 3 ×6
2 ×3 2 ×2
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ } { 2, 4, 6,10,12,14,16ﺣﺎﻟﺔﹲ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
2 ×8
2 ×5 2 ×3
2 ×6 2 ×2
2 ×7
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺬ ﺍ ﻧﺮ ﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ p = 7ﻫﻲ ﺃ ﻛﱪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍ ﳌﻄﻠﻮ ﺏ ،ﻭ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮ ﻋﺎ ﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ
{ 2, 4, 6, 8,10,16,18 }, } { 2, 4, 6, 8,10,14, 20
{ 2, 4, 6,10,12,14,16 }, } { 2, 4, 6, 8,12,14,18
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
135 ﻋﺎﻡ 1974
ﻋﻴﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
a b c d
+ + +
a +b +d b +c +a c +d +b d +a +c
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ aﻭ bﻭ cﻭ dﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) (a, b, c, dﻣﻦ ( ℝ∗+ )4ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
a b c d
= ) F ( a, b, c, d + + +
a +b +d b +c +a c +d +b d +a +c
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ) I = F ( ( ℝ∗+ )4ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ℝﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ Fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ
ﻭﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ( ℝ∗+ )4ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﳏﺪﺑﺔ ،ﻓﻬﻲ ،ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ.
ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) (a, b, c, dﻣﻦ ( ℝ∗+ )4ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
b b a a
> ﻭ >
b +c +a a +b +c +d a +b +d a +b +c +d
d d c c
> ﻭ >
d +a +c a +b +c +d c +d +b a +b +c +d
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ∀ ( a, b, c, d ) ∈ ( ℝ∗+ )4 , F ( a, b, c, d ) > 1
b
ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ c
d
a ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) (a, b, c, dﻣﻦ . ( ℝ∗+ )4ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ
ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) F (a, b, c, dﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . a ≥ max (b, c, dﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
b b d d
≤ ﻭ ≤
b +c +a b +c +d d +a +c d +b +c
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
b c d b +c +d
+ + ≤ =1
b +c +a c +d +b d +a +c b +c +d
ﺇﺫﻥ
a b c d
= ) F ( a, b, c, d + + +
a +b +d b +c +a c +d +b d +a +c
a
≤ +1 < 2
a +b +d
ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ∀ ( a, b, c, d ) ∈ ( ℝ∗+ )4 , F ( a, b, c, d ) < 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 136
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ xﻣﻦ ℝ∗+ﺃﻥﹼ
2x 2
= ) F ( x , x , 1, 1 +
2x + 1 2 + x
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ lim+ F ( x , x , 1, 1 ) = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ . inf I ≤ 1
x →0
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ℝ∗+ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ xﻣﻦ
2x 2
= ) F ( x , 1, x , 1 +
x + 2 1 + 2x
ﻭﻷ ﹼﻥ lim+ F ( x , 1, x , 1 ) = 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . sup I ≥ 2
x →0
¤ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ :ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﰲ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ [ ، I ⊂ ]1, 2ﻭﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ inf I ≤ 1ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
ù sup I ≥ 2ﳑﺎ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ [ I = ]1, 2ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ Pﺃﻣﺜﺎﻟﻪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ dﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 0ﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
}) Z = { x ∈ ℤ : ( P ( x ) = 1 ) ∨ ( P ( x ) = −1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . card ( Z ) ≤ d + 2
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} Z1 = { x ∈ ℤ : P ( x ) = 1ﻭ } Z−1 = { x ∈ ℤ : P ( x ) = −1
ﻫﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﻤﺎ Z1 ∪ Z−1ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . Zﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) . α = min ( Z
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . α ∈ Z1ﻟﻴﻜﻦ γﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ، Z−1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
( )∗ P (α ) − P ( γ ) = 2
= ) P ( Xﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ] ∈ ℤ [ X
d
∑ k = 0 ak X k
d d
= ) P (α ) − P ( γ ∑ ak ( αk − γ k ) = ( α − γ ) ∑ ak
k =1 k =1
) ( ∑ kj =−11 αk −1−j γ j
ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ∗ ( ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ γ − αﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . γ ∈ { α, α + 1 } ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ
ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ } . Z−1 ⊂ { α + 1, α + 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . card ( Z−1 ) ≤ 2ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ،
ﺃﻥﹼ ، card ( Z1 ) ≤ deg ( P ) = dﺇﺫﻥ . card ( Z ) ≤ d + 2
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . α ∈ Z2ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﹶﺞ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ù . −P
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺘﲔ ( x k )1≤k ≤nﻭ ( yk )1≤k ≤nﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ .ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
x1 ≥ x 2 ≥ ⋯ ≥ x nﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ . y1 ≥ y2 ≥ ⋯ ≥ ynﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ σ
ﻣﻦ ، Snﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {1,2, …,nﻳﻜﻦ
n n
2 2
) ∑ ( xk − yk ≤ ) ) ∑ ( x k − yσ( k
k =1 k =1
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﻭﺗﺎﻓﻬﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 2ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ S 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ ) . τ = ( 1, 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ x1 ≥ x 2ﻭ y1 ≥ y2ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
( x 1 − y1 )2 + ( x 2 − y2 )2 ≤ ( x 1 − y2 )2 + ( x 2 − y1 )2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ
∆ = ( x1 − y2 )2 + ( x 2 − y1 )2 − ( x1 − y1 )2 + ( x 2 − y2 )2
ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
) ∆ = 2 ( x1y1 + x 2y2 − x1y2 − x 2y1
= 2 ( x1 − x 2 )( y1 − y2 ) ≥ 0
( x k )1≤k ≤n ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n − 1ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺘﲔ
ﻭ ( yk )1≤k ≤nﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻷ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ ﺍ ﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎ ﻥ x1 ≥ x 2 ≥ ⋯ ≥ x nﻭ ﻛﺬ ﻟﻚ
. y1 ≥ y2 ≥ ⋯ ≥ ynﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ σﺗﺒﺪﻳﻼﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ . Snﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . σ ( n ) = nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ σɶﻣﻦ Sn−1ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) σɶ ( k ) = σ ( kﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ k ≤ n − 1ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n −1 n −1
2
∑ ≤ ( x k − yk )2 ) ) ∑ ( x k − yσɶ(k
k =1 k =1
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ( x n − yn )2ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﳒﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ :
n n
2
∑ ≤ ( x k − yk )2 ) ) ∑ ( x k − yσ( k
k =1 k =1
137
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 138
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . σ ( n ) ≠ nﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) r = σ−1 ( nﻭ ) ، m = σ ( nﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍ ﳌﹸﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ
) τ = ( n, mﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺍ nﻭ ، mﻭﻳﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ .ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ σ ′ = τ σﻓﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، σ ′ ( n ) = nﺇﺫﻥ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ، σ ′ﳒﺪ
n n
2
( )∗ ∑ ≤ ( x k − yk )2 ) ) ∑ ( x k − y σ ′( k
k =1 k =1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) σ ′ ( k ) = σ ( kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } ، σ ( k ) ∉ {n, mﺃﻱ } ، k ∉ {r , n
ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ σ ′ ( r ) = mﻭ . σ ′ ( n ) = n
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ∗ ( ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
n
2
∑ ≤ ∑ ( xk − yk )2 ( x k − yσ( k ) ) + ( x r − ym )2 + ( x n − yn )2
k =1 } k ∉{ r ,n
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ x r ≥ x nﻭ ، ym ≥ ynﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 2ﳒﺪ
( x r − ym )2 + ( x n − yn )2 ≤ ( x r − yn )2 + ( x n − ym )2
2 2
≤ ( x r − yσ ( ))r + ( x n − yσ ( ) )n
ﺇﺫﻥ
n n
2
) ) ∑ ( xk − yk )2 ≤ ∑ ( x k − yσ(k
k =1 k =1
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ù ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﳒﺰﻧﺎ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (an )n ≥1ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ iﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ anﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
an = rai + sa jﻣﻊ j > iﻭ rﻭ sﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ.
139 ﻋﺎﻡ 1975
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ iﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ rﻣﻦ } { 0,1, …, ai − 1ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} Ar = { k ∈ ℕ∗ : ak mod ai = r
ﺗﺆﻟﹼﻒ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ ( Ar )0≤r <aiﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ∗ . ℕﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ، Asﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ .ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ jﻣﻦ [ ∞، As ∩ ]i, +
ﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ [ ∞ . Bij = As ∩ ] j, +ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
∀n ∈ Bij , an = a j mod ai
ﺃﻭ
∗∀n ∈ Bij , ∃r ∈ ℕ an = a j + rai
ù ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ . ABCﻭﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ABRﻭ BCPﻭ CAQﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮﹴ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
PCBﻭ = π
QAC PBCﻭ = π
ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ = π :
4 6 4
. RBAﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
= π
12 RABﻭ
= π
12 QCAﻭ
ﻭ = π
6
QRPﻭ QR = RP =π
2
C
ﺣﻞﱞ ﺣﺴﺎﰊ :ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) ، λ = cos ( 12πﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ :
P
Q AB = cﻭ BC = aﻭ CA = b
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BCPﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
A B
R BP CP CB
= =
π
sin 6 π
sin 4 sin 512π
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، sin 512π = cos 12π = λﺇﺫﻥ
a a
) (1 = CP = BPﻭ
2λ 2λ
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ CAQﺃﻥﹼ
b b
)(2 = CQ = AQﻭ
2λ 2λ
AB π
ﺇﺫﻥ = cos ﻭﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ABRﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ = λ
2AR 12
c
)(3 = BR = AR
2λ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 140
ﻟﻨﺤﺴﺐ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، PQRﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻭ ) . ( 3
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BPRﳒﺪ
)
PR 2 = BP 2 + BR 2 − 2BP ⋅ BR ⋅ cos ( π3 + B
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
1
4λ 2
)) (a 2 + c 2 − 2ac cos ( π3 + B
= PR 2
، cos ( π3 + B ) = 12 cos B −ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ 12 ac sin Bﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ 2
3 ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
sin B
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ . Aﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
1
) (a 2 + c 2 − ac cos B + 2 3A
= PR 2
4λ 2
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺃﻥﹼ a 2 + c 2 − b 2 = 2ac cos Bﺇﺫﻥ
1 a 2 + c 2 + b 2 1
= PR 2 2 ) + 2 3A = 2 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 + 4 3A
4λ 2 8λ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ QRﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ aﻭ bﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻨﺠﺪ
1
= QR 2 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 + 4 3A ) = PR 2
8λ 2
ﺇﺫﻥ .QR = RP
ﻟﻨﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻵﻥ PQﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ PQCﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
)
PQ 2 = CP 2 + CQ 2 − 2CP ⋅ CQ ⋅ cos ( π3 + C
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
1 ))
= PQ 2
2λ 2
(a 2 + b 2 − 2ab cos ( π3 + C
1 + )
= 2 (a 2 + b 2 − ab cosC 3ab sin C
2λ
1 a 2 + b2 − c2
= 2 a 2 + b2 − + 2 3A
2λ 2
1
= (a 2 ) + b 2 + c 2 + 4 3A
4λ 2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ PQ 2 = PR 2 + QR 2ﻓﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
PRQﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
141 ﻋﺎﻡ 1975
C ﺣﻞﱞ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ :
P
Q
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ = π
PBCﻭ ، BC = 2λ ⋅ BPﺣﻴﺚ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ
4
A
R
B = ، λﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Cﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
π
cos ( 12 )
Pﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ T1ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ B
π
،ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻉﹴ ﺑﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Bﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ . 2λ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﻪ
S 4
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Sﺻﻮﺭﺓ Rﻭﻓﻖ . T1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ . BS = 2λ ⋅ BR = BAﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
π π π
= ) (BA, BS ) = (BA, BR) + (BR, BS = +
12 4 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BASﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ.
1 ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ = π
= ، AQﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Qﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ C CAQﻭ AC
2λ 4
π
،ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻉﹴ ﺑﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ T 2ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Aﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﻪ
4
1
Aﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( RSﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، BASﺇﺫﻥ
2λ
1
π
= AR = ) (AS , AR) = (BR, BSﻭ AS
2λ 4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ . T2 ( S ) = R
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ . R = T 2 T1ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻧﺴﺒﱵ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﰲ
π
،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ T1ﻭ T2ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 1ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﱵ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﲔ ﰲ T1ﻭ T2ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
2
π
Rﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥﹲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﻪ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻥ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Rﻷﻥﹼ . R ( R ) = Rﻭﻟﻜﻦ
2
. R ( P ) = Qﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
= π
PRQ RP = RQﻭ
2
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 142
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Aﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، 44444444ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Bﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﰲ
ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . Aﺃﻭﺟﺪ Cﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . B
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ . N = 44444444ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 4444 < 104ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
N < 104×4444 = 1017776
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ Nﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 17776ﺭﻗﻤﺎﹰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
A ≤ 9 × 17776 = 159984 < 199999
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
B ≤ 5 × 9 = 45
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ .C ≤ 12
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
N mod 9 = A mod 9 = B mod 9 = C mod 9
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
44444444 mod 9 = ( −2 )4444 mod 9 = 161111 mod 9 = 71111 mod 9
ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ 7 3 = 1mod 9ﻭ 1111 = 3 × 370 + 1ﺇﺫﻥ
370
) 44444444 = ( 7 3 × 7 mod 9 = 7 mod 9
ﺇﺫﻥ Cﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ 12ﻭﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 9ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 7ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 7ﻭﻫﻲ
ù ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ 1975ﻧﻘﻄﺔﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ) O ( 0, 0ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، 1ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) e i θ − e i ϕ = 2 i exp ( i θ +2 ϕ ) sin ( θ−2ϕﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) e i θ − e i ϕ = 2 sin ( θ −2 ϕ ) = 2 sin ( 2θ ) cos ( ϕ2 ) − cos ( 2θ ) sin ( ϕ2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) ) ( sin ( θ2 ), cos ( θ2 ), sin ( ϕ2 ), cos ( ϕ2ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ e i θﻭ e i ϕﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺎﹰ.
143 ﻋﺎﻡ 1975
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ
∀n ≥ 1, θn = 2 arcsin ] ( n 2n+ 1 ) ∈ [ 0, π
2
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
2
−1 2n
cos ( θ2 ) = nn
n
2
+1
θ
2 ) (
sin n = 2ﻭ
n +1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻭ mﻣﻦ ℕﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∗
i θn i θm 2n m2 − 1 n2 − 1 2m
e −e =2 2 ⋅ 2 − 2 ⋅ 2
n +1 m +1 n +1 m +1
4 ( nm + 1 ) m − n
=
) ( n 2 + 1 )( m 2 + 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ∗ (e i θn )n ∈ℕﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻋﺎﺩﻱ .ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ } {e i θk : 1 ≤ k ≤ 1975ﻟﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﲟﺘﺤﻮﻟﲔ ) P ( X ,Yﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ :
.1ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) P ( tx , ty ) = t n P ( x , yﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ tﻭ xﻭ . y
، P ( 1, 0 ) = 1 .2ﻭﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﻭ yﻭ zﻛﺎﻥ
) (E P ( y + z, x ) + P ( z + x , y ) + P ( x + y, z ) = 0
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ z = 1 − x − yﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( Eﳒﺪ
) (1 P ( 1 − x , x ) + P ( 1 − y, y ) + P ( x + y, 1 − x − y ) = 0
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ xﻭ yﻣﻦ . ℝﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﲟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
) Q (X ) = P (X, 1 − X
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ ) ،Q ( X + Y ) = −Q ( 1 − X ) − Q ( 1 − Yﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
∂2
Q ′′ ( X + Y ) = − (Q ( 1 − X , X ) + Q ( 1 − Y ,Y ) ) = 0
∂X ∂Y
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 144
ﺇﺫﻥ ،Q ′′ = 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ aﻭ bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ Q ( X ) = aX + bﺃﻱ
P ( X , 1 − X ) = aX + b
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 1ﳒﺪ
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℝ2 , a ( 1 − x ) + b + a ( 1 − y ) + b + a ( x + y ) + b = 0
ﺃﻭ . 2a + 3b = 0ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ P ( 1, 0 ) = 1ﺃﻥﹼ . a + b = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺑﺎﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ
ﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﲔ 2a + 3b = 0ﻭ a + b = 1ﳒﺪ a = 3ﻭ . b = −2ﺇﺫﻥ
P ( X , 1 − X ) = 3X − 2
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ℝ2ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ t = x + y ≠ 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
P ( x, y ) = t n P ) ( xt , yt ) = ( x + y ) P ( xt , 1 − xt
n
x
= ( x + y )n 3 ) − 2 = ( x + y )n −1 ( x − 2y
x +y
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) P ( X ,Y ) = ( X + Y )n −1 ( X − 2Y
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ
ù ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ، 32ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﲔ ﻭﻗﻄﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 16
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ.
D β C
ﻟﻨﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺱ ، ABCDﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
ϕ
AB = αﻭ BD = δﻭ CD = β
δ
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ
θ θ = DBAﻭ
ϕ = BDC
A α B
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
)(1 α + β + δ = 16
)(2 αδ sin θ + βδ sin ϕ = 64 ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
ﺑﻀﺮﺏ ) ( 1ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، δﺛﹸﻢ ﻃﺮﺡ ) ( 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﳒﺪ
αδ ( 1 − sin θ ) + βδ ( 1 − sin ϕ ) + δ 2 − 16δ + 64 = 0
ﺃﻭ
αδ ( 1 − sin θ ) + βδ ( 1 − sin ϕ ) + ( δ − 8 )2 = 0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
D β C
δ = 8ﻭ sin θ = sin ϕ = 1
δ ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، θ = ϕ = π2ﻭ . α + β = 8ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ
α B
AC = AB + BD + DC
A
ﳒﺪ
AC 2 = AB 2 + BD 2 + DC 2 + 2AB ⋅ DC
= α2 + δ 2 + β 2 + 2αβ
= ( α + β )2 + δ 2
= 8 2 + 82 = 2 × 8 2
ù ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . AC = 8 2ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ.
145
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 146
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ . P1 ( X ) = X 2 − 2ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ( Pn )n ≥1ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
)) . Pn +1 ( X ) = P1 ( Pn ( Xﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Pn ( x ) = xﻫﻲ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ.
ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ deg Pn ( X ) = 2nﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . nﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﻥﹼ
) ∀n ≥ 1, ∀x ∈ ℝ, Pn ( 2 cos x ) = 2 cos ( 2n x
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) . ( 2 cos θ )2 − 2 = 2 ( 2 cos2 θ − 1 ) = 2 cos2 ( 2xﻭﻫﻨﺎ
ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Pn ( x ) = xﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ) . cos ( 2n θ ) = cos ( θﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
x k = 2 cos ) ( 22π−k 1
n yk = 2 cosﻭ ) ( 22π+k 1
n
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ cosﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, πﺃﻥﹼ
1 = x 0 > y1 > x1 > ⋯ > x 2n −1 −1 > y2n −1 ≥ −1
ﻭﺃﻥﹼ Pn ( x k ) = x kﺇﺫﺍ ، 0 ≤ k < 2n −1ﻭ Pn ( yk ) = ykﺇﺫﺍ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ 2n −1
ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ 2nﺟﺬﺭﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ . Pn ( x ) = xﺇﻻﹼ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Pn ( x ) = xﻷﻥﹼ . deg ( Pn ( X ) − X ) = 2nﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏù .
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻠﹾﺆﻫﺎ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﲟﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻸﻫﺎ ﲟﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 2ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ،
ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ،ﲤﻜﹼﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻞﺀ 20%ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻋﻴﻦ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﺒﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ aﻭ bﻭ cﻣﻊ ) . a = min (a, b, cﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
c b a
α = 3 ﻭ β = 3 ﻭ γ = 3
2 2 2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻠﺆﻩ ﲟﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ 2ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ . αβγﻭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ aﻭ bﻭ cﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ
)(1 5αβγ = abc
147 ﻋﺎﻡ 1976
ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
17 12 5 19
< 3
<5 < ﻭ 3
<2
10 7 4 15
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
1 1 3
5−32 5−2
3 = −3 3 =
2 5 10 3
) 10 ( 52 + 3 22 + 3 10
3
3
=
5 2 + 2 5 + 3 100
3 3
3 63
> 19 12
=
5 × 15 + 2 × 7 + 5 310
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
m m 63 63 63
∀m ≥ 5, 3
−3 >m ×≥ 5 = >1
2 5 310 310 62
m m
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، ∀m ≥ 5, 3 > 3 + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
2 5
m m
∀m ≥ 5, 3 > 3
2 5
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ
3 3 3 30 4
3 − 3 = 2− 3 > 2− = >0
2 5 5 17 17
4 4 4 40 11
3 − 3 = 3− 3 > 3− = >0
2 5 5 17 17
5 5 5 50 1
3 − 3 = 3− 3 > 3−
17
=
17
>0
2 5 5
ﺇﺫﻥ
)(2 ∀m ≥ 3, m > m
3 2 3
5
ﺗﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . a = min (a, b, cﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ a ≥ 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1 1
>γ 3
α> 3 aﻭ β> 3 bﻭ c
5 5 5
1
ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، αγβ > abc ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ) . ( 1ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ a = 1ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ، α = 0
5
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ a = 2ﻭ . α = 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 148
ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
)(3 5βγ = 2bc
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 5 ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ bﺃﻭ ، cﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ . 5 | bﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ b = 5ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . b ≥ 10
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ b ≥ 10ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
β 1 b 1 1 15 1 131
> = 3 > 3 − − =
b b 2 2 b 19 10 190
ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 3ﳒﺪ
γ 2 b 2 190 76
× < × = =
c 5 β 5 131 131
< ، 127ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ 3
1
5
، 127 − 131ﻭﻛﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ
76
= 5
12×131 ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ > 0
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، cγ < 127 < 315ﺃﻱ . 3c2 < 3c5ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
c = 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، γ = 1 ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 3ﳒﺪ
4 β 1 b 1
= = 3 < 3
5 b b 2 2
< . 312 4
5 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻷﻥﹼ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، b = 5ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . β = 3 ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
2 γ 1 c 1 1 15 1
> = = 3 > 3 − −
3 c c 2 2 c 19 c
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
1 15 2 45 − 38 7
> = − =
c 19 3 57 57
< cﺃﻭ . c ≤ 8ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ : 57
7 ﺃﻱ
c 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
γ 1 2 3 3 2 5 3
c 2 3 4 5 3 7 4
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ cﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ 3ﺃﻭ . 6
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} {2, 3, 5ﺃﻭ }{2, 5, 6
ﻭﻧﺘﻴﻘﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺘﲔ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ .ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﳊﻼﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﳍﺎ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏù .
149 ﻋﺎﻡ 1976
ﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ . 1976
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ، N = 1976ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ rﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} Ar ,N = {( x1, …, xr ) ∈ ( ℕ∗ )r : x1 + ⋯ + xr = N
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ) ،ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ، ( N rﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . r > Nﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ r ≤ Nﻋﺪﺩ Pr ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
r
Pr = max ∏ x j : ( x1, … x r ) ∈ Ar ,N
j =1
ﻭﻧﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) . P = max ( P1, …, PN
Aℓ,N ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ℓﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, …, Nﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ) ( x1, …, x ℓﻣﻦ
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . P = x1x 2 ⋯ x ℓﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻥ
x1 ≤ x 2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ x ℓ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ P ≥ Nﻷﻥﹼ } . A1,N = { N
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . x1 = 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ } ، k = max { j : x j = 1ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻻ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ k = Nﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻛﺎﻥ P = 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ
) Y = ( k + x k +1, xk + 2, …, x ℓﻓﻨﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ Aℓ−k ,Nﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
( k + xk +1 ) x k + 2 ⋯ x ℓ > x k +1xk + 2 ⋯ x ℓ = P
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . x1 ≥ 2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، x ℓ ≥ 5ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀p ≥ 5, )p < 2( p − 2
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) Y = ( x1, x 2, … x ℓ −1, 2, x ℓ − 2ﻣﻦ Aℓ +1,Nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
x1 ⋯ x ℓ −1 × 2 ( x ℓ − 2 ) > x1x 2 ⋯ x ℓ = P
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . x ℓ ≤ 4
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، x ℓ−1 = 4ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ x ℓ = 4ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
4×4 < 2×3×3
Aℓ +1,Nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) Y = ( x1, x , … x ℓ−2, 2, 3, 3ﻣﻦ
x1 ⋯ x ℓ −2 × 2 × 3 × 3 > x1x 2 ⋯ x ℓ = P
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . x ℓ−1 ≤ 3
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 150
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ x1 = 2ﻭ . x ℓ = 4ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ 2 × 4 < 3 × 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) Y = ( x 2, … x ℓ−1, 3, 3ﻣﻦ Aℓ,Nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
x 2 ⋯ x ℓ −1 × 3 × 3 > x1x 2 ⋯ x ℓ = P
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ x1 = 2ﻭ . x ℓ = 4
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x ℓ = 4ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، x1 = x 2 = ⋯ = x ℓ −1 = 3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
N = 3 ( ℓ − 1 ) + 4 = 3ℓ + 1ﻭ P = 22 × 3ℓ −1
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x ℓ = 3ﻧﺎﻗﺸﻨﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، x1 = 3ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ، x1 = x 2 = ⋯ = x ℓ = 3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
N = 3ℓﻭ P = 3ℓ
ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . x1 = 2ﻭﻫﻨﺎ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x 2 = 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Pﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ x 3x 4 ⋯ x ℓ 4ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، x 3 = ⋯ = x ℓ = 3ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ x ℓ = 4ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﺭﺳﻨﺎﻫﺎ
ﺁﻧﻔﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
N = 3 ( ℓ − 2 ) + 4 = 3 ( ℓ − 1 ) + 1ﻭ P = 22 × 3ℓ −2
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x 2 = 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، x 2 = ⋯ = x ℓ = 3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
N = 3 ( ℓ − 1 ) + 2ﻭ P = 2 × 3ℓ −1
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺗﺘﻌﻠﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺑﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ Nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 3
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، N mod 3 = 0ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ، N = 3qﻳﻜﻮﻥ 3qﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ
ﺿﺮﺏ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ . N
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، N mod 3 = 1ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ، N = 3q + 1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 22 × 3q −1ﺃﻛﱪ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ . N
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، N mod 3 = 2ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ، N = 3q + 2ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 2 × 3qﺃﻛﱪ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ . N
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ، 1976 = 3 × 658 + 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ 2 × 3658ﻫﻮ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ
ù ﺿﺮﺏ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ . 1976
151 ﻋﺎﻡ 1976
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، nﻭﻧﻀﻊ . m = 2nﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ Aﻣﻦ
) Mn×m ( ℝﺃﻱ ، A = (aij )( i, j )∈ ℕ n ×ℕ mﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ } aij ∈ {−1, 0,1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ iﻣﻦ ℕ nﻭ jﻣﻦ ) . ℕ mﻧﺬ ﻛﹼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ } (. ℕ k = {1, 2, …, kﻭﺃﺧﲑ ﺍﹰ ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ
ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
ai1x1 + ai 2x 2 + ⋯ + aimx m = 0, i ∈ ℕn
ﺑﺎﺎﻫﻴﻞ . ( x k )k ∈ℕ mﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ }) ℤm \{( 0, …, 0ﺣﻼﹰ
) Z = ( z1, …, zmﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ . ∀k ∈ ℕ m , zk ≤ m
ﻟﻨﺘﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} P = {( x1, …, xm ) : ∀k ∈ ℕ m , − n ≤ xk ≤ n
= {−n, …, −1, 0,1, …, n }m
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ Pﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
m
ϕ : P → ℤn , X = ( x1, …, x m ) ֏ ∑ aij x j
j =1 i ∈ ℕ n
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) X = ( x1, …, x mﻣﻦ Pﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
m m m
∀i ∈ ℕ n , ∑ aij x j ≤ ∑ aij ≤ xj ∑ xj ≤ nm = 2n 2
j =1 j =1 j =1
ﺇﺫﻥ
} ϕ ( P ) ⊂ {( y1, …, yn ) ∈ ℤn : ∀k ∈ ℕ n , yk ≤ 2n 2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
) card ( P ) = ( 2n + 1 )m = ( 2n + 1 )2n = ( 4n 2 + 4n + 1
n
) card ( ϕ ( P ) ) ≤ ( 4n 2 + 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ) card ( ϕ ( P ) ) < card ( Pﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ϕﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ .ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ Pﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﻥ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ X1ﻭ X 2ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ) . ϕ ( X1 ) = ϕ ( X 2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) Z = X1 − X 2 = ( z1, …, z mﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ }) ℤm \{( 0, …, 0
ù ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ϕ ( Z ) = 0ﻭ . ∀k ∈ ℕ m , zk ≤ mﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 152
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( un )n ∈ℕﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
5
= u0 = 2, u1 , ∀n ≥ 1, un +1 = un ( un2−1 − 2 ) − u1
2
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ، un = 2( 2 −( −1 ) )/3ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ x ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . x
n n
n n
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (an )n ∈ℕﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، an = 2( 2 −( −1 ) )/3ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ . ℕﺛﹸﻢ
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ (bn )n ∈ ℕﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ . bn = an + 1/anﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≥ 1ﻣﺎ
ﻳﻠﻲ :
1 n
+ 2( −1 )n )/3 n
+ 2( −1 )n )/3
bn2−1 − 2 = an2 −1 + = 2( 2 + 2−( 2
an2 −1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n n
)n )n
bn ( bn2−1 − 2 ) = ( 2( 2 −( −1 )/3
+ 2−( 2 −( −1 )/3
×)
n )n )/3 n
+ 2( −1 )n
( 2( 2 +2 −1
(
+ 2−( 2 )/3
)
( n +1 )n +1 ( n +1 )n +1
) = 2( 2 − −1 )/3 + 2−( 2 − −1 )/3 + 2−( −1 ) + 2( −1
n n
1
= bn +1 + 2 +
2
ﺇﺫﻥ
5
∀n ≥ 1, bn +1 = bn ( bn2−1 − 2 ) −
2
5
= . b1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ bn = un ﻛﻤﺎ ﳒﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ b0 = 2ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
2
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . n
2n − ( −1 )n
،ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ an ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ 2n = ( −1 )n mod 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ∈ ℕ
3
ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ . n > 0 ⇒ an > 2ﺇﺫﻥ
1
∀n ≥ 1, an < un < an +
2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ un = anﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n ≥ 1ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 0
ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ .ﺇﺫﻥ
n n
)n
∀n ≥ 0, un = 2( 2 −( −1 )/3
= 2round( 2 ) /3
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﺃ ﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎ ﺕ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺔ ﺍ ﻷﺿﻼ ﻉ ABKﻭ BCLﻭ CDMﻭ DANﺩ ﺍ ﺧﻞ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻊ
] [ KLﻭ ] [ LMﻭ ] [ MNﻭ ] [ NK . ABCDﺃ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ﺕ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
] [ AKﻭ ] [ BKﻭ ] [ BLﻭ ] [CLﻭ ] [CMﻭ ] [ DM ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ﺕ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﻭ ] [ DNﻭ ] [ ANﺗﺆﻟﹼﻒ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﺍﺛﲏ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﹰﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺎﹰ.
ﻟﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ . ℂﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ B
ﻭ Cﻭ Dﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ α = 1ﻭ β = iﻭ γ = −1ﻭ . δ = − i
B
N M
3
9 2
5 1
C 6 0 A
7 11
8 10
9
K L
D
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ π
3 ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Kﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ Bﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Aﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﻪ
κﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Kﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
1 3
κ = 1 + e i π / 3 (i − 1) = 1 + + i ) (i − 1
2 2
1 3 1 3 3 −1
= − + i − =−
) (1 + i
2 2 2 2 2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
3 −1
κ=− ) exp ( i π4
2
153
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 154
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ BCLﻭ CDMﻭ DANﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABKﻭﻓﻖ
ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ) Oﺃﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ( ﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻫﺎ π2ﻭ πﻭ 32πﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ،
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ λﻭ µﻭ νﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Lﻭ Mﻭ Nﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻌﻄﻰ
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ
λ = i κﻭ µ = −κﻭ ν = − i κ
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ z 0ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ LMﻛﺎﻥ
1 1 3 −1
= z0
= ( λ + µ ) = − (1 − i ) κ
2 2 2
ﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ MNﻭ ] [ NKﻭ ] [ KLﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ LM
ﻭﻷ ﹼ
ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻫﺎ π2ﻭ πﻭ 32πﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ z 3ﻭ z 6ﻭ z 9ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ MNﻭ ] [ NKﻭ ] [ KL
ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ
z 3 = i z 0ﻭ z 6 = −z 0ﻭ z 9 = − i z 0
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ z1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ ANﻛﺎﻥ
1 1
= z1 ) ( α + ν ) = (1 − i κ
2 2
3 − 1 3 1 π
=
2 2
+ i = z 0 exp i
2 6) (
ﺇﺫﻥ z1 = ωz 0ﻣﻊ ) . ω = exp ( i π6
] [ AN ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ BKﻭ ] [CLﻭ ] [ DMﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ،Oﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻫﺎ π2ﻭ πﻭ 32πﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ z 4ﻭ z 7ﻭ z10ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ BKﻭ ] [CLﻭ ] [ DM
ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ
z 4 = i z1 = ω 4z 0ﻭ z 7 = −z1 = ω 7z 0ﻭ z10 = − i z1 = ω10z 0
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ . ω 3 = i
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ z 2ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ BLﻛﺎﻥ
1 1 π
z 2 = ( β + λ ) = (i + i κ) = z 0 exp i
2 2 3
= ω 2z 0 ) (
155 ﻋﺎﻡ 1977
] [ BL ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [CMﻭ ] [ DNﻭ ] [ AKﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ،Oﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻫﺎ π2ﻭ πﻭ 32πﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍ ﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻳﺔ z 5ﻭ z 8ﻭ z11ﺍ ﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ﺕ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [CMﻭ ] [ DN
ﻭ ] [ AKﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ
z 5 = i z 2 = ω 5z 0ﻭ z 8 = −z 2 = ω 8z 0ﻭ z11 = − i z 2 = ω11z 0
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺱ ﳑﺜﹼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ( zk )0≤k ≤11ﻫﻲ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ
ù ﺍﺛﲏ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻷﻥﹼ zk = z 0ωkﻭ ) . ω = exp ( i π6
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ
ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻓﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻲ ﳊﺪﻭﺩ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ) Z = ( z1, …, znﻣﻦ ℝnﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ .ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ
ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ (U k )1≤k ≤n −6ﻭ (Vk )1≤k ≤n −10ﻣﻦ ℝnﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
U k = (0, …, 0,1,1,
)…,1, 0, …, 0
:1 ≤ k ≤ n −6
k −1 7
Vk = (0, …, 0,1,1,
)…,1, 0, …, 0
: 1 ≤ k ≤ n − 10
k −1 10
= X ,Yﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ ℝnﺑﺎﳉﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﹼﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ
n
∑ i =1 xiyi
) X = ( x1, …, x nﻭ ) .Y = ( y1, …, yn
ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ( εk )1≤k ≤nﻟﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ، ℝnﺣﻴﺚ εkﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﻣﺮﻛﹼﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺃﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﹼﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ kﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Zﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ
∀k ∈ {1,2, …, n − 6 }, Z ,U k < 0
)(1
∀k ∈ {1, 2, …, n − 10 }, Z ,Vk > 0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 156
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ . n ≥ 17ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
11 11
k +6 17
= ∑U k = ∑ ∑ εj ∑ λj ε j
k =1 k =1 j =k j =1
ﻣﻊ
) } λj = card ( {k ∈ ℕ : 1 ≤ k ≤ 11, k ≤ j ≤ k + 6
) } = card ( {k ∈ ℕ : 1 ≤ k ≤ 11, j − 6 ≤ k ≤ j
) } ) = card ( { k ∈ ℕ : max(1, j − 6) ≤ k ≤ min(11, j
)= min(11, j ) − max(0, j − 7
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
j : 1≤ j <7
λj = 7 : 7 ≤ j ≤ 11
18 − j : 11 < j ≤ 17
ﻛﻤﺎ ﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﺃﻥﹼ
7 7
k +10 17
= ∑Vk = ∑ ∑ εj ∑ µ j εj
k =1 k =1 j =k j =1
ﻣﻊ
) } µj = card ( { k ∈ ℕ : 1 ≤ k ≤ 7, k ≤ j ≤ k + 10
) } = card ( { k ∈ ℕ : 1 ≤ k ≤ 7, j − 10 ≤ k ≤ j
) }) = card ( { k ∈ ℕ : max(1, j − 10) ≤ k ≤ min(6, j
)= min(7, j ) − max(0, j − 11
ﻭﲟﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ، µj = λjﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
11 7
∑U k = ∑Vk
k =1 k =1
ﻭﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﹼﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ Zﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢﹴ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ
) ، ( 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . n ≤ 16
157 ﻋﺎﻡ 1977
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ، n = 16ﻭﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ Z = ( zk )1≤k ≤16ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀k ∈ {1, 2, …,10 }, Z ,U k = −1
∀k ∈ {1,2, …, 6 }, Z ,Vk = +1
ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z1 −1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z 2 −1
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z3 −1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 z4 −1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 z 5 −1
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 z6 −1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 z
7
−1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 z
8 = −1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 z −1
9
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
z −1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 10 1
z
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 11 1
z
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 z12 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 z14
13 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 z15 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 z16 1
ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺇﺫ ﳒﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
z1 = z 2 = z 4 = z 5 = z 6 = z 8 = z10 = z11 = z12 = z13 = z15 = z16
z 3 = z 7 = z10 = z14
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﳒﺪ
5z1 + 2z 3 = −1
8z1 + 3z 3 = 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ z1 = 5ﻭ . z 3 = −13ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ Zﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
) Z = ( −5, −5,13, −5, −5, −5,13, −5, −5,13, −5, −5, −5,13, −5, −5
ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 16ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 16ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻲ ﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ
ù ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﻞ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 158
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . n > 2ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Vnﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} ∗Vn = {1 + kn : k ∈ ℕ
ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ mﻣﻦ » Vnﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﰲ « Vnﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﺀَ
ﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ .Vnﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ Vnﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﰲ Vnﳉﺪﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﲑ
ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻦ Vnﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﹰ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺎﹰ ) .ﻻ ﻧﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻘﲔ ﳜﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ
ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻤﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﹰ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺎﹰ( .
ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻞﹼ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺇﺟﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ N = abcdﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ a
ﻭ bﻭ cﻭ dﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ، −1 mod nﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮﹴ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ abﻭ cdﻭ ac
ﻭ bdﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﺪﺍ ﺩ ﻣﻦ Vnﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﰲ .Vnﺳﻨﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ
ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ.
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ Dirichletﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ
ﺍ ﻷ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ ﺍ ﻷ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺩ ﺍ ﳌﺘﺘﺎ ﻟﻴﺔ ∗ . ( kn − 1 )k ∈ ℕﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺇ ﺫ ﻥ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺍﹰ ﺃ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺎﹰ pﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
p ≡ −1 mod nﻭ . p ≠ n − 1ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ
N = ( n − 1 )2 p 2 = ( ( n − 1 ) p )2
ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( n − 1 )2ﻭ p 2ﻭ ( n − 1 ) pﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ .Vnﺑﻘﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻼﹰ
ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﰲ .Vn
ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ( n − 1 )2 = u ⋅ vﻣﻊ uﻭ vﻣﻦ ) ،Vnﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ (n + 1
ﻛﺎﻥ ( n − 1 )2 ≥ ( n + 1 )2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ.
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ p 2 = u ⋅ vﻣﻊ uﻭ vﻣﻦ ،Vnﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ uﺃﻭ ، vﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . u = kpﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ، p = kvﻭﻷﻥﹼ pﺃﻭﱄ
ﻭ v ≠ 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ v = pﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ pﻷﻥﹼ
، v ≡ 1 mod nﻭ . n ≠ 2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ( n − 1 ) p = u ⋅ vﻣﻊ uﻭ vﻣﻦ ،Vnﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ uﺃﻭ ، vﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . u = kpﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ n − 1 = kvﻭﻷﻥﹼ vﺃﻛﱪ
ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ n + 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ n − 1 ≥ n + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ Nﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
159 ﻋﺎﻡ 1977
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ :ﺑﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ Dirichetﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ
ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ pﺃﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﻠﻲ n − 1ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ −1ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ nﺃﻱ ، 2n − 1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ
ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺬﺭﻳﻦ ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ .ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
x = ( n − 1 )2ﻭ y = ( 2n − 1 )2ﻭ ) z = ( n − 1 )( 2n − 1
ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ xﻭ yﻭ zﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ،Vnﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ N = xy = z 2ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻘﲔ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻛﺠﺪﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ .Vnﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﹶﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﰲ Vn؟
ﻟﻘﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ xﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﰲ .Vn
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) z = ( αn + 1 ) ⋅ ( βn + 1ﻣﻊ ) ( α, βﻣﻦ . ℕ∗2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
α + β + 3 = ( 2 − αβ ) n
ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ αβ = 1ﻭ . α + β + 3 = nﺃﻱ α = β = 1
ﻭ . n = 5ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n ≠ 5ﻛﺎﻥ zﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﰲ .Vn
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) y = ( αn + 1 ) ⋅ ( βn + 1ﻣﻊ ) ( α, βﻣﻦ . ℕ∗2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
α + β + 4 = ( 4 − αβ ) n
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . 1 ≤ αβ ≤ 3
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ αβ = 1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ α + β = 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، n = 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ.
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ αβ = 2ﻳﻜﻮﻥ α + β = 3ﻭﻣﻨﻪ 7 = 2nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ αβ = 3ﻳﻜﻮﻥ α + β = 4ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . n = 8
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n ≠ 8ﻛﺎﻥ yﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﰲ .Vn
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } n ∉ { 5, 8ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ N = ( n − 1 )2 ( 2n − 1 )2
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 5ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ N = 42 × 192ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ù ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ،ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 8ﳔﺘﺎﺭ . N = 72 × 232ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) (a,b, A, Bﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻄﺎﺓ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
) f : ℝ → ℝ, f ( x ) = 1 − a cos x − b sin x − A cos ( 2x ) − B sin ( 2x
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀x ∈ ℝ, f ( x ) ≥ 0ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
a 2 + b 2 ≤ 2ﻭ A2 + B 2 ≤ 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 160
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ، ζ = a − i b = ζ e i θﻭ . ξ = A − i B = ξ e i ϕﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
∀x ∈ ℝ, ) f ( x ) = Re ( 1 − ζe i x − ξe 2 i x
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ g ( x ) = 1 − ζe i x − ξe 2 i xﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ) . f = Re ( g
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ، g ( x + π ) = 1 + ζe i x − ξe 2 i xﻭﻣﻨﻪ
) g ( x ) + g ( x + π ) = 2 ( 1 − ξe 2 i x
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
1
∀x ∈ ℝ, 1 − ξ cos ( 2x + ϕ ) = ( f ( x ) + f ( x + π ) ) ≥ 0
2
1
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ، x = − ϕﻟﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ξ ≤ 1ﺃﻱ
2
A2 + B 2 ≤ 1
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
( π4 ) = 1 − ζe
g x+ ix i π/4
e − i ξe 2 i x
π
g ( x − ) = 1 − ζe ix −i π/4
e + i ξe 2 i x
4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
π π
(
g x+
4 ( )
+g x −
4 )
= 2 − 2ζe i x
ﺇﺫﻥ
1 π π
∀x ∈ ℝ, = ) 2 − ζ cos ( x + θ
2 ((
f x+
4
+f x−
4 ) ( )) ≥ 0
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ x = −θﻟﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ζ ≤ 2ﺃﻱ
a 2 + b2 ≤ 2
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
Qa ,bﺇﱃ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ a + bﻋﻠﻰ
2 2
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ aﻭ ، bﻧﺮﻣﺰ
( ℕ∗ )2 ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، a + bﻭﻧﺮﻣﺰ Ra,bﺇﱃ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ .ﻋﻴﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (a,bﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . (Qa,b )2 + Ra,b = 1977
161 ﻋﺎﻡ 1977
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ) (a,bﻣﻦ ( ℕ∗ )2ﻳﺤﻘﱠﻘﺎﻥ . (Qa,b )2 + Ra,b = 1977ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
= a 2 + b2
2
) ( (a + b )2 + (a − b )2
ﺇﺫﻥ
2
a 2 + b2 ) a + b (a − b
= +
a +b 2 ) 2 (a + b
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
a + b a 2 + b2
≤ = Qa,b ≤ 1977
2 a + b
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ 442 = 1936ﻭ 452 = 2025ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
a +b a + b
−1 < ≤ 44
2 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . a + b < 90 ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Ra,bﻫﻮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ a 2 + b 2ﻋﻠﻰ a + bﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
0 ≤ Ra,b < a + b < 90
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ (Qa,b )2 = 1977 − Ra ,bﺃﻥﹼ
2
1977 − 90 ≤ (Qa,b ) ≤ 1977
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ 432 = 1849ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ 432 < (Qa,b )2 < 452ﺇﺫﻥ .Qa ,b = 44
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2
Ra,b = 1977 − (Qa,b ) = 1977 − 1936 = 41
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
a 2 + b 2 = 44 ( a + b ) + 41
ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
( a − 22 )2 + (b − 22 )2 = 1009
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ 1009ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ 1009ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ
ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﲔ ﳘﺎ 282ﻭ . 152ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺣﻠﹼﲔ ﳑﻜﻨﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﳘﺎ
} {a, b } = { 7, 50ﻭ } {a, b } = { 37, 50
ﻭﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺃﻥﹼ }) {( 7, 50 ), ( 50, 7 ), ( 37, 50 ), ( 50, 37ﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝﹲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﺣﺔ
ù ﻓﻬﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 162
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ∗ . f : ℕ∗ → ℕﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , ) ) f ( n + 1) > f ( f (n
. ∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ f ( n ) = n
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ∗ (qn )n ∈ℕﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ } . qn = min { f ( k ) : k ≥ nﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pnﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ:
» ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ( qk )1≤k ≤n +1ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ« .
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﻥﹼ Pnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . n
ﺇﻥﹼ P1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ kﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . k ≥ 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ f ( k − 1 ) ≥ 1ﺃﻥﹼ
f ( k ) > f ( f ( k − 1 ) ) ≥ min { f ( j ) : j ≥ 1 } = q1
ﺇﺫﻥ ∀k ≥ 2, f ( k ) ≥ 1 + q1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ، q2 ≥ 1 + q1ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﺔ . P1
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ . Pn ⇒ Pn +1ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ Pnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ qn +1 ≥ n + 1ﻷﻥﹼ
n n
= qn +1 − q1 ∑ (qk +1 − qk ) ≥ ∑ 1 = n
k =1 k =1
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ kﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . k ≥ n + 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ، k − 1 ≥ n + 1ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
qn +1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، f ( k − 1 ) ≥ qn +1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، f ( k − 1 ) ≥ n + 1 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
f ( k ) > f ( f ( k − 1 ) ) ≥ min { f ( j ) : j ≥ n + 1 } ≥ qn +1
ﺇ ﺫ ﻥ ، ∀k ≥ n + 2, f ( k ) ≥ 1 + qn +1ﺃ ﻱ ﺇ ﻥﹼ . qn +2 ≥ 1 + qn +1ﻭ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﺔ
. Pn +1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∗
)(1 ∀n ∈ ℕ , qn < qn +1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) ، qn = min ( f ( n ), qn +1ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( 1ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ
ﺃﻥﹼ ) . qn = f ( nﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺃﻱ
)(2 ∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , )f ( n ) < f ( n + 1
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ،ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀n ∈ ℕ∗, f ( n ) ≥ n
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) ) ، f ( n + 1 ) > f ( f ( nﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍ ﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ
ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) n + 1 > f ( nﺃﻭ ) . n ≥ f ( nﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , f ( n ) = n
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
mﻭ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . m < nﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ 1978mﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ
. 1978nﺃﻭﺟﺪ nﻭ mﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻤﻮﻋﻬﻤﺎ m + nﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ mﻭ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . 1 ≤ m < nﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
) 1978n = 1978m mod ( 1000
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ) 1000 | 1978m ( 1978n −m − 1
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ 1000 = 8 × 125ﻭ 1978n −m − 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 8
ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، 1978m = 2m × 989mﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. m ≥ 3
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ) ( 1ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
) ) 125 | ( 9893 × 1978m −3 × ( 1978n −m − 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، gcd ( 125, 9893 × 1978m−3 ) = 1 ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 9893 × 1978m−3ﻭ 125
ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
) 125 | ( 1978n −m − 1
) (1 ﺃﻭ ، 1978n −m = 1 mod 53ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ، 1978 = −22 mod 53ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
)(2 ( −22 )n −m = 1 mod 53
×
ﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ a = −22ﰲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﻴﺔ ) ) ، ( ℤ/( 53 ℤﺃﻱ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ rﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ . ( −22 )r = 1 mod 53
×
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ ) ) ( ℤ/( 53 ℤﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) ، 100ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﻻﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ( { 0,1, …,124ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . r | 100ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
r < 100ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ rﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 50ﺃﻭ . 20
163
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 164
ﻟﻨﻼ ﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻭ ﻻﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، 125 = 22 + 112ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . 112 = −22 mod 53 ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ
ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
a 5 =− 25 × 114 × 11 =− 2
5
× 24 × 11 =− 12 × 11 =− 132 mod 53
512
. aﻭﻣﻨﻪ 10
ﺇﺫﻥ . a 5 = −7 mod 53ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ = 49 mod 53
a 20 = ( 50 − 1 )2 = 2500 − 100 + 1 = 26 mod 53
ﺇﺫﻥ . r 20ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
a 40 = ( a 20 ) = ( 25 + 1 )2 = 51 mod 53
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
a 50 = a 40 × a 10 = ( 50 + 1 )( 50 − 1 ) = 2500 − 1 = −1 mod 53
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ . r 50ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، r = 100ﺃﻱ
min {k : a k = 1 mod 53 } = 100
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ) ( 2ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ) . 100 | (n − mﻭﻷﻥﹼ n > m ≥ 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
n = m + 100k ≥ 3 + 100 = 103
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، n + m ≥ 106ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) . (m, n ) = ( 3,103ﻭﻫﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ
ù ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺮﺓ . Sﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ Pﻭﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ
ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﰲ Uﻭ Vﻭ .Wﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Qﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﰲ
ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ] [ PUﻭ ] [ PVﻭ ] [ PWﺃﺿﻼﻋﺎﹰ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ
ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Qﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ) . Pﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﲎ
ﻣﺜﲎ( .
ﻟﻨﺮ ﻣﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮ ﻣﺰ Oﺇ ﱃ ﻣﺮ ﻛﺰ ﺍ ﻟﻜﺮ ﺓ ، Sﻭ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ Rﺩ ﻻ ﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺎ .ﻭ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
. ρ = OP
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ uﻭ vﻭ wﺗﻮ ﺟﻪ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) [ PUﻭ ) [ PVﻭ ) . [ PW
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) ( u, v, wﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺍﹰ ﻟﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
165 ﻋﺎﻡ 1978
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ) ( α, β, γﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﹼﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ POﰲ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) . ( u, v, wﺃﻱ
PO = αu + β v + γ w
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ OP = ρﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) ( u, v, wﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ،ﻳﺄﺧﺬ
ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) ( α, β, γﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Aﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
} A = {( α, β, γ ) ∈ ℝ 3 : α2 + β 2 + γ 2 = ρ 2
ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ PU = xuﻣﻊ xﻣﻦ . ℝ∗+ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
OU = PU − PO = (x − α) u − β v − γ w
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،OU = Rﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
(x − α)2 + β 2 + γ 2 = R 2
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ β 2 + γ 2 = ρ 2 − α2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ، x > 0ﺃﻥﹼ
= x R 2 − ρ 2 + α2 + α
. ℝ∗+ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃ ﹼﻥ PV = yvﻭ PW = zwﻣﻊ yﻭ zﻣﻦ
ﻟﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
= z = yﻭ R2 − ρ2 + γ 2 + γ R2 − ρ2 + β 2 + β
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
OQ = PQ − PO = PU + PV + PW − PO
ﺇﺫﻥ
= OQ R 2 − ρ 2 + α2 u + R 2 − ρ 2 + β 2 v + R2 − ρ 2 + γ 2 w
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
2
OQ = 3 ( R 2 − ρ 2 ) + α 2 + β 2 + γ 2 = 3R 2 − 2ρ 2
ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Qﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ S ′ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . 3R2 − 2ρ2ﻓﺎﶈﻞﹼ
ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ Lﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Qﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ) ( u, v, wﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ . S ′
ﺇﻥﹼ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺃﻱ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ S ′ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ . Lﺃﻣﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ
ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﹰ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 166
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺆﻗﹼﺘﺎﹰ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ) . B0 = ( u, v, wﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ) ( α, β, γﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻣﺮﻛﹼﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ POﰲ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) . ( u, v, wﺃﻱ
PO = αu + β v + γ w
ﻣﻊ α = PO ⋅ uﻭ β = PO ⋅ vﻭ ، γ = OP ⋅ wﻭ
α2 + β 2 + γ 2 = ρ 2 = OP 2
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ θﻣﻦ ] [ 0, 2πﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) . Bθ = ( uθ , vθ , wﻣﻊ
uθ = cos θu + sin θv
vθ = − sin θu + cos θv
Bθﻫﻲ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ B0ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ℝwﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ . θﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ
) ( αθ , βθ , γﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﹼﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ POﰲ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) . Bθ = ( uθ , vθ , wﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
αθ = PO ⋅ uθ = α cos θ + β sin θ
βθ = PO ⋅ vθ = −α sin θ + β cos θ
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Qθﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ Lﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ . Bθﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
= OQθ R 2 − ρ 2 + αθ2 uθ + R 2 − ρ 2 + βθ2 vθ + R 2 − ρ 2 + γ 2 w
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ θﰲ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, 2πﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ Qθﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Pwﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
Wﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ، wﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cwﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Pwﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ
. S ′ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻫﻮ :ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ Qθﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ؟.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Pwﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ) ، (W ; u, vﻭﻛﺘﺒﻨﺎ ) ( X θ ,Yθﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﱵ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Qθﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ،ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
= Xθ R 2 − ρ 2 + αθ2 cos θ − R 2 − ρ 2 + βθ2 sin θ
= Yθ R 2 − ρ 2 + αθ2 sin θ + R 2 − ρ 2 + βθ2 cos θ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) X θ + iYθ = e i θ ( R 2 − ρ 2 + αθ2 + i R 2 − ρ 2 + βθ2
167 ﻋﺎﻡ 1978
ﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ
= Zθ R 2 − ρ 2 + αθ2 + i R 2 − ρ 2 + βθ2
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ،
2
Zθ = = 2 ( R 2 − ρ 2 ) + αθ2 + βθ2
= 2 ( R2 − ρ2 ) + α 2 2 2 2 2 2
θ + βθ + γ − γ = 2R − ρ − γ
2
ρ2
ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﹼﻌﺔ ﻷﻥﹼ Qθﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cwﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ . Pwﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
ﺍﳉﺰﺋﲔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ Z θﻳﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ، ℝ +ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ ψθ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, π2ﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ :
= Zθ 2R 2 − ρ 2 − γ 2 e i ψθ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ϕﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ α2 + β 2 e i ϕ = α + i βﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
Re ( Z θ2 ) = αθ2 − βθ2
= ( α cos θ + β sin θ )2 − ( −α sin θ + β cos θ )2
= ( α2 − β 2 ) cos 2θ + 2αβ sin 2θ
) = ( α2 + β 2 ) cos ( 2θ − 2ϕ ) = ( ρ 2 − γ 2 ) cos ( 2θ − 2ϕ
ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
) Re ( Z θ2 ) = ( 2R 2 − ρ 2 − γ 2 ) cos ( 2ψθ
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
ρ2 − γ 2
= ) cos ( 2ψθ ) cos ( 2θ − 2ϕ
2R 2 − ρ 2 − γ 2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
2 2
1 ρ −γ
= ψθ arccos 2 cos ( 2θ − 2ϕ )
2 2R − ρ − γ
2 2
ﺇﺫﻥ
= X θ + iYθ ) 2R 2 − ρ 2 − γ 2 e i ϕ × e i( θ −ϕ + ψθ
2R 2 − ρ 2 − γ 2
= 2 2 ) × ( α + i β ) × e i h ( θ −ϕ
ρ −γ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 168
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) h ( tﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
1
h (t ) = t + ) ) arccos ( λ cos ( 2t
2
ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ λﻣﻦ [ ، [ 0,1ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ρ2 − γ 2 ρ2 − γ 2
=λ =
2R 2 − ρ 2 − γ 2 2 ( R2 − ρ2 ) + ρ2 − γ 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) λ sin ( 2t
h ′ (t ) = 1 +
) 1 − λ 2 cos2 ( 2t
) λ sin ( 2t ) λ 2 − λ 2 cos2 ( 2t
≥ 1− = 1−
) 1 − λ 2 cos2 ( 2t ) 1 − λ 2 cos2 ( 2t
1 − λ2
≥ 1− 1− ≥ 1−λ > 0
) 1 − λ 2 cos2 ( 2t
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ hﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀t ∈ ℝ, h ( t + 2π ) − h ( t ) = 2π
ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ tﳎﺎﻻﹰ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ 2πﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺎ ) h ( tﳎﺎﻻﹰ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ 2πﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﺮﺳﻢ θﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, 2πﺗﺮﺳﻢ ) e i h ( θ−ϕﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Qθﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cw = Pw ∩ S ′
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ Qﻣﻦ ، S ′ﻭﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ Wﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] . [ PQﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ) . ( PW ) ⊥ (WQﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ Qﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ PWﺍﳌﺎﺭ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Wﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( PWﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ S ′ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Cwﺇﺫﹾ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
1
= . wﺇﺫﻥ ،Q ∈ Cwﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ Qﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ Lﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻫﺎﻥ. PW
PW
¤ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Uﻭ Vﻭ Wﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ .Q
ﳔﺘﺎﺭ Wﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ Sﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] . [ PQ
ﻧﻌﻴﻦ Vﻭ Uﻧﻘﻄﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ Cﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Pﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( PW
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
169 ﻋﺎﻡ 1978
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ∗ ℕﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ
} F = { f ( k ) : k ≥ 1ﻭ } ، G = { g ( k ) : k ≥ 1ﺣﻴﺚ fﻭ gﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﻥ
ﲤﺎ ﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺇ ﱃ ∗ ، ℕﻭ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎ ﻥ ﺍ ﻟﺸﺮ ﻁ . ∀n ∈ ℕ∗, g ( n ) = 1 + f ( f ( n ) ) :
ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) . f ( 240
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(1 ∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , ) f ( n + 1) ≥ 1 + f ( n
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ m ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻛﺎﻥ ) ، f ( m + 1 ) > 1 + f ( mﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ
ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) 1 + f ( mﺇﱃ ،Gﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ k ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) g (k ) = 1 + f (m
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
)) 1 + f (m ) = g (k ) = 1 + f ( f (k
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، m = f ( kﺃﻱ . m ∈ Fﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 1 + f (m ) < f (m + 1) ⇒ m ∈ F
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ mﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ، Fﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ k ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ f ( k ) = m
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
1 + f ( m ) = 1 + f ( f (k )) = g ( k ) ∈ G
ﺇﺫﻥ 1 + f ( m ) ∉ Fﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) f ( m + 1 ) > 1 + f ( mﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( 1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 1 + f ( m ) < f ( m + 1) ⇔ m ∈ F
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ n ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . f ( n + 1 ) > f ( n ) + 2ﺑﻨﺎ ﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ
) ، ( 3ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ n ∈ Fﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ p ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) ، n = f ( pﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
f ( n ) + 2ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ،Gﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭ qﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، g (q ) = f ( n ) + 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
) 1 + f ( f (q ) ) = 2 + f ( n
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 170
ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) ) a = f ( f (qﻣﻦ ، Fﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) a = 1 + f ( n ) = 1 + f ( f ( p )) = g ( p
ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺇﱃ ،Gﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(4 ∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , f ( n + 1) ≤ f (n ) + 2
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ 1Fﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ Fﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ nﺇﱃ
، Fﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 0ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ nﺇﱃ . Fﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 4ﺃﻥ
)(5 ∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , ) f ( n + 1 ) = f ( n ) + 1 + 1F ( n
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ، g ( 1 ) = 1 + f ( f ( 1 ) ) ≥ 1 + 1 = 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ 1 ∉ Gﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ
. 1 ∈ Fﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ pﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . f ( p ) = 1ﺑﺎﻟﻄﹼﺒﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ p > 1ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
) ، 1 = f ( p ) > f ( 1ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . f ( 1 ) = 1
ﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ) ( 5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ nﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ m − 1ﳒﺪ
m −1
∀m ≥ 2, f ( m ) = f (1) + m − 1 + ∑ 1F ( )n
n =1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ f ( 1 ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ
)(6 ∀m ≥ 1, ) [ f ( m ) = m + card ( F ∩ [ 1, m
ﺇﺫﹾ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . m = 1
ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 6ﻋﻼﻗﺔﹲ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) f ( mﺃﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ mﺇﺫ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﹸﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
) (7 ∀m ≥ 1, ) } f ( m ) = m + card ( { k ∈ ℕ∗ : f ( k ) < m
ﻭﳒﺪ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ
n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
) f (n 1 3 4 6 8 9 11 12 14 16
ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 7ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ) ، f ( 240ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ
ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ . f
171 ﻋﺎﻡ 1978
ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺃﻥﹼ m ≤ f ( m ) ≤ 2mﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
. mﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺍﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ، f ( m ) = αmﻛﺎﻥ ، card {k : f ( k ) < m } = mα
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ α = 1 + α1ﺃﻱ . α = 1+2 5ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﺃﹶﻳﻜﻮﻥ
f ( m ) = αm ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ mﻣﻦ ∗ ℕ؟
= .α 1+ 5
2 ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ mﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﺃﻥﹼ f ( m ) = αm ﻣﻊ
ﻧﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ m ≤ 10
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ f ( k ) = αk ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k < nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ، α ∉ ℚﺃﻥﹼ
} { k ∈ ℕ∗ : f ( k ) < n } = { k ∈ ℕ∗ : αk < n
} = { k ∈ ℕ∗ : αk < n
n
{
< = k ∈ ℕ∗ : k
α }
n
= {k ∈ ℕ ∗
: k ≤
}
α
ﺇﺫﻥ،
n
card ( { k ∈ ℕ∗ : f ( k ) < n } ) =
α
ﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( 7ﳒﺪ
n 1
α (
f ( n ) = n + = 1 +
) n = αn
α
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ . 1 + α1 = αﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , f ( n ) = αn
ù ﻓﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( 240 ) = 388
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ABCﻓﻴﻪ . AB = ACﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﲤﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻭﲤﺲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Pﻭ Q
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ PQﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
. ABC
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 172
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ A′ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C ′ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻳﻘﻊ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ
Cﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ، BACﻭﻳﻘﻊ O ′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C ′ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] ، [ BC
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ ، AB = ACﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ BACﻫﻮ
ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ BCﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Oﻭ O ′ﺗﻘﻊ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ dﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ
] . [ BCﻭﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺃﻥﹼ A′ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂﹼ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ) (OO ′ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
A ، dﻓﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ dﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﹴ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ.
C′ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ PQﺗﻘﻊ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ . dﺃﻱ ﺇ ﻥﹼ Mﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ
O′ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ . BAC
Q M P
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Mﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
O
B C C ACBﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ Mﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
A′ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ O ′ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ] [ AA′ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ] [ AA′ﻫﻮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، C ′ﻓﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
PCA′ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ PMA′ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ CPMA′
ﺭﻳﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(1 PCM = PA′ M
ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Cﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﻴﺔ PA′ Mﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ POMﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ .ﺇﺫﻥ
)(2 PA′ M = 21 POM
= ، OPAﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺄ ﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ π
2 ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( APﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ
OPAﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 = POM π
2 = − 12 BAC 1
2 ( π − BAC ) = ACB
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﰲ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﺃﻥﹼ
ACM = 21 ACB
ﳑﺎ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) (CMﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ . ACBﻭﺃﻥﹼ Mﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ
ù ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
173 ﻋﺎﻡ 1978
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ∗ . ϕ : ℕ∗ → ℕﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
n n
∗ ) ϕ (k 1
∀n ∈ ℕ , ≥ ∑ k2 ∑k
k =1 k =1
n
= ، Anﻭﻟﻨﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ . A0 = 0 Anﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) ∑ ϕ ( k ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≥ 1ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
k =1
)n ( n + 1
≥ . Anﻷ ﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ nﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﻣﻦ ℕﻳﻜﻦ
2
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ } . {1,2, …, n
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n n n n
) ϕ (k 1 A A
= ∑ k2 = ) ∑ k 2 ( Ak − Ak −1 ∑ k 2k − ∑ kk −2 1
k =1 k =1 k =1 k =1
n n −1
A A
= ∑ k 2k − ∑ ( k +k 1 )2
k =1 k =1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
n n −1
ϕ (k ) A 2k + 1
∑ k 2 = nn2 + ∑ ( k + 1 )2 k 2 Ak
k =1 k =1
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ ، θ : ℕ∗ → ℕ∗, θ ( n ) = nﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n
)n ( n + 1
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , = Bn = ) ∑ θ (k
k =1 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n n −1
1 1 2k + 1
∑ k = n 2 Bn + ∑ k 2 ( k + 1 )2 Bk
k =1 k =1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
n n n −1
) ϕ (k 1 1 2k + 1
) ∑ k 2 − ∑ k = n 2 ( An − Bn ) + ∑ ( k + 1 )2 k 2 ( Ak − Bk
k =1 k =1 k =1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻷﻥﹼ . ∀m ≥ 1, Am ≥ Bmﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ù ، ∀m ≥ 1, Am = Bmﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . ∀m ≥ 1, ϕ ( m ) = m
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 174
ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻈﹼﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻝ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻭﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﹼﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 1978
ﺍﲰﺎﹰ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﳛﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺣﱴ . 1978ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻀﻮ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪﻩ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ
ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪﻩ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺼﻎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻀﻮﹴ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ .ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Hﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ.
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 1978 = 329 × 6 + 4ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ، P1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﹼﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ 330ﻋﻀﻮﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ .ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ، B1ﻭﺇﱃ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ، M 1ﻭﻧﻀﻊ . a1 = min M 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ C 1ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} } N 1 = {a − a1 : a ∈ M 1 \{a1
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 329ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ .ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ Hﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
.1ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ C 1ﺇﱃ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ . P1
.2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻀﻮﹴ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ C 1ﺇﱃ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ . P1
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 329 = 5 × 65 + 4ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ .1ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ،
ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ، P2ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ C 1ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 66ﻋﻀﻮﺍﹰ .ﻧﺮﻣﺰ
ﺇﱃ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ، B2ﺃﻱ ( ، B2 = C 1 ∩ P2ﻭﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ M 2
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ . a2 = min M 2
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ C 2ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} } N 2 = {a − a2 : a ∈ M 2 \{a2
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 65ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ .ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ Hﻭﺇﱃ .2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
.1ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ C 2ﺇﱃ . P1 ∪ P2
.2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻀﻮﹴ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ C 2ﺇﱃ . P1 ∪ P2
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ C 2ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ P2ﻓﻬﻮ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺇﱃ ، P2ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ B2 ⊂ C 1ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ C 1ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . P1
175 ﻋﺎﻡ 1978
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 65 = 4 × 16 + 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ .1ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ،ﻧﺮﻣﺰ
ﺇﱃ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎﻫﺎ ، P3ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ C 2ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 17ﻋﻀﻮﺍﹰ.
ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ، B3ﺃﻱ ( ، B3 = C 2 ∩ P3ﻭﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
M 3ﻭﻧﻀﻊ . a 3 = min M 3
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ C 3ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} } N 3 = {a − a 3 : a ∈ M 3 \{a 3
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 16ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ.
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ Hﻭﺇﱃ .2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
.1ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ C 3ﺇﱃ . P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3
.2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃ ﻱ ﻋﻀﻮﹴ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ C 3ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
. P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ C 3ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ P3ﻓﻬﻮ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
، P3ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ B3 ⊂ C 2ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ C 2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . P1 ∪ P2
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 16 = 3 × 5 + 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ .1ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ،ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ
ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎﻫﺎ ، P4ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ C 3ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 6ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ .ﻧﺮﻣﺰ
ﺇﱃ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ، B4ﺃﻱ ( ، B4 = C 3 ∩ P4ﻭﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ M 4
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ . a 4 = min M 4
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ C 4ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} } N 4 = {a − a 4 : a ∈ M 4 \{a 4
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 5ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ.
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ Hﻭﺇﱃ .2ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
.1ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ C 4ﺇﱃ . P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3 ∪ P4
.2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃ ﻱ ﻋﻀﻮﹴ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ C 4ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
. P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3 ∪ P4
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ C 4ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ P4ﻓﻬﻮ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
، P4ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ B4 ⊂ C 3ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ C 3ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 176
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 5 = 2 × 2 + 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ .1ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺔ ،ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ
ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎﻫﺎ ، P5ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ C 4ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 3ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ .ﻧﺮﻣﺰ
ﺇﱃ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ، B5ﺃﻱ ( ، B5 = C 4 ∩ P5ﻭﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ M 5
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ . a5 = min M 5
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ C 5ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} } N 5 = {a − a 5 : a ∈ M 5 \{a 5
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ.
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ Hﻭﺇﱃ .2ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
.1ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ C 5ﺇﱃ . P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3 ∪ P4 ∪ P5
.2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃ ﻱ ﻋﻀﻮﹴ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ C 5ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
. P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3 ∪ P4 ∪ P5
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ C 5ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ P5ﻓﻬﻮ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
، P5ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇ ﻥﹼ B5 ⊂ C 4ﻭ ﺍ ﻟﻔﺮ ﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭ ﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ C 4ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇ ﱃ ﺍ ﻻ ﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ
. P1 ∪ P2 ∪ P3 ∪ P4
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ .1ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ card (C 5 ) ≥ 2ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ C 5ﻋﻀﻮﺍﻥ Xﻭ Yﻣﻦ
ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ . P6
.2ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻳﺘﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺭ ﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ X ﻭ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
ﻭ Yﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ P6ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ . H
ù ﻓﺎﻟﻔﺮﺽ Hﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﻭ qﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
1319
p ( −1 )k −1
q
= ∑ k
k =1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ 1979ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . p
2n −1
( −1 )k −1
= ، Snﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ : ∑ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﺍﻤﻮﻉ Snﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
k =1 k
n n −1
1 1
= Sn ∑ 2k − 1 − ∑ 2k
k =1 k =1
2n −1 n −1 n −1
1 1 1
= ∑ ∑−∑ −
k k =1 2k k =1 2k
k =1
2n −1 n −1 2n −1
1 1 1
= ∑ k
− = ∑k ∑k
k =1 k =1 k =n
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
n −1 n −1
1 1
= Sn ∑n +k =
k ⇝n −1−k
∑ 2n − 1 − k
k =0 k =0
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
n −1 n −1
1 1 1 3n − 1 1
∑ = Sn ( +
2 k = 0 n + k 2n − 1 − k
= ∑ )
) 2 k = 0 ( n + k )( 2n − 1 − k
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 2mﺃﻥﹼ
m −1 2m −1
1 1
) ∑ ( 2m + k )( 4m − 1 − k =
k ⇝ 2m −1−k
) ∑ ( 2m + k )( 4m − 1 − k
k =0 k =m
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
m −1
1
) (1 ∑ ) S 2m = ( 6m − 1
k = 0 2m + k
( ) )( 4m − 1 − k
177
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 178
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
! ) ( 4m − 1
= ) Qm = ( 2m )( 2m + 1 )⋯( 4m − 1
! ) ( 2m − 1
ﻛﺎﻥ
m −1
1
∑ × Pm = Qm ∗∈ ℕ
k =0
( 2m + k () 4m − 1 − k )
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ( 6m − 1 ) Pm = QmS 2m
p
= S 2mﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ℓ = 6m − 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
q
) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ ℓﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، pQmﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ℓﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ Qmﺃﻱ ) ، gcd ( ℓ,Qm ) = 1ﻷﻧﻪ
ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( 2m + k )0≤k <2mﻓﻬﻮ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﺃﻭﱄ
ﻣﻊ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺀ ﺿﺮﺎ ﺃﻱ . ( Qmﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ﺩ ﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﻃﺌﺔ ، Gaussﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ℓ | pQm
ﻭ gcd ( ℓ,Qm ) = 1ﺃﻥﹼ ℓﻳﻘﺴﻢ . p
¤ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ℓﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ 6m − 1ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ℓﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﻂ
. ∑ k =1 ﺃﻱ ﻛﺴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ
4m −1 ( −1 )k −1
k
ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، m = 330ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
6m − 1 = 1979ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻧﺘﺮﻛﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ
ù ﺃﻭﱄ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 43ﻻ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . 1979
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺷﻮﺭ ﺍﹰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﹰ ،ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﳘﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﻤﺴﺎﻥ A0A1A2A3A4
ﻭ . B0B1B2B3B4ﻧﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺗﲔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﹰ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ Ai B jﻣﻊ i
ﻭ jﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، { 0,1, …, 4ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﲔ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺃ ﻻﹼ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻋﺪﺗﲔ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
179 ﻋﺎﻡ 1979
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﲔ Xﻭ Yﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺷﻮﺭ ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ) c ( XYﺇﱃ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ XYﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻠﹼﻮﻧﺔ
ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ Rﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ،ﺃﻭ Bﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Cﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ
ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻧﲔ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ Cﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ .ﻭ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ iﻣﻦ ، ℤﻧﻜﺘﺐ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ Aiﻭ Biﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
Ai mod 5ﻭ Bi mod 5ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ A0A1A2A3A4ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻧﺎﳘﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
c ( Ai Ai +1 ) = Cﻭ . c ( Ai −1Ai ) = C
ﲢﻤﻞ ﺛﻼ ﺙﹲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ([ Ai B j ])0≤ j ≤4ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﺎﻥ Bkﻭ Bk +1ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻘﺎﻥ ) . c ( Ai Bk ) = c ( Ai Bk +1
Ai −1 Ai +1 ﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . c ( Ai Bk ) = c ( Ai Bk +1 ) = C
Ai
ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ Ai Bk +1Ai +1ﻭ Ai Bk Bk +1
ﻭ ، Ai Bk Ai +1ﺍﻟﱵ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﻠﻌﺎﻥ ﳛﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ Cﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ، Cﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ Ai +1Bk Bk +1ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ
Bk Bk +1
Cﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ.
Ai −1 Ai +1 ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . c ( Ai Bk ) = c ( Ai Bk +1 ) = C :
Ai
ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ Ai Bk +1Ai −1ﻭ Ai Bk Bk +1
ﻭ ، Ai Bk Ai −1ﺍﻟﱵ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﻠﻌﺎﻥ ﳛﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ Cﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ، Cﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ Ai −1Bk Bk +1ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ
Bk B k +1
Cﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ.
ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ A0A1A2A3A4ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ B0B1B2B3B4ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﺪ ﻻﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Cﺇﱃ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ
A0A1A2A3A4ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ Cﻟﻮﻥﹶ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ . B0B1B2B3B4
ﲢﻤﻞ ﺛﻼ ﺙﹲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ([ A0B j ])0≤ j ≤4ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﺎﻥ Bkﻭ Bk +1ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻘﺎﻥ ) . c ( A0Bk ) = c ( A0Bk +1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 180
A0 A1 ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، c ( A0Bk ) = c ( A0Bk +1 ) = Cﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺭﺃ ﻳﻨﺎ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩ ﺭ ﺍﺳﺔ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥ ﻳﻜﻮ ﻥ ﻷﺿﻼ ﻉ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
Bk +1
A1Bk Bk +1ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ Cﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
Bk
A1
A0
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، c ( A0Bk ) = c ( A0Bk +1 ) = Cﺇ ﺫﹾ ﰲ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A0Bk Bk +1ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ Cﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
Bk Bk +1 ﺧﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Aﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ .ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺗﲔ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﲤﺮﺍﻥ ﰲ ﳊﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A
ﻭﺗﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ .ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ Aﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Pﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻬﻤﺎ.
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ Cﻭ C ′ﺇﱃ ﺍ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺘﲔ .ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Bﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ.
ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ABﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﰲ ، Dﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C ′ﰲ . D ′
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺪﺅﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Aﻭﳏﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻬﺎ
ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( DD ′ﻭﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( ABﻭﻧﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ
ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ . ℂﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ βﻭ δﻭ ) ، δ ′ﻣﻊ ، (δ ≠ δ ′ﻋﻠﻰ
ﳓﻮﹴ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ 0ﻭ 2 i βﻭ 2δﻭ 2δ ′ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Dﻭ D ′ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻓﻴﻤﺜﹼﻞ
δ + i βﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ، Cﻭﳝﺜﹼﻞ δ ′ + i βﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ O ′ﻣﺮﻛﺰ . C ′
M θ′ B
Mθ
θ
O
O′
θ
D′ A P D
181 ﻋﺎﻡ 1979
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . ( rad/s ) 1
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ M θﻭ M θ′ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ θﻣﻦ ] [ 0,2πﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺘﲔ
(OA,OM θ ) = θﻭ (O ′A,O ′M θ′ ) = θ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺎﻥ ) ξ ( θﻭ ) ζ ( θﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﺜﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ M θﻭ M θ′ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
ξ ( θ ) − ( δ + i β ) = ( 0 − ( δ + i β ) )e i θ
ζ ( θ ) − ( δ ′ + i β ) = ( 0 − ( δ ′ + i β ) )e i θ
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
ξ ( θ ) = ( δ + i β )( 1 − e i θ ) = −2 i ( δ + i β ) sin ( θ2 )e i θ /2
θ
ζ ( θ ) = ( δ ′ + i β )( 1 − e i θ ) = −2 i ( δ ′ + i β ) sin ( 2 )e i θ /2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
ξ ( θ ) = 2 ( β − i δ ) sin ( θ2 )e i θ /2
θ
ζ ( θ ) = 2 ( β − i δ ′ ) sin ( )e i θ /2
2
ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Pﳝﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ zﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ M θﻭ M θ′ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
z − ξ ( θ ) 2 = z − ζ ( θ ) 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
2 Re ( z ( ζ ( θ ) − ξ ( θ ) ) ) = ζ ( θ ) 2 − ξ ( θ ) 2
ﺃﻭ
( δ ′ − δ ) sin ( θ2 ) Im ( ze i θ /2 θ
) ) = ( δ ′2 − δ 2 ) sin2 ( 2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
Im ( ( z − δ − δ ′ )e − i θ /2 ) = 0
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ zﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ θﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، z = δ + δ ′
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ δ + δ ′ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ DD ′ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، P
ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ DD ′ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ M θﻭ M θ′ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ
ù ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ . θﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 182
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﹰ Pﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ Aﻣﻨﻪ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Bﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Mﻣﻦ
AB + AM
= ) ϕ ( Mﺃﻋﻈﻤﻴﺔ. Pﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
BM
B ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Oﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ . Pﻧﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ
β ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺅﻫﺎ ، Oﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ
O ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﻫﻲ ) ( α, 0, 0ﻣﻊ ، α ≥ 0ﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
α
Bﻫﻲ ) ( 0, 0, βﻣﻊ . β > 0ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ
θ
r
A M
= a = AB α2 + β 2
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ، Pﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺎ ) . ( r cos θ, r sin θ, 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ rﻭ θﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ϕﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
a + ( r cos θ − α )2 + r 2 sin2 θ
= ) ϕ : ℝ + × ℝ → ℝ, ϕ ( r , θ
r 2 + β2
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
a + r 2 + α2 − 2r α cos θ
= ) ϕ ( r, θ
r 2 + β2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
a + r 2 + α2 + 2r α a +α+r
)(1 = ) ϕ ( r, θ ) ≤ ϕ ( r, π =
r 2 + β2 r 2 + β2
ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
) ( α ≠ 0, θ = π ﺃﻭ (α )= 0
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
a +α+x
= ) h : ℝ + → ℝ, h ( x
x 2 + β2
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
x 2 + β 2 − (a + α + x ) x β 2 − (a + α ) x
= ) h′(x 3 = 3
( ) x 2 + β2 ( ) x 2 + β2
183 ﻋﺎﻡ 1979
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ h
x 0 a −α ∞+
) h′(x + 0 −
2a
) h (x ր a −α ց
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . β 2 = (a + α )(a − αﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ) ϕ ( r , π ) ≤ ϕ (a − α, π
ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . r = a − α
ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2a
∀ ( r , θ ) ∈ ℝ + × ℝ, ≤ ) ϕ ( r, θ
a −α
ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
r = aﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . α = 0
ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( r, θ ) = (a − α, πﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . α ≠ 0
¤ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Aﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ، Pﺃﻱ (α = 0ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Mﻣﻦ Pﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ϕ ( M ) = max ϕﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ
Aﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . AB
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ Oﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ) ، Pﺃﻱ (α ≠ 0
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Mﻣﻦ Pﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ϕ ( M ) = max ϕﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ . M 0ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ M 0ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (OAﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ M 0ﻭ ، A
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ
AM 0 = AO + OM 0 = α + r = a = AB
ﺇﺫﻥ M 0 ،ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) [ AOﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ Aﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ù . AB
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 184
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ aﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ Saﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
x1 + 2x 2 + 3x 3 + 4x 4 + 5x 5 = a
x 1 + 23 x 2 + 33 x 3 + 4 3 x 4 + 53 x 5 = a 2
x 1 + 2 5 x 2 + 3 5 x 3 + 4 5 x 4 + 55 x 5 = a 3
ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺣﻠﻮﻻﹰ ) ( x1, x 2, x 3, x 4, x 5ﻣﻦ . ( ℝ + )5
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ] ℝ 2 [ Xﻓﻀﺎﺀ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥ
ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ Saﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
5
)(1 ∀P ∈ ℝ 2 [ X ], = ) aP ( a ) ∑ kxk P ( k 2
k =1
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ P = 1ﻭ P = Xﻭ P = Xﳓﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﰲ ، Sa
2
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﻥﹼ ) ( 1, X , X 2ﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ
] . ℝ2 [X
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ aﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ . Aﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ) ( x1, x 2, x 3, x 4, x 5ﻣﻦ ( ℝ + )5ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) ، ( 1
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ P ( X ) = ( X − a )2ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
5
2
) ∑ kxk ( k 2 − a =0
k =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2
∀k ∈ {1, 2, …, 5 }, xk ( k 2 − a ) = 0
ﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ( x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 , x 5 ) = ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. a = 0
ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ( x1, x 2, x 3, x 4 , x 5 ) ≠ ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ aﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} . {1, 4, 9,16, 25ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} A ⊂ { 0,1, 4, 9,16, 25
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ a = m 2ﻣﻊ 0 ≤ m ≤ 5ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ( x1, x 2, x 3, x 4, x 5ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ x k = mﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k = mﻭ x k = 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k ≠ mﺣﻼﹰ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
( ℝ + )5ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ . Sa
ù ﺇﺫﻥ } ، A = { 0,1, 4, 9,16, 25ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
185 ﻋﺎﻡ 1979
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Aﻭ Eﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﲔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ .ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺿﻔﺪﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Aﻗﺎﻓﺰﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻔﺪﻉ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻔﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﲔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ، Eﻭﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Eﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮ ﻗﹼﻒ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ anﻋﺪﺩ
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻔﺪﻉ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ Eﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺍﺕ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
a2n −1 = 0
1
= a2n
2
) (( 2 + 2 )n −1 − ( 2 − 2 )n −1
C ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﻫﻮ ﰲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
D B
. (an )n ≥1
E A ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻤﻦ . ABCDEFGHﺛﹸﻢ
F H
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ bnﻟﻴﺪﻝﹼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻔﺪﻉ
G
ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ Cﺇﱃ Eﰲ ﻋﺪ ﺩ n ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺍﺕ .ﻭﻫﻮ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻔﺪﻉ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ Gﺇﱃ
Eﰲ ﻋﺪ ﺩ n ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺍﺕ .ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ RXnﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ Xﺇﱃ E
( )
ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻗﻔﺰﺓ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . n > 2ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
↷↷ ↷↷
RAn
( )
= ∪ ) ) ( ABC − RC( n −2 ) ) ∪ ( ABA − RA( n −2
↷↷ ↷↷
) ) ( AHG − RG( n −2 ) ) ∪ ( AHA − RA( n −2
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . an = 2an −2 + 2bn −2
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n > 2ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
↷↷ ↷↷ ↷↷
) ) RCn = (CBA − RA( n −2 ) ) ∪ (CBC − RC( n −2 ) ) ∪ (CDC − RC( n −2
( )
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. bn = an −2 + 2bn −2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n > 2, an = 2an −2 + 2bn −2
)(1
bn = an −2 + 2bn −2
ﻭﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ a1 = a2 = 0ﻭ b1 = 0ﻭ .b2 = 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 186
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
an 2 2
M = 1 2 ﻭ Zn = b
n
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
0 0
Z1 = 0 , Z 2 = 1 , ∀n > 2, Z n = MZ n −2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ∀n ≥ 1, Z 2n −1 = M n −1Z1 = 0ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ≥ 1, Z 2n = M n −1Z 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Mﻫﻮ XM ( X ) = X 2 − 4X + 2ﻭﻟﻪ ﺟﺬﺭﺍﻥ ﳘﺎ
2 − 2ﻭ . 2 + 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ X n −1ﻋﻠﻰ ) XM ( Xﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
n −1 n −1
) (2 − 2 ) (2 + 2
(2 + 2 − X ) + ) (X − 2 + 2
2 2 2 2
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
( 2 − 2 ) 2 −2 ( 2 + 2 ) 2 2
n −1 n −1
n −1
=
M
2 2 + 2 2 2
−1 2
1
ﺇﺫﻥ
( 2 − 2 ) −2 ( 2 + 2 ) 2
n −1 n −1
= Z 2n 2 + 2
2 2 2 2
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
n −1 n −1
) (2 + 2 ) − (2 − 2
= a2n
2
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Pﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Dﻭ Eﻭ F
ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BCﻭ ) (CAﻭ ) ( ABﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ
BC CA AB
= ) ϕ ( Pﺃﺻﻐﺮﻳﺎﹰ. + + ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Pﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
PD PE PF
A
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Aﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ A
F E
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ PBCﻭ PCAﻭ ، PAB
P
ﺃﻱ
B D C 2A = BC ⋅ PD + CA ⋅ PE + AB ⋅ PF
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
AB CA BC
= x3 = x2ﻭ = x1ﻭ
PF PE PD
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
= y3 = y1ﻭ y2 = CA ⋅ PEﻭ AB ⋅ PF BC ⋅ PD
ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ( x1y1 + x 2y2 + x 3y 3 )2 ≤ ( x 12 + x 22 + x 32 )( y12 + y22 + y 32
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
) ( AB + BC + CA )2 ≤ ϕ ( P )( 2A
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
( AB + BC + CA )2
≥ ) ϕ (P
2A
ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
y1 y y
= 2 = 3
x1 x2 x3
ﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . PD = PE = PFﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻛﻮﻥ Pﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ
ù ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
187
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 188
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ nﻭ ، rﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ، 1 ≤ r ≤ nﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ
} ℕ n = {1, 2, …, nﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ rﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻧﻘﺮﹺ ﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) F ( n, rﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮﻳﺔ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
n +1
= ) F ( n, r
r +1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮ ﻑ } . Pn r = { B ⊂ ℕ n : card ( B ) = rﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Pn r
( ) ( )
= .C nrﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ !n
!) r !(n −r
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
1
= ) F ( n, r
C nr ∑ ) min ( B
B ∈Pn r( )
ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) min ( Bﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ B ∈ Pn rﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، ℕ n −r +1ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ pﻣﻦ ( )
ℕ n −r +1ﺗﺘﺄ ﻟﹼﻒ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { B ∈ Pn r : min ( B ) = pﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ
( )
} { p + 1, …, nﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ r − 1ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺎﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ . pﺇﺫﻥ
−1
card ( { B ∈ Pn r : min ( B ) = p } ) = C nr −
( )
p
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ
n −r +1
−1
∑ ( )r
= ) min ( B ∑ pC nr − p
B ∈Pn p =1
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ،ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Cba = C ba++11 − Cba +1ﻓﻨﻜﺘﺐ
n −r +1
∑ = ) min ( B ∑ ) p (C nr −p +1 − C nr − p
( )r
B ∈Pn p =1
n −r +1 n −r
= ∑ pC nr −p +1 − ∑ pC nr − p
p =1 p =1
n −r n −r
= ∑ ( p + 1 )C nr −p − ∑ pC nr −p
p =0 p =0
n −r n −r
= ∑ C nr −p = ∑ (C nr −+p1 +1 − C nr −+1p ) = C nr ++11
p =0 p =0
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ
n +1
ù +1
F ( n, r ) = C nr + r
= 1 /C n
r +1
189 ﻋﺎﻡ 1981
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ m 2 + n 2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ mﻭ nﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ } ℕ 1981 = {1, 2, …,1981ﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . ( n 2 − nm − m 2 ) = 1
2
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
2
{
A = ( n, m ) ∈ ℕ∗ × ℕ∗ : ( n 2 − nm − m 2 ) = 1 }
ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Aﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) ( n,1ﳒﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ) ( 1,1ﻭ ) ، ( 2,1ﺃﻣﺎ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) ( n, 2ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ) ، ( 3, 2ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﰲ Aﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
}… {( 1,1 ), ( 1, 2 ), ( 2, 3 ), ( 3, 5 ), ( 5, 8 ),
( Fn )n ≥1 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Aﻭﺑﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ : Fibonacci
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
F0 = 0, F1 = 1, ∀n ∈ ℕ, Fn +2 = Fn +1 + Fn
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
δn = Fn2+1 − Fn +1Fn − Fn2
ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
= δn +1 Fn +2 ( Fn +2 − Fn +1 ) − Fn2+1
= ( Fn +1 + Fn ) Fn − Fn2+1
= − ( Fn2+1 − Fn +1Fn − Fn2 ) = −δn
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ، δ0 = 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ . δn = ( −1 )nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , ( Fn +1, Fn ) ∈ A
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ :
} ∗A = { ( Fn +1, Fn ) : n ∈ ℕ
ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ Aﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . n ≥ mﻷﻥﹼ
2
( n 2 − nm − m 2 ) = 1 ⇒ n 2 − nm − m 2 ≥ −1
⇒ n (n − m ) ≥ m 2 − 1 ≥ 0
⇒ n −m ≥ 0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 190
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ . Aﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n > mﻛﺎﻥ . n − m ≤ m
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ n − m > mﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
n 2 − nm − m 2 = n (n − m ) − m 2
> nm − m 2 = m (n − m ) > m 2 ≥ 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﹸﻠﻒ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . n − m ≤ m
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ . Aﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n > mﻛﺎﻥ ) ( m, n − mﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ . A
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻘﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 1 ≤ n − m ≤ mﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ
) m 2 − m(n − m ) − (n − m )2 = − ( n 2 − nm − m 2
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ Aﻭ m = nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ . n = m = 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
( m, n − m ) : n > m
Φ : A → A, Φ ( n, m ) =
) ( 1,1 : n =m
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ) X = (a,bﻣﻦ ، Aﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( X p )p ≥0ﻣﻦ Aﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ
ﻳﻠﻲ ،ﻧﻀﻊ ) X 0 = ( n 0, m0 ) = (a, bﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳊﺪ X p +1 = ( n p +1, m p +1 ) ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ
) X p = ( n p , m pﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) . X p +1 = Φ ( X p
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ na > 1ﻛﺎﻥ nk > mkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 0 ≤ k ≤ aﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﱠﻢ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, a − 1 }, nk − nk +1 = mk +1 ≥ 1
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ a − na = n 0 − na ≥ aﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ na = 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. Xa = ( 1,1 )
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ℓﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
}) ℓ = min { k ∈ ℕ, X k = ( 1,1
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) Xk ≠ ( 1,1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 0 ≤ k ≤ ℓ
ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ rﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, …, ℓ, ℓ + 1ﺃﻥﹼ
)(1 ) X ℓ +1−r = ( Fr +1, Fr
191 ﻋﺎﻡ 1981
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . r = 1
، X ℓ +1−rﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، r ≤ ℓﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ) = ( Fr +1, Fr
) ( m ℓ −r , n ℓ −r − m ℓ −r ) = Φ ( X ℓ −r ) = ( Fr +1, Fr
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
m ℓ −r = Fr +1ﻭ n ℓ −r − m ℓ −r = Fr
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
n ℓ −r = Fr + Fr +1 = Fr +2
ﺇﺫﻥ ) ، X ℓ−r = ( Fr +2, Fr +1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ( 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . r + 1ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، r = ℓ + 1ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ( a, b ) = X 0 = ( Fℓ +2 , Fℓ +1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ } ∗ ، A ⊂ {( Fn +1, Fn ) : n ∈ ℕﻭﺃﻛﻤﻠﻨﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﻫﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
} ∗A = { ( Fn +1, Fn ) : n ∈ ℕ
ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ Fn2 + Fn2+1ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ، Fn +1 ≤ 1981
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳓﺴﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺒﻮﻧﺎﺗﺸﻲ ﻟﻨﺠﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ F15 = 987ﻭ F16 = 1597ﰲ ﺣﲔ
ﺃﻥﹼ . F17 > 1981ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ m 2 + n 2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ mﻭ nﰲ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ℕ 1981ﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ، ( n 2 − nm − m 2 ) = 1ﻫﻮ . 9872 + 15972
2
ù
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، 2ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺘﲔ Pnﻭ Qnﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ :
» : Pnﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ« .
» : Qnﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ« .
.1ﻋﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . Pn
.2ﻋﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ .Qn
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 192
ﺇﻥﹼ P3ﺧﻄﺄ .ﺇﺫ ﻟﻮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ } {k − 2, k − 1, kﻟﻮﺟﺐ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﺃﻭﱄ pﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ kﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ k − 1ﻭ ، k − 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
p = 2ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ k = 2mﻭ . m ≥ 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ2
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 2m −1 − 1 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ.
ﺇﻥﹼ P2kﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ≥ 2ﺇﺫ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} S 2k = { 2k − 2 + j : j ∈ ℕ 2k
ﺇﻥﹼ ) ، m2k = max ( S2k ) = 2 ( 2k − 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ 2k − 1ﻭ 2kﻳﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} S2k \{ m2kﻭﳘﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) 2k ( 2k − 1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) } ، lcm ( S2k \{ m2k
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. m2k | lcm ( S2k \{ m2k } )
ﺇﻥﹼ P2k +1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ≥ 2ﺇﺫ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} S 2k +1 = { 2k − 3 + j : j ∈ ℕ 2k +1
ﺇﻥﹼ ) ، m2k +1 = max ( S2k +1 ) = 2 ( 2k − 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ 2k − 1ﻭ 2k − 2ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ
ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } S2k +1 \{ m2k +1ﻭﳘﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) 2 ( k − 1 )( 2k − 1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ
) } ، lcm ( S2k +1 \{ m2k +1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. m2k +1 | lcm ( S2k +1 \{ m2k +1 } )
¤ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ Pnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ . n ≥ 4
ﺇﻥﹼ Q2kﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ≥ 3ﺇﺫ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} S2′k = { 2k − 6 + j : j ∈ ℕ 2k
ﺇﻥﹼ ) ، m2′k = max ( S2′k ) = 2 ( 2k − 3ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ 2k − 3ﻭ 2k − 4ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } S2′k \{ m2′kﻭﳘﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) 2 ( k − 2 )( 2k − 1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) } ، lcm ( S 2′k \{ m2′kﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . m2′k | lcm ( S 2′k \{ m2′k } ) ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ Q2k
ﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻥﹼ . S2k ≠ S2′k
ﺇﻥﹼ Q2k +1ﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ≥ 4ﺇﺫ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} S2′k +1 = { 2k − 7 + j : j ∈ ℕ 2k +1
m2′k +1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﻥﹼ ) ، m2′k +1 = max ( S2′k +1 ) = 2 ( 2k − 3ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ
) } . lcm ( S2′k +1 \{ m2′k +1ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ Q2k +1ﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻥﹼ . S2k +1 ≠ S2′k +1
193 ﻋﺎﻡ 1981
ﺇﻥﹼ Q5ﻭ Q7ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 5ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} S 5 = { 2, 3, 4, 5, 6ﻭ } S 5′ = { 8, 9,10,11,12
ﻭﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 7ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} S 7 = { 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10ﻭ } S 7′ = { 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11,12
ﺇﻥﹼ Q4ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { x − 3, x − 2, x − 1, xﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . P4ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻛﻞﱡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢﹴ ﺃﻭﻟﹼﻲ pﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ xﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ x − 1ﺃﻭ x − 2ﺃﻭ x − 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ p = 2ﺃﻭ . p = 3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 4ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، xﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ x − 1ﻭ x − 3ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﲔ ،ﺃﻥﹼ 4
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ، x − 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻥ 4 | 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، 9 | xﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) 3 ( x − 1ﻭ ) ، 3 ( x − 2ﺃ ﻥﹼ 9
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، x − 3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻥ 9 | 3ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ x ≥ 4ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، x = 6ﻭﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 3, 4, 5, 6ﻫﻲ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ
ﻟﻠﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ.
ù ¤ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ Qnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . n = 4
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﳍﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ، Mﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻧﻬﺎ
ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻭﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﺲ ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ G
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Gﻭ Oﻭ Mﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، ρﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) CA = C ( A′, ρ
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] ، [ ACﻭ ﻟﻨﺴﻢ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ
ﺍﻟﺪﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﲔ ) CB = C ( B ′, ρﻭ ) . CC = C (C ′, ρ
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ Rﻭ rﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) C = C (G, Rﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ
ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) C ′ = C (O, rﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 194
، BACﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Oﻭ A′ﻭ Aﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Oﻭ A′ﺗﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ Eﻭ Fﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﱵ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C Aﻭ C ′ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ AC
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ AA′ Eﻭ AOFﺃﻥﹼ
AA′ A′ E ρ
= =
AO OF r
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ :
A
E
F
A′
O M
C′
B′ G
B C
، k = OAﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ h = HO,kﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Oﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ . k ′
OA = r
r −ρ
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ
، k = OBﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ . h ( A ) = Aﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ OB = OC
′ OC ′ ′
h ( A ) = A′ﻭ h ( B ) = B ′ﻭ h (C ) = C ′
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ρﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ ،C ′ﺇﺫﻥ Mﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ
ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . A′ B ′C ′ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ) h −1 ( Mﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
، ABCﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ h −1 ( M ) = Gﺃﻭ ) . M = h (Gﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
Oﻭ Mﻭ Gﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
¤ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹶً ﺃﻥﹼ ، kR = ρﻓﺄﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ rﻭ Rﻭ ρﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ
OMﺃﻥﹼ Mﺗﻘﺴﻢ . rR = ρ r + Rﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ OG = k = r +R
r ( ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ )
ù ] [OGﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ . Rr
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℕ × ℕ → ℝﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ℕﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
2
f ( 0, y ) = y + 1ﻭ ) . f ( x + 1, 0 ) = f ( x ,1
) ) . f ( x + 1, y + 1 ) = f ( x , f ( x + 1, y
ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ) . f ( 4,1981
195 ﻋﺎﻡ 1981
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀y > 0, ) f ( 1, y ) = f ( 0, f ( 1, y − 1 ) ) = 1 + f ( 1, y − 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( f ( 1, y ) − y )y ∈ℕﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
f ( 1, 0 ) − 0 = f ( 0,1 ) = 1 + 1 = 2
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀y ∈ ℕ, f ( 1, y ) = y + 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ،
∀y > 0, ) f ( 2, y ) = f ( 1, f ( 2, y − 1 ) ) = 2 + f ( 2, y − 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( f ( 2, y ) − 2y )y ∈ℕﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
f ( 2, 0 ) − 0 = f ( 1,1 ) = 1 + 2 = 3
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀y ∈ ℕ, f ( 2, y ) = 2y + 3
ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﳒﺪ
∀y > 0, ) f ( 3, y ) = f ( 2, f ( 3, y − 1 ) ) = 3 + 2 f ( 3, y − 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( 2−y ( f ( 3, y ) + 3 ))y ∈ℕﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
20 ( f ( 3, 0 ) + 3 ) = f ( 2,1 ) + 3 = 5 + 3 = 23
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀y ∈ ℕ, f ( 3, y ) = 2y + 3 − 3
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ،
∀y > 0, f ( 4, y ) = f ( 3, f ( 4, y − 1 ) ) = 2 f ( 4,y −1 )+3 − 3
ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2
f ( 4, 0 ) + 3 = f ( 3,1 ) + 3 = 21+ 3 = 24 = 22
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ (an )n ∈ℕﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ a 0 = 1ﻭ . an +1 = 2anﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
a1 = 2ﻭ a2 = 22ﻭ
2
a 3 = 22
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ, f ( 4, n ) = an + 3 − 3
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 196
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ) f ( 4,1981ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﻯ 2ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ 1984ﻣﻄﺮﻭﺣﺎﹰ ﻣﻨﻪ . 3
n+3 22
⋰
2
f ( 4, n ) = 22 −3
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℕ∗ → ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﻭ mﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﻜﻦ } . f ( n + m ) − f ( n ) − f ( m ) ∈ { 0,1
f ( 2 ) = 0ﻭ f ( 3 ) > 0ﻭ . f ( 9999 ) = 3333
ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ) . f ( 1982
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℕ∗ → ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
)(H ∀ ( n, m ) ∈ ℕ 2 , } f ( n + m ) − f ( n ) − f ( m ) ∈ { 0,1
ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ pﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( An )n ∈ℕﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
∀n ≥ 0, ) An = 2−n f ( 2n p
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ) ( Hﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀n ∈ ℕ, 0 ≤ f ( 2n +1 p ) − 2 f ( 2n p ) ≤ 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
)(1 ∀n ∈ ℕ, ≤ 0 ≤ An +1 − An n +1
2
n −1 ∞
ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) ∑ n =0 ( An +1 − Anﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ .ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ) ∑ k =0 ( Ak +1 − Ak
ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ An − A0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ . ( An )n ∈ℕﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
αpﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ
)(2 ) αp = lim 2−n f ( 2n p
∞→ n
ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ αﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . α1ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( Hﳒﺪ
) f ( 2n ( p + 1 )) f ( 2n p ) f ( 2n 1
∀n ∈ ℕ, ≤0 n − n − n ≤ n
2 2 2 2
ﻭﲜﻌﻞ nﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ ، αp +1 = αp + αﻭﻫﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ pﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ pﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 ∀p ∈ ℕ∗, αp = p α
197
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 198
ﻟﻨﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ، ( 1ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ pﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
n −1
) f ( 2n p 1 1
≤0 n − f ( p ) ≤ ∑ k +1 = 1 − n
2 k =0 2 2
ﻭﲜﻌﻞ nﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
0 ≤ pα − f ( p ) ≤ 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
)(4 ∀p ∈ ℕ, pα − 1 ≤ f ( p ) ≤ pα
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ f ( 9999 ) = 3333ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( 4ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1 1
≤α≤ +
3 3 9999
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . 660 < 1982α < 661 ﺇﺫﻥ
659 < 1982α − 1 ≤ f ( 1982 ) ≤ 1982α < 661
ù ﻭﻷﻥﹼ f ( 1982 ) ∈ ℕﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( 1982 ) = 660
¤ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ fﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ) ( Hﻳﻮﺟﺪ αﻣﻦ ℝ +
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, f ( n ) = n α ﺃﻭ ∀n ∈ ℕ∗, f ( n ) = n α − 1
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ A1A2A3ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ .ﻧﺮﻣﺰ akﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﺱ
، Akﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ M kﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ، akﻭ Tkﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
A1A2A3ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ، akﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Skﻧﻈﲑﺓ Tkﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
. Akﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( M1S1ﻭ ) ( M 2S2ﻭ ) ( M 3S 3ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . A1A2A3ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Skﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ) . (OAk
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ . T 3 = S2 S3 S1ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ T 3ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺛﻼﺙ
ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳏﺎﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﻛﺎﻥ T 3ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﺍﹰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﹰ ﳏﻮﺭﻩ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .O
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ S1 (T3 ) = T2ﻭ S3 (T2 ) = T1ﻭ ، S2 (T1 ) = T3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ﺃﻥﹼ . T 3 (T3 ) = T3ﺇﺫﻥ T 3ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳏﻮﺭﻩ ) . (OT3
199 ﻋﺎﻡ 1982
A1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
S1 ( S1 ) = T1ﻭ S3 (T1 ) = T2ﻭ S2 (T2 ) = S 2
ﺇﺫﻥ
S3 S2
T3 T 3 ( S1 ) = S 2
O
T2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) ( S1S2ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ
) (OT3
S 1
ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ، T 3ﻭﻷ ﻥﹼ ) (OT3ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( A1A2
A2 T A3
1
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . ( S1S2 ) ( A1A2
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ T2 = S1 S2 S3ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳏﻮﺭ
ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (OT2ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، ( S 3S1 ) ( A3A1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ T1 = S3 S1 S2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻩ ﻫﻮ ) ، (OT1ﺃﻥﹼ ) . ( S2S 3 ) ( A2A3
A1 ) ( A1S1 ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Xﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ
ﻭ ) . ( A2S2ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ Hﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Xﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
. H ( S1 ) = A1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ S2ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ
S3 S2 ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( S1S2ﻭ ) ، ( A2S2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) H ( S2ﻫﻲ
X
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) ( A2S2ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A1ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ
) ( S1S2ﺃﻱ ﻣﻊ ) ( A1A2ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ، A2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
S1
A2 A3
H ( S 2 ) = A2
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ S 3ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( S1S 3ﻭ ) ( S 3S 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) H ( S 3
ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A1ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ) ، ( S1S 3ﺃﻱ ) ، ( A1A3ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A2ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ) ، ( S2S 3ﺃﻱ ) ، ( A2A3ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ A3ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . H ( S 3 ) = A3
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺄ ﻣﻠﻨﺎ ، H ′ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Gﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ) ،ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎﺗﻪ ( ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ، − 21ﺗﻴﻘﹼﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ H ′ ( Ak ) = M kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } . k ∈ {1, 2, 3
Hﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ Hﲢﺎﻛﻴﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ( Sk ) = M k ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ = H′ H
} ، {1, 2, 3ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( S1M 1ﻭ ) ( S2M 2ﻭ ) ( S 3M 3ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ
ù . Hﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 200
ﺗﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ( xn )n ∈ ℕﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻓﻴﻬﺎ . x 0 = 1
.1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ mﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
x 02 x12
x m2 −1
+ +⋯+ ≥ 3.999
x1 x2 xm
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ( yn )n ∈ℕﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ y0 = 1ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
y02 y12 y2
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, + + ⋯ + n −1 < 4
y1 y2 yn
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Dﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ( xn )n ∈ ℕﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ
ﲢﻘﹼﻖ . x 0 = 1
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ X = ( x n )n ∈ ℕﻣﻦ Dﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) S ( Xﻣﻦ }∞ ℝ∗+ ∪ {+ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
∞
x k2
= ) S (X ∑
k = 0 x k +1
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ min S ( X ) = 4ﺣﱴ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ .1ﻭ .2
X ∈D
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ X = ( x n )n ∈ ℕﻣﻦ ، Dﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ nﻣﻦ . ℕﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
∗
ﻛﻮﺷﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
n −1 2 n −1 xk 2 n −1 xk2 n −1
∑ k ∑ xk +1 k +1 ∑ xk +1 ∑ k +1
x
k = 0
= ⋅ x ≤ × x
k =0 k =0 k =0
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n −1 2 n −1 x k2 n
∑ x k ≤ × ∑ x k
∑ k
) (1
=0
k = 0 xk +1 k =1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
n −1 2 n −1 2
n −1
1 +
∑ k ∑ k
x − 1 − x = 4 ×
∑ k
x k
k =1 k =1 =1
ﺇﺫﻥ
2
n −1 n −1
4 × ∑ x k ≤ ∑ x k
k =1 k = 0
201 ﻋﺎﻡ 1982
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ) ( 1ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
n −1 n −1 2 n −1 xk2 n
∑ 4 × ∑ x k ≤ ∑ x k ≤
× ∑ x k
k =1 k = 0 k = 0 x k +1 k =1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
n −1
4xn xk2
)(2 ∀n ∈ ℕ∗, 4− n ≤∑ ) ≤ S (X
∑ k =1 xk k = 0 xk +1
x
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﹶً ، lim n n = 0ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
n →∞ ∑k =1 x k
∞
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ∞ ، ∑ xk = +ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ :
k =1
xn x0
∀n ≥ 1, ≤0 n ≤ n
∑ k =1 x k ∑ k =1 xk
∞
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ∞ ، ∑ x k = ℓ < +ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ lim x n = 0
∞→ n
k =1
xn
. lim ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ) ،ﻷﻥﹼ ، (0 < x 0 ≤ ℓﺃﻥﹼ = 0
∞→ n ∑kn =1 xk
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 2ﻭﺟﻌﻞ nﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ . S ( X ) ≥ 4ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ
ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . inf S ( X ) ≥ 4
X ∈D
yn = 2ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ −n
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ Y = ( yn )n ∈ ℕﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
n −1 n −1
y2 1 1
∀n ∈ ℕ ,∗
∑ yk +k 1 = 4 × ∑ 2k +1 = 4 1 − 2n < 4
k =0 k =0
( )
ù ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . S (Y ) = 4 ﺇﺫﻥ . min S ( X ) = 4ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
X ∈D
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ℤﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Enﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 = n
.1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﹶﺒﹺﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Enﺣﻼﹰ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ، ℤ2ﻓﺈﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ.
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ E1982ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺣﻠﻮﻻﹰ ﰲ . ℤ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 202
.1ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ 3xy 2 − y 3ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭ
( x − y )3 = x 3 − 3x 2y + 3xy 2 − y 3
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 = 2x 3 − 3x 2y + ( y − x )3
= −x 3 − 3x 2 ( y − x ) + ( y − x )3
= ( y − x )3 − 3 ( y − x ) (−x )2 + (−x )3
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) X1 = ( x , yﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Enﻛﺎﻥ ) X 2 = ( y − x , −x
ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ X 3 = ( −y, x − y ) ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺣﻼﹰ ﳍﺎ.
ﺇﻥﹼ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ X1 = X 2ﺃﻭ X 2 = X 3ﺃﻭ X 3 = X1ﻏﲑ ﳑﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ
ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ) X1 = ( 0, 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻥﹼ . n ≠ 0ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﹶﺒﹺﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Enﺣﻼﹰ ﻗﹶﺒﹺﻠﺖ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ
ﺣﻠﻮﻝﹴ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ.
.2ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ E2ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ . 9ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ( ℤ/9ℤ )2
ﻳﻜﻦ . x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 ≠ 2 mod 9
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3z mod 9 0 3 −3 0 3 −3 0 3 −3
z 3 mod 9 0 1 −1 0 1 −1 0 1 −1
( z 3 − 3z ) mod 9 0 −2 2 0 −2 2 0 −2 2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ x 3 = ε mod 9ﻣﻊ } . ε ∈ {−1, 0,1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ 3x = 3ε mod 9
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ yﻣﻦ ℤ/9ℤﻛﺎﻥ
x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 = ε − 3εy 2 + y 3 mod 9
= ( y − ε )3 − 3 ( y − ε ) ε2 − ε mod 9
203 ﻋﺎﻡ 1982
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ :
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ε = 0ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، 9ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ . x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 ∈ { 0,1, 8 } :
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ε = 1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، 9ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ . x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 ∈ {1, 8, 6 } :
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ε = −1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، 9ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ . x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 ∈ {1, 8, 3 } :
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ x 3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 mod 9ﻫﻲ } ، { 0,1, 3, 6, 8ﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ nﻋﻠﻰ 9ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، { 2, 4, 5, 7ﻣﺎ ﻗﹶﺒﹺﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Enﺣﻠﻮﻻﹰ ﰲ
. ℤﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻷﻥﹼ 1982 = 2 mod 9ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ E1982ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺣﻠﻮﻻﹰ ﰲ
ù .ℤ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺪﺳﹰﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺎﹰ M . ABCDEFﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ] ، [ ACﻭ Nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ
] . [CEﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
AM CN
= =r
AC CE
ﻋﻴﻦ rﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bﻭ Mﻭ Nﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
C B ﻟﻨﻄﺎ ﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎ ﻁ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ ﻱ ،ﻭ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍ ﻷ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ ﺍ ﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻳﺔ ، ℂﻭ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ
) . j = exp ( 2 π3 iﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻧﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﻷ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ ﺍ ﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻳﺔ 1
M
D N A
E F
ﻭ − j2ﻭ jﻭ j2ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Eﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮ ﺽ ،ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ) 1 + r ( j − 1ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Mﻭﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ
) j + r ( j2− jﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Nﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ . AC = CE
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
BM = 1 + j2 + r ( j − 1 ) = −r + ( r − 1 ) j
BN = j2 + j + r ( j2 − j ) = −1 − r − 2r j
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﹼﺮﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) ( 1, jﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bﻭ Nﻭ Mﺗﻘﻊ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ det ( BM , BN ) = 0ﺃﻱ ، 3r 2 − 1 = 0ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
1
ù = .r
3
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 204
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Sﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 100ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) L = ( A0, A1, …, Anﻃﺮﻳﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﻀﻠﻌﻴﺎﹰ
ﻏﲑ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ) ( A0 ≠ Anﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ . Sﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ
Pﻣﻦ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ Sﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ Lﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ Pﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1/2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ Xﻭ Yﻣﻦ Lﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ
Lﺍﶈﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 198
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﻣﻦ Lﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ] ، [ Ak Ak +1ﻣﻊ ، 0 ≤ k < nﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ Lﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Mﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) ، dL ( Mﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ، L
ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
k −1
= ) dL ( M ∑ Aj Aj +1 + Ak M
j =0
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ℓ = dL ( Anﻫﻮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ، Lﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) M ֏ dL ( Mﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ
ϕ
ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍﹰ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ Lﻭﺍﺎﻝ ] ، [ 0, ℓﻧﺮﻣﺰ ϕﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ Pﻣﻦ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ Sﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ Lﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ
ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 12ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {t ∈ [0, ℓ ] : d(P, ϕ(t )) ≤ 12ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ،
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
≤ )) t(P ) = min {t ∈ [0, ℓ ] : dd (P, ϕ(t 1
2
}
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﺩﺍﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ Lﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ A0ﻛﺎﻥ )) ϕ(t(Pﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺼﻠﻪ
Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ Lﻭﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 12ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . P
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Pﻭ Qﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻥ ) t ( P ) ≠ t (Qﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ
ﺃﻥﹼ t ( P ) = t (Q ) = τﻭﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) M = ϕ(τﻛﺎﻥ
1 1
≤ PQ ≤ PM + MQ + =1
2 2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
ﻟﻨﺴﻢ ﺇﺫﻥ P0ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Mﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ Lﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ، A0
ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ،ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ) t ( P0ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) t (Qﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ Qﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ . S
205 ﻋﺎﻡ 1982
ﻟﻨﺴﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ P1ﻭ P3ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﲔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﺱ P0ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ، Sﻭﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) . t ( P1 ) < t ( P3
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺃﻳﻦ L1ﻭ L2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
)] ) L1 = ϕ ([ 0,t ( P1ﻭ )] L2 = ϕ ( [ t ( P1 ) , ℓ
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} J = { P ∈ [ P0P3 ] : d ( P, L1 ) ≤ 12
≤ ) ) = { P ∈ [ P0P3 ] : ∃t ∈ [ 0, t ( P1 ) ], d ( P , ϕ ( t 1
2 }
ﻫﺬﻩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺻﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﺎ ﲢﻮﻱ . P0ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ P ֏ PP3ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ
ﻋﻠﻰ . Jﻓﺘﻮﺟﺪ X ′ﻣﻦ Jﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
} X ′P3 = min { PP3 : P ∈ J
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ t0ﻣﻦ ] ) [ 0,t ( P1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ d ( X ′, ϕ(t0 ) ) ≤ 12ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) . X = ϕ ( t0
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} Jɶ = { P ∈ [ P0P3 ] : d ( P, L2 ) ≤ 12
≤ ) ) = { P ∈ [ P0P3 ] : ∃t ∈ [ t ( P1 ) , ℓ ], d ( P, ϕ ( t 1
2 }
ﻫﺬﻩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺻﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﺎ ﲢﻮﻱ . P3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ X ′ ∉ Jɶﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Jɶﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺻﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺭ
ﻛﺎﻣﻞﹲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ X ′ﻏﲑ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ، Jɶﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ X ′′ﻣﻦ ] [ P0P3
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ X ′′P3 < X ′P3ﻭ X ′′ ∉ Jɶﺃﻱ . d ( X ′′, L2 ) > 12ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
≤ ) min ( d ( X ′′, L1 ) , d ( X ′′, L2 ) ) = d ( X ′′, L
2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . d ( X ′′, L1 ) ≤ 12ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، X ′′ ∈ Jﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
X ′′P3 < X ′P3ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . X ′ﺇﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . X ′ ∈ Jɶ
≤ ) ) ، d ( X ′, ϕ ( t1ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) .Y = ϕ ( t1 1
2 ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ t1ﻣﻦ ] [ t ( P1 ) , ℓﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
1 1
≤ ) ) XY ≤ XX ′ + X ′Y = d ( X ′, ϕ ( t0 ) ) + d ( X ′, ϕ ( t1 + =1
2 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 206
ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) ) . Z = ϕ ( t ( P1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ] X ′ ∈ [ P0P3ﺃﻥﹼ
100 = P0P1 ≤ X ′P1 ≤ X ′X + XZ + ZP1 ≤ XZ + 1
ﺇﺫﻥ . dL (Z ) − dL (X ) ≥ XZ ≥ 99
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻥﹼ
100 ≤ X ′P1 ≤ X ′Y + YZ + ZP1 ≤ YZ + 1
ﺇﺫﻥ . dL (Y ) − dL (Z ) ≥ YZ ≥ 99
ù ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . dL (X ) − dL (Y ) ≥ 198ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ f : ℝ∗+ → ℝ∗+ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ( ℝ∗+ )2ﻛﺎﻥ ) . f ( x f ( y ) ) = y f ( x
. lim f ( x ) = 0
∞x →+
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℝ∗+ → ℝ∗+ﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ) f (xyﻣﻜﺎﻥ xﳒﺪ
x ) f (x
) (1 ∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℝ∗+ × ℝ∗+ , f =
f (y ) y
ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ x = y = 1ﰲ ﳒﺪ ) . f ( f ( 1 ) ) = f ( 1
ﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ) x = y = f ( 1ﰲ ) ( 1ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) f ( f ( 1 ) ) = f ( 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( 1 ) = 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ zﻣﻦ ℝ∗+ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . f ( z ) = zﻭﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . z > 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﻥﹼ . f ( z 2 ) = z 2
n n
ﻫﺬﻩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n = 0ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻭﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ، x = y = z 2ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃ ﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
n
ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻷﻥﹼ ∞. lim z 2 = +
n
∞→ n
،f ) ( 1z = 1
z ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . z < 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ x = 1ﻭ y = zﺃ ﻥﹼ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 1z
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . z = 1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( z ) = z ⇔ z = 1
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ ℝ∗+ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) . z = xf ( xﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ
f ( z ) = f ( xf ( x ) ) = xf ( x ) = z
1
ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، z = 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. f ( x ) =
x
ù ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ x ֏ x1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻭ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻘﻬﻤﺎ.
207
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 208
C1ﻭ C 2ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺍﳘﺎ O1ﻭ O2ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﻧﺼﻔﻲ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﻬﻤﺎ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ،ﻭﺃﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﺎﻥ .ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Aﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ . C 2ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ
ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﲔ ﳍﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﰲ ، P1ﻭﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 2ﰲ ، P2ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳝﺲ
، [ PQ
ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 1ﰲ ،Q1ﻭﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 2ﰲ .Q2ﻧﻌﺮﻑ M 1ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] 1 1
ﻭ M 2ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ] . [ P2Q2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ 1AO2 = M 1AM 2
.O
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻂﹼ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ) (O1O2ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ M 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ
P1ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، (O1O2ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ M 2ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ P2ﻋﻠﻰ ) . (O1O2
P2
D
P1 A
M 1 O1 M2 O2
B
ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
) (1
M
1AO1 = M 2AO2
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ M 1AO1ﻧﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ
M 1O1
sin M 1AO1
sin M 1AO1
)(2 = =
O1A
sin O1M 1A
sin M 2M 1A
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ M 2AO2ﻧﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ
M 2O2
sin M 2AO2
sin M 2AO2
)(3 = =
O2A
sin O2M 2A
sin M 1M 2A
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ O1P1M 1ﻭ O2P2M 2ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ
209 ﻋﺎﻡ 1983
M 1O1 MO MO MO
= 1 1 = 2 2 = 2 2
O1A O1P1 O2P2 O2A
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﺃﻥﹼ
sin M 1AO1
sin M 2AO2
)(4 =
sin M 2M 1A
sin M 1M 2A
، Mﺃﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺆﻭﻝ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ) ( 1ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ 2M 1A = M 1M 2A
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AM 1M 2ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Bﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻏﲑ ، Aﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ C1ﻭ . C 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ) ( P1P2ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ . Dﺗﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، ( DP1 )2 = DA × DBﻭﺗﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
C 2ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، ( DP2 )2 = DA × DBﻓﻨﺮﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Dﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ P1P2ﻭﻷﻥﹼ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( M 1P1ﻭ ) ( M 2P2ﻭ ) ( DBﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ) ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ((O1O2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ( DBﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ M 1M 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . AM 1 = AM 2 ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ù AM 1M 2ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ) ( 4ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ) ( 1ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻭ cﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
2abc − ab − bc − caﻫﻮ ﺃ ﻛﱪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ
xab + ybc + zcaﻭ xﻭ yﻭ zﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
.1ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ bﻭ cﻭﺃﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
} L(b,c ) = { µb + νc : ( µ, ν ) ∈ ℕ2
ﻭﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ
max ( ℕ\L(b,c ) ) = bc − b − c = ( b − 1 ) ( c − 1 ) − 1
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ gcd ( b, c ) = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ cﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﹶﻠﻮ ﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، bﺃﻱ ﰲ ، ℤ/b ℤ
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ x ֏ cxﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℤ/b ℤﻭﻣﻨﻪ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 210
∀r ∈ { 0,1, …, b − 1 } , ∃ ! ℓ ∈ { 0,1, …, b − 1 } : c ℓ = r mod b
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ Nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) . (b − 1 )( c − 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ rﺑﺎﻗﻲ
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ Nﻋﻠﻰ bﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ، 0 ≤ r < bﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ℓ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, b − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . c ℓ = r mod bﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ N − ℓc
ﺇﱃ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . bﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ kﻣﻦ ℤﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . N = kb + ℓcﻭﻟﻜﻦ
kb = N − ℓc ≥ ( b − 1 ) ( c − 1 ) − ( b − 1 )c
≥ 1 − b > −b
ﺇﺫﻥ k > −1ﺃﻭ . k ∈ ℕﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . N ∈ L(b,c
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ bc − b − cﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ) ، L(b,cﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ µ
ﻭ νﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ µb + νc = bc − b − cﻭﻣﻨﻪ
( ν + 1 )c = ( c − 1 − µ )bﻭ ( µ + 1 )b = ( b − 1 − ν )c
ﻭ ﻷ ﻥﹼ gcd ( b, c ) = 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺃ ﻥﹼ bﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ν + 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ، ν + 1 ≥ bﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ( µ + 1 )b ≤ 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ
ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ bc − b − cﻫﻮ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ) ، L(b,cﺃﻱ
max ( ℕ\L(b,c ) ) = bc − b − c
.2ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
} L(a,b,c ) = { λa + µb + νc : ( λ, µ, ν ) ∈ ℕ 3
ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ
max ( ℕ\L(a,b,c ) ) = 2abc − ab − bc − ca
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ gcd ( bc, a ) = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ bcﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﹶﻠﻮ
ﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، aﺃﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ
، ℤ/a ℤﻓﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ x ֏ bcxﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℤ/a ℤﻭﻣﻨﻪ
∀r ∈ { 0,1, …, a − 1 } , ∃ ! ℓ ∈ { 0,1, …, a − 1 } : bc ℓ = r mod b
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ Nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 2abc − ab − bc − caﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ r
ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ Nﻋﻠﻰ aﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ، 0 ≤ r < aﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
211 ﻋﺎﻡ 1983
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ℓﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, a − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . cb ℓ = r mod aﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
N − ℓbcﺇﱃ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . aﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ kﻣﻦ ℤﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . N = ka + ℓbc
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
ka = N − ℓbc ≥ N − ( a − 1 ) bc
> 2abc − ab − bc − ca − abc + bc
> ( bc − b − c )a
ﺇﺫﻥ k > bc − b − cﺃﻱ ) ، k ∈ L(b,cﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ mﻭ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ، k = mb + ncﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
) N = ℓbc + mab + nca ∈ L(a,b,c
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ A = 2abc − ab − bc − caﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ) ، L(a,b,cﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ
ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ λﻭ µﻭ νﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . A = λab + µbc + νca
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ aﻭﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ A = −bc mod aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ aﻳﻘﺴﻢ
، ( µ + 1 )bcﻭﻟﻜﻦ a ﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ bcﺇﺫﻥ aﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، µ + 1ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . µ ≥ a − 1ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ λ ≥ c − 1ﻭ . ν ≥ b − 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
A = λab + µbc + νca
≥ ( c − 1 )ab + ( a − 1 )bc + ( b − 1 )ca
≥ 3abc − ab − bc − ca
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) . A ∉ L(a,b,c
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ A = 2abc − ab − bc − caﻫﻮ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻻ
ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ) ، L(a,b,cﺃﻱ
max ( ℕ\L(a,b,c ) ) = 2abc − ab − bc − ca
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Eﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ] ، [ AB ] ∪ [ BC ] ∪ [CA
ﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞﱢ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 212
ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ Eﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ،ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﻗﺎﺋﻢ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞﱢ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ Eﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ،ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍ ﳉﺪ ﻝ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻓﺘﻮ ﺟﺪ ﲡﺰ ﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮ ﻋﺔ Eﺇ ﱃ ﳎﻤﻮ ﻋﺘﲔ
ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ Fﻭ Gﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ C ′ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ
BA′ = 23 BCﻭ CB ′ = 23 CAﻭ AC ′ = 23 AB
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( A′B ′ﻭ ) ( B ′C ′ﻭ ) (C ′A′ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
A ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BCﻭ ) (CAﻭ ) ( ABﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
B′ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ C ′ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺟﺰﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ
Fﺃﻭ ، Gﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ
C′
ﺃﻥﹼ A′ﻭ B ′ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ . Fﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) ( A′B ′
B D E A′ C ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( BCﺃﻥﹼ . [ BC ]\{A′} ⊂ G
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Dﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ C ′ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( BCﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BDC ′ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﹰ ،ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Bﻭ Dﺗﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ Gﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ،ﺑﻨﺎ ًﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﺃﻥﹼ .C ′ ∈ F
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻷﻥﹼ B ′ﻭ C ′ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ، Fﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (C ′B ′ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . [ AC ]\{B ′} ⊂ G
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Eﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( BCﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ù ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ AECﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Gﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ.
ﺃﹶﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ 1983ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 10ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
5
ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ؟
ﺳﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ .ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) P ( f )( ℕﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ . ℕﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Aﻣﻦ ) P ( f )( ℕﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ N Aﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
213 ﻋﺎﻡ 1983
= NA ∑ 3k
k ∈A
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ . N ∅ = 0
N Anﺑﺄﻧﻪ [ N A∩[ 0,nﺃﻱ
( )
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Aﻣﻦ ) P ( f )( ℕﻭ nﻣﻦ ، ℕﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
= N An
( )
∑ 3k
k ∈A,k <n
ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ a mod bﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻭﻡ . b
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
n −1
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, 2 × ∑ 3k = 3n − 1 < 3n
k =0
ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ, N An = N A mod 3n
( )
ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
1
) (1 ∀n ∈ ℕ, < 0 ≤ N An
( )
× 3n
2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ 1Aﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، Aﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 1ﻋﻨﺪ nﻣﻦ Aﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 0ﻋﻨﺪ nﻣﻦ . ℕ\Aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) ، N A( n +1 ) − N An = 3n ⋅ 1A ( nﺃﻥﹼ
( )
)(2 ∀n ∈ ℕ, 1A ( n ) = 3−n ( N A( n +1 ) − N An ( )
)
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ A ֏ N Aﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
}) B = { N A : A ∈ P ( f )( ℕ
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ Bﻻ ﺗﺆﻟﱢﻒ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻣﻦ ) P ( f )( ℕﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
N A + NC = 2N B
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻗﻮﻟﻨﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ ) ( N A, N B , NCﻫﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 214
∀n ∈ ℕ, N An + NCn = ( N A + NC ) mod 3n
( ) ( )
= ( 2N B ) mod 3n = 2N Bn ( )
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
∀n ∈ ℕ, ) 1A ( n ) + 1C ( n ) = 21B ( n
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n ∉ Bﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ n ∉ Aﻭ ، n ∉ Cﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﺘﻤﻤﺔ
Bﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺘﻤﻤﱵ Aﻭ ،Cﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ . A ∪ C ⊂ B
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n ∈ Bﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ n ∈ Aﻭ ، n ∈ Cﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ
.B ⊂ A ∩ C
ﺇﺫﻥ ، A ∪ C ⊂ B ⊂ A ∩ Cﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ، A = B = Cﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ .ﺇﺫﻥ
ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bﻻ ﺗﺆﻟﱢﻒ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ } ، k + B = { k + b : b ∈ B
ﻣﻊ kﻣﻦ . ℕﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ] BN = ( 1 + B ) ∩ [ 1, Nﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {1, …, Nﻻ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻓﻜﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ BN؟ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ،
3p − 1
⇔ 1 + N [ 0, p −1 ]∩ ℕ ∈ BN ≤ N −1
2
⇔ 3p ≤ 2N − 1
) ⇔ p ≤ log 3 ( 2N − 1
⇔ p ≤ log 3 ( 2N − 1 )
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ، PN = log 3 ( 2N − 1 ) ﻛﺎﻥ
{1 + N A : A ⊂ { 0,1, …, PN − 1 } } ⊂ BN
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. card ( BN ) ≥ 2PN
ﻭﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ N = 105ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ PN = 11ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
card ( B105 ) ≥ 2048 > 1983
ù ﻓﺎﳉﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺡ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻌﻢ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻭ cﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
215 ﻋﺎﻡ 1983
a 2b ( a − b ) + b 2c (b − c ) + c 2a ( c − a ) ≥ 0
ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﱴ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ xﻭ yﻭ zﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ
a +b +c
=p x = p − aﻭ y = p − bﻭ z = p − cﻣﻊ
2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻗﻮﻟﻨﺎ ﺇ ﹼﻥ aﻭ bﻭ cﻫﻲ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ xﻭ yﻭ zﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ.
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
a = y +zﻭ b = z +xﻭ c = x +y
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
) F ( a, b, c ) = a 2b ( a − b ) + b 2c (b − c ) + c 2a (c − a
ﻛﺎﻥ
) F ( a, b, c ) = 2 ( xy 3 + yz 3 + zx 3 ) − 2xyz ( x + y + z
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2
) xyz ( x + y + z )2 = ( x 3y z + y 3z x + z 3x y
) ≤ ( x 3y + y 3z + z 3x )( x + y + z
ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
3 3 3
x y y z z x
= = ⇔x =y =z
z x y
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ F (a,b, c ) ≥ 0ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . a = b = cﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ
ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﻓﻘﻂ
ù ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 216
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ xﻭ yﻭ zﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ x + y + z = 1
ﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
7
≤ 0 ≤ xy + yz + xz − 2xyz
27
ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ Pﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ xﻭ yﻭ zﺟﺬﻭﺭﺍﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
) P ( X ) = ( X − x )( X − y )( X − z
= X 3 − X 2 + ( xy + yz + zx ) X − xyz
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
P ) ( 12 ) = ( 21 − x )( 21 − y )( 21 − z ) = − 81 + 21 ( xy + yz + zx − 2xyz
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
xy + yz + zx − 2xyz 1 1 1 1
)(1
2
=
2 (
−x
2()
−y
2 ()
−z +
8 )
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ xﻭ yﻭ zﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ x + y + z = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﻛﻼﹰ
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 21ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 1
2 ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
= ) ( 12 − x )( 21 − y )( 21 − z 1
2
−x
1
2
−y
1
2
≤ −z
1
8
ﺇﺫﻥ
xy + yz + zx − 2xyz 1
2
=
2
−x ( )( 21 − y )( 21 − z ) + 18 ≥ 0
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ.
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ xﻭ yﻭ zﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، x + y + z = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، 21ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ) ( 12 − x )( 12 − y )( 12 − zﺳﺎﻟﺒﺎﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ) ، ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ
xy + yz + zx − 2xyz 1
2
=
2
−x ( )( 12 − y )( 21 − z ) + 18 ≤ 18 < 547
217
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 218
ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ xﻭ yﻭ zﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 21ﻓﻌﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻸﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ) ( 12 − xﻭ ) ( 12 − yﻭ ) ( 12 − zﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﻬﺎ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 16ﺃﻥﹼ
xy + yz + zx − 2xyz 1 1
2
=
2
−x
2 (
−y () )( 12 − z ) + 18
1 1 7
≤ ≤ 3 +
6 8 54
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺯﻭﺟﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ) (a,bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ :
.1ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 7ﻻ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) . ab (a + b
.2ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 77ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . (a + b )7 − a 7 − b 7
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﺟﺎﹰ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ .ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
) ( a + b )7 − a 7 − b 7 = 7ab ( a + b ) ( a 2 + ab + b 2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ ) (a, bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ .1ﻭ .2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
) 7 ab ( a + bﻭ ) 73 | ( a 2 + ab + b 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ 19 × 18 = 342 = −1 mod 73ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
a 2 + ab + b 2 = ( a − 18b )( a + 19b ) mod 73
ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ 7 bﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ) 7 ( a − 18bﺃﻭ ) ) ، 7 (a + 19bﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 7ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻼ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻱ ) 7 | ( 37bﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ
ﻛﻮﻥ 7ﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ bﻭ ( . 37
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ 7 bﻭ a 2 + ab + b 2 = 0 mod 73ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
a − 18b = 0 mod 7 3ﺃﻭ a + 19b = 0 mod 7 3
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ، −19 = 324 mod 73ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ،ﺃﻥﹼ
a = 18b mod 7 3ﺃﻭ a = 324b mod 7 3
219 ﻋﺎﻡ 1984
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) (a, bﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) 7 bﻭ (a = 18b mod 7 3ﺃﻭ ) 7 bﻭ (a = 324b mod 73
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ 7 aﻭﺃﻥﹼ ) ، 7 ( a + bﺃﻱ ) 7 ab ( a + bﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 7
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ .ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ .2ﺇﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ .1ﻭ .2ﻫﻲ
}) ) {( a, b ) ∈ ℕ2 : ( 7 b ) ∧ ( (a = 18b mod 73 ) ∨ (a = 324b mod 73
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺟﲔ ) ( 1,18ﻭ ) ( 18,1ﳘﺎ ﺣﻼﹼﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻭﳘﺎ ﺍﳊﻼﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ
ù ﻳﻌﻄﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ a + bﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ Oﻭ Aﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ .ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻪ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ، Oﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) C ( Mﺍﻟﱵ
1
، ρ ( M ) = OM +ﺇﺫﹾ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) arg(OA,OM
OM
arg(OAﺇ ﱃ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻴﺎ ﺱ ﺍ ﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﺎ ﻝ [ [ 0, 2πﻟﻠﺰ ﺍ ﻭ ﻳﺔ ﺍ ﳌﻮ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮ ﻣﺰ ) ,OM
. (OAﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، (OAﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ) ,OM
) .C (M
ﻟﻨﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺅﻫﺎ ،Oﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ) . ( 1, 0
ﻭﻟﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻭﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ . ℂﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ C ρﺩ ﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . ρ
ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ M = re i θﻣﻊ r > 0ﻭ [ ، θ ∈ [ 0, 2πﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
، C ( M ) = C ρﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ρﻣﻦ . ℝ∗+ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ
θ
C (M ) = Cρ ⇔ r + ) = ρ ⇔ θ = r (ρ − r
r
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ρ < 2 2πﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Γρﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
} Γ ρ = {re i r ( ρ −r ) : 0 < r ≤ ρ
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ [ r ( ρ − r ) ∈ [ 0, 2πﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ rﻣﻦ ] ] 0, ρﺃﻥﹼ C ( M ) = C ρﺃﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Mﻣﻦ . Γρ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 220
) C(M
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺎ،
ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ
) P ( Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) c ( Mﺇﱃ ﻟﻮﻥ
ρ
r
O A
M
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ.
Γρ
ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، 2 2πﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ :
} Ψ : ] 0, 5 [ → P ( A ) , Ψ ( t ) = { c ( M ) : M ∈ C t
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﱢ ﻋﺪﺩ t ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ [ ] 0, 5ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .C tﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
) P ( Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ Ψﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ
ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ rﻭ ρﻣﻊ 0 < r < ρﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ) . Ψ ( r ) = Ψ ( ρ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﲏ Γρﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C rﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) M = re i r ( ρ−rﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . (OAﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
} ) c ( M ) ∈ Ψ ( r ) = Ψ ( ρ ) = {c ( P ) : P ∈ C ( M
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ، ABCDﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CDﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ
) . ( ABﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ) (CDﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( BCﻭ ) ( ADﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Oﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [ ABﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺑﻌﺪ Oﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CDﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ
AA′ﻭ BB ′ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Aﻭ Bﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) (CDﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] ، [ ABﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ Oﻋﻦ ) (CDﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ، 12 AB
ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . AA′ + BB ′ = AB
D
A′
B′
C
E
A O B
221 ﻋﺎﻡ 1984
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) A ( XYZﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ . XYZﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ 12 CDﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CDﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ
] ، [ ABﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
1
) (1 = ) A ( ACD ) + A ( BCD AB ⋅ CD
2
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Eﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ ] [ ACﻭ ] . [ BDﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ » :ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) (CDﳑﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] ، « [ ABﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺓﹶ
1
= ) A ( AED ) + A ( BCE ) + 2A ( ECD AB ⋅ CD
2
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ » :ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﳑﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] ، « [CDﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓﹶ
1
= ) A ( AED ) + A ( BCE ) + 2A ( EAB AB ⋅ CD
2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CDﳑﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] ، [ ABﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ
ﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] ، [CDﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) . A ( ECD ) = A ( EABﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻗﻮﻟﻨﺎ
)(2 EA ⋅ EB = EC ⋅ ED
AEBﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺃﺱ .ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ) ( 2ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ
CEDﻭ
EA ED
=
EC EB
ù ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( ACﻭ BDﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﺲ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ،ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﺫﺍ nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ ، n > 3ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﳏﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ .ﺛﹸﻢ
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ dﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
2d n n + 1
<n−3 < −2
p 2 2
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ x ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . x
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 222
D
C
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
M » ﰲ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﳏﺪﺏ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ
ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ« .
A B
] [ AC ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ Mﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﻪ
ﻭ ] ، [ BDﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ MABﺃﻥﹼ ، AB < MA + MBﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ MCDﺃ ﹼﻥ
،CD < MC + MDﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﳒﺪ
AB + CD < AC + BD
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ،ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ،ﻫﻲ ، ( Ak )0≤k <n
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ Akﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } k ∉ { 0,1, …, n − 1ﺑﺄﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Ak mod nﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ dij
ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ Ai Ajﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ℓ kﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ Ak Ak +1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ iﻣﻦ } { 0,1, …, n − 1ﻭ jﻣﻦ } ، {i + 2, …, i + n − 2ﻧﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺏ ، Ai Ai +1Aj Aj +1ﻓﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻥﹼ
Ai Aj + Ai +1Aj +1 > Ai Ai +1 + Aj Aj +1
ﺃﻭ . dij + di +1, j +1 > ℓ i + ℓ jﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﳒﺪ
n −1 i +n −2 n −1 i +n −2
> ∑ ∑ (dij + di +1, j +1 ) ∑ ∑ ( ℓ i + ℓ j )
i = 0 j =i + 2 i =0 j =i + 2
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
n −1 n −1
2∑ ∑ > dij ∑ ( n − 3 ) ℓ i + ∑ ℓ j
j ∉{i +1,i −1 }
i =0 i =0 } j ∉ {i +1,i ,i −1
ﺃﻭ
n −1
2 ∑ > dij ) ∑ ( ( n − 3 ) ℓ i + p − ℓ i +1 − ℓ i − ℓ i −1
j −i ≠1 i =0
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
4d > ( n − 3 ) p + np − p − p − p = 2 ( n − 3 ) p
ﺃﻭ 2d > ( n − 3 ) pﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
223 ﻋﺎﻡ 1984
ﻟﻨﺄ ﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲎ .ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﻃﺮ ﻓﹶﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﺮﹴ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﺘﺼﻼﻥ ﲞﻄﹼﲔ ﻣﻨﻜﺴﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ
ﻣﻜﻮ ﻥﹲ ﻣﻦ rﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ،ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﻮ ﻥﹲ ﻣﻦ n − rﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ .ﻓﻄﻮﻟﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﻂﱢ ﺍﳌﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ ،ﺃﻱ ) ، min ( r , n − rﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 2m + 1ﻟﺘﻜﻦ rﻣﻦ } ، { 2, …, mﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻂﱞ ﻣﻨﻜﺴﺮ
ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻒ ﻣﻦ rﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ([ Ai Ai +r ])0≤i <nﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . nﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
di,i +r = Ai Ai +r ≤ ℓ i + ℓ i +1 + ⋯ + ℓ i +r −1
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
n −1 n −1
m m
≤ d = ∑ ∑ di,i +r ∑ ∑ ( ℓ i + ℓ i +1 + ⋯ + ℓ i +r −1 )
i =0 r =2 i =0 r =2
m
)m (m + 1
≤ ( ∑ rp = p 2
−1 )
r =2
2d n n + 1
. ≤ m ( m + 1 ) − 2 = ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ − 2
p 2 2
ﻂ ﻣﻨﻜﺴﺮ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 2mﻟﺘﻜﻦ rﻣﻦ } ، { 2, …, m − 1ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧ ﱞ
ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻒ ﻣﻦ rﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ([ Ai Ai +r ])0≤i <nﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . nﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
r = mﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ ([ Ai Ai +m ])0≤i <mﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . mﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
di,i +r = Ai Ai +r ≤ ℓ i + ℓ i +1 + ⋯ + ℓ i +r −1
ﺇﺫﻥ
n −1 m −1 m −1
= d ∑ ∑ i,i +r + ∑ di,i +m
d
i = 0 r =2 i =0
n −1 m −1 m −1 p
∑ ≤ ∑ ∑ ( ℓ i + ℓ i +1 + ⋯ + ℓ i +r −1 ) +
i = 0 r =2 i = 0 2
m −1
mp mp )m (m − 1
≤
2
+ = ∑ rp
r =2 2
+p
2 ( −1 )
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﳒﺪ
2d n n + 1
≤ m 2 − 2 = −2
p 2 2
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲎ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 224
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻭ cﻭ dﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ 0 < a < b < c < dﻭ ، ad = bc
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ kﻭ mﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ a + d = 2kﻭ b + c = 2mﻛﺎﻥ
.a = 1
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
c ( 2k − 2m ) = c ( d + a − b − c ) = cd + ac − bc − c 2
= cd + ac − ad − c 2 = ( c − a ) ( d − c ) > 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . 2k > 2m
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ad = cbﺃ ﹼﻥ ) a ( 2k − a ) = b ( 2m − bﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) (1 ) ( b − a )( b + a ) = b 2 − a 2 = 2m ( b − 2k −m a
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ b − a = 2r pﻭ ، b + a = 2s qﺣﻴﺚ pﻭ qﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﻥ .ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
b − 2k −m aﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . r + s = mﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ b + aﻭ b − aﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ
ﺯﻭﺟﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ r ≥ 1ﻭ . s ≥ 1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ r ≥ 2ﻭ ، s ≥ 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 4ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) 2b = (b + a ) + ( b − aﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ bﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ r = 1ﺃﻭ . s = 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ s = 1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، r = m − 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ 2m −1 ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، b − aﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
ﺃﻥﹼ ، c > b ≥ 2m −1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، 2m = b + c > 2m −1 + 2m −1 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ r = 1ﻭ ، s = m − 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ
2m = c + b > a + b = 2m −1q
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ 2 > q ﺇﺫﻥ ، q = 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
)(2 a + b = 2m −1
ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﳒﺪ ، ( 2k −m +1 − 1 )a = bﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 2ﳒﺪ . a = 22m −2−kﻭﻷ ﹼﻥ
aﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ a = 1ﻭ . k = 2m − 2ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ﻣﻦ 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
a = 1, b = 2n − 1, c = 2n + 1, d = 22n − 1
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ . ABCDﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﻭﲤﺲ
ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . AD + BC = AB
M
C
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Iﻣﻦ ] [ ABﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
D L
N ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻸﺿﻼﻉ ] [ BCﻭ ] [CDﻭ ] ، [ ADﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ
Lﻭ Mﻭ Nﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
A B
I
ﻭﻟﻨﺴﻢ r ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭ 2θﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
.CBA
، BADﻭ 2ϕﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
، DCBﻭﻷ ﹼﻥ
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ = π − 2θ
، ICBﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
DCBﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ = π − θ
2
) ( ICﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
. DIN
.CILﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﹶﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ = ϕ =θ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ILCﳒﺪ ، LC = r tan θﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ . ND = r tan ϕ
r
= . IB ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ BLIﳒﺪ ) ، LB = r cot ( 2ϕﻭ
sin 2ϕ
r
= . IA ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳒﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ INAﺃ ﹼﻥ NA = r cot 2θﻭ
sin 2θ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 0 < x < π2ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
1 1 − cos 2x 2 sin2 x
= − cot 2x = = tan x
sin 2x sin 2x 2 sin x cos x
ﺇﺫﻥ
IA − NA − LC = r ( sin12θ − cot 2θ − tan θ ) = 0
1
IB − ND − LB = r − cot 2ϕ − tan ϕ = 0
sin 2ϕ
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
AB − AD − BC = ( IA − NA − LC ) + ( IB − ND − LB ) = 0
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
225
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 226
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻭ kﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . 0 < k < nﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ
ﻛﻞﱢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } M = {1, 2, …, n − 1ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻧﲔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ .ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ
ﲢﻘﱡﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ :
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ iﻣﻦ Mﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ iﻭ n − iﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ iﻭ kﻣﻦ ، Mﺣﻴﺚ ، i ≠ kﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ iﻭ i − kﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Mﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ℓﻣﻦ Mﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ، ϕ ( ℓ ) = k ℓ − n k ℓ/n ﺃﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ
ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ k ℓﻋﻠﻰ . nﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎﹰ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، 0 ≤ ϕ ( ℓ ) < nﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ϕ ( ℓ ) = 0
ﺗﻌﲏ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، k ℓﻭﻷ ﻥﹼ gcd ( k, n ) = 1ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﻥﹼ nﻳﻘﺴﻢ ℓﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻥﹼ . ℓ < nﺇﺫﻥ . ∀ℓ ∈ M, ϕ ( ℓ ) ∈ M
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ : M → Mﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ϕ ( p ) = ϕ (q
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ nﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) k ( p − qﻭ ﻷ ﻥﹼ gcd ( k, n ) = 1ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫ ﻟﻚ ﺃ ﻥﹼ nﻳﻘﺴﻢ
p − qﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ p = qﻷ ﻥﹼ . p − q < nﻭﻟﻜﻦ M ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ℓﻣﻦ Mﻣﻊ . ℓ < n − 1ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ k ℓ = ϕ ( ℓ ) + q ℓnﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
k ( ℓ + 1 ) = ϕ ( ℓ ) + k + q ℓn
ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k + ϕ ( ℓ ) < nﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) k + ϕ ( ℓ : k + ϕ(ℓ) < n
ϕ ( ℓ + 1 ) =
k + ϕ ( ℓ ) − n : k + ϕ ( ℓ ) ≥ n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
}) ϕ ( ℓ + 1 ) − k ∈ { ϕ ( ℓ ) , n − ϕ ( ℓ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻤﻼﹰ ﺑﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ) ϕ ( ℓ + 1ﻟﻮﻥ ) ϕ ( ℓﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ) ، n − ϕ ( ℓﻭﻟﻜﻦ
ﳍﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ) ϕ ( ℓ + 1ﻭ ) ϕ ( ℓﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ }) ، { ϕ ( 1 ) , ϕ ( 2 ) , … ϕ ( n − 1ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ، M
ù ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
227 ﻋﺎﻡ 1985
= Pﺃﻣﺜﺎﻟﻪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ( P ∈ ℤ [ X ]) ،ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ
n
∑ k =0 ak X k
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) o ( Pﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ، Pﺃﻱ
) } o ( P ) = card ( { k ∈ ℕ : ak = 1 mod 2
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (Qn )n ∈ℕﻣﻦ ] ℤ [ Xﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ .Qn = ( 1 + X )nﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، ϕ : ℕ → ℕﻭﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ mﻣﻦ ، ℕﻛﺎﻥ
m
) ) o ∑ Qϕ( k ) ≥ o (Qϕ( 0
k = 0
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
n n
∀n ∈ ℕ, ( 1 + X )2 = 1 + X 2 mod 2
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 0ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
n +1 n 2 n 2
( 1 + X )2 = ( ( 1 + X )2 ) = (1 + X 2 ) mod 2
n n +1 n +1
= 1 + 2X 2 + X 2 mod 2 = 1 + X 2 mod 2
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀n ∈ ℕ, o (Q2n ) = 2
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pkﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
» ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، ϕ : ℕ → ℕﻭﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ mﻣﻦ ، ℕﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
ϕ ( m ) ≤ kﲢﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
m
) ) « . o ( ∑ i = 0 Qϕ( i ) ) ≥ o (Qϕ( 0
ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pkﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . k
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ϕ ( m ) = 0ﻳﻜﻮﻥ m = 0ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ P0ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ.
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ϕ ( m ) ≤ 1ﺇ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ϕ ( 0 ) = 0ﻭ ϕ ( 1 ) = 1ﻭ ، m = 1
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
m
Qϕ( 0 ) = 1ﻭ ∑ i = 0Qϕ(i ) = Q0 + Q1 = 2 + X
ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔ.
ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ϕ ( 0 ) = 1ﻭ m = 0ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﳏ ﹼﻘﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ
ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . P1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 228
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pjﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، kﻭﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pk
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، ϕ : ℕ → ℕﻭﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ . mﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ϕ ( m ) < k
ﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﻷﻥﹼ Pϕ mﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ .ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ
( )
ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ϕ ( m ) = kﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ .ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ . n = log 2 k ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ، 2n ≤ k < 2n +1ﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﹰ
m
Qﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ) . ∑ i = 0 Qϕ( iﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . ϕ ( 0 ) ≥ 2nﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) Q = ( 1 + X )2 B ( Xﻭ ) = ( 1 + X )2 A ( X
n n
) Qϕ( 0
ﻣﻊ
m
= ) B ( Xﻭ ) A ( X ) = Qϕ( 0 )−2 ( X
n
∑ Qϕ i −2 ) ( n ) (X
i =0
ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pk −2nﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ i ֏ ϕ ( i ) − 2nﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ m
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . o ( A ) ≤ o ( Bﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n
) Q (X ) = B (X ) + X 2 B (X mod 2
n
) Qϕ( 0 ) ( X ) = A ( X ) + X 2 A ( X mod 2
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
n n n n
deg A = ϕ ( 0 ) − 2 ≤ ϕ ( m ) − 2 = k − 2 < 2
deg B = ϕ ( m ) − 2n = k − 2n < 2n
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻷﻥﹼ
) ) o (Q ) = 2o ( B ) ≥ 2o ( A ) = o (Qϕ( 0
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . ϕ ( 0 ) < 2nﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ rﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
} r = max { j : ϕ ( j ) < 2n
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ . ϕ ( r ) < 2n ≤ ϕ ( r + 1 ) ≤ ϕ ( m ) = kﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
r m
2n
= Q ∑ ) Qϕ( i ) + (1 + X ∑ Qϕ( i )−2n
= 0
i =r +1
i
A B
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ deg A < 2nﻭ . deg B < 2ﻭ .Q = ( A + B + X B ) mod 2
2n n
229 ﻋﺎﻡ 1985
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Prﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ) o (Qϕ( 0 ) ) ≤ o ( A
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n
) o (Q ) = o ( A + B + X 2 B ) = o ( A + B ) + o ( B
ﻷﻥﹼ . deg ( A + B ) < 2nﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ
) o (R + S ) ≤ o (R ) + o (S
ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
) o ( A ) = o ( A + 2B ) = o ( A + B + B ) ≤ o ( A + B ) + o ( B
ﺇﺫﻥ
)(2 ) o ( A ) ≤ o (Q
ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( Eﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ. Pk
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ،ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pkﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، kﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Mﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . 1985ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ . 23ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Mﲢﻮﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍ ﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺀُ ﺿﺮﺎ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
» ﻟﺘﻜﻦ } P = { p1, p2, …, pnﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷ ﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻫﺎ . n
ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ،ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻫﺎ
. 3 ⋅ 2n + 1ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Mﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ . P
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻮﻱ Mﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﺍﺀُ ﺿﺮﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ« .
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳓﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎ Pﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} P = { 2, 3, 5, 7,11,13,17,19, 23
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ، n = 9ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . 1985 > 3 ⋅ 29 + 1 = 1537
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 230
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄﹼ ، pﻧﻜﺘﺐ ) ν p ( nﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﺱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ p
ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، nﺃﻱ
} ν p ( n ) = max { α ∈ ℕ : p α | n
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ mﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
ψ0 ( m ) = m mod 2 = m − 2 m /2
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) M( 2ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Mﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Aﻣﻦ
) ، M( 2ﻣﺜﻼﹰ } ، A = {a, bﻧﻜﺘﺐ ) π ( Aﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ . abﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺟﺰﺀﺍﹰ
Nﻣﻦ ) M( 2ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
.1ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻣﻦ Nﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ A ≠ Bﻛﺎﻥ ∅ = . A ∩ B
.2ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺟﺰﺀٍ Aﻣﻦ Nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) π ( Aﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ.
.3ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Nﺃﻋﻈﻤﻲ ﺑﲔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ.
ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻨﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ∅ = ، Nﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . card ( N ) ≤ 2nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
، card ( ∪A∈ N A ) ≤ 2 ⋅ 2nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) M1 = M\( ∪A∈ N Aﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
card ( M1 ) ≥ 3 ⋅ 2n + 1 − 2 ⋅ 2n ≥ 2n + 1
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
) ) ) Φ0 : M1→ { 0,1 }n , k ֏ ( ψ0 ( ν p1 ( k ) ) , …, ψ0 ( ν pn ( k
ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ،ﰲ ، M1ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ aﻭ bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ) ، Φ0 ( a ) = Φ0 ( bﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳚﻌﻞ
ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ abﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ،ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } N = N ∪ {a, bﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ .1ﻭ .2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ . 3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . card ( N ) ≥ 2n + 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
) ) ) ) Φ1 : N → { 0,1 }n , A ֏ ( ψ0 ( ν p1 ( π ( A ) ) ) , …, ψ0 ( ν pn ( π ( A
ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﻓﺘﻮﺟﺪ ،ﰲ ، Nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺘﺎﻥ } A = {a, bﻭ } B = {c, dﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
) Φ1 ( A ) = Φ1 ( B
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ) abcd = π ( A ) π ( Bﻗﻮﺓ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ù ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
231 ﻋﺎﻡ 1985
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ، ABCﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﲤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺃﺳﲔ Aﻭ ، Cﻭﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﳎﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ BCﰲ Kﻭ Nﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ
OMBﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ABCﻭ KBNﺑﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ Bﻭ . Mﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ C1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ C 2ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . KBNﻧﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﲔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﱵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ،
ﻭﻫﻮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻮﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻮﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
B B
C1 C1
C2
C2
M M
K N
C C
N K
O O
E C A C A E
ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CAﻫﻮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ Cﻭ ، C1ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( NKﻫﻮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ
ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ Cﻭ . C 2ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) (CAﻭ ) ( NKﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ﻟﻜﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
Mﻣﻨﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) (CAﻭ ) ( NKﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ،
ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ . Eﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ Cﻭ C1ﻭ ، C 2
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Eﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ) ( BMﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ . C 2
ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ECNMﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ .ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ .ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
1 2 ) ( ) (
= π − NMB
EMN = BKN = π − NCE
= ACN
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ .ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2) (1 ) (
= π − BMN
NME = π − BKN =
= NKA
π − ECN
ﺇﺫ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ) ( 1ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ BMNKﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ،ﻭﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ) ( 2ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ KNCAﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺘﲔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ECNMﻫﻮ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 232
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ KBMNﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . EM ⋅ EB = EN ⋅ EKﻭﻷ ﹼﻥ
EN ⋅ EKﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ Eﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ EN ⋅ EKﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
،OE 2 − ON 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
)∗( EM ⋅ EB = OE 2 − ON 2
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ECNMﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . BM ⋅ BE = BN ⋅ BC
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ BN ⋅ BCﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ Bﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ BN ⋅ BC
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،OB 2 − ON 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
) ∗∗ ( BM ⋅ EB = OB 2 − ON 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ )∗( ﻭ ) ∗∗ ( ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ، EB = EM + MBﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
( EM − BM ) ⋅ ( EM + BM ) = OE 2 − OB 2
ﺃﻭ
ME 2 − MB 2 = OE 2 − OB 2
ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
) ( ME + MB )( ME − MB ) = (OE + OB )(OE − OB
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
( ME + MB ) ⋅ BE = (OE + OB ) ⋅ BE
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
ME + MB = 2MO + OE + OB
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
MO ⋅ BE = 0
ù OMBﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
= π
2 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ
ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ x ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x n )n ≥1ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
1
x1 = x , ∀n ≥ 1, xn +1 = xn xn + ( n )
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ xﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
∀n ≥ 1, 0 < x n < xn +1 < 1
233 ﻋﺎﻡ 1985
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ( Pn )n ∈ ℕﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
1
P0 ( X ) = X , (
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, Pn ( X ) = Pn −1 ( X ) Pn −1 ( X ) +
n )
ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، nﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ Pnﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Pn
ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ +ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ Pn ( 0 ) = 0ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . nﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Pn ( 1 ) > 1ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ . ℕﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ n
ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ (an , bn ) ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0,1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
1
Pn ( an ) = 1 −ﻭ Pn ( bn ) = 1
n +1
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Pnﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . an < bn
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
(
Pn +1 ( an ) = Pn ( an ) Pn ( an ) +
n +1 )
1 1
= 1− <1− ) = Pn +1 ( an +1
n +1 n+2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ , an < an +1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ
1
(
Pn +1 ( bn ) = Pn ( bn ) Pn ( bn ) +
n +1 )
1
= 1+ ) > 1 = Pn +1 ( bn +1
n +1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . bn > bn +1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ, 0 ≤ an < an +1 < bn +1 < bn ≤ 1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ( Pn )n ∈ ℕﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) t ֏ Pn ( tﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﳏﺪﺏ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0,1ﻓﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻪ ﻳﻘﻊ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ) ( 0, 0ﻭ ) (bn ,1ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
t
∀t ∈ [ 0,1 ], ≤ ) Pn ( t
bn
1 a
1 −ﺃﻭ ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﻋﻨﺪ t = anﳒﺪ ≤ n
n + 1 bn
b 1
∀n ∈ ℕ, ≤ 0 ≤ bn − an ≤ n
n +1 n +1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . lim ( bn − an ) = 0
∞→ n
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 234
( an )n ∈ ℕ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ ℓﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ
ﻭ ، ( bn )n ∈ ℕﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀n ∈ ℕ, 0 ≤ an < an +1 < ℓ < bn +1 < bn ≤ 1
ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ∗ ( xn )n ∈ ℕﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ≥ 1, ) x n = Pn −1 ( x
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . 0 < xn < xn +1 < 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . 0 < x < 1
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Pnﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ +ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ 0 < xn +1 < 1ﺃﻥﹼ
x n +1 1
) 0 < Pn ( x ) < Pn ( bn
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . ∀n ≥ 1, x < bn
1
، x n > 1 −ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻷﻥﹼ x n > 0ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ x n < xn +1ﺃﻥﹼ
n
1−1/n xn
) Pn −1 ( an −1 ) < Pn −1 ( x
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . ∀n ≥ 1, an < x
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, an < x < bn
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ،ﲜﻌﻞ nﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻥﹼ . x = lim an = lim bn = ℓ
∞→ n ∞→ n
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ . x = ℓﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, an −1 < ℓ < bn −1
ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Pn −1ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ +ﺃﻥ
1
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, 1− < xn < 1
n
1
1 < x n +ﻭ 0 < xnﻭ x n +1 < 1ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
0 < x n < x n +1 < 1
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ dﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ 2ﻭ 5ﻭ . 13ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ aﻭ bﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 2, 5,13,dﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ab − 1ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ.
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ 2d − 1ﻭ 5d − 1ﻭ 13d − 1ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ.
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ m ﳔﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮﹴ ﺟﻴﺪ .ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ m
ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ mﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, m − 1ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ m = 16ﻫﻮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ﻣﻦ . 13ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥﹼ
} Q16 = {k 2 mod 16 : k ∈ ℤ } = { 0,1, 4, 9
ﻓﻠﻮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 2d − 1ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞﹲ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} ( 2d − 1 ) mod 16 ∈ { 0,1, 4, 9
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ } ( 2d ) mod 16 ∈ { 2,10ﺃﻭ
} d mod 16 ∈ {1, 5, 9,13
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
d mod 16 ( 5d − 1 ) mod 16 ( 13d − 1 ) mod 16
1 4 12
5 8 0
9 12 4
13 0 8
ﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ } d mod 16 ∈ { 5, 9ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 5d − 1ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ،ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
} d mod 16 ∈ {1,13ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 13d − 1ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ .ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ù 2d − 1ﻭ 5d − 1ﻭ 13d − 1ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ.
235
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 236
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ، A1A2A3ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ . P0ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ An = An −3ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n
ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 4ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ( Pn )n ∈ℕﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ Pn +1 :ﻫﻲ
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ Pnﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ An +1ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﻪ . 23πﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
P1986 = P0ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A1A2A3ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ.
ﺳﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ، ℂﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) . j = exp ( 2π3 iﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ
ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀n ∈ ℕ, ) Pn +1 = An +1 + j ( Pn − An +1
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ، ℕﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
P3n +1 = ( 1 − j ) A1 + j P3n
P3n + 2 = ( 1 − j ) A2 + j P3n +1
P3n + 3 = ( 1 − j ) A3 + j P3n + 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) ) P3n + 3 = ( 1 − j ) A3 + j ( ( 1 − j ) A2 + j ( ( 1 − j ) A1 + j P3n
= ( 1 − j ) ( A3 + j A2 + j2 A1 ) + P3n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، nﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
∀n ∈ ℕ, P3n = n ( 1 − j ) ( A3 + j A2 + j2 A1 ) + P0
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ m ﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ P3m = P0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
A3 + j A2 + j2 A1 = 0
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ 1 + j + j2 = 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
) A3 = A2 + e i π /3 ( A1 − A2
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ A3ﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ A1ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ A2ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﻪ . π3ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A1A2A3
ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ .ﺇﺫﻥ
( ∃m ∈ ℕ∗, ) A1A2A3ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ( ⇒ ) P3m = P0
ù ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ m = 662ﻷ ﹼﻥ . 3 × 662 = 1986
237 ﻋﺎﻡ 1986
ﻧﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﱢ ﺭﺃﺱﹴ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﳐﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢﹴ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎﹰ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺎ ﻫﻲ xﻭ yﻭ zﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﳝﻜﻦ
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ y < 0ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ x + yﻭ −yﻭ z + yﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﳚﺮﻯ
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ .ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﺔ
ﺗﺘﻮﻗﹼﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ.
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ x iﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺃﺱ iﻣﻊ . 0 ≤ i ≤ 4ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ
ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ .ﻟﻌﻞﹼ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ
4 4
= ) F ( x 0 , x1, x 2 , x 3 , x 4 ∑ xi2 + ∑ ( xi + xi +1 )2
i =0 i =0
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺡ . x i = x i mod 5ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﲔ
) ρ : ℤ5 → ℤ5, ( x 0 , x1, x 2 , x 3 , x 4 ) ֏ ( x1, x 2 , x 3, x 4 , x 0
) s : ℤ5 → ℤ5, ( x 0 , x1, x 2 , x 3 , x 4 ) ֏ ( −x 0 , x 0 + x1, x 2 , x 3 , x 4 + x 0
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳒﺮﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﻤﺲ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ x i < 0ﻫﻮ
. τi = ρ−i s ρi
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ . F ρ = Fﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) ∆ = ( F − F s )( x 0, …, x 4ﻛﺎﻥ
∆ = ( x1 + x 2 )2 − ( x 0 + x1 + x 2 )2 + ( x 3 + x 4 )2 − ( x 3 + x 4 + x 0 )2
) = ( 2x1 + 2x 2 + x 0 )( −x 0 ) + ( 2x 3 + 2x 4 + x 0 )( −x 0
) = −2x 0 ( x 0 + x1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4
= Sﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ρﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
4
∑ i = 0 xi
( F − F τi ) ( x 0 , …, x 4 ) = ( F − F s ) ρi ( x 0 , …, x 4 ) = −2x i × S
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ، S > 0ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ τiﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ x i < 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) F ( x 0 , …, x 4 ) > F τi ( x 0 , …, x 4
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻼﺕ ( τi )0≤i ≤4ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺎﹰ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ) F ( x 0, …, x 4ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ
ù ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 238
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Aﻭ Bﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢﹴ ﻟﻪ nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ،ﻣﻊ ، n ≥ 5ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ
XYZ .Oﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻃﺒﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ،OABﻭﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊﹺ ﺑﺪﺀٍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ
ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻘﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ،OABﻓﺘﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Yﻭ Zﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ،ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ Xﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ
ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ . X
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Rﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Oﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﻪ . 2nπﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ C0ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ
ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ABﻣﻦ Bﺇﱃ ) ، Aﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ Yﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ
] ، [ ABﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ (.Aﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ) . C = ∪ Rk ( C0ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ
0≤k <n
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ . C0
ﻟﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ، ℂﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) 1 + i cot ( nπﻭ 0ﻭ 2
ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Oﻭ Aﻭ Bﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺇﺫ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ . AB = 2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ zﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, 2ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . Zﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Yﻓﻴﻤﺜﹼﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ yﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، z − 2e− i θﻣﻊ θﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . [ 0, 2nπﻭﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ zﻭ θﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
X
C0 2 z
ցւ =
O ) sin ( 2nπ sin ( 2nπ )− θ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ : AZY
Y
2π YZ AZ
n θ =
A Z B
sin ZAY
sin AYZ
ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Xﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ Vﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [YZﺣﻮﻝ Zﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ، nπ − π2ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ
Zﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ) . sin( 1π/nﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ xﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
π π
i ein y + z i ein −i θ
x =z−
) sin ( nπ 2
− z (= ) z +
) sin ( nπ
e
) 1 sin ( 2nπ − θ π
= π
π
+ i e i( n −θ )
) sin ( n ) cos ( n
2 π
) 1 sin ( n − θ
= π
π
− sin ( nπ − θ ) + i cos ( nπ − θ )
) sin ( n ) cos ( n
239 ﻋﺎﻡ 1986
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
π π
1 ) sin ( nπ ) 2e i( 2 − n
= x (
) sin ( nπ ) cos ( nπ ) π
= ) + i cos ( n − θ
) sin ( 2nπ
) cos ( nπ − θ
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ θﰲ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, 2nπﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Xﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [OC 0ﺇﺫ ﳝﺜﻞ
π π
) e i( 2 − n
= (θﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،Oﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﳝﺜﹼﻞ 2π
n ) ،ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ θ = 0ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) sin ( nπ
π π
1 ) e i( 2 − n
= (θﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .C 0ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ π
n ) ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ × ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) cos ( nπ ) sin ( nπ
= OC 0 ( cos1 ) ( nπ )
− 1 AO
ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ Zﻣﻦ Bﺇﱃ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [ ABﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Xﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
] [OC 0ﺫﻫﺎﺑﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ Oﺇﱃ ،C 0ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ Zﻣﻦ Mﺇﱃ Aﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Xﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [OC 0ﺇﻳﺎﺑﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ C 0ﺇﱃ ،Oﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ] . C0 = [OC 0ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ Cﻓﻬﻮ
) 1 − cos ( nπ
. 2 π
ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ )] ، ∪ Rk ( [OC 0ﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ AB
) sin ( n 0 ≤k <n
ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ . n = 5
C
O
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ fﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ، ℝ +ﻭﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﰲ
، ℝ +ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
.f ( 2 ) = 0
.∀x ∈ [ 0, 2 [ , f (x ) ≠ 0
.∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ( ℝ + )2 , ) f ( xf ( y ) ) f ( y ) = f ( x + y
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 240
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ f : ℝ + → ℝ +ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﻭ .
ﺃ ﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ xﻣﻦ ، ℝ +ﻛﺎﻥ f ( x + 2 ) = f ( xf ( 2 ) ) f ( 2 ) = 0ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﻭ .ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ
) †( ∀x ≥ 2, f (x ) = 0
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ xﻣﻦ [ [ 0, 2ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ،ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
) 0 = f ( 2 ) = f ( x + 2 − x ) = f (( 2 − x ) f ( x )) f ( x
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ f ( ( 2 − x ) f ( x ) ) = 0ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . ( 2 − x ) f ( x ) ≥ 2ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
) ‡( ∀x ∈ [ 0, 2 [ , ≥ ) f (x
2−x
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﺘﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ [ ، [ 0, 2ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ αﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ [ . ]x , 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
) 0 ≠ f ( α ) = f ( x + α − x ) = f (( α − x ) f ( x )) f ( x
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) † ( ﺃﻥﹼ ، ( α − x ) f ( x ) < 2ﺃﻭ
2
∀α ∈ ]x , 2 [ , < ) f (x
α−x
ﺛﹸﻢ ﲜﻌﻞ αﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
≤ ) ∀x ∈ [ 0, 2 [ , f ( x
2−x
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ‡ ( ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
0 [∞: x ∈ [ 2, +
f : ℝ+ → ℝ +, f ( x ) = 2
[ : x ∈ [ 0, 2
2 − x
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺀ ،ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ
ﻭ .ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ( ℝ + )2ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﺆ
2x
( y < 2 ) ∧ < 2 ⇔ x + y < 2
2 − y
ù ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
241 ﻋﺎﻡ 1986
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔﹲ .ﺃﹶﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ
ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﲔ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﲔ
ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ؟
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍ ﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔﹲ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ dﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﲔ ﻭﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ، Pﻧﺴﻤﻲ P1, P2, …, Pkﻧﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ P ∩ dﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، d ||oxﺃﻭ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . d ||oyﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ . ([P2i −1P2i ])1≤i ≤k /2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ
ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
d
P4
P3
d P2
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
P1
ﻧﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ dﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ
. Pﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﺎﹰ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﻴﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ .ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺧﻂﱟ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺃﺱ
ﺃﲪﺮ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﻞﱠ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﺀ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀً.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 242
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ :
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) πn ( kﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ℕ n = {1, …, nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ kﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
! ∑ k ⋅ πn ( k ) = n
k =0
ﻧﺬﻛﱢﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ℕ nﻫﻮ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ﻣﻦ ℕ nﺇﱃ . ℕ nﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ Snﺇﱃ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، ℕ nﻛﺎﻥ
) } πn ( k ) = card ( { σ ∈ Sn : card ( Fix ( σ ) ) = k
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ) Fix ( σﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { j ∈ ℕ n : σ( j ) = j
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Aﻣﻦ ، ℕ nﻧﻌﺮﻑ
} Πn ( A ) = { σ ∈ Sn : Fix ( σ ) = A
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ℕ n \Aﺍﻟﱵ
ﻟﻴﺲ ﳍﺎ ﺃ ﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، card ( Πn ( A ) ) = πn −card( A ) ( 0 ) ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺡ
. π0 ( 0 ) = 1ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) Pn( kﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ℕ nﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، kﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
= } Π(nk ) = { σ ∈ Sn : card ( Fix ( σ ) ) = k ) ∪ Πn ( A
) A∈Pn( k
) ) ( Πn ( Aﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
) A∈Pn( k
= ) πn ( k ∑ ) (k
) card ( Πn ( A ) ) = C nk πn −k ( 0
A∈Pn
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ) 0 ≤ k ≤ n ⇒ πn ( k ) = C nk πn −k ( 0
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ( Π(nk ) )0≤k ≤nﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ Snﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
= ) card ( Sn ) ) ∑ card ( Π(nk
k =0
243
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 244
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n
)(2 ∀n ∈ ℕ, = !n ) ∑ πn ( k
k =0
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ :
n n n
−1
) ∑ k ⋅ πn ( k ∑= kC nk ⋅ πn −k ( 0 ) = n × ∑ C nk −) 1 ⋅ πn −k ( 0
k =0 k =1 k =1
n −1 n −1
) = n × ∑ C nk −1 ⋅ πn −1−k ( 0 ) = n × ∑ πn −1 ( k
k =0 k =0
! = n × (n − 1 )! = n
ﺇﺫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ،ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ kC nk = nC nk −−11ﰲ ﻭ ﻣﻦ
ù ) ( 2ﰲ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘ ﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ . ABCﻳﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ Aﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ BCﰲ
، Lﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ . Nﻟﻴﻜﻦ Kﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ
ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Lﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( ABﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Lﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( ACﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻭﻟﻠﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ AKNMﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ.
N ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Oﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABC
C
M L
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Rﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، AON
، 2 ( B + 12 A
NOAﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ )
ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
O
h
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
A K B
1 AN
+ 1A
= sin ( B ) 2
2
R
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
+ 1A
AN = 2R sin ( B
) (1 ) 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ AKLﻭ AMLﻃﺒﻮﻗﲔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Kﻋﻦ
) ( ANﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( ANﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ hﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Kﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . AKL
245 ﻋﺎﻡ 1987
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
)(2 A ( AKNM ) = h ⋅ AN
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ) A ( AKNMﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ . AKNM
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
= π − (B
+ 1A
ALB ) 2
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ALBﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
AB AL
=
) sin ( B + 2 A
1
sin B
ﺇﺫﻥ
sin B
= AL AB
+ 1A
sin ( B
) 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ AKLﳒﺪ
) ⋅ AL sin ( 1 A
h ⋅ AL = AK ⋅ KL = AL cos ( 12 A
) 2
ﺇﺫﻥ
1
)(3 = h = 1 ⋅ sin A ⋅ sin B AB
AL ⋅ sin A
+ 1A
2 sin ( B
) 2
2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
A ( AKNM ) = R ⋅ AB ⋅ sin A = 1 AB ⋅ BC ⋅ sin B
⋅ sin B
2
ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ
ù ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ) ( x1, …, xnﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، x12 + x 22 + ⋯ + xn2 = 1ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ
pﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ) (a1, …, anﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻔﺎﺭﺍﹰ
ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ، ∀i ∈ ℕ n , ai ≤ p − 1ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
p −1
≤ a1x1 + a 2x 2 + ⋯ + an xn n
pn − 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 246
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ yk = xkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ nﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ . D = { 0,1, …, p − 1 }nﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
n
= ) ϕ : D → ℝ, ϕ ( α1, …, αn ∑ αkyk
k =1
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( α1, …, αnﻣﻦ ، Dﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n n
≤ ) 0 ≤ ϕ ( α1, …, αn ∑ yk2 ⋅ ) ∑ αk2 ≤ ( p − 1 n
k =1 k =1
1 αk ≤ p −1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ϕﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﰲ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . I = [ 0, ( p − 1 ) n
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﲨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺎﻻﺕ ( I j )0≤ j < pn −1ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
p −1 p −1
Ij = j n n, ( j + 1 ) n n
p − 1 p −1
= ، Iﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﺎﻻﺕ ، pn − 1ﻭ ، card ( D ) = pn ∪n ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ I j
0 ≤ j < p −1
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ) ( α1, …, αnﻭ ) ( β1, …, βnﻣﻦ ، Dﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺻﻮﺭﺗﺎﳘﺎ ) ϕ ( α1, …, αnﻭ ) ϕ ( β1, …, βnﺇﱃ ﺍﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ . I j0
ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ
p −1
≤ ) ϕ ( α1, …, αn ) − ϕ ( β1, …, βn n
pn − 1
ﻓﺈ ﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ 0 ≤ k ≤ nﺍ ﳌﻘﺪﺍ ﺭ εkﺑﺄ ﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ 0ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ ، x k = 0
ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) sgn ( xkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، x k ≠ 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
p −1
∑ (αk − βk ) εk xk ≤
pn − 1
n
k =1 ak
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ak = ( αk − βk ) εkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 0 ≤ k ≤ nﻟﻴﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏù .
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ f : ℕ → ℕ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
f ( f ( n ) ) = n + 1987
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ nﻣﻦ ℕ
247 ﻋﺎﻡ 1987
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ :ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﻣﻦ . ℕﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ f : ℕ → ℕ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) (P ∀n ∈ ℕ, f ( f ( n ) ) = n + p
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ pﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ.
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℕ → ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) . ( Pﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ fﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻷﻥﹼ
f fﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} f ( k ) < pﻭ A = {k ∈ ℕ : k < p
} f ( k ) ≥ pﻭ B = {k ∈ ℕ : k < p
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ kﻣﻦ ، Aﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) ، q = f ( kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
q < pﻭ f (q ) = k + p ≥ p
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ، q ∈ Bﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( A ) ⊂ B
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻴﻜﻦ kﻣﻦ ، Bﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ . s = f ( k ) − pﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
) f ( f (s )) = s + p = f (k
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ fﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( s ) = k < p
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، s ≥ pﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ f ( f ( s − p ) ) = sﺃﻥﹼ
k = f (s ) = f f ( f ( s − p )) = f ( s − p ) + p ≥ p
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . s < pﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﺎﻥ s < pﻭ f ( s ) < pﺗﻌﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
، s ∈ Aﻭﻷﻥﹼ ) k = f ( sﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . k ∈ f ( Aﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . B ⊂ f ( A
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( A ) = Bﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ) card ( A ) = card ( Bﻷﻥﹼ f
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( A, Bﻫﻲ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ [ [ 0, pﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، pﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) ، p = card ( A ) + card ( B ) = 2 card ( Aﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ pﻋﺪﺩ
ﺯﻭﺟﻲ.
f
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، p = 2mﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ n ֏ n + mﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) . ( Pﻭﻳﺘﻢ
ù ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 248
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Pﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻧﻘﻄﺔﹰ ﻣﻦ
ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻏﲑ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ Pﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ.
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ } P = { Ak : 1 ≤ k ≤ nﻭ Akﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺎ ) . ( k, k 2
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﺗﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ) d ( Ak , Aℓﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Akﻭ Aℓﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ :
2
= ) d ( Ak , Aℓ ( k − ℓ )2 + ( k 2 − ℓ 2 ) = k − ℓ 1 + ( k + ℓ )2
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ Nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺎﹰ r
p
ﻛﺎﻥ rﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ) .ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ = rﻭ pﻭ qﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ
q
ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ p 2 = Nq 2ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻗﺎﺳﻢﹴ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ qﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، pﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ q = 1ﻷﻥﹼ . gcd ( p, q ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ . ( r = p ∈ ℕﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
( k + ℓ )2 < 1 + ( k + ℓ )2 < ( 1 + k + ℓ )2
ﺃﻥﹼ 1 + ( k + ℓ )2ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ، ℚﺃﻱ
∀ ( k , ℓ ) ∈ ℕ2n , k ≠ ℓ ⇒ d ( Ak , Aℓ ) ∉ ℚ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ iﻭ jﻭ ، kﺗﺤﺴﺐ ) A ( Ai Aj Akﺃﻱ
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ Ai Aj Akﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
1 k −i j −i
= ) A ( Ai Aj Ak det 2 ) = ( k − i ) ( j − i )( j − k
2 2 2 2 2
k − i j −i
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
∀ ( i, j , k ) ∈ ℕ 3n , card ( {i, j , k } ) = 3 ⇒ A ( Ai Aj Ak ) ∈ ℚ∗+
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ k 2 + k + nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ
، [ 0,ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( k 2 + k + n )0≤k ≤n −2 n
3 ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ kﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ]
ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
249 ﻋﺎﻡ 1987
ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﻟﻴﻜﻦ qﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﺎﻥ :
.1ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﻛﺎ ﻥ mﺃ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ ﺍ ﻷ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ } ، {q + 1, …, 2qﻛﺎ ﻥ mﺃ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ ﺍ ﻷ ﻋﺪ ﺍﺩ
} . {1, 2, …, qﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
)(H ∀k ∈ {q + 1, …, 2q } , gcd ( m, k ) = 1
ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ . ∀k ∈ {1, …, 2q } , gcd ( m, k ) = 1
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﹼﻖ ، mﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ) ( Hﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ m < ( 2q + 1 )2ﻛﺎﻥ m
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ gcd ( m, 2q ) = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ mﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ rﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {1, 2, …, qﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ، k = log2 ( qr ) ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
2k r ≤ q < 2k +1r ≤ 2q
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ) ( Hﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، gcd ( m, 2r +1r ) = 1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ m ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
، gcd ( m, r ) = 1ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ .1
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، mﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ) ( Hﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ، m < ( 2q + 1 )2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ .1
ﺃﻥﹼ gcd ( m, k ) = 1ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ mﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ m
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ.
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ . ℓ = n3 ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ، n = 3ℓ2 + sﻭ sﻋﺪﺩ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] ، [ 0, 6ℓ + 2ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻓﻬﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ℓ = 0ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . ℓ ≥ 1
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ Pﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pkﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
» « k (k + 1 ) + n ∈ P
ﻓﻴﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺇﻥﹼ Pkﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } . { 0,1, …, ℓﻭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ
ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { ℓ + 1, …, n − 2ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺎ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ Pk ′ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ′ < kﻭﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pkﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﹰ m
ﺇﱃ ، k ( k + 1 ) + nﻭ kﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { ℓ + 1, …, n − 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 250
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
( 2k + 1 )2 − m = 3k 2 + 3k + 1 − n
= 3k 2 + 3k + 1 − 3ℓ 2 − s
= 3k 2 + 3k − 3ℓ2 − 3ℓ + 3ℓ + 1 − s
= 3 ( k − ℓ )( k + ℓ + 1 ) + 3ℓ + 1 − s
≥ 3 ( 2ℓ + 2 ) + 3 ℓ + 1 − s = 9ℓ + 7 − s > 0
ﺇﺫﻥ m < ( 2k + 1 )2ﻷﻥﹼ . s ≤ 6ℓ + 2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ gcd ( m, q ) ≠ 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ q ﻣﻦ } . {k + 1, …, 2kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) (1 gcd ( m − q ( 2k + 1 − q ) , q ) ≠ 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
2 2
) m − q ( 2k + 1 − q ) = k + k + n + q − q ( 2k + 1
= ( q − k − 1 )( q − k ) + n
= k ′ (k ′ + 1) + n
ﺇﺫ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ k ′ = q − k − 1ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، { 0,1, …, k − 1ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ
Pk ′ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ k ′ ( k ′ + 1 ) + nﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
(n + k ′ (1 + k ′ )) | q
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
q ≤ 2k ≤ 2 ( n − 2 ) < 2n
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﹶﺒﹺﻞ qﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ، k ′ ( k ′ + 1 ) + nﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، n
ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . q = k ′ ( k ′ + 1 ) + nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
k ′2 = q − k ′ − n = k + 1 − n ≤ n − 2 + 1 − n = −1 < 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ.
ﺇﺫﻥ gcd ( m, q ) = 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k + 1 ≤ q ≤ 2kﻭﻷﻧﻨﺎ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، m < ( 2k + 1 )2
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ mﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄﹼ ،ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pkﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ
ù ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﺗﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ،Oﻭﻧﺼﻔﻲ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﻬﻤﺎ Rﻭ rﺣﻴﺚ . r < R
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ .ﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( BPﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ،Cﻭﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ
) ( BPﰲ ، Pﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﹰ ﰲ ) ، Aﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ
ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ . (A = P
.1ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ . AB 2 + BC 2 + CA2
] [ BC .2ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
) ( BP ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Qﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻏﲑ ، Pﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
A B
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﺍﳌﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Oﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ
O P ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( BPﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ، Mﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ،
M
Q ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ BCﻭﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [ PQ
C .1ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺃﻥﹼ
AB 2 = AP 2 + PB 2 = AP 2 + ( BM − MP )2
AC 2 = AP 2 + PC 2 = AP 2 + ( BM + MP )2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . AB 2 + AC 2 = 2 ( AP 2 + BM 2 + MP 2 ) ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ
OMBﳒﺪ ، BM 2 = R 2 − OM 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ OMPﳒﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
، MP 2 = r 2 − OM 2ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ APQﳒﺪ ، AP = 2OMﺇﺫﻥ
) AB 2 + AC 2 = 2 ( 4OM 2 + R 2 − OM 2 + r 2 − OM 2
) = 2 ( 2OM 2 + R 2 + r 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) ، BC 2 = 4BM 2 = 4 ( R 2 − OM 2ﺇﺫﻥ
AB 2 + AC 2 + BC 2 = 4OM 2 + 2 ( R 2 + r 2 ) + 4R 2 − 4OM 2
= 6R 2 + 2r 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ AB 2 + AC 2 + BC 2ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ
ﻭﳛﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ . 6R 2 + 2r 2
251
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 252
.2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ،ﺗﺮﺳﻢ Qﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ،ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Mﻫﻲ
ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [ PQﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Mﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ Qﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ hﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Pﻭﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ
. 12ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻫﻮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ) ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﲰﻬﺎ (Qﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ
ù ، hﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] . [OP
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ( Ak )1≤k ≤2n +1ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
. Bﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ℕ 2n +1 = {1, …, 2n + 1ﻛﺎﻥ . card ( Ak ) = 2n
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ iﻭ jﻣﻦ ، ℕ 2n +1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ i ≠ jﻛﺎﻥ . card ( Ai ∩ Aj ) = 1
ﻛﻞﱡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ Bﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ . ( Ak )k ∈ℕ 2n +1
ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ Bﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 0ﺃﻭ ، 1ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ
( Ak )k ∈ℕ 2n +1 ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺀً ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 0ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ n؟
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ( Ak )1≤k ≤2n +1ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، B
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﻭ ﻭ .
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ ℕ 2n +1ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، Dk = ℕ 2n +1 /{kﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻣﻦ
Akﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ S jﻣﻦ Dkﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
S j = { ℓ ∈ Dk : j ∈ Aℓ } ⊂ Dk
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ∅ ≠ . ∀j ∈ Ak , S j
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ j ≠ j ′ﻣﻦ ، Akﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ∅ = . S j ∩ S j ′ﻷ ﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﻰ ℓﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ
S j ∩ S j ′ﻛﺎﻥ { j , j ′ } ⊂ Aℓ ∩ Akﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ .
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
= 2n ∑ 1 ≤ ∑ card ( S j ) ≤ card j ∈∪A S j ≤ card ( Dk ) = 2n
j ∈Ak j ∈Ak k
ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀j ∈ Ak , card ( S j ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ′ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
′ﻛﻞﱡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ Bﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ،ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ . ( Ak )k ∈ℕ 2n +1
253 ﻋﺎﻡ 1988
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} Bn = {( i, j ) ∈ ℕ × ℕ : 1 ≤ i < j ≤ 2n + 1
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( i, jﻣﻦ Bnﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) ϕ ( i, jﻣﻦ Bﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
}) Ai ∩ Aj = {ϕ ( i, j
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) . ϕ : Bn → B, ( i, j ) ֏ ϕ ( i, jﺗﻌﲏ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ′ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ،ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
2n +1
= ) card ( B ) = card ( Bn ) } ∑ card ( {i : 1 ≤ i ≤ j − 1
j =2
2n +1 2n
= ) ∑ ( j − 1 ) = ∑ j = n ( 2n + 1
j =2 j =1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Ak ,n )k ∈ℕ 2n +1ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Bnﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
} ) ( j = kﺃﻭ ) Ak ,n = {( i, j ) ∈ Bn : ( i = k
} = {( i, k ) : 1 ≤ i < k } ∪ {( k , j ) : k < j ≤ 2n + 1
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 2nﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ ، ϕ ( Ak ,n ) ⊂ Akﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ
ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 2nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀k ∈ ℕ 2n +1, ϕ ( Ak ,n ) = Ak
ﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻻﺯﻡﹴ ﻟﻴﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ.
. ∀k ∈ ℕ 2n +1, ∑θ ( ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ } θ : B → { 0,1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ x ) = n
x ∈Ak
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺭﺩﺕ ﰲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ Θ = θ ϕﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
k −1 2n +1
∀k ∈ ℕ 2n +1, ∑ ∑ Θ ( i, k ) + Θ ( k, j ) = n
i =1 j =k +1
ﻭﺑﺎﳉﻤﻊ ﳒﺪ
2n +1 k −1 2n 2n +1
+
∑ ∑ Θ ( i , k ) ) ∑ ∑ Θ ( k , j ) = n ( 2n + 1
k =1 j =k +1
k = 2 i =1
ﺃﻭ ∑(p,q )∈B ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍ ﻤﻮ ﻋﲔ ﺍ ﻟﺴﺎ ﺑﻘﲔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻥ ،ﺇ ﺫﹾ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻱ ) Θ(p, q
n
) . ∑ x ∈B θ ( xﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) n ( 2n + 1ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ nﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ
ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 254
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮﻁﹲ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ( Ak )k ∈ℕ 2n +1ﻣﻦ Bﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﻭ ﻭ .
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، n = 2mﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ B = B2mﺃﻱ
} B2m = {( i, j ) ∈ ℕ × ℕ : 1 ≤ i < j ≤ 4m + 1
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ k ≤ 4m + 1ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Ak = Ak ,2mﺃﻱ
} ) ( j = kﺃﻭ ) Ak = Ak ,2m = {( i, j ) ∈ B2m : ( i = k
} = {( i, k ) : 1 ≤ i < k } ∪ {( k , j ) : k < j ≤ 4m + 1
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﻭ ﻭ .
ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ } θ : B → { 0,1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻧﺎ
ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . mﻧﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺣﻠﻮ ﻻﹰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ
m = 1ﻭ m = 2ﻭ .m = 3
• • • • • • A1
• • • • • A2
• A3 • • • •
• • • • A1 • • • • •
• • • A2 A4
• • • • A5
• • A1 • A3 •
• •
•
• • • • A6
• A2 A4 • • A7 •
A3 • • • A5
• • A8 •
A4
• • A6
• A9 •
A7 • •
A5 • A10
A8 A11 •
A9 A12 •
m =1 m =2 m =3 A13
ﻓﻨﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ m = 1ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻳﺔ ،ﳚﺮﻯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ،ﻭﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ، 2ﺃﻱ ℓ +1
2 ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ℓﻣﻦ ℕﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ s ℓﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ
} 0 : ℓ mod 4 ∈ { 0, 3
ℓ + 1
sℓ =
mod 2 =
2 } 1 : ℓ mod 4 ∈ {1, 2
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
Θ : B2m → { 0,1 } , Θ ( i, j ) = ( i + j + si +1s j ) mod 2
255 1988 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻫﻲﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣΘ ( i, j ) ﳝﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ
1 ( −1 )i + j
Θ ( i, j ) = − + ( −1 )i + j si +1s j
2 2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬℕ 4m +1 ﻣﻦk ﻟﺘﻜﻦ
k −1 4m +1
∑ Θ(X ) = ∑ Θ ( i, k ) + ∑ Θ ( k, j )
X ∈Ak i =1 j =k +1
k −1
1 ( −1 )i +k
= ∑ 2 − 2 + ( −1 )i +k si +1sk
=1
i
∆1
4m +1
1 ( −1 )k + j
+ ∑ − + ( −1 )k + j sk +1s j
j =k +1 2 2
∆2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
k −1 k −1
k − 1 ( −1 )k
∆1 =
2
−
2 ∑ ( −1 )i + ( −1 )k sk ∑ ( −1 )i si +1
i =1 i =1
k 4m +1 4m
4m + 1 − k ( −1 )
∆2 =
2
−
2 ∑ ( −1 )i − ( −1 )k sk +1 ∑ ( −1 )i si +1
i =k +1 i =k
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧ
4q 4q +1 4q −1
∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1 = ∑ ( −1 )i si = ∑ ( −1 )i si
i =1 i =2 i =0
q −1
= ∑ ( s4 ℓ − s4 ℓ +1 + s4 ℓ +2 − s4 ℓ +3 ) = 0
ℓ =0
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
k −1 4m +1 4m + 1
∑ ( −1 )i + ∑ ( −1 )i = ∑ ( −1 )i − ( −1 )k = −1 − ( −1 )k
i =1 i =k +1 i =1
ﺇﺫﻥ
k −1
1 + ( −1 )k
∆1 + ∆2 = 2m + − ( −1 )k ( sk + sk +1 ) ∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1
2 i =1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 256
4q
ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1 = 0
i =1
4q +1
∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1 = s 4q +2 = s2 = 1
i =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
4q + 3 4q + 2
∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1 ﻭ = 1 + s0 = 1 ∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1 = 1 − s3 = 1
i =1 i =1
ﺇﺫﻥ
ℓ −1 0 : ℓ = 1 mod 4
∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1 =
i =1 1 : ℓ ≠ 1 mod 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
0 : ℓ = 3 mod 4
s ℓ +1 + s ℓ = 1 : ℓ = 0 mod 2
2 : ℓ = 1 mod 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ℓ −1 0 : ℓ = 1 mod 2
( −1 )ℓ ( s ℓ +1 + s ℓ ) ∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1 =
i =1 1 : ℓ = 0 mod 2
ﺃﻱ
ℓ −1
1 + ( −1 )ℓ
) ( −1 ℓ
= ( s ℓ +1 + s ℓ ) ∑ ( −1 )i +1 si +1
i =1 2
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ، ∆1 + ∆2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ∆1 + ∆2 = 2mﺃﻭ
∑ Θ ( X ) = 2m = n
X ∈Ak
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﹺﺖ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ .ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، nﺣﱴ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ( Ak )k ∈ℕ 2n +1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﻭ ﻭ ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰù .
257 ﻋﺎﻡ 1988
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ∗ f : ℕ∗ → ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
f (1 ) = 1ﻭ . f ( 3 ) = 3
ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻓﻠﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) .f ( 2n ) = f ( n
) .f ( 4n + 1 ) = 2 f ( 2n + 1 ) − f ( n
) .f ( 4n + 3 ) = 3 f ( 2n + 1 ) − 2 f ( n
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ nﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1988ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . f ( n ) = n
ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ، 2
ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . nﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . nﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ( A )2
ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ 2ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . A
n f ( n ) (n )2 ( f ( n ))2
1 1 1 1
2 1 10 01
3 3 11 11
4 1 100 001
5 5 101 101
6 3 110 011
7 7 111 111
8 1 1000 0001
9 9 1001 1001
10 5 1010 0101
11 13 1011 1101
12 3 1100 0011
13 11 1101 1011
14 7 1110 0111
15 15 1111 1111
ﻓﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ( bℓbℓ−1 …b1b0 )2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ) ، mﻣﻊ bℓ ≠ 0ﺃﻱ
(ℓ = log2 m ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ( b0b1 …bℓ−1bℓ )2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ) ، f ( mﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . m < 16ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ Pnﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . nﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pnﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ » :ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ) ( ε0, …, εn −1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
n −1 n
{ 0,1 }n −1ﻳﻜﻦ « f 2n + ∑ εk 2k = 1 + ∑ εn −k 2k
k =0 k =1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 258
ﻟﻘﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Pnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ n ≤ 3ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ Pnﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {1, 2, …, m − 1ﻭﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pm
= x = ( bmbm −1 …b0 )2ﻣﻊ . bm = 1ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ
m
∑ k = 0 bk 2k
= . y = ( bmbm −1 …b2 )2 ﻧﻜﺘﺐ x = b0 + 2b1 + 4yﺣﻴﺚ
m −2
∑ k =0 bk +2 2k
ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . b0 = 0ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ xﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ bk +1 = δkﻛﺎﻥ
m −1
= z ∑ δk 2k x = 2zﻭ
k =0
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ، fﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ، Pm −1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
m −1
f x = f z = 1+
( ) ( )
∑ δm −1−k 2k
k =1
m −1 m
k
=1+ ∑ bm −k 2 = 1+ ∑ bm −k 2k
k =1 k =1
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻧﺘﺠﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ . b0 = 0ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pmﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) . (b0, b1 ) = ( 1, 0ﺇﺫﻥ x = 1 + 4yﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) f ( x ) = f ( 1 + 4y ) = 2 f ( 1 + 2y ) − f ( y
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ Pm −1ﻭ Pm −2ﻟﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ( ( bmbm −1 …b2 01 )2 ) = f ( x ) = 2 f ( ( bm …b21 )2 ) − f ( ( bm …b2 )2
m −2 m −2
= 2 2m −1 + ∑ bm −k 2k − ∑ bm −k 2k
k =0
k = 0
m −2
m
=2 + ∑ bm −k 2k = ( 10b2 …bm −1bm )2
k =0
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pmﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) . (b0, b1 ) = ( 1,1ﺇﺫﻥ x = 3 + 4yﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) f ( x ) = f ( 3 + 4y ) = 3 f ( 1 + 2y ) − 2 f ( y
259 ﻋﺎﻡ 1988
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﳎﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ Pm −1ﻭ Pm −2ﻟﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ( ( bmbm −1 …b211 )2 ) = f ( x ) = 3 f ( ( bm …b21 )2 ) − 2 f ( ( bm …b2 )2
m −2 m −2
= 3 2m −1 + ∑ bm −k 2k − 2 ∑ bm −k 2k
k =0
k =0
m −2
= 2m + 2m −1 + ∑ bm −k 2k = ( 11b2 …bm −1bm )2
k =0
ﻭﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻴﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pmﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ.
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
}) ( f ( n ) = nﻭ ) A = { n ∈ ℕ∗ : ( n ≤ 1988
ﻟﻘﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ f ( n ) = nﺗﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ .ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Lℓﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﹼﻒ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ 2ﻣﻦ ℓ + 1ﺧﺎﻧﺔﹰ ،ﺃﻱ
} Lℓ = {( 1εℓ −1 … ε0 )2 : ( εk )0≤k < ℓ ∈ { 0,1 }ℓ
ﺛﹸﻢ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ S ℓﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﹼﻒ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ 2ﻣﻦ ℓ + 1ﺧﺎﻧﺔﹰ ،ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
، f ( n ) = nﻛﺎﻥ
} S ℓ = {( 1εℓ−1εℓ−2 … ε2ε11 )2 ∈ Lℓ : ∀k ∈ {1, …, ℓ/2 } , εk = εℓ −k
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
card ( S ℓ ) = 2 ℓ/2
ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ
1988 = 211 − ( 25 + 24 + 23 + 22 ) = ( 11111000010 )2
ﺇﺫﻥ
( = } ∗ ) {n ≤ 1988 : f ( n ) = n ( ∪
0 ≤ ℓ ≤10
Sℓ )\( S 10 )] ∩ ]1988, 2047
ﻟﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ] . S10 ∩ ]1988, 2047ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
( 1ε1ε2ε3ε4ε5ε4ε3ε2ε11 )2 ≥ 1989 = ( 11111000011 )2
ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
5 4
≥ ∑ εk 2k ∑ ( 1 − εk ) 210−k + 2
k =1 k =1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 260
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { ε1, ε2, ε3, ε4ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
5 4
≥ 26 − 2 ≥ ∑ εk 2k ∑ ( 1 − εk ) 210−k + 2 ≥ 2 + 26
k =1 k =1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، ε1 = ε2 = ε3 = ε4 = 1ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
} S10 ∩ ]1988, 2047 ] ⊂ {( 11111011111 )2 , ( 11111111111 )2
ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
card ( S10 ∩ ]1988, 2047 ]) = 2
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ∗ ( ﳒﺪ
10 ℓ/2
card ( {n ≤ 1988 : f n = n } ) = ∑ 2 − 2
( )
ℓ = 0
4
= ∑ 2 2k /2 + 2 ( 2k +1 )/2 + 25 − 2
k = 0
5
= ∑ 2k + 30 = 26 − 2 + 30 = 92
k =1
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ nﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1988ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، f ( n ) = n
ù ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 92
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
70
k 5
∑x −k ≥
4
k =1
ﻫﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﳍﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1988
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
n
k
= ) f : ( ℝ\ℕ n ) → ℝ, f ( x ∑x −k
k =1
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ\ℕ n = I 0 ∪ I 1 ∪ ⋯ ∪ I n −1 ∪ I nﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
[ I 0 = ]−∞,1ﻭ [∞ I n = ]n, +ﻭ [ I k = ]k, k + 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ k < n
261 ﻋﺎﻡ 1988
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ h > 0ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . Eh = { x ∈ ℝ\ℕ n : f ( x ) ≥ h
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺳﺎﻟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ، I 0ﺇﺫﻥ ∅ = . Eh ∩ I 0
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ k < nﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ I kﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
lim f ( x ) = +∞, lim ∞f ( x ) = −
x →k + x →( k +1 )−
ﻓﻠﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ، f ( x ) = hﺣﻞﱞ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ I kﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ، x kﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
] Eh ∩ I k = ]k , x k
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ I nﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
lim f ( x ) = +∞, lim f ( x ) = 0
x →n + ∞x →+
ﻓﻠﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ، f ( x ) = hﺣﻞﱞ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ I nﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ، x nﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
] Eh ∩ I n = ]n, x n
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
= Eh ] ∪ ]k , x k
1≤k ≤n
ﺃﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Ehﻓﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
n n
)n (n + 1
= ) λ ( Eh ∑ ( x k − k ) =
∑ xk − 2
k =1 k =1
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ x kﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ I kﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ . f ( x ) = hﻭﻟﻜﻦ
f (x ) = h ⇔ P (x ) = 0
ﻭ Pﻫﻮ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
n
1
= ) P (X ∏ (X − j ) −
∑h k
) k ∏ (X − j
1≤ j ≤n =1 1≤ j ≤n , j ≠k
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ deg P = nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ( x k )1≤k ≤nﻫﻲ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Pﻭﺃﺎ ﲨﻴﻌﺎﹰ
ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ X n −1ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Pﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، −∑ k =1 x kﻭﻣﻨﻪ
n
n
n 1 n )1 n (n + 1
∑ xk = ∑ j + h ∑ k = 1 + h
k =1 k =1 k =1 2 ( )
5 )n (n + 1
= ) . λ ( Ehﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 70ﻭ = hﳒﺪ . λ ( Eh ) = 1988 ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
4 2h
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 262
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ABCﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﹰ ﰲ . Aﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Dﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ . Aﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
] [ AB ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ABDﻭ ACDﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ
ﻭ ] [ ACﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Kﻭ Lﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ
ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . AKL
ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ . AK = AL = AD
A
C1
K C2
I
J L
B D C
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ K ′ﻣﻦ ] [ ABﻭ L ′ﻣﻦ ] [ ACﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ، AK ′ = AD = AL ′
ﻓﻴﻜﻮ ﻥ L ′AK ′ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻗﺎ ﺋﻤﺎﹰ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻱ ﺍ ﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮ ﻑ Xﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ﺍ ﻟﻌﻤﻮ ﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ
) ( ABﻣﻦ K ′ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( ADﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ( K ′L ′ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ . AK ′X
A ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AK ′Xﻫﻮ ﺻﻮ ﺭ ﺓ ADBﻭ ﻓﻖ
C 1 ﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺎ ﻇﺮ ﺍ ﻟﻘﺎ ﺋﻢ S1ﺑﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇ ﱃ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ، ∆1
K′ C2
ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ، BADﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ∆1ﻫﻮ
I
J ﳏﻮ ﺭ ﺗﻨﺎ ﻇﺮ ﻟﻠﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺓ Cﺍ ﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼ ﻉ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ L ′
1
B D C
∆ 1
ABDﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ،ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Iﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ . ∆1
ﻭ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ C1ﻫﻲ ﺃ ﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍ ﻟﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺓ ﺍ ﳌﺎﺳﺔ
X ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AK ′Xﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﻓﻤﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Iﻳﻘﻊ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ، AK ′Xﺃﻱ ) . ( K ′L ′
ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ،ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، Jﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 2ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ADC
ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( K ′L ′ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( K ′L ′ﻫﻮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭ ﲟﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1
ﻭ ، C 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ K = K ′ ﻭ . L = L ′ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ . AK = AL = AD
ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺘﻨﺎ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ AUVWﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ .UVWﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
1 1 1
= AABC AAKL = AK ⋅ AL = AD 2ﻭ AD ⋅ BC
2 2 2
263 ﻋﺎﻡ 1988
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ BCﻛﺎﻥ ، BC = 2AM ≥ 2ADﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
1
= AABC AD ⋅ BC ≥ AD 2 = 2AAKL
2
ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﻘﺖ Mﻋﻠﻰ ، Dﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ABC
ù ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺍ ﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﻥ ﻣﻮ ﺟﺒﺎ ﻥ ﲤﺎ ﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻧﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ab + 1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، a + b
2 2
ﻭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ a 2 + b 2ﻋﻠﻰ ab + 1ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞﹲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . 0 < a ≤ bﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ qﺇﱃ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ
a 2 + b 2ﻋﻠﻰ . ab + 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، a = bﻳﻜﻮﻥ a 2 + 1ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ 2a 2ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ ، a 2ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ
ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، 2ﻭﻟﻜﻦ (a 2 + 1 ) | 2ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ، a = 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، q = 1 ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ
ﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ 0 < a < bﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} ) ) ( α2 + β 2 = q ( αβ + 1ﻭ ) Dq = {( α, β ) ∈ ℕ2 : ( 0 < α < β
ﺇﻥﹼ ∅ ≠ Dqﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ . (a, b ) ∈ Dqﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ cﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
} c = min { α ∈ ℕ∗ : ∃β ∈ ℕ, ( α, β ) ∈ Dq
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ dﻣﻦ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
0 < c < dﻭ ) c 2 + d 2 = q ( cd + 1
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ . m = cq − d
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
qcd < q ( cd + 1 ) = c 2 + d 2 < cd + d 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ qc < c + d ﺃﻭ . m < c
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
m 2 + c 2 − q ( mc + 1 ) = ( qc − d )2 + c 2 − qc ( qc − d ) − q
= c 2 + d 2 − q ( cd + 1 ) = 0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 264
ﺇﺫﻥ
( )∗ ) m 2 + c 2 = q ( mc + 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ . m ≥ 0
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، m > 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ( m, c ) ∈ Dqﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ، c
ﻷﻥﹼ . m < c
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، m = 0ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ∗ ( ﺃﻥﹼ . q = c 2ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ qﻫﻮ
ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
( Ai )1≤i ≤117 ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, …,1989ﺇﱃ 117ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ
ﳛﻮﻱ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ 17ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ،ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﹼﻖ ﺎ.
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ℕ 1989 = {1, 2, …,1989ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1989 × 995
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ Aiﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
1989 × 995
= 17 × 995
117
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ ℕ 1989ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ، k = 1990 − kﻭ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} ، ℕ 1989 \{ 995ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ } .C k = {k, kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮ ﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱢ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2 × 995ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∪ } ℕ 1989 = { 995 ( ∪
1≤k ≤994
Ck )
ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ، 17 = 3 + 2 × 7ﻓﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻛﻞﱡ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ Ai
ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ 7ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ، (C k )1≤k ≤994ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Diﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ،
ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3 × 995
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ، ( Di )1≤i ≤117ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 3ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 3 × 995ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻤﻤﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﺎ
ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉﹴ ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ . (C k )1≤k ≤994
ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ،ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 995ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Di )1≤i ≤117ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ
، D117ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ } . D117 = C 1 ∪ { 995 } = {1, 995,1989
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Di )1≤i ≤116ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮ ﺏﹴ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻤﻤﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉﹴ ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ . (C k )2≤k ≤994ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
card ( ∪ 1≤i ≤116 Di ) = 3 × 116 = 2 × 174
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Jﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ } { 2, …, 994ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ 174ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∪ 1≤i ≤116 Di = ∪ k ∈J C k
265
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 266
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Di )i ≤116ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺟﺎﹰ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﻧﺎ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} D2 ℓ +1 = {a, b, cﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ } D2 ℓ +2 = {a, b, cﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ
D2 ℓ ∪ D2 ℓ +1 = C a ∪ Cb ∪ Cc
ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ،ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﻌﻤﻞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ aﻭ bﻭ cﻭ aﻭ bﻭ cﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ
ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 2, …,1988
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻓﻤﺜﻼﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 0 ≤ ℓ ≤ 57ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
a ℓ = 470 + ℓﻭ bℓ = 528 + ℓﻭ c ℓ = 1987 − 2ℓ
ﻛﺎ ﻥ ] a ℓ ∈ [ 470, 527ﻭ ] bℓ ∈ [ 528, 585ﻭ ] ، c ℓ ∈ [ 1873,1987ﻭ ﻛﺬ ﻟﻚ
] a ℓ ∈ [ 1463,1520ﻭ ] bℓ ∈ [ 1405,1462ﻭ ] ، cℓ ∈ [ 3,117ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺍﺎﻻﺕ ] [ 3,117ﻭ ] [ 470, 527ﻭ ] [ 528, 585ﻭ ] [ 1463,1520ﻭ ] [ 1405,1462
ﻭ ] [ 1873,1987ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ .ﻓﻨﻌﺮﻑ
} D2 ℓ +1 = {a ℓ , bℓ , c ℓﻭ } D2 ℓ +2 = {a ℓ , bℓ , c ℓ
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ
} J = { 470 + ℓ : 0 ≤ ℓ ≤ 115 } ∪ {1 + 2ℓ, 0 ≤ ℓ ≤ 58
ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Di )1≤i ≤117ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 3
ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3 × 995ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
117
∪ Di = { 995 } ∪ ∪ C j
i =1 j ∈J
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ℕ 1989 \( ∪117
= ) i =1Di ∪ Cj
j ∈ ℕ 994 \J
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
card ( ℕ 994 \J ) = 994 − 175 = 819 = 7 × 117
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳒﺰﺉ ،ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ،ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ℕ 994 \Jﺇﱃ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ 117ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ
( J i )1≤i ≤117ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 7ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ ) Ai = Di ∪ ( ∪ j ∈J i C j
ù ﻟﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Ai )1≤i ≤117ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
267 ﻋﺎﻡ 1989
Aﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Cﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ . ABCﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
Bﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C
ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ . A1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ، B1ﻭ ﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ Cﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ .C 1ﻧﻌﺮﻑ A0ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( AA1ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻔﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ Bﻭ .Cﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ B0ﻭ .C 0ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A0B0C 0ﺗﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﹶﻲ ﻣﺴﺎ ﺣﺔ ﺍ ﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ
ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻲ ، AC 1BA1CB1ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ . ABC
B0 ﻟﻨﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻔﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ Bﻭ Cﺗﺒﻌﺪ
C0
A
C1
B1
ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( ACﻭ ) ( BCﻭ ) ( ABﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻭﻫﻲ
I ، Aﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ
ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ) ( AA1ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻳﱪﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ A0ﺑﺄﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ) ( AA1
B C
A1
ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺼﻔﲔ ﺍ ﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ Bﻭ .Cﻭﺑﺎ ﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻧﱪﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ B0ﻭ .C 0
A 0
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Iﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﺃﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ
ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
= 1A
IAC CABﻭ 1 = CBB 1 = 1 B
2 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABIﳒﺪ
B 1 1
0IA = 2 A + 2 B
، Bﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. B1A = B1I ﺇﺫﻥ 0IA = IAB1
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ IAB0ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﹰ ﰲ Aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
B= 1AB0
π − CAB
− IAC = 1 π − 1A
− 12 B
2 2 2
ﻭ
+ 1A
− ( 12 B
IB = 0A −B = 0IA ) 2
π π
2 2
، Bﻭﻣﻦ ﹶﺛﻢ . B1A = B1B0 ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ 1AB0 = IB0A
B1ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ] [ IB0ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ . IAB0ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ) A ( Pﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ، Pﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . A ( IAB0 ) = 2A ( IAB1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 268
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . A ( IAC 0 ) = 2A ( IAC 1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
) A ( IBC 0 ) = 2A ( IBC 1 ), A ( IBA0 ) = 2A ( IBA1
A ( ICA0 ) = 2A ( ICA1 ), ) A ( ICB0 ) = 2A ( ICB1
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺮﻑ ﳒﺪ
A ( A0B0C 0 ) = 2A ( AC 1BACB
1 )1
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ،ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ aﻭ bﻭ cﺇﱃ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺍﳌﹸﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ
A
B 1
Aﻭ Bﻭ ،Cﻭﻧﺮﻣﺰ Rﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺳﻪ. ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
C
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ، BA1Cﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ BC = a
1
B C ، 12 a tan ( 12 Aﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ
ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ A1ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )
A1 a2 ) = R 2 sin 2 A
⋅ tan ( 1 A
= ) 1
A ( BAC tan ( 12 A ) 2
4
، x = tan ( 1 Aﻛﺎﻥ = 2x
، sin Aﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) 2
1 + x2
2 x3
A BAC
( 1 ) = 4R 2
) (1 + x 2
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﹼﻠﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) y = tan ( 12 Bﻭ ) z = tan ( 12 Cﻛﺎﻥ
z3 y3
A ( AC 1B ) = 4R 2 2 ﻭ A (CB1A ) = 4R 2 2
) (1 + z 2 ) (1 + y 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
) S = A ( BA1C ) + A (CB1A ) + A ( AC 1B
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﲔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﻭﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﺃﻥﹼ
S 4R 2 x3 y3 z3
= + +
3 3 ( 1 + x 2 )2 ( 1 + y 2 )2 ( 1 + z 2 )2
x3 y3 z3
≥ 4R 2 ⋅ 3 2 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 2
) (1 + x 2 ) (1 + y 2 ) (1 + z 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
xyz
⋅ S ≥ 12R 2
2 2 2 2
3
) (1 + x ) (1 + y 2 ) (1 + z 2
269 ﻋﺎﻡ 1989
ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻓﺘﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
sin B
A ( ABC ) = 2R 2 sin A sin C
xyz
= 16R 2 2
( 1 + x ) )( + y 2 )( 1 + z 2
1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
S 3
) (1 ⋅ ≥ 3 ) ( 1 + x 2 )( 1 + y 2 )( 1 + z 2
A ( ABC ) 4
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
1
f : 0, → ℝ, f ( t ) = ln
2
π
cos2 t ( )
) = −2 ln ( cos t
ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ، f ′ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) ، f ′ ( t ) = 2 tan ( tﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ، [ 0, π2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﳏﺪﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ [ [ 0, π2ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ
1 A B C A +B
+C
f + f + ≥ f f
3 2 2 2 6
ﺃﻭ
1 4
3
( ln ( 1 + x 2 ) + ln ( 1 + y 2 ) + ln ( 1 + z 2 ) ) ≥ ln
3 ) (
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
4
3 ≥ ) ( 1 + x 2 )( 1 + y 2 )( 1 + z 2
3
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﰲ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، S ≥ A ( ABCﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ
ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، A ( AC 1BA1CB1 ) = S + A ( ABCﺇﺫﻥ
) A ( AC 1BA1CB1 ) ≥ 2A ( ABC
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) A ( A0B0C 0 ) = 2A ( AC 1BA1CB1 ) ≥ 4 A ( ABC
ù ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 270
nﻭ kﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭ Qﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻻ
ﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Pﻣﻦ Qﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
1
ﻋﻦ kﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ .Qﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . k < + 2n
2
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) S = Q( 2ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Qﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ،ﻭﺍﻟﱵ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ .Q
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Dﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ )] ، ( P , [ ABﺇ ﺫﹾ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ، Qﻭ ] [ AB
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ Sﻭﳏﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Pﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ . D ⊂ Q × Sﺳﻨﺠﺰﺉ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ D
ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ :
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] s = [ ABﻣﻦ Sﻧﻌﺮﻑ
} Qs = { P ∈ Q : ( P, s ) ∈ D
ﺇﺫﻥ Qsﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Qﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ . s
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ Qﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ
ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . card (Qs ) ≤ 2
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Pﻣﻦ Qﻧﻌﺮﻑ
} S P = {s ∈ S : ( P, s ) ∈ D
ﺇﺫﻥ SPﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ Qﻭﺗﺒﻌﺪ Pﻋﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ
ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ Qﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ
ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ) k ( k −1
2 ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻦ ، Pﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ Sﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . card ( SP ) ≥ k ( k2−1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ
D = ∪ Qs = ∪ S P
s ∈S P ∈Q
ﺇﺫﻥ
) k (k − 1 ) k (k − 1
= ) card ( D × ) ∑ card ( SP ) ≥ card (Q 2
×=n
2
P ∈Q
) n (n − 1
= ) card ( D = ∑ card (Qs ) ≤ card ( S ) × 2 2
×2
s ∈S
271 ﻋﺎﻡ 1989
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ) n ( n − 1 ) ≥ n × k ( k2−1ﺃﻭ
k 2 − k + 2 ≤ 2n
ù . k < 12 + ، ( k − 12 ) = k 2 − k +ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ2n
2 1
4 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ < 2n
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ BCﻭ ] [ ADﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
) (CD ، AB = AD + BCﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Pﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ hﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ AP = h + ADﻭ . BP = h + BCﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1 1
≥ +
h AD BC
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ . h
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ C Aﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Aﻭﲤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Dﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ C Bﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Bﻭﲤ ﺮ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،Cﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺳﺘﲔ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ AB
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Cﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Pﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ، hﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ∆ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ
ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C Aﻭ C Bﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ Cﻭ Dﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( AB
∆ C ∆
C
P C E
D
D P
A B A B
CA CA
CB CB
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ∆ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ،ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ، P+ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C A
ﻭ C Bﻓﻬﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Cﻭ ، Dﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [CDﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C
ﲤﺲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C Aﻭ C Bﻛﻤﺎ ﲤﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] ، [CDﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﺎ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺟﺰﺀ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ P+ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C Aﻭ . C Bﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ » ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﺍﳌﻨﺤﲏ « ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C Aﻭ C Bﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ∆ .
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ hﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ h0ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ) (CDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ∆ .ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ C ﻭ Dﳘﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ∆ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C Aﻭ . C Bﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ
ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﻟﻨﺤﺴﺐ . h0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 272
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Eﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ∆ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ APEDﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
E P ED 2 = AP 2 − AX 2
= ( AD + h0 )2 − ( AD − h0 )2 = 4AD ⋅ h0
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ،ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ BPECﺃﻥﹼ
D X A EC 2 = 4BC ⋅ h0
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ ABCD ﳒﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ .CD 2 = 4AD ⋅ BC
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ CD = CE + EDﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
2 AD ⋅ BC = 2 BC h0 + 2 AD h0
ﺃﻱ
1 1 1
= +
h0 AD BC
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ hﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ h ≤ h0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔù .
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ، nﻓﺘﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄﹼ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 2 ≤ k ≤ mﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ . Ak ,m = ( m ! )2 + kﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Qk ,mﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ! mﻋﻠﻰ ، kﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ، mﻭﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ . kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
2 2
) (1 ) Ak ,m = k 2 (Qk ,m ) + k = k ( k × (Qk ,m ) + 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ Ak ,mﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، kﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Ak ,mﻗﻮﺓﹰ ﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ، pﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﺳﻢ ، Ak ,mﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻗﻮﻯ ﳍﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ،ﻭﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
2
k × (Qk ,m ) + 1 = 0 mod p ﻭ k = 0 mod p
ù ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ } S = { Ak ,n +1 : 2 ≤ k ≤ n + 1ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
273 ﻋﺎﻡ 1989
ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ σﻣﻦ ، S2nﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، ℕ 2n = {1, 2, …, 2n
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﹲ iﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, …, 2n − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
σ (i ) − σ (i + 1) = n
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، nﻳﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ S2nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻘﻬﺎ.
( Bk )k ∈ℕ n ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Ai )i ∈ℕ 2n −1ﻣﻊ } ، Ai = {i, i + 1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
( Si ,k )( i ,k )∈ ℕﻣﻦ S2n ﻣﻊ } . Bk = {k, k + nﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ
2n ×ℕ n
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
} Si ,k = { σ ∈ S2n : σ ( Ai ) = Bk
= ، Tkﻭ . P = ∪ Tkﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ σﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ∪ ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ Si ,k
k ∈ℕn i ∈ ℕ 2n −1
ﻛﺎﻥ σﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ، Pﻭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . card ( P ) ≥ 12 card ( S2n
ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ( X j )j ∈ ℕ nﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
n
≥ card ∪ X j
j ∈ℕn ∑ ∑ card ( X j ) − ) card ( X ℓ ∩ Xk
j =1 1≤ ℓ <k ≤n
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳚﺮﻱ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، nﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
n = 1ﻭ . n = 2ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
card ∪ X j = card ∪ X j + card ( Xn +1 ) − card ∪ ( X j ∩ Xn +1 )
j ∈ℕ n +1 j ∈ℕ n j ∈ℕ n
n +1
≥ ∑ ∑ card ( X j ) − card ( X ℓ ∩ Xk ) − ∑ ) card ( X ℓ ∩ Xn +1
j =1 1≤ ℓ <k ≤n 1≤ ℓ ≤n
n +1
= ∑ card ( X j ) − ∑ ) card ( X ℓ ∩ Xk
j =1 1≤ ℓ <k ≤n +1
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n + 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ! ) card ( Si ,k ) = 2 × ( 2n − 2ﺇﺫﻥ
2n −1
= ) card ( Tk !) ∑ card ( Si,k ) = 2 ( 2n − 1
i =1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 274
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ℓ < kﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
0 : i−j ≤1
card ( Si,k ∩ S j , ℓ ) =
2 × 2 × ( 2n − 4 ) ! : i−j >1
ﺇﺫﻥ
= ) card ( T ℓ ∩ Tk ∑ ) card ( Si ,k ∩ Sj , ℓ
1≤i , j ≤2n −1
! ) = 4 ( 2n − 2 )( 2n − 3 ) × ( 2n − 4 ) ! = 4 ( 2n − 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
≥ ) card ( P ∑ ∑ card ( Tk ) − ) card ( T ℓ ∩ Tk
k =1 1≤ ℓ <k ≤n
)n (n − 1
≥ n × 2 ( 2n − 1 ) ! − ! ) × 4 ( 2n − 2
2
n −1
≥ ( 2n ) ! − ! ) ( 2n
2n − 1
n 1
× ! ) = ( 2n (
2n − 1 )
! ) > × ( 2n
2
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻭﺗﺮﻳﻦ ] [ ABﻭ ] ، [CDﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ . Eﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ EBﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ Eﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ DEMﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( BCﻭ ) ( ACﰲ Fﻭ Gﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
AM EG
= .t ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
AB EF
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ CEGﻭ . BMD
DBMﻷﻥﹼ ACBDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
= ECG ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،
DEGﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﻴﺔ
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﻴﺔ
G
D
M
B . DEﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
DMEﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺱ
F
A
E
.CEGﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ BMDﻭ
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ ﺍﳌﻜﻤﻠﺘﲔ
C
ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ CEGﻭ ، BMDﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
EC EG
) (1 =
BM DM
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ CEFﻭ . AMD
DAMﻷﻥﹼ ACBDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ .ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،
= ECF
= GED
FEC = DME
= DMA
ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ CEFﻭ ، AMDﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
AM DM
)(2 =
EC EF
ﻭﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
EG AM AM t
= = =
EF BM AB − AM 1−t
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
275
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 276
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ، n ≥ 3ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Eﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ 2n − 1ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺯﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ kﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ .ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ » ﺟﻴﺪ«
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍ ﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞﹸ ﻗﻮ ﺱﹴ ،ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ،ﻋﻠﻰ nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . Eﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ kﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦﹴ ﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ k ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ E
» ﺟﻴﺪﺍﹰ « .
ﻟﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ Pﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) . ω = exp ( 22ni−π1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
} E = { ωk : k ∈ ℤ } = { ωk : 0 ≤ k < 2n − 1
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ϕﻭﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ϕ−1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Eﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ϕ : E → E , z ֏ ωn +1 ⋅ z
ϕ−1 : E → E , z ֏ ωn −2 ⋅ z
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ Bﻣﻦ » Eﺟﻴﺪﺓ « ) ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ
ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ( ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ z ﻣﻦ ، Bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ϕ ( z ) ∈ Bﺃﻭ . ϕ−1 ( z ) ∈ B
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ Bﻣﻦ » Eﺳﻴﺌﺔ « ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ :ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ z
ﻣﻦ ، Bﻛﺎﻥ ϕ ( z ) ∉ Bﻭﻛﺎﻥ ، ϕ−1 ( z ) ∉ Bﺃﻱ
∀z ∈ E , ) ) z ∈ B ⇒ ( z ∉ ϕ ( B ) ) ∧ ( z ∉ ϕ−1 ( B
) ) ⇒ z ∈ E \( ϕ ( B ) ∪ ϕ−1 ( B
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
) ) B ⊂ E \( ϕ ( B ) ∪ ϕ−1 ( B
ﺃﻭ
∅ = ) ) B ∩ ( ϕ ( B ) ∪ ϕ−1 ( B
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ϕﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ،ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ∅ = ) . ϕ ( B ) ∩ ( ϕ2 ( B ) ∪ Bﻭﻟﻜﻦ
∀z ∈ E , ϕ2 ( z ) = ω 2n + 2 ⋅ z = ω 3 ⋅ z
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ Bﻣﻦ » Eﺳﻴﺌﺔ « ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ :
∅ = ) ϕ ( B ) ∩ ( ω 3B ∪ B
277 ﻋﺎﻡ 1990
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ℓ nﻣﻦ } { 0,1, …, 2n − 1ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
}) ∅ = ) ℓ n = max { card ( B ) : ( B ⊂ E ) ∧ ( ϕ ( B ) ∩ ( ω 3B ∪ B
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ℓ nﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻛﱪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ » ﺳﻴﺌﺔ « ﰲ . Eﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ k
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ . ℓ n + 1
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ) ϕ ( Bﻭ ω 3B ∪ B
ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ ﺃﻥﹼ
card ( ϕ ( B ) ) + card ( ω 3B ∪ B ) ≤ card ( E ) = 2n − 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
) card ( ϕ ( B ) ) = card ( Bﻭ ) card ( B ) ≤ card ( ω 3B ∪ B
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، 2 card ( B ) ≤ 2n − 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . card ( B ) ≤ n − 1 ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ
ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻥﹼ . ℓ n ≤ n − 1
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﹼﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ω 3B ∩ Bﺻﻐﲑﺍﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ω 3B ∪ Bﻛﺒﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﻭﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ) ) ، ϕ ( Bﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، (Bﺻﻐﲑﺍﹰ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺳﻴﺌﺔ Bﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ω 3B ∩ Bﻛﺒﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺃﻱ
ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ω 3ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺟﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻻﹼ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺍﹰ .ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ
ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Eﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
} A( r ,a,b ) = { ω 3k +r : a ≤ k < b
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ϕﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ nﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n mod 3 = 0ﺃﻱ . n = 3m
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ℓ n = n − 1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ Bﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
. 3m − 1ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ gcd ( 3, 2n − 1 ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ω 3ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﻟﹼﺪ
ﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ 2n − 1ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ
} E = { ω 3k : 0 ≤ k < 6m − 1
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
} B = { ω 3k : 0 ≤ k < 3m − 1
ﻓﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . card ( B ) = 3m − 1 = n − 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 278
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ω 6m = ωﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، ωn +1 = ω 3m +6m = ω 3( 3mﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
} ϕ ( B ) = { ω 3( k + 3m ) : 0 ≤ k < 3m − 1
} = { ω 3k : 3m ≤ k < 6m − 1
ﻭ } ) ، ω 3B ∪ B = B ∪ { ω 3( 3m −1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . ϕ ( B ) ∩ ( ω 3B ∪ B ) = ∅ ﺃﻱ ﺇ ﹼﻥ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ . n − 1ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ
ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ :
) (1 n mod 3 = 0 ⇒ ℓ n = n − 1
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n mod 3 = 1ﺃﻱ . n = 3m + 1
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ℓ n = n − 1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ Bﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n − 1 = 3mﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ gcd ( 3, 2n − 1 ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ω 3ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﻟﹼﺪ ﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ 2n − 1ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ
} E = { ω 3k : 0 ≤ k < 6m − 1
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
} B = { ω 3k : 0 ≤ k < 3m
ﻓﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . card ( B ) = 3m = n − 1
، ωn +1 = ω 3m + 6m + 3ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ω 6m + 3 = ω 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) = ω 3( 3m +1
} ϕ ( B ) = { ω 3( k + 3m +1 ) : 0 ≤ k < 3m
} = { ω 3k : 3m + 1 ≤ k < 6m + 1
ﻭ } ) ، ω 3B ∪ B = B ∪ { ω 3( 3mﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . ϕ ( B ) ∩ ( ω 3B ∪ B ) = ∅ ﺃﻱ ﺇ ﹼﻥ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ . n − 1ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ
ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ :
)(2 n mod 3 = 1 ⇒ ℓ n = n − 1
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n mod 3 = 2ﺃﻱ . n = 3m + 2
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ . ℓ n = n − 2ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ، gcd ( 3, 2n − 1 ) = 3
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Eﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺛﻼﺙ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ A0ﻭ A1ﻭ ، A2
ﻫﻲ } Ar = { ω 3k +r : 0 ≤ k < 2m + 1ﻣﻊ rﻣﻦ } . { 0,1, 2
279 ﻋﺎﻡ 1990
ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ω 3Ar = Arﻭ . ϕ ( Ar ) = Arﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺳﻴﺌﺔ ،ﻭﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ Br = B ∩ Arﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ rﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ
∅ = ) ϕ ( B ) ∩ ( ω 3B ∪ B
ﺃﻥﹼ
3
∀r ∈ { 0,1, 2 } , ∅ = ) ϕ ( Br ) ∩ ( ω Br ∪ Br
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ rﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, 2ﺃﻥﹼ . 2 card ( Br ) ≤ card ( Ar ) = 2m + 1
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، ∀r ∈ { 0,1, 2 } , card ( Br ) ≤ mﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
card ( B ) = card ( B0 ) + card ( B1 ) + card ( B2 ) ≤ 3m = n − 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . ℓ n ≤ n − 2ﻭﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﲢﻘﱡﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ
Bﳍﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ،ﺃﻱ ، 3mﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺳﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ rﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, 2ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} Br = { ω 3k +r : 0 ≤ k < m
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ . B = B0 ∪ B1 ∪ B2ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ، card ( B ) = 3m = n − 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ :
) } ϕ ( Br ) = { ω 3( k +m +1 )+r : 0 ≤ k < m } = Ar \( Br ∪ { ω 3m +r
ﰲ ﺣﲔ } ، ω 3Br ∪ Br = Br ∪ { ω 3m +rﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
∅ = ) ϕ ( B ) ∩ ( ω 3B ∪ B
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ . n − 2ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ
ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ :
)(3 n mod 3 = 2 ⇒ ℓ n = n − 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺴﺒﻨﺎ ℓ nﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻨﻪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ kﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، ℓ n + 1ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ nﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } n mod 3 ∈ { 0,1ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ n − 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ù . n mod 3 = 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 280
ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n 2ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ
. 2n + 1ﻋﻴﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pn
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ P1ﻭ P3ﻣﺤﻘﹼﻘﺘﺎﻥ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺗﺤﻘﱡﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ 2n + 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ Pnﳏﻘﹼﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . {1, 3ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ :
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ aﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ . gcd ( a, 6 ) = 1ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
، bk = 23 a + 1ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
k
∀k ≥ 0, ( 3k +1 | bk ) ∧ ( 3k + 2 ) bk
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳚﺮﻱ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . k
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k = 0ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻭ ﻻﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ gcd ( a, 6 ) = 1ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ aﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
2a + 1 = ( −1 )a + 1 = −1 + 1 = 0 mod 3
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ . 3 | b0
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻷﻥﹼ 3 aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ a = 3q + rﻣﻊ } . r ∈ {1, 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، 2a = ( 23 ) ⋅ 2r = ( −1 )q 2r mod 9ﺃﻱ
q
} 2a mod 9 ∈ { 2, 4, 7, 5
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ 2a + 1 ≠ 0 mod 9ﺃﻭ . 9 b0ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 0
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ bk = 3k +1akﻣﻊ . 3 ak
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
k 3
) bk +1 = ( 23 a ) + 1 = ( bk − 1 )3 + 1 = bk (bk2 − 3bk + 3
ﺇﺫﻥ
) bk +1 = 3k + 2ak ( 32k +1ak2 − 3k +1ak + 1
ﻭﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ 3k + 2 | bk +1ﻭ . 3k + 3 bk +1ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k + 1
ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .
281 ﻋﺎﻡ 1990
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 2ﻳﺤﻘﻖ
2n = −1 mod n
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ℓ p ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
} ℓ p = min {k > 0 : 2k = −1 mod p
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ℓ p < p − 1ﻭ ℓ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ . n
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ p | nﻭ ) n | ( 2n + 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، 2n = −1 mod pﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} {k > 0 : 2k = −1 mod pﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ℓ pﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ.
ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃ ﺧﺮ ﻯ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎ ﻥ 2p −1 = 1 mod pﺍ ﻋﺘﻤﺎ ﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱪ ﻫﻨﺔ ، Fermat
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {k > 0 : 2k = 1 mod pﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻻ ﺣﺘﻮﺍ ﺋﻬﺎ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ
، p − 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ m pﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ . m p ≤ p − 1
ﳒﺮ ﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇ ﻗﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪ ﺩ ℓ pﻋﻠﻰ ، m pﻓﻴﻜﻮ ﻥ ℓ p = m pQ + Rﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ . 0 ≤ R < m pﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﳒﺪ
Q
−1 = 2ℓ p = ( 2m p ) ⋅ 2R = 2R mod p
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ 2n + 1ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ . p ≠ 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، R ≠ 0ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ℓ p ≤ Rﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ، ℓ pﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
0 < ℓ p < mp ≤ p − 1
ﻧﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﻋﻠﻰ : ℓ p
n = ℓ pq + r , 0 ≤ r < ℓp
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
q
−1 = 2n = ( 2ℓ p ) ⋅ 2r = ( −1 )q 2r mod p
ﺃﻭ . 2r = ( −1 )q +1 mod pﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ r > 0ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
m pﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ q = 1 mod 2ﻭﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ℓ pﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . q = 0 mod 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، r = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ℓ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ nﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 282
ﻟﻨﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺘﻨﺎ .ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ nﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، 1ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﻘﱡﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
. Pn
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
ℓ p < pﻭ ℓ p | nﺃﻥﹼ ، ℓ p = 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، 21 = −1 mod p ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ . p = 3
ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3ﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . n
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ 3kﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ 3ﺗﻘﺴﻢ . nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، n = 3k aﻭ . 3 aﻭﻟﻜﻦn
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺇﺫﻥ ، 2 aﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . gcd ( a, 6 ) = 1 ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ Pnﺃﻥﹼ
ﺃﻱ ) . 32k | ( 23 a + 1ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
k
( 32k a 2 ) | ( 2n )+ 1
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ 2k ≤ k + 1ﺃﻭ . k ≤ 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ n = 3aﻣﻊ . gcd ( a, 6 ) = 1
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . a > 1ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ p ′ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، aﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ . p ′ ≥ 5
ﻭﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ℓ p′ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . p ′ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ℓ p′ = 1ﺃﻭ . ℓ p′ = 3ﺃﻱ
2 = −1 mod p ′ﺃﻭ 23 = −1 mod p ′
ﻭﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺎﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ p ′ = 3ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، a = 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . n = 3 ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} n 2 | ( 2n + 1 ) ⇔ n ∈ {1, 3
ù ﻭﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ.
ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℚ∗+ → ℚ∗+ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) f (x
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℚ∗+ × ℚ∗+, = ) ) f ( xf ( y
y
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ) ℤ( ℕﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﰲ . ℤﺃﻱ
∞( αn )n ∈ ℕ ∈ ℤ( ℕ ) ⇔ card ( {k ∈ ℕ : αk ≠ 0 } ) < +
ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ } P = { Pk : k ∈ ℕﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
283 ﻋﺎﻡ 1990
ﺗﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
֏ ϕ : ℤ( ℕ ) → ℚ∗+, ( αn )n ∈ℕ ∏ Pnα n
n ∈ℕ
ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﺑﲔ ℚ∗+ﻭ ) . ℤ( ℕﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻀﻊ
f ( ∏ P )=( ∏ P
n ∈ℕ
n
αn
n ∈ℕ
α2n +1
2n ) )⋅( ∏ P
n ∈ℕ
−α2n
2n +1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x = ∏ Pnαnﻭ y = ∏ Pnβnﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ℚ∗+ﻛﺎﻥ
n ∈ℕ n ∈ℕ
= ) xf ( y) ( ∏ P )( ∏ P )( ∏ P ) ⋅ ( ∏ P
n ∈ℕ
α2n
2n
n ∈ℕ
α2n +1
2n +1
n ∈ℕ
β2n +1
2n
n ∈ℕ
−β2n
2n +1
=( ∏ P )( ∏ P )
α2n + β2n +1
2n
α2n +1 − β2n
2n +1
n ∈ℕ n ∈ℕ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
(∏P
= ) ) f ( xf ( y
n ∈ℕ
α2n +1 −β2n
2n )( ∏ Pn ∈ℕ
−α2n −β2n +1
2n +1 )
=( ∏ P α2n +1
2n )( ∏ P )( ∏ P )( ∏ P
−α2n
2n +1
−β2n
2n
−β2n +1
2n +1 )
n ∈ℕ n ∈ℕ n ∈ℕ n ∈ℕ
=( ∏ P )( ∏ P ) ( ∏ P ) = f yx
( )
α2n +1 −α2n βn
2n 2n +1 n
n ∈ℕ n ∈ℕ n ∈ℕ
ù ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪ ﺀٍ ، n 0ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﳜﺘﺎﺭ ﻻﻋﺒﺎﻥ Aﻭ B
ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ n1ﺛﹸﻢ n2 ﺛﹸﻢ n3 ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ⋯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
−R1ﲟﻌﺮﻓﺔ n2kﳜﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ Aﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ n2k +1ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . [ n2k , n22k
n2k +1
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ −R 2ﲟﻌﺮﻓﺔ n2k +1ﳜﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ Bﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ n2k + 2ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
n2k + 2
ﻏﲑ ﺗﺎﻓﻬﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ) .ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ p αﻣﻊ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻭ (. α ≥ 1
ﻳﺮﺑﺢ Aﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 1990ﻭﻳﺮﺑﺢ Bﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 1ﻋﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ n0ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﻼﻋﺐ Aﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﲝﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﻋﺐ Bﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﲝﺔ،
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﲝﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 284
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 2 ≤ n0 ≤ 5ﳝﺘﻠﻚ Bﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﲝﺔ ،ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n0 ≥ 8ﳝﺘﻠﻚ
Aﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﲝﺔ ،ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } n0 ∈ { 6, 7ﻓﻬﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ،ﻭﻻ ﳝﺘﻠﻚ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﲔ ﰲ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﲝﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 2ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ) θ ( nﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ n
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ . nﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ θﺩﻭﺭﺍﹰ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﹰ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ Bﺍﻟﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 2 ≤ n0 ≤ 5ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ n2k +1ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Bﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
n2k + 2ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ . n2k +2 = θ ( n2k +1 ) :
ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ :
n 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
) θ (n 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1
n 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
) θ (n 2 3 1 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n 0ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، { 2, …, 5ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n1ﻣﻦ } ، { 2, …, 25ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ B
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, …, 4ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n2 = 1ﺭﺑﺢ . Bﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n2ﻣﻦ } . { 2, 3, 4
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، { 2, 3, 4ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n 3ﻣﻦ } ، { 2, …,16ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ B
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ n 4ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, 3ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n 4 = 1ﺭﺑﺢ . Bﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n 4ﻣﻦ } . { 2, 3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n 4ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، { 2, 3ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n5ﻣﻦ } ، { 2, …, 9ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ B
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ n6ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n6 = 1ﺭﺑﺢ . Bﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ . n6 = 2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n6 = 2ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n7ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ } . { 2, 3, 4
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Bﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n8 = 1ﻭﻳﺮﺑﺢ.
285 ﻋﺎﻡ 1990
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ Aﺍﻟﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ] . n 0 ∈ [ 45,1990ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n1ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ 1990
ﻭﻳﺮﺑﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ Aﺍﻟﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ] . n0 ∈ [ 30, 44ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
n1 = 840 = 7 × 5 × 3 × 23
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ :
} { 8407 , 8405 , 8403 , 8402 , 8404 , 8408
ﻭﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ . 105ﻓﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n3 = 1990ﻭﻳﺮﺑﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ Aﺍﻟﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ] . n0 ∈ [ 15, 29ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
n1 = 210 = 7 × 5 × 3 × 2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ :
} { 2107 , 2105 , 2103 , 2102
ﻓﲑﺑﺢ. ﻭﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ . 30ﻓﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n3 = 840ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ Aﺍﻟﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } . n0 ∈ {12,13,14ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
n1 = 105 = 7 × 5 × 3
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ :
} {1057 , 1055 , 1053
ﻓﲑﺑﺢ. ﻭﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ . 15ﻓﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n3 = 210ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ Aﺍﻟﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ } . n0 ∈ { 8, 9,10,11ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
n1 = 60 = 5 × 3 × 22
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ :
} { 605 , 603 , 604 , 602
ﻓﲑﺑﺢ. ﻭﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ . 12ﻓﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n3 = 105ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 286
ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ Aﺍﻟﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n0 = 1991ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
n1 = 1991 = 11 × 181
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {11,181ﻭﰲ ﻛﻼ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﻟﺪﻯ Aﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ
ﻟﲑﺑﺢ ،ﺇﺫ ﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، n = 11ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . n2 = 181
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ rﻣﻦ ، ℕﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻼﹼﻋﺐ Aﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﲝﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
( 11 )r × 181 + 1 ≤ n 0 ≤ ( 11 )r +1 × 181
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، r = 0ﺑﻨﺎ ﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ .ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 0 ≤ r < ρﻭﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . ρ
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
( 11 )ρ × 181 + 1 ≤ n 0 ≤ ( 11 )ρ +1 × 181
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، n1 = ( 11 )ρ +1 × 181ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} {( 11 )ρ +1 , ( 11 )ρ × 181, ( 11 )ρ −1 × 181, …,181
ﻭﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ n2ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ρ −1
∪ ] [ 121,181 ( ∪ [ 11
r =0
( )r ] × 181 + 1, ( 11 )r +1 × 181 )
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻼﹼﻋﺐ Aﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ n2ﻭﻳﺮﺑﺢ.
ﺑﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﱵ n0 = 6ﻭ . n0 = 7ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳕﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
θﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
n 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
) θ (n 2 1 4 1 6 1 1 3 2 5 4 1
n 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
) θ (n 2 3 5 1 6 1 4 5 2 1 3 1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ A1ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n1ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {30, 42ﻭﻃﺒﻖ Bﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
) ، n2 = θ ( n1ﺭﺑﺢ Bﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻊ n2ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 2, 3, 4, 5ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ
ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 30ﺃﻭ 42ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻈﻮﻇﻪ ﰲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ.
287 ﻋﺎﻡ 1990
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، n1 = 30ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 6,10,15ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 10ﺃﻭ 15ﲤﻜﹼﻦ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ ﻷﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 7
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Bﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n2ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ 6ﻟﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻈﻮﻇﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ.
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n1 = 42ﺇﺫﹾ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ n2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 6,14, 21ﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 14ﺃﻭ 21ﲤﻜﹼﻦ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ ﻷﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﱪ
ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 7ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Bﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n2ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ 6ﻟﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻈﻮﻇﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ.
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ Aﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( n2k +1 )k ≥0ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ، 30ﻭﳜﺘﺎﺭ Bﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( n2k )k ≥1ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ . 6ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ،ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﳜﺮﻕ
ù ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﳜﺴﺮ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﳏﺪﺏﹴ ﺫﻭ 1990ﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ،ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﻫﻲ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . {k 2 : 1 ≤ k ≤ 1990
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻋﻢ ،ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = pqrﻭﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ pﻭ qﻭ rﻫﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ،
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﳏﺪ ﺏ ﺫﻭ nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ،ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} . {k 2 : 1 ≤ k ≤ nﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . n = 1990 = 199 × 5 × 2
ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹴ σ : { 0, …, n − 1 } → ℕ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
n −1
) (C ∑ σ ( k )2 ωk =0
k =0
ﻣﻊ ) . ω = exp ( 2nπ iﺇﺫ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ( Am )0≤m <nﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ Am
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﺜﱠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ، ∑ k = 0 ( σ ( k ) )2 ωk −1 ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
m
ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ x mod yﺇﱃ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ، yﻭﻫﻮ
ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, y − 1ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ . ℤ yﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ℓﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، ℤ nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) σ ( ℓﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
) σ ( ℓ ) = 1 + ( ℓ mod p ) + p ( ℓ mod q ) + pq ( ℓ mod r
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 288
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
1 ≤ σ ( ℓ ) ≤ 1 + p − 1 + p ( q − 1 ) + pq ( r − 1 ) = pqr = n
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀ℓ ∈ ℤ n , σ ( ℓ ) ∈ {1, …, n } = ℕ n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) . σ : ℤ n → ℕ n , ℓ ֏ σ ( ℓﻭﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ σ
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ qrﻭ prﻭ pqﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ uﻭ vﻭ wﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . uqr + vpr + wpq = 1ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ
a = uqrﻭ b = vprﻭ . c = wpqﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ σﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﲟﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ .ﻓﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﲔ
) θ : ℤ n → ℤ p × ℤ q × ℤ r , ℓ ֏ ( ℓ mod p, ℓ mod q, ℓ mod r
ϕ : ℤ p × ℤ q × ℤ r → ℤ n , ( i, j , k ) ֏ (ai + bj + ck ) mod n
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( i, j , kﻣﻦ ℤ p × ℤ q × ℤ rﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
( ai + bj + ck ) mod p = ai mod p = i mod p = i
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ p | bﻭ p | cﻭ . a = 1 mod pﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
( ai + bj + ck ) mod q = jﻭ ( ai + bj + ck ) mod r = k
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . θ ϕ ( i, j , k ) = ( i, j , kﻭﻣﻨﻪ . θ ϕ = I ℤ p ×ℤq ×ℤ rﻓﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ϕﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﳍﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ، n = pqrﺇﺫﻥ ϕﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ،
ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ θ ϕ = I ℤ p ×ℤq ×ℤ rﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . θ = ϕ−1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ψ : ℤ p × ℤ q × ℤ r → ℕ n , ( i, j , k ) ֏ 1 + i + pj + pqk
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ) ، ψ ( i, j , k ) = ψ ( i ′, j ′, k ′ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺡ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ،ﺛﹸﻢ
ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ، pﺃﻥﹼ ، i = i ′ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ، pﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
، j + qk = j ′ + qk ′ﺛﹸﻢ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ qﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ، j = j ′ﻭﳒﺪ ﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
ﺃﻥﹼ . k = k ′ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ﻷﻥﹼ ﳌﻨﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﻩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻷﻥﹼ σ = ψ θﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ σﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ.
289 1990 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n −1
∑ σ ( ℓ )2 ω ℓ = ∑ σ ( ϕ ( i, j , k ) ) ωϕ( i, j ,k )
k =0 ( i , j ,k )∈ ℤ p ×ℤ q ×ℤ r
p −1 q −1 r −1
= ∑ ∑ ∑ ( 1 + i + pj + pqk )2 ωai +bj +ck
i =0 j =0 k =0
p −1 q −1 r −1
= p 2q 2 ∑ ωai ∑ ωbj ∑ k 2ωck +
i = 0 j = 0 k = 0
p −1 q −1 bj r −1 ck
ai
2pq ∑ 1 + i ω ∑ ω ∑ k ω +
( )
i = 0 j = 0 k = 0
p −1 ai q −1 bj
r −1
2p q ∑ ω ∑ j ω ∑ k ωck +
2
i = 0 j = 0 k = 0
p −1 q −1 r −1
∑ ∑ ( 1 + i + pj ) ωai +bj ∑ ωck
2
i = 0 j = 0 k = 0
=0
ωa = 1 ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ، ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ.ﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﻄﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺍ
ﺇ ﺫﻥ. a = 1 mod p ﻭ ﻳﺘﻨﺎ ﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮ ﻥp | a ﻭ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼn | a ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢωa ≠ 1
p −1
ωap − 1
∑ ωai = ωa − 1
=0
i =0
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ. n | ap ﻷﻥﹼ
r −1 q −1
∑ω ck
=0 ﻭ ∑ ωbj =0
k =0 j =0
ù .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 290
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Iﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﹸﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﰲ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ C ′ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ
ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
ﺃﻥﹼ
1 AI BI CI 8
< ⋅ ⋅ ≤
4 AA′ BB ′ CC ′ 27
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AA′Bﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
AA′ AB
C =
+ 1A
sin ( B
sin B ) 2
A′
B′ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AIBﳒﺪ
I
AI AB
=
+ 1A
sin ( 2 B
) sin ( 2 B ) 2
A C′ B 1 1
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ،
sin ( B + 1A + 1A
) 2
) sin ( B
AI sin ( 12 B ) 2
= ⋅ =
AA′ + 1A
sin ( 12 B ) cos ( 1 B
)
) 2 sin B 2 cos ( 12 C 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
+ 1A 1
) ) ( B + A
sin ( B 2 ) = sin ( 2 B +
1
2
−B
= sin ( π2 − 12 (C ) ) = cos ( 1 (C
−B
))
2
ﺇﺫﻥ
AI 1 ) tan ( 1 B
))
= ( 1 + tan ( 12 C 2
AA′ 2
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ xﻭ yﻭ zﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ
) x = tan ( C2 ) tan ( B2ﻭ ) y = tan ( A2 ) tan ( C2ﻭ ) z = tan ( B2 ) tan ( A2
AI 1+x
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
= ﻓﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
AA′ 2
CI 1+z BI 1+y
= ﻭ =
CC ′ 2 BB ′ 2
291
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 292
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ
AI BI CI
=Λ ⋅ ⋅
AA′ BB ′ CC ′
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
=Λ ) ( 1 + x ) ( 1 + y )( 1 + z
8
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
) y + z = tan ( A2 ) tan ( C2 ) + tan ( B2 ) tan ( A2
) ) = tan ( A2 ) ( tan ( C2 ) + tan ( B2
) ) = tan ( π2 − C2 − B2 ) ( tan ( C2 ) + tan ( B2
) tan ( C2 ) + tan ( B2
= = 1 − tan ( C2 ) tan ( B2 ) = 1 − x
( tan C
2 + B
2 )
ﺇﺫﻥ . x + y + z = 1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﲔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﻭﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
3
= Λ 3
( 1 +2 x )( 1 +2 y )( 1 +2 z ) ≤ 16 ( 3 + x + y + z ) = 23
8
≤ ، Λﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ. ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
27
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ،
1
=Λ ) ( 1 + x + y + z + xy + yz + zx + xyz
8
1+x +y +z 1
> =
8 4
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ nﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 6ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ } {a j : 1 ≤ j ≤ kﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻭﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
a2 − a1 = a 3 − a2 = ⋯ = ak − ak −1 > 0
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . 2
293 ﻋﺎﻡ 1991
ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ ، gcd ( n,1 ) = gcd ( n, n − 1 ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
a1 = 1ﻭ ak = n − 1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ℓﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ a2 − a1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀i ∈ {1, …, k } , ai = 1 + ( i − 1 ) ℓ
ﻣﻊ n − 1 = 1 + ( k − 1 ) ℓﺃﻭ
n = 2 + (k − 1) ℓ
ﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ،ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ gcd ( 2, n ) = 1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺃ ﹼﻥ
، a2 = 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . ℓ = 1 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ gcd ( n, i ) = 1ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ iﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {1, 2, …, n − 1ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ n ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، n = 0 mod 4ﻣﺜﻼﹰ n = 4bﻣﻊ . b ≥ 2ﻛﺎﻥ
gcd ( 2b − 1, n ) = gcd ( 2b + 1, n ) = 1ﻭ gcd ( 2b, n ) ≠ 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ℓ = 2ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ،
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ nﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ .ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ
.2
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، n = 2 mod 4ﻣﺜﻼﹰ n = 4b + 2ﻣﻊ . b ≥ 2ﻛﺎﻥ
gcd ( 2b + 3, n ) = gcd ( 2b + 5, n ) = 1ﻭ gcd ( 2b + 4, n ) ≠ 1
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ، 2b + 5 < nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ℓ = 2ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
. gcd ( 2b + 1, n ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . n = 2 mod 4
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . S = ℕ 280 = {1, 2, …, 280ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، kﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻛﻞﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Sﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ kﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﲢﻮﻱ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 294
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﺏ ﻫﻮ . 217
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺃ ﻭ ﻻﹰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Aﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Sﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ 2ﺃﻭ 3
ﺃﻭ 5ﺃﻭ . 7ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ℓ ﻣﻦ ، Aﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) ϕ ( ℓﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} { 2, 3, 5, 7ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . ℓ
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ، Aﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . card ( B ) = 5ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
) ϕB : B → { 2, 3, 5, 7 } , ℓ ֏ ϕ ( ℓﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Bﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ
ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) . k > card ( A
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ) . card ( Aﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Saﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ aﰲ : S
} Sa = { na : 1 ≤ na ≤ 280
280
. na = card ( Sa ) = ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
a
A = S2 ∪ S3 ∪ S5 ∪ S7
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ gcd ( a, b ) = 1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
، Sa ∩ Sb = Sabﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
card ( A ) = n2 + n3 + n5 + n7 − n6 − n10 − n14 − n15 − n21 − n35
+ n30 + n 42 + n70 + n105 − n210
= 140 + 93 + 56 + 40 − 46 − 28 − 20 − 18 − 13 − 8
+ 9 + 6 + 4 + 2 − 1 = 216
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . k > 216
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﱠ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Cﻣﻦ Sﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ، 217ﲢﻮﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ، 5ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ .ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
A0ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 1ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ . Sﺇﻥﹼ . card ( A0 ) = 60
A0 = { 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23,
29, 31, 37, 41, 43, 47, 53, 59, 61, 67,
71, 73, 79, 83, 89, 97, 101, 103, 107, 109,
113, 127, 131, 137, 139, 149, 151, 157, 163, 167,
173, 179, 181, 191, 193, 197, 199, 211, 223, 227,
229, 233, 239, 241, 251, 257, 263, 269, 271, } 277
295 ﻋﺎﻡ 1991
ﻭﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ A1ﻭ A2ﻭ A3ﻭ A4ﻭ A5ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
A1 = {2 × 47, 3 × 43, 5 × 41, 7 × 37, 11 × 23, 13 × 19},
A2 = {2 × 43, 3 × 41, 5 × 37, 7 × 31, 11 × 19, 13 × 17},
A3 = {2 × 41, 3 × 37, 5 × 31, 7 × 29, 11 × 17, 13 × 13},
A4 = {2 × 37, 3 × 31, 5 × 29, 7 × 23, 11 × 13},
A5 = {2 × 31, 3 × 29, 5 × 23, 7 × 19, 11 × 11}.
ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Sﺑﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ
ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﺎ Qﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 88ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ.
card (Q ) = card ( )
∪ Ai = 88
0 ≤i ≤5
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ Cﻣﻦ Sﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ . 217ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀i ∈ { 0,1, …, 5 } , card ( Ai ∩ C ) ≤ 4
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، card (Q ∩ C ) ≤ 6 × 4 = 24ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) card ( C ) = card (Q c ∩ C ) + card (Q ∩ C
) ≤ card (Q c ) + card (Q ∩ C
≤ ( 280 − 88 ) + 24 = 216
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ i0ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, 5ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، card ( Ai0 ∩ C ) ≥ 5ﻭﺃﻱ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Ai0 ∩ Cﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ
ù ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
} {1, 2, …, k ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺎﹰ Gﻟﻪ kﺣﺮﻓﺎﹰ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮ ﺏﹴ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻢ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻱ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻓﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ.
¤ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ) ،G = (V , Eﺣﻴﺚ Vﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ،
ﻭ Eﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ } V ( 2 ) = {e ⊂ V : card (e ) = 2ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ
ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎﹰ .ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Gﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂﹲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ
} {a, bﻣﻦ ) V ( 2ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x i )0≤i ≤n +1ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Vﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀i ∈ { 0,1, …, n } , x 0 = aﻭ x n +1 = bﻭ { xi , x i +1 } ∈ E
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 296
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ .ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺎﹰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺃ ﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ
ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻱ ﺭﺃ ﺱﹴ ﻣﻌﻄﻰ .ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺠﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃ ﺱﹴ ﻣﻌﻄﻰ ،ﻣﺮ ﻗﱢﻤﲔ
ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳕﺮ ﺎ ،ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﻻﹼ ﳕﺮ ﺑﺮﺃ ﺱﹴ ، aﻣﺎ ﱂ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎ aﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ) ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ aﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﳊﺮ ﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ( ، ﻓﻜﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ
ﺫﻟﻚ؟
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ aﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﳊﺮ ﻑ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 1ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ aﻃﺮﻑ
ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ aﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﹰ ﳊﺮﻓﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﺎﳘﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ jﻭ ، j + 1ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ aﻃﺮﻑ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﺎﻥ ﻹﳚﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ) G = (V , E
ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ،ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ Eaﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ) G = (V , Eﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎ
ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ، aﺃﻱ
} } Ea = {e ∈ E : ∃b ∈ V , e = {a, b
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺇ ﺫ ﻥ ﺑﻴﺎ ﻧﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﹰ ) G = (V , Eﻓﻴﻪ . k = card ( E ) ≥ 1ﺳﻨﺤﺘﺎ ﺝ ﰲ ﺷﺮﺡ
ﺧﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ،Gﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ، ϕ : E → ℕ kﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ E ′ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺁﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ V ′ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺁ ﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﺭﻧﺎ ﺎ ،ﻭﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳛﻘﹼﻖ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ . 2
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ V ′ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ، iﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ، 0ﻭﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ 1ﻛﻠﹼﻤﺎ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ.
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ Xﻳﺆﺷﺮ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﳊﻈﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﲡﻮﺍﻟﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ.
297 ﻋﺎﻡ 1991
ﺧﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ) .G = (V , E
.1ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ :ﺿﻊ i ú 0ﻭ ∅ ، E ′ úﺛﹸﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﺃﺳﺎﹰ Xﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ،Vﻭﺿﻊ } .V ′ ú { X
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ∅ ≠ ، E X \E ′ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﺎﹰ } e = {X ,Yﻣﻦ ، E X \E ′ﺛﱡﻢ
.1.2ﺭﻗﹼﻢ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ، eﺃﻱ ﺿﻊ i ú i + 1ﻭ . ϕ ( e ) ú i
.2.2ﻭﺳﻊ E ′ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ eﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ . E ′ ú E ′ ∪ {e} :
.3.2ﺃﺷﺮ ﺇﱃ ،Yﺃﻱ ﺿﻊ X ú Yﰒﹼ ﻭﺳﻊ V ′ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Xﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ
ﺃﺻﻼﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .V ′ ú V ′ ∪ {X } :
.4.2ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﱃ .2
.3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ∅ ≠ { x ∈ V ′ : Ex \E ′ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺷﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺭﺃ ﺱﹴ ﻣﺎ Xﻣﻦ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﺛﹸﻢ ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﱃ .2
.4ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ.
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
−ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﹼﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ .2ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ kﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻷﻧﻪ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﹴ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ.
−ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ Xﺇﱃ V ′ﰲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Xﺃﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ﺇﱃ ،V ′ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Xﻃﺮﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ . 1
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ e ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ، ϕ ( e ) = iﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ
ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ jﻣﻊ . 1 ≤ j < iﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ .2ﺗﺒﹺﻊ eﺣﺮﻑ
ﺟﺪﻳﺪ e ′ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﻊ eﺑﺎﻟﺮﺃﺱ Xﻭﳛﻘﹼﻖ . ϕ (e ′ ) = i + 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ
ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ E Xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ gcd ( ϕ(EX ) ) = 1ﻷﻥﹼ . gcd ( i, i + 1 ) = 1ﺃﻣﺎ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ .2ﻓﻌﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ } ، E X = {eﻭﻻ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ Xﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
−ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ،V ′ = Vﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂﹲ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ bﻣﻦ
Vﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ،V ′ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ aﻣﻦ .V ′ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x i )0≤i ≤n +1ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ V
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
x 0 = aﻭ x n +1 = bﻭ ∀i ∈ { 0,1, …, n } , { xi , x i +1 } ∈ E
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 298
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ } ، i0 = max { j : x j ∈ V ′ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
u = xi0 ∈ V ′ﻭ v = x i0 +1 ∉ V ′
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ } e = {u, vﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ، E ′ﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ vﺇﱃ V ′ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ .3.2ﻭﺇﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻥ e ∉ E ′ﻛﺎﻥ ∅ ≠ Eu \E ′ﻣﻊ ، u ∈ V ′ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ .3ﻻ ﳚﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ
ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ.
−ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . E ′ = Eﻷﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ .3ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ V ′ = V
ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ
∅ = ∀x ∈ V : Ex \E ′
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، E = ∪ x ∈V E x ⊂ E ′ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . E ′ = Eﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ
ù ﻗﺪ ﺭﻗﹼﻤﻨﺎ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ، ABCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Xﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ . ABCﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ
π
. XCAﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
XBCﻭ
XABﻭ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
6
A ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ aﻭ bﻭ cﺇﱃ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BCﻭ CAﻭ ABﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ P
Q
R ﻭ Qﻭ Rﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻗﻂ Xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ] [ BC
X
ﻭ ] [CAﻭ ] [ ABﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﺮ ﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭ ﻟﻨﺮ ﻣﺰ pﻭ qﻭ rﺇﱃ
B P ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ XPﻭ XQﻭ XRﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﻭ αﻭ βﻭ C γ
ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ XAﻭ XBﻭ XCﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) A ( XYZﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ . XYZ
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
) A ( XAB ) + A ( XBC ) + A ( XCA ) = A ( ABC
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) rc + pa + qb = 2A ( ABC
299 ﻋﺎﻡ 1991
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
) 2A ( ABC ) ≤ BC ⋅ AP ≤ BC ⋅ ( AX + XP ) = a ( α + p
ﺇﺫﻥ rc + pa + qb ≤ αa + paﻭﻣﻨﻪ
rc + qb ≤ αa
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ 2 xy ≤ x + yﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 2 rq ⋅ bc ≤ αa
ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﳌﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ،ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﲔ
) 2A ( ABC ) ≤ CA ⋅ BQ ≤ b ( β + q
) 2A ( ABC ) ≤ AB ⋅ CR ≤ c ( γ + r
ﳒﺪ
)(2 2 pr ⋅ ca ≤ βbﻭ 2 qp ⋅ ab ≤ γc
ﺛﹸﻢ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﳒﺪ
8pqr ≤ αβγ
ﺃﻭ
)(3 ) ⋅ sin ( XBC
sin ( XAB ) = r ⋅ p ⋅ q ≤ 1
) ⋅ sin ( XCA
α β γ 8
π
XABﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ XBCﻭ XCAﻭ ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
6
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
، ABCﺃﺎ ﲨﻴﻌﺎﹰ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ
sin ( XBCﻭ ) > 1
، sin ( XAB sin ( XCAﻭ ) > 1
5πﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) > 1
2 2 2 6
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﻮﺩﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
) ⋅ sin ( XBC >)
) ⋅ sin ( XCA 1
sin ( XAB
8
XABﺃﺻﻐﺮ
XBCﻭ
XCAﻭ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( 3ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
π
ù . ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
6
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 300
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ αﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 1ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ( xn )n ∈ ℕﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀ ( i, j ) ∈ ℕ 2 , i ≠ j ⇒ xi − x j ⋅ i − j α
≥1
ﺗﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔﹰ ( yn )n ∈ℕﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ Mﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ yn ≤ Mﺃﻳﺎﹰ
ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ nﻣﻦ . ℕ
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ) P ( f ) ( ℕﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ . ℕﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
= ) ϕ : P ( f ) ( ℕ ) → ℕ, ϕ ( A ∑ 2k
k ∈A
ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ،ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﱢ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﲤﺜﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ 2ﻫﻮ
( εm(n ), εm(n−) 1, …, ε1(n ), ε0(n ) )2
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . A = {k : εk(n ) = 1
= . XA ∑ 2−αk ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Aﻣﻦ ) P ( f ) ( ℕﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ X Aﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ :
k ∈A
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Aﻭ Bﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ) P ( f ) ( ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ، A ≠ Bﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ iﺃﺻﻐﺮ
ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ، A∆Bﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ 2iﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ) ϕ ( A ) − ϕ ( Bﻭﻣﻦ
ﺛﹶﻢ . ϕ ( A ) − ϕ ( B ) ≥ 2i ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ،
= XA − XB ∑ 2−αk − ∑ = 2−αk ∑ εA,B ( k ) 2−αk
k ∈ A /B k ∈B / A k ∈ℕ
ﻣﻊ } εA,B ( k ) ∈ {−1, 0,1ﻭ εA,B ( k ) = 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . k < iﺇﺫﻥ
∞
−αi 2α − 2
X A − X B ≥ 2−αi − ∑ 2−αk
= 2
k =i +1
2α − 1
ﺇﺫﻥ
α
2 − 2
X A − X B ⋅ ϕ ( A ) − ϕ ( B ) α ≥ α
2 − 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ Aﻣﻦ ) P ( f ) ( ℕﻛﺎﻥ
∞
1
≤ 0 ≤ XA ∑ 2−αk =
1 − 2−α
k =0
= x nﻟﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( xn )n ∈ ℕﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓù . 2α −1 X
) 2α −2 ϕ−1 ( n
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ aﻭ bﻭ cﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ 1 < a < b < cﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) (a − 1 ) (b − 1 )(c − 1ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . abc − 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺛﻼ ﺛﻴﺔ ) ( a, b, cﻣﻦ ℕ 3ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍ ﳌﻄﻠﻮ ﺏ .ﻭ ﻟﻨﻌﺮ ﻑ α = a − 1ﻭ β = b − 1
ﻭ . γ = c − 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮ ﻥ ﻟﺪ ﻳﻨﺎ ، 1 ≤ α < β < γﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ αβγ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ
αβγ + αβ + βγ + γα + α + β + γﺃﻭ
) αβγ | ( αβ + βγ + γα + α + β + γ
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ
1 1 1 1 1 1
= ) F ( α, β, γ + + + + +
α β γ βγ γα αβ
ﻓﺘﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﱃ
F ( α, β, γ ) ∈ ℕ 1≤α<β <γﻭ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ α ≥ 3ﻛﺎﻥ β ≥ 4ﻭ γ ≥ 5ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
1 1 1 1 1 1 59
≤ ) F ( α, β, γ + + + + + = <1
3 4 5 20 15 12 60
ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ } . α ∈ {1, 2
≤ ) ، F ( 2, β, γ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . α = 2ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ β ≥ 6ﻛﺎﻥ γ ≥ 7ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
83
84
ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ }. β ∈ {3, 4, 5
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ β = 3ﻛﺎﻥ ، F ( 2, 3, γ ) = 1 + 611γﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) k = F ( 2, 3, γ
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 6 | 11ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
= ) ، F ( 2, 5, γﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) k = F ( 2, 5, γ 17 + 8 γ
10 γ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، β = 5ﻛﺎﻥ
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، 2 ( 5k − 4 ) γ = 17ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
= ) ، F ( 2, 4, γﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) k = F ( 2, 4, γ ) 7( γ + 2
8γ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، β = 4ﻛﺎﻥ
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ( 8k − 7 ) γ = 14ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ γﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ 14
ﻭﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ، 5ﺇﺫﻥ ، γ = 14ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) . ( α, β, γ ) = ( 2, 4,14
301
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 302
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . α = 1
1 1 1 ) ( 2 β + 1 ) ( 2γ + 1
F ( 1, β, γ ) = 1 + 2 + + = −3
β γ βγ βγ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) F ( 1, β, γﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، βγ | ( 2β + 1 )( 2γ + 1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
gcd ( β, 2β + 1 ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ) β | ( 2γ + 1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ) . γ | ( 2β + 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ β < γﺇﺫﻥ ، 2β + 1 < 2γﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) γ | ( 2β + 1ﺃﻥﹼ
. γ = 2β + 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁﹸ ) β | ( 2γ + 1ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁﹶ ) β | ( 4β + 3ﺃﻭ
، β | 3ﻭﻟﻜﻦ β > 1ﺇﺫﻥ β = 3ﻭ . γ = 7ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) . ( α, β, γ ) = ( 1, 3, 7
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ 1 ≤ α < β < γﻭ F ( α, β, γ ) ∈ ℕﻳﻘﺘﻀﻴﺎﻥ
) ( α, β, γ ) = ( 2, 4,14ﻭ ) . ( α, β, γ ) = ( 1, 3, 7
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ F ( 2, 4,14 ) = 1ﻭ . F ( 1, 3, 7 ) = 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺎﺕ
) ( a, b, cﻣﻦ ℕ 3ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ، 1 < a < b < cﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ abc − 1
ù ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ) (a − 1 ) (b − 1 )(c − 1ﻫﻲ ) ( 3, 5,15ﻭ ) . ( 2, 4, 8
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ f : ℝ → ℝﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℝ 2, f ( x 2 + f ( y ) ) = y + ( f ( x ) )2
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℝ → ℝﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ) . ( E
ﻟﻨﺒﺪ ﺃ ﺑﺈ ﺛﺒﺎ ﺕ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . f ( 0 ) = 0ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) a = f ( 0ﻭ ) ، b = f ( 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ﺑﺘﻌﻮ ﻳﺾ
x = y = 0ﰲ ) ( Eﳒﺪ . f (a ) = a 2ﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻮ ﻳﺾ x = 0ﻭ y = 1ﳒﺪ
. f (b ) = 1 + a 2ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ x = 1ﻭ y = 0ﳒﺪ . f ( 1 + a ) = b 2
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ،
2 2 2
) ) f (a + b ) = f (a + f ( 1 + a
= 1 + a + ( f ( a ) )2 = 1 + a + a 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ،
) ) f (a 2 + b 2 ) = f (b 2 + f ( a
2
) = a + ( f ( b ) )2 = a + ( 1 + a 2
303 ﻋﺎﻡ 1992
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
a + (1 + a 2 ) = 1 + a + a 4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . a = 0
ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ x = 0ﰲ ) ( Eﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀y ∈ ℝ, f f ( y ) = y
ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ) f ( yﻣﻜﺎﻥ yﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℝ 2, f ( x 2 + y ) = f ( y ) + ( f ( x ) )2
ﺍ ﻟﺘﺎ ﺑﻊ f ﺗﺎ ﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰ ﺍ ﻳﺪ ، ﻷ ﻧﻪ ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﻛﺎ ﻥ z > yﻋﺮ ﻓﻨﺎ ، x = z − yﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
z = x 2 + yﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. f ( z ) = f ( y ) + ( f ( x ) )2 ≥ f ( y )
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ . ℝﻭﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﻛﺎ ﻥ ، f ( x ) > xﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) x = f ( f ( x ) ) ≥ f ( xﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺧﻠﻒ.
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) x > f ( xﻛﺎﻥ ، f ( x ) ≥ f ( f ( x ) ) = xﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . f ( x ) = xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ . ∀x ∈ ℝ, f ( x ) = x
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ x ֏ xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ) ، ( Eﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
ù ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﻬﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ 9ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ،ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﹴ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ،ﺃﻭ ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ،ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ n ﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﹼﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ، n ≥ 33ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﳚﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ 32ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﹼﻮﻧﲔ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ
ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ . (A0, B0, B1, B2, B3, R0, R1, R2, R3 ) :
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 304
B1
B2
B0
B3
A0
R3
R0
R2
R1
ﻭﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ] [ B0B2ﻭ ] [ B1B3ﻭ ] [ R0R2ﻭ ] [ R1R3ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ.
ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ B0B1B2B3ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ،ﻭﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ R0R1R2R3ﲪﺮﺍﺀ.
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ([ A0Ri ])0≤i ≤3ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ([ A0Bi ])0≤i ≤3ﲪﺮﺍﺀ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 3ﺗﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ Ri B jﺑﺎﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ i − jﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ i − jﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ.
ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ Bi = Bi mod 4ﻭ . Ri = Ri mod 4
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ .ﻭﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻫﻮ ﺿﻠ ﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ . R1R2R3R4ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ] ، [ Ri Ri +1
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ] [ Ri Biﺃﻭ ] [ Ri Bi + 2ﻷﻧﻪ ﺃﲪﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ،ﻭﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ
ﻟﻠﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺇﻻﹼ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ Ri +1Biﺃﻭ ] [ Ri +1Bi + 2ﻭﻫﻮ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ
ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ.
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻫﻮ ] . [ A0Biﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ
] [ Ri Bi
ﺃﻭ ] [ Bi Ri + 2ﻷ ﻧﻪ ﺃﲪﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻭﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻟﻠﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺇ ﻻﹼ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ
] [ A0Riﺃﻭ ] ، [ A0Ri +2ﻭﻫﻮ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ.
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ] [ Ri Biﻭ ] [ Ri Bi + 2ﺿﻠﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ] [ Bi Bi + 2ﻏﲑ ﻣﻠﹼﻮﻥ ،ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻠﻒ.
305 ﻋﺎﻡ 1992
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ .ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ
ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . n ≥ 33
ﻟﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ . n = 33ﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻧﺔ .ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ Xﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ Xﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ.
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ Aﻣﻦ . Xﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺛﻼﺙﹸ ﻗﻄﻊﹴ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ
} ([ AC ])C ∈X \{Aﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﻲ . ([ AC k ])0≤k ≤2ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ
ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ AC 0C 1ﺃﻭ AC 1C 2ﺃﻭ AC 2C 0ﺃﻭ C 0C 1C 2ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Cﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ Mﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳑﺎﺱ d ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﶈﻞﹼ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ P
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Qﻭ Rﻋﻠﻰ dﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ، Mﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ Cﻫﻲ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ PQRﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
ﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ﲨﻠﺔ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ dﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ،ﻭ ) ( 0,rﻣﻊ ، r > 0ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ I
ﻣﺮ ﻛﺰ ، Cﻭ ) ( m, 0ﻣﻊ m > 0ﺇ ﺣﺪ ﺍ ﺛﻴﺎ ﺕ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Mﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃ ﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
) Q ( m + t , 0ﻭ ) R ( m − t, 0ﻣﻊ . t > mﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ Pﻫﻲ ) ( x , y
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ IPQﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ،ﳒﺪ
2
) r 2 ⋅ PQ 2 = det ( IP, IQ
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
r 2 ( ( x − m − t )2 + y 2 ) = ( r ( x − m − t ) + ( m + t ) y )2
ﺃﻭ
) (1 ) r 2y = ( y − 2r ) ( m + t )2 + 2rx ( m + t
ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ،ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ IPRﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ،ﳒﺪ
)(2 ) r 2y = ( y − 2r ) ( m − t )2 + 2rx ( m − t
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 306
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺮﺣﻨﺎ ) ( 2ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
)(3 ( y − 2r ) m + rx = 0
ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) ، J ( 0, 2rﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﹸﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ dﻣﻊ ، C
ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) ، N ( 2m, 0ﻧﻈﲑﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ dﻣﻊ Cﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ . M
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﲨﻌﻨﺎ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ، ( 2ﺛﹼﻢ ﺃﺻﻠﺤﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺴﺒﻨﺎ xﻭ yﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ، tﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
) 2r ( t 2 − m 2 −2mr 2
= y ﻭ x =
t 2 − r 2 − m2 t2 − r 2 − m2
ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ Cﳑﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﹼﺚ PQRﻳﻜﻮﻥ y > 0ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﺫﻥ
ﻛﻮﻥ . t > m 2 + r 2ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ tﺍﺎﻝ m 2 + r 2 , +∞ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ P
ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d ′ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻪ ( y − 2r ) m + rx = 0ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ xﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ،
ﺃﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ، d ′ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Jﻭﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ . Nﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
d′
P
C J
I
d
R M N Q
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Sﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ℝ 3ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺏ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ .Oxyz
) (Oxy ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Sxyﻭ Syzﻭ Sxzﺍﳌﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ
ﻭ ) (Oyzﻭ ) (Oxzﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
S ≤ Sxy ⋅ Syz ⋅ Sxz
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Xﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Xﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، card ( Xﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ . X
307 ﻋﺎﻡ 1992
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Pxﻭ Pyﻭ Pzﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ) (Oxﻭ ) (Oyﻭ ) (Ozﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
) Px : ℝ 3 → ℝ 3, Px ( ( a, b, c ) ) = ( a, 0, 0
) Py : ℝ 3 → ℝ 3, Py ( ( a, b, c ) ) = ( 0, b, 0
) Pz : ℝ 3 → ℝ 3, Pz ( ( a, b, c ) ) = ( 0, 0, c
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻃﺎﺕ Pxy = Px + Pyﻭ Pyz = Py + Pzﻭ ، Pxz = Px + Pz
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ) (Oxyﻭ ) (Oyzﻭ ) (Oxzﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ، Sﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Pz ( S ) = nﻛﺎﻥ
2
S ) ≤ Pxy ( S ) Pyz ( S ) Pxz ( S
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، nﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 1ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ } ، Pz ( S ) = {cﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
) ) S → Pxz ( S ) × Pyz ( S ) : ( a, b, c ) ֏ ( ( a, 0, c ) , ( 0, b, c
ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) S ≤ Pyz ( S ) Pxz ( S
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ . S = Pxy ( S ) ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ
2
S ) ≤ Pxy ( S ) Pyz ( S ) Pxz ( S
ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ P1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k < nﻣﻊ ، n ≥ 2ﻭﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ . Pn
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Sﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . Pz ( S ) = nﻧﻌﺮﻑ mﻭ Mﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻭﺃﻛﱪ
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ }) . { γ : ( 0, 0, γ ) ∈ Pz ( Sﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ n ≥ 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . m < M
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ cﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، m < c < Mﻭﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
} K = { ( x , y, z ) ∈ S : z < cﻭ } L = {( x , y, z ) ∈ S : z ≥ c
ﺎﺕﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴ 308
ﻛﺎﻥ
S = K ∪ L ﻭK ∩ L = ∅ ﻭL ≠ ∅ ﻭK ≠ ∅
،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
Pxz ( S ) = Pxz ( L ) + Pxz ( K )
Pyz ( S ) = Pyz ( L ) + Pyz ( K ) ﻭ
Pxy ( S ) ≥ Pyz ( K )
Pxy ( S ) ≥ Pyz ( L ) ﻭ
ﳒﺪL ﻭK ﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺮ
L ≤ Pxy ( L ) Pyz ( L ) Pxz ( L ) ≤ Pxy ( S ) Pyz ( L ) Pxz ( L )
ﻭ
K ≤ Pxy ( K ) Pyz ( K ) Pxz ( K ) ≤ Pxy ( S ) Pyz ( K ) Pxz ( K )
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
S ≤ Pxy ( S ) ( Pyz ( L ) Pxz ( L ) + Pyz ( K ) Pxz ( K ) )
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
2 2
(a + b )( a ′ + b ′ ) − ( aa ′ + bb ′ ) = ( ba ′ − ab ′ ) ≥ 0
ﻟﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
S ≤ Pxy ( S ) ( Pyz ( L ) + Pyz ( K ) ) ( Pxz ( L ) + Pxz ( K ) )
≤ Pxy ( S ) Pyz ( S ) Pxz ( S )
ù .ﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻ، Pn ﺔﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺻﺤ
309 ﻋﺎﻡ 1992
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، nﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) S ( nﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ kﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ،ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ n 2ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ kﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ.
k
= S n = max p ∈ ℕ : ∀k ∈ ℕ p , ∃ (a1, …ak ) ∈ ℕ∗k : n 2
( )
∑ a j2
j =1
. ∀n ≥ 4, .1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ S ( n ) ≤ n − 14
2
.2ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . S ( n ) = n 2 − 14
.3ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . S ( n ) = n 2 − 14
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) ، S ( nﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ pﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Dpﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ pﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﺃﻱ
Dp = ∑ αkk 2 : ( ∀k ∈ ℕ∗, αk ∈ ℕ ) ∧ ( ∑ k ≥1 αk = p )
k ≥1
ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﺗﺘﺄﻟﹼﻒ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ D1ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) R ( nﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ pﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، n 2 ∉ Dpﺃﻱ
} R ( n ) = min { p ≥ 2 : n 2 ∉ Dp
ﻓﻨﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ . R ( n ) = S ( n ) + 1
.1ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ . n 2 ∉ Dn 2 −13ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ
ﻋﺪ ﺩ n ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 4ﻭ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . n 2 ∈ Dn 2 −13ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ∗ ( αk )k ∈ℕﻣﻦ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
n 2 = ∑ αkk 2ﻭ n 2 − 13 = ∑ αk
k ≥1 k ≥1
= . 13 ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﳒﺪ ) ∑ k ≥2 αk ( k 2 − 1
ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k ≥ 4ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، 13 ≥ αk ( k 2 − 1 ) ≥ 15αkﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∀k ≥ 4, αk = 0
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . 13 = 3α2 + 8α3ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ α3ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ } ، { 0,1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ،ﻷﻥﹼ
3 13ﻭ . 3 5ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ n 2 ∉ Dn 2 −13ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢR ( n ) ≤ n 2 − 13
ﺃﻭ . S ( n ) ≤ n 2 − 14
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 310
.2ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ D1ﻭ D2ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞﹲ ،ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﲔ
ﻛﺎﻣﻠﲔ .ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ 25ﻭ 100ﻭ 169ﻭ ،...ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﱃ ، D3ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ، 169ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥﹼ
169 = 132 = 122 + 52 = 122 + 42 + 32
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 13ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . S ( 13 ) = 169 − 14 = 155ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ ℕ 155, 169 ∈ Dk
ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
169 = 4x 1 + ( 4y − x ) 4 + ( 4z + 2 − y ) 16 + ( 2 − z ) 64 + 1 9
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ) ( x , y, zﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} A = {( x , y, z ) ∈ ℕ 3 : 0 ≤ x ≤ 4y, y ≤ 4z + 2, z ≤ 2
ﺍﻧﺘﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 169ﺇﱃ ) . D5+ 3( x +y +z
ﻭ ﲟﻼ ﺣﻈﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Aﲢﻮ ﻱ } {( x ,10, 2 ) : 0 ≤ x ≤ 40ﻭ } {( x , 2,1 ) : 0 ≤ x ≤ 8
ﻭ }) ، {( 0, 0, 0 ) , ( 0,1, 0 ), ( 1,1, 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} { 0,1, …, 52 } ⊂ { x + y + z : ( x , y, z ) ∈ A
ﺇﺫﻥ 169 ∈ D5+ 3kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } . { 0,1, …, 52ﻭﻷﻥﹼ 169 ∈ D2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ∀k ∈ { 0,1, …, 53 } , 169 ∈ D2 + 3k
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
169 = ( 1 + 4x ) 1 + ( 4y + 2 − x ) 4 + ( 4z + 2 − y ) 16 + ( 2 − z ) 64
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ) ( x , y, zﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} B = {( x , y, z ) ∈ ℕ 3 : 0 ≤ x ≤ 4y + 2, y ≤ 4z + 2, z ≤ 2
ﺍﻧﺘﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 169ﺇﱃ ) . D7 + 3( x +y +zﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﳒﺪ
} { 0,1, …, 54 } ⊂ { x + y + z : ( x , y, z ) ∈ B
ﺇﺫﻥ 169 ∈ D7 + 3kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } . { 0,1, …, 54ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ، 169 ∈ D1ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ، 169 = 42 + 52 + 2 82 ∈ D4 ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ∀k ∈ { 0,1, …, 56 } , 169 ∈ D1+ 3k
311 ﻋﺎﻡ 1992
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
169 = (3 + 4x ) 1 + (4y + 1 − x ) 4 + (4z + 1 − y ) 16 + (2 − z ) 64 + 2 9
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ) ( x , y, zﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} C = {( x , y, z ) ∈ ℕ 3 : 0 ≤ x ≤ 4y + 1, y ≤ 4z + 1, z ≤ 2
ﺍﻧﺘﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 169ﺇﱃ ) . D9+ 3( x +y +z
ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ Cﲢﻮﻱ } {( x , 9, 2 ) : 0 ≤ x ≤ 37ﻭ } {( x , 2,1 ) : 0 ≤ x ≤ 7
ﻭ }) ، {( 0, 0, 0 ) , ( 0,1, 0 ), ( 1,1, 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} { 0,1, …, 48 } ⊂ { x + y + z : ( x , y, z ) ∈ C
ﺇﺫﻥ 169 ∈ D9+ 3kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ } . { 0,1, …, 48ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 169 ∈ D3ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ
ﺃﻥﹼ 169 = 4 22 + 32 + 122 ∈ D6ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 ∀k ∈ {1, …, 51 } , 169 ∈ D3k
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ {1, …,155 } , 169 ∈ Dk
ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ N = 13ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . S ( N ) = N 2 − 14
.3ﺳﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺗﲔ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n ≥ 20ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
3n
)(4 ∀k ∈ ℕ, ≤ 14 ≤ k ⇒ n ∈ Dn −k
4
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ nﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 20ﻭﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . n = ( n − 4x ) 12 + x 22ﺇﺫﻥ
n
≤ 0≤x ⇒ n ∈ Dn −3x
4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻗﻮﻟﻨﺎ
( 0 ≤ k ≤ 34n ) ∧ (k = 0 mod 3 ) ⇒ n ∈ D n −k
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ . n = ( n − 1 − 4x ) 12 + ( x − 2 ) 22 + 1 32ﺇﺫﻥ
n −1
≤ 2≤x ⇒ n ∈ Dn −2−3x
4
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 312
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻗﻮﻟﻨﺎ
( 8 ≤ k ≤ 3n 4+ 5 ) ∧ (k = 2 mod 3 ) ⇒ n ∈ D n −k
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ . n = ( n + 2 − 4x ) 12 + ( x − 4 ) 22 + 2 32ﺇﺫﻥ
n+2
≤ 5≤x ⇒ n ∈ Dn −1−3x
4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻗﻮﻟﻨﺎ
(16 ≤ k ≤ 3n +4 10 ) ∧ (k = 1 mod 3 ) ⇒ n ∈ D n −k
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﻭ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﺤﺔ ) . ( 4
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Ep )p≥1ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
= Ep = D1 ∩ D2 ∩ … ∩ Dp ∩ Dj
1≤ j ≤ p
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ pﻭ qﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
)(5 ∀ ( a, b ) ∈ Ep × Eq , ab ∈ Epq
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ، Ep × Eqﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . ℕ pq
-ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ . k ≤ qﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ b ∈ Dkﻭ ، a ∈ D1ﺃﻥﹼ
k
a =α 2
= bﻭ ∑ βℓ2
ℓ =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
k
= ab = b ∑ ( αβℓ )2 ∈ Dk
ℓ =1
-ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ، k = nq + rﻣﻊ nﻣﻦ ℕ p −1ﻭ rﻣﻦ . ℕ qﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ b ∈ Dq
ﻭ b ∈ Drﻭ a ∈ Dn +1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
n q r
= bﻭ a = δ 2 + ∑ αℓ2 = ∑ βi2 ∑ γ j2
ℓ =1 i =1 j =1
ﻭﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ) ( 5ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
n r n q
2
= ab = δ 2b + ∑ αℓ2b ) ∑ ( δγ j + ∑ ∑ ( αℓ βi )2 ∈ Dnq +r
ℓ =1 j =1 ℓ =1 i =1
313 ﻋﺎﻡ 1992
ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ) ( 4ﻭ ) ( 5ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻭ mﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ :
S ( n ) = n 2 − 14ﻭ S ( m ) = m 2 − 14
ﻛﺎﻥ . S (nm ) = (nm )2 − 14
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﻟﹶﻨﺎ n 2 ∈ En 2 −14ﻭ . m 2 ∈ Em 2 −14ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 5
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)n 2m 2 ∈ E(n 2 −14)(m 2 −14
ﺇﺫﻥ
)(6 ∀k ∈ {1, …,(n 2 − 14)(m 2 − 14)} , n 2m 2 ∈ Dk
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 4ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
)3(n 2 − 14)(m 2 − 14
∀k ∈ ℕ, ≤ 14 ≤ k ⇒ n 2m 2 ∈ Dn 2m 2 −k
4
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ n 2 ≥ 169ﻭ . m 2 ≥ 169ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
)3(n 2 − 14)(m 2 − 14
)(7 n 2m 2 − ≤ k ≤ n 2m 2 − 14 ⇒ n 2m 2 ∈ Dk
4
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ℓ2 ≥ 169ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ℓ2 14 14
2 =1+ 2 ≤1+ < 1.1
ℓ − 14 ℓ − 14 155
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n2 m2 7
2 ⋅ 2 < < 1.21
n − 14 m − 14 4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ
)3(n 2 − 14)(m 2 − 14
n 2m 2 − )< (n 2 − 14)(m 2 − 14
4
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ) ( 6ﻭ ) ( 7ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ {1, …, n 2m 2 − 14 } , n 2m 2 ∈ Dk
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ . S (nm ) = (nm )2 − 14
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻣﻦ } ∗ {( 13 ) : r ∈ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . S (n ) = n 2 − 14
r
ù
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 314
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 1ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
P ( X ) = X n + 5X n −1 + 3
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ Pﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﺜﲑﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻏﲑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﲔ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﳍﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺜﲑﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻏﲑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﲔ
q p
= ) B (X ∑ bk X k = ) A(Xﻭ ∑ ak X k
k =0 k =0
ﻣﻦ ] ℤ[Xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ) . P ( X ) = A ( X ) B ( Xﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ p ≥ 1ﻭ q ≥ 1
ﻭ . p + q = nﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ a pbq = 1ﻭ . a0b0 = 3ﺇﺫﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ
ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ a p = bp = 1ﻭﺃﻥﹼ a0 = εﻭ b0 = 3εﻣﻊ } . ε ∈ {−1,1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ) P ( X ) = A ( X ) B ( Xﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، 3ﺃﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ] F3 [ Xﻣﻊ
. F3 = ℤ/3ℤﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ] ، F3 [ X
) P ( X ) = X n − X n −1 = X n −1 ( X − 1
p −1
A ( X ) = X p + ∑ ak X k + ε
k =1
q −1
B ( X ) = X q + ∑ bk X k
k =1
ﺇﺫﹾ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ bk = bk mod 3ﻭ . ak = ak mod 3ﻭﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ P = ABﺃﻥﹼ
) A ( X ) B ( X ) = X n −1 ( X − 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، X n −1 | A ⋅ Bﻭ ، gcd ( X n −1, A ) = 1ﻷﻥﹼ . ε ≠ 0 mod 3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، X n −1 | Bﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
n − 1 ≤ deg B = q = n − p ≤ n − 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ p = 1ﻭ } . A ( X ) ∈ { X − 1, X + 1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻥﹼ ، P ( 1 ) = 9 ≠ 0
ﻭ . P ( −1 ) = 4 ( −1 )n −1 + 3 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Pﻏﲑ ﺧﺰﻭﻝ ﰲ ] ù . ℤ[X
315
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 316
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Dﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ADBﻭ AC ⋅ BD = AD ⋅ BC = π + ACB
2
AB ⋅ CD
= .ρ .1ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
AC ⋅ BD
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﺪ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Cﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ C 2ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺗﲔ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ
ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ACDﻭ BCDﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
.1ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BCEﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﰲ Cﻭﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻭﺗﻘﻊ ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( BCﻭﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ . Aﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
E AC EC
= ADBﻭ
= ACE
C AD BD
ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ ADBﻭ ACEﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ .ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ
D BADﻭﻣﻦ ﰒﹼ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
= EAC
AC AE
A B
= BAEﻭ
= DAC
AD AB
E
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ABEﻭ ، ADCﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎﹰ
C
AB BE
=
AD CD
D
ﺃﻭ . AB ⋅ CD = AD ⋅ BEﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳒﺪ
A B AB ⋅ CD AD ⋅ BE BE
=ρ = = = 2
AC ⋅ BD AD ⋅ BC BC
.2ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺰ ﺍﻭﻳﺔ ADBﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) [ DX
C ﻭ ) [ DYﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﰲ Dﻟﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ C1ﻭ C 2ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ADXﻷﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﳑﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﳏﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
= ACD
D ADﻣﻦ . C1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﺎﻥ
ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺘﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺱ
A X Y
B DBﻣﻦ . C 2ﺇﺫﻥ
DCBﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺱ
YDBﻭ
. XDY
= ADB − ACB ، ADXﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ = π
2
+ YDB = ACB
ﻓﺎﳌﻤﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ Dﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ C 2ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺍﻥ ،ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﳏﻮﺭ ] [CDﻫﻮ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ù ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﻣﻦ Cﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ C 2ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
317 ﻋﺎﻡ 1993
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺞ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻧﻠﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ n 2ﺣﺠﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﰲ
ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ، n × nﺣﺠﺮ ﺍﹰ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻊ .ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ
ﺷﺎﻗﻮﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎﹰ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﳎﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﻝ ﳚﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ ،ﻭﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻌﺐ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔﹸ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ،ﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Rﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ،ﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ 2 ∈ Rﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
☯
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، n ≥ 3ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ، n ∈ Rﻭﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . n + 3 ∈ Rﻧﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ
ﳑﻠﻮﺀﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ( n + 3 )2 ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﺭ ،ﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ A1ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ A1ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺍﹰ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ C 0ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ C 1
ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞﹴ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻩ n × 3ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
n
C0 C1
ﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺍﹰ ﻧﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻩ 3 × n
ﻓﻨﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ C 2ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ،
n n
C2 C3
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 318
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ، n ≥ 3ﻟﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ، 3 × 3
ﻭﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ C 3ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ . n × nﻭﻷﻥﹼ n ∈ Rﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
.n + 3 ∈ R
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . 4 ∈ Rﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺷﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
C0 C1 C2 C3
ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ C 3ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
☯ ☯
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯ ☯
ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . 4 ∈ R
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ . 5 ∈ Rﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺷﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
C0 C1 C2 C3
ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ C 3ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ C 3ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . 5 ∈ R
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 3 nﻛﺎﻥ . n ∈ Rﻫﺬﻩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ { 2, 4, 5 } ⊂ Rﻭﻣﻦ
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ .
ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﻛﺎ ﻥ 3 | nﻛﺎ ﻥ . n ∉ Rﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﺃ ﻧﻨﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻧﺎ
ﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ :ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ، Rﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ،W
ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ . Bﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ
ﺃﻱ ﺣﺠﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ، 1ﻭﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﲔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ . 1
319 ﻋﺎﻡ 1993
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ rﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﹼﻲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﲪﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻮ ﻗﹼﻔﻬﺎ،
ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ wﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﹼﻲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﹼﻔﻬﺎ،
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ bﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﹼﻲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﹼﻔﻬﺎ.
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ . n = 3mﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ 3m × 3mﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺠﺎﺭ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ 3m 2ﺣﺠﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ،ﻭ 3m 2ﺣﺠﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ،ﻭ 3m 2ﺣﺠﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﹼﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ، x = 3m 2 + r − w − bﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﹼﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺎﺕ
ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ، y = 3m 2 + w − r − bﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﹼﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ
. z = 3m 2 + b − r − wﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
x ≡ y ≡ z mod 2
ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺠﺮﺍﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ . n ∉ R
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﱡﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﲝﺠﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3
ù ﻻ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ Pﻭ Qﻭ Rﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) m ( PQRﺑﺄ ﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Pﻭ Qﻭ Rﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
PQRﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ،ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Xﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻛﺎﻥ
) m ( ABC ) ≤ m ( ABX ) + m ( AXC ) + m ( XBC
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) m ( ABCﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ
) ، A ( ABCﻣﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﺃﻱ
) 2A ( ABC
= ) m ( ABC
) max ( AB, BC ,CA
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 320
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﲝﺎﻟﺔ Xﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻭﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ AXﻭ BX
ﻭ CXﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ . BC
D
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
F
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Yﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ، EFﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Dﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
Y
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ DYﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﲔ DEﻭ . DFﺃﻱ
) DY ≤ max ( DE , DF
E ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
2
ϕ : [ 0,1 ] → ℝ, ϕ ( t ) = DE + tEF
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
ϕ ( t ) = DE 2 + 2tDE ⋅ EF + t 2EF 2
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ϕﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﳏﺪﺏ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ tﻣﻦ ] ، [ 0,1
) ) ϕ ( t ) ≤ ( 1 − t ) ϕ ( 0 ) + t ϕ ( 1 ) ≤ max ( ϕ ( 0 ) , ϕ ( 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
∀t ∈ [ 0,1 ], ) DE + tEF ≤ max ( DE , DF
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
∀Y ∈ [ EF ], ) DY ≤ max ( DE , DF
A ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ . ABCﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
) L = max ( AB, BC , AC
C′
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Xﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ C ′ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
X ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) (CXﻣﻊ ] . [ ABﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
B C
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳒﺪ
AX ≤ max ( AC , AC ′ ) ≤ max ( AC , AB ) ≤ L
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻥﹼ BX ≤ Lﻭ .CX ≤ Lﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) 2A ( ABX ) 2A ( ABX
= ) m ( ABX ≥
max AB, AX , BX
( ) L
) 2A ( XBC ) 2A ( AXC
≥ ) . m ( XBC ≥ ) m ( AXCﻭ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
L L
321 ﻋﺎﻡ 1993
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) A ( ABC ) = A ( ABX ) + A ( AXC ) + A ( XBC
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) 2A ( ABX ) 2A ( AXC ) 2A ( XBC
= ) m ( ABC + +
L L L
) ≤ m ( ABX ) + m ( AXC ) + m ( XBC
ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ Xﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABC
A
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Xﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ABCﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ.
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
Xﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( BCﻭﺃﻥﹼ Cﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ Bﻭ . X
B A′ C X
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( BCﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ) ( BXﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ) ) d ( A, ( BX ) ) = d ( A, ( BC
A
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ X ′ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Xﰲ ، ABXﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ
X′
C ′ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Cﰲ . ABCﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
C′
ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ XX ′Bﻭ CC ′Bﺃﻥﹼ
B C X
XX ′ BX
= ≥1
CC ′ BC
)(2 ) ) d ( X , ( BA ) ) ≥ d (C , ( BA ﺇﺫﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ B ′′ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ Bﰲ ، ABXﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ B ′ﻭ A′ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﲔ
ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻟﲔ ﻣﻦ Bﻭ Aﰲ . ABC
A
B ′′
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . BB ′′ < AA′ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
B′
ABXﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . BX < AXﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
B A′ C X
BAXﺯ ﺍ ﻭ ﻳﺔ ﺣﺎ ﺩ ﺓ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﳌﺘﺮ ﺍ ﺟﺤﺔ
ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﻟﺰ ﺍ ﻭ ﻳﺔ
BACﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
< BAX
≤π
2
> BA sin BAC
BB ′′ = BA sin BAX = BB ′
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، BB ′′ ≥ min ( AA′, BB ′ﺃﻱ
)(3 ) ) ) d ( B, ( AX ) ) ≥ min ( d ( B, ( AC ) ) , d ( A, ( BC
ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، m ( ABX ) ≥ m ( ABCﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 322
ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( AXﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( BCﰲ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) .Yﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳑﻜﻨﺎﹰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﻓﻬﺔ ( .ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ.
A ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ] .Y ∈ [ BCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﺎ
ﻳﻠﻲ :
Y
B C ) m ( ABY ) ≤ m ( ABX
X ) m ( AYC ) ≤ m ( AXC
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) m ( ABC ) ≤ m ( ABY ) + m ( AYC ) ≤ m ( ABX ) + m ( AXC
) ≤ m ( ABX ) + m ( AXC ) + m ( XBC
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
A ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ] .Y ∉ [ BCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
ﻧﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
Y
B C ) m ( ABY ) ≤ m ( ABX
X ) m ( ABC ) ≤ m ( ABY
ﺇﺫﻥ
) m ( ABC ) ≤ m ( ABX ) ≤ m ( ABX ) + m ( AXC ) + m ( XBC
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺃﹶﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ f : ℕ∗ → ℕ∗ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ f ( 1 ) = 2ﻭ ∀n ∈ ℕ∗, f ( f ( n ) ) = f ( n ) + n؟
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ( f (n )) f (n ) f (n
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , ⋅ = +1
) f (n n n
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، limn →∞ (f (n ) / n ) = αﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ . α2 = α + 1
323 ﻋﺎﻡ 1993
= ، αﻭﻧﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) f (nﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . αn 1+ 5
2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳚﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ
ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
f : ℕ∗ → ℕ∗, f (n ) = round(αn ) = αn + 1/2
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ . f (1) = 2
≤ f (n ) − αnﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . n 1
2
ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
δn = f ( f (n )) − f (n ) − n
= f ( f (n )) − α f (n ) + (α − 1)f (n ) − n
= f ( f (n )) − α f (n ) + (α − 1)( f (n ) − αn ) + (α 2 − α − 1)n
) = f ( f (n )) − α f (n ) + (α − 1)( f (n ) − αn
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
δn ≤ f ( f (n )) − α f (n ) + (α − 1) f (n ) − αn
1 α −1 α
≤ + = <1
2 2 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ δn ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، δn = 0ﺃﻱ
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , f ( f (n )) = f (n ) + n
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 1ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ nﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ( ¤ k )0≤k <nﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ ℤﻧﻜﺘﺐ ¤ kﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ¤ k mod nﻛ ﱡﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡﹴ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﺇ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺍﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﹰ .ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ .ﺛﹸﻢ
ﻣﺮﺭﻧﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ( si )i ∈ ℕﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ، siﻧﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ¤ i
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ¤ i −1ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻧﺒﻘﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ¤ i −1ﻣﻄﻔﺄﹰ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ
ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ، M nﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓﹰ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n = 2pﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ . M n = n 2 − 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n = 2p + 1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ . M n = n 2 − n + 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 324
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ F2ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻘﻞ ) ⊙ . ( ℤ/2ℤ, ⊕,ﺃﻱ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} { 0,1ﻣﺰ ﻭﺩ ﺓﹰ ﺑﺎﳉﻤﻊ ⊕ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ⊙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ . 2ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺳﲑﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 1ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ
ﺍﳌﹸﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 0ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﹸﻄﻔﺄ.
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ iﻣﻦ ، ℕﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) σi = ( ε0( i ), ε1( i ), …, εn( i−)1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ F2nﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ) . ( ¤ i ,¤ i +1, …,¤ i +n −1ﺃﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ¤ i +rﻣﻀﺎﺀً ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ
iﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . εr( i ) = 1
) . σ0 = (1,1, …,1ﺛﹸﻢ ﳓﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ( σi )i ≥0ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ
n
ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ) ، σi +1 = s ( σiﻭ sﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ
) s : F2n → F2n , ( α0 , α1, …, αn −1 ) ֏ ( α1, α2 …, αn −1, αn −1 ⊕ α0
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . ∀i ∈ ℕ, σi = s i ( σ0ﻭﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ kﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . σk = σ0
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ sﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ t = s −1ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
) t : F2n → F2n , ( β0 , β1 , … , βn −1 ) ֏ ( βn −2 ⊕ βn −1 , β0 , β1 … , βn −2
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ sﻫﻮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻄﹼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ F2nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻘﻞ . F2
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ Sﻭ Tﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ sﻭ tﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﰲ . F2nﻓﻨﺠﺪ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
0 ⋯ 0 1 1 0 1 0 ⋯ 0
1 0 0 ⋯ 0 ⋱ 0 1 ⋱ ⋮
T = 0 ⋱ ⋱ ⋱ ⋱ ⋮ S = ﻭ ⋮ ⋱ ⋱ 0
⋮ ⋱ ⋱ ⋱ 0 0 ⋱ 0 1
0 ⋯ 0 1 0 1 0 ⋯ 0 1
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ Viﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ σTiﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ . σiﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
∀i ∈ ℕ, Vi = S iV0
325 ﻋﺎﻡ 1993
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ : { 0,1, …, 2n } → F2n , i ֏ Viﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﻩ ،ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻼﻥ iﻭ jﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
0 ≤ i < j ≤ 2nﻭ ،Vj = Viﺃﻭ ، S jV0 = S iV0ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Sﻗﹶﻠﻮﺑﺔﹲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، S j −iV0 = V0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { ℓ ∈ ℕ∗ : S ℓV0 = V0ﻏﲑ
ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ } M n = min { ℓ ∈ ℕ∗ : S ℓX 0 = X 0ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ،ﻣﻊ . M n ≤ 2n
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . n = 2pﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ S n −1 = I nﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﻦ
2
ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .T = S −1ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) Q ( Xﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .T
ﺃﻱ
X ⋯ 0 1 1
1 X 0 ⋯ 0
Q ( X ) = det (T ⊕ XI n ) = det 0 ⋱ ⋱ ⋱ ⋮
⋮ ⋱ ⋱ ⋱ 0
0 ⋯ 0 1 X
ﺑﻨﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺳﻄﺮﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﳒﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
Q (X ) = Xn ⊕ X ⊕ 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ) . X 2 ≡ X ⊕ 1 mod Q ( Xﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ jﺃﻥﹼ
p
p+ j j
X2 ≡ X2 ⊕ 1 ) mod Q ( X
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . j + 1
ﻭﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ j = pﺃﻥﹼ
2p p
X2 ≡ X2 ⊕ 1 ≡ X ⊕ 1 ⊕ 1 ≡ X ) mod Q ( X
، ( X 2ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، gcd (Q ( X ), X ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ ) Q ( Xﻳﻘﺴﻢ − 1 ) X
2p
−1
. X nﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ Q (T ) = 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ X 2ﺃﻱ − 1 ) Q ( Xﻳﻘﺴﻢ − 1
2 2p
−1 −1
.S n S nﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ = I n .T nﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
2 2 2
−1 −1 −1
= In
، S nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ M n = n 2 − 1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ. ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ X 0 = X 0
2
−1
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ σ0ﻛﺎﻥ . σn 2 −1 = σ0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 326
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . n = 2p + 1ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ S n −n +1 = I nﻟﻴﺘ ﻢ
2
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻟﻘﺪ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Tﻫﻮ .Q ( X ) = X n ⊕ X ⊕ 1
ﺇﺫﻥ
p
X2 +1
) ≡ X ⊕ 1 mod Q ( X
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، jﺃﻥﹼ
p+ j
+2j j
X2 ≡ X2 ⊕ 1 ) mod Q ( X
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . j + 1ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ
ﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ j = pﺃﻥﹼ
2p
+ 2p p
X2 ≡ X2 ⊕ 1 ) mod Q ( X
ﻭﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ Xﳒﺪ
2p
+ 2p +1 p
+1
X2 ≡ X2 ⊕ X ≡ Q (X ) ⊕ 1 ≡ 1 ) mod Q ( X
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
22 p + 2p + 1 = ( n − 1 )2 + n = n 2 − n + 1
. X nﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ Q (T ) = 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ) Q ( Xﻳﻘﺴﻢ − 1
2
−n +1
.T nﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Sﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻥﹼ = I n
2
−n +1
، S nﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ M n = n 2 − n + 1ﰲ . S nﺇﺫﻥ X 0 = X 0
2 2
−n +1 −n +1
= In
ù ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، nﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ℕ n
) ﻣﻊ } ، ( ℕ n = {1, 2, …, nﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ Aﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ . ( A + A ) ∩ ℕ n ⊂ A
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 n +1
∑
card ( A ) a ∈A
≥a
2
¤ﻧﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ } . A + A = {a + b : (a, b ) ∈ A × A
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Aﻣﻦ ℕ nﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ mﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 1ﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
، ( A + A ) ∩ ℕ n ⊂ Aﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﺭﺗﺒﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Aﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
a1 < a2 < ⋯ < am
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ak + am +1−k ≤ nﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ kﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
m2+1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} A ∩ ]am +1−k , +∞[ = {a j : m + 1 − k < j ≤ m
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ k − 1ﲢﻮﻱ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} {a j + am +1−k : 1 ≤ j ≤ k
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ kﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∀k ∈ {1, …, m 2+1 } , ak + am +1−k ≥ n + 1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ m +1
2 ﻭﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ m + 1 − kﺑﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ < k ≤ m
∀k ∈ {1, …, m } , ak + am +1−k ≥ n + 1
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﳒﺪ
) 2 ∑ a ≥ ( n + 1 ) card ( A
a ∈A
ﺃﻭ
1 n +1
∑
card ( A ) a ∈A
≥a
2
ù ﻭﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
327
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 328
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ABCﻓﻴﻪ . AB = ACﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [ BC
ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Oﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( AMﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (OBﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( AB
ﻭﺃﺧﲑ ﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Qﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ BCﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ Bﻭ ، Cﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Eﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ
) ، ( ABﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Fﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ) . ( ACﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Eﻭ Qﻭ Fﻧﻘﺎﻁﹲ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻊ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) (OQﻭ ) ( EFﻳﻜﻮﻧﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻥ .QE = QF
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . (OQ ) ⊥ ( EFﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
A
= OQE
EBO = π
2
E .OEQ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ OQEBﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
= OBQ
Q C
B M ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
F
O = OQF
FCO = π
2
.OFQﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ OCB ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ OQCFﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ
= OCQ
،OEQﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ
= OFQ .OBQﺇﺫﻥ
= OCQ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ OFEﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ .OE = OFﻓﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [OQﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
OEFﻫﻮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ.QE = QF
A ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ .QE = QFﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
Qﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (OQﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﰲ ، E ′ﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ
E
Q ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ACﰲ ، F ′ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ . E ≠ E ′
B C
M ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) (OQ ) ⊥ ( E ′F ′ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
F
O FQFﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺘﺎﻥ
EQEﻭ ′ .QE ′ = QF ′ﻭﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ ′
ﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ EQE ′ﻭ , FQF ′ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ
= FEB
EFC
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( ACﻭ ) ( ABﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ E = E ′
ù ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . F = F ′ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . (OQ ) ⊥ ( EFﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
329 ﻋﺎﻡ 1994
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ kﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) f ( kﺑﺄ ﻧﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {k + 1, k + 2, …, 2kﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ
ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ . 1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ mﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ kﻣﻦ
∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . f ( k ) = mﺃﻱ ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ∗ f : ℕ∗ → ℕﻏﺎﻣﺮ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ، Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ mﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ
card ( {k : f ( k ) = m } ) = 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Pﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻮﻯ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . 2
} P = { 2α + 2β + 2γ : ( α, β, γ ) ∈ ℕ 3, 0 ≤ α < β < γ
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ 1Pﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ k ﻣﻦ ، Pﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 0ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ k ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . P
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ( k + 1 ) − f ( k ) = 1P ( 2k + 1 ) + 1P ( 2k + 2 ) − 1P ( k + 1
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ
n ∈ P ⇔ 2n ∈ P
ﻟﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ ℕ∗, ) 1P ( 2k + 2 ) = 1P ( k + 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
∀k ∈ ℕ∗, ) f ( k + 1 ) − f ( k ) = 1P ( 2k + 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ 2k + 1ﺇﱃ Pﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ 1 + 2β + 2γﻣﻊ
، γ > β > 0ﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ kﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ 2β ′ + 2γ ′ﻣﻊ . γ ′ > β ′ ≥ 0
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Qﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﻮﺗﲔ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، 2ﺃﻱ
} Q = { 2α + 2β : ( α, β ) ∈ ℕ 2, 0 ≤ α < β
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 330
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، 2k + 1 ∈ P ⇔ k ∈ Qﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ ℕ∗, ) f ( k + 1 ) − f ( k ) = 1Q ( k
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ kﻣﻦ 1ﺣﺘﻰ ، n − 1ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ، f ( 1 ) = 0
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
n −1
∗
∀n ∈ ℕ , = f n
( )
) [ ∑ 1Q ( k ) = card (Q ∩ ]1, n
k =1
ﻟﻨﺮﻗﹼﻢ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Qﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ .ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺛﹸﻢ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
، 5ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 6ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 9ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ.
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Qﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
، ϕ : ℕ∗ → Qﺑﻮﺿﻊ ، ϕ ( 1 ) = min Q = 3ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) ϕ ( kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
، 1 ≤ k < nﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ ) }) . ϕ ( n ) = min (Q\{ϕ ( 1 ) , …, ϕ ( n − 1ﻓﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ
ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺇﱃ .Q
ﻭﻓﻘﺎﹰ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ mﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﺆ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
[ ϕ ( m ) < k ≤ ϕ ( m + 1 ) ⇔ {ϕ ( 1 ) , …, ϕ ( m )} = Q ∩ ]1, k
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ϕ ( m ) < k ≤ ϕ ( m + 1 ) ⇔ f ( k ) = card (Q ∩ ]1, k [ ) = m
ﻓﻤﺜﻼﹰ
∗
∀m ∈ ℕ , f ( ϕ (m + 1 )) = m
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ fﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻏﺎﻣﺮ ،ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀m ∈ ℕ∗, ) card ( {k : f ( k ) = m } ) = ϕ ( m + 1 ) − ϕ ( m
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
} A = {m : card ( {k : f ( k ) = m } ) = 1
} = {m : ϕ ( m + 1 ) = ϕ ( m ) + 1
} = { f ( ϕ (m + 1 )) : ϕ (m + 1 ) − 1 ∈ Q
331 ﻋﺎﻡ 1994
ﺇﺫ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) ϕ ( m + 1ﺇﱃ Qﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ
) . ϕ ( mﻭﻷﻥﹼ ϕﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻏﺎﻣﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،Qﺗﻜﺘﺐ Aﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
) ) A = { f ( u ) : ( u ∈ Q ) ∧ ( u − 1 ∈ Q ) } = f (Q ∩ ( 1 + Q
ﻟﻨﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ ) .Q ∩ ( 1 + Qﻟﻴﻜﻦ u = 2α + 2βﻣﻊ 0 ≤ α < βﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ .Q
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ α ≥ 2ﻛﺎﻥ . u − 1 = 1 + 2 + ⋯ + 2α−1 + 2β ∉ Q
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ α = 0ﻛﺎﻥ . u − 1 = 2β ∉ Q
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ α = 1ﻛﺎﻥ . u − 1 = 1 + 2β ∈ Q
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
} Q ∩ ( 1 + Q ) = { 2 + 2p : p > 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، p > 1ﳒﺪ
) } f ( 2 + 2p ) = card ( {1 + 2p } ∪ { 2i + 2 j : 0 ≤ i < j < p
)p ( p − 1
=1+
2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
)p ( p − 1
A = 1+{ 2
:p ≥1 }
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺎ ٍﺀ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 0 ≤ q < pﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
)p ( p − 1
2q + 2p ≤ n < 2q +1 + 2p ⇒ f ( n ) = q +
2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ) f ( nﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . n
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) ( m, nﻣﻦ ∗ ℕ∗ × ℕﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n 3 + 1ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ
ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . mn − 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﺟﺎﹰ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ ∗ . ℕ∗ × ℕﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nm − 1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . n 3 + 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ k ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . n 3 + 1 = k ( nm − 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 k + 1 = nhﻣﻊ . h = km − n 2 ≥ 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 332
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ hﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) h + m = ( k + 1 ) m − n 2 = n ( hm − n
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
)(2 h + m = n ℓﻣﻊ . ℓ = hm − n ≥ 1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ ) ( n, m, ℓ, hﻣﻦ ℕ∗4ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
h + m = n ℓﻭ hm = n + ℓ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
(n − 1 )( ℓ − 1 ) + ( m − 1 ) ( h − 1 ) = 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 2ﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ 0ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ
2ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ .ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ ) . M = ( n, m, ℓ, h
، M = ( 2, 2, 2, 2 ) ﺃﻱ ) . ( n, m ) = ( 2, 2
، M = ( 1, 3, ?, 2 ) ﺃﻱ ) . ( n, m ) = ( 1, 3
، M = ( 1, 2, ?, 3 ) ﺃﻱ ) . ( n, m ) = ( 1, 2
، M = ( 2,1, 3, ? ) ﺃﻱ ) . ( n, m ) = ( 2,1
، M = ( 3,1, 2, ? ) ﺃﻱ ) . ( n, m ) = ( 3,1
، M = ( ?, 3,1, 2 ) ﺃﻱ ) ( n, m ) = ( 5, 3ﻷﻥﹼ . ℓn = h + m
، M = ( ?, 2,1, 3 ) ﺃﻱ ) ( n, m ) = ( 5, 2ﻷﻥﹼ . ℓn = h + m
، M = ( 2, ?, 3,1 ) ﺃﻱ ) ( n, m ) = ( 2, 5ﻷﻥﹼ . hm = n + ℓ
، M = ( 3, ?, 2,1 ) ﺃﻱ ) ( n, m ) = ( 3, 5ﻷﻥﹼ . hm = n + ℓ
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ ) ( n, mﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
}) S = {( 1, 2 ) , ( 2,1 ) , ( 1, 3 ) , ( 3,1 ) , ( 2, 2 ) , ( 2, 5 ) , ( 5, 2 ) , ( 5, 3 ) , ( 3, 5
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﱠ ﺯﻭﺝﹴ ﻣﻦ Sﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ .ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ù ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
333 ﻋﺎﻡ 1994
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Iﺍﺎﻝ [∞ ، ]−1, +ﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . −1
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ f : I → Iﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ :
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ xﻭ yﻣﻦ ، Iﻛﺎﻥ
) f ( x + f (y ) + xf (y ) ) = y + f (x ) + yf (x
) f (x
֏ xﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻟﲔ [ ]−1, 0ﻭ [∞. ] 0, + ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
x
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : I → Iﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ .
ﻭ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ λﻣﻦ Iﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، f ( λ ) = λﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ xﻭ y
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﻥ λﺃﻥﹼ ، f ( µ ) = µﻣﻊ . µ = 2λ + λ 2ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . λ ≠ 0
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، λ > 0ﻛﺎﻥ ، µ > λﻭﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﹸﻠﻒ
) f (λ ) f ( µ
=1 < =1
λ µ
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ λ < 0ﻛﺎﻥ ، −1 < µ < λ < 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﹸﻠﻒ
) f ( µ ) f (λ
=1 < =1
µ λ
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ( f (λ ) = λ ) ⇒ (λ = 0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ y = xﰲ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ((x + ( 1 + x ) f ( x ))) = x + ( 1 + x ) f ( x
λ λ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ، x + ( 1 + x ) f ( x ) = 0ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥﹼ
x
f (x ) = −
1+x
ù ֏ xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻭ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ. −x
1+ x ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Aﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ
ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Sﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷ ﻭﻟﻴﺔ ، Pﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﻣﻦ Aﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ
، ℕ\Aﻭﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ kﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، Sﻣﻊ . k ≥ 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 334
ﻟﻨﺮﻗﹼﻢ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻱ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ϕ : ℕ∗ → P, ϕ ( n ) = pn
ﻓﻤﺜﻼﹰ p1 = 2ﻭ p2 = 3ﻭ p3 = 5ﻭ p4 = 7ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ⋯ .
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻧﻌﺮﻑ
}) Vn = { B ⊂ ℕ∗ : ( card ( B ) = n ) ∧ ( min ( B ) > n
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ
V = ∪ Vn
n ≥1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Aﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
=A {∏p
k ∈B
k : B ∈V }
ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Aﲢﻮﻱ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ،ﻭﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮﳘﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ
ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 5ﻭﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 7ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﺍﻟﻴﻚ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Sﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ . Pﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، Sﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ k ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ pk = pﻭ k ≥ 2ﻷﻥﹼ pﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( ℓ j )1≤ j ≤k +1ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ، ℓ 1 = kﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
} ℓ j +1 = min {r > ℓ j : pr ∈ S
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ j ≤ kﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ
n = p ℓ 1 p ℓ 2 … p ℓ kﻭ m = p ℓ 2 p ℓ 3 … p ℓ k p ℓ k +1
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } B1 = { ℓ 1, ℓ 2, …, ℓ kﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ، kﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ Vk
ﻷﻥﹼ ، min ( B1 ) = kﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ } B2 = { ℓ 2, …, ℓ k , ℓ k +1ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ
، kﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ Vkﻷﻥﹼ . min ( B2 ) = ℓ 2 > kﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ mﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ A
ﻭﺃﻥﹼ nﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ، Aﻭﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ kﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . Sﻭﺑﺬﺍ
ù ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢﹴ dﺃ ﺭ ﺑﻊ ﻧﻘﺎ ﻁ ﻣﺘﺒﺎ ﻳﻨﺔ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Dﺬ ﺍ ﺍ ﻟﺘﺮ ﺗﻴﺐ .ﺗﺘﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] [ ACﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C 2ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] [ BDﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Xﻭ .Y
) ( XY ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( XYﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] [ BCﰲ . Zﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ . Zﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CPﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Cﻭ ، Mﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) ( XYﻭ ) ( AM ) ( BPﺍ ﻟﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺓ C 2ﰲ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Bﻭ . Nﺃ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ
ﻭ ) ( DNﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
P ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ Qﺩ ﻻ ﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ) ( AMﻭ ) . ( XY
X
C2 ﻭ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ Q ′ﺩ ﻻ ﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ) ( DNﻭ ) . ( XY
N Q′ M
Q ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ .Q = Q ′
A B Z C D
C1 AMCﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﳏﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
Y ] [ ACﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ = π
. AMCﻭ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﻳﱪ ﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ 2
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ CMQZﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
ZQAﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ
ZCPﻭ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ
ZQ AZ
ﺃﻭ = AZQﻭ . PZCﻭﻣﻨﻪ
ZC PZ
1
= ZQ × AZ × ZC
PZ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ CXAﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ AZ × ZC = ZX 2ﺇﺫﻥ
ZX 2
) (1 = ZQ
PZ
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﹶﻠﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ Q ′ZDﻭ BZPﺃﻥﹼ
ZX 2
)(2 = ZQ ′
PZ
ù ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ، ZQ = ZQ ′ﺃﻱ .Q = Q ′ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
335
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 336
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻭ cﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ . abc = 1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1 1 3
3 + 3 + 3 ≥
a (b + c ) b ( c + a ) c (a + b ) 2
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ xﻭ yﻭ . zﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﲔ :
x y z
u = , ,
y +z z +x x + y
) v = ( y + z, z + x, x + y
2
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ-ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ( u ⋅ v ) ≤ u 2 v 2ﺃﻱ
x2 y2 z 2
( x + y + z )2 ≤ 2 + + ) ( x + y + z
y + z z + x x + y
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
x 2 2 2
y z
x + y + z ≤ 2 + +
y + z z + x x + y
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﲔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﻭﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
x +y +z
3 ≤ xyz
3
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2 2 2
33 x y z
≤ xyz + +
2 y +z z +x x +y
1 1 1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ = xﻭ = yﻭ = zﻣﻊ ، abc = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
c b a
ù ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Sﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ : S → ℝ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
∀T ⊂ S, = ) ( card ( T ) = 3 ) ⇒ A ( T ) ∑ ϕ (A
A∈ T
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ) A ( Tﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Tﺍﳌﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ.
ﻭﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، nﻣﻊ ، n > 3ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
Pﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . nﺃﻭﺟﺪ Nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ n > 3ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . P
337 ﻋﺎﻡ 1995
. Pﺇﺫﹾ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ،ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ S
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 4ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 4ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pﻓﻤﺜﻼﹰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ Sﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ
ϕﺑﺄ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍ ﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﹼ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺪﺱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ﺑﻊ .ﺃﻭ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ Sﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ،ﻭﻧﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ ϕﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺛﹸﻠﺚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺛﹸﻠﺚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ.
1 1
1
−1
1 1 1 1
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 6 ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 3
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Sﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ P
ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ nﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 5ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞﹲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ :
ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﺛﹸﻢ ﺳﻨﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ
ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾﹴ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Pﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﳏﺪﺏﹴ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، Sﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ Pﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ
A1 ﺍﶈﺪﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ . S
ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ Pﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﺎ ﻁﹲ ﻣﻦ ، Sﻟﻨﺴﻤﻬﺎ A1ﻭ A2
A4
A5
ﻭ ، A3ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻳﻴﻦ A4ﻭ A5ﻣﻦ . Sﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ
A2 A3
ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A1A2A3ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ :
) A ( A1A2A3 ) = A ( A1A2A4 ) + A ( A2A3A4 ) + A ( A3A1A4
) = A ( A1A2A5 ) + A ( A2A3A5 ) + A ( A3A1A5
ﻭﺑﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . ϕ ( A4 ) = ϕ ( A5
A1 A4 ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ Pﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁﹲ ﻣﻦ . Sﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ
A5 ﺃﻗﻄﺎ ﺭﻩ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺴﻤﻪ ] [ A1A3ﺇﱃ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺴﻤﻪ
A1A3A4ﳛﻮﻱ ﰲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭ ﻟﻨﺴﻤﻬﺎ ، A5ﻣﻦ ) ، Sﻷﻥﹼ
A2 A3 . (card ( S ) ≥ 5ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ A2ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﻦ Pﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﱂ
ﻧﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 338
ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ A1A2A3Ajﻣﻊ j = 4ﺃﻭ j = 5ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳒﺪ
) A ( A1A2A3 ) + A ( A1A3A4 ) = A ( A1A2A4 ) + A ( A2A3A4
) A ( A1A2A3 ) + A ( A1A3A5 ) = A ( A1A2A5 ) + A ( A2A3A5
ﻭﺑﻄﺮﺡ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . ϕ ( A4 ) = ϕ ( A5
A5
A1 ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ Pﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺫﻭ kﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ،ﻣﻊ ، k ≥ 5ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁﹲٌ
A4 ﻣﻦ . Sﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ Pﻭﻧﺴﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ A1
ﻭ A2ﻭ A3ﻭ A4ﻭ . A5ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
A2 A3 A1A2A3Ajﻣﻊ j = 4ﺃﻭ j = 5ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳒﺪ
) A ( A1A2A3 ) + A ( A1A3A4 ) = A ( A1A2A4 ) + A ( A2A3A4
) A ( A1A2A3 ) + A ( A1A3A5 ) = A ( A1A2A5 ) + A ( A2A3A5
ﻭﺑﻄﺮﺡ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . ϕ ( A4 ) = ϕ ( A5
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ A4ﻭ A5ﰲ Sﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ϕﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ.
ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) d = ( A4A5ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻔﲔ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ S
ﻧﺴﻤﻴﻬﻤﺎ A1ﻭ . A2ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ A1A2A4ﻭ A1A2A5ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ A4
ﻭ A5ﺗﺒﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( A1A2ﻭﻷﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ dﻭ ) ( A1A2ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ .ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺔ A3ﻣﻦ . S
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻌﺖ A3ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ dﻭﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ A1ﻭ . A2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﳌﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ dﻭ ) ( A1A3ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
A1ﻭ A2ﻭ A3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
ﺃ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻌﺖ A3ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ dﻭﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ A1ﻭ . A2
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ A1A3A4ﻭ A1A3A5ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ A4A5ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( A1A3ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ A2A3A4ﻭ A2A3A5ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ،ﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) . ( A2A3ﺇﺫﻥ M = A3ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A3ﻭ A4ﻭ A5ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﺧﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹶً.
ù ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ Pﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n > 4ﺇﺫﻥ } ، N = { 4ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
339 ﻋﺎﻡ 1995
ﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، x 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ( x k )0≤k ≤1995ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، x 0 = x1995ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
2 1
) (E x k −1 + = 2x k +
x k −1 xk
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ k ≤ 1995
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 2 a 1
2x +
x
=a+ ⇔ x−
a (
2
x−
a() =0 )
{ x
، x k ∈ k −1 ,ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
2 x k −1 }
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( Eﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
) (1 ∈ x k +1 {x 4
k −1
, x k −1,
1
,
2
2x k −1 x k −1 }
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} An = { 22 j : −n ≤ j ≤ n
ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x k )0≤k ≤2m +1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( Eﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ k ≤ 2m + 1ﻭﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ
1 x
= bﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ pﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ a = 0 ،ﻭ
x0 2
) x 2 p +1 ∈ ( aAp ) ∪ ( bAp
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ pﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 0,1, 2, …, m
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . p = 0ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ، A0 = {1 } ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
} x 1 ∈ {a, b } = { x20 , x10
ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( Eﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 1
. x 2 p −1 ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، p − 1ﺇﺫﻥ ) ∈ ( aAp −1 ) ∪ ( bAp −1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x 2 p −1 = a 22 jﻣﻊ ، −p < j < pﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ
) x 2 p +1 ∈ {a 22( j −1 ), a 22 j , b 2−2 j , b 2−2( j −1 ) } ∈ ( aAp ) ∪ ( bAp
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x 2 p −1 = b22 jﻣﻊ ، −p < j < pﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ
) x 2 p +1 ∈ {b 22( j −1 ), b 22 j , a 2−2 j , a 2−2( j −1 ) } ∈ ( aAp ) ∪ ( bAp
ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 340
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x k )0≤k ≤2m +1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ) ( Eﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k
ﻣﻦ } . {1, 2, …, 2m + 1ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . x 0 = x 2m +1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ∈ x0 ( x2 A ) ∪ x1 A
0
m
0
m
1 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 1ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، Amﻓﺎﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ) ( 2ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ x 0ﺇﱃ ، Amﺃﻭ
x0 2
ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ x 02ﺇﱃ ، Amﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ x 0ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 2 j : −m ≤ j ≤ mﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺃﻥﹼ . x 0 ≤ 2m
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x k )0≤k ≤2m +1ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
2m −k : 0 ≤ k ≤ 2m
xk = m
2 : k = 2m + 1
1 x k −1
= . x 2m +1 = x kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ 2mﻭ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃ ﻥﹼّ
x 2m 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x k )0≤k ≤2m +1ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( Eﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ k ≤ 2m + 1ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ . x 0 = x 2m +1 = 2m
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ،ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 2mﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، x 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ( x k )0≤k ≤2m +1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، x 0 = x 2m +1ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
) ( Eﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ k ≤ 2m + 1
ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ 2m + 1 = 1995ﺃﻭ . m = 997ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ
ù ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ x 0ﻫﻲ . 2997ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ABCDEFﻓﻴﻪ
= EFA
BCD AB = BC = CDﻭ DE = EF = FAﻭ = π
3
. AGBﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ Gﻭ Hﳘﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ = 2π
= DHE
3
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
AG + BG + GH + DH + EH ≥ FC
341 ﻋﺎﻡ 1995
ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Cﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ . XYZﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Vﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ
XYﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ . Zﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ .VX + VY = VZ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
V
X ) ( XV ﰲ ﺍ ﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍ ﳌﺎ ﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Zﻣﻮ ﺍ ﺯ ﻳﺎﹰ
S ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﰲ ، Tﻭﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) (VZﻭ ) ( XTﰲ
. Sﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
= XTZ
XVZ = XYZ = π
Z
3
Y
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ XVZ = VZTﻷﻥﹼ ) . ( XV ) ( ZTﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
T
ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ XVSﻭ STZﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ .ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ
ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 VZ = VS + SZ = VX + ZT
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ،
= π − YXT
ZXT = VZT − YZT = VZY
3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ZT = VYﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﻮﺿﻨﺎ ﰲ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ،VZ = VX + VY
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺘﻨﺎ ،ﻧﻨﺸﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] ، [ EDﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻲ ،ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﻲ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ABC ′ﻭ . DEF ′
F′ E
F
H
G A
D
B
C C′
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ C ′ﻭ Aﻭ Fﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Cﻭ Dﻭ F ′
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( BEﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ .CF = C ′F ′
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 342
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ = 2π
BGAﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Gﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ABﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ C ′ﻣﻦ
3
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ . ABC ′ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺎ،
ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 GA + GB = GC ′
DEﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ = 2π
DHEﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Hﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
3
ﳛﻮﻱ F ′ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ . DEF ′ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺎ ،ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 HD + HE = HF ′
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
C ′F ′ ≤ C ′G + GH + HF ′ = GA + GB + GH + HD + HE
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ،CF = C ′F ′ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ.
، Z 2pﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺎﹰ .ﻧﻌﺮﻑ } = { 0,1, …, 2p − 1
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
{
) B = A ⊂ Z 2 p : ( card ( A ) = p ) ∧ ( ∑ k ∈A k = 0 mod p }
ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ،ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) P ( k ) ( Xﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Xﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ k
ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ .ﻭﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ) µp ( Aﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ
ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، pﺃﻱ
µp ( A ) = ∑ k mod p
k ∈A
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} A0 = { 0,1, …, p − 1ﻭ } A1 = { p, p + 1, …, 2p − 1
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ mﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, …, pﻭ rﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, …, p − 1ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ) B ( m, r
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
{ B0 ∪ B1 : ( B0, B1 )∈ P m ( )
( A0 )× P ( p −m ) ( A1 ) , µp ( B0 ∪ B1 ) = r }
343 ﻋﺎﻡ 1995
ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ، µp ( A0 ) = µp ( A1 ) = 0ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
{ A1 } : r = 0, { A0 } : r = 0,
B ( 0, r ) = B ( p, r ) =
∅ : 0<r ∅ : 0<r
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ τaﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
τa : A0 → A0 , k ֏ ( k + a ) mod p = k ⊕p a
ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻫﻮ . τ p −a
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Bﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ) ، P ( p ) ( Z2 pﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) T ( Bﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
) T ( B ) = τ1 ( B ∩ A0 ) ∪ ( B ∩ A1
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ) T ( Bﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ) . P ( p ) ( Z2 pﻭﺃﻥﹼ Tﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
) ، P ( p ) ( Z2 pﺇﺫ ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
) T −1 ( B ) = τ1−1 ( B ∩ A0 ) ∪ ( B ∩ A1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ Bﻣﻦ ) . B ( m, rﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
card ( T ( B ) ∩ A0 ) = card ( τ ( B ∩ A0 ) ) = card ( B ∩ A0 ) = m
ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
card ( T ( B ) ∩ A1 ) = card ( B ∩ A1 ) = p − m
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
µp ( T ( B ) ) = ∑ ( k + 1 ) + ∑ k mod p
k ∈B ∩A0
k ∈B ∩ A1
= card ( B ∩ A0 ) + ∑ k mod p
k ∈B
= ( m + r ) mod p = m ⊕p r
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
) T ( B ( m, r ) ) ⊂ B ( m, m ⊕ p r
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∀k ≥ 0, ) T ( B ( m, km ⊕p r ) ) ⊂ B ( m, ( k + 1 ) m ⊕p r
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Tﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
∀k ≥ 0, ) ) card ( B ( m, km ⊕p r ) ) ≤ card ( B ( m, ( k + 1 ) m ⊕p r
ﺎﺕﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴ 344
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
card ( B ( m, r ) ) = card ( B ( m, pm ⊕p r ) )
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, p − 1 } , card ( B ( m, r ) ) = card ( B ( m, km ⊕p r ) )
ﻭﻣﻦ، gcd ( m, p ) = 1 ﺃﻥﹼ،ﺎﹰﻟﻴ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭp ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ، 1 ≤ m < p ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﺑﲔ ﻳﻌﺮk ֏ km ⊕p r ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ( ℤ/p ℤ, + ) ﻳﻮﻟﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓm ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺛﹶﻢ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ1 ≤ m < p ﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧ، { ﻭﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ0, …, p − 1 } ﻤﻮﻋﺔﺍ
∀r ∈ { 0, …, p − 1 } , card ( B ( m, r ) ) = card ( B ( m, 0 ) )
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
card ∪ B ( m, r ) = p card ( B ( m, 0 ) )
0≤r < p
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
card ∪ ∪ B ( m, r )
= p card 1≤m∪< p B ( m, 0 )
1≤m < p 0≤r < p
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
∪ ∪ B ( m, r ) = P ( p ) ( Z2 p )\{ A0 , A1 }
1≤m < p 0 ≤r < p
∪ B ( m, 0 ) = B \{ A0 , A1 }
1≤m < p
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ،C 2pp − 2 = p ( card ( B ) − 2 ) ﺇﺫﻥ
C 2pp − 2
card ( B ) = 2 +
p
ù .ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ rﻭﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﱃ 20 × 12ﻣﺮ ﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . rﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ
ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﳍﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻌﺔ.
.1ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ rﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ 2ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . 3
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . r = 73
.3ﻫﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ r = 97؟
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} B = {( i, j ) : 0 ≤ i ≤ 19, 0 ≤ j ≤ 11
ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) S ( 0, 0ﺪﻑ
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ) ، E ( 19, 0ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . r
( M k )1≤k ≤mﻣﻦ .1ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 2 | rﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Bﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
M 0 = S, Mm = E, = ∀k ∈ { 0, …, m − 1 } , M k M k +1 r
ﻧﻀﻊ ) . M k = ( αk , βkﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, m − 1 } , ( αk +1 − αk )2 + ( βk +1 − βk )2 = r
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، ∀x ∈ ℤ, x 2 = x mod 2ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ 2ﳒﺪ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, m − 1 } , αk +1 + βk +1 = αk + βk mod 2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ، αm + βm = α0 + β0 mod 2ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ
α0 + β0 = 0 αm + βm = 19ﻭ
ﻓﺎﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 2 | r
345
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 346
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 3 | rﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( M k )1≤k ≤mﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
Bﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
M 0 = S, Mm = E, = ∀k ∈ { 0, …, m − 1 } , M k M k +1 r
ﻧﻀﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ) . M k = ( αk , βkﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, m − 1 } , ( αk +1 − αk )2 + ( βk +1 − βk )2 = 0 mod 3
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
) (1 ) 3 | (t 2 + s 2 ) ⇔ ( 3 | t ) ∧ ( 3 | s ) ⇒ 3 | (t + s
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, m − 1 } , αk +1 + βk +1 = αk + βk mod 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ، αm + βm = α0 + β0 mod 3ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ
α0 + β0 = 0 αm + βm = 19ﻭ
ﻓﺎﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 3 | rﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ( 1ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ t 2 = −s 2 mod 3ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
، t 4 = s 4 mod 3ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ x 3 = x mod 3ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ xﻣﻦ ، ℤﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ﺃﻥﹼ ، t 2 = s 2 mod 3ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ، t 2 = −s 2 mod 3ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
، t 2 = s 2 = 0 mod 3ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ tﻭ . s
.2ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ r = 73ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ
ﻣﺮﺑﻌﲔ . 73 = 32 + 82ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲦﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ) ( ±8, ±3ﺃﻭ ) . ( ±3, ±8ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ :
) Start T ( 0, 0 ) ( 0, 10 ) T ( 11, 9
c ` c
) ( 3, 8 ) ( 8, 7 ) ( 19, 6
c ` c
) ( 11, 5 ) ( 0, 4 ) ( 11, 3
c ` c
) ( 3, 2 ) T ( 8, 1 ( 19, 0 ) T Finish
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺍﹰ.
347 ﻋﺎﻡ 1996
.3ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ r = 97ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﲔ . 97 = 42 + 92ﻭﻋﻠﻰ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲦﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ) ( ±9, ±4ﺃﻭ ) . ( ±4, ±9
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( M k )1≤k ≤mﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ Bﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
M 0 = S, Mm = E, = ∀k ∈ { 0, …, m − 1 } , M k M k +1 r
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ) . M k = ( αk , βkﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﺃﻥﹼ
β
∀k ∈ { 0, …, m } , αk = k mod 2
4
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k = 0ﻷ ﹼﻥ ) . M 0 = ( 0, 0
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ αk = βk /4 mod 2ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k < mﻭﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
. 0 ≤ βk < 4ﺇﺫﻥ . αk = 0 mod 2ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) ( αk +1, βk +1 ) = ( αk ± 9, βk + 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . αk +1 = βk +1 /4 mod 2 = 1 mod 2 ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) ( αk +1, βk +1 ) = ( αk ± 4, βk + 9
) ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ، (βk < 3ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . αk +1 = βk +1 /4 mod 2 = 0 mod 2
. 4 ≤ βk < 8ﺇﺫﻥ . αk = 1 mod 2ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) ( αk +1, βk +1 ) = ( αk ± 9, βk ± 4
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . αk +1 = βk +1 /4 mod 2 = 0 mod 2
. 8 ≤ βk < 12ﺇﺫﻥ . αk = 0 mod 2ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) ( αk +1, βk +1 ) = ( αk ± 9, βk − 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . αk +1 = βk +1 /4 mod 2 = 1 mod 2 ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) ( αk +1, βk +1 ) = ( αk ± 4, βk − 9
) ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ، (βk > 8ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . αk +1 = βk +1 /4 mod 2 = 0 mod 2
ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ αk +1 = βk +1 /4 mod 2ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥﹼ αm = βm /4 mod 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻥﹼ
) . ( αm , βm ) = ( 19, 0ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . r = 97
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 348
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
− ACB
APB = APC − ABC
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Dﻭ Eﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﺘﲔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ APBﻭ APCﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( APﻭ ) ( BDﻭ ) (CEﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Xﻭ Yﻭ Zﺍﳌﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ P
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BCﻭ ) (CAﻭ ) ( ABﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ XYZ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Pﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
. ZXY
= CPB
−A YZXﻭ
= BPA −C XYZﻭ
= APC −B
.YZ = AP sin A
XZ = BP sin Bﻭ XY = CP sin Cﻭ
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
A ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ AZPYﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
= PYZ
PAZ
Z ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ CYPXﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
P Y
= XYP
XCP
B X C ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
= XCP
XYZ
+ PAZ
+A
− ACP
=C − CAP
) = APC
− ( π − APC
= π−B −B
. ZXY
= CPB −A YZXﻭ
= BPA −C ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
Y ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [CPﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ Mﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ
ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ .YPXCﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
P C
M
، MYXﻭﻧﻼﺣﻆ
= MXY = π −C
2
MYXﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
X
ﺃﻥﹼ . MX = MY = 12 PCﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺘﺒﻨﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﻮﺏ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
XY PC
=
)
sin(2C
2 cos C
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ، XY = PC sin Cﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﹶﻠﺔ.
349 ﻋﺎﻡ 1996
A ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ .ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Xﻭ Yﻭ Zﺑﺄﺎ
ﻣﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BCﻭ ) (CAﻭ ) ( AB
Q R
Z
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺁﻧﻔﺎﹰ
D E Y
P ، XYZﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ XYZﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ = XZY ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ
B X C ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ . XY = XZﺛﹸﻢ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
ﺃﻥﹼ ،CP sin C = BP sin Bﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
CP BP
) (1 =
CA BA
ACPﻣﻊ ] ، [ APﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ Qﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ) (CEﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ABPﻣﻊ ] . [ AP
Rﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ) ( BDﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ
RP BP QP CP
= ﻭ =
RA BA QA CA
QP RP
،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ .Q = Rﻓﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ = ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
QA RA
ù ) (CEﻭ ) ( BDﻭ ) ( APﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻟﻨﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ℕﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ }… . ℕ = { 0,1,ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ
f : ℕ → ℕﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀ ( n, m ) ∈ ℕ 2 , ) f ( m + f (n )) = f ( f ( m )) + f ( n
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℕ → ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ.
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ n = m = 0ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) ، f ( f ( 0 ) ) = f ( f ( 0 ) ) + f ( 0ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( 0 ) = 0
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ) N = f ( ℕﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ . fﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ } N = { 0
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ∀n ∈ ℕ, f ( n ) = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﻞﱞ ﺗﺎﻓﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ
ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ } ، N ≠ { 0ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . a = min ( N \{ 0 } ) ≥ 1
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ n = 0ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ،ﳒﺪ ) ∀m ∈ ℕ, f ( f ( m ) ) = f ( mﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ f ( x ) = xﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ xﻣﻦ . Nﺇﺫﻥ . x = f ( x ) ⇔ x ∈ N
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 350
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ، N × Nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
f ( x + y ) = f ( x + f ( y )) = f ( f ( x )) + f ( y ) = x + y
ﺇﺫﻥ . x + y ∈ Nﺇﺫﻥ N + N = Nﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ
ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 0ﺇﱃ . Nﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . a ℕ ⊂ N
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ، N × Nﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ x > yﻓﻨﻌﺮﻑ . z = x − yﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
)) x + z = y = f (y ) = f ( z + f ( x
= f ( f ( z )) + f ( x ) = f ( z ) + x
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ z = f ( z ) ﺇﺫﻥ ، z ∈ Nﺇﺫﻥ . ( N − N ) ∩ ℕ = N
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ . Nﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ xﻋﻠﻰ aﻧﻜﺘﺐ x = aq + rﻣﻊ r
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 0,1, …, a − 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﻷ ﻥﹼ aq ∈ a ℕ ⊂ Nﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ . r = x − aq ∈ Nﻭﻟﻜﻦ a ﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﰲ . Nﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ
ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . r = 0ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، f ( ℕ ) = a ℕﻭﺃﻥﹼ
f (x ) = x ⇔ a | x
ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ f ( k ) = aλkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 0 ≤ k < aﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﹰﺍ xﻣﻦ . ℕﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ xﻋﻠﻰ aﻧﻜﺘﺐ x = aq + rﻣﻊ rﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} . { 0,1, …, a − 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ) f ( x ) = f ( r + aq ) = f ( r + f (aq
= f ( f ( r ) ) + f ( aq ) = f ( r ) + aq
= aλr + aq
ﺇﺫﻥ
f ( x ) = x − x mod a + aλx mod a
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، f ≠ 0ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ a ﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻭﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ( λk )0≤k <aﻣﻊ
λ0 = 0ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . ∀x ∈ ℕ, f ( x ) = x − x mod a + aλx mod a
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ fﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲢﻘﹼﻘﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
351 ﻋﺎﻡ 1996
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ aﻭ bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 15a + 16b
ﻭ 16a − 15bﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞﹲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ .ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ
ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ 15a + 16b = n 2ﻭ ، 16a − 15b = m 2ﻣﻊ mﻭ nﻣﻦ ∗ . ℕﻭ ﻣﻨﻪ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 15n 2 + 16m 2 = 481aﻭ 16n 2 − 15m 2 = 481b
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﲔ ،ﺛﹸﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ 481ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ) n 4 + m 4 = 481 ( a 2 + b 2
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ . 481 = 13 × 37
ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، 13ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ ، n 4 + m 4 = 0 mod 13ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 13 n
ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) . x = n −1m ∈ ( ℤ/13ℤﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ x 4 = −1 mod 13
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، x 12 = −1 mod 13ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻥﹼ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ Fermatﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﺗﻨ
ﺺ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ x 12 = 1 mod 13ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ . 13ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، 13 | nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ 13 | mﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، 37ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ ، n 4 + m 4 = 0 mod 37ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 37 n
ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) . x = n −1m ∈ ( ℤ/37 ℤﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ x 4 = −1 mod 37
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، x 36 = −1 mod 37ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ Fermatﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ
ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ x 36 = 1 mod 37ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ . 37ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ
ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، 37 | nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ 37 | mﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ nﻭ mﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 481ﻓﺄﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﳌﺮ ﺑﻌﲔ ﻫﻲ ، 4812ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ a = 31 ⋅ 481ﻭ . b = 481ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ
ù ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﻥ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 352
) ( AB ) ( DEﻭ ) ( BC ) ( EF ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﺳﺪ ﺍﺳﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪ ﺑﺎﹰ ، ABCDEFﻓﻴﻪ
ﻭ ) . (CD ) ( FAﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ RAﻭ RCﻭ REﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ
FABﻭ BCDﻭ DEFﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﹰﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
p
≥ RA + RC + RE
2
C B . γ = DEFﻧﻌﻠﻢ
β = BCDﻭ α = FABﻭ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ
β FB
= . 2RAﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ FBﺃ ﻃﻮ ﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻥﹼ
D α A sin α
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ) (CBﻭ ) ( EFﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ
γ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ FA ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﹶﻄﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ
E F
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . (CBﺃﻱ
FB ≥ FA sin β + AB sin γ
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ] [ FBﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﻘﹶﻄﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ] [ DCﻭ ] [ DEﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . (CBﺃﻱ
FB ≥ CD sin β + DE sin γ
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
2FB ≥ ( FA + CD ) sin β + ( AB + DE ) sin γ
ﺇﺫﻥ
sin β sin γ
) 4RA ≥ ( FA + CD ) + ( AB + DE
sin α sin α
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﺃﻥﹼ
sin α sin γ
) 4RC ≥ ( FA + CD ) + (CB + EF
sin β sin β
sin α sin β
) 4RE ≥ ( AB + DE ) + (CB + EF
sin γ sin γ
1
ﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ x + ≥ 2ﳒﺪ
x
4 ( RA + RC + RE ) ≥ 2p
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
353 ﻋﺎﻡ 1996
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ pﻭ qﻭ nﺛﻼ ﺛﺔ ﺃ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮ ﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎ ﻣﺎﹰ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . p + q < nﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎ ﻟﻴﺔ
( x k )0≤k ≤nﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، x 0 = xn = 0ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
∀i ∈ {1, 2, …, n } , } xi − x i −1 ∈ { p, −q
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ iﻭ jﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ i < jﻭ ) ( i, j ) ≠ ( 0, nﻭ . x i = x j
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} A = {i ∈ ℕ n : xi − x i −1 = p
} B = {i ∈ ℕ n : xi − x i −1 = −q
ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) α = card ( Aﻭ ) . β = card ( Bﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
∅ = A ∩ Bﻭ A ∪ B = ℕn
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . α + β = nﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
= 0 = xn − x 0 ) ∑ ( xi − xi −1 ) = ∑ ( xi − xi −1 ) + ∑ ( xi − xi −1
i =1 i ∈A i ∈B
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، αp = βqﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ α > 0 ﻭ . β > 0
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . gcd ( p, q ) = 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) p | ( βqﺃﻥﹼ . p | βﻭﻋﻠﻰ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ mﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ β = pmﻭ . α = qmﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ r = p + qﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ α + β = nﺃﻥﹼ . n = rmﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ p + q < nﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
.m ≥ 2
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ x i = x jﻣﻊ j > iﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ
j
=0 ∑ ) ( x k − x k −1
k =i +1
)] = p card ( A ∩ ]i, j ]) − q card ( B ∩ ]i, j
) )] = p card ( A ∩ ]i, j ]) − q ( j − i − card ( A ∩ ]i, j
) = r card ( A ∩ ]i, j ]) − q ( j − i
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) ) r | (q ( j − iﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، gcd ( r , q ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ) ، r | ( j − iﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ j
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ . i + λrﺇﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻭﺣﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
، j = i + rﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 354
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ( δi )0≤i ≤n −rﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، δi = xi +r − xiﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
i +r
= δi ∑ ) ( x k − x k −1
k =i +1
)] = p card ( A ∩ ]i, i + r ]) − q card ( B ∩ ]i, i + r
) )] = p card ( A ∩ ]i, i + r ]) − q ( r − card ( A ∩ ]i, i + r
) = r ( card ( A ∩ ]i, i + r ]) − q
. ∀i ∈ { 0,1, …, n − r } , ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢδi ∈ r ℤ
.2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﲟﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
} δi +1 − δi = ( x i +1+r − xi +r ) − ( xi +1 − x i ) ∈ {−r , 0, r
.3ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ δi ≠ 0ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ iﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, …, n − rﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ
ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ δi δi +1 > 0ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ iﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, …, n − r − 1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻧﻪ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ
، .1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ δi δi +1 < 0ﳒﺪ δi − δi +1 ≥ 2rﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ .2
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ δi δi +1 > 0ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ iﻣﻦ } ، { 0,1, …, n − r − 1ﺃﻥﹼ
∀i ∈ { 0, …, n − r } , δ0δi > 0
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
∀k ∈ { 0,1, …, m − 1 } , δ0δkr > 0
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، δ0 ( ∑ k = 0 δkr ) > 0 ﺇﺫﻥ ، ∑ k = 0 δkr ≠ 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ،ﻷﻥﹼ
m −1 m −1
m −1 m −1
= ∑ δkr ∑ ( x( k +1 )r − xkr ) = xn − x 0 =0
k =0 k =0
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ i0ﰲ } { 0,1, …,n − rﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، δi0 = 0ﺃﻱ
، x i0 +r = xi0ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
p
= p′ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . gcd ( p, q ) = d > 1ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
d
x p
ﻭ = q ′ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( yk )0≤k ≤nﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، yk = kﻟﻨﺠﺪ ) ( i, jﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ
d d
) ( 0,nﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ i < jﻭ yi = y jﺃﻱ . x i = x jﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔù .
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﺃﻥﹼ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﲔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﺮﻧﺞ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ nﻭ ، mﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍ ﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﻭﺿﻠﻌﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﳘﺎ nﻭ mﻭﳏﻤﻮﻻﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ .ﻟﺘﻜﻦ S1ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ
ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ S 2ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
. f ( n, m ) = S 1 − S 2
.1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = m mod 2ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ) . f ( n, m
1
.2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ) f ( n, m ) ≤ max ( n, mﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ . ℕ∗2
2
. ℕ ∗2 ﺖ Cﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ f ( n, m ) ≤ Cﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( n, mﻣﻦ
.3ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﺎﺑ
C D .1ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﲝﺎﻟﺔ n = 2pﻭ . m = 2qﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) A ( −p, −qﻭ ) B ( p, −qﻭ ) ،C ( −p, q
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) . D ( p, qﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ) O ( 0, 0ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
O
ﺗﻨﺎ ﻇﺮ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ . ABDCﻭ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ DCBﻫﻮ ﺻﻮ ﺭﺓ
ABCﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ Sﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ .Oﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
A 1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ −1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ B
ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮ ﺑﻊ C ijﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ) ( i + 12 , j + 12ﻫﻮ ( −1 )i + jﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮ ﺑﻊ
ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ) S (C ijﻫﻮ ( −1 )−i −1− j −1 = ( −1 )i + jﺃﻱ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻮﻥ C ijﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ) S1 ( ABCﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ
) S1 ( DCBﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . DCBﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ
ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ، ABDCﺃ ﻱ ، 2S1 ( ABC ) = 2pqﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، S1 ( ABC ) = pq ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
S 2 ( ABC ) = 2pq − S1 ( ABC ) = pq
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( 2p, 2q ) = 0
355
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 356
ﻟﻨﺄ ﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 2p + 1ﻭ . m = 2q + 1ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
) A ( −p − 12 , −q − 12ﻭ ) B ( p + 12 , −q − 12ﻭ ) ، C ( −p − 12 , q + 12ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ
) . D ( p + 2 , q + 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﺃﻥﹼ D
1 1
C
) O ( 0, 0ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ . ABDCﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ DCB
ﻫﻮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ABCﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ Sﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ .Oﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ
O
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ 1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ −1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ
ﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ C ijﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ) ( i, jﻫﻮ ( −1 )i + jﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
A ﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ) S (Cﻫﻮ ﻟﻮﻥ Cﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ B
ij ij
ﻣﺴﺎ ﺣﺔ ﺍ ﳉﺰ ﺀ ﺍ ﻷﺳﻮ ﺩ ) S1 ( ABCﻣﻦ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺗﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻱ ﻣﺴﺎ ﺣﺔ ﺍ ﳉﺰ ﺀ ﺍ ﻷﺳﻮﺩ
) S1 ( DCBﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . DCBﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ، ABDCﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ) ، S 2 ( ABCﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
q p
1
= ) S 2 ( ABC ) − S1 ( ABC
2 ∑ ∑ ( −1 )i + j
j =−q i =−p
p q
1 1
=
2 ∑ ( −1 )i ∑ ( −1 )j =
2
i =−p j =−q
1
= ) . f ( 2p + 1, 2q + 1ﺇﺫﻥ
2
.2ﺇﻥﹼ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺗﺒﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ،ﻳﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﳘﹼﻴﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ، n ≠ m mod 2ﺇﺫﹾ ﻟﻴﺲ
ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
n = 2p + 1ﻭ . m = 2q
C ﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻫﻲ ) A ( 0, 0ﻭ ) B ( 2p + 1, 0
ﻭ ) .C ( 0, 2qﻭﺳﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) . B ′ ( 2p, 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) S1 ( ABC ) = S1 ( AB ′C ) + S1 ( B ′BC
) S 2 ( ABC ) = S 2 ( AB ′C ) + S 2 ( B ′BC
A B′ B ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) S1 ( AB ′C ) = S 2 ( AB ′Cﺇﺫﻥ
) S1 ( ABC ) − S 2 ( ABC ) ≤ S1 ( B ′BC ) + S 2 ( B ′BC
357 ﻋﺎﻡ 1997
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ) S1 ( B ′BC ) + S 2 ( B ′BCﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BB ′Cﺃﻱ ، q
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
≤ f ( 2p + 1, 2q ) ≤ q ) max ( 2p + 1, 2q
2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭ mﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) . f ( n, m ) ≤ 12 max ( n, mﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ،
ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ) f ( n, m ) = f ( m, nﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≠ m mod 2
ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) . f ( n, m ) ≤ 12 max ( n, mﻭﻫﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻓﻖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ
ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = m mod 2ﺇﺫﻥ
∀ ( n, m ) ∈ ℕ ∗, ) f ( n, m ) ≤ 12 max ( n, m
.3ﻟﻨﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺪ ﻗﹼﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) . f ( 2p + 1, 2pﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ
C
ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) A ( 0, 0ﻭ ) B ( 2p + 1, 0
ﻭ ) .C ( 0, 2pﻭﺳﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) . B ′ ( 2p, 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
) S1 ( ABC ) = S1 ( AB ′C ) + S1 ( B ′BC
A B′ B
) S 2 ( ABC ) = S 2 ( AB ′C ) + S 2 ( B ′BC
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) S1 ( AB ′C ) = S 2 ( AB ′Cﺇﺫﻥ
) S1 ( ABC ) − S 2 ( ABC ) = S1 ( B ′BC ) − S 2 ( B ′BC
= 2S1 ( B ′BC ) − p
ﻷﻥﹼ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BB ′Cﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . pﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) S1 ( B ′BCﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ( Ak BkC k )0≤k <2 pﺍﻟﱵ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ
2p ( 1 + k ) ( 2p + 1 )( 2p − k )
C k 2p − k , Bk ﻭ ) Ak ( 2p − k , kﻭ , k
2p + 1 2p
ﺇﺫﻥ
2 p −1 2 p −1
1 1
= ) S1 ( B ′BC
2 ∑ = Ak Bk ⋅ AkC k
∑4 p ( 2p + 1 ) k
( 2p − k )2
k =0 =0
2p
1 4p + 1
∑4 p ( 2p + 1 ) k
= = k2
=1 12
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 358
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
4p + 1 1 − 2p
= ) S1 ( ABC ) − S 2 ( ABC = −p
6 6
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2p − 1
= ) f ( 2p + 1, 2p
6
ﺇﺫﻥ
∞lim f ( 2p + 1, 2p ) = +
∞→ p
ù ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﳏﺪﻭﺩﺍﹰ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ : f
f ( n, m ) = nm ∫∫ ( −1 ) nx + ny d x d y
∆
ﻭ } . ∆ = {( x , y ) ∈ ℝ + × ℝ + : x + y ≤ 1
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ABCﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ Aﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ .ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Bﻭ Cﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ
ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺇﱃ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Aﻟﺘﻜﻦ Uﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ،
ﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﳏﻮﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( AUﰲ Vﻭ Wﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ،
ﻭﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( BVﻭ ) (CWﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .Tﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . AU = TB + TC
A ﺣﻞﱞ ﺃ ﻭﻝ .ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﹰﺍ
Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﺇﱃ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABC
θ
.UACﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ θﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
V
T ، ACWﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
Wﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ] [ ACﺃ ﻥﹼ = θ
W
B ABVﻭﻣﻦ
=A .TCBﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ − θ
=C −θ
U
C
.CBTﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
=B +θ−Aﺛﹶﻢ
BTC − θ ) − (B
= π − (C ) = 2A
+θ−A
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BTCﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
BC − θ ) = BC sin ( B )
= TB sin (C +θ+A
)sin(2A
)sin(2A
359 ﻋﺎﻡ 1997
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
BC
= TC sin ( B )
+θ−A
)sin(2A
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
sin ( B ) + sin ( B
+θ+A ) = 2 sin ( B
+θ−A + θ ) cos A
ﺇﺫﻥ
BC + θ ) = AB sin ( B
) (1 = TB + TC sin ( B ) + θ
sin A
sin C
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
= ACB
AUB =C CBUﻭ = CAU =θ
، ABUﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ
=B AUBﻭ + θ
=Cﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABUﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
AB AU
=
sin C sin ( B
) + θ
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﻋﻮﺿﻨﺎ ﰲ ) ( 1ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ .TB + TC = AUﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
A ﺣﻞﱞ ﺛﺎ ﻥ .ﳕﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CWﻟﻴﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﰲ . Xﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ
ﺃﻭﱃ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
X V
T =A
= BAC
BXC
W
B ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
C + ABT
= XBA = XCA
+ BAU
U XBT
+ BAU
= UAC = BAC =A
ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ TXBﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ ، BT = TXﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
. BT + TC = CXﻭﻟﻜﻦ
XBC +B
= XBA = UAC +B = UBC
+B = ABU
ﻓﻄﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻱ . XC = AUﻭﻧﻜﻮﻥ
ù ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ . BT + TC = AU
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 360
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ( x k )1≤k ≤nﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ :
n +1
≤ max xi x1 + x 2 + ⋯ + x n ≤ 1ﻭ
1≤i ≤n 2
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ σﻣﻦ ) ، Snﺃﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، (ℕ n = {1, …, nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
n
n +1
) ∑ kx σ( k ≤
2
k =1
n
= ) . f ( σﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ∑ kx σ(k ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ σﻣﻦ Snﻧﻜﺘﺐ
k =1
n +1
)(H ∀σ ∈ Sn , > ) f (σ
2
∑ k =1 kxk
n
= ) ، f ( idﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ > 0
ﻧﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( −x i )1≤i ≤nﺑﺎﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x i )1≤i ≤nﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ .ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} A = { σ ∈ Sn : f ( σ ) > ( n + 1 )/2
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ . id ∈ A
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ σﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ، Aﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) τi = ( i, i + 1ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ i + 1
ﻭ ، iﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﹼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
= ) f ( σ τi ∑ ) kx σ( k ) + ix σ( i +1 ) + ( i + 1 ) x σ( i
} k ∉ {i ,i +1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) f ( σ τi ) − f ( σ ) = ix σ( i +1 ) + ( i + 1 ) x σ( i ) − ix σ( i ) − ( i + 1 ) x σ( i +1
) = x σ ( i ) − x σ ( i +1
ﺇﺫﻥ
f (σ τi ) − f (σ) = x σ(i ) − x σ(i +1) ≤ n + 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
n +1
f ( σ τi ) ≥ f ( σ ) − ( n + 1 ) > −
2
n +1
> ) ، f ( σ τiﺇﺫﻥ . σ τi ∈ A ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( Hﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ∀i ∈ {1, …, n − 1 } , ∀σ ∈ A, σ τi ∈ A
361 ﻋﺎﻡ 1997
ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ ) ρi = ( 1, iﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ iﻭ 1ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﹼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻣﻦ ، ℕ nﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ρ2 = τ1ﻭ
ρi +1 = τi ρi τiﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 2 ≤ i < n
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﻼﺕ ( τi )1≤i <nﺗﻮﻟﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﻼﺕ ، ( ρi )1<i ≤nﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
)(2 ∀i ∈ { 2, …, n } , ∀σ ∈ A, σ ρi ∈ A
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، i ≠ jﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ λijﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ iﻭ jﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﹼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ، ℕ nﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ λij = ρi ρ j ρiﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ i ≥ 2ﻭ ، j ≥ 2ﰲ ﺣﲔ
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . λ1 j = ρ jﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻮﻟﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﻼﺕ ( ρi )1<i ≤nﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﻼﺕ ، ( λij )1≤i < j ≤nﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
)(3 ∀ ( i, j ) ∈ ℕ n × ℕ n , ∀σ ∈ A, σ λij ∈ A
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﹸﻨﺎﻗﻼﺕ ( λij )1≤i < j ≤nﺗﻮﻟﹼﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﰲ . Snﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ) ، ( 3ﺃﻥﹼ Sn ⊂ Aﺃﻱ
n +1
)(4 ∀σ ∈ Sn , > ) f (σ
2
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ σ0ﻣﻦ Snﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
∀k ∈ ℕ n , σ0 ( k ) = n + 1 − k
ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
n n
= ) f ( σ0 ) + f ( id ∑ kxk + ∑ kxn +1−k
k =1 k =1
n n
= ∑ kxk + ∑ ( n + 1 − k ) xk
k =1 k =1
n n
= ∑ (n + 1 ) xk = ( n + 1 ) ∑ x k
k =1 k =1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ،ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( 4ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
n
) n + 1 < f ( σ0 ) + f ( id ) ≤ ( n + 1 ∑ xk ≤n +1
k =1
) ∑ k =1 kx σ( k
n
ù . ≤ n +1
2 ﻓﺎﻟﻔﺮﺽ ) ( Hﻓﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ،ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ σﻣﻦ Snﳛﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 362
ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ A = ( aij )( i , j )∈ℕ2nﻣﻦ ) Mn ( ℝﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﹼﻘﺖ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ :
ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، ℕ 2n −1 = {1, 2, …, 2n − 1ﺃﻱ
∀ ( i, j ) ∈ ℕ 2n , aij ∈ ℕ 2n −1
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ iﻣﻦ ℕ nﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ iﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ iﻣﻌﺎﹰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ، ℕ 2n−1ﺃﻱ
∀i ∈ ℕ n , {aik : k ∈ ℕ n } ∪ {aki : k ∈ ℕ n } = ℕ 2n −1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
.1ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 1997
.2ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ.
.1ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ nﻛﺎﻥ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ .ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
∀i ∈ ℕ n , } Li = {( i, k ) : k ∈ ℕ n
∀j ∈ ℕ n , } C j = {( k , j ) : k ∈ ℕ n
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ A = ( aij )( i , j )∈ℕ2nﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ، nﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ℕ 2n −1ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . M k = {( i, j ) : aij = kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n n
= ) card ( M k ) ∑ card ( M k ∩ Li ) = ∑ card ( M k ∩ C i
i =1 i =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n
= ) 2 card ( M k )) ∑ ( card ( Mk ∩ Li ) + card ( M k ∩ C i
i =1
n
= ∑ card ( M k ∩ ( Li ∪ C i ) ) + card ( M k ∩ Li ∩ C i )
i =1
↵1
n
) }) = n + ∑ card ( M k ∩ {( i, i
i =1
) } = n + card ( {i ∈ ℕ n : aii = k
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ kﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ iﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ iﻣﻌﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . card ( M k ∩ ( Li ∪ C i ) ) = 1
363 ﻋﺎﻡ 1997
ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ( {i ∈ ℕ n : aii = k } )1≤k ≤2n −1 ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ℕ nﺃﻥﹼ
2n −1
≥ ) n = card ( ℕ n ∑ card ( {i ∈ ℕ n : aii = k } ) ≥ 2n − 1
k =1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ) ،ﺇﻻﹼ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻓﻬﺔ . (n = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ k0ﲢﻘﹼﻖ
∅ = } {i ∈ ℕ n : aii = k 0
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) n = 2 card ( M k0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ .ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 1997
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ . 1997
) A( pﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ 2pﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ .2ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 2pﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﲨﻴﻌﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 1ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ
1 2 4 6
3 1 7 4
1 2
) A( 2 = A( 1 ) = ﻭ
5 6 1 2 3 1
7 5 3 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ p = 1ﺃﻭ . p = 2ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﻧﺎ ) ، A( pﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ I pﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ، 2pﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ J pﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ 2pﺍﻟﱵ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﳍﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
) A( p +1ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ 2p +1ﻛﺘﻠﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
) A( p A( p ) − I p + 2p +1J p
) ( p +1
A )= (p p +1 )(p
A + 2 Jp A
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ) Li ( Mﻭ ) C j ( Mﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ iﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ jﻣﻦ
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ، Mﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ i ≤ 2pﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
} Li ( A( p +1 ) ) = Li ( A( p ) ) ∪ ( 2p +1 + Li ( A( p −1 ) )\{1 } ) ∪ { 2p +1
) ) ) C i ( A( p +1 ) ) = C i ( A( p ) ) ∪ ( 2p +1 + C i ( A( p −1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
Li ( A( p +1 ) ) ∪ C i ( A( p +1 ) ) = ℕ 2p +1 ∪ ( 2p +1 + ℕ 2p +1 −1 ) = ℕ 2p +2 −1
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﹸﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ Li ( A( p +1 ) ) ∪ C i ( A( p +1 ) ) = ℕ 2p +2 −1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 2p < i ≤ 2p +1
ù ﻓﺎﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) A( p +1ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 364
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
2
a b = ba
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ aﻭ bﻭ nﻭ mﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ . a n = bmﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
) ، δ = gcd ( m, nﻭﻛﺘﺒﻨﺎ m = δµﻭ ، n = δνﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ cﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
a = c µﻭ .b = c ν
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ
= b ∏ pβ p
= aﻭ ∏ pα p
p∈P p∈P
ﻣﻊ Pﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ( αp )p ∈Pﻭ ( βp )p ∈ Pﲨﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺘﲔ
ﻣﻦ . ℕﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∏ pn α p
= ∏ pm β p
p∈P p ∈P
ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ، δﺃﻥﹼ . ∀p ∈ P, ναp = µβpﻭﻟﻜﻦ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ gcd ( ν, µ ) = 1ﺃﻥﹼ βp = νλpﻭ αp = µλpﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﻷﻭﱄ . pﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ c = ∏ p ∈ P pλpﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ a = c µﻭ . b = c ν
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺯﻭﺟﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ) (a, bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . ab = baﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ
2
) ، δ = gcd ( a, b 2ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ xﻭ yﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺘﲔ a = δxﻭ . b 2 = δyﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﻋﺪﺩ c ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ a = c xﻭ . b = cyﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) δ = gcd ( c 2y , c x ) = min ( c 2y , c x ) = min ( b 2, a
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . δ = aﺇﺫﻥ x = 1ﻭ . c = aﻭﻣﻨﻪ
b 2 = δy = ayﻭ b = c y = a y
ﺇﺫﻥ . a 2y −1 = yﻭﻟﻜﻦ
a ≥ 2 ⇒ a 2y −1 ≥ 22y −1 ≥ 2y > y
) ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ 2ℓ−1 ≥ ℓﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . ( ℓ ≥ 1ﻓﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ a 2y −1 = yﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . a = y = 1ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . b = 1ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳊﻞ ) . (a, b ) = ( 1,1
365 ﻋﺎﻡ 1997
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . δ = b 2 < aﺇﺫﻥ y = 1ﻭ . c = bﻭﻣﻨﻪ
a = b xﻭ a = b 2x
b x −2 ﺇﺫﻥ b x −2 = xﻭ x ≥ 2ﻷﻥﹼ . b 2 < a = b 2xﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ = x ≥ 2
b x −2 ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . x ≥ 3ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ xﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ bﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ = x
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ b ≥ 3ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
x ≥ 5 ⇒ b x −2 ≥ ( 1 + 2 )x −2 ≥ 1 + 8 ⋅ 2x −5 ≥ 1 + 8 ( x − 4 ) > x
ﺇﺫﻥ } . x ∈ { 3, 4
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، x = 3ﳒﺪ b = 3ﻭ ، a = 33ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳊﻞ ) . (a, b ) = ( 27, 3
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، x = 4ﳒﺪ b = 2ﻭ ، a = 24ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ) . (a, b ) = ( 16, 2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
{ ( a, b ) ∈ ℕ ∗ × ℕ ∗ : a b }) = ba } = {( 1,1 ) , ( 16, 2 ) , ( 27, 3
2
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) f ( nﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﻮﻯ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . 2ﺇﺫ ﻧﻌﺘﱪ ﲤﺜﻴﻠﲔ ﳜﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ
ﺍﻤﻮﻉ ﲤﺜﻴﻼﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ .ﻓﻤﺜﻼﹰ f ( 4 ) = 4ﻷﻥﹼ
4 = 22 = 21 + 21 = 21 + 20 + 20 = 20 + 20 + 20 + 20
. 2n ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≥ 3ﺃﻥﹼ
2 2
/4 /2
≤ f ( 2n ) ≤ 2n
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻟﺘﻜﻦ Anﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ
ﻗﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، 2ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 1ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Bnﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n
ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . 20 = 1ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ
.C n = An ∪ Bnﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ
) f ( n ) = card (C n ) = card ( An ) + card ( Bn
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، 1ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ∅ = . Anﻭﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
x ֏ x − 1ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﺑﲔ Bnﻭ .C n −1ﺇﺫﻥ ) . 2 n ⇒ f ( n ) = f ( n − 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 366
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ .ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ x ֏ x − 1ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﺑﲔ Bnﻭ ،C n −1
ﻭﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ x ֏ x2ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﺑﲔ Anﻭ .C n /2ﺇﺫﻥ
) f ( n ) = f ( n /2 ) + f ( n − 1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ : f
)f (n − 1 : 2 n
f (n ) = n
f
2 ) (
+ f (n − 1 ) : 2 | n
ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ f ( 1 ) = 1ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ) f ( nﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗. ℕ
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≥ 1ﻭ 1 ≤ k ≤ 2n −1ﺃﻥﹼ
) ) f ( 2n + 2k ) = f ( 2n −1 + k ) + f ( 2n + 2 ( k − 1
ﺇﺫﻥ
n −1
2
) ∑ f ( 2n −1 + k ) = f ( 2n + 2n ) − f ( 2n ) = f ( 2n +1 ) − f ( 2n
k =1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
) (1 f (2 n +1
) − f (2n
=) ∑ )f (j
2n −1 < j ≤2n
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
)(2 f ( 2n +1 ) = 1 + ∑ )f (j
1≤ j ≤2n
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
)(3 ) f ( 2n +1 ) ≤ f ( 2n ) + 2n −1 f ( 2n ) = 2n f ( 2n
ﺇﺫﻥ
f ( 2n ) ≤ f ( 2 ) 21+ 2+⋯+( n −1 ) = 21+n
( n −1 )/2
2
f ( 2n ) ≤ 2nﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n ≥ 2 /2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 0 ≤ j < 2n −1ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
) Aj = f ( 2n −1 + 1 + j ) + f ( 2n −1 − j
367 ﻋﺎﻡ 1997
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ،
A2 j −1 ) = f ( 2n −1 + 2 j ) + f ( 2n −1 + 1 − 2 j
) = f ( 2n −1 + 2 j ) + f ( 2n −1 − 2 j
) A2 j = f ( 2n −1 + 1 + 2 j ) + f ( 2n −1 − 2 j
) = f ( 2n −1 + 2 j ) + f ( 2n −1 − 2 j
) A2 j +1 = f ( 2n −1 + 2 j + 2 ) + f ( 2n −1 − 2 j − 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ، A2 j = A2 j −1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
) A2 j +1 − A2 j = f ( 2n −1 + 2 j + 2 ) − f ( 2n −1 + 2 j
) ) − ( f ( 2n −1 − 2 j ) − f ( 2n −1 − 2 j − 2
) = f ( 2n −2 + j + 1 ) − f ( 2n −2 − j
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ،ﺇﺫﻥ . A2 j +1 − A2 j ≥ 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
( Aj )0≤ j <2n −1ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ
∀j ∈ { 0,1, …, 2n −1 − 1 } , ) Aj ≥ A0 = 2 f ( 2n −1
ﺇﺫﻥ
2n 2n −1 −1
∑ = )∑f (j ) Aj ≥ 2n f ( 2n −1
j =1 j =0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( 2ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ( 2n +1 ) ≥ 1 + 2n f ( 2n −1 ) > 2n f ( 2n −1
ﻓﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k ≥ 1ﳒﺪ
f ( 22k ) ≥ 22k −1 f ( 22( k −1 ) ) ≥ 2( 2k −1 )+⋯+ 3 f ( 2 ) = 2k
2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k ≥ 1ﳒﺪ
f ( 22k +1 ) ≥ 22k f ( 22k −1 ) ≥ 22( k +⋯+1 ) f ( 2 ) = 2k +k +1
2
2
. f ( 2n ) > 2nﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. /4
ﻭﻫﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ ﺗﺜﺒﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
ù
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 368
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ، ABCDﻗﻄﺮﺍﻩ ) ( ACﻭ ) ( BDﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺍﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺎﺑﻼﻥ
] [ AB ] [ ABﻭ ] [CDﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﳏﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺘﲔ
ﻭ ] ، [CDﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ . ABCDﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﲔ ABPﻭ CDPﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺘﲔ.
B
ﻟﻨﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ،ﳏﻮﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﳏﻤﻮﻻﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﺒﺪﺅﻫﺎ Oﻫﻮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻌﻬﻤﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻦ
P ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Dﻫﻲ ) ( a, 0
ﻭ ) ( 0,bﻭ ) ( −c, 0ﻭ ) ( 0, −dﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﺮ ﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻊ aﻭ bﻭ c
C O
A
ﻭ dﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ.
D
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ) ( X P ,YPﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Pﻣﻦ PA = PBﻭ PC = PDﳒﺪ
( X P − a )2 + YP2 = X P2 + (YP − b )2
( X P + c )2 + YP2 = X P2 + (YP + d )2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2aX P − 2bYP + b 2 − a 2 = 0
2cX P − 2dYP + c 2 − d 2 = 0
ﺇﺫﻥ
a 2c + c 2a − b 2c − d 2a a 2d + c 2b − b 2d − d 2b
= Yp = XPﻭ
) 2 ( da − bc ) 2 ( da − cb
) ( AB ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ) ) δ ( P, ( ABﺃﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ Pﻋﻦ ) ، ( ABﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
x y
، +ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﻲ = 1
a b
1 X P YP
= ) ) δ ( P, ( AB −2 −2 a
+ −1
a +b b
369
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 370
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Pﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ Oﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ) ، ( ABﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
= ) ) δ ( P, ( AB ) ( ab − bX P − aYP
a + b2
2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABPﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
ab − bX P − aYP
= ) A ( ABP
2
ﻭﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﱵ X Pﻭ YPﳒﺪ
a 2bd + b 3d − ab 2c − a 3c + a 2d 2 + b 2d 2 − a 2c 2 − b 2c 2
= ) A ( ABP
) 4 ( da − bc
ﺃﻭ
) (a 2 + b 2 )(bd − ac + d 2 − c 2
) (1 = ) A ( ABP
) 4 ( da − bc
ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ) ) δ ( P, (CDﺃﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ Pﻋﻦ ) ، (CDﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
x y
، +ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (CDﻫﻲ = −1
c d
1 X P YP
= ) ) δ ( P, (CD + +1
c −2 + d −2 c d
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Pﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ Oﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ) ، (CDﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
= ) ) δ ( P, (CD ) ( cd + dX P + cYP
c + d2
2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ CDPﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
cd + dX P + cYP
= ) A (CDP
2
ﻭﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﱵ X Pﻭ YPﳒﺪ
cd 2a + c 3a − bc 2d − bd 3 + a 2d 2 + a 2c 2 − b 2d 2 − b 2c 2
= ) A (CDP
) 4 ( da − bc
ﺃﻭ
) ( c 2 + d 2 )( ca − bd + a 2 − b 2
)(2 = ) A (CDP
) 4 ( da − bc
371 ﻋﺎﻡ 1998
ﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﳒﺪ
) ( ca − bd ) ( ( a + c )2 + ( b + d )2
= ) A (CDP ) − A ( ABP
) 4 ( da − bc
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
A (CDP ) = A ( ABP ) ⇔ ca = bd
ﺃﻭ
A (CDP ) = A ( ABP ) ⇔ OC ⋅ OA = OB ⋅ OD
ù ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪ ﺩ a ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ،ﻭﻋﺪ ﺩ b ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ،ﻭ bﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺣﻜﻢﹴ ﻛﻞﱠ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖﹴ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ 1ﺃﻭ . 0ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ kﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
k b −1
≥ . ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺣﻜﻤﲔ ﻋﻨﺪ kﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
a 2b
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Jﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Cﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ،ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ
card ( C ) = aﻭ card ( J ) = b
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻜﻢﹴ jﻣﻦ Jﻭﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖﹴ cﻣﻦ ، Cﻧﻜﺘﺐ ) j (cﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ } { 0,1ﺍﻟﱵ
ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ jﻟﻠﻤﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ . cﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) J ( 2ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ . Jﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Aﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
}) A = {( { j , j ′ } , c ) ∈ J ( 2 ) × C : j ( c ) = j ′ ( c
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺯﻭﺝﹴ } { j , j ′ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ،ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
}A{ j , j ′ } ) = {c ∈ C : j ( c ) = j ′ ( c
ﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳛﺼﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﻤﲔ jﻭ . j ′ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖﹴ cﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
}) Ac = { { j , j ′ } ∈ J ( 2 ) : j ( c ) = j ′ ( c
ﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ cﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ
) card ( Aﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
) (1 = ) card ( A ∑ = ) } card ( A{ j , j ′ ) ∑ card ( Ac
) { j , j ′ }∈J ( 2 c ∈C
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 372
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀ { j , j ′ } ∈ J ( 2 ), card ( A{ j , j ′ } ) ≤ k
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
) b (b − 1
)(2 card ( A ) ≤ k card ( J ( 2 ) ) = k
2
ﻟﻨﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Acﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖﹴ . cﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻄﻮﺍ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ cﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ، 1ﺃﻱ ) } ، x = card ( { j ∈ J : j ( c ) = 1ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ b − xﻋﺪ ﺩ
ﺍﳊﻜﹼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻄﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ cﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ . 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ Acﻫﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} ، { { j, j ′ } ∈ J ( 2 ) : j (c ) = j ′ (c ) = 1ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) ، x ( x2−1
ﻭ } { { j, j ′ } ∈ J ( 2 ) : j ( c ) = j ′ ( c ) = 0ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ) ، (b −x )(2b −x −1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
= ) card ( Ac ) ) ( x ( x − 1 ) + ( b − x )( b − x − 1
2
) b (b − 1
= x 2 − bx +
2
2
b ) b ( b − 2 ) b (b − 2
(
= x−
2 )
+
4
≥
4
ﺃﻭ
( b − 1 )2 1
≥ ) card ( Ac −
4 4
≥ ) card ( Acﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ( b −1 )2
4 ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ bﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ، ،ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ − 14
( b − 1 )2
≥ ) card ( Ac
4
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
( b − 1 )2 a ( b − 1 )2
)(3 ) card ( A ) ≥ card ( C =
4 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺘﲔ ) ( 2ﻭ ) ( 3ﳒﺪ
b ( b − 1 ) a ( b − 1 )2
k ≥
2 4
k b −1
ù ≥ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ﺃﻭ
a 2b
373 ﻋﺎﻡ 1998
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، nﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) d ( nﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ n
ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ 1ﻭ . nﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} ) K = { k ∈ ℕ∗ : ∃n ∈ ℕ*, d (n 2 ) = kd ( n
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Pﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﲨﺎﻋﺔ ( αp ( n ) )p ∈Pﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ،
) ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ∞ (card ( { p ∈ P : αp ( n ) > 0 } ) < +ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) p(n
= n ∏ pα
p∈P
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﺆ
) ) ( m | n ) ⇔ ( ∀p ∈ P , αp ( m ) ≤ αp ( n
ﺃﻥﹼ
= ) } d ( n ) = card ( {m ∈ ℕ∗ : m | n ∏ ( 1 + αp ( )) n
p∈P
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
) d (n 2 1 + 2α n )
(
) d (n
= ∏ 1 + αpp n ( )
p∈P
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
Kﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
2
= d (n ) : n ∈ ℕ*
K
) d ( n
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹴ ﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ Pﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ℕ
ﺃﻥﹼ
) = ∏ 1 + 2αi : ( αi (ℕ)
K i ∈ℕ ∈ ℕ
i ∈ℕ 1 + αi
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ) ℕ( ℕﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺎﹰ.
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ∩ ℕ
.K = K
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 374
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ 1ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ، Kﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ ( αi )i ∈ℕﻣﻊ . ∀i ∈ ℕ, αi = 0
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ kﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ، Kﻭﺟﹺﺪﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ) ( αi )i ∈ ℕ ∈ ℕ( ℕﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) ∏ ( 1 + 2αi ) = k ⋅ ∏ ( 1 + αi
i ∈ℕ i ∈ℕ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ kﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ Oﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ
ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ . K ⊂ O
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ . K ≠ Oﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ K ⊂ Oﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
O \Kﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) . q = min ( O \Kﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ qﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3ﻭﺇﺫﺍ
ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ }) m = max { j ∈ ℕ∗ : 2 j | ( q + 1ﻛﺎﻥ ، m ≥ 1ﻭﻛﺎﻥ q + 1 = 2m k
ﻣﻊ kﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ، qﻓﻬﻮ ﻋﻨﺼ ﺮ ﻣﻦ . Kﳓﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
q = 2m k − 1ﻭ k ∈ Kﻭ q ∉ K
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ kﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ، Kﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ، νﻭﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( αi )i ∈ℕﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ
ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ، νﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
ν −1
1 + 2α
= k ∏ 1 + αii
i =0
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( βi )i ∈ℕﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ βi = αiﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 0 ≤ i < νﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
βi = 2i −ν λﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ν ≤ i < m + νﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ λﻻﺣﻘﺎﹰ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
m + ν −1 ν −1 m + ν −1
1 + 2βi 1 + 2α 1 + 2i +1−ν λ 1 + 2m λ
∏
1 + β
= ⋅ ∏ 1 + αii ∏ 1 + 2i −ν λ = k ⋅ 1 + λ
i =0 i i =0 i =ν
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
m
1+2 λ
⋅k ) = q ⇔ k ( 1 + 2m λ ) = ( 1 + λ ) ( 2m k − 1
1+λ
⇔ λ = ( 2m − 1 ) k − 1 = q − k
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ ، λ = q − kﻛﺎﻥ
m + ν −1
1 + 2βi
= q ∏
1 + βi
∈K
i =0
ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . qﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ = ، O \Kﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . K = O ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ù Kﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ.
375 ﻋﺎﻡ 1998
ﻋﻴﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃ ﺯ ﻭ ﺍ ﺝ ﺍ ﻷ ﻋﺪ ﺍ ﺩ ﺍ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍ ﳌﻮ ﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎ ﻣﺎﹰ ) (a, bﺍ ﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺴِﻢ ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ab 2 + b + 7ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ. a 2b + a + b
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﺟﺎﹰ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕ∗ × ℕﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n = ab 2 + b + 7 ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ
. m = a 2b + a + bﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ، an − bm = 7a − b 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
. ℓ = 7a − b 2ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . ℓ > 0ﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ b ≥ 3ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، n ≥ 9a + 10 > ℓﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ n ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ℓﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . b ≥ 3
ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، b = 2ﻓﻠﺪﻳﻨﺎ n = 4a + 9ﻭ ، ℓ = 7a − 4ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ n | ℓﻣﻊ
ℓ < 2nﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ℓ = nﺃﻭ ، 3a = 13ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
ﻭ ﺃ ﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ ، b = 1ﻓﻠﺪ ﻳﻨﺎ n = a + 8ﻭ . ℓ = 7a − 1 = 7n − 57
ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ n | ℓﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ، n | 57ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ n ≥ 9ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ } ، n ∈ {19, 57
ﺃﻭ } ، a ∈ {11, 49ﻭﻣﻨﻪ }) . (a, b ) ∈ {( 11,1 ), ( 49,1
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . ℓ < 0ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
n > n + ℓ = ( a − 1 )b 2 + b + 7 ( a + 1 ) > 0
ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ. ℓ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . ℓ = 0ﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ 7a = b 2ﺃﻥﹼ b = 7βﻭ ، a = 7β 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∈ ) ( a, b } ∗ {( 7 β 2 , 7 β ) : β ∈ ℕ
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} ∗{( 11,1 ) , ( 49,1 )} ∪ {( 7β 2, 7 β ) : β ∈ ℕ
ù ﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝﹲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
] [ BC ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Iﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﲤﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ
ﻭ ] [CAﻭ ] [ ABﰲ Kﻭ Lﻭ Mﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ Bﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ
) ( KMﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( LMﻭ ) ( LKﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Rﻭ Sﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
RISﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 376
A
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ IK = IMﻭ BK = BMﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
) ( BIﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ KMﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
L
M
) . ( KM ) ⊥ ( BIﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) ، ( RS ) ( KMﺇﺫﻥ
R I
ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) . ( RS ) ⊥ ( BI
B K C ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
IS 2 = BS 2 + BI 2
S
IR 2 = BR 2 + BI 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
IS 2 + IR 2 − RS 2 = BS 2 + BI 2 + BS 2 + BI 2 − ( BS + BR )2
) = 2 ( BI 2 − BS ⋅ BR
، AMLﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ
= AIL
= 1 (π − A
2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ AMILﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ )
، RBMﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
= 1 (π − B
2
BMRﻭ )
= 1(π − A
2
ﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ RBMﺃ ﻥﹼ )
، MRBﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
= 1 (π −C
2
= )
BM BR
=
) /2
cos(C ) /2
cos(A
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، SBKﺃﻥﹼ
BK BS
=
)cos(A/2 ) /2
cos(C
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ BM = BKﺃﻥﹼ
BR ⋅ BS = BM ⋅ BK = BK 2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
IS 2 + IR 2 − RS 2 = 2 ( BI 2 − BK 2 ) = 2 IK 2
ﺇﺫﻥ
2 2 2 2
) = IS + IR − RS = IK
cos ( RIS >0
2IS ⋅ IR IS ⋅ IR
ù RISﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻓﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
377 ﻋﺎﻡ 1998
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ∗ f : ℕ∗ → ℕﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ∗ℕ
ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ) ( Eﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
∀ ( t , s ) ∈ ℕ ∗ × ℕ∗ , f ( t 2 f ( s ) ) = s ( f ( t ) )2
ﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) . f ( 1998
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﺎ ∗ f : ℕ∗ → ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ، ( Eﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) . a = f ( 1
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ t = 1ﰲ ) ( Eﳒﺪ . ∀s ∈ ℕ∗, f f ( s ) = a 2s
. ∀t ∈ ℕ∗, ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺑﻮﺿﻊ s = 1ﰲ ) ( Eﳒﺪ f (at 2 ) = ( f ( t ) )2
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ ∗ . ℕﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
( af ( x ) )2 ) = a 2 ( f ( x ) )2 = a 2 f ( ax 2
) ) = f f ( f (ax 2 ) ) = f ( f f ( ax 2
= f ( a ( ax )2 ) = ( f ( ax ) )2
. ∀x ∈ ℕ∗, ﺇﺫﻥf ( ax ) = af ( x ) ،
ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
) ∀t ∈ ℕ∗, ( f ( t ) )n +1 = a n f ( t n +1
.ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pn−1 ﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ P0ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ .ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ P1ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ . ℕﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
( f ( t ) )n + 2 = a n −1 f ( t n ) ( f ( t ) )2 = f ( a n −1t n ) ( f ( t ) )2
) (1
) = f ( t 2 f f ( a n −1t n ) ) = f ( t 2a 2a n −1t n
) (E
) = f ( a n +1t n + 2 ) = a n +1 f ( t n + 2
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﰲ ) ، ( 1ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pn +1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ
Pnﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . n
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ aﻭ bﳘﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ a n | bn +1ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
. nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ bﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . aﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ a = ∏p ∈ P p αpﻭ ، b = ∏p ∈ P p βpﺇ ﺫﹾ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ Pﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺘﲔ ( αp )p ∈Pﻭ ( βp )p ∈ Pﻣﻨﺘﻪ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 378
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ، ∀n ∈ ℕ, a n | bn +1ﺃﻥﹼ
∀p ∈ P, ∀n ∈ ℕ, n αp ≤ ( n + 1 ) βp
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ،ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ pﻣﻦ Pﻛﺎﻥ . ∀n ∈ ℕ∗, αp ≤ ( 1 + n1 ) βpﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ n
ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . αp ≤ βpﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . a | b
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀t ∈ ℕ∗, ) a | f (t
1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ∗ g : ℕ∗ → ℕﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) . ∀t ∈ ℕ∗, g ( t ) = f ( tﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ
a
ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( s, tﻣﻦ ∗ ℕ∗ × ℕﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
a 2s ( g ( t ) )2 = s ( f ( t ) )2 )) = f ( t 2f ( s
) ) = f ( at 2g ( s ) ) = af ( t 2g ( s ) ) = a 2g ( t 2g ( s
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ gﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ، ( Eﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . g ( 1 ) = 1
ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﻋﻦ fﻋﻠﻰ gﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀t ∈ ℕ∗, g ( t 2 ) = ( g ( t ) )2 ∀s ∈ ℕ∗, g g ( s ) = sﻭ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ∗ ℕ∗ × ℕﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
) ) ( g ( x ) g ( y ) )2 = g ( x 2 ) ( g ( y ) )2 = g ( y 2g g ( x 2
= g ( y 2x 2 ) = g ( ( xy )2 ) = ( g ( xy ) )2
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℕ ∗, ) g ( xy ) = g ( x ) g ( y
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ pﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) g ( pﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻱ . g ( P ) ⊂ Pﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ،
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ g ( p ) = αβﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) ، p = g ( α ) g ( βﻓﺈ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
، g ( α ) = 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، α = g ( g ( α ) ) = g ( 1 ) = 1 ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، g ( β ) = 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، β = 1ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ g ( p ) ∈ Pﻷﻥﹼ . g ( p ) ≠ 1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮ ﻥ ، g ( P ) ⊂ Pﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﳋﺎﺻﺔ ∀s ∈ ℕ∗, g g ( s ) = sﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
) p ֏ g ( pﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ . P
379 ﻋﺎﻡ 1998
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ) p = g ( 2ﻭ ) q = g ( 3ﻭ ) . r = g ( 37ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ 1998 = 2 × 33 × 37ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
f ( 1998 ) = ag ( 1998 ) = ag ( 2 ) ( g ( 3 ) )3 g ( 37 ) = apq 3r
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺀ pqrﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﻞﹼ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ
ﺼﻐﺮ ﺃﻱ ، pqr ≥ 2 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 5 = 30ﻭﻷﻥﹼ q ≥ 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﰲ ﺍﻟ
pq 3r ≥ 4 × 30 = 120
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ، a ≥ 1ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ . f ( 1998 ) ≥ 120
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ∗ g : ℕ∗ → ℕﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
g ( 2a ⋅ 3b ⋅ 5c ⋅ 37d ⋅ ∏p ∈Q p αp ) = 3a ⋅ 2b ⋅ 37c ⋅ 5d ⋅ ∏p ∈Q p αp
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ } .Q = P \{ 2, 3, 5, 37ﺗﻴﻘﹼﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ gﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ( Eﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
. g ( 1998 ) = 120ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 120ﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) . ( E
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 380
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Pﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﺍﳌﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ،
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ Pﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . P
ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Pﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ nﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 3ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ
ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Gﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . Pﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∑ GM = 0
M ∈P
ﺇﻥﹼ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ، Pﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، Pﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .G
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ M 0ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ . Pﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ . R = GM 0ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Gﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ MM 0ﻣﻊ Mﻣﻦ Pﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . ∀M ∈ P, GM = Rﻓﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
Pﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Gﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . R
ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ ) ( A0 , A1, …, An −1ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، Pﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ C
ﺑﺎﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ) ،ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ( ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ Aiﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Ai mod nﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . i ≥ n
C Ai +1
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aiﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ Pﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﹸﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
Ai ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ) ، (GAi −1,GAi +1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ Ai′ﻧﻈﲑﺓ Ai
G
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ Ai −1, Ai +1ﺇﺫﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
Ai −1
Ai −2
. Ai = Ai′ﺃﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ Aiﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
] . [ Ai −1, Ai +1ﻭﻣﻨﻪ Ai −1Ai = Ai Ai +1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
1
i ) = (AG
(Ai Ai +1, AG ) i , Ai Ai −1 ) = (Ai Ai +1, Ai Ai −1
2
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Gﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ] ، [ Ai −1Aiﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
(Ai −1Ai , Ai −1G ,) = (AG ) i , Ai Ai −1
381
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 382
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Ai −1ﺑﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ Aiﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
) (Ai −1Ai , Ai −1G ) = (Ai −1Ai , Ai −1Ai −2
2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ،ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ، iﻛﺎﻥ
Ai −1Ai = Ai Ai +1ﻭ ) (Ai −1Ai , Ai −1Ai −2 ) = (Ai Ai +1, Ai Ai −1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ A0, A1, …, An −1ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﺫﻭ nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ .ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Pﻫﻲ
ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊﹴ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢﹴ .ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊﹴ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻮﺹ
ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Pﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻫﺎ
ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ، Pﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﹴ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ Pﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊﹴ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢù .
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 1ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ C ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
n n 4
∀ ( x 1, x 2 , … , x n ) ∈ ( ℝ + ) , ∑ ( xix j x i2 + x 2j
) ≤ C ∑ xk
1≤i < j ≤n k =1
ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﱴ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ.
ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ (a + b )2 ≥ 4abﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
n 4 n 2 n
∑ x k = ∑ x k2 + 2 ∑ xi x j ≥ 8 ∑ x k2 ⋅ ∑ x i x j
k =1 k =1 1≤i < j ≤n
k =1 1≤i < j ≤n
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n 4 n
) ∑ x k ≥ 8 ∑ xi x j ∑ x k2 ≥ 8 ∑ xi x j ( x i2 + x j2
k =1 k =1
1≤i < j ≤n 1≤i < j ≤n
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ x pﻭ xqﻭ x rﻣﻊ ، p < q < rﻛﺎﻥ
n 2
) x pxq ∑ xk ≥ x pxq ( x p2 + xq2 + xr2 ) > x pxq ( x p2 + xq2
k =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
4
n
) ∑ x k > 8 ∑ xi x j ( xi2 + x j2
k =1
1≤i < j ≤n
383 ﻋﺎﻡ 1999
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x pﻭ xqﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ x k = 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﻋﻦ pﻭ ، qﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
n 2 2 n 2
∑ x k + 2 ∑ x i x j − 8 ∑ x k ⋅ ∑ x i x j = ( x p − xq )4
k =1 1≤i < j ≤n
k =1 1≤i < j ≤n
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
n 4
) ∑ x k > 8 ∑ xi x j ( xi2 + x j2
k =1 1≤i < j ≤n
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
1
n
4
∑ ( xix j xi2 + x j2 ) ≤ ∑ xk
1≤i < j ≤n 8 k =1
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( x1, …, xnﻣﻦ ، ( ℝ + )nﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
} ( x1, …, x n ) ∈ { λ ( ei + e j ) : 1 ≤ i < j ≤ n, λ ∈ ℝ +
ù ﺇﺫ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ( ei )1≤i ≤nﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﰲ . ℝn
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺞ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻫﺎ n × nﻭ nﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ .ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﺇ ﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻛﺎ ﺑﻀﻠﻊ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ .ﻧﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮ ﺏﹴ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻣﺮﺑﻊﹴ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﳎﺎﻭﺭﺍﹰ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍ ﳌﹸﻌﻠﹼﻤﺔ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺳﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ) ( i, jﻣﻦ ، ℕ n × ℕ nﻭﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﺮﻧﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ) ( 1,1ﺃﺑﻴﺾ .ﻭﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ (Wk )1≤k ≤nﺇﱃ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ
⋯ 1 2 3 4 5 ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
1
2 } Wk = {( i, j ) ∈ ℕ n × ℕ n : i + j = 2k
3
4 ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ ، n = 2mﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ : 1 ≤ k ≤ m
5
⋮ }} Wk = {( i, 2k − i ) : i ∈ {1, 2, …, 2k
ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، m < k ≤ 2mﻓﻨﺠﺪ
} } Wk = {( i, 2k − i ) : i ∈ { 2 ( k − m ) , …, 2m
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 384
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻣﺄﺧﻮﺫﹲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍﹰ ﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .ﺳﻨﺴﻌﻰ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺇﱃ
ﺃﺧﺬ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ.
Ø Ø ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻥ
∞ ∞
Ø ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ
∞
ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ W1ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﹰ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﻥ .ﻭﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ
Ø
∞
ﻧﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ W2ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ
ﻻ ﻧﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻞ ﻧﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
ﺃﻱ ،W3ﻭﻧﻀﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻟﻨﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ
ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ.
ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻓﻼ ﻧﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﹼﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ
، (W2k )1≤k ≤mﺑﻞ ﻧﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﹼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ
، (W2k −1 )1≤k ≤mﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﳏﻴﻂ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ.
ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ W2k −1ﻓﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
2k − 1ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ m2+1ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) 2 ( m − k + 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
. m2+1 < k ≤ mﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ،
ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ، wﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ
= w ∑ ( 2k − 1 ) + ∑ )2 (m − k + 1
1≤k ≤( m +1 )/2 ( m +1 )/2<k ≤m
m
)m (m + 1
= ∑ k+ ∑ = k ∑k =
2
1≤k ≤m 1≤k ≤m k =1
kﻓﺮﺩﻱ kﺯﻭﺟﻲ
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻷﺧﺬ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ) m ( m +1
2 ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ.
385 ﻋﺎﻡ 1999
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺪﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﹶﺧﺬﹸ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ) m ( m + 1ﻋﻼﻣﺔ.
ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
n =4 n =6 n =8
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ) m ( m + 1ﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ
ﺪﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺎ .ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ) m( m2+1ﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺪﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ mﻧﻌﺮﻑ Bkﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺭ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ .W2k −1ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻳﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) ، 2 card ( Bk ) ≥ card (W2k −1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
card (W2k −1 )
card ( Bk ) ≥
2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Bk )1≤k ≤mﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﹼﻲ bﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
m m
card (W2k −1 )
= b ≥ ) ∑ card ( Bk ∑ 2
k =1 k =1
) m (m + 1
≥ ∑ ( 2k − 1 ) + ∑ = )2 (m − k + 1
2
1≤k ≤ m 2+1 m +1
2 <k ≤m
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ ﺪﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﲨﻴﻊ
ù ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، m ( m + 1 ) = n ( n + 2 )/4ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 386
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) ( n, pﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ.
. n ≤ 2p
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n p −1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . ( p − 1 )n + 1
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) ، ( 1, pﺣﻴﺚ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄﹼ ،ﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝﹲ ﺗﺎﻓﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، n | 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ) ( 2, 2ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، p = 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ n > 1ﻭ . p > 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ qﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . −1 ≠ 1 mod qﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {m ∈ ℕ∗ : ( p − 1 )m = −1 mod qﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺇﺫ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ nﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ،
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ
} β = min {k ∈ ℕ∗ : ( p − 1 )k = −1 mod q
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ( p − 1 )n = −1 mod qﺃﻥﹼ ، gcd ( p − 1, q ) = 1ﻓﻨﻌﺮﻑ
αﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ p − 1ﰲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ . ℤ/q ℤﺃﻱ
} α = min {k ∈ ℕ∗ : ( p − 1 )k = 1 mod q
ﻣﻊ . α ≤ q − 1ﻧﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﻋﻠﻰ αﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ mﻭ rﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
n = mα + rﻭ 0 ≤ r < α
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳒﺪ ﰲ ℤ/q ℤﺃﻥﹼ
−1 ≡ ( p − 1 )n ≡ ( ( p − 1 )α )m ( p − 1 )r ≡ ( p − 1 )r mod q
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، β ≤ r < αﻷﻥﹼ . r ≠ 0ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻧﺠﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ n
ﻋﻠﻰ βﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ kﻭ ℓﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
n = kβ + ℓﻭ 0 ≤ ℓ < β
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳒﺪ ﰲ ℤ/q ℤﺃﻥﹼ
k
−1 ≡ ( p − 1 )n ≡ ( ( p − 1 )β ) ( p − 1 )ℓ ≡ ( −1 )k ( p − 1 )ℓ mod q
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﺯﻭﺟﻲ ،ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥﹼ ℓ = 0ﻷﻥﹼ ، ℓ < βﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻓﺮﺩﻱ ،ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ℓ = 0ﻷﻥﹼ . ℓ < αﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . n = k β
387 ﻋﺎﻡ 1999
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، β < α ≤ q − 1ﻭ qﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ nﻓﺤﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ βﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﳚﺐ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، β = 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . q | pﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ pﻭ qﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
.p = q
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . n = λ pﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ،ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، λ ≥ 3ﻷﻥﹼ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ n ≥ 3pﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﺇﺫﻥ . n = p
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
p
p
( p − 1) + 1 = 1 + ∑ C pk pk ( −1 )p −k
k =0
p
2
= 1 + ( −1 )p + ( −1 )p −1 p + ∑ C pk pk ( −1 )p −k
k =2
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ p | C pkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ k < pﻭ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
( p − 1 )p + 1 = p 2 mod p 3
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) p 2 | ( 1 + ( p − 1 )pﻭ ) p 3 ( 1 + ( p − 1 )p
ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) p p −1 | ( 1 + ( p − 1 )pﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ p − 1 ≤ 2ﺃﻭ
p = 3ﻷ ﻥﹼ pﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺃ ﻭ ﱄﹼ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) ( n, p ) = ( 3, 3ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ p ≥ 3ﻭ . n > 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷ ﺯﻭﺍﺝ
) ( n, pﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﻭ ﻫﻲ
}) {( 1, p ) : p ∈ P } ∪ {( 2, 2 ) , ( 3, 3
ù ﺣﻴﺚ Pﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ C1ﻭ C 2ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Cﻭﲤﺴﺎﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Mﻭ Nﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﲤﺮ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C 2ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ ، C 2ﻋﻨﺪ
ﲤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ،ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﰲ Aﻭ . Bﻭﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( AMﻭ ) ( BMﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ
Eﻭ Fﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( EFﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 388
A
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ O1ﻭ O2ﻭ Oﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ C1ﻭ C 2ﻭ ، C
N
E ﻭ r1ﻭ r2ﻭ rﺇﱃ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
M
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭ ﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺼﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ Cﰲ
O2 O1
O Mﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ MAﲢﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C1ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ME
، MFEﻭﻫﻲ ﲢﺼﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ C
ﻓﻘﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
F
. MBAﺇﺫﻥ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ MAﻓﻘﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
B
= MBA
MFE
ﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ) . (O1O2ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﻓﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( EFﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧ ﹼ
MEFﻫﻮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ MABﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Mﻭﻧﺴﺒﻨﻪ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻧﺼﻔﹶﻲ
ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺗﲔ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ﺃﻱ . r1 /rﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺑﻌﺪ O2ﻋﻦ
ﻣﺴﻘﻂ Eﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (O1O2ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . r2
ﻟﻨﻨﺴﺐ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺅﻫﺎ ،O2ﻭﳏﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ
،O2O1ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ) O2 ( 0, 0ﻭ ) .O1 ( r1, 0
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( x A, yAﻫﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Aﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻮﰐ A
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ C1ﻭ C 2ﺃﻥﹼ ، (O1A )2 − r12 = (O2A )2 − r22ﺃﻭ
( x A − r1 )2 + yA
2
− r12 = x A2 + yA2 − r22
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺃﻥﹼ
r22
) (1 = xA
2r1
r1
= ، MEﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( x M , yMﻭ ) ( x E , yEﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ MA
r
ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Mﻭ ، Eﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
r1 r − r1 r
xE = xM + = ) ( xA − xM xM + 1 xA
r r r
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
r − r1 r2
)(2 = xE xM + 2
r 2r
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ . x M
389 ﻋﺎﻡ 1999
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( xO , yOﻫﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .Oﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
O1M
O2M = O2O1 + O1M = O2O1 + r1
O1M
OO1 r
= O2O1 + r1 = O2O1 + 1 OO1
OO1 r − r1
ﻭﺑﺈﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﳒﺪ
r1 ) r ( r − xO
x M = r1 + ( r1 − xO ) = 1
r − r1 r − r1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
2r1 ( r − xO ) + r22
)(3 = xE
2r
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺃﻥﹼ O2O = r − r2ﻭ O1O = r − r1ﺇﺫﻥ
( xO − r1 )2 + yO2 = ( r − r1 )2 xO2 + yO2 = ( r − r2 )2ﻭ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
2r1xO = xO2 + yO2 + r12 − ( r − r1 )2
= ( r − r2 )2 + r12 − ( r − r1 )2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2r1 ( xO − r ) = ( r − r2 )2 + r12 − ( r − r1 )2 − 2rr1
= ( r − r2 )2 − r 2 = r22 − 2rr2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳒﺪ ، 2r1 ( r − xO ) + r22 = 2rr2ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
. x E = r2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( EFﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ،O2ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، C 2ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ù ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﳑﺎﺱ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘ ﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ℝﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ .ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ f : ℝ → ℝﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ :
) (E f ( x − f ( y ) ) = f ( f ( y ) ) + xf ( y ) + f ( x ) − 1
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ . y
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 390
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ fﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ) . ( E
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ f ( 0 ) = 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( Eﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ x = y = 0ﺃ ﻥﹼ 0 = −1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . λ = f ( 0 ) ≠ 0
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ yﻣﻦ ، ℝﳔﺘﺎﺭ ) x = f ( yﻭﻧﻌﻮﺽ ﰲ ) ، ( Eﻓﻨﺠﺪ
λ = f ( 0 ) = 2 f ( f ( y ) ) + ( f ( y ) )2 − 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
λ +1 1
) (1 ∀y ∈ ℝ, − ( f ( y ) )2
= )) f ( f ( y
2 2
ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( α, βﻣﻦ ، ℝ2ﳔﺘﺎﺭ x = f αﻭ y = βﰲ ) ، ( Eﻓﻨﺠﺪ
( )
f ( f ( α ) − f ( β )) = f ( f ( β )) + f ( α ) f ( β ) + f ( f ( α )) − 1
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ) ) f ( f ( αﻭ ) ) f ( f ( βﻟﻨﺠﺪ
1 1
f ( f ( α ) − f ( β ) ) = λ − ( f ( β ) )2 + f ( α ) f ( β ) − ( f ( α ) )2
2 2
1
= λ − ( f ( α ) − f ( β ) )2
2
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
1
)(2 ∀ ( α, β ) ∈ ℝ2, f ( f ( α ) − f ( β ) ) = λ − ( f ( α ) − f ( β ) )2
2
ﻭﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ y = 0ﰲ ) ( Eﳒﺪ
∀x ∈ ℝ, f ( x − λ ) = f ( λ ) + λx + f ( x ) − 1
= x zﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ) ، z = f ( x z − λ ) − f ( x z ) z +1− f ( λ
λ ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ zﻣﻦ ، ℝﻧﻌﺮﻑ
ﻭﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
( f ( x z − λ ) − f ( x z ) )2 z2
f ( z ) = f ( f ( xz − λ ) − f ( xz )) = λ − =λ −
2 2
ﻭﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، z = λﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ، ( 1ﳒﺪ
λ2 1 + λ λ2
λ−
= )) = f ( f ( 0 −
2 2 2
2
z
f ( z ) = 1 −ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ zﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ . λ = 1ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
ù . ℝﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) ( Eﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ABﻫﻮ ﳑﺎ ﺱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮ ﻙ ﻟﻠﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺗﲔ ﺍ ﳌﺮﺳﻮ ﻣﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ﻟﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻴﻴﻦ CANM
) ( AB ﻭ . MNBDﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ Cﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، (CDﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ
ﻭ ) (CDﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎ ﻥ .ﻳﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( NAﻭ ) (CMﰲ ، Pﻭﻳﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ
) ( NBﻭ ) ( MDﰲ ، Qﻭﺃﺧﲑ ﺍﹰ ﻳﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) (CAﻭ ) ( DBﰲ . Eﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﲔ PEﻭ QEﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﻥ.
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ) (CDﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
Q M = BDM
EBA
C P D
ABMﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﳑﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﲢﺼﺮ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻷﻥﹼ
MBﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﻴﺔ
BDM ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
N
A B
، BDMﺇﺫﻥ
= ABM ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
F
= ABM
EBA
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ
E
= BAM
EAB
ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ ABEﻭ ABMﻃﺒﻮﻗﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ EB = MBﻭ . EA = MA
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ( ABﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ EMﻭﻣﻨﻪ ) . ( EM ) ⊥ (CD
ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ) ( MNﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ( AB ) ﰲ . Fﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ،ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) ( FA
ﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ،CANMﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، FA2 = FN ⋅ FMﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) ( FB
ﳑﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، MNBDﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . FB 2 = FN ⋅ FMﺇﺫﻥ . FA = FB
ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻃﻊ ) ( AP
ﻭ ) ( FMﻭ ) ( BQﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
AF NF BF
= =
PM NM QM
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . PM = QMﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ، ( EM ) ⊥ ( PQﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
ù ) ( EMﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] ، [ PQﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . PE = QE ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
391
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 392
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
( A − 1 + B1 )( B − 1 + C1 )(C − 1 + A1 ) ≤ 1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ αﻭ βﻭ γﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
1 1 1
γ =C −1+ α = A −1 +ﻭ β = B −1 +ﻭ
A C B
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
1 1 1
α+β =A+
C
+ ( B−
B ) ≥A+
C
>0
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﹶﻠﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
β+γ >0ﻭ γ+α>0
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ αﻭ βﻭ γﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ.
åﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ αﺃﻭ βﺃﻭ γﺳﺎﻟﺒﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ،ﻭﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﺃﻥﹼ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ،ﻓﺘﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ αβγ ≤ 1ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ.
åﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ αﻭ βﻭ γﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ .ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
1 A 1 1
αβ = AB − B + 1 − A + 1 − + − +
B C C BC
A 1
=
C (
− B + −2
B )
A 1 2 A
= − B−
C ( B
≤
C )
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
C B
≤ γα ≤ βγﻭ
B A
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺎ
ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ( αβγ )2 ≤ 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ αβγ ≤ 1ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ.
393 ﻋﺎﻡ 2000
ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ nﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ
ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻘﺔ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﻀﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﱃ » ﻧﻘﻼﺕ « .ﺇﺫﹾ ﺗﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻠﺔﹸ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ
ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻘﺘﲔ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻬﻤﺎ Aﻭ ، Bﻣﻊ Aﺇﱃ ﳝﲔ ، Bﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Bﻧﻘﻄﺔ
B ′ﺗﻘﻊ ﺇﱃ ﳝﲔ Aﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . AB ′ = kBAﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ kﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻘﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ؟
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﹸﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ .ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ” ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ “ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﻴﺪ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻵﰐ.
åﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ϕ : ℕ n → ℝﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
. card ( Im ϕ ) ≥ 2ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Fﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
åﻟﺘﻜﻦ P2 nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ℕ nﺍﳌﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Qﻣﻦ ، P2 nﻭ ϕ
( ) ( )
ﻣﻦ Fﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) TQ ( ϕﻣﻦ Fﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ card ( ϕ (Q ) ) = 1ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ .TQ ( ϕ ) = ϕ
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ card ( ϕ (Q ) ) = 2ﺃﲰﻴﻨﺎ iﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ Qﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﰲ ) ϕ (Qﻭﺃﲰﻴﻨﺎ jﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ Qﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﰲ
) . ϕ (Qﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ } Q = {i, jﻣﻊ ) . ϕ ( i ) < ϕ ( jﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) ψ = TQ ( ϕﺑﻮﺿﻊ ) ψ ( ℓ ) = ϕ ( ℓﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ℓ ≠ iﻭﻭﺿﻊ
)) ψ (i ) = ϕ ( j ) + k ( ϕ ( j ) − ϕ (i
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ.
) ϕ (i ) ϕ(j )ϕ(ℓ
) ψ = TQ ( ϕ
) ψ ( j ) ψ ( ℓ ) ψ (i
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻼﺕ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} T = {TQ : Q ∈ P2 n ( )
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 394
.1ﻟﻴﻜﻦ aﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﺳﻨﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻻﺣﻘﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ϕﻣﻦ ، Fﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ
n
) ) M ( ϕ ) = max ( ϕ ( ℓﻭ ) ∆a ( ϕ ) = aM ( ϕ ) − ∑ ϕ ( ℓ
1≤ ℓ ≤n
ℓ =1
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻠﺔ TQﻣﻦ ، Tﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕﻣﻦ ، Fﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) . ψ = TQ ( ϕﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
card ( ϕ (Q ) ) = 1ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ) . ∆a ( ψ ) = ∆a ( ϕ
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ، card ( ϕ (Q ) ) = 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ } Q = {i, jﻣﻊ ) . ϕ ( i ) < ϕ ( j
ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
n
n
∑ ψ ( ℓ ) = ∑ ) ) ϕ ( ℓ ) − ϕ ( i ) + ϕ ( j ) + k ( ϕ ( j ) − ϕ ( i
ℓ =1
ℓ =1
n
) ) = ∑ ϕ ( ℓ ) + ( k + 1 ) ( ϕ ( j ) − ϕ ( i
ℓ =1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ϕ ( j ) + k ( ϕ ( j ) − ϕ ( i ) ) ≤ M ( ϕﻛﺎﻥ ) M ( ψ ) = M ( ϕ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. ∆a ( ψ ) ≤ ∆a ( ϕ )
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ϕ ( j ) + k ( ϕ ( j ) − ϕ ( i ) ) > M ( ϕﻛﺎﻥ
)) M ( ψ ) = ϕ ( j ) + k ( ϕ ( j ) − ϕ (i
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) ) ∆a ( ϕ ) −∆a ( ψ ) = a ( M ( ϕ ) − M ( ψ ) ) + ( k + 1 ) ( ϕ ( j ) − ϕ ( i
k +1
= a ( M ( ϕ ) − M ( ψ )) + )) ( M ( ψ ) − ϕ ( j
k
k +1 k +1
= (k )
− a ( M ( ψ )−M ( ϕ ) ) +
k
) ) ( M ( ϕ )−ϕ ( j
ﺇﺫﻥ
) (1 ≥ ) ∆a ( ϕ ) −∆a ( ψ )) ( k +k 1 −a )( M ( ψ ) − M ( ϕ
ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) . ϕ ( j ) = M ( ϕ
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ a = 1 + 1/kﻛﺎﻥ ) . ∆a ( ψ ) ≤ ∆a ( ϕﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
)(2 ∀ϕ ∈ F , ∀T ∈ T , ) ∆1+1/k (T ( ϕ ) ) ≤ ∆1+1/k ( ϕ
395 ﻋﺎﻡ 2000
.2ﻟﻨﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ϕ0ﻣﻦ ، Fﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻼﺕ (Tm )m ∈ℕﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
، Tﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( ϕm )m ≥0ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) . ϕm +1 = Tm ( ϕmﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2
ﺃﻥﹼ
∀m ∈ ℕ ) ∆1+1/k ( ϕm +1 ) ≤ ∆1+1/k ( ϕm
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀m ∈ ℕ ) ∆1+1/k ( ϕm ) ≤ ∆1+1/k ( ϕ0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n
1
(
∆1+1/k ( ϕm ) = 1 +
k )
) ) − n M ( ϕm ) + ∑ ( M ( ϕm ) − ϕm ( ℓ
ℓ =1
>0
1
(
≥ 1+
k )
) − n M ( ϕm
1 1
< ، kﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، 1 + − n > 0ﺃﻱ
n −1 k
k
≤ ) ∀m ∈ ℕ M ( ϕm ∆ ) (ϕ
1 − k ( n − 1 ) 1+1/k 0
ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( M ( ϕm ) )m ∈ℕﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ.
1
< kﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﺀ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
n −1
ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﻄﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
1
≥ ، kﻭﻟﻨﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ϕ0ﻣﻦ ، Fﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻼﺕ .3ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵ ﻥﹼ
n −1
( ϕm )m ∈ℕﻣﻦ ، Fﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺘﲔ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ .ﺇﺫﺍ (Tm )m ∈ℕﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ، Tﻭﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻛﺎ ﻥ ϕmﻣﻌﺮ ﻓﺎﹰ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ﻳﻮ ﺟﺪ imﻭ jmﻣﻦ ℕ nﻳﺤﻘﱢﻘﺎ ﻥ ) ϕm ( jm ) = M ( ϕm
ﻭ ) ، ϕm ( im ) = L ( ϕmﻣﻊ ) ) . L ( ϕ ) = min ( ϕ ( ℓﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
1≤ ℓ ≤n
} Tm = T{im , jmﻭ ) ϕm +1 = Tm ( ϕm
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻔﺴﻨﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( 1ﻣﻊ ، a = 1 + 1/kﺃﻱ
∀m ∈ ℕ, ) ∆1+1/k ( ϕm +1 ) = ∆1+1/k ( ϕm
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 396
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀m ∈ ℕ, ) ∆1+1/k ( ϕm ) = ∆1+1/k ( ϕ0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n
1
∆1+1/k ( ϕ0 ) = 1 − n + ( ) k
) ) M ( ϕ0 ) + ∑ ( M ( ϕ0 ) − ϕ0 ( ℓ
ℓ =1
n
1
∆1+1/k ( ϕm ) = (1 − n + ) M ( ϕ m)+ )) ∑ ( M ( ϕm ) − ϕm ( ℓ
k ℓ =1
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ ، mﻳﻜﻦ
n n
) ) ∑ ( M ( ϕm ) − ϕm ( ℓ )) = ∑ ( M ( ϕ0 ) − ϕ0 ( ℓ
ℓ =1 ℓ =1
1
(
+ n −1−
k )
) ) ( M ( ϕm ) − M ( ϕ0
1
≥ ، kﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، M ( ϕm ) > M ( ϕ0ﻭﻷﻥﹼ
n −1
(n − 1 − k1 )( M ( ϕ m ) − M ( ϕ0 ) ) ≥ 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
n n
≥ )) ∑ ( M ( ϕm ) − ϕm ( ℓ )) ∑ ( M ( ϕ0 ) − ϕ0 ( ℓ
ℓ =1 ℓ =1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
∀m ∈ ℕ, ) n ( M ( ϕm ) − L ( ϕm ) ) ≥ M ( ϕ0 ) − L ( ϕ0
ﺃﻭ
) M ( ϕ0 ) − L ( ϕ0
)(3 ∀m ∈ ℕ, M ( ϕm ) ≥ L ( ϕm ) +
n
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ nﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ϕmﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳝﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ ϕm
ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ) ، M ( ϕmﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) L ( ϕm +n ) ≥ M ( ϕmﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ mﻣﻦ
, ℕﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ) ( 3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) M ( ϕ0 ) − L ( ϕ0
∀m ∈ ℕ, L ( ϕm +n ) ≥ L ( ϕm ) +
n
397 ﻋﺎﻡ 2000
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
) M ( ϕ0 ) − L ( ϕ0
∀ℓ ∈ ℕ, L ( ϕ( ℓ +1 )n ) ≥ L ( ϕℓn ) +
n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
ℓ
∀ℓ ∈ ℕ, L ( ϕℓn ) ≥ L ( ϕ0 ) + ) ) ( M ( ϕ0 ) − L ( ϕ0
n
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. lim L ( ϕℓn ) = +∞
∞→ ℓ
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ
1
≥ . kﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﹴ ﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻼﺕ ،ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
n −1
ù ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺌ ﹰﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﺮﻗﹼﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺣﺘﻰ . 100ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺯﻋﺔ
ﰲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻋﻠﺐﹴ ﳛﻮﻱ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ .ﺑﻜﻢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ،
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻭﺝﹴ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ،ﺛﹸﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ U 1ﻭ U 2ﻭ ،U 3ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ nﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻗﹼﻤﺔﹰ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ . n
ﻧﺴﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ،T1ﺃ ﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊﹴ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﳛﻮﻱ ﻭﻓﻘﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ
2 ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ،V>n +1ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻘﻂ،
3
ﻭﳛﻮﻱ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺛﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ،V<n +1ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ n
n 4 1
⋮
n−1
V<n +1 V n +1V >n +1ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻨﺴﻤﻴﻪ ،Vn +1
ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ 2ﺣﺘﻰ . n − 1
ﻭﻧﺴﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ،T2ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳ ﹴﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﳛﻮﻱ ﻭﻓﻘﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ،ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ،W0ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، 3ﻭﳛﻮﻱ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺛﺎﻥ،
3 2 1 ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ، W1ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3
6 5 4
⋮
3k
9 8
⋮
3k + 2
7
⋮
3k + 1
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 2ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺴﻤﻴﻪ ،W2
W 0 W 1 W 2 ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 398
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﱠ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊﹴ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﲔ T1ﺃﻭ T2ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ،ﳛﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pﺍﳌﻨﺼﻮﺹ
ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﹼ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ ،ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻗﲔ،
ﺛﹸﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ.
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 3ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
” ﺇﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﳏﻘﹼﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺻﺔ ، Pﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﹼﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ
nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ،ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﲔ T1ﺃﻭ “ .T2
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pnﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n = 3ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷ ﻱ ﺻﻨﺪﻭ ﻕﹴ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻜﻞﱡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭ ﻕﹴ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊﹴ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ .T1ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ
ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﺎﻥ T1ﻭ .T2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ، Pnﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﹰ ،ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ، Pﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ
n + 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ B1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ n + 1ﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ
B2ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ 1ﻭﻧﺴﻤﻲ B3ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ B2ﳛﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ، 1ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ mﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ، k2ﺃﻛﱪ ﺭﻗﻢﹴ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﰲ ، B2ﻣﻊ k3ﺃﻛﱪ ﺭﻗﻢﹴ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ . B3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ k3 ≥ 2ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 1ﻟﻴﺴﺖ
ﰲ ، B3ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ k2 ≥ 2ﻷﻧﻨﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ B2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ . 1
ﻭ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ nﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﲔ B2ﺃﻭ B3ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
. max ( k2, k3 ) = nﻭ ﻣﻨﻪ . m = k2 + k3 ≥ n + 2ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻟﻮ ﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ
. m ≤ n + ( n − 1 ) = 2n − 1ﺇ ﺫ ﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ k = m − n − 1ﺇ ﱃ ﺍ ﻤﻮ ﻋﺔ
} ، {1, …, nﻓﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ kﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﲔ B2ﺃﻭ . B3ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
m = k2 + k 3 = n + 1 + k
B2 B3 B1 B2 ∨ B3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﹾ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ
B2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ 1ﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ .T1
399 ﻋﺎﻡ 2000
ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ n + 1ﳛﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺬﻓﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ،
ﺣﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊﹴ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ، Pﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ .ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ
ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﲔ T1ﺃﻭ T2ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ ، nﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ،T1ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ B1
ﳛﻮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ، 1ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ B2ﳛﻮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ، n
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ B3ﳛﻮﻱ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ 2ﻭ . n − 1
ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ ، n + 1ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pﰲ ﻇﻞﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
n +2 = n +1 + 1 = n + 2
? B1 B2 B3
ﺇﻻﹼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ n + 1ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ . B1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≥ 4ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
n +3 = n +1 + 2 = n + 3
B1 B3 B2 B3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ . Pﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 3ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ
، n + 1 = 4ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ،T2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
} B1 = {1, 4ﻭ } B2 = { 3ﻭ } B3 = { 2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ ، nﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ،T2ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ B ℓ
ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، ℓﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼﹰ
. Bk = Bk mod 3ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . n mod 3 = rﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
n +1 + r +1 = n + r +2
? Br +1 Br Br + 2
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ } ، {r mod 3, ( r + 1 ) mod 3, ( r + 2 ) mod 3 } = { 0,1, 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻴﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ n + 1
ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ، Pﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﺎﻥ n + 1ﻭ r + 1ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ Br +1ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ .T2ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺻﺔ Pn +1ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺍﻵﻥ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n ≥ 4ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ T1ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ .T2
ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﲔ .ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﹼﻲ ﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ،ﻣﻊ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ، Pﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 12ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ù . n ≥ 4ﻭﺍﳉﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 100ﻫﻮ . 12ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 400
ﺃﹶﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻔﲔ
ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 2n + 1؟ ) ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ
ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ( .
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺍﳉﻮﺍﺏ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻌﻢ .ﺑﻞ ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐﹴ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻌﻄﻰ ، rﻳﻮﺟﺪ
ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nrﻳﻘﺴﻢ 2nr + 1ﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . card ( { p ∈ P : p | nr } ) = rﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ
Pﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ،ﻧﺬﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ aﻭ mﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ mﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ 2a + 1ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . 2am + 1
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ،
m −1
am
2 + 1 = ( 2 + 1 ) ∑ ( −1 )p 2a ( m −1−p )
a
p =0
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ak = 23 + 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ≥ 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ
k −1
ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ( bk )k ≥1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k ≥ 1ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ak +1 = 3akbkﻭ gcd ( 3ak , bk ) = 1
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ a1 = 3ﻭ a 2 = 32ﻭ ، a 3 = 33 × 19ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ b1 = 1
ﻭ . b2 = 19ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ (bk )1≤k <mﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ
ak +1 = 3akbkﻭ gcd ( 3ak , bk ) = 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ k < mﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
m −1 3
am +1 = ( 23 ) + 1 = ( am − 1 )3 + 1
) = am ( am2 − 3am + 3 ) = am ( 3amam −1bm −1 − 3am + 3
) = 3am ( am ( am −1bm −1 − 1 ) + 1
= 3ambm
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
bm = am ( am −1bm −1 − 1 ) + 1 = 3am −1bm −1 ( am −1bm −1 − 1 ) + 1
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ gcd ( am , bm ) = 1ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ . gcd ( 3, bm ) = 1ﻭﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺃ ﻭﱄ
ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ . gcd ( 3am , bm ) = 1
401 ﻋﺎﻡ 2000
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( bk )k ≥1ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k ≥ 1
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
) (1 ak +1 = 3akbkﻭ gcd ( 3ak , bk ) = 1
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ak +1 = 3k +1b1b2b3 ⋯bkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ≥ 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ
3k −1
، 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ، bm = am ( a3m − 1 ) + 1ﺃﻥﹼ 3
+1
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﺆ > 1 ⇔ k ≥ 2
∀m ≥ 2, bm ≥ am + 1 > 1
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ pmﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ bmﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، m ≥ 2ﺃﻱ
) } pm = min ( { p ∈ P : p | bm
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ m ֏ pmﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ .ﻷﻧﻪ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، ℓ < mﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
am = 3am −1bm −1 = ⋯ = 3m −ℓ a ℓbℓbℓ +1 ⋯bm −1
ﺇﺫﻥ pℓ | amﻭﻷ ﻥﹼ gcd ( 3am , bm ) = 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ pℓ bmﻭﻣﻨﻪ pℓ ≠ pmﻷﻥﹼ
. pm | bm
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷ ﻭﻟﻴﺔ } { pm : m ≥ 2ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ، 3ﻭﻫﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
( am )m ≥1ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ.
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺎ .ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ar +1 = 3r +1b2b3 ⋯br
ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nrﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
nr = 3r +1 ∏ pr
2≤k ≤r
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ mﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ m = 3p2p3 ⋯ prﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
23 + 1ﻳﻘﺴﻢ 23 m + 1ﺃﻱ . ar +1 | 2nr + 1ﺇﺫﻥ nr | 2nr + 1ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ
r r
} { p ∈ P : p | nr } = { 3 } ∪ { pm : 2 ≤ m ≤ r
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
card ( { p ∈ P : p | nr } ) = r
ù ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n2000ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 402
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺣﺎ ﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ . A1A2A3ﻧﺴﻤﻲ K iﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Aiﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ Liﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﺱ . Aiﻟﻴﻜﻦ d3ﻧﻈﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( K 1K 2ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، ( L1L2
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ d2ﻧﻈﲑ ) ( K 3K1ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ) ، ( L3L1ﻭ d1ﻧﻈﲑ ) ( K 2K 3ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ
) . ( L2L3ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺆﻟﹼﻔﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ d1ﻭ d2ﻭ d3ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
.C
ﻧﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ . ℂﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 0ﳝﺜﹼﻞ
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
. 1ﻭﻧﺮﻣﺰ αﻭ βﻭ γﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ L1ﻭ L2ﻭ ، L3ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻛﻞﱟ
ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
A1 ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ a1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . A1
L2
L3 ﺗﻘﻊ A1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ L3ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، (OL3
O
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ tﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
A2 L1 A3
a1 = γ + t ( i γ ) = ( 1 + i t ) γ
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﻊ A1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ L2ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، (OL2ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ s
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ . a1 = ( 1 + i s ) β
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ، ( 1 + i t ) γ = ( 1 + i s ) βﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﺃﻥﹼ ، s 2 = t 2ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ
1 + it β
،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ = ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، s = tﻷﻥﹼ ، γ ≠ βﺇﺫﻥ . s = −tﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
1 − it γ
2β
= ، 1 + i tﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳒﺪ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
β+γ
2βγ
= a1 = ( 1 + i t ) γ
β+γ
ﻭﻧﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﲔ a2ﻭ a3ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﺜﹼﻼﻥ A2ﻭ A3ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﻓﻨﺠﺪ
2αβ 2αγ 2βγ
) (1 = a3 = a2ﻭ = a1ﻭ
α+β α+γ β+γ
403 ﻋﺎﻡ 2000
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ k1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ K1ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . A1
A1 ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﺗﻘﻊ K1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ L1ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎﹰ
L3
L2 ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، (OL1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ tﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
O k1 = ( 1 + i t ) α
A2 K1L1 A3 ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻘﻊ K 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A1
ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ) ، (OL1ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ sﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . k1 = a1 + sα
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ( 1 + i t ) α = a1 + s αﺃﻥﹼ 1 − s + i t = a1 αﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
a1 α − a1α
= it
2
ﺇﺫﻥ
1 1 βγ − α2
k1 = α + i t α = α + a1 − a1α2 = α +
2 2 β+γ
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﹶﻠﺔ ،ﳒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﲔ k2ﻭ k3ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﺜﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ K 2ﻭ K 3ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻓﻨﺠﺪ
αβ − γ 2 αγ − β 2 βγ − α2
)(2 k3 = γ + k2 = β +ﻭ k1 = α +ﻭ
α+β α+γ β+γ
ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻈﲑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ dﻣﺎﺭﺍﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ M 1ﻭ M 2ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺘﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ z1ﻭ z 2ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
Wﳑﺜﹼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ . wﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ
z 2 − z1
)(3 w ′ = z1 + ) ( w − z1
z 2 − z1
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ W ′ﻧﻈﲑﺓ Wﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ . d
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ W ′ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ w ′ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) . ( 3ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺃﻥﹼ
w ′ − z1 = w − z1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ M 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [WW ′ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﺮﻯ
ﺃﻥﹼ
z 2 − z1 z − z1
w ′ = z1 + ( ( w − z 2 ) + ( z 2 − z1 ) ) = z 2 + 2 ) (w − z2
z 2 − z1 z 2 − z1
ﺇﺫﻥ ، w ′ − z 2 = w − z 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻘﻊ M 2ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ] . [WW ′ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ dﻫﻮ ﳏﻮﺭ ] ، [WW ′ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ W ′ﻧﻈﲑﺓ Wﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ . d
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 404
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ m1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ M 1ﻧﻈﲑﺓ L1ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . (OA1
A1
K2
L2
K3
L3
O
S1
M1
A2 K1 L1 A3
T1
ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ( 3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ z1 = 0ﻭ z 2 = a1ﳒﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
a1 2βγ β + γ 1 βγ
= m1 =α ⋅ = ⋅
a1 β+γ 2 α α
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ s1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ S1ﻧﻈﲑﺓ M 1ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( L1L2
ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ( 3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ z1 = αﻭ z 2 = βﳒﺪ
β−α α 1 α2
s1 = α + ( m1 − α ) = α − αβ − = α + β −
β−α βγ α γ
ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ t1ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ T1ﻧﻈﲑﺓ M 1ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( L1L3
ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ( 3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ z1 = αﻭ z 2 = γﳒﺪ
γ−α α 1 α2
t1 = α + ( m1 − α ) = α − αγ − = α + γ −
γ−α βγ α β
ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ S1ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، ( K1K 2ﻭﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ T1ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( K1K 3
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ S1ﻭ K1ﻭ K 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ
k1 − s1
= ξﻫﻮ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
k2 − s1
α 3 − β 2γ ) β ( α2 − βγ
= k2 − s1 = k1 − s1ﻭ
) γ (α + γ ) γ (β + γ
405 ﻋﺎﻡ 2000
ﺇﺫﻥ
k1 − s1 ) β ( α2 − βγ ) ( α + γ
= ξ =
k2 − s1 ) ( α3 − β 2γ ) ( β + γ
ﻭﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﹸﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ . ξ = ξﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ:
1
β ( α1 2 − 1
βγ ) )( α1 + γ1 ) β ( βγ − α2 ) ( α + γ
= ξ = =ξ
( α1 3 − 1
β 2γ ) )( β1 + γ1 ) ( β 2γ − α 3 ) ( β + γ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ S1ﻭ K1ﻭ K 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﳒﺪ
2
α 3 − βγ 2 ) γ ( α − βγ
= k3 − t1 = k1 − t1ﻭ
) β (α + β ) β (β + γ
ﺇﺫﻥ
k1 − t1 ) γ ( α2 − βγ ) ( α + β
= ζ =
k 3 − t1 ) ( α3 − βγ 2 )( β + γ
ﻭﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ζ = ζﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ζﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ، ℝﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ T1ﻭ K 1
ﻭ K 3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ S1ﺇﱃ ) ( K1K 2ﺃﻥﹼ M 1ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d3ﻧﻈﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) ( K 1K 2ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( L1L2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ T1ﺇﱃ ) ( K 1K 3ﺃﻥﹼ M 1
ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ d2ﻧﻈﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( K1K 3ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( L1L3ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
، { M 1 } = d2 ∩ d3ﻭﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ m1 = 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ d2ﻭ d3ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . C
ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ d1ﻭ d3ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ M 2ﻧﻈﲑﺓ L2ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، (OA2ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﻷﻥﹼ ) (OA2ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ d1ﻭ d2ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ M 3ﻧﻈﲑﺓ L3ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، (OA3ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ù ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 406
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ . ABCﻟﻴﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺳﻪ ،ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Pﻣﻮﻗﻊ
π
. BCAﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
≥ ABC
+ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . Aﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
6
+ COP
CAB <π
2
A ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
π −B ≥π
O >C
2 6
B P C 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ≥ ) ، sin(C − Bﻭﻣﻦ ﹶﺛﻢ
C 2
sin C cos B − sin B ≥1
cos C
2
ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﻮﺏ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺮﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ 2OBﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
− AC ⋅ cosC
AB ⋅ cos B ≥ OB
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
AB cos Bﻭ = CP
AC cos C = BP
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
BP − BO ≥ CP
Aﺣﺎﺩﺓ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bﻭ Oﻭ Pﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺃﻥﹼ . BP − BO < OPﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ .CP < OPﻓﺈﺫﺍ
.COP
< OCP ﺗﺄﻣﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ COPﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
، BOCﺇﺫﻥ
= 2A ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ OBCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ
+ 2A
2OCP =π
< π −A
،COPﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ = π −A
،OCPﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2 2
ù ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
407
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 408
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ aﻭ bﻭ . cﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
a b c
+ + ≥1
a 2 + 8bc b 2 + 8ca c 2 + 8ab
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ، Hölderﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻣﻦ ∗، ℕ
ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ pﻭ qﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ، 1p + q1 = 1ﻭﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ( xi )i ∈ℕ nﻭ ( yi )i ∈ℕ nﻣﻦ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
n
n p 1/ p n q 1/q
∑ xiyi ≤ ∑ xi ∑ yi
i =1 i =1 i =1
ﻭﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ
a 2/3 1/3 3
p = 3ﻭ = qﻭ ) yi = i x i = ( αi2ai
αi 2
ﳒﺪ
n
n 2 1/3 n ai 2/3
∑ ai ≤ ∑ αi ai ∑ αi
i =1 i =1 i =1
ﺃﻭ
n 3
) ( ∑i =1 ai n ai 2
≤ ∑
n
∑ i =1 αi ai i =1 αi
2
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ n = 3ﻭ a1 = aﻭ a2 = bﻭ a3 = cﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
= α3 = α2ﻭ c 2 + 8ab = α1ﻭ b 2 + 8ca a 2 + 8bc
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
) (a + b + c 3
a b c 2
) (1 ≤ + +
a α12 + b α22 + c α32 α1 α2 α3
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ N = (a + b + c )3ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
N = a 3 + b 3 + c 3 + 3 ( ab 2 + ac 2 + ba 2 + bc 2 + ca 2 + cb 2 ) + 6abc
= a 3 + b 3 + c 3 + 3 ( a ( b − c )2 + b(c − a )2 + c ( a − b )2 ) + 24abc
) = a 3 + b 3 + c 3 + 24abc + F ( a, b, c
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ) . F (a, b, c ) = 3 ( a ( b − c )2 + b(c − a )2 + c ( a − b )2
409 ﻋﺎﻡ 2001
ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
a α12 + b α22 + c α32 = a 3 + b 3 + c 3 + 24abc
ﺇﺫﻥ
( a + b + c )3 ) F ( a, b, c
=1+ ≥1
a α12 + b α22 + c α32 a α12 + b α22 + c α32
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
a b c
+ + ≥1
α1 α2 α3
ù ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . a = b = cﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
a b c 3
∀x ≥ 8, + + ≥
2
a + xbc 2
b + xca 2
c + xab 1+x
ﻭﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﻀﻊ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، x ≥ 8ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
= α3 = α2ﻭ c 2 + xab = α1ﻭ b 2 + xca a 2 + xbc
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
a α12 + b α22 + c α32 = a 3 + b 3 + c 3 + 3xabc
3abc
T = 3ﺻﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
a + b3 + c3
( a + b + c )3 1 + 8T ) F ( a, b, c 1 + 8T
2 2 = 2 + 2 2 ≥ 2
a α1 + b α2 + c α3 1 + xT a α1 + b α2 + c α3 1 + xT
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﲔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﻭﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، 0 < T ≤ 1ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ x ≥ 8
T ֏ 11++xTﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ] ] 0,1ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺎﻝ 8T
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ
ﻋﻨﺪ ،T = 1ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ . 1+9 xﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
( a + b + c )3 9
≥
a α12 + b α22 + c α32 1+x
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
a b c 3
+ + ≥
α1 α2 α3 1+x
ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻪ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 410
ﺷﺎﺭﻙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﺎﹰ ﻭﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﻠﹼﻬﺎ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 6ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ.
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﹼﺬﻳﻦ ﳔﺘﺎﺭﳘﺎ ﻓﺘﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﻠﹼﻬﺎ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﻠﹼﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ.
ﳓﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ .ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Gﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺃﺧﲑﹰﺍ
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ .ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ pﻣﻦ ، Pﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) B ( pﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ، pﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) G ( pﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻼﰐ ﺣﻠﻠﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ . pﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) P ( bﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﻠﹼﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ b
ﻣﻦ ، Bﻭﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) P ( gﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﻠﹼﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ gﻣﻦ .G
ﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻥﹼ
card ( B ) = card (G ) = 4n + 1
ﻣﻊ . n ≥ 3ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
∀b ∈ B, card ( P ( b ) ) ≤ n + 1ﻭ . ∀g ∈ G, card ( P ( g ) ) ≤ n + 1
∅ ≠ ) . ∀ ( b, g ) ∈ B ×G, P (b ) ∩ P ( g
ﻭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ p0ﻣﻦ Pﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
card ( B ( p0 ) ) ≥ 3ﻭ card (G ( p0 ) ) ≥ 3
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 5
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺳﻨﺘﺒﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ) ( Hﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
∀p ∈ P, cardG ( p ) ≥ 3 ⇒ card ( B ( p ) ) ≤ 2
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} P0 = { p ∈ P : card (G ( p ) ) ≤ 2
} P1 = { p ∈ P : card (G ( p ) ) ≥ 3
ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
}) S = {( p, b, g ) ∈ P × B × G : p ∈ P (b ) ∩ P ( g
ﻓﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 card ( S ) ≥ card ( B × G ) = ( 4n + 1 )2
411 2001 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳒﺪ، ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
∑ card (G ( p )) = ∑ ∑ 1
p ∈P p ∈P g ∈G ( p )
= card ( {( p, g ) ∈ P × G : g ∈ G ( p )} )
= card ( {( p, g ) ∈ P × G : p ∈ P ( g )} )
= ∑ ∑ 1 = ∑ card ( P ( g ) )
g ∈G p ∈P ( g )
g ∈G
≤ ( n + 1 ) card (G )
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳒﺪ
(2) ∑ card (G ( p ) ) ≤ ( n + 1 )( 4n + 1 )
p ∈P
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ
(3) ∑ card ( B ( p )) ≤ ( n + 1 )( 4n + 1 )
p ∈P
ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ.G ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦg ﻟﺘﻜﻦ
∀p ∈ P ( g ) , card ( B ( p ) ) ≤ 3
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢB = ∪ B ( p ) ﺔ ﺃﻥﹼﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻ
p ∈P ( g )
4n + 1 = card ( B ) ≤ 3 card ( P ( g ) ) ≤ 3 ( n + 1 )
ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ. n ≥ 3 ﻷﻥﹼﻠﻒﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧ
∀g ∈ G , ∃p ∈ P ( g ) , card ( B ( p ) ) ≥ 4
( ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎH ) ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
card ( B ( p ) ) ≥ 4 ⇒ card (G ( p ) ) ≤ 2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ، ∀g ∈ G , P ( g ) ∩ P0 ≠ ∅ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
card (G ) = ∑ 1 ≤ ∑ card ( P ( g ) ∩ P0 )
g ∈G g ∈G
≤ ∑ ∑ 1 = ∑ 1= ∑ card (G ( p ))
g ∈G p ∈P ( g )∩P0
p ∈P0 ,g ∈G ( p ) p ∈P0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 412
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
4n + 1 + ) ∑ card (G ( p ) ) ≤ ∑ card (G ( p ) ) ≤ ( n + 1 )( 4n + 1
p ∈P1 p ∈P
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
)(4 ) ∑ card (G ( p ) ) ≤ n ( 4n + 1
p ∈P1
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ،ﻟﻴﻜﻦ bﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . Bﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀p ∈ P ( b ) , card (G ( p ) ) ≤ 3
= Gﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ∪ G ( p
) p ∈P ( b
) 4n + 1 = card (G ) ≤ 3 card ( P ( b ) ) ≤ 3 ( n + 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻥﹼ . n ≥ 3ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀b ∈ B, ∃p ∈ P ( b ) , card (G ( p ) ) ≥ 4
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Hﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
card (G ( p ) ) ≥ 4 ⇒ p ∈ P1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ ≠ ، ∀b ∈ B, P ( b ) ∩ P1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
= ) card ( B ) ∑ 1 ≤ ∑ card ( P (b ) ∩ P1
b ∈B b ∈B
≤ ∑ ∑ = 1 ∑ =1 ) ) ∑ card ( B ( p
b ∈B p ∈P ( b )∩ P1
) p ∈P1 ,b ∈B ( p p ∈P1
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
4n + 1 + ) ∑ card ( B ( p )) ≤ ∑ card ( B ( p ) ) ≤ ( n + 1 )( 4n + 1
p ∈P0 p ∈P
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
)(5 ) ∑ card ( B ( p ) ) ≤ n ( 4n + 1
p ∈P0
413 ﻋﺎﻡ 2001
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
≤ ) card ( S )) ∑ card ( B ( p ) × G ( p
p ∈P
≤ ) ) ∑ card ( B ( p ) × G ( p ) ) + ∑ card ( B ( p ) × G ( p
p ∈P0 p ∈P1
) ) ≤ 2 ∑ card ( B ( p ) ) + 2 ∑ card (G ( p
p ∈P0 p ∈P1
) ≤ 2n ( 4n + 1 ) + 2n ( 4n + 1 ) = 4n ( 4n + 1
ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ) . ( 1ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ) ، ( Hﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ
ù ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﻡ ﲝﻠﹼﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻭﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 3ﻧﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ } ، ℕ n = {1, 2, …, nﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ
( k j )j ∈ℕ nﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑ ﺍﹰ ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ Snﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℕ nﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ! . nﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ σﻣﻦ Snﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
n
= Φ σ
( )
) ∑ kjσ ( j
j =1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ρﻭ ρ ′ﻣﻦ Snﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) Φ ( ρ ) − Φ ( ρ ′
ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ! . n
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻣﻦ ℕ nﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
= Aj ) ∑ σ(j
σ ∈Sn
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) τ j = ( 1, jﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ Snﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ 1ﻭ jﻭﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﳍﺎ .ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ σ ֏ σ τ1ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻳﻞ Snﺃﻥﹼ
= Aj ∑ σ ( j ) = ∑ σ τ j ( j ) = ∑ σ ( 1 ) = A1
σ ∈Sn σ ∈Sn σ ∈Sn
ﺇﺫﻥ
n n ) n n ( n + 1
= nA1 = ∑ Aj ∑ = ∑ σ ( j ) ∑ = k
∑ k !n
j =1 σ ∈Sn
j =1 σ ∈Sn =1 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 414
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ،ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ،ﺃﻥﹼ
n +1
∀j ∈ ℕ n , = Aj ∑ = ) σ(j
2
! n ! ≡ 0 mod n
σ ∈Sn
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
n
) (1 ∑Φ ( = )σ ∑ k j Aj ! ≡ 0 mod n
σ ∈Sn j =1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
! ϕ : Sn → ℤ/n ! ℤ, ϕ ( σ ) = Φ ( σ ) mod n
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ϕﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ ﳌﻨﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﻩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﳒﺪ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n > 1ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
n !−1 ) n ! ( n !− 1 !n
≡ ! ∑ ϕ σ ≡ ∑ k mod n
( )
2
≡ ! mod n
2
! mod n
σ ∈Sn k =0
!n
.ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ) ( 1ﻷﻥﹼ ! mod n ! ≠ 0 mod n
2
ϕﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻼﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ρﻭ ρ ′ﻣﻦ Snﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ù ) Φ ( ρ ) − Φ ( ρ ′ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ! . nﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﹰﺎ ، ABCﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ Pﻣﻦ ] [ BCﻭ Qﻣﻦ ] . [CAﻧﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
، ABCﻭ ﺃﻥﹼ
، BACﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( BQﻳﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
) ( APﻳﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
= π
، BACﻭﺃﺧﲑ ﺍﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . AB + BP = AQ + QBﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
3
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABC؟
A ﻟﻨﻤﺪ ﺩ ] [ ABﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ Bﺇ ﱃ P ′ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺓ
. BP = BP ′ﻭﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ P ′′ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
Q
) [ AQﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . AP ′′ = AP ′
B P
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ AP ′P ′′ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ،
P′ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ( APﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ P ′P ′′ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹP ′′
ﳒﺪ . PP ′ = PP ′′
415 ﻋﺎﻡ 2001
Pﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BPP ′ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ
′BP = π − B
BP
′P = P
′PB = 12 B
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ APP ′ﻭ APP ′′ﺃﻥﹼ
AP
′′P = AP
′P = 12 B
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
AQ + QP ′′ = AP ′′ = AP ′ = AB + BP = AQ + QB
P ′′ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ .QB = QP ′′
Q P ﳓﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
= PP
QBP QB = QP ′′ﻭ
′′Q = 12 B
B
P ′′ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ PQBﻭ PQP ′′ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
QB PQ QP ′′
Q P = =
sin BPQ ) /2
sin(B ′′
sin QPP
′′ = sin BPQ
. sin QPPﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﺎﻥ : ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
B
. BQPﺇﺫﻥ ) ( PQﻫﻮ QPPﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ′′
= PQP ′′ = BPQ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ BP ′′ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﳒﺪ ، PB = PP ′′ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
= ، B 2π ، 12 Bﺇﺫﻥ
= BP = ′P π BPP ′ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
3 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻧﻪ ﳚﻌﻞ .C = 0
′′ + BPQ
.QPPﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bﻭ Pﻭ P ′′ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ = π
ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ P ′′ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( BPﻭ ) ، ( ACﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ .C = P ′′
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
C
= BP
′′Q = 12 B
= C + Bﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ 2π
3 ﻭﻷﻥﹼ
Bﻭ = 2π
C Aﻭ = 4π
= π
9 9 3
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 416
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ aﻭ bﻭ cﻭ dﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . a > b > c > d > 0ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ac + bd = ( b + d + a − c )( b + d − a + c
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ab + cdﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ.
ﻟﻨﻀﻊ α = a + dﻭ . β = b − cﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ac + bd = ac + ( c + β )d = αc + βd
) ( b + d + a − c )( b + d − a + c ) = ( α + β ) ( b + d − a + c
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﻟﹶﻨﺎ ، ( α + β )( b + d − a + c ) = αc + βdﺃﻭ
)(H ) α (a − b − d ) = β (c + b − a
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n = ab + cdﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
n = a ( c + β ) + cd = βa + αc
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ) δ = gcd ( α, βﻭﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ α′ﻭ β ′ﻭ n ′ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ α = δα′ﻭ β = δβ ′
ﻭ . n ′ = β ′a + α′cﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ . n = δn ′
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ n ′ ≥ a + c > 1 ،ﻷﻥﹼ α′ ≥ 1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ . β ′ ≥ 1
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ . δ = 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ، ( Hﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
λﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ a − b − d = λβﻭ . c + b − a = λαﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﳒﺪ
) c − d = λ (a + b + d − c
ﺃﻭ ) . ( 1 + λ ) (c − d ) = λ ( a + b
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ . λ ≠ 0ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ a > c − dﻭ ، b > c − dﺇﺫﻥ
1 1+λ a +b
1+
= = >2
λ λ c −d
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ 0 < λ < 1ﻷﻥﹼ λﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ .ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﹼﻥ . δ > 1ﺇﺫﻥ
n = δn ′ﻣﻊ δ > 1ﻭ n ′ > 1ﻓﻬﻮ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ .ﻭﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓù .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
) ( ab + cd )( ad + bc ) = ( ac + bd ) ( b 2 + d 2 + bd
ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ab + cd > ac + bd > ad + bcﲡﻌﻞ ﻛﻮﻥ ab + cdﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻣﺮﺍﹰ
ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼﹰ.
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Tﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ℕ2ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . x + y < nﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Tﺑﺄﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﲔ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﲢﻘﱡﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) ( x , yﲪﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) ( x ′, y ′ﻣﻦ Tﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ x ′ ≤ xﻭ y ′ ≤ yﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻧﺴﻤﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Tﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ، Xﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ Tﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ
ﺍﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ .Yﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ Xﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ .Y
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 0 ≤ k < nﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ C kﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﰲ Tﺍﻟﱵ
ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . kﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Rkﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﰲ Tﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺍﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Xﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ، Xﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ Yﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ Yﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
card ( X ) = C 0C 1 ⋯C n −1ﻭ card ( Y ) = R0R1 ⋯ Rn −1
n−1 ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
ւ
Y C 0C 1 ⋯C n −1 = R0R1 ⋯ Rn −1
ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ،
ւ
X
σﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ } { 0,1, …, n − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
Rσ( k ) = C kﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 0 ≤ k < n
ﳚﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ
O n−1 .T
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮﺍﹰ ،ﺇﺫ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
C k = n − k = Rk
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ،ﺇﺫﹾ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
) O ( 0, 0ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ،ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Rk = C kﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . k
417
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 418
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ Tﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ
، mﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ Tﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . m
ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ) ( x 0, y 0ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ x 0 + y0ﺃﻋﻈﻤﻴﺎﹰ ﺑﲔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﹼﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﰲ . Tﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) ( x 0, jﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ jﰲ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {y0 + 1, …, n − 1 − x 0ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ) ( x 0, jﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ jﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0, …, y 0ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﲪﺮﺍﺀ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
C x0 = n − 1 − x 0 − y0
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﺃﻥﹼ . Ry0 = n − 1 − x 0 − y 0ﺇﺫﻥ ،C x 0 = Ry0ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
tﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻱ .C x 0 = Ry0 = t
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔﹰ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ،ﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ
ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ . m − 1ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ C k′ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ kﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻭﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Rk′ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺍﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ k
ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ .ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, n − 1 }\{y0 } , Rk′ = Rk , Ry′0 = Ry0 + 1
( ∗ )
∀k ∈ { 0, …, n − 1 }\{ x 0 } , C k′ =C k , C x′ 0 = C x 0 + 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ
} σ : { 0, …, n − 1 } → { 0, …, n − 1
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . ∀k ∈ { 0, …, n − 1 } , Rσ′ ( k ) = C k′
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، σ ( x 0 ) = y0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ Rσ( k ) = C kﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . { 0, …, n − 1
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، σ ( x 0 ) ≠ y0ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ
} A = {i : C i′ = tﻭ } B = { j : Rj′ = t
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ x 0 ∈ Aﻭ . y0 ∈ Bﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ iﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ Aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ Rσ′ ( i ) = C i′ﺃﻥﹼ ، σ ( i ) ∈ Bﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . σ ( A ) ⊂ B ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
jﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ Bﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ) Rj′ = C σ′ −1( jﺃﻥﹼ ، σ−1 ( j ) ∈ Aﻭﻣﻦ
ﺛﹶﻢ ، σ−1 ( B ) ⊂ A ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ . σ ( A ) = B
419 ﻋﺎﻡ 2002
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ τbb′ﻣﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ bﻭ b ′ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ، Bﺣﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ σɶ = τbb′ σﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ Rσɶ′ ( k ) = C k′ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ kﻣﻦ } . { 0, …, n − 1
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ σﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ σ ′ = τσ( x 0 ),y0 σﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ
ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ∀k ∈ { 0, …, n − 1 } , Rσ′ ′( k ) = C k′ﻭ . σ ′ ( x 0 ) = y0
ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∗ ( ،ﺃﻥﹼ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, n − 1 } , Rσ′( k ) = C k
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . mﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ
ù ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ] [ BCﻗﻄﺮﺍﹰ ﰲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ .Oﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Aﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ Γﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
< 2π
0 < AOB
3
ABﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .Cﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻂ Dﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
Oﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ) ( DAﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ( AC ) ﰲ . Iﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [OAﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
Γﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Eﻭ . Fﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ Iﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ CEFﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
A ﺇ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ Iﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .CEF
D E ﺳﻨﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﺮﻫﺎﻧﺎﹰ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﹰ .ﺇﺫ ﺳﻨﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
I
F
ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ℂﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ، Γﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
B C
O
ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ zC = 1ﻫﻮ ﳑﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Cﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ −1ﻫﻮ ﳑﺜﹼﻞ
Γ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Bﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Aﻓﻴﻤﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، e i θﺍﻟﺬﻱ ،ﺑﻨﺎ ﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ
π
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ . < θ < πﺳﻨﻌﺮﻑ ) ، α = exp ( i θ/2ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ α2ﻫﻮ
3
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . A
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻓﻴﻤﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . exp ( i π +2 θ ) = i α
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ OAEﻭ OAFﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭ ﻳﻲ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﳝﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) ، z E = exp ( i θ − π3ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) z F = exp ( i θ + π3ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . F
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 420
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) ، ω = exp ( i π/6ﺃﻣﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺮﻥ
ﻛﻞﹼ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ :
O A B C D E F
0 α2 −1 1 i α ω 2α 2 ω 2α 2
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Iﻓﻬﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ACﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﹰ ) . ( AD
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ sﻭ tﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
OI = tDAﻭ CI = sCA
ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ z Iﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Iﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) z I = t ( α 2 − i α ) = 1 + s ( α2 − 1
ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ
(1 − s ) α
+ (s − t ) α + i t = 0
ﻭﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﳒﺪ ، ( 1 − t ) Re ( α ) = 0ﺃﻭ . t = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Iﻫﻮ . z I = α2 − i α
ﺳﻨﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ] [ BCﻭ ] [CAﻭ ] [ ABﻫﻲ aﻭ bﻭ c
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ Iﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ I
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺜﻘﹼﻠﺔ ) ( A;aﻭ ) ( B ;bﻭ ) . (C ; cﺃﻱ
aIA + bIB + cIC = 0
ﺳﻨﺮﺟﺊ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ
ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﹼﻖﹴ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
EF = ω 2α2 − ω 2α2 = 2 sin = ) ( π3 3
FC = 1 − ω 2α2 = 2 sin ( θ2 + π6 ) = 2 sin ( θ2 + π6 ) = 2 Im αω ( )
θ π θ π
EC = 1 − ω 2α2 = 2 sin ( − ) = 2 sin ( − ) = 2 Im αω ( )
2 6 2 6
< . π6 < θ2 π
2 ﺇﺫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
421 2002 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
A = EF ⋅ zC + FC ⋅ z E + EC ⋅ z F
= 3 + 2 Im ( αω ) α2 ω 2 + 2 Im ( αω ) α2ω 2
= 3 − i ( ( αω − αω ) α2 ω 2 + ( αω − αω ) α2ω 2 )
= 3 − i ( α3 ω − αω 3 + α3ω − αω 3 )
= 3 − i α3 ( ω + ω ) = 3 − 2 i α3 cos ( π6 )
= 3 ( 1 − i α3 )
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
B = ( EF + FC + EC ) ⋅ z I
= ( 3 + 2 Im ( αω ) + 2 Im ( αω ) ) ( α2 − i α )
= ( 3 + 2 Im ( α ( ω + ω ) ) ) ( α2 − i α )
= ( 3 − 2 i cos ( π6 )( α − α ))( α 2
− i α)
= 3 ( α − i ( α2 − 1 ) ) ( α − i )
= 3 ( i + α − i α2 ) ( α − i ) = 3 ( 1 − i α3 )
ﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺗ، A = B ﻓﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
EF ⋅ ( zC − z I ) + FC ⋅ ( z E − z I ) + EC ⋅ ( z F − z I ) = 0
ﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳI ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ، EF ⋅ IC + FC ⋅ IE + EC ⋅ IF = 0 ﺃﻭ
. ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ، ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰCEF ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
A ﻒ ( ﻣﻨﺼAM ) ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ.ﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺷﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻟﻨﺄﺕ
BM BA c
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ، = = ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ، BAC
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
CM CA b
ca
I . BM = ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ، bMB + cMC = 0
c +b
B
M
C ﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ( ﻣﻨﺼBI ) ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ، ABC
IA BA c (c + b )
ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎ ﺩ ﺓ ﻣﻦ، aIA + (c + b ) IM = 0 ﻭ ﻣﻨﻪ، = =
IM BM ca
ù . ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ. aIA + bIB + cIC = 0 = 0 ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥﹼbMB + cMC = 0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 422
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( m, nﻣﻦ ℕ 2ﻣﻊ ، n ≥ 3ﻧﻌﺮﻑ Am,nﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ a
ﺍ ﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮ ﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ a n + a 2 − 1ﻗﺎ ﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪ ﺩ . a m + a − 1ﺃ ﻭ ﺟﺪ ﺍ ﻟﺜﻨﺎ ﺋﻴﺎﺕ
) ( m, nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ∞. card ( Am,n ) = +
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ a ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Am,nﻳﻜﻮﻥ
an + a 2 − 1 ≤ am + a − 1 < am + a 2 − 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، a n < a mﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ n < m ﻷﻥﹼ . a > 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ) ( m, nﻣﻦ ℕ2ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
∞ card ( Am,n ) = +ﻣﻊ n ≥ 3
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، m > nﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺜﲑﻱ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Am
ﻭ Bnﻣﻦ ] ، ℤ [ Xﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
Am ( X ) = X m + X − 1ﻭ Bn ( X ) = X n + X 2 − 1
ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Amﻋﻠﻰ Bnﳒﺪ ﻛﺜﲑﻱ ﺣﺪﻭ ﺩ Qﻭ Rﻣﻦ ] ℤ [ X
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
Am = QBn + Rﻭ deg R < n
) R (x
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ ، lim ( ) = 0ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ x 0 ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
x →∞ Bn x
) R (x
∀x > x 0 , <1
) Bn ( x
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ aﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ Am,nﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ x 0ﻛﺎﻥ
) R (a ) A (a
= m } − Q ( a ) ∈ ℤ ∩ ]−1,1[ = { 0
) Bn ( a ) Bn ( a
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . R ( a ) = 0 ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ∞ card ( Am,n ) = +ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
Rﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻻﺎﺋﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ،ﺃﻱ . R = 0ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Bnﻳﻘﺴﻢ
ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ . Am
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ، ℓ = m − nﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
Am = X n + ℓ + X − 1 = X ℓ ( Bn + 1 − X 2 ) + X − 1
) = X ℓBn + ( 1 − X ) ( X ℓ +1 + X ℓ − 1
423 ﻋﺎﻡ 2002
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ Bn | Amﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ gcd ( X − 1, Bn ) = 1ﻷﻥﹼ Bn ( 1 ) ≠ 0ﺃ ﹼﻥ
Bnﻳﻘﺴﻢ . X ℓ +1 + X ℓ − 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ ℓ + 1 ≥ nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
، ℓ ≥ 2ﻷﻥﹼ . n ≥ 3
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ 1 = X n + X 2 − Bnﺇﺫﻥ
) X ℓ +1 + X ℓ − 1 = X ℓ +1 + X ℓ − ( X n + X 2 − Bn
= X ℓ +1 − X n + X ℓ − X 2 + Bn
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Bnﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ . S ( X ) = X ℓ +1 − X n + X ℓ − X 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ Bn ( 0 ) = −1ﻭ Bn ( 1 ) = 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ α ﻣﻦ [] 0,1
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، Bn ( α ) = 0ﻭﻷﻥﹼ Bnﻳﻘﺴﻢ Sﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . S ( α ) = 0ﺃﻭ
α ℓ +1 − αn + α ℓ − α2 = 0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ α ℓ ≤ α2ﻭ α ℓ +1 ≤ αnﻷﻥﹼ ℓ ≥ 2ﻭ . ℓ + 1 ≥ nﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ α ℓ = α2ﻭ ، α ℓ +1 = αnﻭﻣﻨﻪ ℓ = 2ﻭ . ℓ + 1 = nﺇﺫﻥ n = 3
ﻭ . m = n + ℓ = 5ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≥ 3ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) card ( Am,n ) = +∞ ⇒ ( m, n ) = ( 5, 3
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺇﺫ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) X 5 + X − 1 = ( X 2 − X + 1 )( X 3 + X 2 − 1
ù ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ A5,3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ . ( Am,n )m,n ≥3
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ( d j )1≤ j ≤kﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ n
ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ . 1 = d1 < d2 < ⋯ < dk = n :ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
Dn = d1d2 + d2d3 + ⋯ + dk −1dk
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . Dn ≤ n 2
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ Dnﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . n 2
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ dﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ n ﻛﺎﻥ d ′ = n /dﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، nﺇﺫﻥ
n
∀j ∈ {1, 2, …, k } , = dj
dk +1− j
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 424
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
n2 n2 n2
= Dn +⋯+ +
dkdk −1 d3d2 d2d1
k −1 k −1
1 1 1
∑⋅ =n2
≤ n ⋅ ∑ −
2
j =1 d jd j +1
j =1 d j d j +1
1 1 = n 2 1 − 1 < n 2
≤ n 2 −
d1 dk ( n )
ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .
n
= . dk −1 ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ d2 = pﻭ
p
åﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ، k = 2ﺃﻱ ، n = pﻳﻜﻮﻥ Dn = pﻭﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ . n 2
åﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ k > 2ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
n2 n2
Dn ≥ d1d2 + dk −1dk = p + >
p p
n2
< .1 ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ< p
Dn
n2
= mﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺼﻮﺭﺍﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺑﲔ 1ﻭ ، pﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Dn | n 2ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
Dn
qﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ mﻛﺎﻥ qﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، n 2ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، nﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ﻣﻦ pﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . pﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﻥﹼ Dn n 2ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ù ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ Dn | n 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ f : ℝ → ℝﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ) ( Eﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
) ( f ( x ) + f ( z ) ) ( f ( y ) + f ( t ) ) = f ( xy − zt ) + f ( xt + yz
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﻭ yﻭ zﻭ . t
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ fﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺘﻮﺛﹼﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . ( E
1
∀x ∈ ℝ, ≡ fﺃﻭ f ( x ) = x 2 f ≡ 0ﺃﻭ
2
425 ﻋﺎﻡ 2002
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ f : ℝ → ℝﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ) ، ( Eﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ x 0ﻣﻦ ℝ
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ } . f ( x 0 ) ∉ { 0, 12
åﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ y = t = 0ﻭ x = z = x 0ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﳒﺪ
) 4 f ( 0 ) f ( x 0 ) = 2f ( 0
≠ ) . f ( x0 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ f ( 0 ) = 0ﻷ ﹼﻥ
1
2
åﻭﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ y = 1ﻭ t = 0ﻭ x = z = x 0ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﳒﺪ
) 2f ( x 0 ) f (1 ) = 2f ( x 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ f ( 1 ) = 1ﻷﻥﹼ . f ( x 0 ) ≠ 0
åﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ z = t = 0ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﳒﺪ
) (1 ∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ℝ 2, ) f ( xy ) = f ( x ) f ( y
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ fﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ.
åﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ x = y = 0ﻭ z = 1ﰲ ) ( Eﳒﺪ
)(2 ∀t ∈ ℝ, ) f ( t ) = f ( −t
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ.
åﻭﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ y = xﻭ t = −zﰲ ) ، ( Eﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﳒﺪ
)(3 f ( x 2 + z 2 ) = ( f ( x ) + f ( z ) )2
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ u ≥ 0ﻛﺎﻥ
f ( u ) = f ( ( u )2 + 02 ) = ( f ( u ) + f ( 0 ) )2 ≥ 0
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﻴﻤﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﺑﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ.
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ v > u ≥ 0ﻭﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ w = v − uﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ( v ) = f ( w 2 + ( u )2 ) = ( f ( w ) + f ( u ) )2 ≥ ( f ( u ) )2 = f ( u
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ +
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 3ﻭ ) ( 1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ xﻭ yﺃﻥﹼ
( f ( x ) + f ( y ) )2 = f ( x + y ) = f ( ( x + y )2 ) = ( f ( x + y ) )2
ﺃﻭ
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ( ℝ + )2 , )f ( x +y) = f ( x)+ f ( y
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 426
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ gﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
) g : ℝ + → ℝ +, g ( x ) = f ( x
ﻛﺎﻥ gﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ g ( 0 ) = 0ﻭ g ( 1 ) = 1ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
∀ ( x , y ) ∈ ( ℝ + )2 , ) g ( x + y ) = g ( x ) + g (y
åﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﻣﻦ ℕﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ, ∀x ∈ ℝ +, ) g ( nx ) = ng ( x
ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ xﰲ 1
m ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ∀m ∈ ℕ∗, mg ( m1 ) = g ( 1 ) = 1ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﻮﺿﻨﺎ
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀ ( n, m ) ∈ ℕ × ℕ ∗, g ( mn ) = mn
ﺃﻭ . ∀r ∈ ℚ +, g ( r ) = r
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻣﻦ ، ℝ +ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺘﲔ ( rn )n ∈ ℕﻭ ( sn )n ∈ ℕﻣﻦ ℚ +ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
∀n ∈ ℕ, sn ≤ x ≤ rn
ﻭ . lim rn = lim sn = xﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ gﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ
∞→ n ∞→ n
∀n ∈ ℕ, sn ≤ g ( sn ) ≤ g ( x ) ≤ g ( rn ) = rn
ﻭﲜﻌﻞ nﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ ﳒﺪ . g ( x ) = xﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀x ≥ 0, f( x)= x
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2
∀x ≥ 0, f (x ) = x
ù . ∀x ∈ ℝ,ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ. ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ،ﻷﻥﹼ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﳒﺪ f ( x ) = x 2
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃ ﻛﱪ ﺃ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻱ . 3ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ ﻱ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺍﹰ nﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻟﺪ ﻭ ﺍ ﺋﺮ
. ( Γk )1≤k ≤nﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oiﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 (n − 1 ) π
∑ ≤
4
1≤i < j ≤n OiO j
427 ﻋﺎﻡ 2002
ﺗﻜﻤﻦ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﱠ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﹼﺐ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n ≥ 3ﺃﻻﹼ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﻦ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، i ≠ jﻧﻌﺮﻑ ∆ijﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﺎ ﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Γ j
A3
A4
Oi Oj
ϕij
C ij
A2
A1
ﻟﻨﻀﻊ C ijﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [OiO jﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ C ijﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ Γiﻭ . Γ j
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ] [ A1A3ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ) . (OiO jﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ
C ijﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ A1ﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﰲ ، A2ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﳝﺲ Γ jﻷﻥﹼ C ijﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ .ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . A3ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ∆ijﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
) ، Aﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ) . ((OiO jﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ A1A2ﻭ 3A4
Oﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻴﻬﻤﺎ .ﺇﺫﻥ
ϕijﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ A1A2ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ iC ij A2
Oi A2 1 2
) (1 = sin ϕij = =
OiC ij OiC ij OiO j
ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ∆ijﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ µ ( ∆ij ) = 2ϕijﻷ ﻥﹼ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γi
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ،
} ∆ij = { M ∈ Γi : 0 ≤ Oi M ⋅ OiO j ≤ 2
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Ki = ∪ ∆ijﻣﻦ . Γiﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ } ( ∆ij )j ∈ ℕ n \{iﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ
j ≠i
ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ) ،ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ Mﰲ ∆ijﻭ ∆ij ′ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ M
ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ Γ jﻭ Γ j ′ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ( ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 = ) µ ( Ki ∑ µ ( ∆ij ) = 2∑ ϕij
j ≠i j ≠i
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 428
ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ µ ( Ki ) ≤ 2πﺗﺆ ﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺃﻗﻞﹼ ﺩ ﻗﹼﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺇﺫﹾ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ nﺑﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ ) . ( n − 1
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ، Γiﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Liﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ M
Li Γi ﺇﱃ Liﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ } ( Γ j )j ∈ℕ n \{iﲨﻴﻌﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻧﺼﻒ
Oi
M
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻱ Oiﻭﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ Mﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
Γj
. Γiﻧﻘﻨﻊ ﺃﻧﻔﺴﻨﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
Oj
} Li = { M ∈ Γi : ∀j ∈ ℕ n \{i } , Oi M ⋅ OiO j < 0
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ∅ = ، Li ∩ Kiﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ Mﺇﱃ Kiﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ M
، ( Γ j )j ∈ℕﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻌﲎ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ Mﺇﱃ Li ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﻳﻘﻄﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﺲ ،ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ
} n \{ i
ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ Mﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γiﻻ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺃ ﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ } . ( Γ j )j ∈ℕ n \{iﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(3 ∀i ∈ ℕ n , µ ( Li ) + µ ( Ki ) ≤ 2π
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γ0ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ
}) N = { M ∈ Γ 0 : ∃ ( i, j ) ∈ ℕ2n , ( i ≠ j ) ∧ (OM ⋅ OiO j = 0
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . µ ( Γ 0 \ N ) = 2π
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Mﻣﻦ ، Γ 0 \ Nﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) . m ( M ) = max (OM ⋅ OO jﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
1≤ j ≤n
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( Li′ )i∈ ℕ nﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
} Li′ = { M ∈ Γ0 \ N : m ( M ) = OM ⋅ OOi
ﻭﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
. Γ0 \ N = ∪ i ∈ ℕ n Li′
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ k ≠ jﻛﺎﻥ ∅ = . Lk′ ∩ Lj′
) . ∀i ∈ ℕ n , µ ( Li′ ) = µ ( Li
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ .ﻭﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ Mﺇﱃ
Lk′ ∩ Lj′ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ،OM ⋅ OO j = OM ⋅ OOkﻭﻣﻨﻪ OM ⋅ OkO j = 0ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
Mﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ Nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ.
429 ﻋﺎﻡ 2002
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ τiﺍﻻﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻪ ،OOiﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ، v ֏ v + OOi ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ . τi ( Li′ ) = Li
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﺇﱃ Li′ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀j ∈ ℕ n \{i } , OM ⋅ OO j < OM ⋅ OOi
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∀j ∈ ℕ n \{i } , OM ⋅ (OO j − OOi ) < 0
ﺃﻭ
∀j ∈ ℕ n \{i } , OM ⋅ OiO j < 0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) M ′ = τi ( Mﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ،OM = Oi M ′ﺇﺫﻥ
(
M ∈ Li′ ⇔ ∀j ∈ ℕ n \{i } , )
Oi M ′ ⋅ OiO j < 0 ⇔ M ′ ∈ Li
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ Liﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ Li′ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ، τiﻭﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ∀i ∈ ℕ n , µ ( Li′ ) = µ ( Li
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ .ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
n n
)(4 = ) ∑ µ ( Li ∑ µ ( Li′ ) = µ ( Γ0 \ N ) = 2π
i =1 i =1
ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺤﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ
L1 L5
L4
L2 L3
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 3ﻭﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﳒﺪ
n
2π + ∑ µ ( Ki ) ≤ 2πn
i =1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 430
ﺃﻭ
n
) ∑ µ ( Ki ) ≤ 2π ( n − 1
i =1
ﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 2ﳒﺪ
∑ ) ϕij ≤ π ( n − 1
1≤i ≠ j ≤n
2
،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ = sin ( ϕij ) ≤ ϕij
OiO j
4 2
∑ OiO j = ∑ OiO j
1≤i < j ≤n 1≤i ≠ j ≤n
= ∑ sin ϕij
1≤i ≠ j ≤n
≤ ∑ ) ϕij ≤ π ( n − 1
1≤i ≠ j ≤n
ﺃﻭ
1 ) π (n − 1
∑ ≤
4
1≤i < j ≤n OiO j
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
QWE
AgD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Sﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ } . ℕ 106 = {1, 2, …,1000000ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ Sﻣﺆ ﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ 101ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﹰ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ( x i )1≤i ≤100ﻣﻦ S
ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( x i + A )i ∈ ℕ 100ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﺃﻱ
∀ ( i, j ) ∈ ℕ 2100 , ∅ = ) (i ≠ j ) ⇒ ( xi + A ) ∩ ( x j + A
ﻧﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ } . a + B = {a + b : b ∈ B
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ .ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Sﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ℕﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ
Sﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . kﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
) k (k − 1
n > (m − 1 ) 1 +
2( )
ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ Bﻣﻦ Sﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ mﻭﲢﻘﱢﻖ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
(b + A )b ∈Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ.
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
= ∗A } { a − a ′ : ( a , a ′ ) ∈ A2
} = { 0 } ∪ {a − a ′ : ( a, a ′ ) ∈ A2, a > a ′
ﻓﻨﺮﻯ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
) k (k − 1
card ( A∗ ) ≤ 1 + C k2 = 1 +
2
( br )2≤r ≤m åﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ b1ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹴ ﻣﻦ ، Sﺃﻱ ،b1 = min Sﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
(
)) ∗br = min S \( ∪ ( bk + A
1≤k <r
) : 2≤r ≤m
ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ )) ∗ S \( ∪ ( bk + Aﻟﻴﺴﺖ
1≤k <r
ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ brﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ) ، (b1, b2, …, br −1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 2 ≤ r ≤ m
431
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 432
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ
r −1
≤ )) ∗card( ∪ ( bk + A ) ∗∑ card (bk + A∗ ) ≤ ( r − 1 ) card ( A
1≤k <r k =1
) ≤ ( m − 1 ) card ( A∗ ) ≤ ( m − 1 ) ( 1 + C k2
ﺇﺫﻥ
( )
)) ∗card S \( ∪ ( bk + A∗ )) ≥ card ( S ) − card( ∪ ( bk + A
1≤k <r 1≤k <r
≥ n − ( m − 1 ) ( 1 + C k2 ) > 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ . (br )2≤r ≤m
åﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ r ≤ mﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Trﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ) ∗ ، ∪ ( bk + Aﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
1≤k ≤r
ﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ Tr −1 ⊂ Trﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ( S \Tr ) ⊂ ( S \Tr −1 ) ﳑﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
. br +1 ≥ brﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 0ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ∗ Aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ brﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ، Trﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
br +1 = brﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ . br ∈ ( S \Tr ) ∩ Trﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ br +1 > br
ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (br )1≤r ≤mﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ } B = {br : 1 ≤ r ≤ mﻛﺎﻥ
. card ( B ) = m
åﻟﻴﻜﻦ iﻭ jﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . 1 ≤ i < j ≤ mﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ b ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ bi + Aﻭ . bj + Aﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ Aﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ aﻭ a ′
ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . b = bj + a ′ = bi + aﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ، bj − bi = a − a ′ > 0ﺃﻥﹼ
− a′ ∈ bi + A∗ ∈ T j −1
bj = bi + a
∗∈A
ﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ (b + A )b ∈Bﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ، bjﻳﺜﺒ
ﻣﺜﲎ ،ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ n = 106ﻭ k = 101ﻭ . m = 100ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ
) k (k − 1
n = 106 > ( m − 1 ) 1 +
2 ( )
= 99 ( 1 + 50 × 101 ) = 500049
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bﻣﺆﻟﹼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ 197ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏﹴ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
ù (b + A )b ∈Bﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻣﺜﲎ.
433 ﻋﺎﻡ 2003
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ) (a, bﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
a2
2ab 2 − b 3 + 1
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ.
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Sﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ℕ∗2ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
a2
2ab 2 − b 3 + 1
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ) ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ . (a > 0
åﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ) (a,1ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ Sﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . 2 | a
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ) (a, bﻣﻦ Sﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . b > 1ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ kﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
a2
) (1 = k
2ab 2 − b 3 + 1
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ( 2a − b )b 2 + 1 ≥ 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . 2a ≥ b
å
åﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ a ≤ b < 2aﻛﺎﻥ ، ( 2a − b )b 2 + 1 ≥ a 2 + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
a2 a2
= k ≤ <1
2ab 2 − b 3 + 1 a 2 + 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 ) ( ( a, b ) ∈ S ) ∧ ( b > 1 ) ⇒ ( b = 2a ) ∨ ( b < a
åﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ b < aﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ
( 2kb 2 − a )a = k ( b 3 − 1 ) > 0
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ a ′ = 2kb 2 − aﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ aa ′ = k (b 3 − 1 ) > 0
ﻭﺃﻥﹼّ ) . ( 2kb 2 − a ′ )a ′ = k ( b 3 − 1ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ∗ a ′ ∈ ℕﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ ) ( a ′, b
ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ . S
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) α+ = max ( a, a ′ﻭ ) . α− = min (a, a ′ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
α− + α+ = 2kb 2
ﺃﻥﹼ ، α+ ≥ kb 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ) kb 2α− ≤ α+α− = k ( b 3 − 1ﺇﺫﻥ
b 2α− ≤ b 3 − 1 < b 3
ﺃﻭ ، α− < bﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ، b < aﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ α− = a ′ﻭ . α+ = a
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 434
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ a ′ < bﻭﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃ ﹼﻥ . 2a ′ = b
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ a ′ = 2kb 2 − aﻭ ) aa ′ = k (b 3 − 1ﺃﻥﹼ
a = 8ka ′2 − a ′ﻭ aa ′ = 8ka ′3 − k
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، k = a ′2ﺇﺫﻥ ) . (a, b ) = ( 8a ′4 − a ′, 2a ′
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) (a, bﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ Sﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ 1 < b < aﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ℓﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . (a, b ) = ( 8ℓ 4 − ℓ, 2ℓ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ) ( 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} ∗S ⊂ {( 2ℓ,1 ) : ℓ ∈ ℕ∗ } ∪ {( ℓ, 2ℓ ) : ℓ ∈ ℕ∗ } ∪ {( 8ℓ 4 − ℓ, 2ℓ ) : ℓ ∈ ℕ
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝﹲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﺣﺔ.
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
} ∗S = {( 2ℓ,1 ) : ℓ ∈ ℕ∗ } ∪ {( ℓ, 2ℓ ) : ℓ ∈ ℕ∗ } ∪ {( 8ℓ 4 − ℓ, 2ℓ ) : ℓ ∈ ℕ
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﲔ ﰲ
3
.ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ. ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ
2
ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
A
≥ . Aﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ π
3 ﲤﻬﻴﺪ :ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻓﻴﻪ
c b
m ] . [ BCﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍ ﺟﺤﺔ ، AM ≤ 23 BCﻭ ﺗﻘﻊ
M
B a C ﺍ ﳌﺴﺎ ﻭ ﺍ ﺓ ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇ ﺫ ﺍ ﻛﺎ ﻥ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ
ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ.
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ aﻭ bﻭ cﺇﱃ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ] [ BCﻭ ] [ ACﻭ ] ، [ ABﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ mﺇﱃ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ] . [ AMﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ
a 2 = b 2 + c 2 − 2bc cos A
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) −2bc = (b − c )2 − (b 2 + c 2ﺇﺫﻥ
a 2 = ( b 2 + c 2 ) ( 1 − cos A ) + ( b − c )2 cos A
435 ﻋﺎﻡ 2003
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺃﻥﹼ ) 4m 2 + a 2 = 2 (b 2 + c 2ﺇﺫﻥ
2a 2 = ( 4m 2 + a 2 ) ( 1 − cos A ) + 2 ( b − c )2 cos A
ﺃﻭ
1 + cos A 2 2 cos A
4m 2 = a − ( b − c )2
1 − cos A 1 − cos A
1 + cos A 2 1 + cos A
= a + ( b − c )2 1 −
1 − cos A 1 − cos A
= ( a 2 − ( b − c )2 ) cot2 ( 12 A ) + ( b − c )2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ a ≥ b − cﻷﻥﹼ aﻭ bﻭ cﻫﻲ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) θ ֏ cot2 ( θ
ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ] . ] 0, π2ﺇﺫﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ A ≥ π3ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ π2 ≥ 12 A ≥ π6ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
cot2 ( 12 A ) ≤ cot2 ( π6 ) = 3ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . A = π3ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
4m 2 ≤ 3a 2 − 2 ( b − c )2 ≤ 3a 2
ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ b = cﻭ . A = π3ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺠﺰ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ.
ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺘﻨﺎ ،ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻲ A0A1A2A3A4A5ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﰲ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ d0ﻭ d1ﻭ d2ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ) ( A0A3ﻭ ) ( A1A4ﻭ ) ( A2A5ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
(d0, d1 ) + (d1, d2 ) + (d2, d0 ) = 0 mod π
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ) (d0, d1ﺃﻭ ) (d1, d2ﺃﻭ ) (d2, d0ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . π3
ﺇﺫﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
A4
M3 A3 . (d0, d1 ) ≥ π3ﻟﺘﻜﻦ B0ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ d0ﻭ ، d1
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ M 0ﻭ M 3ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ A0A1ﻭ ] . [ A3A4
B0
A5 A2 ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ B0A0A1ﻭ B0A3A4ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ
A0 M0 A1
ﰲ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ، B0 ≥ π3ﳒﺪ
3 3
≤ B0M 3 ≤ B0M 0ﻭ A3A4 AA
2 2 0 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
3
( A0A1 + A3A4 ) = M 0M 3 ≤ B0M 0 + B0M 3
2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 436
ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
3 3
= B0M 3ﻭ M 0M 3 = B0M 0 + B0M 3 = B0M 0ﻭ A3A4 AA
2 2 0 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ B0A0A1ﻭ B0A3A4ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﻲ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ B0ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، ( M 0M 3ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥﹼ
π
= A0A1A4 = A1A0A3 = A0A3A4 = A1A4A3 ) ( A0A1 ) ( A3A4ﻭ
3
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃ ﹼﻥ . (d0, d1 ) = B0 = π3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
2π
= ) (d1, d2 ) + (d2, d0 3
mod π
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ ) (d1, d2ﺃﻭ ) (d2, d0ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . π3ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ،ﺩﻭﻥ
ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . (d1, d2 ) ≥ π3ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞﹴ ﳌﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ
= ) (d1, d2ﻭﺃﻥﹼ π
3 ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
π
= A1A2A5 = A2A1A4 = A1A4A5 = A2A5A4 ) ( A1A2 ) ( A4A5ﻭ
3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ (d2, d0 ) = π3ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
π
) ( A2A3 ) ( A5A0ﻭ = A2A3A0 = A3A2A5 = A2A5A0 = A3A0A5
3
2π
ù .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ. ﻭﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
3
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎ ﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ . ABCDﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻭ Qﻭ Rﺍ ﳌﺴﺎ ﻗﻂ ﺍ ﻟﻘﺎ ﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Dﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BCﻭ ) (CAﻭ ) ( ABﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ PQ = QRﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ ABCﻭ ADCﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) . ( AC
ﻧﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻭﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ aﻭ bﻭ cﻭ dﲤﺜﹼﻞ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ . Dﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻻ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ Dﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Pﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ tﻭ sﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
) p = b + s ( c − b ) = d + i t (c − b
437 ﻋﺎﻡ 2003
d −b
D
= ، s − i tﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
c −b
d −b b −d
P
= s + it (
c −b )
⋅ = cb
c −b
M L C ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ) . i t (c − b ) = 2 ( c + b − d − cbdﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
1
Q
A R 1
) p = ( c + b + d − cbd
B 2
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﹶﻠﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ qﻭ rﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﺜﹼﻼﻥ Qﻭ Rﳒﺪ
1 1
) q = ( a + c + d − acdﻭ ) r = ( b + a + d − abd
2 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1
= PQ = q − p a − b 1 − cd = a − b c − d
2 2
1 1
= a − b c − d = AB ⋅ CD
2 2
1 1
RQ = r − p = b − c ⋅ 1 − ad = b − c ⋅ a − d
2 2
1 1
= b − c ⋅ a − d = BC ⋅ AD
2 2
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
BA DA
⇔ PQ = QR ⇔ AB ⋅ CD = BC ⋅ AD =
BC DC
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Mﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ABCﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، ( AC
ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Lﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ADCﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ACﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ M
ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ACﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻃﻮﻟﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] ، [ ACﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﻴﻦ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
MA BA
.ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺘﻌﻴﻦ Lﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ = ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ACﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺓ
MC BC
LA DA
.ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ = ] [ ACﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
LC DC
MA LA
⇔ PQ = QR = ⇔M =L
MC LC
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ PQ = QRﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻼﻗﻰ ﻣﻨﺼﻔﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ ABCﻭ ADCﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ
ù ) . ( ACﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 438
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ( x k )1≤k ≤nﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
2
n ) ≤ 2 ( n − 1
2 n
2
∑ i ∑
xi − x j ) ( xi − x j
, j =1 3 i , j =1
ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ( x k )1≤k ≤n ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
1
= ، xﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ yi = xi − xﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . 1 ≤ i ≤ nﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ x
n
n ∑ i =1 i
n n
∑ = xi − x j ∑ yi − y j = 2 ∑ ) ( y j − yi
i , j =1 i , j =1 1≤i < j ≤n
=2 ∑ yj − 2 ∑ yi
1≤i < j ≤n 1≤i < j ≤n
n n −1
∑= 2 ( j − 1 )y j − 2 ∑ ( n − i )yi
j =2 i =1
n
= 2∑ ( 2k − 1 − n ) yk
k =1
ﺇﺫﻥ
n n
) (1 ∑ xi − x j = 2∑ ( 2k − 1 − n ) yk
i , j =1 k =1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n n n n n
2 2
= ) ∑ ( xi − x j = ) ∑ ( yi − y j ∑ yi2 + ∑ y j2 − 2 ∑ yiy j
i , j =1 i , j =1 i , j =1 i , j =1 i , j =1
n 2
n
= 2n ⋅ ∑ yk2 − 2 ∑ yk
k =1
k =1
0
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ . ∑ k =1 yk = nx − nx = 0ﺇﺫﻥ
n
n n
2
)(2 ∑ ( xi − x j ) = 2n ⋅ ∑ yk2
i , j =1 k =1
439 ﻋﺎﻡ 2003
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ-ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
n 2 n n
)(3 ∑ ( 2k − 1 − n ) yk ≤ ∑ ( 2k − 1 − n )2 ⋅ ∑ yk2
k =1 k =1 k =1
ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ λﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
)(4 ∀k ∈ ℕ n , ) yk = λ ( 2k − 1 − n
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n n n n
∑ ( 2k − 1 − n )2 = 4∑ k 2 − 4 ( n + 1 ) ∑ k + ( n + 1 )2 ∑ 1
k =1 k =1 k =1 k =1
) 2n ( n + 1 )( 2n + 1
= − 2n ( n + 1 )2 + n ( n + 1 )2
3
) n (n + 1
= ( 3 )
) ) ( 2 ( 2n + 1 ) − 3 ( n + 1
)n (n 2 − 1
=
3
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﻮﺿﻨﺎ ) ( 1ﻭ ) ( 2ﰲ ) ( 3ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
n 2 2 (n 2 − 1 ) n
2
∑ x i − x j ) ⋅ ∑ ( xi − x j
≤
i , j =1 3 i , j =1
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( 4ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ λﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
n +1
∀k ∈ ℕ n , x k = 2λ k −( 2
+x )
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ( x k )1≤k ≤nﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻮﻧﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ( x k )1≤k ≤nﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ
aﻭ bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ x k = ak + bﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ nﻣﻊ . a ≥ 0ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
، x = a n +2 1 + bﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ x k = a ( k − n +2 1 ) + x ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ . ℕ nﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ
ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻮﻥ ( x k )1≤k ≤nﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ
ù ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 440
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ qﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀n ∈ ℤ, ) q (n p − p
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ λpﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
p
p −1
= λp = 1 + p + ⋯ + p p −1
p −1
åﻧﻼﺣﻆ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﺃﻥﹼ ، λp = 1 + p mod p 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ λpﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 1 ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ) ، p 2ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﺳﺎﻭﻯ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﺎ λpﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 1
ﱄ qﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ λpﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . q ≠ 1 mod p 2
ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ . (p 2ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺳﻢﹴ ﺃﻭ ﹼ
åﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ q ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ .ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . q | ( n p − pﺃﻱ . n p = p mod q
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ q | λpﻭ ) λp | ( p p − 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . n p = p p mod q = 1 mod q
2
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ rﺭﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﰲ . ℤ/q ℤﺃﻱ } r = min {k > 0 : n k = 1 mod qﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ rﻗﺎﲰﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ q − 1ﻷﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﻴﺔ ×) ( ℤ/q ℤﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . q − 1
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ rﻗﺎﲰﺎﹼ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ p 2ﻷﻥﹼ . n p = 1 mod q
2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ r = p 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، p 2 | (q − 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻷﻥﹼ . q ≠ 1 mod p 2
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ } . r ∈ {1, pﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، n p = 1 mod qﻭﻣﻨﻪ . p = 1 mod q
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ λpﺃﻥﹼ
p −1 p −1
= λp = ∑ pk ∑ ( 1 mod q ) = p mod q
k =0 k =0
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، q | λpﺇﺫﻥ q | pﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ.
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . q | ( n p − pﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ
ù ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
QWE
A gD
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
] [ BC ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ . AB ≠ ACﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ
ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ ﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﰲ Mﻭ Nﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﺮ ﺗﻴﺐ .ﻧﺴﻤﻲ Oﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
. MONﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [ BCﻭﻧﺴﻤﻲ Rﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻨﺼﻔﹶﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ
BACﻭ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺗﲔ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ BMRﻭ CNRﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
A ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ BC
C
N ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ Aﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] ، [ BC
ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ.
M R
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ BCNMﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
B LO C
. MNAﻭ ﺍ ﻟﺸﺮ ﻁ AB ≠ AC =B NMAﻭ
=C
ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ B ≠ Cﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. AN ≠ AM
MONﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ MONﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ MNﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Rﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ MNﻭﻣﻨﺼﻒ
MANﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . MANﺇﺫﹾ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻛﻮﻥ . AN ≠ AM ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Cﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . AMNﳝﺮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ MNﲟﻨﺘﺼﻒ
MNﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﺮ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
MAN ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
MNﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Rﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Cﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
ﲟﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
MNﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ . A
MOBﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ NOCﻭ
= π − 2B = π − 2C ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
= π − ( π − 2C
MON ) − ( π − 2B
) = 2B
+ 2C
− π = π − 2A
. MNO
= NMO =A ﺇﺫﻥ
ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ،ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) (ONﻭ ) (OMﳝﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ R
ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ MONﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻟﻨﺴﻢ L ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ
BACﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ] . [ BCﻓﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ Rﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
] . [ AL
441
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 442
A ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ، AMRNﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
C
N
= RMN
= RMA
RNC
+ NMA
M R
+C
= 12 A = BLR
B L C RMB = RNM
= RNA
+ MNA
+B
= 12 A = CLR
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﲔ LRNCﻭ LRMBﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﻥ ،ﻓﺎﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
RNCﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ RMBﺗﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Lﻣﻦ ] . [ BCﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ
ù ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ] ℝ[X ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ Pﻣﻦ
) P ( a − b ) + P (b − c ) + P ( c − a ) = 2P ( a + b + c
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ aﻭ bﻭ cﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . ab + bc + ca = 0
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ Pﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ.
ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ، a = b = 0ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ab + bc + ca = 0ﺃﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، cﻭﻣﻦ
ﺛﹶﻢ
∀c ∈ ℝ, ) P ( 0 ) + P ( −c ) = P ( c
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ c = 0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، P ( 0 ) = 0ﺛﹸﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ، ∀c ∈ ℝ, P ( −c ) = P ( cﻓﻜﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Pﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﻭﻳﻨﻌﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ . 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ P
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
n
= ) P (X ∑ ak X 2k
k =1
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ
a = x αﻭ ) b = x ( 1 − αﻭ ) c = −x α ( 1 − α
ﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ . ab + bc + ca = 0ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ
) ) P ( x ( 2α−1 ) ) + P ( x ( α2 −1 ) ) + P ( x ( α2 −2α ) ) = 2P ( x ( 1−α+ α2
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ αﻭ xﻣﻦ . ℝ
443 ﻋﺎﻡ 2004
ﻭﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ x 2nﰲ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
2n 2n 2n
( 1 ) ( 2α ) − 1 )2n + ( α2 − 1 ) + ( α2 − 2α ) = 2 ( 1 − α + α2
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . α
ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ } [Q ]{ α2ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ α2ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ .Q ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
، n > 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) [ ( 2α − 1 )2n ]{ α2 } = 4n ( 2n − 1
( α2 − 1 )2n { α2 } = −2n
( α2 − 2α )2n { α2 } = 0
) 1 − α + α2 )2n { α2 } = 2n + n ( 2n − 1
(
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ، ( 1ﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ، α2ﺃﻥﹼ
) ) 4n ( 2n − 1 ) − 2n = 2 ( 2n + n ( 2n − 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ . n = 2ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ . P = a1X 2 + a2X 4
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺜﲑﻱ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ X 2ﻭ X 4ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . P ( X ) = X 2ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ،
) ( a − b )2 + ( b − c )2 + (c − a )2 = 2 ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2 − ab − bc − ac
) 2 ( a + b + c )2 = 2 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 + 2ab + 2bc + 2ac
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) 2 ( a + b + c )2 − ( a − b )2 − ( b − c )2 − (c − a )2 = 6 ( ab + bc + ac
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ab + bc + ca = 0ﻛﺎﻥ
( a − b )2 + ( b − c )2 + (c − a )2 = 2 ( a + b + c )2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . P ( X ) = X 2
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . P ( X ) = X 4ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ
σ3 = abcﻭ σ2 = ab + bc + caﻭ σ1 = a + b + c
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 = σ12 − 2σ2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 444
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
a 3 + b 3 + c 3 = σ1 ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) − σ2 ( a + b + c ) + 3σ3
= σ13 − 3σ1σ2 + 3σ3
a 4 + b 4 + c 4 = σ1 ( a 3 + b 3 + c 3 ) − σ2 ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) + σ3σ1
= σ14 − 4σ12σ2 + 4σ1σ3 + 2σ22
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ ∆ = (a − b )4 + ( b − c )4 + (c − a )4ﻛﺎﻥ
) ∆ = 2a 4 + 2b 4 + 2c 4 − 4a 3 ( b + c ) − 4b 3 ( c + a ) − 4c 3 ( a + b
) + 6 ( a 2b 2 + b 2c 2 + c 2a 2
ﺇﺫﻥ
) ∆ = 2a 4 + 2b 4 + 2c 4 − 4a 3 ( σ1 − a ) − 4b 3 ( σ1 − b ) − 4c 3 ( σ1 − c
) + 6 ( ab + bc + ca )2 − 12abc ( a + b + c
= 6 ( a 4 + b 4 + c 4 ) − 4σ1 (a 3 + b 3 + c 3 ) + 6σ22 − 12σ1σ3
) = 2σ14 + 6σ2 ( 3σ2 − 2σ12
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ σ2 = ab + bc + ca = 0ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ∆ = 2σ14ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ Pﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ
) P ( a − b ) + P ( b − c ) + P ( c − a ) = 2P ( a + b + c
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) (a, b, cﻣﻦ ، ℝ 3ﻣﻊ . ab + bc + ca = 0ﻫﻲ
} { αX 2 + βX 4 : ( α, β ) ∈ ℝ2
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﺴﻤﻲ » ﺧﻄﹼﺎﻓﺎﹰ « ﻛﻞﹼ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺎﻭﺭ
ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻧﺎ ﺕ ﺃ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺎ ﻇﺮﺍﺕ .ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ n × mﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﲞﻄﹼﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ
ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ،ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ.
445 ﻋﺎﻡ 2004
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃ ﻱ ﺭﺻﻒ ﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﲞﻄﹼﺎﻓﺎﺕ ،ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﹼﺎﻑ ، Xﻫﻨﺎﻙ
ﺧﻄﹼﺎﻑ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ Y ﻳﻐﻄﹼﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﰲ ، Xﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺑ ﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻦ
.Yﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻐﻄﹼﻲ ، Xﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻪ ،ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﰲ .Yﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻘﻂ
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ Yﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ Xﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﹼﺎﻓﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺛﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .ﰲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ
ﺍ ﻟﻄﺮ ﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﻳﺆ ﻟﹼﻒ ﺍ ﺟﺘﻤﺎ ﻉ ﻫﺬ ﻳﻦ ﺍ ﳋﻄﹼﺎ ﻓﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﹰ Tﺑﻌﺪ ﺍ ﻩ ، 3 × 4ﻭ ﰲ ﺍ ﻟﺜﺎ ﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺆ ﻟﹼﻒ
ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﻤﺎ ﺷﻜﻼﹰ ﺛﹸﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎﹰ Oﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ . 3, 2,1, 2, 3, 2,1, 2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
X
X
Y
Y
T O
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﹰ Rﺑﻌﺪﺍﻩ ، m × nﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﲞﻄﹼﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ
ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ،ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃ ﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳏﻴﻄﻪ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ Rﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﻏﲑ
ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ Tﺃﻭ Oﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳏﻴﻄﻪ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ Tﻭ O
ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺛﲏ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 12ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، mnﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎﹰ 3 | nﺃﻭ . 3 | m
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃ ﻥﹼ 4 nﻭ ، 4 mﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ nﻭ mﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﻥ ﻷﻥﹼ
. 4 | nmﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ Rﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
=R ∪ C ij
( i , j )∈ ℕ n ×ℕ m
ﻣﻊ ] ، C ij = [ i − 1, i ] × [ j − 1, jﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ kﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) χ ( kﺑﺄ ﻧﻪ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 4 | kﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . 4 kﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﱢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ C ijﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) . λij = χ ( i ) + χ ( jﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ λij = 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 4 | iﻭ ، 4 | jﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ
1
1
1
1
1
1 λij = 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 4ﻳﻘﺴﻢ iﺃﻭ jﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻤﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ.
1 1 1
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳒﺪ ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 } ∑ λij ∈ { 3, 7ﻭ } ∑ λij ∈ { 5, 7
1 1 1 C ij ⊂O C ij ⊂T
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
m n m n
∑ = λij ∑ ∑ ( χ ( i ) + χ ( j ) ) = n ∑ χ ( i ) + m ∑ χ ( j ) ∈ 2ℕ
C ij ⊂R i =1 j =1 i =1 j =1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 446
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ Tﺃﻭ Oﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻐﻄﹼﻲ Rﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 24ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، nmﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ 8 | nm ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 4ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ nﺃﻭ ، m
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﻥﹼ 4 | nﺃﻭ . 4 | m
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ nﺃﻭ mﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﺃﻭ 2ﺃﻭ . 5
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ Sﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ℕ∗2ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
) ) ( n ∉ {1, 2, 5 } ) ∧ ( m ∉ {1, 2, 5 } ) ∧ ( 3 | mn ) ∧ ( ( 4 | n ) ∨ ( 4 | m
ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ m × nﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﲞﻄﹼﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ،ﻭﻻ
ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳏﻴﻄﻪ .ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ) ( m, nﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . S
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) ( m, nﻣﻦ . Sﻭﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ Rﺑﻌﺪﺍﻩ m × nﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ Tﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ.
ﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ ) ( m, n ) = ( 3k, 4k ′ﺃ ﻭ ) ( m, n ) = ( 4k, 3k ′ﺍ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺤﺔ ،ﺑﺮﺻﻒ
kk ′ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ .T
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( m, n ) = ( 12k, nﻣﻊ ، gcd ( 12, n ) = 1ﻭ } . n ∉ {1, 2, 5ﺑﺈ ﺟﺮ ﺍﺀ
ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﻋﻠﻰ 3ﳒﺪ n = 3q + rﻣﻊ } r ∈ {1, 2ﻷ ﻥﹼ ، 3 nﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ
.q ≥ 2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ r = 1ﻛﺘﺒﻨﺎ ، n = 4 + ( q − 1 ) × 3ﻭﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ R
ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﲔ ( 3 ( 4k ) ) × 4ﻭ ) ) ( 4 ( 3k ) ) × ( 3 ( q − 1ﻭﻛﻞﱞ
ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲤﹼﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻪ.
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ r = 2ﻛﺘﺒﻨﺎ . n = 2 × 4 + ( q − 2 ) × 3ﻭﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ
Rﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﲔ ( 3 ( 4k ) ) × 8ﻭ ) ) ( 4 ( 3k ) ) × ( 3 ( q − 2
ﻭﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲤﹼﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻪ.
ﻭﻧﻌﺎﰿ ﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ( m, n ) = ( m,12kﻣﻊ gcd ( m,12 ) = 1ﻭ } . m ∉ {1, 2, 5
ù ﻓﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻭ ﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
447 ﻋﺎﻡ 2004
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ( tk )1≤k ≤nﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻖ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
1 1 1
n 2 + 1 > ( t1 + t2 + ⋯ + tn ) + + ⋯ +
t1 t2 tn
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( i, j , kﻣﻦ ℕ 3ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ 1 ≤ i < j < k ≤ nﻛﻮﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ti
ﻭ t jﻭ tkﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ.
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
(x − 1 2
)x + (y − 1 2
)y ﺧﺎﺻﺔ :ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻭ yﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ < 1
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . xy < 2
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ، ∆ = ( x − x1 )2 + ( y − y1 )2 − 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
1 1
∆ = x 2 + y2 + 2 + 2 −5
x y
1 1 2 2
= ( x − y )2 + − + 2xy + −5
x y xy
1 1 2 1
) = ( x − y )2 + − + 2 − ( xy − 2
x y xy
1 1 2 2 1
= ( x − y )2 + − +
x y xy (
) xy − ( xy − 2
2 )
ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ∆ < 0ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ( xy − 2 )( xy − 12 ) < 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ xyﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺇﱃ ﺍﺎﻝ [ ، ] 12 , 2ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ . xy < 2
ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
n n 1 ti t t
= ∑ ti ∑ ∑ = n + ∑ i + j
i =1 j =1 t j 1≤i , j ≤n t j
1≤i < j ≤n t j ti
ti
= n + n (n − 1) + ∑ + t j − 2
1≤i < j ≤n t j ti
ti t j 2
= n + ∑
2
−
1≤i < j ≤n t j ti
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 448
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
2
ti t j
∑ − <1
1≤i < j ≤n t j ti
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) ( i, j , kﻣﻦ ℕ 3ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ 1 ≤ i < j < k ≤ nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺃﻥﹼ
2
ti
t j ti tk 2
− + − <1
t j ti tk ti
2 2
ti t j t t < 1
−
+ j − k ﻭ
t j ti tk tj
2
ti tk 2 t j tk
− + − <1 ﻭ
tk ti tk t j
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺃﻥﹼ
tk tk tj tj ti ti
ﻭ <2 ﻭ <2 <2
ti tj ti tk tj tk
ﺃﻭ
ti < 2 t jtk ≤ t j + tkﻭ t j < 2 titk ≤ ti + tkﻭ tk < 2 tit j ≤ ti + t j
ù ﻓﺎﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) ( ti , t j , tkﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ . ABCDﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ] [ BDﻻ ﻳﻨﺼﻒ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ
ABC
ﺃﻭ
.CDAﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Pﺩﺍﺧﻞ ABCDﺗﺤﻘﱢﻖ
PBCﻭ
= BDA
PDC
= DBA
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
. AP = PC
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﺎﻥ Bﻭ Dﺩﻭﺭﺍﹰ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﲔ Aﻭ .Cﺇﺫﻥ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ
ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﻫﻲ
ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ACDﻭ ، BCDﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﹼﺐ
ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
449 ﻋﺎﻡ 2004
D ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ .ﻭﻟﻨﺴﻢL
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) ( DPﻣﻊ ) ، ( ACﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻨﺴﻢK
P
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) ( BPﻣﻊ ) . ( AC
A
K L
C ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺎﹰ،
. LDC
= ADB = KCB ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻟﻔﺮ ﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ :
. LCD
= DBA = KBC ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
B
D ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ DLCﻭ CKBﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ
) (1 PKLﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢPL = PK
= PLK
P
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ BKCﻭ BADﺃﻥﹼ
A C KC AD
K L =
BC BD
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ALDﻭ BCDﳒﺪ
AD AL
B =
BD BC
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﲔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، AL = KCﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ) ( 1ﺗﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ PKCﻭ ، PLAﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . PA = PC
D ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . PA = PCﻧﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ
X
ﲤﺮ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . BCPﻓﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
P
) ( DCﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ، Xﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( DPﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ .Y
C
A
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ BCXPﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
= PBC
DXP
= DBA
B . ADBﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
= PDX
DPXﻭ DABﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ
DX DB
، BDXﳑﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ،ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
= ADP = ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ
DP DA
DB BX
.ﺇﺫﻥ = ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ADPﻭ . BDXﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
DA AP
DX BX
)(2 =
DP AP
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 450
D ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ DYXﻭ DPCﺃﻥﹼ
DX XY
X .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ =
P DP PC
XY BX
C
=
A PC AP
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، AP = PCﺇﺫﻥ . XY = XB
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
B
= XBY
XPY = XYB
= XCB
= DCB
Y
. DPXﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ DPXﻭ DABﺃﻥﹼ
= DAB
DCB = XPY
+ DAB + DPX
=π
ù ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺇﻧﻪ » ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ « ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ
ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Aﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ.
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ Aﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 20ﺃﻱ
n ∈ A ⇔ 20 n
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﹶﺒﹺﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 20ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺗﻪ،
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﱵ ﺍﻵﺣﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 20ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﻥ ،ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺑﺔ .ﺇﺫﻥ . 20 | n ⇒ n ∉ A
ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ.
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ .1ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( an )n ≥1ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, 9ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ
∗ ، ℕﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
an = ( n + 1 ) mod 2
ν2 ( ( a2n −1 …a1 )10 ) = 2n − 1
ν2 ( ( a2na2n −1 …a1 )10 ) = 2n + 1
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ) ν2 ( mﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ 2ﺗﻘﺴﻢ . m
451 ﻋﺎﻡ 2004
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺳﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ a1 = 2ﻭ . a2 = 7
. a2n +1 ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮ ﺽ ﺃ ﻧﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻧﺸﺄﻧﺎ ) ( a1, a2, …, a 2nﰲ ﺣﺎ ﻟﺔ . n ≥ 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺋﺬ ﻧﻀﻊ = 4
ﻓﻴﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ .ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
( a2na2n −1 …, a1 )10 = 22n +1 λ2nﻣﻊ λ2n = 1 mod 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
(a2n +1a2na2n −1 …, a1 )10 = 4 × 102n + 22n +1λ2n
= 22n +1 ( 2 × 52n + λ2n ) = 22n +1λ2n +1
. ﻣﻊ . λ2n +1 = 2 × 52n + λ2n = 1 mod 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﻧﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ a2n +2 ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 3, 5, 7, 9ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
λ2n + 2 ( a2n +2a2n +1a2na 2n −1 …, a1 )10 = 22n + 3 λ2n + 2ﻣﻊ = 1 mod 2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
(a2n +2a2n +1a2na 2n −1 …, a1 )10 = a2n +2102n +1 + 22n +1 λ2n +1
) = 22n +1 ( 52n +1a2n + 2 + λ2n +1
ﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ a2n +2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 3, 5, 7, 9ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
52n +1a2n + 2 + λ2n +1 = 4λ2n + 2ﻣﻊ λ2n + 2 = 1 mod 2
ﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ a2n +2ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
52n +1a2n + 2 + λ2n +1 = 4 mod 8
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ gcd ( 5, 8 ) = 1ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
( 25 )n +1 a 2n + 2 + 5λ2n +1 = 20 mod 8 = 4 mod 8
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، 25 = 1 mod 8ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
a2n + 2 = ( 4 + 3λ2n +1 ) mod 8
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ 4 + 3λ2n +1ﻋﻠﻰ ، 8ﻟﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
a2n +2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 3, 5, 7ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﻧﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
( an )n ≥1ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 452
ﺧﺎﺻﺔ .2ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (bn )n ≥1ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, 9ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ
∗ ، ℕﺍﳋﺎﺻﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ.
bn = ( n + 1 ) mod 2
2 × 5n | ( bnbn −1 ⋯b1 )10
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﺳﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ b1 = 0ﻭ . b2 = 5
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﻧﺎ ) (b1, b2, …, bnﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n ≥ 1ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
) ℓ = ν5 ( ( bnbn −1 ⋯b1 )10
ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥﹼ ( bnbn −1 ⋯b1 )10 = 5ℓ µnﻣﻊ . 5 µnﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . ℓ ≥ n
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ bn +1ﻟﻴﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
bn +1 = n mod 2ﻭ ) 5n +1 | ( bn +110n + 5ℓ µn
ﺃﻭ
bn +1 = n mod 2ﻭ bn +1 2n + 5ℓ−n µn = 0 mod 5
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ 2 × 3 = 1 mod 5ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
bn +1 = n mod 2ﻭ bn +1 = −3n × 5ℓ−n µn mod 5
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ
bn +1 = ( 5n + 4 × 3n × 5ℓ−n µn ) mod 10
ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻤﻮ ﻋﺔ } ، { 0,1, …, 9ﲢﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺍ ﳋﺎﺻﺘﺎ ﻥ ﺍ ﳌﻄﻠﻮ ﺑﺘﺎ ﻥ .ﻭ ﰎﹼ ﺇ ﻧﺸﺎ ﺀ ﺍ ﳌﺘﺘﺎ ﻟﻴﺔ
(bn )n ≥1ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻧﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﺁﻧﻔﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .1ﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻜﻞﱢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ 2αﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .2ﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻜﻞﱢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ 2 × 5βﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ
ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
453 ﻋﺎﻡ 2004
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﺎ nﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 20ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ nﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ n = 2α5β k
ﻣﻊ . gcd ( k,10 ) = 1ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ 20 nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} 2α 5 β ∈ { 2 α , 5 β , 2 × 5 β
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ 2α5βﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ 2mﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﻧﺎﺕ،
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﹸﻀﺎﻋﻒ . M = (c2m ⋯c2c1 )10
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، k > 1ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ gcd ( 102m , k ( 102m − 1 ) ) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ
q > 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) ) 102mq = 1 mod ( k ( 102m − 1
) qﻫﻮ ﺭﺗﺒﺔ 102mﰲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﻴﺔ ) . ( ( ℤ/( k ( 102m − 1 ) ) ℤﺇﺫﻥ
×
) ) k | ( 1 + 102m + ⋯ + 102m(q −1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ) ) M ( 1 + 102m + ⋯ + 102m (q −1
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ
(c2m ⋯c2c1 c2m ⋯c2c1 ⋯ c2m ⋯c2c1 )10
M M ⋯ M
ﻣﻜﺮﺭ qﻣﺮﺓ
ù ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 20 nﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ، n ∈ Aﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﱪﻫﺎﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 454
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ . ABCﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ A1ﻭ A2ﻋﻠﻰ
] ، [ BCﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ B1ﻭ B2ﻋﻠﻰ ] ، [CAﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ C 1ﻭ C 2ﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ ABﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ
ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺆ ﻟﹼﻒ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻲ ﳏﺪﺏ A1A2B1B2C 1C 2ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( A1B2ﻭ ) ( B1C 2ﻭ ) (C 1A2ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻧﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ
2π
3
A
ϕ
ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ A1ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺜﹼﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 0ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 1ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
C1
ψ B2
. A2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ e i θﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ، A2B1ﻭﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
C2
B1
j = e 2π i/3ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ، B1B2ﻭ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ e i ϕﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ
B θ
2π
3 ، B2C 1ﻭ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ j2 = e 4 π i/3ﺍ ﻟﺸﻌﺎ ﻉ ،C 1C 2
A1 A2 C
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ e i ψﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ .C 2A1
2π 2π 2π
BCﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
≤ 2A1 ≤ AB2C 1ﻭ ≤ CA2B1ﻭ ﲟﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
3 3 3
4π 2π 4π 2π
) (1 ﻭ < ψ ≤ 2π ≤<ϕ ≤ 0<θﻭ
3 3 3 3
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
A1A2 + A2B1 + B1B2 + B2C 1 + C 1C 2 + +C 2A1 = 0
ﺃﻥﹼ ، 1 + e i θ + j + e i ϕ + j2 + e i ψ = 0ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، 1 + j + j2 = 0ﺇﺫﻥ
ei θ + ei ϕ + ei ψ = 0
ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺛﹸﻢ ﺑﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ، e i θe i ϕe i ψﳒﺪ
e i ϕe i ψ + e i θ ( e i ϕ + e i ψ ) = 0
ﺃﻭ . e 2 i θ = e i ϕe i ψﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ e i ϕﻭ e i ψﳘﺎ ﺟﺬﺭﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
X 2 + e i θX + e 2 i θ = 0
ﺃﻭ . ( X − je i θ )( X − j2 e i θ ) = 0ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
e i ϕ = j e i θﻭ e i ψ = j2 e i θ
455
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 456
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ
A2B2 = e i θ + j
B2C 2 = e i ϕ + j2 = j e i θ + j2 = e i θ + j
C 2A2 = e i ψ + 1 = j2 e i θ + j3 = e i θ + j
) ( A1B2ﻭ ) ( B1C 2ﻭ ) (C 1A2 ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A2B2C 2ﻣﺜﻠﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ .ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ù ﻫﻲ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
A ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
P′ C1
B2
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ PC 2A1A2ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎﹰ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﻷﻥﹼ
π
C2 P .C
= 1C 2P ) (C 2P ) ( BCﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫ ﻟﻚ
3
B1
ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ C 1C 2Pﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ .ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎ
ﺹ
B A1 A2 C ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) ( PC 1 ) ( B1B2ﻭ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . PC 1 = B1B2
π
Aﻷ ﻥﹼ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A2PB1ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ
= 2PB1 ﻓﺎ ﻟﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻲ C 1PB1B2ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺃ ﻳﻀﺎﹰ .ﺇ ﺫ ﻥ
3
ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ .ﻟﺘﻜﻦ P ′ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( A1C 2ﻭ ) ، ( B2C 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
π
C
= 2P ′C 1 = A2PB1
3
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺿﻠﻌﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ .ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ BA1C 2ﻭ P ′C 1C 2
ﻃﺒﻮﻗﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ P ′C 1C 2ﻭ . AC 1B2ﺇﺫﻥ
π
C
= 1AB2 = A1BC 2 AB2 = BC 2ﻭ AC 2 = BA2ﻭ
3
ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ C 2BA2ﻭ B2AC 2ﻃﺒﻮﻗﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ . A2C 2 = B2C 2ﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ، B2C 2 = B2A2ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A2B2C 2ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ.
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( an )n ≥1ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﺎﻥ {ak : k ∈ ℕ∗ } ∩ ℕﻭ {−ak : k ∈ ℕ∗ } ∩ ℕﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﱳ.
ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ a1, a2, …, anﻋﻠﻰ nﲢﻮﻱ
nﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﹰ.
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ . ( an )n ≥1
457 ﻋﺎﻡ 2005
ﻧﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ : ℕ∗ → ℤ, k ֏ ak ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ .ﻟﻨﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ :
} ℕ n = {1, 2, …, nﻭ } Zn = { 0,1, …, n − 1
ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ
ψn : ℕ n → Zn , ψn ( k ) = ak mod n
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، card ( ψn ( ℕ n ) ) ≥ nﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) ) n = card ( ℕ n ) ≥ card ( ψn ( ℕ n
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، ψn ( ℕ n ) ⊂ Znﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Znﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . nﺇﺫﻥ ψn ( ℕ n ) = Zn
ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ψnﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ، ψn = Qn ϕ ℕ nﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ Qnﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ :
Qn : ℤ → Zn ,Qn ( x ) = x mod n
ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ ℕ nﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ) ، An = ϕ ( ℕ n
ﺃﻭ } ، An = {ak : k ∈ ℕ nﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ jﻭ kﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ) ϕ ( k ) = ϕ ( jﺃﻭ . ak = a jﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ
) ، n = max ( j , kﻓﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ ℕ nﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ،ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ak = a j
ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ . k = jﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ mﻣﻦ . ℤﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ j 0ﻭ k0ﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ . ak0 < m < a j0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ) ، n = max ( j 0, k0ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ
αn = min Anﻭ βn = max An
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ( i, jﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ℕ2nﻭﺃﲰﻴﻨﺎ mﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ai − a jﻭﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ m < nﻷﻧﻪ
ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ m ≥ nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ai − a j = mﺃﻥﹼ ) ψm ( i ) = ψm ( jﻣﻊ i
ﻭ jﻣﻦ ، ℕ mﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، i = jﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ m = 0 ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ
ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ai − a j < nﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) ( i, jﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . ℕ2nﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
، βn − an ≤ n − 1ﺇﺫﻥ ) . An ⊂ ([ αn , αn + n − 1 ] ∩ ℤﻭﻟﻜﻦ
n = card ( An ) ≤ ( [ αn , αn + n − 1 ] ∩ ℤ ) = n
ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، An = [ αn , αn + n − 1 ] ∩ ℤﺃﻭ . An = [ αn , βn ] ∩ ℤﻭﻟﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ nﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، αn ≤ ak0 < m < a j0 ≤ βnﺇﺫﻥ . m ∈ An
ù ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ ﻏﺎﻣﺮ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ .ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 458
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ xﻭ yﻭ zﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . xyz ≥ 1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
x5 − x2 y5 − y2 z5 − z2
+ + ≥0
x 5 + y2 + z 2 x 2 + y5 + z 2 x 2 + y2 + z 5
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ-ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2
1
⋅ ( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) = x 5/2
2
( x
+ y ⋅y + z ⋅z )
1
(
≤ (x 5 + y2 + z 2 ) + y2 + z2
x )
1
≤ ( x 5 + y 2 + z 2 )( yz + y 2 + z 2 ) ¤ ≤ yz
x
3 5 y2 + z 2
≤ ) ( x + y 2 + z 2 )( y 2 + z 2 ≤ ¤ yz
2 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
x 2 + y2 + z 2 3 y 2 + z 2
≤
x 5 + y2 + z 2 2 x 2 + y 2 + z 2
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2 2 2 2 2
x +y +z 3 x + z
2 ≤
2 5
x +y +z 2 x + y + z
2 2 2
ﻭ
x 2 + y2 + z 2 3 x 2 + y 2
≤
x 2 + y2 + z 5 2 x 2 + y 2 + z 2
ﻭﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳒﺪ
x 2 + y2 + z 2 x 2 + y2 + z 2 x 2 + y2 + z 2
+ + ≤3
x 5 + y2 + z 2 x 2 + y5 + z 2 x 2 + y2 + z 5
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
5 2 5 2 5 2
x −x y −y z −z
52 2 + 2 5 2 + 2 ≥0
x +y +z x +y +z x + y2 + z 5
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
459 ﻋﺎﻡ 2005
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ∗ ( an )n ∈ℕﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
∀n ∈ ℕ∗, an = 2n + 3n + 6n − 1
∗( an )n ∈ ℕ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Aﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺃﻱ
} A = {m ∈ ℕ∗ : ∀n ≥ 1, gcd ( m, an ) = 1
ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . A
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ } . A = {1
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ . 1 ∈ A
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻟﻴﻜﻦ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﹰ ﺃ ﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ . p > 3ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ
Fermatﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2p −1 = 1 mod pﻭ 3p −1 = 1 mod pﻭ 6p −1 = 1 mod p
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
3 ⋅ 2p −1 + 2 ⋅ 3p −1 + 6 p −1 = 3 + 2 + 1 mod p = 6 mod p
ﺇﺫﻥ ، 6a p −2 = 0 mod pﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ، gcd ( p, 6 ) = 1ﺃﻥﹼ . p | a p −2
ﻭﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ 2 | a1ﻭ . 3 | a2ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ Aﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ
ù ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 1ﻭﻣﻨﻪ } ، A = {1ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﺿﻠﻌﺎﻩ ] [ BCﻭ ] [ ADﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﲔ .ﻟﺘﻜﻦ
] [ AD Eﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ BCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Fﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . BE = DFﻧﺴﻤﻲ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( ACﻭ ) ، ( BDﻭﻧﺴﻤﻲ Q
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( EFﻭ ) ، ( BDﻭ ﺃ ﺧﲑ ﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ Rﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ
) ( ACﻭ ) . ( EF
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Eﻭ Fﻋﻠﻰ ] [ BCﻭ ] [ ADﻓﺈ ﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ
ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ PQRﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . P
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 460
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺗﲔ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ BCPﻭ . DAPﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﰲ Pﻭ .T
ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Eﻭ Fﻋﻠﻰ ] [ BCﻭ ] [ ADﻓﺈ ﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ
ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ PQRﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Pﻭ .Tﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ PQTR
ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
B
A
P
R F
Q
E
T
C D
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﻥ DAPTﻭ BCTPﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ ﺃﻥﹼ
= DPT
DAT = BCT
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
= CPT
ADT = CBT
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ AD = BCﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﳌﺜﹼﻠﺜﲔ DATﻭ . BCT
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
AF = CEﻭ AT = CTﻭ
= ECT
FAT
ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ FATﻭ ECTﻃﺒﻮﻗﺎﻥ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ATCﻭ FTEﻣﺜﹼﻠﺚﹲ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ،ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
= ATE
ATC + ETC + FTA
= ATE = FTE
،TCQﻓﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ TCEQ ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ ATCﻭ FTEﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ،ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
= TEQ
ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
RQT ، RQTﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
= RPT = BCT = DPT = RPT ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
ù ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ PQTRﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
461 ﻋﺎﻡ 2005
ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻃﹸﺮﹺﺣﺖ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ .ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﱠ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﻗﺪ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺣﻠﹼﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞﹺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ،ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﱂ ﳛﻞ
ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﹺﻘﹶﻴﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﻞﱠ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﲬﺲ
ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . nﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ aiﺑﺄ ﻧﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ i
ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ .ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
) (1 a 0 + a1 + a 2 + a 3 + a 4 + a5 = n
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ) P ( 2ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Cﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ
Nﻣﻦ ) C × P ( 2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) } (c, { p, p ′ﺇﱃ Nﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫ ﺣﻞﹼ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ cﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺘﲔ pﻭ . p ′ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ ) . N = card ( N
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ πﻣﻦ ) P ( 2ﻳﻜﻦ
2n + 1
≥ ) } card ( {c : ( c, π ) ∈ N
5
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2n + 1
= N ∑ × ) ) card ( {c : ( c, π ) ∈ N } ) ≥ card ( P ( 2
) π∈P( 2
5
ﺃﻭ . N ≥ 6n + 3
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺇﺫ ﺣﻞﹼ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ c ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ iﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻛﺎﻥ
card ( { π ∈ P ( 2 ) : ( c, π ) ∈ N } ) = C i2
ﺇﺫﻥ
5
= N ∑ card ( { π : (c, π ) ∈ N } ) = ∑ C i2ai
c ∈C i =0
ﺃﻭ . N = a2 + 3a3 + 6a 4 + 10a5ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
)(2 6n + 3 ≤ a 2 + 3a 3 + 6a 4 + 10a5
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ، a5 ≥ 1ﻷﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ a5 = 0ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ،ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ) ، ( 1ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
a2 + 3a 3 + 6a 4 + 10a5 ≤ 6n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ) . ( 2
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 462
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ، a5 = 1ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
N = a2 + 3a 3 + 6a 4 + 10
= 6 ( a 0 + a1 + a2 + a3 + a 4 + 1 ) + 4 − 6a 0 − 6a1 − 5a2 − 3a 3
) = 6n + 4 − ( 6a0 + 6a1 + 5a2 + 3a3
ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) ( 2ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ 6a0 + 6a1 + 5a2 + 3a3 ≤ 1ﺃﻭ
a 0 = a1 = a2 = a 3 = 0
ﺇﺫﻥ ، N = 6n + 4ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ) wﻧﺴﻤﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺰ ( ﲤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻞﹼ ﲬﺲ
ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ،ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺣﻞﱠ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ .ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
= 6n + 4 ∑ ) } card ( {c : (c, π ) ∈ N
) π∈P( 2
ﺃﻥﹼ
∑
) π ∈P ( 2
( card ( {c : (c, π ) ∈ N }) − 2n 5+ 1 ) = 1
2n + 1
λ = ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
5
∑ ( card ( {c : (c, π ) ∈ N } ) − λ ) + 3 ( 5λ − ( 2n + 1 ) ) = 1
) π ∈P ( 2 ≥0 ≥0
ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ،ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، 2n + 1 = 5λﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ
} π0 = { p0, p0′ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
λ : π ≠ π0
card ( {c : ( c, π ) ∈ N } ) =
λ + 1 : π = π0
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ πﻣﻦ ) . P ( 2
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ q 0ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺰ wﻣﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻬﺎ .ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ pﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} N p = {( c, π ) ∈ N : p ∈ π
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ γ pﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺣﻠﹼﻮﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ . pﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
3γ p + 1 : p ≠ q 0
card ( N p ) =
3γq 0 : p = q0
463 ﻋﺎﻡ 2005
ﻷﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ، q 0ﻛﻞﱡ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ cﺣﻞﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺣﻞﹼ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
card ( {( c, π ) ∈ N : q 0 ∈ π } ) = 3
ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ pﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ، q 0ﻓﺄﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ cﺣﻞﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺰ،
ﺣﻞﹼ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
card ( {( c, π ) ∈ N : p ∈ π } ) = 3
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺰ wﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﻞﹼ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
card ( {( w, π ) ∈ N : p ∈ π } ) = 4
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ،
) } card ( N p ) = ∑ card ( {c : ( c, { p, p ′ } ) ∈ N
p′ ≠ p
ﺇﺫﻥ
5λ : p ∉ π0
card ( N p ) =
5λ + 1 : p ∈ π0
ﻓﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻭﱃ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ card ( Nq0 ) = 0 mod 3ﺃﻥﹼ } ، λ mod 3 ∈ { 0,1ﻭﻣﻦ
ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ pﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } π0 ∪ {q 0ﳒﺪ 5λ = 3γ p + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ
ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، λ mod 3 = 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ a5ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 1ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ
ù ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 464
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ . ABCﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Iﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
. PBA
+ PCA
= PBC ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
+ PCB
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ AP ≥ AIﻭﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . P = I
A ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Cﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭ ﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ D
C
ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍ ﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ، ( IAﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍ ﻟﺰ ﺍ ﻭ ﻳﺔ
P I C Bﻭ Aﻭ ، BACﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﹰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Cﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
ﺇﱃ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ABC
B C
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ∗ (
D . PBAﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
+ PCA
= PBC
+ PCBﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
، PCAﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ∗ (
=C PBAﻭ
− PCB =B ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃ ﻥﹼ
− PBC
2 ( PBCﺃﻭ
+ PCB
) = B
+C = π−Aﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ
= π − ( PBC
BPC + PCB ) = π + A
2 2
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ∗ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ
. 1 ( π + Aﻭﻟﻜﻦ
2
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ BCﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ Pﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ )
= π − ( DCB
BDC + DBC + DAC
) = π − ( DAB ) = π−A
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ C ′ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Dﻭﲤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) ، Bﻭﻫﻲ ﲤﺮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻂ Cﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ (
، 1 ( π + Aﻫﻲ
2
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ BCﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ )
BCﻣﻦ C ′ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ . Cﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
. BC
ABCﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ∗ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ Pﺇﱃ
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ Iﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ∗ ( ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( AD
. BCﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ APDﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
AP − AI = AP + PD − AI − ID = AP + PD − AD ≥ 0
ù ﻭﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ Pﺇﱃ ] ، [ ADﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . P = I
465
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 466
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺎﹰ Pﺫﺍ 2006ﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ .ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭ Pﺑﺄﻧﻪ » ﺟﻴﺪ « ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺴﻢ
ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻩ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ Pﺇﱃ ﺟﺰﺃﻳﻦ ﳛﻮﻱ ﻛ ﱞﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ . Pﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻛﻞﹼ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ Pﺑﺄﻧﻪ » ﺟﻴﺪ. «
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ Pﻗﺪ ﺟﺰﺉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ 2003ﻗﻄﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭﻩ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ . Pﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ
ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻠﻚ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﻠﻌﲔ ﺟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳓﺼﻞﹼ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ.
ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ » ﺟﻴﺪ « ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺟﻴﺪﻳﻦ .ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ
ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺑﺄﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ . 2003
ﲤﻬﻴﺪ :ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ] [ ABﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺠﺰﺉ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ،ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Lﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﳏﻴﻂ P
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻩ Aﻭ . Bﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Lﻣﻜﻮ ﻥﹲ ﻣﻦ nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ
n
. ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ Lﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
2
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n = 2
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، 2 < n ≤ 1003ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃ ﻱ L ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺃﻗﻞﹼ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . nﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Lﻃﺮﻓﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻜﻮﻥﹲ ﻣﻦ
nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ . Pﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺃﻃﻮ ﻝ ﻗﻄﺮﹴ ] [ PQﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ﻭﻱ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﺟﻴﺪ PSQﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻣﻦ ) ، Lﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ
ﻣﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ( .
B
Q
ﻛﻞﱡ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Lﻫﻮ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ،
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Sﻫﻮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ، PSQﺃﻱ
، SP = SQﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ Aﻭ P
S ﻭ Sﻭ Qﻭ ، Bﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﺗﺠﺰﺉ Lﺇﱃ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ LAP
ﻭ LPSﻭ LSQﻭ LQBﻣﻊ ﺇ ﻣﻜﺎ ﻥ ﻛﻮ ﻥ ﺃ ﺣﺪ ﺍ ﳉﺰ ﺃ ﻳﻦ LAPﺃﻭ
P
LQBﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
A
467 ﻋﺎﻡ 2006
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﺃﻱ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻣﻦ ، Lﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ
LAPﻭ LQBﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ ﺇﺫﹾ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ] . [ PQﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﹼﺮﻧﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ
ﻻ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻣﻦ Lﻫﻮ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ LAP
ﻭ LPSﻭ LSQﻭ . LQBﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺛﹸﻢ ﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﳓﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺍ ﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ، L
n
.ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ LPSﻭ LSQ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ PSQﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
2
ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ،ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳚﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﻧﻜﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲨﻊ
n
ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . PSQﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ. ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ،ﻭﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ
2
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ] [ XYﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
LXYﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻩ Xﻭ Yﻣﻦ ﳏﻴﻂ . Pﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ XYZﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ
ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻭ Zﻏﲑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . LXYﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻗﻌﺖ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ
ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، LXYﻭﻟﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻒ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ LXYﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻗﻞﹼ ﻣﻦ . ( 1003ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ XYZﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ،
ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ ] [ XZﺃﻭ ] [YZﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ] . [ XY
ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ LXYﻭ LXZﻭ LYZﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ
ﻭﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 2006/2ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ XYZﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺟﻴﺪﺍﹰ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ XYZﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺟﻴﺪﺍﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ
ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ LXZﻭ LYZﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳚﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﻧﻜﺴﺐ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ،ﻭﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ 1003ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، XYZﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ( Ak )1≤k ≤2006ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻠﹼﻊ ، Pﻭﺟﺰﺃﻧﺎﻩ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ( [ A2k −1A2k +1 ])1≤k ≤1003ﻭ ( [ A1A2k +1 ])2≤k ≤1001ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ 2003
ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ( A2k −1A2k A2k +1 )1≤k ≤1003ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ
ù 1003ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 468
ﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ Mﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
2
) ab ( a 2 − b 2 ) + bc ( b 2 − c 2 ) + ca (c 2 − a 2 ) ≤ M ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ aﻭ bﻭ . c
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
) f ( a, b, c ) = ab ( a 2 − b 2 ) + bc ( b 2 − c 2 ) + ca ( c 2 − a 2
ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ ، S = a + b + cﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
) f ( a, b, c ) = ab ( a − b )( S − c ) + bc ( b − c )( S − a ) + ca(c − a ) ( S − b
) ) = S ( ab ( a − b ) + bc ( b − c ) + ca(c − a
) = S ( ab ( a − b ) + b 2c − bc 2 + c 2a − ca 2
) ) = S ( ab ( a − b ) + ( b 2 − a 2 )c + c 2 ( a − b
) = S ( a − b ) ( ab − ( b + a )c + c 2
) = S ( a − b )( b − c )(a − c
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) (a, b, c ) ֏ f ( a, b, cﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ،ﻭﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ،ﺇﺫﻥ
ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ
} M = sup { f ( a, b, c ) : a 2 + b 2 + c 2 = 1, c ≤ b ≤ a
ﻟﻨﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻮﻟﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ x = a − cﻭ ، y = b − cﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
c ≤b ≤a ⇔ 0 ≤y ≤x
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ ، x − y = a − bﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
) x 2 + y 2 + ( x − y )2 + S 2 = 3 ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ) . f (a, b, c ) = Sxy ( x − yﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
} M = sup { S xy ( x − y ) : x 2 + y 2 + ( x − y )2 + S 2 = 3, 0 ≤ y ≤ x
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
) x 2 + y 2 + ( x − y )2 + S 2 = 3 ⇔ 2x 2 + S 2 − 3 = 2y ( x − y
469 ﻋﺎﻡ 2006
1
ﻋﻠﻤﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﺇﺫﻥ Mﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) S x ( 2x 2 + S 2 − 3
2
) 2x 2 + S 2 − 3 = 2y ( x − yﻭ 0 ≤ y ≤ x
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ) y ֏ 2y ( x − yﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺎﻝ ] [ 0, xﻋﻨﺪ ، y = 12 xﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
x2
≤ 2x 2 + S 2 − 3ﺃﻭ . S 2 ≤ 3 − 32 x 2ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ x ≤ 2ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﹰ
2
1 1 3 3 3
= S x ( 2x 2 + S 2 − 3 ) ≤ x 3 ⋅ 3 − x 2 x 2 − x2
2 4 2 4 2
ﻭﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ y = 12 xﻭ . S = 3 − 23 x 2
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ) x ֏ x 6 ( 2 − x 2ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0, 2ﻋﻨﺪ
، x = 32ﺇﺫﻥ
1 9 2
≤ ) S x ( 2x 2 + S 2 − 3
2 32
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . M ≤ 9322
= Sﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ 2
3 =yﻭ 1
2
3
2 =xﻭ 3
2 ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ
9 2
= ) S xy ( x − y 0 ≤ y ≤ xﻭ x 2 + y 2 + ( x − y )2 + S 2 = 3ﻭ
32
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ . M = 9322ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) (a, b, cﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ
) ( 1 + 32 2,1,1 − 32 2ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻉﹴ ﻣﺮﻛﹼﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﻧﺎﲡﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﹼﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ.
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ) ( x , yﻣﻦ ℤﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
2
1 + 2x + 22x +1 = y 2
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ) ( x , yﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﰲ . ℤ2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) ( x , −yﺣﻼﹰ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻼ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ yﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ.
1 1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x < −1ﻛﺎﻥ 1 < 1 + 2x + 22x +1 ≤ 1 + + < 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
4 8
. 1 < y 2 < 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . x ≥ −1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x = −1ﻛﺎﻥ y 2 = 1 + 2x + 22x +1 = 2ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 470
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ x = 0ﻛﺎﻥ ، y 2 = 1 + 2x + 22x +1 = 4ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، y = 2ﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳊﻠﹼﲔ ) ( 0, 2ﻭ ) . ( 0, −2
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ . x > 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ yﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ
22x < 1 + 2x + 22x +1 < 22x +2
ﺃﻥﹼ . 2x < y < 2x +1ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ z = y − 2xﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ [ . ] 0, 2xﺃﻱ
ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ t ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ] [ 1, 2x −1 − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . y = 2x + 2t + 1ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
ﳒﺪ ، ( 2x + 2t + 1 )2 = 1 + 2x + 22x +1 = 4ﺃﻭ
) 4t ( t + 2x + 1 ) = 2x ( 2x − 1
ﺇﺫﻥ 4ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، 2xﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . x ≥ 2ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ x = 2ﻓﺘﻘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ t ( t + 5 ) = 3
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ .ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃ ﹼﻥ
) (1 x ≥ 3ﻭ ) t ( t + 2x + 1 ) = 2x −2 ( 2x − 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ tﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ t + 2x + 1ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) 2x −2 ( 2x − 1
ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ 2x − 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞﹲ ﻷﻥﹼ . t + 2x + 1 > 2x − 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ tﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 2x −2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺟﺪﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ) ، t ( t + 2x + 1ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ 2x −2ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، t + 1 + 2xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . t + 1ﺇﺫﻥ . t + 1 = λ2x −2ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ tﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺇﱃ ﺍﺎﻝ ] ، [ 1, 2x −1 − 1ﺇﺫﻥ } . λ ∈ {1, 2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
t = 2x −2 − 1ﺃﻭ t = 2x −1 − 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، t = 2x −1 − 1ﺗﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ) ( 1ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
6 ( 2x −1 − 1 ) = 2x − 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞﹲ ﻷﻥﹼ 2x − 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، t = 2x −2 − 1ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻀﻲ
ﺃﻥﹼ ، 5 ( 2x −2 − 1 ) = 2x − 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ 2x −2 = 4ﺃﻭ . x = 4ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳒﺪ
t = 3ﻭ . y = 2x + 2t + 1 = 23ﻓﻨﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﻠﹼﲔ ) ( 4, 23ﻭ ) . ( 4, −23
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ }) {( 0, 2 ) , ( 0, −2 ) , ( 4, 23 ) , ( 4, −23
ù ﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝﹲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ،ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
471 ﻋﺎﻡ 2006
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ) P ( Xﺃﻣﺜﺎﻟﻪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ nﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 1ﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ
،Q ( X ) = Pﺃﻱ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ . kﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) P ⋯ P ( X
kﻣﺮﺓ
ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ Pﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ kﻣﺮﺓ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﰲ ℤﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ Q ( x ) = x
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ] P [ jﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ
] P [ jﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ j ≥ 2 P [ 1 ] = Pﻭ ] = P P [ j −1
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ] .Q = P [ kﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
} Fix ( j ) = { x ∈ ℤ : P [ j ] ( x ) = x
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥﹼ . card ( Fix ( k ) ) ≤ n
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k = 1ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ P ( X ) − Xﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، k = 2ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ، Fix ( 1 ) = Fix ( 2ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
) . Fix ( 1 ) ⊊ Fix ( 2ﻭﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ aﻣﻦ ) Fix ( 2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ) . Fix ( 1ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
b = P (a ) ≠ aﻭ P (b ) = a
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ tﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ } . Fix ( 2 )\{a, bﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ) s = P ( tﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ) . t = P ( s
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ X − Yﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) ، P ( X ) − P (Yﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ) Λ ( X ,Yﻣﻦ ] ℤ [ X ,Yﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) (1 ) P ( X ) − P (Y ) = Λ ( X ,Y ) ( X − Y
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
) t − a = P ( s ) − P ( b ) = Λ ( s, b ) ( s − b
) = Λ ( s , b ) ( P ( t ) − P ( a ) ) = Λ ( s, b ) Λ ( t , a ) ( t − a
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ t ≠ aﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ، Λ ( s, b ) Λ ( t, a ) = 1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ) Λ ( s, bﻭ ) Λ ( t, a
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ،ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ } {−1,1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ εﻣﻦ } {−1,1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) . t − a = ε ( s − bﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ε′ﻣﻦ } {−1,1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . t − b = ε′(s − aﻓﺈﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻥ ε = ε′ = +1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺃﻥﹼ b − a = a − bﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ a = b ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ .ﺇﺫﻥ ε = −1ﺃﻭ ε′ = −1ﻭﰲ ﻛﻼ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﳒﺪ ، t + s = a + bﺃﻭ
. P (t ) + t − a − b = 0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 472
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
} Fix ( 2 ) ⊂ { x ∈ ℤ : P ( x ) + x − a − b = 0
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ
card ( Fix ( 2 ) ) ≤ deg ( P ( X ) + X − a − b ) = n
ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k = 2
ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . k ≥ 3
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻭ ﻻﹰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) ، Fix ( 1 ) ⊂ Fix ( kﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) Fix ( 1 ) = Fix ( kﰎﹼ ﺍ ﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻷﻥﹼ
. card ( Fix ( 1 ) ) ≤ n
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) ، Fix ( 1 ) ⊊ Fix ( kﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ x 0ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ) Fix ( kﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ
) . Fix ( 1ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﺤﻘﱢﻖ
P ( x0 ) ≠ x0ﻭ P[k ] ( x0 ) = x0
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ( x j )j ∈ℕﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎﹰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ) x j = P ( x j −1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ∗ . ℕﻧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﹾ ﺇﻥﹼ
∀j ∈ ℕ, x j +k = x j
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ P ( X ) − Xﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
) ، P ( P ( X ) ) − P ( Xﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ) λ ( Xﻣﻦ ] ℤ [ Xﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) P ( P ( X )) − P ( X ) = λ ( X )( P ( X ) − X
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∀j ∈ ℕ, ) x j + 2 − x j +1 = λ ( x j )( x j +1 − x j
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
) x1 − x 0 = xk +1 − xk = λ ( xk −1 ) λ ( xk −2 )⋯ λ ( x 0 )( x1 − x 0
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ، x1 − x 0 = P ( x 0 ) − x 0 ≠ 0ﳒﺪ
λ ( xk −1 ) λ ( x k −2 )⋯ λ ( x 0 ) = 1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) ) ( λ ( xk −1 ) , λ ( xk −2 ) , …, λ ( x 0ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ
ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . {−1,1
473 ﻋﺎﻡ 2006
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀j ∈ ℕ, x j +1 − x j = x 1 − x 0
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، x m = min ( x1, …, xkﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
x m −1 − x m = xm +1 − x m > 0
، ∀j ≥ 0, ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ x m −1 = xm +1 ≠ x m ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ xm + j −1 = xm + j +1
ﺃﻭ ، ∀j ≥ m, x j −1 = x j +1ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ( x j )j ≥0ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﺃﻥﹼ ، ∀j ≥ 0, x j +2 = x jﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∀j ∈ ℕ, x 2 j = x 0 , x 2 j +1 = x 1
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) . x 0 ∈ Fix ( 2ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) . Fix ( k ) ⊂ Fix ( 2
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ ، card ( Fix ( k ) ) ≤ nﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ù ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
ﺏ Pﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ A bﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﹼﻞ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ،
ﻧﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﹼ ﺿﻠﻊﹴ bﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﳏﺪ ﹴ
ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ، bﻭﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ . Pﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ A bﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ bﻋﻠﻰ
ﺃﺿﻼﻉ Pﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ . P
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ.
ﲤﻬﻴﺪ :ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ Qﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ 2nﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ،ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ . Sﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ ﺿﻠﻊ ، [ AB ] ﻭﺭﺃ ﺱ ، C ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ
S
. ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
n
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﻟﻨﺴﻢ ( Ak )k ∈ ℕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ،Qﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ،ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺎﺩ Ak = Ak mod 2nﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ . ℕﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ( dk )k ∈ℕﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ) ، dk = ( Ak Ak +nﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ M k
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ dkﻭ dk +1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ . ℕﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
dk = dk mod nﻭ M k = M k mod n
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ∆k = Ak Ak +1Mkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ kﻣﻦ . ℕ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 474
ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ Qﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﺕ . ( ∆k )0≤k <2n
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Nﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ .Qﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ Nﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ (dk )0≤k <nﺃﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺃﺿﻼﻉ Qﺍﻧﺘﻤﺖ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﺇﱃ . ∪2kn=−01 ∆kﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃ ﻥﹼ Nﺗﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ Qﻭﻻ
ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ . (dk )0≤k <n
π
ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ukﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ Ak Ak +nﺑﺎﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ .ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ
2
ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
} Pk+ = { M : Ak M ⋅ uk > 0ﻭ } Pk− = { M : Ak M ⋅ uk < 0
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ uk = −uk +nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) (1 Ak +nM ⋅ uk +n = − ( Ak M − Ak Ak +n ) ⋅ uk = −Ak M ⋅ uk
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
∀k ∈ { 0, …, n − 1 } , ( Ak N ⋅ uk )( Ak +1N ⋅ uk +1 ) > 0
ﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ A0N ⋅ u0ﻭ AnN ⋅ unﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ) ، ( 1
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺎﹰ ﻷﻥﹼ Nﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ
. (dk )0≤k <nﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ k0 ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0, …, n − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
( Ak N ⋅ uk )( Ak +1N ⋅ uk +1 ) < 0
0 0 0 0
،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ Nﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ∆k0 åﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ Nﺇﱃ ∩ Pk+0 +1
Pk−0
åﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ Nﺇﱃ ، Pk+0 ∩ Pk−0 +1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ Nﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ∆k0 +n
Ak +1+n Ak +1+n
Ak +n Ak +n
N
M k ∆k +n Mk
∆k
N
Ak Ak
Ak +1 Ak +1
∈ N Pk+ ∩ Pk−+1 ∈ N Pk− ∩ Pk++1
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ
n −1
)(2 ) Q ⊂ ∪ ( ∆k ∪ ∆k +n
k =0
475 ﻋﺎﻡ 2006
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ k ′ ﻣﻦ } { 0, …, n − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
S ) A (Q
= ) ≤ A ( ∆k ′ ) + A ( ∆k ′ +n
n n
ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) A ( Rﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﹼﻊ . R
ﻟﻨﻜﺘﺐ Aﻭ Bﻭ A′ﻭ B ′ﻭ Mﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Ak ′ﻭ Ak ′ +1ﻭ Ak ′ +nﻭ Ak ′ +1+n
B′ ﻭ M k ′ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
A′
åﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ MA ≥ MA′ﻛﺎﻥ
M
) A ( ∆k ′ +n ) = A ( B ′MA′ ) ≤ A ( B ′AM
A B ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) A ( ∆k ′ +n ) + A ( ∆k ′ ) ≤ A ( B ′AM ) + A ( AMB ) = A ( B ′AB
B′ A′ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ B ′ABﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ.
åﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ MA < MA′ﻛﺎﻥ
M
) A ( ∆k ′ ) = A ( MAB ) ≤ A ( A′MB
A B ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
) A ( ∆k ′ +n ) + A ( ∆k ′ ) ≤ A ( B ′MA′ ) + A ( A′MB ) = A ( A′B ′B
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ A′B ′Bﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Pﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ، Sﻭﻟﻪ mﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ . ( bk )1≤k ≤mﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Abk
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﰲ Pﻭﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﻫﻮ . bkﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ
m
Abk
H ∑ <2
k =1 S
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ( rk )1≤k ≤mﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
m
Abk
∀k ∈ {1, …, m } , < rk ﻭ ∑ rk =2
S k =1
ℓk
= rkﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ nﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﹰ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﹰ ﳌﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ، ( rk )1≤k ≤mﻭﻛﺘﺒﻨﺎ
n
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } ، {1, …, mﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . ∑ k =1 ℓ k = 2nﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳒﺰﺉ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ bkﻣﻦ P
m
ﺇﱃ ℓ kﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ .ﻓﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﻠﹼﻊ Qﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ، Sﻭﻟﻪ 2n
ﺿﻠﻌﺎﹰ ) ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ ، πﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺿﲑ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ( .
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 476
ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻠﻊ [ AB ] ﰲ ،Qﻭﺭﺃﺱ C ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ،Qﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
S
.
ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ∆ = ABCﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ
n
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ABﺟﺰﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ bjﰲ Pﺣﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ Tﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ bjﻭﺭﺃﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ،Cﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ℓj
≥ )∆( A (T ) = ℓ j ⋅ A S = rj S > Abj
n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . Abjﻭﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ Hﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
m
∑ Ab k
≥ 2S
k =1
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺎ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﹼﻘﺖ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( x1, …, xm ) ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
m
∑ xk <q
k =1
ﻭ qﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ) ( r1, …, rmﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
m
∀k ∈ {1, …, m } , xk < rk ﻭ ∑ rk =q
k =1
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . m
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﻧﻌﻄﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ a1ﻭ a2ﻭ … ﻭ . anﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) iﺣﻴﺚ (1 ≤ i ≤ nﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ
} di = max {a j : 1 ≤ j ≤ i } − min {a j : i ≤ j ≤ n
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ } . d = max {di : 1 ≤ i ≤ n
) (aﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ x 1ﻭ … ﻭ x nﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ x1 ≤ x 2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ xn
ﻓﺈﻥﹼ
d
)∗( ≥ } max { xi − ai : 1 ≤ i ≤ n
2
) (bﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ x 1ﻭ … ﻭ x nﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، x1 ≤ x 2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ xnﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ )∗( .
) (aﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ x 1ﻭ …
ﻭ x nﲢﻘﹼﻖ x1 ≤ x 2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ xnﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ
d
< } max { xi − ai : 1 ≤ i ≤ n
2
ﺃﻱ
d d
∀i ∈ ℕ n , xi −< ai < xi +
2 2
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ i0ﻣﻦ ℕ nﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . d = di0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ j ≤ i0ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
d d
a j < x j + ≤ x i0 +
2 2
d
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، max {a j : 1 ≤ j ≤ i0 } < x i0 + ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ i0 ≤ j ≤ nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
2
d d
a j > x j − ≤ x i0 −
2 2
d
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ . min {a j : i0 ≤ j ≤ n } > x i0 − ﺇﺫﻥ
2
d d
di0 = max ( a j ) − min ( a j ) < xi0 +
1≤ j ≤i0 i0 ≤ j ≤n 2 (
− x i0 −
2 )
=d
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . i0ﺇﺫﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) (aﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
477
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 478
) (bﻟﻨﻀﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ :
d
x i = max ( a j ) − , i = 1, 2, …, n
1≤ j ≤i 2
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ . x1 ≤ x 2 ≤ ⋯ ≤ xnﻭﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ i ≤ nﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
d
x i − ai ≥ x i − max ( a j ) = −
1≤ j ≤i 2
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ
d d d
x i − ai ≤ xi − min ( a j ) = di − = ≤d −
i ≤ j ≤n 2 2 2
d
≤ ) , max ( xi − aiﻭﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﹸﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ) . (aﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺫﻥ
1≤i ≤n 2
d
ù ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ = ) . max ( xi − aiﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
1≤i ≤n 2
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﲬﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Dﻭ . Eﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ABCDﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ
ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﺃ ﻥﹼ BCEDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ .ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ℓﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﹰ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Aﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ℓ
ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ DCﰲ Fﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( BCﰲ .Gﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
. DAB
ﺃﻥﹼ . EF = EG = ECﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ℓﻳﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
G
D ﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
E
F
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ABCDﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ F
C
ℓ ﻭ Gﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ Eﺑﺄﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
O
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .GFCﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
A
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ BCEDﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ℓﻣﻨﺼﻒ
B . DAB
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻧﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BCDﻫﻲ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﻴﺔ .ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Aﻭ Bﻭ Cﻭ Dﻭ Eﻭ Fﻭ G
DF
ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ αﻭ βﻭ γﻭ δﻭ ηﻭ ϕﻭ ψﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ tﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
DC
ﻣﻦ ﺍﺎﻝ [. ] 0,1
479 2007 ﻋﺎﻡ
ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﺲ
DF AF BC
= = =t
DG AG BG
ﺃﻱ
δ −ϕ β−γ
(1 ) = =t
δ−γ β−ψ
δ − ϕ δ − ϕ
δ − ϕ = γδϕ − γ ﺃﻥﹼ = ﻭδ = γ = 1 ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
δ−γ δ − γ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ϕ−γ
(2) ϕ−γ =−
δγ
β−γ β − γ
ﺃﻥﹼ = ﻭβ = γ = 1 ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ،ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ
β−ψ β − ψ
ψ−γ
(3) ψ−γ =−
βγ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ. EF = EC = EG ﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺘﻌﻴE ﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔﺃﻣ
η − ϕ 2 = ( η − γ ) − (ϕ − γ ) 2
2
= η−γ + ϕ − γ 2 − 2 Re ( ( η − γ )( ϕ − γ ) )
ﻭ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ
η − ψ 2 = (η − γ ) − (ψ − γ ) 2
2
= η−γ + ψ − γ 2 − 2 Re ( ( η − γ )( ψ − γ ) )
ﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓﺇﺫﻥ ﺗ
η −ϕ = η − γ = η − ψ
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
ϕ − γ 2 − 2 Re ( ( η − γ )( ϕ − γ ) ) = 0
ﻭ
ψ − γ 2 − 2 Re ( ( η − γ )( ψ − γ ) ) = 0
ﺎﺕﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴ 480
ﺃﻭ
η − γ η − γ
2 Re = 1 ﻭ2 Re =1
ψ − γ ϕ − γ
( ﺃﻥﹼ2 ) ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ
η−γ η−γ η − γ − δγ ( η − γ )
1= + =
ϕ−γ ϕ−γ ϕ−γ
( ﺃﻥﹼ3 ) ﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺻ. η = ϕ + δγ ( η − γ ) ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
ﺇﺫﻥ. η = ψ + βγ ( η − γ )
δψ − βϕ
(4) η=
δ−β
: ( 1 ) ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﹸﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦη ﳝﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ
1
δ ( ψ − β ) − β (ϕ − δ ) tβ ( δ − γ ) − t δ ( β − γ )
η= =
δ−β (δ − γ ) − (β − γ )
ﺇﺫﻥ
2 1 2
t2 δ − γ + 2 β − γ − 2 Re ( βδ ( δ − γ )( β − γ ) )
η 2
= t
2
δ−γ + β − γ 2 − 2 Re ( ( β − γ )( δ − γ ) )
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
βδ ( δ − γ )( β − γ ) = ( γ − β )( γ − δ )
ﺇﺫﻥ
2 1
t2 δ − γ + β−γ 2 − δ−γ 2− β−γ 2
2
η −1 = t2
δ−β 2
t2 − 1
= 2 (t 2 δ−γ2− β−γ 2
)
t2 δ − β
t2 − 1 2
=
t2 δ − β 2 ( δ −ϕ 2 − β−γ )
ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
η = 1 ⇔ δ −ϕ = δ −α
. δ − α = β − γ ﻷﻥ
481 ﻋﺎﻡ 2007
ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻗﻮﻟﻨﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ BCDﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . DF = DAﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺃﻥﹼ
= 1 ( π − ADC
DAF ) = 1 DAB
2 2
ù ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ℓﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
. DAB
ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ .ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻗﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ .ﻧﺴﻤﻲ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ » ﻋﺼﺒﺔ « ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﲔ ) .ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﻛﻞﱡ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺗﻜﻮ ﻥ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ ( .ﻧﺴﻤﻲ » ﺣﺠﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ « ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ.
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ
ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺘﲔ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺣﺠﻢﹴ ﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺣﺠﻢﹴ ﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ
ﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ R1ﻭ R2ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺘﲔ .ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) M ( Riﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺣﺠﻢﹴ ﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ . Ri
ãﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻧﻀﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ R1ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻈﻤﻲ ،ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ،ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ
ﻓﻨﻀﻌﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ . R2
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻧﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ : ã
ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) M ( R1 ) > M ( R2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ R1ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ . R2
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ) ، M ( R1 ) = card ( R1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖﹴ R1ﺇﱃ ، R2ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) M ( R1
ﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) M ( R2ﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ
) M ( R1 ) − M ( R2ﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ 1ﺃﻭ . 2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ
ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﹼﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ :
.1ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) M ( R1 ) = M ( R2ﻓﻨﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻘﹼﻘﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
.2ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، M ( R1 ) = M ( R2 ) − 1ﻓﻨﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 482
ãﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، M ( R1 ) = pﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ . M ( R2 ) = p + 1ﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ A0ﺇﱃ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ، R1ﻭﻫﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﻥ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﻬﻢ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ
. card ( A0 ) = pﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Aﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻯ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ R1ﺇﱃ R2ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ A ∪ A0ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ
ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﻧﺎ ﺎ .ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ) card ( A ∪ A0ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، card ( A ) ≡ p mod 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Aﻋﺼﺒﺔﹰ ﺫﺍﺕ
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻋﻈﻤﻲ ﰲ ، R2ﻷﻥﹼ . M ( R2 ) = p + 1
ãﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻋﻈﻤﻲ Cﰲ R2ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ، A ⊄ Cﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ A
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑ ﻖ aﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ ،Cﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﱃ R1ﺇﱃ ﺟﻌﻞ
M ( R1 ) = p + 1ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ، M ( R2 ) = crad (C ) = p + 1ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ãﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ Aﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻴﺔ C 1ﻭ C 2ﻭ … ﻭ C nﰲ . R2
ﻭﻟﻨﻀﻊ K i = C i \Aﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ iﻣﻦ } . {1, …,nﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( K i )1≤i ≤nﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ãﻧﺼﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﲰﺔ .ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﻣﻦ R2ﺇﱃ R1ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﳔﺘﺎﺭ
ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ x1ﻣﻦ K 1ﻭﻧﻨﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ . R1ﺇﻥﹼ ﻧﻘﻞ x1ﺇﱃ R1ﻳﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ C 1ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎ
ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻔﻘﺪ ،ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺎﺕ C 2ﻭ … ﻭ C nﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ،
n
ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ، M ( R1 ) = M ( R2 ) = p ) ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ، (x1 ∈ ∩ K iﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
i =1
) ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ x1ﻻ ﻳﺆﻟﹼﻒ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ A0ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ A0 ∪ Aﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ
ﺃﻋﻈﻤﻲ ( .ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ،C 2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ . x1ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖx 2
ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ K 2ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ . x1ﻧﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ x 2ﺇﱃ . R1ﺇﻥﹼ ﻧﻘﻞ x 2ﺇﱃ R1ﻳﻔﻘﺪ
ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ C 2ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺎﺕ C 3ﻭ … ﻭ C nﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ،
ﺗﻮﻗﹼﻔﻨﺎ .ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ ،ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ،C 3ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻖ ، x 2ﻓﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ x 3ﻣﻦ K 3ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺎﹰ ﻣﻊ . x 2ﻭﻧﻨﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ ، R1ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ.
483 ﻋﺎﻡ 2007
ãﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞﹼ ﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ) M ( R1ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ pﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ . p + 1
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﹰ p + 1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ،ﺃﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﺪﻣﲑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻴﺔ
ﺫﺍﺕ p + 1ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﰲ . R2ﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ) M ( R1 ) = M ( R2ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﻘﻲ M ( R1 ) = pﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ،ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ
ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ، M ( R1 ) = M ( R2 ) = pﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺑﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻀﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻴﺔ
ﺫﺍﺕ p + 1ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﰲ ، R2ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺼﺒﺔﹲ ﺫﺍﺕ p + 1ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﰲ ، R1ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ
ﰲ R1ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻠﺔ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﻠﹼﻠﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ãﻟﻨﺘﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻼﺕ .ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ x1, x 2, …, x ℓﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ R1ﺇﱃ R2
ﲝﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ x iﻭ x i +1ﺻﺪﻳﻘﲔ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ i < ℓﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ x ℓ −1
ﻭ x ℓﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﲔ .ﻭﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺪﺭﺳﻬﺎ ،ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ x ℓﺇﱃ ﻋﺼﺒﺔ Xﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ p + 1
ﰲ } ، R1 = A0 ∪ { x 1, …, x ℓﻭﻷﻥﹼ x ℓ −1ﻭ x ℓﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﲔ ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ x ℓ −1
ﻋﻀﻮﺍﹰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ . X
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻘﺪ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﺪﻣﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ C ℓ −1ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ
x1, x 2, …, x ℓ −2ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ،C ℓ −1ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ x ℓ ∉ C ℓ−1ﻷﻥﹼ x ℓ−1ﻭ x ℓﻟﻴﺴﺎ
ﺻﺪﻳﻘﲔ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ x ℓ−1ﺇﱃ R2ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺒﺔ C ℓ−1 = A ∪ K ℓ −1ﺫﺍﺕ
ù p + 1ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﰲ ، R2ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
BCAﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﰲ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﰲ ، Rﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ BCﰲ Pﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ
] [ ACﰲ .Qﻧﺴﻤﻲ Kﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] ، [ BCﻭ ﻧﺴﻤﻲ Lﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [ ACﺃ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ RPKﻭ RQLﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 484
R ﺳﻨﻜﺘﺐ ) A ( XYZﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ . XYZ
B
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
Q
K
= π − C = RPK
RQL
P 2 2
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
C L A
) A ( RQL RQ QL
= ⋅
) A ( RPK RP PK
ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ QLCﻭ PKCﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
QL QC QA
= =
PK PC PB
ﺇﺫﹾ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ) (QLﳏﻮﺭ ] ، [CAﻭ ) ( PKﳏﻮﺭ ] . [ BCﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
) A ( RQL RQ QA
= ⋅
) A ( RPK RP PB
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ RQAﻭ BPRﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ﻷﻥﹼ
= ABC
ARQ = RBC = RBP
− RBA + PBC = RBP
− RCA
ﻭ
= 2QCA
RQA = BCA
= 2BCP
= BPR
ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﺎﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻷﻥﹼ ، RA = RBﺇﺫﻥ
A ( RQA ) RQ QA
=1 = ⋅
) A ( RPB RP PB
) A ( RQL
ù ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ = 1
) A ( RPK
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺩ 4ab − 1 ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) ( 4a 2 − 1ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . a = b
2
ﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
) 4a 2 − 1 = 4a ( a − b ) + 4ab − 1 ≡ 4a (a − b ) mod ( 4ab − 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
2
) ( 4a 2 − 1 ) ≡ ( 4a )2 ( a − b )2 mod ( 4ab − 1
485 ﻋﺎﻡ 2007
2
ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( 4ab − 1 ) | ( 4a 2 − 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ، ( 4ab − 1 ) | ( 4a )2 ( b − a )2
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ( 4a )2ﻭ ) ( 4ab − 1ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﻷﻥﹼ
( 4a )2 b 2 − ( 4ab − 1 ) (4ab + 1) = 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ( 4ab − 1 ) | ( 4a )2 ( b − a )2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . ( 4ab − 1 ) | ( b − a )2ﻧﺮﻏﺐ
ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
∀ ( a, b ) ∈ ℕ * × ℕ * , ( ( 4ab − 1 ) | (a − b )2 ) ⇒ a =b
ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} S = {( a, b ) ∈ ℕ∗ × ℕ∗ : b < a, ( 4ab − 1 ) | ( a − b )2
ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ ≠ ، Sﻭﻟﻨﺨﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ( α, β ) ∈ Sﳛﻘﹼﻖ
} α + β = min {a + b : (a, b ) ∈ S
ﻭﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ nﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
) ( α − β )2 = n ( 4αβ − 1
ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ، α2 − 2β ( 1 + 2n ) α + β 2 + n = 0ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ αﻫﻲ ﺟﺬﺭ
ﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
P ( X ) = X 2 − 2β ( 1 + 2n ) X + β 2 + n
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ α′ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
β2 + n
= α′ = 2β ( 1 + 2n ) − α
α
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ∗ . α′ ∈ ℕﻭﻟﻜﻦ
P ( β ) = −n ( 4β 2 − 1 ) < 0
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ βﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺬﺭﻳﻦ αﻭ α′ﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ . Pﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ β < αﺃ ﹼﻥ
. α′ < βﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ( β, α′ ) ∈ Sﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ) ( α, βﻣﻦ
Sﻷﻥﹼ . β + α′ < α + βﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ = ، Sﻭﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏù .
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 486
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} S = {( x , y, z ) ∈ { 0,1, …, n }3 : x + y + z > 0
ﻭﻧﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ( n + 1 )3 − 1ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ
ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﳛﻮﻱ ، Sﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) . ( 0, 0, 0
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ k ≤ nﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ Pkﻭ Qkﻭ Rkﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ :
Pk : x = kﻭ Qk : y = kﻭ Rk : x = k
، ∪ ) ( Pk ∪ Pℓ ∪ Pm ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Sﳏﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ :
( k , ℓ,m )∈ ℕ3n
ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ، 3nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) . ( 0, 0, 0
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﲰﻴﻨﺎ ℓﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، Sﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
) ، ( 0, 0, 0ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . ℓ ≤ 3n
ﻧﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ℓ = 3nﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ℓ < 3nﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺕ ( Sr )1≤r ≤ ℓﻣﻌﺎ ﺩ ﻻ ﺎ ﻫﻲ ، Sr : ar X + brY + cr Z + dr = 0
ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﳛﻮﻱ Sﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) . ( 0, 0, 0ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
ℓ
= ) P ( X ,Y , Z ) ∏ (ar X + brY + cr Z + dr ) − δΩ ( X ) Ω (Y ) Ω ( Z
r =1
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
n
d1d2 ⋯d ℓ
= δ ) Ω (T ) = ∏ (T − iﻭ
) Ω3 ( 0 i =1
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) ( 0, 0, 0ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ( Sr )1≤r ≤ ℓﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ . δ ≠ 0
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ δﺃﻥﹼ P ( i, j, k ) = 0ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ( i, j , kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
. { 0,1, …,n }3
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ، Pﻭﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ
} IX = { 0,1, …, n − 1 } × { 0,1, …, 3n } × { 0,1, …, 3n
} IY = { 0,1, …, 3n } × { 0,1, …, n − 1 } × { 0,1, …, 3n
} IZ = { 0,1, …, 3n } × { 0,1, …, 3n } × { 0,1, …, n − 1
487 ﻋﺎﻡ 2007
ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
ℓ
∑ = ) ∏ (ar X + brY + crZ + dr λαβγ X αY βZ γ
r =1 α+β + γ ≤ℓ
ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ℓ < 3nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ α + β + γ ≤ ℓﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ α < nﻭﻣﻦ
ﺛﹶﻢ ، ( α, β, γ ) ∈ IX ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ β < nﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، ( α, β, γ ) ∈ IY ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
γ < nﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ . ( α, β, γ ) ∈ IZﺇﺫﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
ℓ
= ) ∏ (ar X + brY + crZ + dr ∑ λαβγ X αY βZ γ
r =1 ( α, β , γ )∈ IX ∪ IY ∪ IZ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ deg ( Ω (T ) − T n ) < nﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
Ω ( X ) Ω (Y ) Ω ( Z ) = X nY nZ n + ∑ µαβγ X αY βZ γ
( α,β , γ )∈ IX ∪ IY ∪ IZ
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 P ( X ,Y , Z ) = −δ X nY nZ n + ∑ ν αβγ X αY βZ γ
( α, β , γ )∈ IX ∪ IY ∪ IZ
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻃﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
ﺗﻮﻃﺌﺔ :ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳋﻄﹼﻲ ϕﻋﻠﻰ ] ℝ [Tﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
n
= ) ϕ (Q ) ∑ C nk ( −1 )k Q ( k
k =0
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ! ϕ (T n ) = ( −1 )n nﻭ ϕ (Q ) = 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . degQ < n
ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ، E 0 = 1ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ j > 0ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ
)T (T − 1 )⋯(T − j + 1
= Ej
!j
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ E j ( k ) = 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 0 ≤ k < jﻭ E j ( k ) = C kjﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، j ≤ k
ﺇﺫﻥ
n n
= ) ϕ (Ej ∑ C nkC kj ( −1 )k = C nj ∑ C nk −−jj ( −1 )k
k =j k =j
n−j
= C nj ( −1 )j ∑ C nk − j ( −1 )k = C nj ( −1 )j ( 1 − 1 )n − j
k =0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 488
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ
n
) ( −1 : j =n
ϕ ( E j ) =
0 : j <n
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ( E j )0≤ j ≤nﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، nﺇﺫﻥ
n −1
= ،Qﻭﻣﻨﻪ ∑ j = 0 αj E j ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ degQ < nﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( αj )0≤ j <n ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . ϕ (Q ) = 0ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ T nﻓﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ، deg (T n − n ! En ) < nﺇﺫﻥ
! . ϕ (T n ) = n ! ϕ ( En ) = ( −1 )n nﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻃﺌﺔ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻀﺎﺀ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ] ℝ [ X ,Y , Zﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞﹼ ﺍﳋﻄﹼﻲ Φ
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ :
)(2 = ) ) Φ (Q ( X ,Y , Z ∑ ) C niC njC nk ( −1 )i + j +k Q ( i, j , k
0≤i , j ,k ≤n
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ
n i n j
i α
n k
j β
Φ ( X Y Z ) = ∑ C n −1 i ∑ C n −1 j ∑ C n ( −1 )k k γ
α
β γ
( ) ( )
i = 0 j = 0 k = 0
) = ϕ (T α ) ϕ (T β ) ϕ (T γ
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ( α, β, γ ) ∈ I X ∪ IY ∪ I Zﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ Φ ( X αY βZ γ ) = 0
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ . Φ ( X nY nZ n ) = ( −1 )n ( n ! )3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 1ﺃﻥﹼ
Φ ( P ( X ,Y , Z ) ) = δΦ ( X nY nZ n ) = d1d2 ⋯d ℓ ≠ 0
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ P ( i, j , k ) = 0ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ iﻭ jﻭ k
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { 0,1, …, nﺃﻥﹼ . Φ ( P ( X ,Y , Z ) ) = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ.
ù ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ . ℓ = 3nﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
ﻧﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ، ABCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Hﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺗﻪ .ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Hﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ BCﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ A1ﻭ . A2ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ
ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Hﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [CAﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ B1ﻭ ، B2
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Hﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] [ ABﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ C 1
ﻭ .C 2ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A1ﻭ A2ﻭ B1ﻭ B2ﻭ C 1ﻭ C 2ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ Cﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻭﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Rﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ.
âﻟﺘﻜﻦ H ′ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ OH ′ = OA + OB + OCﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
) AH ′ ⋅ BC = (OC + OB ) ⋅ (OC − OB
2 2
= OC − OB = R 2 − R 2 = 0
ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ BH ′ ⋅ CA = 0ﻭ .CH ′ ⋅ AB = 0ﺇﺫﻥ H ′ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﺃﻱ . H ′ = Hﺇﺫﻥ
OH = OA + OB + OC
âﻟﺘﻜﻦ A′ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] ، [ BCﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
1 1
) OA′ = (OB + OC ) = (OH − OA
2 2
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
1
) A′H = OH − OA′ = (OH + OA
2
âﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ،ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ A1A′Oﻭ A2A′Oﳒﺪ
OH 2 + OA2 OH 2 + R 2
= (OA1 )2 = (OA2 )2 = OA′2 + A′H 2 =
2 2
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ
OH 2 + R 2 OH 2 + R 2
= OC 1 = OC 2 = OB1 = OB2ﻭ
2 2
ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ A1ﻭ A2ﻭ B1ﻭ B2ﻭ C 1ﻭ C 2ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ
ù ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ. 1
2 ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) (OH 2 + R 2
489
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 490
) (aﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ
x2 y2 z2
+ + ≥1
(x − 1)2 (y − 1)2 (z − 1)2
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﻭ yﻭ zﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ 1ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . xyz = 1
) ( x , y, z ) (bﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻞﱞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ 1ﻭﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . xyz = 1
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻭ yﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻋﻦ 1ﻭﺟﺪﺍﺅﳘﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ . 1ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻀﻊ p = xy
ﻭ . s = x + yﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
x2 y2 ) x 2 ( y 2 − 2y + 1 ) + y 2 ( x 2 − 2x + 1
+ =
( 1 − x )2 ( 1 − y )2 ( xy − x − y + 1 )2
2p 2 − 2ps + x 2 + y 2
=
( p − s + 1 )2
2p 2 − 2ps + s 2 − 2p
=
( p − s + 1 )2
( p − s )2 + p 2 − 2p
=
( p − s + 1 )2
( p − s + 1 )2 − 2 ( p − s + 1 ) + 1 + p 2 − 2p
=
( p − s + 1 )2
2 p − 1 2
=1+ +
s − p + 1 s − p − 1
1 p −1 1 2
= 1− + +
s − p − 1 p − 1
( p − 1 )2
1 z2
،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ = ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ z = 1 / pﻛﺎﻥ
( p − 1 )2 ( 1 − z )2
x2 y2 z2 p −1 1 2
+ + = 1 +
s − p − 1 p − 1 ≥ 1
+
( 1 − x )2 ( 1 − y )2 ( 1 − z )2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ) . (a
491 ﻋﺎﻡ 2008
) (bﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ xﻭ yﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭﺟﺪﺍﺀ ﺿﺮﻤﺎ
ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
p −1 1
+ =0
s − p −1 p −1
ﺣﻴﺚ p = xyﻭ ، s = x + yﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺃﻥﹼ . s = 3p − p 2ﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ xﻭ yﳘﺎ
ﺟﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻮﻝ Tﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ :
T 2 − ( 3p − p 2 )T + p = 0
ﻣﻊ . p ≠ 1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳑﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ
2 2
∆ = ( 3p − p ) − 4 p = p ( p − 4 )( p − 1 )2
ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻟﻨﺠﺪ xﻭ yﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ pﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺎﹰ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) p ( p − 4ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ) ( p, tﻣﻦ ℚ2ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . p ( p − 4 ) = t 2ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
) ( 4, 0ﺣﻼﹰ ﺗﺎﻓﻬﺎﹰ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﲝﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ p = 4 + λtﻣﻊ . λ ∈ ℚﳒﺪ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻥﹼ
4 4λ
=p = tﻭ 2
1−λ 1 − λ2
ﺣﻴﺚ λﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ 1ﻭ ، −1ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ xﻭ yﺟﺬﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
) 4 ( 1 + 3λ 2 4
T2 + T+ =0
2 2 1 − λ2
) (1 − λ
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﳒﺪ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ
−2 ( 1 − λ ) −2 ( 1 + λ ) 1 − λ 2
{ x , y, z } = 2 , 2 ,
) ( 1 + λ ) (1 − λ 4
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ λ = 2n + 1ﺣﻴﺚ ∗ ، n ∈ ℕﳒﺪ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ
n +1
= } { x n , yn , zn { n +n 1
( 2
)
,−
n2
) , −n ( n + 1 }
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ
ù ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﰲ ) ، (aﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ) . (b
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 492
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻻ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﺃ ﻭﱄ
ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ n 2 + 1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ . 2n + 2n
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭ ﻟﻴﺔ pﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ p ≡ 1 mod 4ﻭ . p > 13ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﰲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ pﻣﻦ Nﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
}) Sp = {n ≥ 0 : p | ( n 2 + 1
ﻧﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ Wilson âﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ ≠ . Spﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ
( p − 1 ) ! ≡ −1 mod p
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻷﻥﹼ ، p = 4m + 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2m 2 2m 2m 4m
∏ ≡ k ≡ ∏ k ∏ ( p − k )
∏ k ≡ ( p − 1 )! = −1 mod p
k =1 k =1 k =1 k =1
ﺇﺫﻥ . ( p −2 1 ) ! ∈ Sp
âﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ) n p = min ( Spﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
ãﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n p ≥ pﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻷﻥﹼ ، n p − p ∈ Spﺇﺫﻥ . n p < p
p p
< . np ãﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ≥ n pﻭﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻷﻥﹼ ، p − n p ∈ Spﺇﺫﻥ
2 2
ãﻟﻨﻀﻊ . k p = p − 2n p > 0ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ
k p2 + 4 ≡ 4 ( n p2 + 1 ) ≡ 0 mod p
ﺇﺫﻥ ) . p | ( k p2 + 4ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ p > 13ﺇﺫﻥ k p2 + 4 ≥ 17ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ
k p2 ≥ 13ﺃﻱ . k p ≥ 4ﻭﻟﻜﻦ k p ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺇﺫﻥ . k p > 4ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
k p2 + k p > k p2 + 4 ≥ p
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ k p2 > 2n pﺃﻭ . p > 2n p + 2n p
âﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ p ֏ n pﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ n p = nq = nﻣﻊ ، p ≠ q
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮ ﻥ gcd ( p, q ) = 1ﻭ ) p | ( n 2 + 1ﻭ ) q | ( n 2 + 1ﺃ ﻥﹼ pqﻳﻘﺴﻢ
، n 2 + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ( 2n + 2n )2 < pq ≤ n 2 + 1ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﺇﺫﻥ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {n p : p ∈ Nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻷﻥﹼ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Nﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ .ﻭﺑﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ
ù ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
493 ﻋﺎﻡ 2008
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ [∞ f : ]0, +∞[ → ] 0, +ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
( f ( w ) )2 + ( f ( x ) )2 w2 + x2
=
) f (y 2 ) + f ( z 2 y2 + z 2
ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ wﻭ xﻭ yﻭ zﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ . wx = yz
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ fﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ.
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ w = x = y = z = 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . f ( 1 ) = 1
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ w = z = 1ﻭ y = xﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 ∀x ∈ ℝ∗+ , f ( x 2 ) = ( f ( x ) )2
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ( w, x , y, z ) ∈ ( ℝ∗+ )4ﻣﻊ wx = yzﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
f (w ) + f ( x ) w + x
)(2 =
) f (y ) + f ( z y +z
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ xﻣﻦ ℝ∗+ﻧﻌﻮﺽ ﰲ ) ( 2ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ w = xﻭ z = 1ﻭ y = x 2ﻓﻨﺠﺪ
) 2f ( x 2x
= ) (2
1+ f x 1 + x2
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ( xf ( x ) − 1 )( f ( x ) − x ) = 0ﺇﺫﻥ
)(3 ∀x ∈ ℝ∗+, } f ( x ) ∈ { x ,1/x
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ :
1
{
= ) B = x ∈ ℝ∗+ \{1 } : f ( x
x } } A = { x ∈ ℝ∗+ \{1 } : f ( x ) = xﻭ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ } ، A ∪ B = ℝ∗+ \{1ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ) . ( 3 â
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ∅ ≠ Aﻭ ∅ ≠ Bﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳒﺪ a ∈ Aﻭ . b ∈ Bﻭﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) ( 2 â
ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ x = bﻭ w = aﻭ y = z = abﺃﻥﹼ
1 − b2 a 1 a2 − 1 b
= ) f ( ab ab + = +
a +b b ab a +b a
ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ a = 1ﺃﻭ ، b = 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠ
ﻒ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ( 3ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ab
ﻭﺍﺿﺢ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ∅ = Bﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، ∀x ∈ ℝ∗+, f ( x ) = x ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∅ = Aﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ. ∀x ∈ ℝ∗+, f ( x ) = 1/x
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﻥ x ֏ xﻭ x ֏ 1/xﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ،ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﳊﻼﹼﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩﺍﻥù .
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 494
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻭ kﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ k ≥ nﻭ k − nﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ .ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ 2nﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ ، 2n ، … ، 2 ، 1ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻣﻀﺎﺀً ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﹰ .ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ،ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ .ﻭﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ
ﳚﺮﻱ ﻗﹶﻠﹾﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ) ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﹰ ﺃﺿﺄﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻀﺎﺀً ﺃﻃﻔﺄﻧﺎﻩ( .
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Nﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ kﺧﻄﻮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ
ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ nﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ n + 1ﺇﱃ 2n
ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ.
ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ Mﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ kﺧﻄﻮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ
ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ nﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ n + 1ﺇﱃ 2n
ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ،ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ n + 1ﺇﱃ 2nﰲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ
N
. ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ .ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ
M
ﻟﻨﺒﺪ ﺃ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍ ﻟﺮ ﻣﻮ ﺯ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍ ﳌﺘﺘﺎ ﻟﻴﺎ ﺕ ﺍ ﳌﻜﻮ ﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ kﺧﻄﻮ ﺓ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍ ﻤﻮ ﻋﺔ
، S = ( ℕ 2n )kﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﺒﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ) pﺣﻴﺚ ( 1 ≤ p ≤ kﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
j pﻋﱪﻧﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ( j1, j2, …, jkﻣﻦ . S
ﺃﻣﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ Sﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ
nﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ n + 1ﺇﱃ 2nﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ،ﻓﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ . SNﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ( j1, j2, …, jkﻣﻦ Sﺇﱃ SNﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} { p : j p = iﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ i ≤ nﻭﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n < i ≤ 2n
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ Sﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ
ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﱃ nﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ n + 1ﺇﱃ 2nﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ،ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ
ﻳﻀﺎﺀ ﺃ ﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ n + 1ﺇﱃ 2nﰲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
. SMﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ( j1, j2, …, jkﻣﻦ Sﺇﱃ SMﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } { p : j p = iﻓﺮﺩﻳﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، 1 ≤ i ≤ nﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ } { p : j p = i
ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n < i ≤ 2n
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ) N = card ( SNﻭ ) . M = card ( SM
495 ﻋﺎﻡ 2008
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ .ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
j : 1≤ j ≤n
σ : ℕ 2n → ℕ n : σ ( j ) =
j − n : n < j ≤ 2n
SMﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) s = ( j1, …, jkﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ SNﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ϕ ( sﻣﻦ
) ) ، ϕ ( s ) = ( σ ( j1 ), …, σ ( jkﺇ ﺫﹾ ﻋﻮﺿﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻗﹶﻠﹾﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻪ jﺃﻛﱪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ
nﻧﻘﻠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻪ ، j − nﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﺎﹰ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﹼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ . j − nﻭﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ sﻣﻦ SMﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، ϕ ( s ) = sﻓﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ϕ : SN → SMﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻏﺎﻣﺮ،
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ( ϕ−1 ( s ) )s ∈SMﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ، SNﺇﺫﻥ
) (1 = ) card ( SN ∑ card ( ϕ−1 ( )) s
s ∈ SM
ﻟﻨﺜﺒﺖ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ) s = ( i1, …, ikﻣﻦ . SMﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 ≤ ℓ ≤ nﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} Aℓ = { p ∈ ℕ k : ip = ℓ
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ Aℓﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻢ . ℓﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ
sﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ SMﺃﻥﹼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻛﻤﺎ
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ . ℕ kﺇﺫﻥ
n
= k ) ∑ card ( Aℓ
ℓ =1
Pﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ Aﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ even
) (A ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ Aﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ .ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ
) ) B ∈ P even ( A ) ⇔ ( B ⊂ A ) ∧ ( 2 | card ( B
n
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ B = ( Bℓ )ℓ∈ ℕ nﻣﻦ ) ∏ P even ( Aℓﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ
ℓ =1
B
s ) = ( j1B , j2B , …, jkB
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ j pB = ip + nﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، p ∈ ∪ ℓ∈ ℕ n Bℓﻭ j pB = ipﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . p ∉ ∪ ℓ ∈ℕ n Bℓ
ﺃﻱ ،ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ Aℓﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ، ℓﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ B ℓ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ،ﻭﰲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Bℓﻧﻘﻠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ℓ + nﺑﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻠﹾﺐ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ . ℓ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 496
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ) s B ∈ ϕ−1 ( sﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ B ֏ s Bﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
n
) ∏ P even ( Aℓﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﻩ ) ، ϕ−1 ( sﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ℓ =1
) s ′ = ( j1, …, jk ) ֏ ( Bℓs ′
ℓ ∈ℕ n
.ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ B ℓs ′ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ } = Aℓ ∩ { p ∈ ℕ k : j p = ℓ + n
n n
) ) card ( ϕ−1 ( s ) ) = card ∏ P even ( Aℓ ) = ∏ card ( P even ( Aℓ
ℓ =1 ℓ =1
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ،ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ Aﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ B ֏ A\Bﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﺑﲔ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ Aﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ،ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
1 1
= ) ) card ( P even ( A ) card ( P ( A ) ) = × 2card( A
2 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
n
1 1 n
= ) ) card ( ϕ−1 ( s n ∏ 2
) card( Aℓ
= n 2∑ ℓ =1 card( Aℓ ) = 2k −n
2 ℓ =1 2
ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ) ( 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
= ) card ( SN ∑ card ( ϕ−1 ( ) s ) ) = 2k −n card ( SM
s ∈ SM
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ N /M = 2k −nﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ] ، A = ℝ [ X1, …, X 2nﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ
، X1, X 2, …, X 2nﻭﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﲔ νﻭ µﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ :
1
= ) ) ν (G (X1, …, X 2n ∑ ) ε1ε2 ⋯ εnG (ε1, …, εn , εn +1, …, ε2n
22n (ε1 ,…,εn )∈2n
1
= ) ) µ (G (X1, …, X 2n ∑ )ε1ε2 ⋯ εnG (ε1, …, εn , 0, …, 0
2n (ε1 ,…,εn )∈{−1,1}n
ﻭﻟﻨﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ .ﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ
n 2n
1 − ( −1 )αj 1 + ( −1 )αj
ν ( X1α1 ⋯ X 2αn2n ∏ =) ∏
j =1 2 j =n +1 2
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ν ( X1α1 ⋯ X 2αn2n ) = 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ( αj )1≤ j ≤nﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
( αj )n < j ≤2nﺯﻭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ν ( X1α1 ⋯ X 2αn2n ) = 0ﰲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ.
497 2008 ﻋﺎﻡ
،ﺔ ( ﻓﺮﺩﻳαj )1≤ j ≤n ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩµ ( X1α1 ⋯ X 2αn2n ) = 1 ﻭﳒﺪ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ
.ﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ ﺑﻘﻴµ ( X1α1 ⋯ X 2αn2n ) = 0 ﻭ، ( ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔαj )n < j ≤2n ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎS ﻣﻦs = ( j1, j2, …, jk ) ﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧ
1 : s ∈ SN
ν ( X j1 X j2 ⋯ X jk ) =
0 : s ∉ SN
ﻭ
1 : s ∈ SM
µ ( X j1 X j2 ⋯ X jk ) =
0 : s ∉ SM
ﻓﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
F ( X1, …, X 2n ) = ∑ X j1 X j2 ⋯ X jk
( j1 ,…, jk )∈ S
ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ν ( F ( X1, …, X 2n ) ) = card ( SN ) = N
µ ( F ( X1, …, X 2n ) ) = card ( SM ) = M
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ
2n 2n 2n 2n k
F ( X1, …, X 2n ) = ∑ ∑ ⋯ ∑ Xj Xj 1 2
⋯ X jk = ∑ X j
j1 =1 j2 =1 jk =1 j =1
ﺇﺫﻥ
1
N =
22n ∑ ε1ε2 ⋯ εn F ( ε1, …, εn , εn +1, …, ε2n )
( ε1 ,…,ε2n )∈{ −1,1 }2n
1
M =
2n ∑ ε1ε2 ⋯ εnF ( ε1, …, εn , 0, …, 0 )
( ε1 ,…,ε2n )∈{ −1,1 }n
. M ﻭN ﻟﻨﺤﺴﺐ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ
ﳒﺪN ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
1
N =
22n ∑ ε1ε2 ⋯ εn F ( ε1, …, εn , εn +1, …, ε2n )
( ε1 ,…,ε2n )∈{ −1,1 }2n
n n
1
= 2n
2 ∑ ∑ C np ( −1 )p C nq ( n − 2p + n − 2q )k
p =0 q =0
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 498
ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ
) } p = card ( {1 ≤ i ≤ n : εi = −1
) } q = card ( {n + 1 ≤ i ≤ 2n : εi = −1 ﻭ
ﺇﺫﻥ
n n
1
= N
2 2n −k ∑ ∑ C np ( −1 )p C nq ( n − p − q )k
p =0 q =0
2n
1
=
22n −k
∑ ∑ (n − r )k ( −1 )p C npC nq
r =0 p +q =r ,
0≤ p,q ≤n
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ X rﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ∑ ( −1 )p C npC nq ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
p +q =r
2 n
( 1 − X )n ( 1 + X )n = ( 1 − X )
ﺇﺫﻥ
n
1
= N
22n −k ∑ ( −1 )ℓ C nℓ(n − 2ℓ)k
ℓ=0
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Mﳒﺪ
1
= M
2n ∑ ) ε1ε2 ⋯ εn F ( ε1, …, εn , 0, …, 0
( ε1 ,…,ε2n )∈{ −1,1 }n
n
1
=
2n ∑ C nℓ ( −1 )ℓ ( n − 2ℓ )k
ℓ=0
N
ù ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ. ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ = 2k −n
M
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCDﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﳏﺪﺑﺎﹰ ﻓﻴﻪ . BA ≠ BCﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ω1ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ
ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ω2ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ADC
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ωﲤﺲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) [ BAﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Aﻭﲤﺲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
) [ BCﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، Cﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺃﺎ ﲤﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( ADﻭ ) . (CDﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ
ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ω1ﻭ ω2ﻳﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . ω
499 ﻋﺎﻡ 2008
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ.
ω
P
Q
S
Z R
∆
D ω3
L
A
J ω2
I
C
K ω1
ω4
B
.1ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺃﻥﹼ
) (1 BA + AD = BC + CD
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻭ Qﻭ Rﻭ Sﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ωﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BAﻭ ) (CDﻭ ) ( AD
ﻭ ) ( BCﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
BP = BA + AP = BA + AR = BA + AD + DR
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ . BA + AD = BP − DRﻭﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ، BC + CD = BS − DQ
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ) ( 1ﻷﻥﹼ BS = BPﻭ . DQ = DR
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 500
.2ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Iﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω1ﻣﻊ ) ، ( ACﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Jﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω2ﻣﻊ
) . ( ACﺳﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ . AI = CJ
ﻟﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ p1ﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، ABCﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ p2ﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ . ADC
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ
AI = p1 − BCﻭ CI = p1 − BA
ﺇﺫﻥ . AI − CI = BA − BCﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳒﺪ
AJ = p2 − CDﻭ CJ = p2 − AD
ﺇﺫﻥ .CJ − AJ = CD − ADﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ) ( 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
AI − CI = CJ − AJ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﲨﻌﻨﺎ ACﺇﱃ ﻃﺮﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ 2AI = 2CJﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ . AI = CJ
.3ﻟﺘﻜﻦ ω3ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ ACﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﲤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ACﰲ ، Jﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ .CJ = AI = p1 − BC
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω4ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎﹰ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ADCﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] ، [ AC
ﲤﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [ ACﰲ ، Iﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥﹼ . AI = CJ = p2 − AD
.4ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Kﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ Iﰲ ، ω1ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Lﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ J
ﰲ ، ω2ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻟﻨﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ∆ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ωﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( ACﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ، D
ﻓﻴﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ωﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . Zﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω1ﰲ Kﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ
) ( ACﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω2ﰲ . L
ãﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Bﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ω1ﺇﱃ ω3ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﰲ Kﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω1
ﺇﱃ ) ( ACﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺲ ω3ﰲ . Jﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bﻭ Kﻭ Jﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ãﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Bﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ω1ﺇﱃ ωﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﰲ K
ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω1ﺇﱃ ∆ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺲ ωﰲ . Zﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Bﻭ Kﻭ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ãﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Dﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ω2ﺇﱃ ω4ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﰲ Lﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω2ﺇﱃ
) ( ACﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺲ ω4ﰲ . Iﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Dﻭ Lﻭ Iﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
501 ﻋﺎﻡ 2008
ãﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈ ﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Dﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ω2ﺇﱃ ωﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ L
ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ω2ﺇﱃ ∆ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺲ ωﰲ . Zﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Dﻭ Lﻭ Zﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Zﻣﻦ ωﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( BJﻭ ) . ( DI
) ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻘﲔ ،ﻷﻥ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻗﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ AI = CIﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺃﻥﹼ
AB = BCﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ( .
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ Hﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ Zﻭﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . H ( L ) = Iﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ
) ( LJﻭ ) ( IKﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ACﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) ، H ( J ) ∈ ( IK
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇ ﻥﹼ ) H ( J ) ∈ ( ZJﺇﺫﻥ ) H (Jﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) ( IKﻭ ) ( ZJﺃﻱ
.K
ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ] ، H ( [ LJ ] ) = [ IKﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ H ( ω2 ) = ω1 ﻷ ﻥﹼ ] [ LJ
ﻗﻄﺮ ﰲ ω2ﻭ ] [ IKﻗﻄﺮ ﰲ . ω1ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ω2ﺇﱃ ω1ﻫﻮ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺳﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﲔ ﳍﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺗﲔ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ Z
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . ωﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 502
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻮﻥ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ nﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ، a1, a2, …, akﺣﻴﺚ ) ، (k ≥ 2ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1,2, …, nﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ n ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ai (ai +1 − 1
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ iﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . {1,2, …, k − 1ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ nﻻ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ). ak (a1 − 1
ﻟﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺑﺈﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
Pi : a1 ≡ a1ai mod n
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ iﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } . {2, …, k
âﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ P2ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻷﻥﹼ nﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) a1(a2 − 1ﲝﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻨﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ . H
âﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺻﺤﺔ Piﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺻﺤﺔ . Pi +1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ
ai ≡ aiai +1 mod n
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
Pi H Pi
a1 ≡ a1ai ≡ a1(aiai +1 ) ≡ (a1ai )ai +1 ≡ a1ai +1 mod n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ . Pi +1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ Pkﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ
a1ak ≡ a1 mod n
ﻓﺈ ﺫ ﺍ ﺍ ﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍ ﳉﺪ ﻝ ﺃ ﻥﹼ nﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) ، ak (a1 − 1ﻛﺎ ﻥ ، a1ak ≡ ak mod n
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ . a1 ≡ ak mod nﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ a1 ≠ akﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
a1 − ak ≥ n
ù ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ a1ﻭ akﺇﱃ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ }. {1,2, …, n
503
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 504
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Oﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺳﻪ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ
ﺍ ﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [CAﻭ Qﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩ ﺍ ﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ABﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﺎ ﻁ Kﻭ Lﻭ ، M
ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [BPﻭ ] [CQﻭ ] [PQﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (PQ
ﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ Kﻭ Lﻭ . Mﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ .OP = OQ
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ PQCﳝﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (MLﲟﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [PQﻭ ] [CQﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ) . (AC
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ،ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ PQBﳝﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (MKﲟﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [PQﻭ ] [BQﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ
) . (ABﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(1 = CAQ
LMK
C
P Γ
L K
O
M
B
Q
A
= PML
APMﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻷﻥﹼ ) . (ML) || (APﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،
MLﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﻴﺔ
. MKLﺇﺫﻥ
PMLﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﳑﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γﲢﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
= MKL
. PMLﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥﹼ
)(2 = APQ
MKL
ﻣﻦ ) (1ﻭ ) (2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ APQﻭ MKLﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
MK ML
)(3 =
AP AQ
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ 2MK = QBﻭ . 2ML = PCﺇﺫﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) (3ﺃﻥﹼ
)(4 AQ ⋅ BQ = AP ⋅ CP
505 ﻋﺎﻡ 2009
ﺇﻥﹼ AP ⋅ CPﻫﻲ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Pﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ
ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ R 2 − OP 2ﺣﻴﺚ Rﻫﻮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ .ﻭﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥﹼ AQ ⋅ BQ
ù ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ R2 − OQ 2ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ OP = OQﻣﻦ ). (4
ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ (sk )k ≥1ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ
ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺘﲔ (ssk )k ≥1ﻭ (ssk +1 )k ≥1ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺘﺎﻥ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (sk )k ≥1ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ Aﻭ dAﻭ Bﻭ dBﲜﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
∀k ≥ 1, ss = A + kdA, ss +1 = B + kdB
k k
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ (sk )k ≥1ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ
∀k ≥ 1, sk < sk + 1 ≤ sk +1
ﻭﻧﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ
∀k ≥ 1, ss < ss +1 ≤ ss
k k k +1
ﺃﻭ
∀k ≥ 1, A + kdA < B + kdB ≤ A + (k + 1)dA
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ
A−B A + dA − B
∀k ≥ 1, ≤ < dB − dA
k k
ﳑﺎ ﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ﹼﻥ dA = dBﲜﻌﻞ kﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﺎﻳﺔ .ﻟﻨﻀﻊ . d = dA = dB
ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ k ≥ 1ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
sk +1
d = ss
k +1
= − ss
k
∑ (s j − s j −1 ) ≥ sk +1 − sk ≥ 0
g =sk +1
↵≤1
ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (sk +1 − sk )k ≥1ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ،ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ
M = max(sn +1 − sn ), ) m = min(sn +1 − sn
n ≥1 n ≥1
ﺎﺕﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴ 506
ﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﻳq ﻭp ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ
M = s p +1 − s p , m = sq +1 − sq
ﺍﻵﻥ
ss − ss = ss − ss = A + d (s p + M ) − A − ds p = dM
s p +1 sp s p +M sp
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
ss
p +1
dM = ss
s p +1
− ss
sp
= ∑ (s j − s j −1 ) ≤ M (ss
p +1
− ss ) = Md
p
j =ss
p +1
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀j ∈ {ss , ss + 1, …, ss }, s j − s j −1 = M
p +1 p +1 p +1
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
M = ss − ss = B − A
p +1 p
ﻭﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
ss − ss = ss − ss = B + d (sq + m ) − B − dsq = dm
s p +1 sp sq +m sq
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
ss
q +1
dm = ss
sq +1
− ss
sq
= ∑ (s j − s j −1 ) ≥ m(ss
q +1
− ss ) = md
q
j =ss
q +1
ﺇﺫﻥ
∀j ∈ {ss +1, ssq +1 + 1, …, ss }, s j − s j −1 = m
q q +1
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ
m = ss +1 − ss = B − A
q q
ﺃﻱ ﺇﻥﹼ، m = M ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ≥ 1, sn +1 − sn = m
ù . ﻭﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ،ﺔ( ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴsn )n ≥1 ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
507 ﻋﺎﻡ 2009
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻓﻴﻪ . AB = ACﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
CABﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [BCﰲ
، Dﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ABCﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ] [CAﰲ . Eﻟﻴﻜﻦ Kﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ADCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ = 45
BEKﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ
ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
.CAB
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Iﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄ ﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ E ′ﻣﻦ ] [DC
ﻧﻈﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ Eﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (ICﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
. ACBﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﺎﻥ :
A
E
I
K
B C
D E′
= IDC
، IECﻭﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ ) (BEﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ âﺣﺎﻟﺔ . E ′ = Dﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃ ﻥﹼ = 90
ABCﻫﻮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ، BA = BC ﻓﺎﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ
ABCﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ = 60
.CAB
= IE
، IDKﻓﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ IDE ′K âﺣﺎﻟﺔ . E ′ ≠ Dﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ = 45
′K = IEK
ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ
= KIE
KIE ′ = KDE
′ = 45
ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ،ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ، BICﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
45 = IBC = 1 (ABC
+ ICB ) = 1 (180 − CAB
+ ACB )
2 2
ﺃﻱ = 90
.CAB
CABﺃﻭ = 60
CABﻟﺪ ﻳﻨﺎ = 45
BEK âﻭﻧﺘﻴﻘﹼﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ = 90
ù ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
.CAB
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 508
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ fﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ∗ ، ℕﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ
ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ aﻭ bﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻏﲑ ﺗﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﻫﻲ :
aﻭ ) f (bﻭ )f (b + f (a ) − 1
) ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻏﲑ ﺗﺎﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺭﺅﻭﺳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( .
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ∗ f : ℕ∗ → ℕﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻨﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
.1ﻟﻴﻜﻦ aﻭ bﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﲔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ } {1, a,bﺗﻤﺜﹼﻞ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ
ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻏﲑ ﺗﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . a = bﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
a −1 < b < a +1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ . b = a
.2ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ . τ = f (1) − 1 ≠ 0ﻟﻴﻜﻦ bﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ∗ . ℕﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ }) {1, f (b), f (b + τﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻏﲑ ﺗﺎﻓﻪ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) . f (b) = f (b + τﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ
) ، M = max1≤β ≤τ f (β
ﻛﺎﻥ
∀b ≥ 1, f (b ) ≤ M
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ a = 2M + 1ﻭ b = 1ﻛﺎﻥ
)a > f (b ) + f (b + f (a ) − 1
ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ aﻭ ) f (bﻭ ) f (b + f (a ) − 1ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، τ = 0ﺃﻱ . f (1) = 1
.3ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ b = 1ﻭ aﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ aﻭ 1ﻭ )) f ( f (a
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻏﲑ ﺗﺎﻓﻪ ،ﺃﻥﹼ . f (f (a )) = aﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻥﹼ
fﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ.
509 ﻋﺎﻡ 2009
.4ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ، f (1) = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ . κ = f (2) − 1 > 0ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ a = 2ﻭ bﻣﻦ ∗ ℕﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ 2ﻭ ) f (bﻭ ) f (b + κﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ
ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
f (b) − 2 < f (b + κ) < f (b ) + 2
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ) ، f (b + κ) ≠ f (bﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
0 < f (b + κ) − f (b) ≤ 1
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ
∀b ∈ ℕ ∗ , f (b + κ) − f (b ) = 1
.5ﻟﻴﻜﻦ bﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﻣﻦ ∗ ، ℕﻳﻮﺟﺪ ) εn (bﻣﻦ
} {−1,1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
) f (b + n κ) − f (b + (n − 1)κ) = εn (b
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ εn (b)εn +1(b) < 0ﻛﺎﻥ εn (b) + εn +1(b) = 0ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥﹼ
)f (b + (n + 1)κ) = f (b + (n − 1)κ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ 2κ = 0ﻷﻥﹼ fﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ .ﺇﺫﻥ
∀n > 0, )εn (b ) = εn +1(b
ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ) ε(bﰲ } {−1,1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) εn (b) = ε(bﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . nﻭﻣﻨﻪ
∀n > 0, ) f (b + n κ) − f (b + (n − 1)κ) = ε(b
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺃﻥﹼ ε(b) = −1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n > 0, f (b + nκ) − f (b) = −n
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ nﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ) . f (bﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، ε(b) = 1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
∀n > 0, f (b + n κ) − f (b + (n − 1)κ) = 1
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 510
ﺃﻭ
∀n ≥ 0, f (b + n κ) = f (b) + n
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ،ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ b = 1ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ n − 1ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﳒﺪ
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , f (1 + (n − 1)κ) = n
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻧﺎ ) ، n = κ + 1 = f (2ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ) ، f (1 + κ2 ) = f (2ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ، κ = 1ﻷﻥﹼ f
ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻭ . κ > 0ﺇﺫﻥ
∀n ∈ ℕ ∗ , f (n ) = n
ù ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ،ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ n ֏ nﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳊﻞﹼ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ a1, a2, …, anﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ .ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ Mﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ n − 1ﻭﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
. s = a 1 + a 2 + ⋯ + an
ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ﺟﺮﺍﺩ ﺓﹰ ﺗﻘﻔﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ، 0ﻭﺗﺠﺮﻱ nﻗﻔﺰﺓ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﳍﺎ a1, a2, …, anﰲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺎ .ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ
ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ . M
ﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . nﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n = 1ﺃﻭ n = 2ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ .ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ ، n ≥ 3ﻭﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ
ﻣﻦ . nﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﹼﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥﹼ
an = max(a1, …, an ), m1 = min M
ﻟﻨﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
) (aﺣﺎﻟﺔ m1 < anﻭ . an ∉ Mﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻔﺰﺓ ﻃﻮﳍﺎ ، anﻓﺘﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺔ ، m1ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻗﻔﺰﺍﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ
ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ n − 1ﻟﺘﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } M \{m1ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ . n − 2
511 ﻋﺎﻡ 2009
) (bﺣﺎﻟﺔ m1 < anﻭ an = m j ∈ Mﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﻴﻢ . jﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻧﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ
ﻗﻔﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ (a1, an ),(a2, an ), …,(an −1, an ) :ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ n − 1ﺯﻭﺟﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ
ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ n − 1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﻲ (ak + an )1≤k <nﻭﻫﻲ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ
ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ . an = m jﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } M \{m jﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ n − 1
ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ iﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ 1 ≤ i < nﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ، ai + an ∉ Mﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻔﺰﺗﲔ ) (ai , anﻓﺈﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺘﲔ m1ﻭ ، m jﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻗﻔﺰﺍﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ n − 2ﻟﺘﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ
} M \{m1, m jﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ . n − 3
) (cﺣﺎﻟﺔ . m1 ≥ anﻫﻨﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، m1
ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻔﺰ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﻗﻔﺰﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ، anﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺍﺕ
ﻟﺘﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ } . M \{m1ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ m1ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﻭﺇﻻﹼ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ m1ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺓ ، aiﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺍﺕ ﲟﻨﺎﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺗﲔ anﻭ . aiﻧﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ
ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . M
ù ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 512
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺃﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﳋﻤﺴﻮﻥ
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ f : ℝ → ℝﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ،ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ xﻭ yﻣﻦ ، ℝﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
f (dx t y L = f (x ) d f (y )t
ﺣﻴﺚ da tﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، aﺃﻱ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ . a
ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎﹰ fﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
) (E ∀(x , y ) ∈ ℝ 2 , f (dx t y L = f (x ) d f (y )t
ﺑﻮﺿﻊ x = 0ﻭ y = 0ﰲ ) ، (Eﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
f (0) ( d f (0)t − 1 ) = 0
ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
âﺣﺎﻟﺔ . d f (0)t = 1ﻧﻀﻊ y = 0ﰲ ) ، (Eﻓﻨﺠﺪ
∀x ∈ ℝ, f (x ) = f (0L
ﻭﻷﻥﹼ d f (0)t = 1ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ [ ، f (0) ∈ [1,2ﺃﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ cﰲ ﺍﺎﻝ [ [1,2ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀x ∈ ℝ, f (x ) = c
âﺣﺎﻟﺔ . f (0) = 0ﺑﻮﺿﻊ x = 1ﻭ y = 1ﰲ ) ، (Eﳒﺪ
f (1) ( d f (1)t − 1 ) = 0
ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . f (1) = 0ﺑﻮﺿﻊ x = 1ﰲ ) ، (Eﳒﺪ
∀y ∈ ℝ, f (y ) = 0
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . d f (1)t = 1ﺑﻮﺿﻊ y = 1ﰲ ) ، (Eﳒﺪ
∀x ∈ ℝ, )f (x ) = f (dx t
ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ . f ( 21 ) = f (0) = 0ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ x = 2ﻭ y = 21ﰲ
) (Eﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ، f (1L = f (2)d f (21)t = 0 :ﻭﻫﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﲑ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ.
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ fﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﺪ ﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ [ . {0} ∪ [1, 2ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﻛﻞﱡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ
ù ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . (E
513
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 514
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﻭ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ Iﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ .ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Γﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (AIﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ . Dﻟﺘﻜﻦ E
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻮ ﺱ
، BDCﻭ ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Fﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] ، [BCﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ
= CAE
. BAFﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Gﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ] . [IFﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ < 1 BAC
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ
2
ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) (EIﻭ ) (DGﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ . Γ
âﻟﺘﻜﻦ D ′ﻧﻈﲑﺓ Iﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ . Dﳝﺮﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) (GDﲟﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ] [IFﻭ ] [ID ′
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ IFD ′ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ) . (FD ′ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
)(1 = FD
GDI ′A
= AEC
) ABCﳏﻴﻄﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ âﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ ABFﻭ AECﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ .ﻷﻥﹼ
= EAC
BAFﺑﺎﻟﻔﺮﺽ .ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥﹼ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ( ﻭ
AB AF
=
AE AC
ﺃﻭ
)(2 AB ⋅ AC = AE ⋅ AF
D′
C E
D
Γ
I G
F
A B
L
. ID = CD âﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
= IAC =1 A
+ ICA
DIC
2
) ˆ( ˆ + C
= ICB
+ BCD
= ICB
+ BAD =1 A
ICD
2
) ˆ( ˆ + C
515 ﻋﺎﻡ 2010
= ′ π
. ICDﺇﺫﻥ âﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ] [ID ′ﲤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،Cﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶ ﻢ
2
π 1 ˆ − Cˆ ) = 1 Bˆ = IBA
CD ′A = − DIC = (π − A
2 2 2
.CADﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﻥ AIBﻭ ACD ′ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ′ = IAB ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،
AB AI
=
AD ′ AC
ﺃﻭ
)(3 AB ⋅ AC = AI ⋅ AD ′
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) (2ﻭ ) (3ﺃﻥﹼ
AE AI
=
AD ′ AF
= FAI
IAEﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺜﲔ AEIﻭ . AD ′F ﻭﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ
D′ D′
C E C E
D D
Γ Γ
I G I G
F F
A B A B
L L
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
)(4 = FD
IEA ′A
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ) (1ﻭ ) (4ﺃﻥﹼ
= IEA
GDI
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ Lﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﲔ ) (EIﻭ ) (DGﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ
= LEA
LDA
ù ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ALDEﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ﺗﻘﻊ Lﻋﻠﻰ . Γ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 516
ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ g : ℕ → ℕﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ nﻭ mﻳﻜﻦ
ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) (g(m ) + n )(g(n ) + mﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ.
âﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪ ﺩ n ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . g(n + 1) = g(nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ aﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ ، m = n + 1ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
(a + n )2 < (g (m ) + n )(g (n ) + m ) < (a + n + 1)2
ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) (g(m ) + n )(g(n ) + mﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ .ﺇﺫﻥ
∀n ∈ ℕ, ) g (n + 1) ≠ g(n
âﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ) . g(n + 2) = g(nﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ
aﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻨﺎ ، m = n + 2ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ
(a + n )2 < (g (m ) + n )(g (n ) + m ) < (a + n + 1)2
ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) (g(m ) + n )(g(n ) + mﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ .ﺇﺫﻥ
∀n ∈ ℕ, })g (n ) ∉ {g (n + 2), g(n + 1
âﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ n ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ . g(n + 1) − g(n ) ≥ 2ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ
pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ) . g(n + 1) − g(nﻓﻨﻌﺮ ﻑ r ≥ 1ﺑﺄ ﻧﻪ ﺃ ﻛﱪ ﹸﺃ ﺱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪ ﺩ pﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ
) . g(n + 1) − g(nﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ
g (n + 1) − g(n ) = p rqﺣﻴﺚ gcd(p, q ) = 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . r = 2ℓ + 1ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ tﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
t > ℓﻭ ) p 2t +1 > g(n
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ ) . m = p 2t +1 − g(nﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
g(n ) + m = p 2t +1
) g (n + 1) + m = p 2t +1 + p 2 ℓ +1q = p 2 ℓ +1(p 2(t −ℓ ) + q
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻓﺈﻥﹼ p 2t +1ﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ pﺗﻘﺴﻢ ، g(n ) + mﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ pﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . g(m ) + n
517 ﻋﺎﻡ 2010
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ p 2 ℓ +1ﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ pﺗﻘﺴﻢ . g(n + 1) + mﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﻨﺎ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﳎﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ pﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ . g(m ) + n + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ
ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺇﺫﹾ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ pﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ . (g(m ) + n + 1) − (g(m ) + n ) = 1
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . r = 2ℓ ≥ 2ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ tﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
t ≥ 2ﻭ ) . pt + p > g(n
ﻭﻧﻀﻊ ) . m = pt + p − g(nﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
)g(n ) + m = p(pt −1 + 1
)g (n + 1) + m = pt + p + p 2 ℓq = p(pt −1 + p 2 ℓ−1q + 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﻓﺈﻥﹼ pﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ pﺗﻘﺴﻢ ، g(n ) + mﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ
ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ pﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . g(m ) + n
ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥﹼ pﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ pﺗﻘﺴﻢ . g(n + 1) + mﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ
ﳎﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ pﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ . g(m ) + n + 1ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺇﺫﹾ
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ pﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ . (g(m ) + n + 1) − (g(m ) + n ) = 1
ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻥﹼ
∀n ∈ ℕ, g (n + 1) − g (n ) ≤ 1
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ
∀n ∈ ℕ, g (n + 1) − g(n ) = 1
âﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (εn )n ≥0ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {−1, +1ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀n ∈ ℕ, g (n + 1) − g (n ) = εn
ﻭﻋﻤﻼﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀n ∈ ℕ, εn + εn +1 ≠ 0
. ∀n ∈ ℕ,ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻱ εn = εn +1
∀n ∈ ℕ, g (n + 1) = g (n ) + ε0
ﺃﻭ ، ∀n ∈ ℕ, g(n ) = g(0) + n ε0ﻭﻷﻥﹼ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ gﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃﻥﹼ ، ε0 = 1
ù ﻓﻠﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ gﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ . g(n ) = n + cﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ،ﻛﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 518
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﻣﻦ ﺩ ﺍ ﺧﻞ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ) ABCﺣﻴﺚ . (CA ≠ CBﺗﻼ ﻗﻲ ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ ) (AP
ﻭ ) (BPﻭ ) (CPﺍ ﻟﺪ ﺍ ﺋﺮ ﺓ Γﺍ ﳌﺎ ﺭ ﺓ ﺑﺮ ﺅ ﻭ ﺱ ﺍ ﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺛﺎ ﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ Kﻭ Lﻭ M
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ .ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ﰲ Cﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ Γﻳﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ABﰲ . Sﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ
SC = SPﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ . MK = ML
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Rﻭ Tﻧﻘﻄﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) (SPﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ R ، Γ
C
K ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ
. ALC
L T
P
S R = SPC
. SCPﻭﻣﻨﻪ âﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ SC = SPﻛﺎﻥ
A B
= 1 CAP
= 1 CR
+ RM
SCP
2 2
( )
M
1
SPC = RPC = CR
2
+ MT ( )
ﺇﺫﻥ
)(1 = MT
RM
âﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ SP 2 = SC 2 = SA ⋅ SBﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺠﻨﺎ ﺃ ﻥﹼ ) (SPﳝﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎ ﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ
= PBA
. SPAﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ APBﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ
= 1 LRA
= 1 LR
+ RA
PBA
2 2
( )
1
SPA = RPA = RA
2
(
+ TK )
ﺇﺫﻥ
)(2 = TK
LR
ﲜﻤﻊ ) (1ﻭ ) (2ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
= MK
LM
ù ﻭﻣﻨﻪ . LM = MKﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ.
519 ﻋﺎﻡ 2010
ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ،ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞﱡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺐ B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺘﺎﻥ :
ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ B jﺣﻴﺚ ، 1 ≤ j ≤ 5ﳓﺬﻑ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻧﻀﻴﻒ
ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﺇﱃ . B j +1
ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ Bkﺣﻴﺚ ، 1 ≤ k ≤ 4ﳓﺬﻑ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻧﺒﺎﺩﻝ
ﺑﲔ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺘﲔ Bk +1ﻭ . Bk +2
ﺃﹶﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺐ
2010(2010ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ. B1, B2, B3, B4 , B5ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ B6ﻋﻠﻰ
2010
)
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺘﲔ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰﺍﹰ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ :
T
] : [a, b
1
]→ [a − 1, b + 2
T
: [a, b, c ]
2
] → [a − 1, c, b
ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺘﲔ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
âﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ : T3′
2b
) (T1 T
T3′ : [a, 2 , 0] →[a, 0, 2b +1 ]
b 2
→[a − 1, 2
b +1
], 0
âﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ T3ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ aﻣﺮﺓ :
(T ′)a
b +a
T3 : [a,2b , 0]
3
→[0, 2 ], 0
âﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ : T4′
T T d Td
T4′ : [c, d , 0, 0]
1
→[c, d − 1,2, 0 ]
3
→[c, 0, 2 , 0 ]
2
]→[c − 1, 2 , 0, 0
âﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ T4ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ cﻣﺮﺓ :
(T ′)c
T4 : [c, d, 0, 0]
4
]→[0, E E ⋯ E (d ), 0, 0
cﻣﺮﺓ
ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺘﺒﻨﺎ ) E (xﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 2x
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 520
ﻟﻨﺄﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
T1 T2
][1,1,1,1, 1,1 ]→ [1,1,1, 1, 0, 3 ]→ [1,1,1, 0, 3, 0
T2 T1
][1,1, 1, 0, 3, 0 ]→ [1,1, 0, 3, 0, 0 ]→ [0, 3, 0, 3, 0, 0
T T1
[0, 3, 0, 3, 0, 0]
2
]→ [0, 2, 3, 0, 0, 0 ]→ [0,1, 5, 0, 0, 0
T1 T1
][0, 1, 5, 0, 0, 0 → [0, 0, 7, 0, 0, 0] ]→ [0, 0, 6, 2, 0, 0
T4
][0, 0, 6,2, 0, 0 → [0, 0, 0, E ] E ⋯ E (2), 0, 0
6
ﺛﹸﻢ ﻟﻨﺘﺄﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﱪ
22
22
22
D = E E ⋯ E (2) = 2
6
2010ﻭﻣﻨﻪ 2010
<2 11×2010
ﲟﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥﹼ 2010 < 2048 = 211ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥﹼ
2010 2010 4 22110
2010(2010 )
< 211×2010 < 22 ×2 )= E (222114 ) = E E (22114
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ
)22114 < 216 = E E (4) = E E E (2
ﺇﺫﻥ
2010
2010(2010 )
< E E E E E (2) < D
2010(2010ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، 4ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
2010
)
1 2010
) × 2010(2010
= U
4
ﳌﹼﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ U < Dﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ T2ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ D − Uﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
D −U
) (T2
][0, 0, 0, D, 0, 0 → ][0, 0, 0,U , 0, 0
ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻄﺒﻖ T1ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ 3Uﻣﺮﺓ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
U 2U
1 ) (T 1 ) (T
[0, 0, 0,U , 0, 0] → [0, 0, 0, 0, 2U , 0 ]
] → [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 4U
ù ﻓﻨﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
521 ﻋﺎﻡ 2010
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ … a1, a2, a 3,ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ .ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ sﻋﺪ ﺩ ﺍﹰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﹰ
ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﹰ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀ n > s, }an = max{ak + an −k : 1 ≤ k ≤ n − 1
ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ℓﻭ Nﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ ، ℓ ≤ sﻭ
∀n > N , an = a ℓ + an − ℓ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ℓﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, …, sﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
aℓ a
= max k : 1 ≤ k ≤ s
ℓ k
âﻟﻨﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ nﺃﻥﹼ
an a
)(1 ∀n ≥ 1, ≤ ℓ
n ℓ
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ،ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n ≤ sﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ . ℓ
ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ . n < mﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ kﻣﻦ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, …, m − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ am = ak + am −kﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ
ﺃﻣﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
aℓ a a
am = ak + am −k ≤ k + (m − k ) ℓ = m ℓ
ℓ ℓ ℓ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ) (1ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n = mﻭﻳﻨﺠﺰ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ ) (1ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ.
ﻟﻨﻌﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ n > 0ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ bnﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
bn = na ℓ − ℓan
ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ) (1ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ bn ≥ 0ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ . n
âﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ 1 ≤ nﻓﺘﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) ) (λ1(n ), λ2(n ), …, λs(nﻣﻦ ℕsﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
bn = λ1(n )b1 + λ2(n )b2 + ⋯ + λs(n )bs
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 522
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . n ≤ sﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ nﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺤﻘﹼﻖ
. n < mﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﻳﻮﺟﺪ kﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ } {1, 2, …, m − 1ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
، am = ak + am −kﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
bm = ma ℓ − ℓam
= ka ℓ + (m − k )a ℓ − ℓak − ℓam −k
= bk + bm −k
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ
s
= bm ∑ (λj(k ) + λ(jm −k ) )bj
j =1
ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﺮﻑ ) λj(m ) = λj(k ) + λj(m −kﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ . j = 1, 2, …, s
âﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ nﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ، n > sﻓﻠﺪﻳﻨﺎ . bn ≤ bn −ℓﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ،
bn −ℓ − bn = (n − ℓ)a ℓ − ℓan −ℓ − na ℓ + ℓan
= ℓ(an − an −ℓ − a ℓ ) ≥ 0
ﺇﺫ ﻧﺘﺠﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ anﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ . n > s
ﻓﺎﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ (br +k ℓ )k ≥0ﺣﻴﺚ 0 ≤ r < ℓﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ.
âﻟﺘﻜﻦ
} M = max{bj : 1 ≤ j ≤ s
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻦ 1 ≤ nﻳﻜﻦ . bn ≤ Mﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ M = 0ﻛﺎﻥ bn = 0ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، nﻭﻛﺎﻥ
aℓ
∀n ≥ 1, an = n
ℓ
ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ an = a ℓ + an −ℓﻣﺤﻘﹼﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . n
âﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻥﹼ ، M > 0ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ Jﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ
} J = { j : 1 ≤ j ≤ s, b j > 0
523 ﻋﺎﻡ 2010
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ jﻣﻦ Jﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀n ≥ 1, ≤ λj(n )bj ∑ λi(n )bi = bn ≤ M
i ∈J
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﹶﻢ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ، β = max j ∈J dM /bj tﻛﺎﻥ
∀n ≥ 1, ∀j ∈ J , λj(n ) ≤ dM /bj t ≤ β
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (bn )n ≥1ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ :
} {λ1b1 + ⋯ + λsbs : (λ1, …, λs ) ∈ {0, …, β}s
âﻟﺘﻜﻦ rﻣﻦ } . {0,1, …, ℓ − 1ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ (br +k ℓ )k ≥0ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ
ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ،ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ K rﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
∀k > K r , br +k ℓ = br +(k −1)ℓ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) ، K = max(K 0, …, K ℓ−1ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
∀k > K , ∀r ∈ {0, …, ℓ − 1}, br +k ℓ = br +k ℓ −ℓ
ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ، N = ℓK
∀n > N , bn = bn −ℓ
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ
∀n > N , an = a ℓ + an − ℓ
ù ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 524
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ّ
ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ
ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) f : X → Y , x ֏ f ( xﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ Xﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻠﻖ ،ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ
Yﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺮ ،ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺭﺑﻂ x ֏ f ( x ) ﺗﻘﺮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞﱢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ xﻣﻦ Xﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ
) y = f ( xﻣﻦ .Y
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) f : X → Y , x ֏ f ( xﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ
f ( x1 ) = f ( x 2 ) ⇒ x1 = x 2
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) f : X → Y , x ֏ f ( xﻏﺎﻣﺮﺍﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ f ( x ) = b
ﺑﺎﻬﻮﻝ xﺣﻞﹲ ﰲ Xﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ bﻣﻦ .Y
ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) f : X → Y , x ֏ f ( xﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞﹲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ
ﻭﻏﺎﻣﺮﺍﹰ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Xﻭ Yﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺘﲔ ﻛﺎﻥ
) card ( X ×Y ) = card ( X ) card (Y
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ Xﻭ Yﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ Zﻛﺎﻥ
) card ( X ∪ Y ) = card ( X ) + card (Y ) − card ( X ∩ Y
ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻨﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ f : X → Yﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﹰ ﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺘﲔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ fﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) . card ( X ) ≤ card (Y
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ fﻏﺎﻣﺮﺍﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) . card ( X ) ≥ card (Y
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ fﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) . card ( X ) = card (Y
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) ، card ( X ) = card (Yﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺆ ﺑﲔ ﻛﻮﻥ fﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﹰ ﻭﻛﻮﻥ f
ﻏﺎﻣﺮﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻛﻮﻥ fﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﹰ.
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻞﱟ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ nﻫﻮ ! . n
525
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 526
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ kﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ n
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
!n
= Ank ) = n × ( n − 1 ) × ⋯( n − k + 1
!) ( n − k
ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ kﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ nﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﹰﺍ ﺇﺛﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ kﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ nﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
!n
= C nk
!) k ! (n − k
ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ kﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ nﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ.
ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺩﻳﺮﺧﻠﻴﻪ . Dirichlet
ﻋﻨﺪ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ nk + 1ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ nﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻮﻱ
ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ k + 1ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞﹼ.
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ mﻭ nﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﲔ ،ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇ ﹼﻥ mﻳﻘﺴﻢ ، nﺃﻭ ﺇﻥﹼ nﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ، m
ﻭﻧﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ، m | nﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ kﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ
. n = km
ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ m ℤﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . mﻭﻫﻲ ﺯﻣﺮﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻣﺮﺓ
ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺇﻥﹼ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻣﺮﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ℤﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ m ℤﻭ mﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ) ( x1, …, xnﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) gcd ( x1, …, x nﺑﺄﻧﻪ
ﺃﻛﱪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) ، ( x1, …, xnﻭﺃﲰﻴﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ
ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻭﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ) lcm ( x1, …, x nﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ
ﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ) ، ( x1, …, xnﻭﺃﲰﻴﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) ( x1, …, xnﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ 1ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﲰﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ
ﺍﻷﻛﱪ.
527 ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ
ﻭﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ pﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ p > 1ﻭﲢﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ
} a | p ⇒ a ∈ {−p, −1,1, p
ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺑﹺﺰﻭ . Bézout
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ xﻭ yﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﲔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ gcd ( x , y ) = 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ
ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ aﻭ bﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ . ax + by = 1
ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ) ( x1, …, xnﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
gcd ( x1, …, x n ) = 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ) ( a1, a2, …, an
ﺗﺤﻘﱢﻖ . a1x1 + ⋯ + anx n = 1
ﺗﻮﻃﺌﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺱ . Gauss
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ a | bcﻭ gcd ( a, b ) = 1ﻛﺎﻥ a | c
ﺍﳌﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻦ Pﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻭﻡ ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ ν ( n ) : P → ℕ, p ֏ ν p ( n ) ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﲔ
∞.card ( { p ∈ P : ν p ( n ) > 0 } ) < +
) p (n
= .n ∏ pν
p∈P
) ( q, r ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ .ﺃﻳﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ ) (a, bﻣﻦ ) } ℤ × ( ℤ\{ 0ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ
ﻣﻦ ℤ × ℕﻳﺤﻘﹼﻖ a = qb + rﻭ . 0 ≤ r < b
ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ، n ≠ 0ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﲔ aﻭ bﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ، nﻭﻧﻜﺘﺐ
، a = b mod nﺃﻭ ، a ≡ b mod nﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ، n | (b − aﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ
. b − a ∈ n ℤﻭﻧﱪﻫﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
( a = b mod n ) ∧ ( a ′ = b ′ mod n ) ⇒ a + a ′ = ( b + b ′ ) mod n
( a = b mod n ) ∧ ( a ′ = b ′ mod n ) ⇒ aa ′ = bb ′ mod n
ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ x ∼n y ⇔ x = y mod nﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻧﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ℤ/n ℤﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺌﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻫﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ . n
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 528
ﻣﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ Fermatﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ.
. ∀n ∈ ℤ, p n ⇒ n p −1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ pﻋﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ = 1 mod p
ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ،ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﹼﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻼﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ
.1 : 2
ﻭﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ .ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍﹰ ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻼﹰ.
ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﳚﺎﻭﺭﺍﺎ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ABCﻣﺜﻠﹼﺜﺎﹰ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ] [ BCﻭ ] [CAﻭ ] [ ABﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ aﻭ bﻭ c
Aﻭ Bﻭ .C ﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ
ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ
a 2 = b 2 + c 2 − 2bc cos A
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ Rﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺅﻭﺳﻪ ،ﻛﺎﻥ
a b c
= = = 2R
sin A
sin B
sin C
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) A ( ABCﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ABCﻛﺎﻥ
1
A ( ABC ) = bc sin A
2
ﺃﻭ
= ) A ( ABC ) p ( p − a )( p − b )( p − c
ﻣﻊ . 2p = a + b + c
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻣﺰﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ rﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﹼﺚ ABCﺩﺍﺧ ﹰ
ﻼ
ﻛﺎﻥ
) A ( ABC
= r
p
529 ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ
ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ABCDﻣﻀﻠﹼﻌﺎﹰ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ .ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
. ACB ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
= ADB
. ABC ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ABCDﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺎﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
= π − ADC
ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﲑﺓ
ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻛﻮﺷﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ) (a1, …, anﻭ ) (b1, …, bnﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻛﺎﻥ
n 2 n n
∑ akbk ≤ ∑ ak2 ∑ bk2
k =1 k =1 k =1
ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﲔ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ λﻭ µﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
∀k ∈ {1, 2, …, n } , λak = µbk
ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺔ ﻫﻮﻟﺪﺭ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ) ( a1, …, anﻭ ) ( b1, …, bnﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﻭﻛﺎﻥ p
1 1
ﻭ qﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ [∞ ]1, +ﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ + = 1ﻛﺎﻥ
p q
n
n p 1/ p n q 1/q
∑ akbk ≤ ∑ ak ∑ bk
k =1 k =1 k =1
ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻘﹼﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﹺﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﲔ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ λﻭ µﻳﺤﻘﹼﻘﺎﻥ
∀k ∈ {1, 2, …, n } , λak = µbk
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ) (a1, …, anﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ،ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂﹼ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ، AMﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،GMﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ ، HMﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ QMﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :
a1 + ⋯ + an
= GM n = AMﻭ a1 ⋯an
n
a12 + ⋯ + an2 1 1
= QM HM = n + ⋯ + ﻭ
n a1 an
ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ
HM ≤ GM ≤ AM ≤ QM
ﻭﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ . a1 = a2 = ⋯ = an
ﺎﺕﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴ 530
. ﻭﻧﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺰﺍﺩﺓ،ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺳﻨﻜﺘﻔﻲ
HARDY & WRIGHT. An Introduction to the theory of numbers. Oxford
University Press.
GRAHAM & KNUTH & PATASHNIK. Concrete Mathematics. Addison-
Wesely Publishing Company.
DIEUDONNÉ. Algèbre linéare et géometrie élémentaire. Hermann.
HARDY & LITTLEWOOD & PÓLYA. Inequalities. Cambridge University
Press.
QWE
Ag D
ZXC
ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ∅
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ }…. { 0,1, 2, ℕ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ }…. {1, 2, ∗ℕ
∅ = ℕ0 ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ 1ﻭ . nﻣﻊ ℕn
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ℤ
ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ] ℤ[ X
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﲔ 0ﻭ . n − 1 ℤn
nℤﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ℤ/n ℤﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ . n
ﺍﳊﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻲ ℤ/p ℤﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﱄ . p Fp
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ. ℚ
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ. ℝ
ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ] ℝ[ X
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ. ℝ+
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ. ℝ∗+
ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﺔ. ℂ
ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ z z
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ . −1 i
ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ z | |z
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻱ . z ) arg ( z
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ Aﻭ . B ) ( AB
ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻫﺎ Aﻭ . B ] [ AB
ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺒﺪﺅﻩ Aﻭﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ . B ) [ AB
ABﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AB
ABﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺒﺪﺅﻩ Aﻭﺎﻳﺘﻪ . B
) C (O, Rﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ Oﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ . R
531
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 532
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺭﺃﺳﻬﺎ Bﻭﺿﻠﻌﺎﻫﺎ ) [ BAﻭ ) ، [ BCﻭﻧﻜﺘﺐ Bﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺱ.
ABC
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﲔ ABﻭ ACﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ.
) (AB, AC
AB ⋅ ACﺍﳉﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﹼﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﲔ ABﻭ . AC
) gcd (a, bﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ aﻭ . b
ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ aﻭ . b ) lcm (a, b
aﻳﻘﺴﻢ . b a |b
aﻻ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ . b a b
a mod nﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ aﻋﻠﻰ . n
! n nﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻱ n × ( n − 1 ) × ⋯ × 1ﻣﻊ . 0! = 1
!n
= C nk ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻴﻖ nﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ kﺑﻌﺪ ، kﺃﻱ C nk
! ) k !( n − k
Snﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ . ℕ n
ﺍﶈﺪﺩ. det
ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ
!"#
ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﻧﻌﻘﺪﺕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ،ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﳕﺎﻁ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﹸﺮﺣﺖ ﰲ ﻛﻞﱢ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﻧﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :
ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ. I ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ. N
ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ. C ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ. E
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ. F ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ. G
ﺧﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺎﺕ. A ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﺮﺍﻏﻴﺔ. G3
ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﻏﲑ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ
ﺑﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ،ﺻﻨﻔﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺟﺤﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ،ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ
G3 G G E E N ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ 1959 ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
G3 G3 G G I N ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ 1960 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ
G3 G G E I E ﻫﻨﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ 1961 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ
G G E G3 I N ﺗﺸﻴﻜﻮﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ 1962
∗
ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ
C E E G G3 E ﺑﻮﻟﻮﻧﻴﺎ 1963 ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ
G3 C C G I N ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﻴﻴﱵ 1964 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ
G G E G3 E I ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ 1965 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ
G E E G3 G C ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ 1966 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ
C N G N G3 G ﻳﻮﻏﻮﺳﻼﻓﻴﺎ 1967 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ
∗ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﻃﹸﺮﹺﺣﺖ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻏﻴﺔ.
533
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 534
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ
N F G3 E N G ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﻴﻴﱵ 1968 ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ
I C G G3 E N ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ 1969 ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ
C G3 C I N G ﻫﻨﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ 1970 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻋﺸﺮ
C G G3 N G3 I ﺗﺸﻴﻜﻮﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ 1971 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ
G3 F I N G C ﺑﻮﻟﻮﻧﻴﺎ 1972 ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
I E G I G3 G ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﻴﻴﱵ 1973 ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ
C I C N G C ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ 1974 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ
F G N G N I ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ 1975 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
E E C C E G ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ 1976 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ
F E I N I G ﻳﻮﻏﻮﺳﻼﻓﻴﺎ 1977 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
C I G F G3 N ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ 1978 ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
C E G3 G C N ﺍﻧﻜﻠﺘﺮﺍ 1979 ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
F G N C C G ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ 1981 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
G G E I G F ﻫﻨﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ 1982 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
I N G N G F ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ 1983 ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
N I G G N I ﺗﺸﻴﻜﻮﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ 1984 ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
I G N I N G ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ 1985 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
C F G C G N ﺑﻮﻟﻮﻧﻴﺎ 1986 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
N G F I G C ﻛﻮﺑﺎ 1987 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
N G I F C G ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ 1988 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ
C N G C G C ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ 1989 ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
N C F N C G ﺍﻟﺼﲔ 1990 ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
I G A C N G ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ 1991 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
N G3 G C F N ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ 1992 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
N F G A G N ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ 1993 ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
N F N N G C ﻫﻮﻧﻎ ﻛﻮﻧﻎ 1994 ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
C I E G I G ﻛﻨﺪﺍ 1995 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
C G N F G C ﺍﳍﻨﺪ 1996 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
F N C I G I ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﲔ 1997 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
F G N N C G ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ 1998 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ
F G N C I G ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ 1999 ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
G N C G C G ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ 2000 ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
N G N C I G ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ 2001 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
535 ﻣﱴ ﻭﺃﻳﻦ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ
I F N N G C ﺍﻧﻜﻠﺘﺮﺍ 2002 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
N I G G N C ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ 2003 ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
N G I C F G ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ 2004 ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
C G N I N G ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ 2005 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
G E E I C G ﺳﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺎ 2006 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
C N G A G I ﻓﻴﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ 2007 ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
G C F N I G ﺍﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ 2008 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻮﻥ
A F G N G N ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ 2009 ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻮﻥ
N A G N G F ﻛﺎﺯﺍﺧﺴﺘﺎﻥ 2010 ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﳋﻤﺴﻮﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ 536
ﳛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﻮﺑﺎ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ
ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺟﺎﺋﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﺎﻡ ،1992ﻭﻗﺪ
ﺍﺣﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﺳﺎﺗﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻋﺎﻡ .1985
ﺃﻟﹼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﻮﺑﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎﹰ ﰲ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ.
ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ
ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺎﻡ .1990ﺗﻨﺼﺐ ﺃﲝﺎﺛﻪ
ﻭﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻭﺍﳉﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ
ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ.
ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻳﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﻮﺑﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﺮﻯ
ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ 1959ﻣﻊ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﳍﺎ ،ﺁﻣﻼﹰ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺪ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﹸﺘﻌﺔ.
ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﳌﺒﻴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺭﻱ
View publication stats
You might also like
- Report of the Secretary-General on the Work of the Organization 2021 (Arabic language)From EverandReport of the Secretary-General on the Work of the Organization 2021 (Arabic language)No ratings yet
- أثر تكاليف الإنتاج في زكاة المحاصيل الزراعية والمستغلاتFrom Everandأثر تكاليف الإنتاج في زكاة المحاصيل الزراعية والمستغلاتNo ratings yet
- Full IssueDocument132 pagesFull IssueAlaealeaNo ratings yet
- The Beautiful Mathematical Explorations of Maryam MirzakhaniDocument5 pagesThe Beautiful Mathematical Explorations of Maryam MirzakhaniAlaealeaNo ratings yet
- Interview With Pr. Maryam MirzakhaniDocument3 pagesInterview With Pr. Maryam MirzakhaniAlaealeaNo ratings yet
- HappinessDocument17 pagesHappinessAlaealeaNo ratings yet
